Full text of "The chants of the Vatican gradual"

See other formats

LIBRARY OF
WELLESLEY COLLEGE

PURCHASED FROM
Dean IWd

Digitized by the Internet Archive

in 2011 with funding from

Boston Library Consortium IVIember Libraries

http://www.archive.org/details/chantsofvaticangOOjohn

THE CHANTS OF THE
VATICAN GRADUAL

By Dom Dominic Johner

Translated from the German

By Monks of

St. John's Abbey

St. John's Abbey Press

CoUegeville, Minn.

1940

JG 9 1943

Imprimi potest:

i^ALCUINUS DEUTSCH, O.S.B.
Abbas S. Joannis Bapt.

Nihil obstat:

ALEXIUS HOFFMANN, O.S.B.
Censor Deputatus

November 22, 1934

Imprimatur:

C. THIEBAUT, V.G.

Adm. Dioec. S. Clodoaldi, Minn.

November 26, 1934

aJ L

ST. JOHN'S ABBEY PRESS

Collegeville, Minnesota

CONTENTS

Foreword by the Translators vii

Foreword to the First German Edition ix

Bibliography xii

Literature xiv

Introduction — Structure and Expressiveness of the Variable

Mass-Chants 1

THE MASSES FOR SUNDAYS AND FEASTDAYS ACCORDING
TO THE LITURGICAL SEASONS. {Proprium De Tempore).

First Sunday of Advent 13

Second Sunday of Advent 20

Third Sunday of Advent 27

Fourth Sunday of Advent 34

Vigil of the Nativity 41

Christmas Day- — Midnight Mass . . . . . . . . . .45

Christmas Day — Third Mass 50

St. Stephen, First Martyr 57

St. John, Apostle and Evangelist 62

The Holy Innocents 66

Sunday within the Octave of Christmas 69

The Circumcision of Our Lord 74

The Holy Name of Jesus 75

The Epiphany of Our Lord Jesus Christ 79

The Holy Family 85

Second Sunday after Epiphany 88

Third Sunday after Epiphany 93

Septuagesima Sunday 97

Sexagesima Sunday 101

Quinquagesima Sunday 106

Ash Wednesday Ill

First Sunday in Lent 118

Second Sunday in Lent 126

Third Sunday in Lent 130

Fourth Sunday in Lent 137

Passion Sunday 142

Palm Sunday 150

Maundy Thursday 161

Good Friday . 167

Holy Saturday . 173

Easter Sunday 178

Easter Monday 184

iv Contents

Low Sunday 188

Second Sunday after Easter 191

Third Sunday after Easter 194

Fourth Sunday after Easter 198

Fifth Sunday after Easter 202

Rogation Days 207

The Ascension of Our Lord 211

Sunday with the Octave of the Ascension 215

Whitsunday 219

Monday in Whitsun week 227

Trinity Sunday 229

Corpus Christi 232

Sunday within the Octave of Corpus Christi 240

The Most Sacred Heart of Jesus " . . 245

Third Sunday after Pentecost 252

Fourth Sunday after Pentecost 256

Fifth Sunday after Pentecost 263

Sixth Sunday after Pentecost 267

Seventh Sunday after Pentecost 270

Eighth Sunday after Pentecost 275

Ninth Sunday after Pentecost 279

Tenth Sunday after Pentecost 283

Eleventh Sunday after Pentecost 287

Twelfth Sunday after Pentecost 292

Thirteenth Sunday after Pentecost 298

Fourteenth Sunday after Pentecost 303

Fifteenth Sunday after Pentecost 307

Sixteenth Sunday after Pentecost . 312

Seventeenth Sunday after Pentecost .317

Eighteenth Sunday after Pentecost , . . 321

Nineteenth Sunday after Pentecost 326

Twentieth Sunday after Pentecost 331

Twenty-First Sunday after Pentecost 335

Twenty-Second Sunday after Pentecost 342

Twenty-Third Sunday after Pentecost . . . . . . . . . 346

SPECIAL FEASTS OF OUR LORD AND THE SAINTS

(Proprium De Sanctis.)

St. Andrew, Apostle 353

The Immaculate Conception of the Blessed Virgin Mary . . . 357

St. Thomas, Apostle • . 362

Purification of the Blessed Virgin or Candlemas 362

Contents v

St. Matthias, Apostle 370

St. Joseph, Spouse of the Blessed Virgin Mary, Confessor . . . 372

The Annunciation of the Blessed Virgin Mary 376

St. Mark, Evangelist 381

SS. Philip and James the Younger 381

The Finding of the Holy Cross 385

Solemnity of St. Joseph 387

Nativity of St. John the Baptist 391

SS. Peter and Paul, Apostles 397

The Most Precious Blood of Our Lord Jesus Christ 403

Visitation of the Blessed Virgin Mary 407

St. James, the Elder 413

St. Anne, Mother of the Blessed Virgin Mary 414

The Transfiguration of Our Lord Jesus Christ ...... 417

St. Lawrence, Deacon and Martyr 420

The Assumption of the Blessed Virgin Mary 424

St. Joachim, Father of the Blessed Virgin Mary, Confessor . . . 431

St. Bartholomew, Apostle 434

Nativity of the Blessed Virgin Mary 435

The Exaltation of the Holy Cross 435

The Seven Sorrows of the Blessed Virgin Mary 437

St. Matthew, Apostle and Evangelist 444

The Dedication of St. Michael the Archangel 448

The Holy Guardian Angels 452

The Most Holy Rosary of the Blessed Virgin Mary . . . . . 453

The Maternity of the Most Blessed Virgin Mary 456

St. Luke, Evangelist 459

SS. Simon and Jude, Apostles 459

Kingship of Our Lord Jesus Christ 460

All Saints Day 466

All Souls Day 472

The Dedication of a Church 484

Asperges Me and Vidi Aquam 490

A Last Word 493

Index 497

FOREWORD BY THE TRANSLATORS

In response to many requests for a book descriptive and explanatory
of the Gregorian Mass chants, the monks of St. John's Abbey, College-
ville, Minn., undertook the translation from the German of Dom
Johner's work: Die Sonn- und Festtagslieder des Vatikanischen Graduale,
under the above title. In the foreword the author indicates the scope of
his work. He writes: "The present work is intended chiefly to serve as
an aid to the prayerful rendition of the variable chanted parts of the
Mass. At the same time it aims to be a guide for the worthy and artistic
rendition of those chants which have been handed down to us from an
age of strong faith and noble taste." Chant is essentially a form of wor-
ship offered by the faithful and as such is an integral part of the liturgy.
It is intimately connected with the very source of all Liturgy, the Eu-
charistie Sacrifice, and attempts to interpret and express in music the
sentiments which the text expresses in words.

Individual consideration is given to the texts of the Introit, Gradual,
Alleluia- verse, Tract, Sequence, Offertory, and Communion. These texts
are given in Latin and in English, and are arranged in parallel columns.
They are studied in their historical and liturgical setting, and their sen-
timents of joy and sorrow, hope and fear, gratitude and penance, are
pointed out and developed. In this sense also the intimate relationship
existing between these various texts is indicated; all are integrated into
a unified whole and referred to the life of Christ and His Church. Fol-
lowing this short meditation, the author analyses the musical score ac-
companying the text, and attempts to show how Gregorian Chant inter-
prets these various sentiments and gives adequate expression to them —
in short, how Gregorian Chant is the prefect yet simple medium of tran-
lating religious emotion into the language of music.

An indispensable condition for the intelligent use of this book as a
guide -for interpretation is the simultaneous use of the Vatican Gradual,
since musical notation has not been included in the present work. How-
ever, only a minimum and very elementary knowledge of Gregorian
Chant is necessary for the fruitful use and understanding of the book.
Further knowledge is given in a very significant Introduction, which
describes the structure and expressiveness of the variable Mass Chants.
The original German, as also the English manuscript, have been made
the basis for a very successful summer school course in the study of Gre-
gorian Chant. The book might adequately be described as "a study in
the appreciation of Gregorian Chant."

ACKNOWLEDGMENT

The translators gratefully acknowledge their obligations to the fol-
lowing for the kind permission extended them to use copyrighted mater-
ial: Msgr. H. T. Henry, for his translation of the Lauda Sion; Messrs.
Burns, Oates and Washbourne, for the translations of the Dies Irae and
the Stahat Mater, which appear in Annus Sanctus; P. J. Kenedy, for
Abbot Cabrol's excellent version of the Roman Missal.

FOREWORD TO THE FIiJST GERMAN
EDITION

The present work is intended chiefly to serve as an aiu to the prayer-
ful rendition of the variable chanted parts of the Mass. At tht same time
it aims to be a guide for the worthy and artistic execution of thost? chants
which have been handed down to us from an age of strong faith and nPble
taste. Choral music, or chant, is here considered not as a mere historic
relic of the past, nor is worthy rendition to be understood in the sense
■of an elaborate concert interpretation of these monodic church compo-
;sitions of the Middle Ages. Chant is more than this. It is an integral
part of the liturgy, as much alive and inspiring today as ever. It is the
praise of the living God by his people in union with Christ. Anyone,
therefore, wishing to render chant properly must participate in the
Christ-life of the Church, must seek spiritual nourishment at the heart
•of the liturgy, which is the Eucharistie Sacrifice. He must desire, as
Christ did, to honor the Father with due reverence. These few thoughts
Iiave formed the guiding principles of the present work.

Questions of purely historical interest have been touched upon only
.as occasion offered. No attempt has been made to portray the historical
-development of the different Mass formulas, and still less has any critical
study of the various readings of texts and melodies been attempted. Nor
•should the reader expect a systematic introduction to the liturgical year,
although the author has made an effort to explain the texts in their
proper liturgical setting in the Church year.

As the title states, the work has been limited to the Sundays and
principal feasts of the year. Such feasts of the Saints, which according
to the rubrics are to be celebrated even though they fall on a Sunday
are included also. To these have been added Ash Wednesday, Holy
Week, the feast of St. Joseph, and the Requiem Mass. The second Mass
of Christmas has not been explained, since it is sung in few churches
•only. Historical sketches concerning the introduction of newer feasts
have been given as occasion demanded. Where these sketches are want-
ing, there is question of feasts which belong to the more ancient liturgy
and which with their chants are to be found in manuscripts dating from
the ninth to the tenth century.

Purely theoretical questions were touched upon only lightly. These
■can be studied from textbooks treating of chant. The classic work of
Professor P. Wagner; Einfuehrung In Die Gregorianischen Melodien (3
vols., Breitkopf and Haertel, Leipzig) is particularly recommended.

Outside of this one work few others proved to be of any great help
for the scope of the present undertaking. Betende Kirche (Maria-Laach,

X Foreword to the First German Edition

2nd ed., 1926); Reck, Das Missale als Betrachtungshuch (Herder, Frei-
burg, 5 vols.), and similar excellent works devote little attention to the
texts that are chanted. Only occasional and very general remarks are
made concerning the melodies themselves. Periodicals of sacred music
in Germany, with few exceptions, lack a genuine appreciation of the
intrinsic value of the melodies of the Vatican Gradual. Periodicals in
other countries offer more on chant. A pertinent bibliography, as a guide
to further study of the subject, is subjoined. For the most part, however,
the author has had to rely on his own resources, and, for this reason,
feels keenly that his work is that of a pioneer in this particular field. He
knows well that our modern age listens to ancient melodies with some
misgivings. He realizes also that melodies have more than one signifi-
cation and can therefore be interpreted in a manner different from that
which he has outlined in the following pages. The reader will find that
the author is not entirely alien to subjectivism, which often adapts more
than it explains. This fact, however, is not exactly a great misfortune.
Much greater is the danger that many choirs will sing the chant without
any feeling or art whatsoever. May this book lead them to the true
spirit of the chant and effect a more intimate understanding of the
melodies of Gregorian chant, to the end that these chants may be sung
as so many prayers by means of which the faithful soul may soar aloft
to God. May it also inspire the reader to strive after better technique,
so that he may express outwardly in a more perfect manner that which
he feels and understands inwardly.

An essential condition for understanding the content of the follow-
ing pages is the simultaneous use of the Vatican Gradual. The musical
notation of the text has not been included in the book, although, without
doubt, it would have helped greatly for a better understanding of the
explanations given. Hence, whenever notes are indicated by the use of
their corresponding letters, the distinction of octaves (G-g-g^) is, as a
rule, not made.

Whenever reference is made to some other Sunday or feast for the
explanation of a designated text, there is always a question of similarity
of text and melody. If, for example, the explanation of a certain Introit
is referred to the Introit of another Mass, then the two are to be treated
alike in their rendition, unless, of course, something else to the contrary
has been expressly stated.

Here and there attention has been called to certain imperfections in
the melody. This has been done not in a spirit of criticism but out of
sincerity, and only to warn against the false notion that love and enthu-
siasm for chant must be artifically aroused. This is not at all required.

Foreword to the First German Edition xi

It would be astonishing, indeed, if only pearls of great value were to be
found in its rich storehouse of treasures. These occasional imperfections
give greater prominence to the beauty and sincerity of expression of the
other melodies.

The sequence of the words in the Latin text has, as much as possible,
been retained in the translation. Those unacquainted with Latin can
in this way more easily compare the translation with the original text
and its melody. For this reason, also, the division and phrasing indicated
by the larger pause signs in the Vatican Gradual has been accurately
retained and for the sake of clearness is shown here by numbers.

The present work is the outgrowth of the author's lecture course in
the High School of Music in Cologne.

May God bless the work! May it be the means of ever more fully
realizing the desire of the saintly Pope Pius X, and of teaching the Catho-
lic world once more to sing as the chant of the Church sings, and to pray
as it prays!

Feast of the Purification, 1928, Beuron.

THE AUTHOR

BIBLIOGRAPHY

Following are some works which might prove of interest to the
readers of Johner, not because they will find any further and formal ex-
planation of the Vatican Gradual and its melodies, but because these
books should be of help towards a better understanding of the Graduale..

BOOKS

Benedictines of Stanbrook, A Grammar of Plainsong, 2nd Ed. (Wor-
cester, 1926), 128 pp.

Benedictine Nuns of Stanbrook, A Grammar of Plainsong (Benziger
Bros.), 80 pp.

Benedictines of Stanbrook, Gregorian Music (London, 1897), 97 pp.

Birkle, Dom S., A Complete and Practical Method of the Solesmes Chant,
translated from the German by A. Lamaistre, (J. F. Wagner, New
York, 1904), 150 pp.

Desroquettes, Dom J. Hebert, U Accompagnement Rhythmique d'apres les
Principes de Solesmes (Tournai), 73 pp.

Egerton, Clement C., A Handbook of Church Music (London, 1909)^
218 pp.

Ferretti, Dom P., Principii Teoretici e Practici di Canto Gregoriano, 3rd
Ed. (Rome, 1914), 24. pp.

Huegle, Dom Gregory, Catechism of Gregorian Chant, (J. Fischer and Bro.,
1928), 115 pp.

Haberl, F. X., Magister Choralis, A Theoretical and Practical Manual of
Gregorian Chant, Translated by Rev. N. Donnelly (Ratisbon), 283 pp.

Johner, Dom D., A New School of Gregorian Chant, Translated from the
German, 3rd Ed., (Pustet, New York, 1925), 364 pp.

Johner, Dom D., Erklaerung des Kyriale (Pustet), 128 pp.

Laroche, Th., Principes Traditionelles d' Execution du Chant Gregorien,
(Tournai, 1929), 331 pp.

Leone, Dom G., Grammatica di Canto Gregoriano (Badia di Cava, 1925),
91 pp.

Liturgical Movement, The (Liturgical Press, Collegeville, Minn.)

Missia, F. A., A Church Music, A Brief Guide to its Meaning and Regu-
lations for its Liturgical Observance.

Mocquereau, Dom Andre, Nombre Musical, Gregor., Le, 2 Vols. (Tournai,
1908-1927).

Mocquereau, Dom Andre, The Art of Gregorian Chant (The Catholic
Education Press, Washington, D.C.), 24 pp.

Mocquereau, Dom Andre and Cagin, Dom Paul, Plain Chant and So-
lesmes, (London, 1909), 71 pp.

Bibliography xiii

Potiron, Henri, Cours D' Accompagnement du Chant Gregorien, New
Edition (Paris, 1927), 134 pp.

Predmore, Geo. V., Church Music in the Light of the Motu Proprio. A
Guide for the Catholic Choir Director and Organist, (Rochester, The
Seminary Press), 82 pp.

Ravegnani, E., Metodo Compilato di Canto Gregoriano, 5th Ed. (Rome,
1926), 282 pp.

Ronan, J. E., Catholic Church Music (Toronto, St. Augustine's Sem-
inary), 58 pp.

Schmidt, J. G., Principal Texts of the Gregorian Authors concerning
Rhythm, (Buffalo Volksfreund Printing Co., Buffalo, N.Y.).

Schuster, Cardinal Ildephonse, The Sacramentary (Benziger Bros.).

Springer, Max, The Art of Accompanying Gregorian Chant, translated
from the German (J. Fischer and Bro., New York), 238 pp.

Sunol, Dom Gregory, A Textbook of Gregorian Chant, translated from the
Spanish by G. M. Dunford (Desclee & Cie., 1930), 221 pp.

Terry, Sir Richard, The Music of the Roman Rite.

Wagner, Peter, Einfuehrung in Die Gregorianischen Melodien, Ein Hand-
buch der Choralkunde (Freiburg, Switzerland, 1895), 311 pp.

Wagner, Peter, Einfuerung in Die Gregorianischen Melodien, Ein Hand-
buch der Choralwissenschaft, 3 Vols. (Leipzig, 1911-1921).

Ward, Mrs. Justine, Gregorian Chant according to the Principles of Dom
Andre Mocquereau of Solesmes (Washginton, 1923), 262 pp.

White List, The, By the Musical Committee of the Society of St. Gregory
of America, A Selection of Papal Documents and other information
pertaining to Catholic Church Music. (J. Fischer and Bro., New York),
64 pp.

MAGAZINES

ENGLISH: The Caecilia, (100 Boylston Street, Boston, Mass.).

The Catholic Choir Master (Niccola Montani, 1705 Ritten-

house Street, Philadelphia, Pa.).
GERMAN: Musica Divina (Vienna, Austria).

Musica Sacra (Regensburg, Germany).

LITERATURE

With Abbreviations Used In Quoting

Betende^ Kirche (Berlin, Augustinerverlag), 2nd Ed. [B.K.]
Caecilia, from 1883 (Strassburg).

Caecilienvereinsorgan, from 1856 (Regensburg, Pustet); from 1924 (M.-
Gladbach, Volksvereinsverlag). [CO.]
ChoralUaetter (Beuron), Nos. 1-5.
David, L., O.S.B., Analyses gregoriennes pratiques (Grenoble, Bureaux

de la Revue du chant greg.). [Analyses]
Grisar, H., Das Missale im Lichte roemischer Stadtgeschichte (Freiburg,

Herder, 1925). [Missale]
GregoriusUatt, from 1865 (Duesseldorf, Schwann).
Gregoriusbote (Duesseldorf, Schwann).
Johner, P. D., O.S.B., A New School of Gregorian Chant (N.Y., Pustet,

1925), 3rd Ed. [N. Sch.]

Der gregorianische Choral (Stuttgart, Engelhorn, 1924).
Jahrbuch fuer Liturgiewissenschaft, from 1920 (Muenster, Aschendorff).
Katholischer Kirchensaenger, 1910-1911 (Duesseldorf, Schwann). [K.K.]
Klosterneuburger Liturgiekalendar. [K.L.]
Kramp, J., S.J., Messliturgie und Gottesreich (Freiburg, Herder, 1921).

Three parts, in the Ecclesia orans series.
Musica divina, from 1913 (Vienna, Universaledition).
Schuster, I., O.S.B., The Sacramentary (N.Y., Benziger, 1924-1931),

5 Vols.
Tippmann, R., Die Messen der Fastenzeit (Paderborn, Schoeningh, 1921).
Wagner, P., Einfuehrung in die greg. Melodien (Leipzig, Breitkopf und

Haertel). I. Ursprung und Entwicklung der liturgischen Gesangsformen,

3rd Ed. 1910; II. Neumenkunde, 2nd Ed. 1912; III. Gregorianische

Formenkehre, 1921.
Wiener Kirchenzeitung, Volume 8 contains excellent short explanations

of Mass texts from the pen of P. Simon Strieker (Maria-Laach). [T7.K.]

INTRODUCTION

Structure And Expressiveness Of The Variable
Mass- Chants

The variable chants of the Mass {Proprium Missae — Proper of the
Mass) show surprising diversity both in content and in mood. Unlike
the inflexible sameness of the Oriental liturgy, which practically uses the
same Mass, formulary day after day, the liturgy of the Western Church
has since the fourth century witnessed a development so remarkable
that it now has special texts and melodies for almost every Sunday and
feast day of the year, including those for each day of Lent. Many of
these selections are characterized by a joyful and sincere gratitude to-
ward God; some are filled with the spirit of penance; still others are ex-
pressive of hopes and fears. As a preliminary to the study of each chant
selection it is very helpful to determine: (1) whom do the words of the
text represent as speaking— Christ, the Blessed Virgin, the saints, or
the Church herself? (2) to whom are the words addressed — to Christ,
to the saints, or to us?

There is no close relationship musically between the constituent
parts of a Mass formulary. There is neither similarity of modes nor of
motives to unify them. When songs which now immediately succeed one
another, such as the Graual and the Alleluia (formerly this was not the
case) have the same mode, it is purely a coincidence. The exclusive de-
velopment of one thought or mood is likewise of infrequent occurrence»

The distinctive peculiarities of the chants are due entirely to the
part they are destined to play in the liturgy of the Mass. On this basis
they can be divided into two classes.

The first class of chants embraces all those which are meant to ac-
company some liturgical action — in a broader sense one might call them
"processionals." To this class belong the following: the Introit, which is
to be sung during the solemn procession of the priest to the altar (acce-
dente sacerdote ad altare, as the Rubrics of the Vatican Gradual have it) ;
the Offertory, which formerly was sung during the Offertory procession
of the faithful to the altar; the Communion, which was sung during the
distribution of Holy Communion. These chants embody all those factors
which make for a complete and artistic whole — word, song, and action.
They express effectively the emotions of the soul, at the same time urg-
ing it on to still further activity. (Cf. Johner, A New School of Gregorian
Chant, p. 120.)

2 Structure and Expressiveness of the Variable Mass-Chants

A. THE INTROIT

The Introit is made up of an antiphon, a simple psalm- verse with
the Gloria Patri, and the repetition of .the antiphon. It has the schematic
form ABA. Formerly the whole psalm was sung, or at least a goodly-
number of verses, and the antiphon was repeated after each verse. In
fact, to arrive at a full understanding of most Introits, a thorough study
of the entire psalm from which the Introit has been taken is necessary.
The verse has a distinctive melody for each of the eight modes. These
typical melodies remain unchanged and therefore are not influenced by
the subject matter or the spirit of the feast. The individual antiphons
will be explained in their proper place. As regards the melody of the
psalm-verse and its underlying text, however, a few remarks may be in
place.

In the first, third.

and £

accents:

ExsuUate

Deo

Gloria . . .

Exsul-

td-

and seventh modes the middle cadence has two

ia) ag ga
(c) ha ccc
(e) ed de
no-stro:
san-cto :
Do-mi -no:

ac (a) a

d (c) c

df (e) e

adju-

to ri

Spi-

ri- tu- i

ju-sti in

In the sixth mode the middle cadence has two accents with a pre-
paratory note:

aa a g

ExsuUate Deo adju-

Exsul-td - te

(a)a

to-

ju-

sti in

9 (/) /
no- stro :
Domi - no :

In the fifth mode the middle cadence has one accent with a pre-
paratory note:

c c c d
ExsuUate Deo adjuto- ri

justi in

d (c) c
no- stro:
D6-mi - no:

In the second, fourth and eighth modes the middle cadence has one
accent with three preparatory notes:

2. fe fg g

ExsuUate Deo ad- ju- to- ri

fg (/) /

no - stro:
Do-mi - no :

Structure and Expressiveness of the Variable Mass-Chants 3

In the first, second, third, sixth, seventh, and eighth modes, the
final cadence begins with the fifth syllable from the end; in the fourth
mode with the fourth syllable from the end.

aca

3
/

///

ded

cc h

def

ccc

ccb

jubi-ld - te De - 0 Ja - cob

Here there is simple enumeration of syllables, with no reference to
the word-accent. The text is subordinatd to the melodic rhythm, and
according to Quintilian (A.D. 118), the syllables must then be length-
ened or shortened to fit the pattern of the melody. Occasionally, in the
Vatican edition, the sixth and eighth modes form exceptions when the
verse closes with a dactylic rhythm, as is instanced in the Introit In
medio :

f f f 9 fd f\g (/) /
Do- mi- ni tu- o Al\tis- si- me;

and in the Introit of the Sunday after Christmas:

3 2 1

CC b ga cb\d a g
fortitudinem et prae\cin-xit se.

In both cases, therefore, there is one accent with three preparatory notes;
this makes the rhythm of the eighth mode somewhat uneven.

Some modes have variant final cadences. These effect an artistic
linking of the psalm-verse with the repetition of the antiphon. The an-
cients had a nice sense for the propriety of such a device. Occasionally
the cadence suggests the beginning of the antiphon.

The eighth mode closes with the extended cadence c cc b ga cb a
gadffg when the antiphon rises from a lower note, as for instance on

Palm Sunday:

d fg g gag

Do- mi- ne.

4 Structure and Expressiveness of the Variable Mass-Chants

The fourth mode has the final cadence a gf ga g dgff when the anti-
phon begins with df, as for instance on Maundy Thursday:

dfe
nos.

The first mode has the final cadence /// dcdf, when the antiphon
begins with cd, as for instance on the feast of the Purification:

cd dabb a a

Su- see- pimus.

Otherwise it has the cadence fga, if the antiphon sets in on a, as^
for instance, on the feast of the Conversion of St. Paul;

a gag
Sei- 0.

The fifth mode has the stirring and onward-urging cadence e dh c
ägdgfg, especially when the antiphon is defined within the tone range
f-a, as, for instance, on Septuagesima Sunday:

fa a a a agga f
Cir-cum-de - de - runt me.

The sixth mode has the still more impelling cadence fgfdfgfg
a g when the antiphon sets in on a low pitch, as, for instance, on Low
Sunday:

c d d d
Quasi mo-do

Evidently the need for contrast also comes into play here. The
"Concors varietas," as St. Augustine^ has it; the "suavis quaedam et con-
cordahilis diversitas — smooth and harmonious diversity," as Berno of
Reichenau^ (eleventh century) puts it. The same becomes apparent from
the rule for the adaptation of individual phrases of the same composition :
if one phrase closes on a low pitch, the following will have a tendency to
rise. Thus in the Offertory of the second Sunday in Advent, the fourth
phrase begins with g-c, while the foregoing one closes with //. This is
seen in various Graduals of the third mode, for example, the close and
the beginning of the first and second phrases of Quinquagesima Sunday?
three times on the feast of the Holy Name of Jesus; twice on the feast
of St. Michael.

On the other hand, if one phrase begins in a high pitch, the follow-
ing will have a tendency to begin with a low pitch. This is well exempli-
fied in the Introit of the third Sunday of Advent, where the cadence over

De Civitate Dei, 1, 17, c. 14.

Gerbert, Scriptores eccles. de musica, II, 77.

structure and Expressiveness of the Variable Mass-Chants 5

hominihus closes on gf with reference to the following phrase, which be-
gins in a higher pitch, while over solliciti suis the same cadence becomes
fg with reference to the following phrase, which begins with a lower
pitch. For the same reason the cadence e g f f e oi the fourth mode often
becomes e e f; this, in fact, is the general rule whenever the following
phrase begins with low d or low c. The rule for the adaptation of phrases,
as will be pointed out later, effects a tension between the phrases and its
various members.

B. THE OFFERTORY

The Offertory is also called an antiphon, although in the oldest
manuscripts it consisted of several verses with one or more refrains. It
is, therefore, really a responsory, closely resembling the Gradual respon-
sories in melodic richness. The Offertory of the Requiem Mass with its
refrain Quam olim is the sole remaining example of this type of Offertory.

With truth it has been said that, to explain fully any given excerpt,
it is best to adduce the entire selection from which the excerpt has been
taken. In accordance with this, the setting for the Offertory as well as
the Introit would become much more complete and the excerpted text
much better understood, if the entire psalm from which the manuscript
text as a rule is taken, would be subjoined. Such a procedure, however,
would exceed the prupose and limits of the Gradual. Reference for such
matter should there be made to commentaries on the psalms.^

The Introit and Offertory for the first Sunday of Advent have iden-
tical texts, albeit the melody of the Offertory is more quiet and severe.
Similar observation can be made in regard to other Mass texts. This,
however, would not permit us to generalize and to claim that the Offer-
tory portrays to a higher degree the activities of the inner soul than does
the Introit.

As Wagner (III, 418) has shown. Offertories avoid the lengthier
syllabic element of chant. There are never more than five successive
syllables on the same note. Melismas usually occur within the word,
while at the end of the Offertory and particularly at the end of the last
verse we find a rather ornate vocalise. The Offertories for the Vigil of
Christmas and the twenty-second Sunday after Pentecost illustrate this
well.

Some Offertories- — Offertories alone — have text repetitions. These
are introduced possibly for "artistic effect;" more probably, however,
for a liturgical reason. They were necessitated formerly to occupy the

3 The author refers to the German work Heilige Gabe, by P. Thomas Michels and Athan-
asius Wintersig.

6 Structure and Expressiveness of the Variable Mass-Chants

time during which the faithful brought their gifts to the altar (Wagner,
III, 429).

C. THE COMMUNION

The Communion, like the Introit, had at one time the form ABA,
the sole remaining example of which we find in the Requiem Mass of
today. In addition to the Communions that are practically syllabic and
differ in nothing from ordinary antiphons, there are many which surpass
the Introit in richness of melody, and others which are sung in extended
responsorial form at the Night Office.

II.

In contrast to the above chants which originally accompanied some
liturgical action, we might designate those chants which occur between
the Epistle and Gospel as chants of rest, since they accompany no litur-
gical action. Historically this latter class is the older of the two. The
early Church utilized these chants as a means to impress on the hearts
of the faithful the lessons inculcated by the Epistle, and to make them
the more readily susceptible for the Gospel. Clergy and laity should,
without any further ado, be enabled to devote themselves entirely to
the contemplation of the chant and its import.

"The Epistle and Gospel are chanted in simple, recitative style,
generally monotone, with simple, stereotyped variations at the more
important punctuation marks. And rightly so. Here the important fea-
ture is the word which leads to the comprehensive understanding of the
text. Between the Epistle and Gospel, however, there are responsorial
chants of the richest lyrical melodies. And this with wise forethought,
for it accords with the laws of aesthetics in regard to contrast. These
chants act as a counterpoise to the external musical simplicity of the
Epistle and Gospel."^

D. THE GRADUAL RESPONSORIES

The Gradual responsories formerly had a refrain (hence the usual
form ABA). Without this refrain, text and melody are at present some-
times unintelligible, as for instance, the Gradual on the feast of St. John
the Baptist. Present usage, however, permits the addition of the refrain.
According to the notation of the Vatican edition, the Gradual is divided
into a corpus and a verse. The corpus, as a rule, is more quiet, simple,
and reserved, and not infrequently assigned to a plagal mode. According-
ly, it may be well rendered by a small, choice choir. The verse is con-

i Gregoriusblatt, 50, 18.

Structure and Expressiveness of the Variable Mass-Chants 7

ceived as a solo, which moves upward brightly and joyfully. Generally
a very extended melisma occurs after the first or second word.

The Graduals employ a series of typical melodies which are fre-
quently adapted in their entirety to various other texts. Still more gen-
eral is^the use of about fifty typical formulas which in part may be as-
signed to various modes (shifting melismas'^) and yet are combined in a
pleasing manner. Some conclude a selection (final or codal melismas);
others begin a selection (initial melismas), others again give prominence
to the punctuation (caesural melismas), while others are found in the
middle of a phrase (inner melismas), mostly over the accented syllable,
at least in the verse. The favored mode of Graduals is the fifth. Only
eighteen Graduals are assigned to the third mode and only three to the
eighth mode.

At times the melody forms a recitative on the dominant, thus effect-
ing a striking contrast to the preceding and subsequent melismas, which
are interwoven in the chief parts of the text.

Combined with the subsequent Alleluia, technically the Gradual
forms the artistic apex of the High Mass.

E. THE ALLELUIA

The Alleluia with its verse retains to the present time the form
ABA, and hence belongs to the responsorial chants. A rich, jubilant
melody (juhilus, neum, sequence) continues the melody over the word
Alleluia.

Over the word Alleluia we generally find two motives. They are
distributed in such a way that the first and lower-pitched comes over
the first two syllables, while the second and higher-pitched comes over
the last two syllables. In the ensuing juhilus plain chant displays its fine
sense of form. It favors the repetition of a member, in such a manner,
however, that a real development of the melody takes place. Thus, for
instance, there would not simply be a a but a 6} (ninth Sunday after
Pentecost), or a öl? h\?- (twelfth Sunday after Pentecost), or a a a^ 6b^
(twenty-third Sunday after Pentecost), or a a hb c (eighteenth Sunday
after Pentecost). Over and above repetition, plain chant also uses "the
technique of motivation, which effects a more intimate connection be-
tween the various parts of the juhilus."'^

No less than 170 juhilus precede their final note with a pressus;
thus the third mode has f e f g ff e, the eighth mode has g a c b aa g. 01
the remaining 64 closing melodies, 53 are assigned to the first and sec-

Wagner, III, 376 ff.
Wagner, III, 411 flf.

8 Structure and Expressiveness of the Variable Mass-Chants

ond mode and have mostly the concluding form d e f d { = a b c a) or c e
f d, six to the third and fourth mode, mostly with the concluding form
a b c g. The pressus is thus most adaptable for concluding the jubilus
melody.

The Alleluia-verse often bears the same relation to the preceding
Alleluia and jubilus as do the variations of a theme to the theme itself.
Seldom is every such relation absent. The first words of the verse fre-
quently repeat the melody of the Alleluia. As in the Gradual verse, one
syllable (which is, as a rule, the accented one) has a florid melisma and
is finely membered, like that of the jubilus. Reference might be made
to odorem in the Alleluia for the feast of St. Andrew.

It is proper to designate the systematical division of the various
chants of the Gradual by a a^ b, etc., and to designate identical and simi-
lar passages with a circumflex either above or below the neums. The
singer is thus afforded a general view of the whole composition and ac-
quires that self-confidence which is consonant with the spirit of prayer.

As a rule, the verse has the same rich closing melody, the same
jubilus as the Alleluia. Only a few melodies, among them those of the
three Christmas Masses, have a different ending. They were most likely
composed at a time when the sense of the symmetrical rounding-off of
phrases was not so well developed. Wagner (III, 398 ff.) assigns them to
an older (archaic) form. Neither is the inner development of these melo-
dies so clearly arranged as that which marks other melodies (cf. Pal.
mus., Ill, 53 ff).

F. THE TRACT

As a rule, the text of the Tract is taken from the Psalms or the Can-
ticles. Its several verses have psalmodic structure. Tracts were invariably
assigned either to the second or eighth mode. The first verse generally
has an extended beginning and the last verse a rich closing melisma.
The mediant divides each verse into two halves; in the following it is
indicated by f.

The most frequently occurring form of mediant of the second mode
is that which, for instance, is found in the first Tract of Good Friday
over timui, cognosceris, mea, veniet, eius, and is characterized by the
descent of a fourth with a pressus and close on c. A few other forms (in
the same Tract over innotesceris) occur less frequently, but close on c.
Between the beginning and the mediant, but more frequently the medi-
ant and the closing cadence, a number of caesuras are now and then in-
serted, which as a rule have a melodic upward tendency and close on /,
as, for instance, in the second Tract of Good Friday over iniquo, die,

lum. In the following the caesura is indicated by ( — ).

structure and Expressiveness of the Variable Mass-Chants 9

The form of mediant of the eighth mode is similar to that of the
second. We have an instance of it in the Tract Sicut cervus of Holy Satur-
day over aquarum, vivum, node. This form is also characterized by the
descent of a fourth, pressus, and close on /, hence a whole step below the
finale of the mode. A caesura is also inserted here, and that mostly after
the mediant, as in the above Tract over ad te Deus. Thus melodic orna-
mentation is found where the text is set off by a punctuation mark, or
where the singer finds it necessary to breathe. This melismatic punctu-
ation is not proper to the Latin language. On account of its melodic
structure, we must consider the Tract above all as the first fruits of
Christian Mass chants.'

As a general rule, texts of a serious and pleading character prefer
the second mode, which has a minor third over its tonic and as such gives
us the effect of a modern minor key. On the other hand, texts of a joy-
ful nature prefer the eighth mode which has a major third over its tonic,
and as such gives us the effect of a modern major key. The sentiments
expressed in the Tract of Laetare Sunday and in all the Tracts of Holy
Saturday are well adapted to the eighth mode.

ARE THE VARIABLE MASS CHANTS EXPRESSIVE
OF EMOTION?

The answer to this question is more than a matter of mere simple
formula. Above all must be kept in mind the fact that in their essence
the choral chants are liturgical chants. "Liturgy, however, directs all
things to God and is governed by reverence for God. The goal of plain
chant, therefore, must primarily be the glorification of God and not the
reaction it has on man's ideas and sentiments. Hence it depicts rever-
ential worship of the majesty of God, wonderment over His beauty,
amazement over His divine deeds for us, trustful hope in Him whose
impenetrable Wisdom guides all things — and then again a fervent, even
joyful, gratitude for His love.

"Plain chant, therefore, knows no exuberance of sentiment, no pre-
dominance of mood in the face of quiet and serene reasoning. For this it
is altogether too intimately connected with its text.

"It is prayer devoid of external manifestation and false pathos; it
is direct as the words of a child to its father, plain and simple as the eve-
ning prayer of an innocent soul."^

Liturgical prayer and chant differ greatly from private devotion.
Liturgy, according to its very name, presupposes a fellowship of spirit.

7 Wagner, III, 352 ff.; Gregoriusblatt, 50, 3 ff.; 42, 3 ff.

8 Johner, Der greg. Choral, 76 flF.

10 structure and Expressiveness of the Variable Mass-Chants

This naturally demands a restraint of the purely personal element and
a renunciation of those traits which correspond to the inclinations and
experiences of the individual.

The reverence for God and the attitude of the community often
effect this community of sentiment, which is indicated rather than ex-
pressed. Religious activities are, in fact, less demonstrative.

This is especially noticeable in those chants which were designated
above as "chants of rest," namely, Gradual (Alleluia-verse), Tract, and
also the psalm- verse of the Introit. They are either composed entirely
of typical melodies, which are adapted to different texts, moods, and
feasts, or they make liberal use of typical forms. And it is precisely this
that distinguishes religious and sacred art, that it rises above the natural
propensities of the individual, and that it has a style of its own. All the
forms of religious art — painting, sculpture, architecture, and also music
and song — have these characteristics.

The melody in these cases does not serve as an interpretation, but
rather as an embellishment of the text; it clothes the text with a more
or less festal garb. Occasionally interesting attempts are made to sacri-
fice the typical form for individual expression.

Gregorian music, however, is not merely a music of embellishment;
it does not describe the text in the manner in which a garland entwines
itself about a pillar, effecting no inner connection with it. Chant can also
make the text interpretative, expressive, and explanative. It often brings
its gradations at the very point where a declamatory rendition of the
text grows in warmth, and it emphasizes that word which marks its
climax. Much would be gained for the proper understanding and rendi-
tion of the melody if we would first ask ourselves the question: How would
I read or render this text according to its sense? It will become evident
that chant unites text and melody well, and that there is an intimate
relationship, a union of spirit, between them. Choral music, morevoer,
makes prominent use of the esthetics of the interval.

The chants referred to above as processional hymns may be de-
scribed as expressive of emotion. True, they make use of many typical
forms, but the more these hymns are studied and analyzed the more
apparent it becomes that they are more than mere feelers in the realm
of emotionally expressive music. It is difficult to reconcile the opinion of
Oswald Spengler^ when, writing of the church music of the early Middle
Ages, he says that its subjective emotions and sentiments are not con-
ceivable by us. Indeed, plain chant with its limited means and devices
to portray emotion and expression will not create the immediate reaction

9 Untergang des Abendlandes, 1, 224.

Structure and Expressiveness of the Variable Mass-Chants 11

today that it did in bygone centuries. After all, those ages knew nothing
of the enticing charms of modern harmony, chromatics, and rhythm,
and were, therefore, more susceptible to the chaste allurements of mono-
phonic melodies. Nevertheless, it still radiates today a warmth which
effectively influences the religious life of the soul; it imparts faculties
which enable us to soar over mundane things to the very Mystery of the
altar, to union with God.

Plain chant like all vocal music utilizes two features or forms to render
the melody expressive. The one endeavors to reproduce the single uniform
mood as indicated by the liturgy. It does not center and concentrate
itself on individual words but rather pervades the entire text; it per-
vades every phrase of the whole composition, just as the soul is found
in every part of the body. This form of expressiveness is the one most
frequently used in the so-called processional hymns.

Another form stresses the import of the individual words and is
known as specific expressiveness of music. Plain chant, especially the
Communion, knows many such rich genre pictures.

Let us endeavor to know and realize in our singing the spirit of each
individual melody, but above all let us conceive it as prayer. Prayer is
the raising of the heart and mind and the entire man to God. The ob-
jective in the liturgy should become our personal conviction, our per-
sonal property.

Pius X in his Motu proprio of November 22, 1903, says: "The pro-
per aim of the melody is to add greater efficiency to the text, in order
that through it the faithful may be the more easily moved to devotion
and better disposed for the reception of the fruits of grace belonging to
the celebration of the most holy mysteries." The same pertains also to
the actual rendering of the melodies. We should penetrate deeply into
the feeling of the liturgical chants. Our song rendered with reverence
and love in the presence of God and of the faithful should portray that
which we ourselves have experienced. The knowledge that we have
imparted our own inward happiness to others and have been instrumental
in leading them to the altar and closer union with God will then afford
us a goodly measure of spiritual joy and delight.

The following observations should be noted in regard to the melody
of newer feasts:

1. Their text and melody as such are taken from an older Mass
formulary (cf, what is noted concerning the Introit and Gradual of the
feast of Corpus Christi).

2. They adapt an older melody to a newly selected text (cf. Offer-
tory and Communion of Corpus Christi). At times similarity of text or

12 Structure and Expressiveness of the Variable Mass-Chants

word seems to have occasioned the choice of the melody: Videhunt (Com-
munion Ldnceae et Clavorum) and Viderunt (third Mass on Christmas) ;
Sta-{bant) (Introit of feast of Seven Dolors) and Stä-{tuit) (Common of
Martyr-Bishop); qui vocdtur Christus (Communion for Solemnity of St.
Joseph after Easter) and qui dicitur Christus (Vigil of St. Andrew); in
generatione (Introit for the Sacred Heart feast) ; and a generatione (Tues-
day after the first Sunday in Lent).

3. They borrow individual phrases from various Mass formularies
(Offertory and Communion on the feast of the Kingship of Christ).

4. They employ an altogether new composition; this, however, is
of rare occurrence (Offertory for the feast of the Immaculate Concep-
tion, and Sequence Stabat Mater).

Cf. Revue, 6, 158 ff.

The Masses For Sundays And

Feastdays According To The

Liturgical Seasons

(Proprium de Tempore)

FIRST SUNDAY OF ADVENT
INTROIT (Ps. 24: 1, 3)

1. Ad te levavi animam meam: 1. To thee have I lifted up my

Deus mens in te confido, non eru- soul: in thee, 0 my God, I put my

bescam: 2. neque irrideant me in- trust, let me not he ashamed: 2.

imici mei: 3. etenim universi qui neither let mine enemies laugh at me:

te exspectant, non confundentur . 3. for none of them that wait on thee

Ps. Vias tuas, Domine, demonstra shall he confounded. Ps. Show, 0

mihi: * et semitas tuas edoce me. Lord, thy ways to me: * and teach

me thy paths.

"Lift up (levate) your heads, because your redemption is at hand."
Thus the Lord consoles us in the Gospel for today, which, in the main,
is intensely serious. He wishes to come as our Redeemer on Christmas
night, and for this the Advent season, now beginning, is to prepare us.
He wants to free our soul from the foes that press it from every side,
from enemies who think they can already rejoice at our defeat. Although
we may often have looked up (levavi) to some vain thing, considering
its attainment our life's ambition, there has always come a time when
we realized the nothingness of it all, realized that God alone can be our
ideal, our goal. Only when we take cognizance of His ways (vias tuas,
Domine) and walk accordingly, can we find true happiness. God alone
can guard the beauty and nobility of our soul against its every enemy.
At the beginning of the liturgical year our soul strives, therefore, to
elevate itself, definitely and decisively, to Him who by His incarnation
becomes its God (Deus meus) and who wishes to be intimately united
with it in Holy Communion. For this reason Deus meus sounds almost
jubilant. For this reason, too, strong accents are placed over in te con-
fido; and non erubescam and neque irrdieant sound more like a song of
victory than a suppliant petition.

"Lift up your heads, for your redemption is at hand." Some time it
will come, the perfected redemption, when the Son of Man will come in

14 First Sunday of Advent

the clouds of heaven "with great power and majesty." Then all the world
will see that no one who trusts in God is ever confounded. Then those
who put their faith in men will stand abashed. Then the longing of all
those (universi) who were turned toward God will be fulfilled and all the
desires (exspectant) of the human heart will find their complete satis-
faction in God.

The antiphon is formed of the first verses of Psalm 24. In cases of
this kind, the verse which immediately follows generally supplies the
psalm-verse for the Introit. Here, however, the fourth has been chosen,
the preceding verse having been passed by, most likely because it ex-
presses the same thought as its predecessors.

According to the Vatican edition this virile melody is divided into
three phrases, all having the same range and stressing the full step be-
low the tonic. This gives added firmness to the chant. The first and third
phrases have almost the same closing cadence. Meam and mei close on /.
The most ancient reading, according to the German tradition of the
Middle Ages, has this Introit rising from a low pitch (d c f g), like other
Introits of the eighth mode, e.g., those of Palm Sunday and of Whit-
sunday. Amen at the close of the psalm- verse has not the usual cadence,
but g a d f f g, which acts as an introduction to the repetition of the
antiphon. The fact that this cadence is given here indicates that in its
original form this Introit began on low d, thus representing the lifting
up of the soul to God in a more graphic manner. Animam seems like a
reverent look at God, while meam is filled with childlike submission. We
become more fully conscious of the force in confido if we first sing its
half tone and full tone in the reverse order c h\? h\? a, and then sing the
notes as given. After h a, non has a triumphant ring. The same spirit is
retained in the following phrase, which sets in with an interval of a
fourth and twice has a vibrating tristropha. Thus this prayer almost
becomes a command: Lord, Thou canst not do otherwise than help me
against my enemies.

Revue, 19, 69 ff.

As an antithesis to g-c over änimam we have c-g over (irride)
-ant me.

Rhythmically the close over (inimi)-ci mei is related to (con)-fido.
Now the song becomes more serene. The final phrase has no more large
intervals, no more bistrophas or tristrophas. Characteristic of it are the
thirds and the upward tendency of f a g, g b a, g a c, after had, which
in the rendition should receive a powerful crescendo. Thus the Advent
idea (exspectant) is brought luminously into the foreground, and with
the conviction that the preceding petition will be granted, the song
comes to a close.

First Sunday of Advent 15

Our song should be a prayer, and our prayer a lifting of our whole
being to God (levavi dnimam meam). Such prayerful song will lift others,
too, out of the shadowy valleys of this earth. Grace will then light up
the way to the knowledge of Christ, to union with Him.

Revue, 19, 69 ff.; Analyses, II, 3 ff.; Johner, N. Sch. 54, 66; C. 0.,
46, 136 ff.; Wagner, I, 219; III, 299.; Gregoriushote, 43, 182 ff.

GRADUAL (Ps. 24:3, 4)

Universi qui te exspectant, non None of them that wait on thee

confundentur , Domine. jl/. 1. Vias shall he confounded, O Lord. ^. 1.

tuas, Domine, 2. notas fac mihi: Thy ways, O Lord, 2. show thou to

3. et semitas tuas edoce me. me: S. and teach me thy paths.

Few Graduals show such a clear and evident difference between the
quiet, low-pitched corpus of the Gradual and the ornate, richly devel-
oped, and upward-surging verse with its change of clef. With its deep
notes and emphasis on the dominant /, the corpus ought really to be
ascribed to the second mode. The verse, on the contrary, is not satis-
fied with the dominant of the first mode (a); its actual dominant is a
third higher. In both parts the incisions are marked with elaborate me-
lismas: exspectant, Domine, mihi, me.

Perhaps the florid melody over Universi, rising from a low pitch,
wishes to portray in tone-painting the large number, the multitude.
With exspectant the annotated manuscripts call for a broad rendition of
all notes on the final syllable. This serves to augment the Advent spirit
of longing and of expectancy, which is already expressed by the melody
itself. An intense seriousness pervades the entire piece.

The very first notes of the verse show a combination of the tonic
with the dominant (d-a), the so-called chief repercussion, thereby in-
troducing a change of sentiment. Ever more lively, more fervent, and
more impressive the petition now becomes. The motive /(/ a cc a, striving

upward and then sinking back again, is repeated with pleasant varia-
tions four times; c appears five times in the energetic form of the pressus.
The cadence at the close of Domine might indicate something like
wearniess, but with unwonted power the melody again soars upward,
as if to knock at the very gates of heaven and obtain a hearing. Only
after this does it gradually sink to rest. "Modern music for a long time
now has looked upon such repetition of motive as one of its most effec-
tive devices. The passage reminds us of Edward Grieg, the famous
Norwegian lyrist (Op. 46, Peer Gynt, Suite I, 'Morgenstimmung')."^

1 Kreitmaier, Dominantem, 170.

16 First Sunday of Advent

Obviously, there must be a certain urgency running through the rendi-
tion. The annotated manuscripts give evidence of fine musical taste in
indicating that all the notes of this motive are to be sung broadly. The

close 6 b gg f of Domine is answered by a egg f over mihi. Once again the
abovementioned motive returns in a slightly different form over et
semitas. "The singer is reminded of the grace of Christ which mercifully
descends upon man. With graceful condescension the melody bows
down at semitas tuas, as if to show how lovingly the grace of Christ is
communicated to the suppliant."^ The final me should be given a pro-
nounced ritardando.

The text of the Gradual is already known to us from the close of the
Introit and from its psalm- verse. But the Gradual, following the more
ancient translation of the Scriptures, the Itala, has notas fac instead of
demonstra. It seems that the ancient liturgy preferred to take the In-
troit and the Gradual from the same psalm. The preceding Epistle with
its admonition: "It is now the hour for us to rise from sleep," sheds ad-
ditional light on our present text. We must be of those who watch ex-
pectantly, otherwise understanding will come too late. We must "put
on the Lord Jesus Christ," must become acquainted with His ways. His
works. His manner of life. These we must learn to know and appreciate
in all their awe-inspiring, adorable greatness. We sing therefore and pray
with utmost fervor: "Show thy ways to me, O Lord!" And when we con-
sider the many ways in which the human heart can go satray, the many
paths not illumined by the light of truth, then shall we begin to share
the motherly solicitude of the Church, and from the bottom of our hearts
we shall sing and pray: "Lord, teach us to tread thy paths!"

ALLELUIA VERSE (Ps. 84: 8)

1, Ostende nobis Domine mi- 1. Show us, O Lord, thy mercy:

sericordiam tuam: 2. et salutare 2. and grant us thy salvation,
tuum da nobis.

Ever since the first sin was committed, this cry has been ascending
almost ceaselessly to heaven: "Show us, O Lord, thy mercy!" And never
is it uttered in vain. The riches of divine mercy are infinite, inexhaustible.
But men wish to see God's mercy, to feel it, to touch it bodily. Incarnate
Mercy came to this earth when the only-begotten Son of God became
man. His merciful love urges Him to seek that which was lost, to preach
the Gospel to the poor, to heal wounded hearts, to speak that divinely

'^Gregoriushote, 43, 185.

First Sunday of Advent 17

effective word: "Thy sins are forgiven thee; go in peace." Lord, come
Thou again into our hearts, into the hearts of all men, work the marvels
of Thy forgiving love, and grant us Thy salvation! Such is the heart-
felt supplication of this Advent song.

This melody with its archaic form has been thoroughly discussed
by Dom Mocquereau in the second number of his Monographies gre-
goriennes (Tournai, Desclee). For much of what follows we are indebted
to that excellent work; we are also allowing ourselves some additional
observations. In the most ancient manuscripts this melody is found ac-
commodated to various texts. In the present instance, however, text
and melody fit so perfectly that one may without hesitation say that
the verse Ostende is the original. Besides, in no manuscript has it a dif-
ferent melody than that assigned to it here, a fact which likewise testi-
fies to its great age. Alleluia and juhilus are clearly joined by the final
pressus on a. But they also show inner relationship. Compare, for in-
stance :

a g a b c h ä c
Alle- lü- ia and

Alleluia. g f a b cc b g c

The verse has two parts with two large subdivisions. Ostende sets in
lively and fervently with an interval of a fourth on the dominant of the
eighth mode, as if to recall the words of St. James: "But let him ask in
faith, nothing wavering" (1:6). However energetic this introduction
should be, allowance must be made for a corresponding increase with
Domine and above all with (miseri)-c6rdiam. The cadence of (Dömi)-ne
keeps the melody suspended; then before the next word-accent it sinks
to b a. Now the word misericordiam can shine forth in all its splendor.
Upon this upward flight follows relaxation from tuam on, until the melody
finally rests upon the tonic.

At its beginning the second phrase recites on the tonic, reminding
us, with its porrectus on the word-accent, of, the solemn psalm-intona-
tion of the eighth mode. Corresponding to c e d over (miseri)-c6rdiam in
the first phrase, everything here must be fitted to the principal accent
of tu-(um), which we should like to place on d e c a following the tris-
tropha. According to the annotated manuscripts, however, only c a of
this pes subbipunctus and the subsequent torculus b d b are to be sung
with added emphasis and expression. Thus we have d c b c g and b\? a
g a f corresponding to one another. No one will experience much diffi-
culty in discovering the similarity of tuam in the first phrase and tuum
in the second:

18 First Sunday of Advent

ag ccbg a b\? a f g h\? a g

tu . am

ca chgacaf hi} ag
tu um

The final member (da nobis) moves more quietly and prepares for
the close. Its melody never goes above c; several times it rests upon low
/. The resulting tritonic tone-sequences f a h and b g f are somewhat
grating. But it is just this which makes them fit so well to the supplicat-
ing spirit of the whole. In the second last group of neums, &[> is occa-
sioned by the following /, just as b in the last group by the following g.
The verses of Tracts in the eighth mode end on a. Compare:

Alleluia: cc a g a b\? g f ccagabaag
Tract: cc a g a bh g f acabggaag

The closing neum differs from that of the Alleluia jubilus; it has
the archaic form. We find the richest melismas over tuum and nobis, as
if the meldoy wished to say: Only Thy mercy, Thy salvation can help
and heal us.

In its adaptation to other texts, the melody occasionally receives
the character of a florid psalmody with intonation, dominant, and ca-
dence. Compare, for example, the second phrase of this Alleluia with
that of the feast of SS. Simon and Jude: et salutdre with nimis confo-
tdtus est.

Ostendel How often we pray to the Mother of God in the Salve
Regina that after this exile she may show us her Son Jesus! Today,
since at Rome the principal service (the statio) is being held in St. Mary
Major, we cry out to her also, imploring her to show us here in our exile
the incarnate Love which she once bore under her virgin heart.

OFFERTORY

This Offertory has the same text as the Introit. But it inserts "O
Lord" among the words: "To thee have I lifted up my soul."

We sing this song while the priest is offering the sacrificial gifts and
lifting his eyes heavenward. We also lift up our souls to Him who is
fidelity unchanging. The heavenly bodies will one day be destroyed;
terrible will be the roar of the ocean; cries of horror will escape from the
terrified peoples; all worldly hopes will fail. One alone will remain ever
the same. Therefore, O Christian soul — thus the Church admonishes
again — let your confidence be unshakeable, even in the storms of the
present life, even when you must bring also other than symbolic gifts to

First Sunday of Advent 19

the altar, even when your vocation and your duties demand sacrifices
from you which cut deeply into the heart, even when your fidelity re-
sults only in derision for yourself (neque irrideant). Then pray and sing
with your whole soul: "My God, I put my trust in Thee. I shall not be
confounded." And behold. He for whom your heart longs will come to
you in Holy Communion, to be your light and your strength!

Even more clearly than in the Introit does the melody here "lift"
itself from the depths. Eruhescam, a heightened repetition of (d)-nimam
meam, is much like the eruhescam of the Introit. The division of the
phrases, moreover, is almost identical; in other respects, however, this
Offertory travels its own path. The predilection of the second mode for
the frequent combination of the tonic and dominant (d-f) determines
the melodic line; in fact, the melody extends but a single tone above its
dominant. The motive over (D6)-mine is found again over (confun)-
dentur, with a slight variation over mei, and, taking its rhythm into
consideration (2+4 + 2 [4]), also over te, d-(nimam), Deus mens, and con-
fido. All this assures the song a feeling of deep rest and unimpassioned
reserve. But we must not forget that in early times the Offertory had two
more verses, of which especially the last had a florid close. Deus meus,
non, and neque set in on the dominant. The effect varies, however, de-
pending on whether the preceding note rests on the same pitch, or a
third or a fourth lower. As a result of its intonation, non (eruhescam)
possesses special force, heightened by its pressus-like accent, the only
one in the entire piece. While the Introit and the Gradual make exspect-
ant prominent, our present song stresses universi with its interval of a
fourth. But the melody is more subdued and quiet than in the corres
sponding passage of the Introit. It would seem that the subsequent Sec-
ret already exerts its influence upon this song. According to the position
it occupies liturgically, plain song knows how to give the same text its
proper character, its own spirit. Animam meam, words and melody, is
found also on the feast of St. Joseph of Cupertino. That song uses also
the last phrase of today's Offertory, though with a different text.

Revue, 8, 49 ff.

COMMUNION (Ps. 84: 13).

1. Dominus dahit henignitatem: 1. The Lord will give goodness:

2. et terra nostra dahit fructrum 2. and our earth shall yield her
suum, fruit.

All the chants of this Sunday are fervent and touching supplica-
tions. Here we have the answer to all these petitions, and especially to
that of the Alleluia- verse, which is taken from the same psalm as the

20 Second Sunday of Advent

Communion. Our prayer is not in vain. The Lord gives His blessing: a
joyous animation runs through the melody with these words. What co-
pious blessings has the Lord poured upon this earth, and what a plen-
titude of grace has He again placed in our souls in Holy Communion as
seed for eternity! Wherever this seed falls upon rich soil, in souls who
recognize that the one thing necessary is to do the will of God, there it
bears rich fruit.

In the Blessed Virgin, however, this Communion finds its finest
realization. Hitherto our earth had brought forth but thorns and thistles.
We are, as Adam of St. Victor sang in the twelfth century, a thornhedge,
lacerated by the thorns of sin; but Mary knows nothing of thorns. She
is so richly blessed that the angel can greet her as "full of grace." The
heart of this ancilla Domini was fertile soil, moistened by the dew of
heaven. Soon she will present us with the most beautiful flowerlet, the
ripest and most luscious fruit which has ever graced the face of the earth,
a fruit so precious that mankind, generation after generation, will never
weary of calling out to her: "Blessed art thou amongst women, and
blessed is the fruit of thy womb, Jesus!"

The first phrase has a range of a ninth; with (benigni)-tätem it lets
the blessings drop gently from above. The second phrase, which treats
of the fruits of the earth, does not extend above the dominant of the
mode (a). Both phrases descend in a gentle line to low c and begin the
following member with an interval of a fourth. A fluent and bright ren-
dition should characterize the whole piece.

This melody is sung also on the feast of St. Ignatius (July 31).
"Lift up your heads;" in Holy Communion "your redemption is at hand."

SECOND SUNDAY OF ADVENT

Today the Introit, Gradual, and Communion speak of Sion, i.e., of
Jerusalem. The Alleluia-verse also alludes to this. For at Rome the prin-
cipal service was held in the Church of the Holy Cross in Jerusalem, close
to the Lateran. Formerly it was a royal palace; now it shelters a most
venerable relic of the holy cross. Our present Sion is the Catholic Church.
It is also our individual soul, and likewise the church building in which
we look for the Redeemer today. Here it is that we are being prepared
for the heavenly Sion.

INTROIT (Is. 30:30)

1. Populus Sion, ecce Dominus 1. People of Sion, behold the

veniet ad salvandas qentes: 2. et Lord shall come to save the nations:

Second Sunday of Advent 21

auditam faciei Dominus gloriam 2. and the Lord shall make the glory
vocis suae, 3. in laetitia cordis of his voice to he heard, 3. in the joy
vestri. Ps. Qui regis Israel, intende: of your heart. Ps. Give ear, O thou
* qui deducis velut ovem Joseph. that rulest Israel: * thou that lead-

est Joseph like a sheep.

How different is the effect of the ascending fourth in today's Introit
from that of the descending fourth in last Sunday's! One seems to hear
a herald proclaiming to the people of Sion the most important news ever
told, the tidings which mankind had been awaiting for centuries. The
messenger commissioned by the Lord Himself, would have this mes-
sage of joy j>enetrate into all hearts: "The Lord shall come to save the
nations." And you yourself may listen intently for the voice of the Lord.
For He will speak as one who has power; He will speak of His grace and
transcendent truth and glory. His voice will cause the heart to overflow
with joy.

Where such great things are promised, the petition of the psalm-
verse comes to mind spontaneously: "Give ear, 0 thou that rulest Israel."
Help us to live ourselves into this season of grace. For most lovingly
didst Thou lead Joseph from imprisonment to the regal throne.

The words of the antiphon were verified when the Lord came. Joy
filled the hearts of the shepherds when the Lord, through His angels,
announced to them the message of peace. And although the Child of
Bethlehem could not at that time speak a word, He has often conversed
secretly with our souls in laetitia cordis. A day will come when His voice
will resound majestically over the millions of men who have ever in-
habited the earth, announcing eternal joy to them who have listened to
it during their lifetime.

Three phrases are discernible in the melody, all beginning with the
same, or at least a similar, motive: Populus and ei auditam g c c d and
in laetitia g g a c c d. Still more evident is the agreement of the closing
motives: gentes and vestri g a g g, and suae a fifth higher, d e d d. The real
dominant of the first and third phrases is c; that of the second, d.

Like Populus, Dominus stresses c. Before this, however, the fifth over
ecce fixes the attention. And then it is as if the Lord Himself slowly and
solemnly came into view. Hitherto He had sent the prophets; now He
Himself appears. He comes not to judge, however, but to redeem; He
comes to bring redemption to all the nations. This thought is given a
more detailed treatment in the Epistle; and in the Gospel the Lord
speaks of His activity: "The blind see, the lame walk, the lepers are
cleansed, the deaf hear, the dead rise again, the poor have the gospel
preached to them." He comes to redeem the gentiles. At this gracious

22 Second Sunday of Advent

manifestation of divine favor the melody bows down in gratitude. In
the Sequence-like melody it is best to consider the torculus the points of
support, and to rhythmize in a movement resembling five-eights time:

dd\ cdb ag\ heb ah \ gag g
ad sal- van- das gen-tes.

Thus the word-accents are clearly brought to the fore.

The second phrase begins with the same motive as the first, but its
span is greater. After the accented c and the following d it does not sink
back to c, but establishes itself on d. However insignificant this small
note may appear, it wields great power, urging up to the high /. After
the ascent over faciei comes a brief relaxation. But then follows a mighty
cry (obviously the text has influenced the melody) — gloriam vocis suae.

The third phrase portrays the effects of this message. With full,
round tones it soars upward from g to e^, stressing this, as it afterwards
does c. Then with an interval of a fourth it descends to the tonic and to
the final cadence.

Revue, 19, 139 ff.; Analyses, II, 12 ff.

GRADUAL (Ps. 49:2-3, 5)

1. Ex Sion species decoris ejus: 1. Out of Sion the loveliness of

2, Deus manifeste veniet. S. 1. Con- his heauty: 2. God shall come mani-

gregate Uli sanctos ejus, 2. qui festly. '^. 1. Gather ye together his

ordinaverunt 3. testamentum ejus saints to him, 2. who have set 3- his

super sacrificia. covenant before sacrifices.

When the Lord will come. He will bring joy to the hearts of men:
that is the promise of the Introit. The Epistle closed with similar words:
"Now the God of hope fill you with all joy and peace in believing." This
thought is prolonged by the Gradual. It speaks of the beauty of Him
who is to come. All beauty, and especially that of the coming Messias,
cannot but produce joy: that is the theme of this bright song. Not in-
frequently does it remind us of our modern major scale. In other passages
the Psalmist has painted the beauty of the Messias in brilliant colors,
describing Him as the most beautiful of the children of men. Now He is
to come — and manifeste, in visible form. But this Ruler will not isolate
Himself from His subjects, as is the custom of Oriental sovereigns. He
will show Himself, and with the magic of His beauty He will capture all
hearts.

But he does not come alone: a great host accompanies Him. Of this
the Gradual-verse speaks, as we also read in one of the Advent anti-

Second Sunday of Advent 23

phons: "Behold, the Lord cometh and all His saints with Him." When
He comes at Christmastide, the saints who have sealed the covenant
with the sacrifice of their blood will surround His cradle; St. Stephen,
St. John, the Holy Innocents. But the full grandeur of these words of
the Gradual will be realized only at the end of the world. When the
angels' trumpets will sound — some persons will perhaps hear their echo
in the notes of Congregate — then will arise both the wicked and the just,
the saints who sealed their covenant with God by sacrifice, by loyalty
to the end, frequently by a martyr's bloody death. Now they all come
to form the radiant retinue of the Saviour. However enchanting this
prospect may be, God, the eternal Sun, infinite Beauty, of whom the
saints are but reflections, will appear infinitely more glorious and re-
splendent.

We find the motive of species repeated over (testamentum) ejus, in
its second half over (De)-us, and in an enlarged form over the signifi-
cant ve-(niet). The repetition over (ordinave)-runt becomes more intel-
ligible from this motive. The melody over (Si)-on appears again over
(mani)-feste', similarly (il)-li sanctos, (te)-stamentum, and (su)-per sacri-
(ficia) sound much alike. This play of motives heightens the charm of
the whole song.

The verse has the same range as the corpus, but surpasses it in the
richness of its melismas. It begins, like the corpus, with f a c, which we
may call a resolved major chord, and then toys with the third. Here one
must distinguish well between what are only dives or bistrophas, and
the accented pressus. In any case, the form accede, which occurs
twice, must enliven the whole. In order to warn against any heaviness
in the rendition of this passage, the annotated manuscripts give a light
construction to all the neums over Congregate except the last four notes;
besides, they have "c" { — celeriter, rapidly) marked over it in two places,
the first one covering the first three thirds; and also "st" ( — statim, con-
tinue immediately). The entire passage must therefore be light and airy,
and not as if the angels had to drag the saints onto the scene. It is at the
very beginning of the verse that we find the florid melisma: possibly
this is a reference, in tone-painting, to the multitude of saints. In con-
trast to the tender neums over the first word, the annotated manuscripts
demand a broad, serious, solemn rendition of Uli sanctos ejus.

The second phrase (qui ordinaverunt) is somewhat difficult to sing
properly. Here we also have an example of the small zigzag oscillations
of imitative figures with short motives peculiar to the Dutch School.
This, however, does not justify anyone in generalizing and saying that
thereby "the ideal melody, the beautiful upward and downward line of
movement, is essentially blotted out." The divisions of the melody are

24 Second Sunday of Advent

evident enough. First it descends three times to g, and then thrice down
to a. Toward the end, / gains prominence and calls for ob in place of &,
which dominated the second phrase.

Hear the soft yet persistent undertone: Gather ye around Him, all
ye His saints! Let us be mindful of our vocation to aspire to sanctity,
since we are privileged to assist at the holy Sacrifice of the Mass. Here we
should renew the covenant with Christ which He sealed with His bloody
sacrifice. Perhaps Congregate was intended to urge the early Christians
to lead many of their pagan relatives and friends to Sion, to the Church
(W. Dauffenbach).
N. Sch., 246.

ALLELUIA VERSE (Ps. 121: 1)

1. Laetatus sum in his quae 1. / rejoiced at the things that

dicta sunt mihi: 2. in domum Do- were said to me: 2. We shall go into
mini ihimus. the house of the Lord.

Alleluia with its two ascending fourths begins with an energetic
swing, making one surmise that a greater development is to follow. In
the jubilus and the verse, however, the melody rises but one full tone
higher. The two members of the jubilus resemble each other: 6b c bb a
h\> g f g a and fagedecefg. The first part of the verse seems to have
been formed from a typical antiphonal melody of the first mode, such
as we find on Palm Sunday in the song Pueri Hebraeorum: dfdcfaaa
a c a g f g a. Dicta sunt mi-(hi) exhibits a sort of sequence of thirds: ga
fg ef de. Domum with its fifth, its pressus, and the broad torculus, possesses
the greatest inner tension, the expression of sparkling joy. Such a me-
lisma is also found on June 11, closing the word fructus, singing of the
rich fruits of divine grace and vocation. A second higher Domini has

motives of the second member of the jubilus: f efd fgdag e-e dec efggfd.
Alleluia, Laetatus sum, and the beginning of ibimus show variations of
the same motive.

The ancient plain-song manuscripts add a second verse to that
given here: "Our feet were standing in thy courts, O Jerusalem." How
brightly and spiritedly this song must have come from the lips of those
who, arrayed in their festal robes, were making their pilgrimage to the
Temple! Coming now from our hearts, it should have a still brighter
ring. We are not obliged to make long pilgrimages to the house of the
Lord; our Temple is our parish church, in which the true Emmanuel
(God with us), He for whom the centuries longed, dwells and immolates
Himself for us.

Second Sunday of Advent 25

In olden times the neophytes used to sing this song during the pro-
cession of thanksgiving which each day during Easter Week led them
to the baptismal font. There had they received grace, truth, and divine
adoption. We also belong to the number of those fortunate ones. How
happy we shall be when we can enter our celestial home, the heavenly
Jerusalem whose streets re-echo with the cry of Alleluia!

OFFERTORY (Ps. 84: 7-8)

1. Deus tu convertens vivifica- 1. O God, turning, thou wilt
bis nos, 2. et plebs tua laetabitur in bring us life, 2. and thy people shall
ie: 3. ostende nobis, Domine, miseri- rejoice in thee: 3. show us, O Lord,
cordiam tuam, 4. et salutare tuum thy mercy, 4. and grant us thy sal-
da nobis. vation.

For a musician the change in the character of the melody at the
beginning of the third phrase over ostende with the resolved chord gb
bdb is obvious enough. Here and in the parallel sentence which follows
we have the expression of the great Advent petition contained in Psalm
84, which last Sunday formed the Alleluia- verse. And today it is the only
supplication found in the Mass chants. Hence it is well to leave the pre-
ceding vivificabis and laetabitur in their future forms; for this reason,
also, we have purposely selected the translation given above. God Him-
self will again turn to us and bestow new life upon us; He it is who in
the preceding Gospel Himself said: "The dead rise again." He alone can
produce such an effect. This is forcibly brought out by the melody over
tu. Nobis and da, as well as (vivificä)-bis and (lae)-tdbitur, have either
the same or a similar form of pressus. Care must be taken that these
forms are not sung too hurriedly; the bistrophas and tristrophas on c,
on the contrary, should be somewhat less prominent. Over (vivifi)-cäbis
the ascents gc and ad must not be overlooked. The second phrase re-
joices in the fact that we are allowed to be God's people (plebs tua), and
that He so graciously takes us under His protection. All chants of this
Sunday stress this joy, even more so than the chants of Gaudete
Sunday. God wishes to enrich us with sure and lasting joy; hence the
quiet seconds from (laetä)-bitur on. All this is not so much a supplication,
but rather a happy experiencing. With ostende begins the petition, borne
aloft by the joyous confidence of the first part. Tender half tones are
heard over misericordiam. In fact, it almost seems as if this feeling had
already influenced the close of Domine, so that the interval occurs five
times in all. Compare with it the beginning of the Introit for the second
Sunday after Easter, where the mercy of God is also expressed in half
tones, as well as the passage Domine, suavis ac mitis es from the Introit

26 Second Sunday of Advent

of the sixteenth Sunday after Pentecost with its semitones and minor
thirds. These supply the small stones in the material necessary for the
construction of an aesthetic of intervals in plain song,^ In accordance
with the rules for the adaptation of phrases, the beginning of et salutäre
(gc) is preceded by the low-pitched d e d. From et salutäre on, with its
introductory fourth and the fourth that follows it, the singer feels im-
pelled to present his petition in an especially pleading manner. To this
the pressus over tuum contributes considerably, and especially the de-
velopment over da, which is to be sung with a marked crescendo. In case
breath should not suffice, but only in that case, a brief pause may be
made after the low /, after which the ascent from the prolonged g should
be made slowly and prayerfully.

COMMUNION (Bar. 5: 5; 4: 36)

1. Jerusalem surge, et sta in 1. Arise, 0 Jerusalem, and

excelso: 2. et vide jucunditatem, stand on high: 2. and hehold the joy
quae veniet tibi a Deo tuo. that cometh to thee from thy God.

Subdued joy, the quiet happiness of Advent, inspires this melody.
It knows that the hopes of the soul are not in vain, that its expectation
will surely be fulfilled. It has not that bright ring which is characteristic
of the second mode for example in the second antiphon of Lauds at
Christmas, which sings of the virgin motherhood of Our Lady; gaudia
matris habens cum virginitdtis honore. But neither has it the seriousness
of the Offertory of the first Advent Sunday, which never dared to rise
above g. Here we have not that solemn jubilation with which the Grad-
ual-verse for Epiphany sings its Surge et illumindre; nevertheless, surge
of this Communion also penetrates deeply into the heart. Here we have
a major third. It is a cry harking back to the spirit of today's Introit.
Solemnly it continues — in accordance with the ancient annotated manu-
scripts, which give almost each note the broad form — "stand on high";
rise above your environment; despise what is earthly, as the Postcom-
munion puts it; view all things in their proper proportions. One thing
alone can fill your heart with bliss — the salvation which comes to you
from your God.

The Holy Communion which we receive lifts us to the heights of
the other world, where eternal happiness awaits us in the possession and
contemplation of God ( Kath. Kirchenzeitung, Salzburg, 1927, 441 J.

The serious explanation offered by Oberhammer (Im Lichte des
Christkinds, p. 28J hardly corresponds to the spirit of the melody. Ac-

1 N. Sch. 247 ff.

Third Sunday of Advent 27

cording to this commentator, the disciples return home to John and
relate to him what they have seen and heard; and in his prison in the
fortress Machairus, on the other side of the Dead Sea, John now rises
up and for the last time calls to his people: Jerusalem, surge. Otherwise
the same fate awaits you as that to which the depths of the Dead Sea
bear testimony.

The passage / efd fa g over (Jerüsa)-lem surge corresponds to d cec
ded over vide. Now the melody becomes livelier. The endings over (ex)-
celso and (jucundi)-tdtem, fg ed and fgfe, sound almost alike. Over veniet
tibi the melody shows the form of a melodic sequence. After the descent
over tibi, we meet a bright major chord over Deo. Finally, the words
Deo tuo should find an echo in our souls.

Jerusalem (thou ,0 Christian soul), "behold the joy that cometh to
thee" and listen intently to that which thy Saviour wishes to tell thee
*'to the joy of thy heart."

^ ^ ^ ^

THIRD SUNDAY OF ADVENT

INTROIT (Philipp. 4: 4, 6)

1. Gaudete in Domino semper; 1. Rejoice in the Lord always:

iterum dico, gaudete: 2. modestia again I say, rejoice: 2. let your

vestra nota sit omnibus hominibus: modesty be known to all men: S. for

3. Dominus prope est. Nihil sol- the Lord is nigh. Be nothing soli-

liciti sitis: 4. sed in omni oratione citous: 4. but in every thing, by

petitiones vestrae innotescant apud prayer let your petitions be made

Deum. Ps. Benedixisti, Domine, known unto God. Ps. Thou hast

terram tuam: * avertisti captivi- blessed thy land, O Lord: * thou

tatem Jacob. hast turned away the captivity of

Jacob.

Some Sundays of the liturgical year sum up their character and
spirit in the very first word of the Introit. Thus in today's Introit:
Gaudete — "Rejoice." The altars are decked with flowers as for a feast;
rose-colored vestments are used; we again hear the organ. What is the
meaning of all this? What kind of joy is to be expressed today? Some-
one has written (Feck, Das Missale als Betrachtungsbuch, I, 41): "The
second Sunday of Advent already voiced joyous tones ... On the present
Sunday joy is to sound forth unrestrained." But is that really the case?
He who lets the Introit Gaudete work upon him will think differently.
One will never come to a correct understanding of a liturgical text unlesss

28 Third Sunday of Advent

one views it in conjunction with the melody which proceeds from its
inmost spirit. The praying and singing of plainsong, and therefore of
the liturgy in general, express more shades of meaning and a richer
gradation of feeling than is generally recognized. Advent and Christmas
joy, for instance, differ greatly from the exultation of Easter time.
There, indeed, one may speak of full-voiced rejoicing. The Introit Lae-
täre, with its extended intervals, already acclaims the victorious King
who soon will enter in the fullness of His strength. But the Introit Gau-
dete with its initial seconds and minor thirds has in mind the beautiful
Babe of Bethlehem who "is near at hand," who out of pure love for us
appeared in utter poverty and took on the weakness of an infant, though
He is infinitely rich and mighty. The joy in this song, therefore, sinks
into the heart slowly, sweetly, like gentle dew from heaven. The sim-
plicity which the second phrase voices is already indicated by the mel-
ody of the first phrase.

The phrase Dominus prope est occupies the central position in the
piece, dominating the whole more by its florid neums than by its pitch.
Since the Lord is nigh, we are exhorted to be: (1) joyous, (2) modest
and friendly, (3) without solicitude, (4) persevering in confiding prayer
— a veritable Advent program; a program, in fact, for the whole of life,
including in itself our relations to God and to our fellowmen, and placing
everything on the golden basis of true joy of heart.

It is surprising that the melody never employs the note b, which
generally characterizes the Doric mode; the repeated 6b tends to make
the melody tender and mild. The first and fourth phrases have almost
the same close, but a different range. A pause on the dominant of the
mode is made by the first three phrases. The first phrase may be taken
as a model of phrase structure in chant: an ascent from the tonic to the
dominant, a halting on the dominant, then a descent to the tonic. Each
of its members moves within a different tetrachord: c-f, /-bb, d-g. The
continuous growth of the melody in the first half of the verse portrays
gradations of feeling: Rejoice; then more: Rejoice in the Lord; then still
more: Rejoice at all times. Here a crescendo is obviously demanded.
What follows is somewhat surprising. Where we would sing iterum dico
quietly, to give that feeling of expectation, and then gaudete very em-
phatically, choral by its simple return to the tonic tells us: Let your
Christmas joy be interior, heartfelt!

The ancients called for ascensiones pudicas in the melodic line: a
modest, chaste rising upward. This is satisfied in the second phrase. There
is some resemblance to Domino semper; but here the melody does not
reach high ob by means of a thrid, but with ascending seconds. The pro-
longation of the dominant a over omnibus ho-(minibus) and the exten-

Third Sunday of Advent 29

sion of / over petitiones in the fourth phrase, according to some, portray
the immense multitude of men, or perhaps their petitions. Then, all
aglow with light, comes Dominus prope est. A hidden urge must character-
ize the three porrectus; a note of joyful victory should resound in Nihil
solliciti sitis. Here we find practically the same cadence as over fho)-
minihus.

Solemnity and impressiveness should mark the last phrase. Its low
pitch and its emphasis on the dominant / puts it in marked contrast to
the preceding. Oratione alone seems to indicate that prayer is a lifting
of the entire being to God. Sed in omni and innotescant are similar. The
pressus over omni effectively accents the thought that our prayer must
be fervent. In free translation one might expand this to: everything in
our lives should be transformed into prayer.

The psalm-verse stands out prominently, especially because several
times it extends to high c, while the antiphon never went above hb.

Revue, 20, 12 ff., Analyses, 2, 22 ff., N. Sah. 211 f.

GRADUAL (Ps. 79:2, 3, 2)

1. Qui sedes, Domine, super 1. Thou, O Lord, that sittest

Cherubim, 2. excita potentiam, tuam upon the Cherubim, 2. stir up thy
etveni. S^. 1. Qui regis Israel, inten- might, and come. jil. 1. Give ear, O
de: 2. qui deducisvelutovem Joseph. thou that rulest Israel: 2. thou that

leadest Joseph like a sheep.

Gradual-responsories in general present many difficulties, and this
is especially true of today's. It does not at all develop the way we should
expect. We should undoubtedly have stressed the second phrase in the
corpus, but we find it, in relation to the first, quite in the background.
It supports itself on the tonic, not at all in the manner of the authentic
mode, and even sinks below it four times. The descending fifth a-d over
tuam acts as an antithesis to the high fifth over super. The second half
of the second phrase is a more gratifying melody to sing than the first.
Does the low-pitched melodic line perhaps aim at portraying the mys-
terious coming of God and His activity?

Perhaps the composer could not resist the temptation of showing,
in tone-painting with the high super, how far God surpasses the Cheru-
bim. Rightly does Wagner (III, 300) say: "Here the details are detri-
mental to the harmonic coherence of the single parts, thereby detracting
from the artistic value of the whole. Such passagse, however, are excep-
tional." Some other pieces also show a predilection for tone-painting,
much to the detriment of the leading thought; for example the Alleluia
for the feast of St. Agnes. Here the confusion of voices at the announce-

30 Third Sunday of Advent

ment of the coming of the bridegroom is realistically indicated, but the
leading idea: "Go ye forth to meet Christ the Lord," suffers thereby.
The Communion Quinque prudentes Virgines, on the contrary, brings it
into prominence in a most captivating manner. The antiphon on the
feast of the Transfiguration portrays the Lord's going up to the summit
of a hill, but the Transfiguration itself is given less attention. On the
feast of the Ascension the Magnificat antiphon for second Vespers draws,
a picture of Christ's ascent; the accompnaying petition, however: "Leave
us not orphans," which is less developed melodically, deserves more fer-
vent expression. St. Peter's, where the liturgy is celebrated today, per-
haps suggested tone-painting. There, gleaming from the mosaic above
the altar, was a representation of the Lord ruling from His heavenly
throne. Still, the composer may not have intended this as tone-painting
so much as a development of the thought that God thrones above the
Cherubim in absolute quiet, transcending all change and transitoriness,,
perfectly happy in Himself, needing nothing to add to His bliss. If we,
notwithstanding His august majesty, are the recipients of untold favors
at His hands, that but makes His goodness appear all the more brilliant
before our eyes.

Owing to its abundance of melismas, the verse predominates over the
corpus, although it has the same range. Its first phrase is the arsis, the
rising, and closes on the dominant; its second phrase is the thesis, the
relaxation, or rest, and closes on the tonic. In the verse we should have
stressed the word intende, as it is done, for instance, in the Gradual for
the vigil of Christmas. The technique of Gradual- verses, however, calls
for a florid melisma at the beginning. Today we have time to consider
how God led His people, how long they wandered in the desert until they
finally reached the Promised Land. The same florid melisma stands at
the beginning of the verse on the twenty-third Sunday after Pentecost.
Similarly prolonged passages occur in the Gradual for Wednesday after
the third Sunday of Lent. The bending upward of the last note of a
group is peculiar to the melisma over regis: dcbga, hagagfg, dcdfg,

dedchcdd. A feeling of relaxation is introduced by the clivis over

intende, though not yet a feeling of perfect rest. The melody over (de)~
ducis merely repeats what was sung toward the end of the first member
of regis.

ALLELUIA VERSE

1. Excita, Domine, poteniiam 1. Stir up thy might, 0 Lord^

tuam, 2. et veni, 3. ut salvos facias 2. and come, 3. that thou mayest
nos. save us.

Third Sunday of Advent 31

The initial motive of Allehiia (cf. Caecilia, 29, 69 ff.) is heard again
over Domine. In the latter case, however, the high a is strengthened by
a pressus. The second motive over Alleluia is actually repeated four times

in the juhilus in a motivated elaboration: äb\?aggf, dbbagge, gag
f €> f 9 f f e, but with pleasing wave-like variations, fully corresponding
to the great desire of the singer's heart. Over (poten)-tiam tuam the last
groups are to be sung as two measures in two-fourths time : a f e d e g
f d d. The second member must not be sung too rapidly; the first notes
of each clivis (a, g, f) should be taken more broadly. By its mora vocis on
g, veni is admirably divided. Thus we have the proportions ah g e g (g)
and dhfdff with their continuation. The avoidance of h gives the piece
a tender, devout ring.

This melody is employed in several Masses; keeping within the limits
of this book, we might, besides this Sunday, mention also the second
Sunday after Epiphany, Ascension Day, and Pentecost. The Alleluia
for the feast of Holy Innocents, which has been borrowed from the Sa-
turday of Easter Week, has a similar verse. Several reasons support the
contention that originally the melody belonged to the first Alleluia-verse
of Pentecost. At Milan a similar melody has since early times accomp-
anied the text Emitte Spiritum. One might also adduce a certain ancient
Greek melody for comparisou {Musica s., 44, 194).

The present verse with its fervent Advent petition which, incidental-
ly, formed the first part of the Collect of the first Sunday of Advent, re-
sembles most closely the suppliant character of the verse on Pentecost
Sunday. A kind of daring, added to a deep faith, breathes from this
supplication. Though it does not express the anxiety, akin to despon-
dency, which seized the disciples when the Lord slept during that storm
on the lake, it does state, with unmistakable conviction, that there is
only One who can bring salvation and redemption: the Lord God with
His all-powerful love.

OFFERTORY (Ps. 85:2)

1. Benedixisti, Domine, terram 1. Thou hast blessed thy land,

tuam: 2. avertisti captivitatem Ja- O Lord: 2. thou hast turned away the

cob: 3. remisisti iniquitatem plebis captivity of Jacob: 3. thou hast for -

tuae. given the iniquity of thy people.

In the Gospel John the Baptist could announce that the Messias
stood in the midst of His people. For faithful souls this was a message
of great joy; now indeed God had sent His richest blessings upon this
earth. The first phrase (Benedixisti) forms the theme of the Offertory;
the two subsequent phrases but develop it. Gradually the melody grows:

32 Third Sunday of Advent

Benedixisti has as range d-a; Domine, e-b; terram, d~c. The pressus mo-
tive runs through this phrase; in the first word: g a g f f d, in the third

word: c g f f d and f g f f d. It even goes over to the second phrase; over

the second word we have a c a a f, and over the third, a c a a g. The

emphasis of the dominant a in the second phrase is no dout justified.
If in Offertories we rarely find purely syllabic passages, in which each
syllable carries but one note, it is still more rare to see passages which
have the same note for a considerable length of time. Since we find a
similar construction in the Introit for the twenty-third Sunday after
Pentecost, and there, too, over the word captivitdtem, we may well con-
sider it a reference to the depressing fears and anxieties of captivity, to
the bitter lot of a slave. But now all that affliction is gone. The hour has
struck; sure and perfect liberty is come. For the soul has been freed from
her load of sin, from the slavery of the passions; henceforth she is a child
of God, and His peace will accompany her always. The follwoing verse
therefore, goes on to say: "Thou hast covered all their sins: thou hast
mitigated (mitigdsti) all thy anger." Nevertheless, this Offertory does
not forget that it still is an Advent petition. That this blessing may flow
upon all men, it continues to pray: "Show us, O Lord, Thy mercy; and
grant us Thy salvation." Our prayer is soon answered: the victim offered
upon the altar will become for us the bread of eternal life, the font of joy
unalloyed. It elevates us spiritually, transforms us to pure men, living
in and with God. When the bell rings at the elevation, God again shows
His merciful love; and in Holy Communion He grants us His salvation.
With artistic finesse the composer has succeeded in presenting the
motive of the second phrase and the entire melodic line, in fact, in a more
brilliant form in the third phrase. One need but compare the two phrases:

avertisti: dg a g a bb a and

remisisti: dgg a b a g a b c; furthermore,

captivitdtem Jacob: a a a a a c da f gag and

iniquitdtem plebis: c c b a cdc b g d g a g f

Thus remisisti becomes the song of a soul that fully appreciates the
dealings of God with her, who knows Him who stands in her midst,
who gratefully acknowledges that this is "the freedom wherewith Christ
has made us free."

COMMUNION (Isa. 35: 4)

1. Dicite: Pusillanimes confor- 1, Say: Ye faint-hearted, take

tamini, et nolite timere: 2. ecce Deus courage, and fear not: 2. behold, our
noster veniet, et salvabit nos. God will come and save us.

Third Sunday of Advent 33

A mere glance at the melodic construction tells us that we are here
treating of something out of the ordinary. If we first carefully recite the
text alone and then sing the melody with it, we shall discover that the
melody is not only a fine garment for the text, but that the text and
melody form one whole, an entity as closely united as our intellect and
will and feeling.

The song begins quitely, but soon with jubilant upward flight it
strives to banish from the soul all fear and solicitude, tries to lift it above
all things mundane and carry it up to that new world in which the angels
sing a new canticle of peace and redemption. On Christmas night we shall
hear them saying to the shepherds: Nolite timere — "Fear not; for be-
hold, I bring you good tidings of great joy. . .This day is born to you a
Saviour" (salvabit). Hence this Communion, in a way, introduces the
feast of Christmas, just as in Matins for Gaudete Sunday the Invita-
tory ran: Prope est jam Dominus — "Already the Lord is nigh." With all
its jubilation, however, the melody follows a definite plan: confortdmini,
resting on the dominant of the mode, divides the first phrase into two
halves. Timere repeats the motive of nolite, and then closes a third lower,
paralleling the final neums of (confortämi)-ni. These are formulas ex-
pressive of calm, but at the same time they advance the melodic thought.
Now comes the joyful news: ecce, solemn and resolute, as one antiphon
has it: veniens veniet — "He will surely come." Here the melody in a way
makes a conclusion on the tonic; but it adds another very significant
thought, and introduces it with a major second below the tonic and the
F-major chord built on that note: "Behold, this God will be your Sa-
viour."

What a magnificent ring the song must have had in the ancient
basilicas, when the faithful, accompanied by this stirring melody, went
up to the altar to receive the Holy Euchraist! Into him who approached,
it instilled courage, for it said: nolite timere. And to him who was return-
ing from the altar it whispered: ecce Deus noster: He has come to you to
free you from everything that hampers you, to heal you of every weak-
ness, to make you cheerful and brave in your work, in your sufferings,
in your vocation. For how many, likewise, was Holy Communion the
source of supernatural strength (confortdmini), the Viaticum for martyr-
dom!

The song begins with dicite: a command to us singers. We are the
privileged ones to bring this joyous message into the hearts of the faith-
ful. Those who are bowed down, who scarcely dare to keep on hoping,
those we can now console: Behold, God wishes to be also your Saviour;
in your soul, too, there should be a Christmas.

34 Fourth Sunday of Advent

FOURTH SUNDAY OF ADVENT

INTROIT (Is. 45: 8)

1. Rorate caeli desuper, et nuhes 1. Drop down dew, ye heavens,

pluant justum: 2. aperiatur terra, from above, and let the clouds rain

et germinet Salvatorem. Ps. Caeli the just: 2. let the earth he opened

enarrant gloriam Dei: * et opera and hud forth a Saviour. Ps. The

manuum ejus annuntiat firma- heavens show forth the glory of God:

mentum. * and the firmament declareth the

work of his hands.

Perhaps the word caeli, or the word desuper, which in late Latin
was accented on the second syllable, necessitated the high pitch of the
first half of the first phrase, just as terra influenced the low pitch of the
second phrase (Wagner, III, 300). Be that as it may, the chant is not a
description of the dew descending from heaven. The melody has a quite
different intent. It has more sublime things to tell: it is the expression of
a heart full of ardent desires, of intense longing; it would pierce the bleak
lowering skies of December; it would take from thence Him for whom it
yearns; it would bring the Just One down to this wicked, sinful, guilty
world. The soul's emotions are expressed by the large intervals: Rorate
has an ascending fifth; between desuper and et we have a descending
fifth; between nuhes and pluant occurs an ascending interval of a fourth.
They are further manifested in the rapidly soaring melody and the
powerful accents over caeli, a c c a a g, and (nu)-hes pluant ju-(stum),

g cc a a gf agf f.

Isaias, from whom these words have been culled, first of all cries
for a liberator of the Israelites from their exile and slavery; Cyrus, whom
he has seen in vision, is but a figure of the Saviour of all mankind. All
the yearnings of the centuries have been compressed into this Introit.

What would this earth be without the Messias? A desert, an un-
charted and arid waste scorched by the sun, having not one little flower
^r blade of grass. If new life is to spring forth, the ground must be cul-
tivated, the clouds must send down their rain, the fructifying rain which
is so valuable that the Portuguese say of the summer showers: "Gold
pieces are now falling from heaven." Oh, that it might come, this rain,
to penetrate into the hearts of men and awaken new life! Would that
the clouds might have mercy! For the Israelites the concept of cloud was
full of deep meaning: in the column of cloud God led His people through
the desert; veiled by clouds He manifested Himself on Sinai; in a cloud
the glory of the Most High descended upon the Temple which Solomon

Fourth Sunday of Advent 35

had built. Clouds are the symbol and the containers of life-giving rain,
as well as of the grace of redemption which comes down to us from the
heights of heaven, and of all the benefits and glories of the new kingdom
of the Messias. When these clouds open, new life will bud forth (germinet)
about Nazareth, a life of unusual beauty, rich in blossoms and fruits.

The second phrase of the melody is more quiet. We hear the motive
of terra repeated over (germi)-net. If we take the / on the first syllable of
the first word as an upbeat, measured groups of two notes result. Con-
trast is effected by the three-note groups in the second part of this phrase.
Since it is well to make a pause for breathing after germinet, we have
up to that point three groups of three notes and afterwards two more
over Salvatorem — a symbol of energetic sprouting and blossoming. The
group ah e g over aperiatur corresponds to d e f c over Salvatorem.

We implore the descent of the Just One from heaven. But His jus-
tice will not make His countenance the less benevolent, nor His eyes the
less loving. He comes not to reproach, not to drive sin-laden man away
in confusion; He comes as the Saviour, calling to Himself all who are
weary or burdened.

Already a child of this earth is bearing the Just One in her virginal
womb. From her will go forth the most beautiful flower (germinet) that
ever our earth has produced, the rose of sweetest odor. This earth will
not be opened, for it will be from an intact virginal womb that the
flower will proceed.

Upon his cry Rordte the prophet Isaias immediately received an an-
swer from God: "I, the Lord, have created Him," that is, the Redeemer
and Saviour. Our petition is answered in the psalm- verse: "The heavens
show forth the glory of God." Already at the Annunciation the heavenly
messenger spoke his Ave, gratia plena; soon heavenly messengers will de-
scend in mighty array to sing their Gloria to the Most High and to an-
nounce peace to mankind.

The ancient manuscripts assign today's entire Mass, with the ex-
ception of the Offertory and Alleluia, to Wednesday in the Ember Week
of Advent. Formerly the grave Introit Memento nostri was sung on the
present Sunday.

Revue, 20, 79 ff.; Analyses, II, 30 ff.; R. gr., 3, 145 ff.; Musica s.,
44, 214 f.

GRADUAL (Ps. 144: 18, 21)

1. Prope est Dominus omnibus 1. The Lord is nigh unto all

invocantihus eum: 2. omnibus qui them that call upon him: 2. to all
inovcant eum in veritate. ^. 1. Lau- that call upon him in truth. ^. 1.

36 Fourth Sunday of Advent

dem Domini loquetur os meum: 2. My mouth shall speak the praise of
et benedicat omnis caro nomen the Lord: 2. and let all flesh bless
sanctum ejus. his holy name.

The corpus of the Gradual supports itself on the tonic / and several
times descends below it. We find, however, that the closing words of
either phrase, eum and -te, have a higher pitch and a more florid melody.
Leaving these two passages out of consideration, we must ascribe the
piece to the sixth mode. The melodies over the double eum match quite
well: cbdcggfggf and fgefddcddc. The verse is markedly differ-
ent. Its lowest note is the tonic /, below which it never descends; its do-
minant is c, above which the melody soars several times to high /. We
here have an authentic mode, beyond all doubt. Hence this Gradual,
with the sixth mode in its corpus and the fifth mode in its verse, may well
be placed beside that of the first Sunday of Advent, where the corpus
and the verse exhibit first the second and then the first mode. The re-
peated accentuation of the c on Domini gives the impression that it is
trying to resist the descent of the melody, but unsuccessfully. The melody
passes down to a, g and toward/. But as if to reassert itself, the c prompt-
ly sets in a fifth higher, and then the melody swings above it. The close
over (e)-jus corresponds to that of the corpus of the Gradual. .

"The Lord is nigh." How consoling! That for which we hoped and
prayed so fervently is really coming true. He will come to us with all
His love. To all who pray to Him in truth He will reveal Himself and will
fulfill His word: "Even before ye call upon Me, behold, I am here." But
our prayer must be in truth; and our supplication must be straight-
forward, candid. Is my singing and praying all that it should be? Is it
true, sincere? So I unreservedly place all the powers of my soul, my
whole heart, in the service of God? How well today's Epistle stresses
the fact that when the Lord comes, He will disperse the darkness and
will draw all hidden things into the light!

The Lord's coming in the near future should evoke from us a song
of praise and thanksgiving. Would that we had a better appreciation of
Him and of the immense love that prompted Him to come down to this
earth! How the mere thought of His coming would then inspire us! The
Psalmist says: benedicat omnis caro — all mankind, the whole earth, ought
to join in this song of praise. But what is actually the case? Many do
not know that this is the time of Advent, that Christmas is at hand,
that the Christchild stands at the entrance of their hearts. Many do not
even want to know that today is Sunday; they do not want to come to
church. And of those who do come some intend merely to beg for this
favor or that; they seem to know almost nothing of praise or of thanks-

Fourth Sunday of Advent 37

giving. All this should fire our zeal, should make this song of praise as-
cend from our inmost hearts, to help verify the closing thought of to-
day's Epistle: "Then shall every man have praise from God."

ALLELUIA VERSE

1. Veni, Domine, et noli tar- 1. Come, O Lord, and do not de-

dare: 2. relaxa facinora plebis tuae. lay: 2. forgive the sins of thy people.

Today's Alleluia begins like that of the Sunday after Epiphany.
The jubilus has the form a a b. Its first member is formed from gab
c c dh oi Alleluia. The relation of Alleluia to its verse is not readily ap-
parent. We find the florid closing melisma of the verse in all its length
at the close of many a verse in Gradual-responsories of the first mode.
(Cf. All Saints, the twenty-second Sunday after Pentecost, or Domine
praevenisti in the Common of Abbots.) But here in the Alleluia after
ffecis inserted g g f g a, which is wanting in the previous melodies. Not

only the close but the entire verse bears the impress of a piece of the
first mode with its continued h. According to the present notation, the
Alleluia belongs to the third mode, the verse to the first. Originally the
verse closed on e. And since the melody goes a full tone over e (now d e
d), it ran e fi^ e; thus the entire piece was sung with /#, so that the verse
began with d e f^ gg ga. The melody not only had a frequent /#, but in
the passage over et which now runs / a & c it also had c#. In order to
write the /?? on lines according to the rules of the ancient notation it
was necessary here, as in many other selections, to transpose the entire
piece a fourth higher; then the piece began with g ab c d and closed with
aba, as, in fact, many of the early sources actually give it. Thus the en-
tire piece could be written in the customary way, except for the passage
over et, which even in the transposition retained an /# (the original c#) .
A second transposition of a fourth made it possible also to write this
note; then the piece began with c d e f g and the passage in question be-
came f a b c, the melody remaining intact. But now its relation to the
Alleluia had been changed. Formerly closing with the same note as the
Alleluia, on e (or a fourth higher on a), the verse now closed on d and the
Alleluia on e. If originally, from a purely melodic standpoint (even if
not theoretically), e f^ e was sung, and afterwards Alleluia with e f e
was added, this should not seem strange. Similar combinations can be
found elsewhere in plain song. Thus in the Introit for the fourteenth
Sunday after Pentecost the first phrase ends with agababha, while
the second begins with a g ah a a. With the present notation of Alleluia
and verse a distinctive melodic finesse was lost. After the somewhat

38 Fourth Sunday of Advent

harsh ending on e /# e, Alleluia in the repetition entered gently and ten-
derly with e e f d.

It is much simpler, of course, to say that Alleluia belongs to the
third mode and the verse to the first.

These theoretical considerations should not cause us to overlook
the delicately sensitive melody of the verse, so full of fervent Advent
petitions and confiding trust. One cannot but join in with all one's
heart.

Using seconds only, the beginning of Veni seems almost timorous;
et has the first interval of a third. The treatment of the motives c d e f
then f g ah\>, and finally f ab c is obvious enough. As the motives develop,
the expression must likewise grow and expand. Then the melody rises a
fourth and soars above the previous melodic line over tarddre: "O Lord,
for a long time now Thy people await Thee; leave us no longer in our
darkness and impotence! Lord, do not delay!" It cannot be mere chance
that only in this passage and only in this Alleluia-verse the melody ex-
hibits such tenderness. On the twentieth Sunday after Pentecost and in
the verse Adducentur from the Mass Loquehar for a Virgin Martyr, which
employs the same melody, this expansion is not found. It seems quite
certain, nevertheless, that the verse Paratum cor meum for the twen-
tieth Sunday after Pentecost must be regarded as the original compo-
sition. There also the second paratum with its increase is marvelously
effective. The excessively florid melisma found here over facinora is
there placed over gloria: "I will sing, and will give praise to Thee, my
glory." The singer, so the indication seems to be, cannot find sufficient
outlet for his feelings. Whoever wants to resort to note-counting here
has a real task. Nevertheless, two groups are quite easily distinguished.
The one repeats the same motive thrice, but each time with a slightly
different introduction ; the other extends its motive, especially toward
the end. Since the word gloria frequently means "harp" in the psalms,
one might also translate here: "I will play to Thee upon my many-
stringed harp." Even if we did not know of the Alleluia for the twentieth
Sunday after Pentecost, and that God is there lauded as our glory and
our pride, the melody in itself would here not speak to us of the burden
of sin, for it sounds more like the thanksgiving song of one from whose
soul a great weight has been lifted.

We hear this melody likewise on the feast of St. John Damascene.

Revue, 6, 33 ff.. Rev. gr., 3, 122 ff.; Wagner, III, 402.

OFFERTORY (Luke 1 : 28)

1. Ave Maria, 2. gratia plena, 1. Hail, Mary, 2. full of grace,

3. Dominus tecum: 4. benedicta tu 3. the Lord is with thee: 4. blessed

Fourth Sunday of Advent 39

in mulieribus, et benedictus fructus art thou among women, and blessed
ventris tui. is the fruit of thy womb.

This Ave Maria belongs to the most beautiful creations of plain
song. Here we have reverence and wonderment, tenderness, astonish-
ment, and love. The melody sinks into the deep with gratia, tecum,
fructus; then it rises slowly with Ave, gratia, ventris; again it floats on
high with Maria. It grows more ardent (benedicta tu); then it expresses
profound emotion and humble obeisance, while over all the song there
hovers an ineffably sweet joy. Thus the Archangel Gabriel may have
prayed the first Ave Maria; perhaps in his mind's eye he looked into the
coming centuries, and perceived in millions of human hearts what Mary
would mean to them, what blessings and what happiness the most
blessed among women would bring upon this earth. No one can portray
this adequately, but we get an inkling of it if we let the present melody
penetrate into our hearts.

Over Ave the passage f a f g f e is soon followed by the very similar
f a f g a g. After the upbeat over the first note of Maria, the grouping
of the neums here given suggests a division into two-note groups: a cc
cc\ cagf\ gaca\ fgg; this, though serene in effect, resembles a trembling
with holy joy. The two bistrophas, naturally, are to be sung with a very
light swing. Plena is made prominent by its pressus, the first in this
piece. We do not find the passage Dominus tecum in the early manu-
scripts; its melody is found in the Offertory- verses Posuisti and Ange-
lus over the words gloria and stetit respectively (cf. Monday in Easter
Week). With some variations, this tyle of singing the verses was adapted
to the text of the Offertory Bedta es, which is now sung on September 8
and on some other feasts. Here the melody occurs over the word vir go.
The second member is a repetition of the first. The brilliant phrase bene-
dicta is characterized by its high pitch and by repeated and impressive
accents: c d e e-c d d c-c d ä a g-g 6 cb; then by the fourths d-a, g-c, a-d.

These accents are still active in the last phrase: fgdag, gaffe, and
g a_a gg.

We may not omit Mary, the Virgin Mother of God, from the litur-
gy of Advent. On the first Sunday of Advent we were led to her greatest
shrine in Rome: Saint Mary Major. The vigil of Christmas will most
appropriately find us there again, and in the Missal, heading the Mid-
night Mass, we find these words: "Station at Saint Mary Major, at the
Crib." Almost every day during this season the second Collect is that of
the Blessed Virgin. In the Divine Office for this time one finds many a
delicate and charming allusion to her exalted dignity. And the closer
we come to the feast of Christmas, the more frequently the chants of

40 Fourth Sunday of Advent

the Mass mention her. Thus today we sing to her the Ave Maria. How
marvelously it scintillates in the light of Advent! This blessed one is
bearing in her womb the Child that is God: Dominus tecum. Just as mo-
ther and child form a unity, so the Son of God has become one with Mary.
He is with her, in her, belongs to her, although He is the Lord whom she
adores. But she wishes to present Him to us for the salvation of the world.
Therefore do we call thee blessed, O glorious Virgin. Deborah and Ju-
dith were praised for delivering their people from dire distress; but
thou hast turned mankind's curse into a blessing, and from thee flow
streams of grace which shall carry us into a blissful eternity. Ave Marial

COMMUNION (Isa. 7: 14)

1. Ecce vir go concipiet, et pariet 1. Behold a Virgin shall con-

filium: 2. et vocabitur nomen ejus ceive, and bring forth a son, 2. and
Emmanuel. his name shall be called Emmanuel.

This Communion has the same mode as that of the first Sunday of
Advent, the same range, the same divisions, an arsis-movement in the
first phrase resting on the dominant, then a thesis-movement in the
second phrase. Both over benignitatem and pariet the pentatony, the use
of a five-step scale with no semitones, is noticeable. But if we listen
carefully, we find that the two Communions express quite different
feelings. The Communion Dominus breathes quiet confidence; hence
the preference for seconds and thirds. There are, indeed, two intervals
of fourths, but these occur in a low pitch, and the first one is not unex-
pected, since it returns to the / which occurred five times in the pre-
ceding word. Not so with the Communion Ecce virgo. This has descending
fourths over virgo, g~d, and a fourth higher over pä-(riet), d-a; then as-
cending fourths over et vo-(cdbitur), g c c. They are the expression of
great astonishment over the marvel of the Incarnation wrought in the
most pure womb of Mary. Behold, a virgin shall conceive: thus might
we recite this passage; but there is even greater wonder: this virgin will
become a mother and yet remain a virgin: et pariet f ilium. After this great
upward sweep we meet brighter and more tender notes over et vocabitur.
At Emmanuel the melody is all reverence and amazement. O Wonder
beyond human comprehension! The angel said to Mary: "The Lord is
with Thee." We may now say: "The Lord is with us." And in His Name
lies our guarantee of salvation and eternal peace and the inalienable
possession of God.

When we receive the Saviour in Holy Communion our heart should
be pure, virgin pure, like to the heart of the Mother of God. Then truly
can we "put on the Lord Jesus," and make His thoughts and feelings,

Vigil of the Nativity 41

His prayers and actions our own, so that that which beams forth in our
souls through faith will, as the Collect for the second Mass of Christ-
mas puts it, be reflected in our deeds.
Rass. gr., 7, col. 41 f.

VIGIL OF THE NATIVITY

INTROIT (Ex. 16: 6, 7)

1. Hodie scietis, quia veniet 1. This day you shall know that

Dominus, et salvabit nos: 2. et the Lord will come, and save us: 2.

mane videbitis gloriam ejus. Ps. and in the morning you shall see his

Domini est terra et plentitudo ejus: glory. Ps. The earth is the Lord's

* orhis terrarum, et universi qui and the fulness thereof: * the world

habitant in eo. and all they that dwell therein.

With these words Moses announced to the people of Israel the man-
na from heaven during the journey through the desert. With these same
words Mother Church heralds the true Manna, the Bread of Life, Jesus
Christ, who is born at Bethlehem, the "house of bread" (Schott, Mess-
buch.)

The opening melody is arresting: it challenges our attention, for it
augurs much. How will it be proclaimed, the message there so solemnly
introduced? It is a message of mightiest import, spirit-stirring, enrap-
turing, than which nothing greater can be uttered: The Lord is coming
as Redeemer; tomorrow He will come. The full meaning of the word
Dominus is explained by the Apostle in today's Lesson: the Lord comes
as man, born of the tribe of David. But He is also God, eternal God, of
the same essence as the Father. This God-man comes to redeem us. In
spite of His humble condition, however, the spirit of holiness dwells
within Him, and this leads Him in the end to the great wonder of His
resurrection. The Lord is coming as Redeemer; tomorrow He will come.
Tomorrow, after thousands of years of yearning and waiting; tomorrow,
only a short while to wait, and the hour of deliverance will strike; to-
morrow, and the glory will be revealed of Him whose rule extends over
all the earth, as the psalm-verse says, and over all the inhabitants
thereof.

And the melody? It is of the simplest style, foregoing all attempts
at melismatic grouping. After the portentous introduction, it ranges
itself unpretentiously around the tonic of the sixth mode, nor presuming
to go more than a single tone above it, but several times sinking a fourth

42 Vigii of the Nativity

below it. And the significant mane ("tomorrow") only repeats what has
already been sung over et salvähit. There are only allusions; nothing is
definitely stated. The singer seems almost to regret that he spread his
sails so broadly at the outset, for now he reefs them again. He fears that
he has already divulged too much of that which is to be expected on the
morrow. He lets fall the veil which he had scarce begun to lift. Even the
enticing initial motive of the piece, once we have heard the psalm- verse,
proves to be nothing else than a fine resume of the middle cadence:
(ple)-nitüdo ejus = g h[? a g f. Thus the melody would have us be recol-
lected, meditative; it wishes to give us but an anticipatory taste of the
mystery of the Holy Night.

GRADUAL (Ex. 16:6, 7)

1. Hodie scietis, quia veniet 1. This day you shall know

Dominus, 2. et salvabit nos: et that the Lord will come, 2. and save

mane videhitis 4. gloriam ejus t^. us: 2. and in the morning you shall

1. Qui regis Israel, intende 2. qui see, 4. his glory, jl. 1. Give ear, O

deducis velut ovem Joseph. 3. qui thou that rulest Israel: 2. Thou that

sedes super Cherubim, appare. 4. leadest Joseph like a sheep; 3. thou

coram Ephraim, Benjamin, et Man- that sittest upon the Cherubim,

asse. shine forth, 4. before Ephraim,

Benjamin, and Manasses.

The corpus of the Gradual has the same text as the Introit; in its
first half, the verse has the same words as the Gradual-verse for the third
Sunday of Advent. The melody confines itself to the limits which have
become characteristic of Graduals in the second mode, but, like the
Gradual for the Midnight Mass, it exhibits some forms of its own. Sev-
eral passages of both the corpus and the verse repeat the same melismas.
Compare:

Et salvabit nos : et mane videbitis =

qui sedes super Cherubim, appare.

This last group also serves as a setting for coram Ephraim. More-
over, gloriam ejus = Benjamin et Manäs-(se). The phrasing which so well
separates hodie and mane in the Introit is not so successful here. After
Dominus a large pause is marked which, although melodically justifi-
able, joins et salvabit which actually belongs to the first phrase, to the
second. The verse is taken from the psalms, the text of the corpus from
Exodus. But there is a close relationship between the two. In the corpus
God shows in a special manner how He cared for His people, how, as a
good shepherd. He led them into verdant pastures. Then for the last
time comes the fervent petition: intende and appare.

Vigil of the Nativity 43

The luminous cloud of the Lord's glory rested over the Cherubim
of the Ark of the Covenant, and by night it lighted up the path for the
tribes of Israel who were wending their way across the desert. The twelve
tribes were grouped about the Ark in a square, three to either side, three
in front and three in the rear. Now, when the luminous cloud rose, it
appeared to'the eyes of those who marched behind the Ark, namely, to
Ephraim, Benjamin, and Manasses (Betende Kirche, p. 286J.

We may, if we wish, link the thought of the second half of the verse
with the preceding Collect: "Grant that we, who now joyfully receive
Thine only-begotten Son as our Redeemer, may also, without fear, be-
hold Him coming as our Judge." The Lord will come again, sitting upon
the Cherubim, all the angels forming His train. Then all the tribes of
Israel, all mankind, must appear before Him, to hear from His mouth
judgement irrevocable. Let us pray to Him today: "Lord, be Thou not
to me a Judge, but a Saviour."

ALLELUIA VERSE

1. Crastina die delehitur ini- 1. Tomorrow shall the iniquity

quitas terrae: 2. et regnahit super of the earth be abolished: 2. and the
nos Salvator mundi. Saviour of the world shall reign

over us.

The Saviour is coming as our Redeemer; the Alleluia again stresses
this thought. King He will also be, not to impose burdens, but to relieve
us of them. The King will likewise be the Lamb of God, to discharge
that immense debt which has pressed upon the world ever since Adam's
fall. He who will presently be laid in a rough manger will reign from the
Cross. That is why the mystery which we are about to celebrate makes
us "breathe anew," as the Postcommunion says.

In the most ancient manuscripts this melody is assigned to the Mass
for the feast of the Holy Trinity (q.v.). With the same text as on that
feast we also hear it sung on the Saturday of Whitsun Week, and with
a different text on the feast of the Apostles Philip and James (May 1).

In the first member of the jubilus, dbg over -luia becomes a c b g,
in the second member b deb a g and acb dg. Much like it is the develop-
ment of the verse. Over delebitur, g c c of Crastina becomes g d d; and at
the end of the first phrase the melody again rises to high d. The first
members of the first and second phrases correspond, and confine them-
selves to the tetrachord g-c. Over (inlqui)-tas we also meet the de-
scending motive c b ä g g.

Let us sing this song with the ardor it deserves. If on Good Friday
the Jews will cry: "We do not want this man to rule over us!" we shall

44 Vigil of the Nativity

today already register a protest against this infidelity by crying: Be
Thou our King!

OFFERTORY (Ps. 23: 7)

1. Tollite portas, principes, ves- 1. Lift up your ]iates, O ye

tras: 2. et elevamini, portae aeter- princes: 2. and he ye lifted up, O
nales, 3. et introihit Rex gloriae. eternal gates, 3. and the King of

glory shall enter in.

After the delicate and fragrant Introit, this song, solemn and ma-
jestic in its development, comes as a sharp contrast. It is wholly do-
minated by the thought of the King of glory; it is filled with deep rever-
ence, but also with the glowing desire to lay open all things to this King,
to have everything in readiness for His entrance and to cry to every son
of man: Open your heart to the King of glory! For He comes to restore
to your soul its lost nobility (principes). He wishes to impress upon you
the fact that your soul is eternal and of more worth than all the world.
He wishes to grant your soul the inheritance rights to eternal glory. The
previous chants emphasized the Person who is coming and what He, the
Messias, will accomplish; this Offertory tells us what we must do,

A throbbing which ever increases, an onward urge ever growing,
runs through the melody. It comes to the fore in the very first phrase
with its rising movement. Its low beginning is the only reason why the
piece was transposed into the upper fifth. Thus it could be written with-
out the aid of ledger lines. Although the first phrase was satisfied with
thirds and seconds, the second phrase at the beginning and at the close
is marked by repeated fourths, and with its bold turn over aeterndles
becomes very impressive. Between these two extremes quiet seconds
are inserted. Because of this wise distribution of sudden fiights and
rests, the climax at aeterndles becomes all the more effective. We find a
similar, but calmer, development in the third phrase. Peculiar to it is
the repeated use of the interval cad: once over (intro)-ihit and twice over
(gl6ri)-ae. In the somewhat difficult melisma the clivis d c might be given
slightly more prominence than the bistropha and the other notes. One
all but hears a second voice, a voice which, when the text speaks of the
King of glory, quietly and fervently adds: "Oh, do raise the gates: open
your hearts! The Christchild must not again be turned away, as He was
on that wintry night at Bethlehem." The striking close with the fourth
c g a makes this petition all the more fervent, seems almost like a ques-
tion, as if there were some fear that His people might this time also neg-
lect to receive Him. Yet He is the King of the entire earth, and all men

Christmas Day — Midnight Mass 45

are His subjects — a truth which is emphasized by the first verse of this
Offertory in the ancient manuscripts.

The whole song should resemble a glimpse into eternity, a foretaste
of heaven's glory, and a joyous expectation, based on faith, of the dawn
of that great day which will shine as no other. Donee veniatl

N. Sch. 242, 246, 254, 265.

COMMUNION (Isa. 40: 5)

1. Revelabitur gloria Domini: 1. The glory of the Lord shall he

2. et videbit omnis caro salutare revealed: 2. and all flesh shall see
Dei nostri. the salvation of our God,

In a few short hours the prophecy of this Communion will be ful-
filled. The first antiphon for the first Vespers of Christmas runs thus:
"The King of peace is mighty indeed, whose face the whole earth de-
sireth." Soon we shall be privileged to look upon His countenance, to
gaze into the blue eyes of the divine Child. At first this chant tells of
His glory with quiet reserve, with emphasis on the dominant /, as if we
had here a plagal mode. To the d f g over glör-(ria), g f g f d over (Do)-
mini comes as answer. The notes f e f d over the final syllable of the first
word correspond to f e g f f over caro. But then the melody sings jubi-
lantly of the salvation of our God: salutare Dei nostri. Already we can
hear the joyous bells of Christmas; already we hear the same melody
and text as in the Communion for the third Mass on Christmas Day.

CHRISTMAS DAY
MIDNIGHT MASS

INTROIT (Ps. 2: 7)

1. Dominus dixit ad me: Filius 1. The Lord said to me: Thou

mens es tu, 2. ego hodie genui te. art my Son, 2. this day have I be-
Ps. Quare fremuerunt gentes: * et gotten thee. Ps. Why have the gen-
populi meditati sunt inanial tiles raged: * and the people de-

vised vain thingsl

With what childlike joy our folksongs speak of the Christchild!
They try to please Him, to coax a smile from His rosy lips. They speak
to us in a fresh, direct, intimate way. Not so the texts and the plainsong
melodies of the Midnight Mass. That Child, lying so poor and helpless

46 Christmas Day^ — Midnight Mass

and mute in His rude manger, is the one great Word spoken by the
heavenly Father before all time, begotten of His own essence. This
Child is equal in greatness, holiness, sublimity, and beauty to the Fa-
ther Himself, Dominus dixit ad me- — the Lord spoke to Me who now lie
in this manger in the form of man: "Thou art my Son," my Image,
whom I embrace with fatherly affection. Today, on this glorious morn of
eternity, have I begotten Thee. Today My father's love presents Thee
to the world to be its Redeemer and King. That is truly a gaze into
eternity, into the essence of the divinity, into the heart of the heavenly
Father; a view so sublime and exalted that the soul, overcome with won-
derment, bows down in silent adoration. Enraptured it contemplates
the mysterious mutual relationship in the life of the divinity, its eternal
bestowing and receiving, its eternal being and begetting. And this glo-
rious light of the eternal divine life of joy breaks forth in the dark night
of this world, is made manifest in the weak form of an Infant and shines
from the mild, gentle eyes of the newborn Child as the aurora which
heralds a sun still hidden in a fleecy veil of clouds.

Could such sublime thoughts be sung more worthily, and at the
same time more simply, than is done in this Introit? Just as the eternal
sonship is necessary, just as it is something perfectly evident to God
Himself, so is there likewise an obvious something in this fragrantly
tender song that melts away every last vestige of doubt. An effect is
thus produced which, in the field of the liturgy, would be quite unattain-
able by any elaborate tonal effort. (N. Sch. 225 f).

The antiphon consists of two phrases similar in structure and with
the same range of a fifth. They begin with the same motive (Dominus =
ego) and close with the same serene rhythm: dedc\c = gfef\d. Both
linger on /, and thereby make the song more meditative. The cadence
over meus es tu is frequently found in Introits of the second mode.

The psalm- verse gives us the world's view of this Word of God.
There are men who oppose it, fight against it, persecute it. The child in
the manger can already see the persecution that awaits Him, from that
of Herod to the fateful morning in the court at Jerusalem and up to
Golgotha. But the same verse tells us also: meditdti sunt indnia. All this
raging and fury, all this mad behavior, is futile, like the breaking of a
mighty wave that falls back upon itself. He who sits upon the heavenly
throne derides them. He has set up His Son as King, and gives Him all
the nations of the earth for His inheritance.

At the Gloria in excelsis Deo we shall, with heartfelt joy at the
blessed fact of the Saviour's coming, sing the song which the angels first
intoned during the Holy Night on the fields of Bethlehem.

Musica s., 13, 138 ff.; Gregoriusbote, 33, 84 ff.; 24, 86 ff.

Christmas Day — Midnight Mass 47

GRADUAL (Ps. 109: 3, 1)

1. Tecum principium in die vir- 1. With thee is the principality

tutis tuae: 2. in splendor ihus sane- in the day of thy strength; in the

tor urn, ex utero 3. ante luciferum brightness of the saints, from the

4. genui te. Si . 1. Dixit Dominus womb 3. before the day star 4. / be-

Domino meo: 2. Sede a dextris meis: got thee. S^. 1. The Lord said to my

3. donee ponam inimicos tuos, 4. Lord: 2. Sit thou at my right hand,

scabellum 5. pedum tuorum. 3. until I make thine enemies 4.

a resting place 5. for thy feet.

All the songs for today participate in the splendor radiating from
the Introit of the Midnight Mass. It is not so much the poor manger at
Bethlehem, but rather the eternal procession from the Father that is the
central point from which all the movements of spirit and heart draw their
impulse and life. The Gradual continues the thought of the Introit.
From all eternity the Father has begotten the Word, before the day-
star was made, before any creature had been called into being. From the
very beginning the Word was, and the Word was God, and all things that
have been made were made by the Word. The Word shines in a sea of
infinitely holy light; of this light the day-star is but a tiny spark. "The
newborn Child is 'God' from His very birth. From the very beginning
He was therefore charged with the fulfilment of His two-fold mission:
the destruction of the enemies of God and our salvation. His birthday is
the day of His strength and of His victory" {B.K., p. 290).

With the words of this verse the Word of God, now become man,
will later give testimony before His enemies of the divine dignity and
majesty that is His. These words far transcend the present temporal
order. Even today, at the beginning of Jesus' earthly life, they envisage
His transfiguration on the day of the Ascension ; and the Father will one
day force every hostile power to pay homage, to bow down, and adore
as the true Son of God the Child who now lies here in the manger.

It is, therefore, the eternal, the sublime, that determines the ar-
tistic form of these chants. Hence we ought not to be surprised to note
that basically the Gradual employs a quite common, and therefore
typical, melody of the second mode (cf. the first Sunday of Lent). The
beginning with the solemn fourth a-e, which occurs only once in the
piece, up to the passage over virtü-(tis) is proper to this Gradual. It
also has a few passages in common with the melody for the vigil of
Christmas, not found in the typical melody; and over tuos occurs a ca-
dence of the fifth mode, which, to quote but one example, is sung in the
Gradual for the feast of the Assumption over aurem tuam.

48 Christmas Day — Midnight Mass

I, signifies the corpus of the Gradual; II, the verse; a, the passages
of the Midnight Mass; b, those of the Mass for the vigil of Christmas:
I a, in splendorihus sanctorum \ ex utero =

b, et salväbü nos et mane \ videbitis
II a, donee ponam inimicos \ tuos =
b. qui sedes super Cherubim \ appdre.

Furthermore, in this Gradual the words ante luciferum genui te and
scabellum pedum tuorum, which immediately follow la and IIa, have
the same melody: considerable reptition therefore results.

ALLELUIA VERSE (Ps. 2: 7)

1. Dominus dixit ad me: Filius 1. The Lord hath said to me:

meus es tu, 2. ego hodie genui te. Thou art my Son, 2, This day have

I begotten thee.

In this verse we meet the same text as in the Introit. We heard the
melody for the first time on the first Sunday of Advent (q.v.)- With
holy joy we sing the florid melisma over the word hodie on this blessed
night. The subsequent Gospel in its first part contrasts strongly with
these solemn words. With striking simplicity it relates how Mary wrapped
her Child in swaddling clothes and placed Him in a manger, because
there was no place for them at the inn. In the second part, however,
the newborn Child is announced to the shepherds as the Saviour, as
Christ the Lord; and the angels' Gloria in excelsis Deo sounds like the
echo of the mighty word: "Thou art my Son!"

Springer, Kunst der Choralbegleitung, 244 ff.; Wagner, III, 400 ff.;
Musica divina, 3, 298 ff.

OFFERTORY (Ps. 95: 11, 13)

1. Laetentur caeli, et exsultet 1. Let the heavens rejoice, and

terra 2. ante faciem Domini: quo- let the earth be glad. 2. before the
niam venit. face of the Lord, because he cometh.

On this sacred night the Offertory is the only text of the Mass which
transmutes directly into joy the solemn grandeur proper to the previous
texts and chants. It calls upon the earth to rejoice as the heavens also
are rejoicing. What wondrously sweet and overflowing joy marked the
visit of the angels! What happiness filled the souls of those two heavenly
souls kneeling before the divine Child: Mary in the radiant purity of
her unique virgin motherhood, and the quiet, reserved St. Joseph! We
also shall participate in this rejoicing. The melody, however, is stili
dominated by the feelings which filled the previous chants. No buoyant

Christmas Day — Midnight Mass 49

jubilation here, no singing contest with the angels. A word like exsultet
surely can be sung in a different fashion than is done here; in many other
chants it does receive a prominence commensurate with its meaning.
The melody scarcely rises above /, which note acts as a kind of dominant
in the first phrase. Somewhat more animated is the second phrase;
which has a higher melodic line and for its dominant the note a, stressed
twice over the significant word Domini. Joy comes more to the fore in
the two verses which in the ancient manuscripts followed the Offertory
proper/ both beginning with the words: "Sing ye to the Lord a new
canticle" and with the same motive. A fine effect was no doubt achieved
in former times when, after each verse, the second half of the Offertory
was repeated : ante faciem Domini, quoniam venit. Now has the Lord re-
vealed Himself (cf. the Communion for the vigil of Christmas). Now
we can gaze upon His face; now He is here. The innumerable cries of
Veni, which for countless centuries were storming the gates of heaven,
have now been answered.

The favorite motive, d g f e, is introduced in various ways: first with
a salicus, then with a minor third, and twice with a fourth.

The melody is also used for the feast of the Holy Family, and the
greater part of it likewise is fittingly borrowed for the feast of Christ
the King.

COMMUNION (Ps. 109: 3)

In splendoribus sanctorum, ex In the brightness of the saints,

utero ante luciferum genui te. from the womb before the day-star

I begot thee.

This Communion belongs to the few pieces that make a prominent
use of pentatony (the five-step scale). F g a must be regarded as the nu-
cleus. The melody ascends a third above it to c and descends a third be-
low it to d, each time with avoidance of the semitones. Simplicity is the
obvious characteristic of the melody. Only at luciferum does it become
somewhat more elaborate. The first and fourth members have corre-
sponding endings; so also the second and third. The descending g f d
over the final syllable of utero and luciferum appears in an inverted form
over ge-(nui) as d / g.

Once again we hear expressions of the eternal generation of the
Word from the Father. In the Introit and in the Alleluia-verse the New-
born One Himself spoke of it. In the first part of the Gradual and in
our present chant the Father is the speaker. This difference between the

Wagner, III, 420.

50 Christmas Day — Third Mass

Introit and the Communion is clearly indicated in the annotated manu-
scripts. In the Introit practically all the neums have the simple and light
form; almost everything is tender, fragrant, naive: the divine Child is
speaking. In contrast to this, almost all the neums of the Communion
are given the broad form. Here we hear the Father, serious and solemn;
He is, so to say, conferring upon His Son the dignity of King and Priest.
One cannot but admire the delicate artistic sense here displayed in the
annotated manuscripts.

Christ accepts our sacrificial gifts, just as He assumed our human
nature in order to endow it with His own divine life (cf. the Secret).
Thus we are also made to participate in His generation from the Father.
To each one of us the Father therefore says: "In the brightness of the
saints I begot thee." Instead of "in the brightness of the saints" some
translate "in the splendor of holy followers." "We form the brilliant
host of His followers, celebrating together with Christ His ultimate day
of victory and triumph" (Betende Kirche, p. 290 f.).

Revue greg., 9, 227 ff.; N. Sch., Musica Sacra, 50, 120.

THE THIRD MASS
INTROIT: Isa. 9:6)

1. Puer natus est nobis, et filius 1. A Child is born to us and a

datus est nobis: 2. cujus imperium Son is given to us: 2. whose govern-

super humerum ejus: 3. et vocabi- ment is upon his shoulder: 3. and

tur nomen ejus, magni consilii his name shall be called the Angel

Angelus. Ps. Cantate Domino can- of great counsel. Ps. Sing ye to the

iicum novum: * quia mirabilia Lord a new canticle: * for he hath

fecit. done wonderful things.

Solemn and sublime were the chants of the Midnight Mass, Now,
in the Introit of the third Mass, a new tone is heard. This Introit has
not exactly the spirit of the popular In dulci jubilo, but approaches it
more closely than any of the songs of the Midnight Mass. Indeed, one
might almost say that this Introit supplied the inspiration for the song
In dulci jubilo. After Puer with its dulcet fifth comes d e d; the second
half of the phrase begins in the same manner. There can hardly be any
doubt that the parallelism of the text (Puer— filius) influenced the for-
mation of the melody. The difference in the effect of this parallelism
compared with that of the first Mass of Christmas with its minor thirds,
reminding us of the semidarkness of that night, is well marked. It is
well to note, however, that childlike joy, the kind heard in this first

Christmas Day — Third Mass 51

phrase, does not always demand new forms of expression, and that the
repetition of a favorite motive is one of its chief characteristics. The
tristropha brings a relaxation, allowing the following nobis to be sung
with more color. For us has He been born, this wondrously gracious
Child. We bask in His peace, in His benevolence. Rightly, therefore,
does this nobis receive special emphasis in both parts of the phrase, once
with its close on the dominant, the other time on the tonic of the mode.
Yet, notwithstanding rhythmic relation in the two instances, the dy-
namics are different. In the first nobis the second clivis exercises a de-
cided predominance over the first, while in the second nobis the first two
notes receive the greater prominence. The same holds true of natus
compared to the first nobis. Thus there results a beautiful melodic inter-
play, reminiscent, one might almost say, of a cradle song for the Christ
Child.

The first phrase sings of the Infant, the second stresses His domin-
ion and divine dignity. Here the Christianized Roman sees realized his
old dream of the imperium, of the universal kingdom {B.K., p. 292).
The melody attains its peak at imperium. One best averts the danger of
rushing to the highest note at the expense of the others by following the
indication of MS. 121 of Einsiedeln, which gives the third note a slightly
broader marking. Thus the melodic line can ascend with full solemnity.
Care must likewise be taken that the single notes on the first three sylla-
bles of this phrase be not sung too short, for they should have the ring
of definite and positive avowal. In all this, however, one idea must stand
out pre-eminently: this Child exercises His kingly rule peacefully, with
unmeasured mildness and love. For this reason it is that the sweet mo-
tive which gives such warmth to the first nobis again occurs here. Then
the melody sinks, slowly and deliberately, like the folds of a king's mantle.
Indeed, it almost seems as if a shadow settled upon it. For the royal
dignity also reminds us of the burden which already at Christmas rests
upon the shoulders of this Child: the burden which will grow and de-
velop until it becomes a heavy cross.

In contrast to this minor third and the semitones we hear a bright
major third over et vocäbitur. It is as though it would like to banish the
serious thoughts which insist on entering. It is an effort to introduce the
question to which the tristropha and figure over the second ejus, like
the one over the first ejus, give a still more intense form: "What can be
the name of this Child?" With a succession of large intervals, a major
third, a fifth, and a fourth, we hear the joyful answer: "He is the Angel
of great counsel, the One who comes to announce to us the great deci-
sion of God, and also to make it effective, as far as in Him lies — our re~
demption and eternal salvation."

52 Christmas Day — Third Mass

Now the melody comes exultingly: Cantdte Domino cdnticum no-
vum—''^mg ye to the Lord a new canticle: for He hath done wonderful
things." The wonder of wonders, the divine Child in the manger, prompts
this rejoicing. Each year He returns to us with renewed love, spins a web
of glad magic about our heart, and blesses us with new graces.

Some have thought that the numerous tristrophas in this antiphon
were intended to restrain the singer from a too violent show of joy. Be
that as it may, these tristrophas should not sound heavy or unwieldy.
The piece as a whole ought to be bright and lively. Not without reason
are we using the seventh mode (cf. the Introit for the second Sunday of
Advent and for the feast of the Ascension), which here never descends
below the tonic, but ever strives upward, although the proper dominant
of the seventh mode is prominent only in the first phrase. The accented
syllables in most instances have a higher pitch than the syllable imme-
diately following, frequently also higher than the preceding syllable.

K.K., 23, 134 f!.; Choralhlatier, No. 2; N, Sch., 256; Revue, 8, 71
ff.; Analyses, III, 14 fl.; Wagner, III, 511.

GRADUAL (Ps. 97: 3, 2)

1. Viderunt omnes fines terrae 1. All the ends of the earth have

salutare Dei nostri: 2. jubilate Deo seen the salvation of our God: 2. sing

omnis terra. ^ 1. Notum fecit Do- joyfully to God all the earth, jll 1.

minus salutare suum: 2. ante con- The Lord hath made known his sal-

spectum gentium revelavit justitiam vation: 2. he hath revealed his jus-

suam. tice in the sight of the

As in the Introit, so here again childlike naivete and lofty grandeur
combine to form a liturgical Christmas song, except that here, in accord-
ance with the style of a Gradual-responsory, the sublime predominates
in the melodic line as well as in the richness of the melody. The grand
beginning with Viderunt omnes already hints at this. Here the custom-
ary limits assigned to Graduals of the fifth mode are broken. The Sa-
viour of the world has appeared! Effaced are the national boundaries
which separated Jew and Greek and Roman; there comes forth the Catho-
lic Church, the earth-encircling Church, which mediates the salvation
of God to all the world, and thus bestows a happiness upon the nations
which makes them shout aloud for very joy. Originally this Mass was
celebrated at the world-church, St. Peter's. Viderunt omnes has an echo
in omnis at the end of the corpus of the Gradual. Extremely naive is the
motive ch c a which runs through the corpus: (ter)-rae, (salutä)-re, (no)-
stri. The form over terra again recalls the popular In dulci jubilo. The
frequent occurrence of the tone-sequence f a c and its inversion insistent-

Christmas Day — Third Mass 53

ly calls to mind our modern F major. But when, as here, the note b fol-
lows immediately upon c ,we are made to realize again that the Lydian
fifth mode has a character all its own.

The florid melisma at the beginning of the verse over Dominus is, as
we know, a stylistic peculiarity of Graduals. At Christmastide it recalls
the words of the Apostle: "But God (who is rich in mercy), for his ex-
ceeding charity wherewith he loved us . . . hath quickened us together in
Christ." Into this rich melisma we put our thanks for the profusion of
love the Lord has shown us today, that He has revealed His justice to
us, has given us the Just One whose coming we have so fervently im-
plored from the clouds above in the Rordte caeli. Only the Lord (Do-
minus) was able to work such a miracle. Three pauses divide this melisma
into four parts. The first and second groups are the same, closing with
c d a f, a. motive which in a gracefully shortened form is again heard at
the close of (Dömi)-nus, (conspec)-tum, and (genti)-um. The third mem-
ber ends with c a f. The beginning of the fourth member, a f a g f, im-
mediately ascends to the higher reaches with a f g a c, and then the
melody rises jubilantly, reminding us of Dei in the corpus, while the
quieter and more devout salutdre which follows sounds much like terrae
there. In an outburst of overflowing joy the melody at gentium again
stresses the idea that the salvation of the entire world has appeared.
With suam the first two notes are to be sung as a sort of preparation for
the subsequent torculus; similarly g a after the pause should be weaker
than the neum which follows; the same holds true oi f g a before the
pressus, the summit toward which everything else must tend in an as-
cending line: all in all a masterful development of incomparable melodic
beauty.

Revue, 8, 72; 12, 17; Greg. Rundschau, 1, 165 ff.

ALLELUIA VERSE

1. Dies sanctificatus illuxit nobis: 1. A sanctified day hath shone

2. venite gentes et ador ate Dominum: upon us: 2. come ye Gentiles, and

3. quia hodie descendit lux magna adore the Lord: 3. for this day a
super terram. great light hath descended upon the

earth.

This verse continues the thoughts of the Epistle and acts as a tran-
sition to the Gospel. The Epistle portrays the greatness and majesty of
the Son of God. It exalts Him as the image of the Father, the Creator
of the world, who through the power of His word sustains all things,
whose throne stands forever, whom the angels adore at the Father's be-

54 Christmas Day — Third Mass

hest. Hence, this Alleluia- verse now cries: adordte — "adore ye the Lord,"
whereas the preceding Gradual had cried: juhildtel

When we hear the mighty words in the Gospel: "And the Word was
made Flesh," we bend our knees before the Babe of Bethlehem. The
descent of the melody over venite to low a, the prolongation of the domi-
nant / — within a passage of florid melismas, a recitation on a single note
always produces a solemn effect^ — truly seem like an eloquent expression
of our prayerful adoration.

We have here a typical melody of the archaic form, a favorite for
the Christmas season; thus it appears on the feasts of St. Stephen, of
St. John, and on Epiphany; likewise on the feasts of St. John the Bap-
tist and SS. Peter and Paul.

Four phrases may be distinguished in the verse. The first and third
have practically the same intonation: Dies = quia hodie; then follows a
recitation on the tonic: sanctificdtus lUuxit = descendit lux; then the same
florid cadence: nobis = magna. The second phrase begins with a sort of
intonation contrasting with that of the others, then a recitation on the
dominant /, and a sinple cadence. The fourth phrase is extremely short.
It has no intonation of any kind, but a recitation on the dominant like
the second phrase (this recitation is longer on the feast of St. John the
Evangelist and on Epiphany), and finally a closing cadence. The psalmo-
dic construction of the whole is quite evident.

Both the text and melody probably come from old Byzantium. In
some of the ancient manuscripts either a Latin or a Greek text accom-
panies the melody; in one of the Vatican Library (No. 298, f. Ill), both
a Latin and a Greek text accompany it.

The great Light, the Light of Light, God of God, true Light of true
Light, has come down to us. It transfigures the present day, makes it a
holy day indeed. There is nothing blinding, nothing to repel the eye, in
this fullness of light; enraptured we contemplate the divine Child, the
while we adore Him as the sol invictus, the truly unconquerable Sun.

OFFERTORY (Ps. 88: 12, 15)

1. Tui sunt caeli, et tua est terra: 1. Thine are the heavens, and.

2. orhem terrarum, et plenitudinem thine is the earth: 2. the world and

ejus tu fundasti: S. justitia et judi- the fullness thereof thou hast

dum praeparatio sedis tuae. founded: 3. justice and ju

are the preparation of thy throne.

The divine dignity of the Babe of Bethlehem is the first thought,
in fact one might say, the thought, occupying the mind of the Church
today. In opposition to the Arians it was necessary to stress the fact that

Christmas Day^ — Third Mass 55

this Child is equal in essence to the Father, and against the tenets of
the Mithraic cults, that on the present day, the day of increasing sun-
light, it is not a question of mere symbolism, but of the birth of the
divine Sun of Justice in the flesh. The Church, therefore, addresses these
words to the newborn Babe: Thine are the heavens, and Thine is the
earth. Thou art the Creator and Governor of the world; Thine it is with
all its inhabitants. Prominently this tu dominates the melodic line, which
otherwise never rises above a. Tuae of the third phrase corresponds to
fundasti. Nor does the remaining part speak of the poor manger in which
the Child is lying. It speaks of His throne, of the exercise of His judicial
power, of His zeal for right and justice, of His eternal, immutable judge-
ments. In the same strain run the verses which formely belonged to this
Offertory: "Thou art a great God and terrible; Thou wilt slay the dra-
gon of the sea. Mercy and truth shall go before Thy face. Thou strikest
down the proud; with the strength of Thine arm Thou wilt cut down
Thine enemies. For strong is Thy hand, O Lord, and mighty is Thine
arm."

Vigorous words, these. But the melody? Proske, in the preface of
his Musica divina, makes too sweeping a statement when he says of the
church music of the ancients that it avoided all specialized expression.
To plain song, at least, a greater freedom of expression must be conceded.
But he is right when he characterizes as lyric meditation, or contempla-
tion, that ancient church music which of set purpose avoided any defin-
ite emotion. Over this present Offertory, for instance, there hovers a
delicate shimmer of light, dreamlike one might almost call it. At sunt
caeli we find Palestrina (IX, 16, 1) using a sixth (d~h); plain chant, how-
ever, is content with simple minor thirds and seconds within the tetra-
chord d-g, and similarly over ejus later on; justitia likewise confines
itself to a tetrachord, e-a. Low / is the dominant of the entire piece. The
first and third phrases have a range of only a fifth; the second, excepting
tu with its reach of a minor third above the note a, has the range of a
sixth. All is in an unpretentious style: there seems to be deliberate self-
restraint. Large intervals are rare; the few that do occur are quite inert,
as in the ascending sequence over est, whose nucleus is f g a g, a.n inver-
sion of which is found in ('pleni)-tü-(dinem): e g f g. At ejus the melody
effects a retarding tension much like the related melody in the Introit.
Tu can then sound with full effect. Justitia sets in energetically. We may
regard the melody over judicium, and especially that over sedis tuae, as
a free variation of est terra.

To understand and appreciate this chant, one might imagine the
Blessed Mother kneeling before the manger, contemplating her divine
Child. Her meditation turns into song, and this tender melody reveals

56 Christmas Day — Third Mass

what thoughts are flooding her heart. A tremor of holy ecstasy seizes
her: Thou, O Almighty One, art mine, my very own, my Child. And
the divine Child (the twenty-seventh verse of the same psalm suggests
this thought) addresses the most pure Virgin thus: And thou art my
Mother !^ — Let us kneel at the side of the Mother of God, to pray and sing
with her, and in union with her to offer up the gifts of our faith and love
and adoration.

(The "Stabat Mater'' in Liszt's Christus closely approaches the spirit
of this Offertory.)

COMMUNION (Ps. 97: 3)

Viderunt omnes fines terrae salu- All the ends of the earth have

tare Dei nostri. seen the salvation of our God.

We hear this same melody, in a happy adaptation, on the feast of
St. Philip Neri (May 26). The jubilant salutdre there occurs over the
word exsultaverunt- — my heart and my flesh rejoice. Less happy is the
adaptation for the feast of the Holy Family; its adaptation in the Mass
of the holy Lance and Nails (on the Friday after the first Sunday of
Lent) to the text: "They looked upon Him whom they have pierced,
and the foundations of the earth were shaken," is strange, to say the
least. No objection can be made to the treatment of the word-accents;
but our jubilant salutdre is there sung to the very dissimilar mover entur.
In all probability the opening word, Viderunt, led to the choice of the
melody proper to the Communion Viderunt. These remarks, be it said,
are not made merely to find fault. They should help us, rather, to a
deeper understanding of the appropriateness and of the beauty of our
present Communion song. If we then compare it with the same text
used in the first part of today's Gradual, we get an illuminating insight
into the stylistic differences of the two chants.

Terrae and salutdre mark the high points of the melody. The con-
nection is immediately evident: salvation has come to the world. The
momentous promise so solemnly uttered on the vigil of Christmas that
"all flesh shall see the salvation of our God," is now perfectly realized;
and from overflowing hearts joyous thanks ascend to God. When we
consider, moreover, how great is the number of those who have not yet
heard the message of Christmas, who know nothing of the Babe of Beth-
lehem who came to save them and who would fill the hearts of all with
His grace and peace and love; when we consider that we are privileged
to look upon Him, that we are even allowed in Holy Communion to
taste and see "how sweet He is," then our salutdre will have a particu-
larly radiant ring. The notes that come after the lengthened c should be

St. Stephen, First Martyr 57

sung as two groups of two; the measured rhythm will thus restrain the
almost too animated exultation. Rhythmically, a g e f f corresponds to
g f a g e over (ter)-rae and f d f e c over De-(i).

God is generosity itself; His giving is always on a grand scale. He
is the salvation of the entire world. Would that we equalled His mag-
nanimity, and would give our hearts entirely to Him who has become
our salvation, our joy, and our delight!

ST. STEPHEN, THE FIRST MARTYR

(December 26)

INTROIT (Ps. 118: 23, 86, 23)

1. Eienim sederunt principes, et 1. Princes sat and spoke against

adversum me loquehantur: et iniqui me: and the wicked persecuted me:

persecuti sunt me: 2. adjuva me, 2. help me, O Lord my God, for thy

Domine Dens mens, quia servus servant is exercised in thy justifica-

tuus exercehatur in tuis justifica- tions. Ps. Blessed are the undefiled

tionibus. Ps. Beati immaculati in in the way: * that walk in the law

via: * qui ambulant in lege Domini. of the Lord.

When we come to Mass on this second Christmas feast we hear,
immediately at the Introit, the saint of today describing that which
passed in his soul when he stood before the high council. Dispensing with
introductory phrases, he speaks to us directly, graphically, impressively.
Around him he sees the high priests and scribes (principes); from their
faces, from their words, he knows that they are his bitterest opponents.
He must hear how truth is distorted by the testimony of false (iniqui)
witnesses; and by this assembly he hears the sentence of death passed
against him.

That is the first phrase of this Introit. Its melody consists of three
members. The first member, with its series of agitated porrectus, each of
which sets in on a higher pitch, leads up to the dominant; the second
leads back to the tonic: arsis and thesis. The second phrase repeats
practically the same formula over et adver- and me loquebdn-. The sub-
sequent double bistropha suggests a mysterious muffled whispering;
similarly its recurrence in the Gradual. An agitated up-and-down move-
ment runs through the third member, like the motions of some noble
animal at bay: there is indignation at the injustice displayed. It is well
to stress the torculus, and the syllable following it must also be given its

58 St. Stephen, First Martyr

full due. The first note of each neum over ( perse )-cüti can be sung almost
martellato.

If in the first phrase the saint looked about himself, he now in the
second, looks upward to God. Deus mens does not occur in the original
psalm-verse, but the composer so merged himself into the feelings of the
saint that these words rose spontaneously. The melody becomes urgent-
ly pleading. It marks the summit of the entire piece and has the only
high pressus. Here again the first member lingers on the dominant. Most
truthfully can the saint pray: Thou art my God — Deus mens. . .. Thee
have I chosen, to Thee have I dedicated myself. In the second and third
members the influence of the word-accents in the formation of the melody
becomes apparent: servus tuus exercehdtur, tuis. Though practically the
same formula recurs three or four times, this may remind us of the con-
stancy with which the saint withstood all opposition and persevered in
the service of his Lord; it may remind us of the fiery zeal with which
he offered himself for the great cause. For no one could resist the wisdom
and the spirit that spoke in him. With full determination he likewise
advances to his death. We have already met the closing formula in the
Introit Gaudete; we shall meet it again in the Introit for Epiphany.

The psalm-verse now sings its Bedti quietly, almost genially. The
purity of heart and fidelity to God here mentioned were the saint's
great consolations.

Revue, 4, 65 ff.

GRADUAL (Ps. 118: 23, 86)

1. Sederunt principes, et adver sum 1. Princes sat and spoke against

me loquebantur: 2. et iniqui per- me: 2. and the wicked persecuted

secuti sunt me. f. 1. Adjuva me me: i\ 1. Help me, 0 Lord my God:

Domine Deus meus: 2. salvum me 2. save me for thy mercy's sake,
fac propter misericordiam tuam.

The corpus oi the Gradual has the same text as the first phrase of
the Introit, except that the word Etenim has been omitted. Similarly,
the verse bears some resemblance to the second phrase of the Introit.
In both pieces loquebantur carries a similar melody; iniqui is stressed
still more; in both instances Domine Deus meus marks the principal as-
cent. But there are also specific differences besides those of mode and
range. In the Introit the accented syllables helped to form the melody;
not a single closing syllable had more than two notes. In the Gradual,
on the contrary, it is precisely the final syllables that receive special
prominence. Here we also find an interplay of florid melismatic passages
with some that are purely syllabic, whereas the entire Introit was de-

St. Stephen, First Martyr 59

veloped more regularly and simply: the accented syllable of persecuti
alone was given three neums. The difference in spirit is even more marked,
especially in the verse. At its very beginning the Introit was lively in
movement; the solemn beginning of the Gradual, however, seems to
lead us to a serious, dignified court-session. At adver sum me it gathers
momentum, and iniqui is still more vigorous: here f f g a c becomes
a c d e f. At persecuti sunt the notes, without being hammered out, must
be accented well enough to show that the meaning of the word is fully
grasped. Thus far the text had a setting almost entirely original; the no-
tation over me, however, already acts as a transition to the verse, which
employs typical forms only.

The beginning of the verse still reminds us of et adversum me in the
corpus. Snatches of the melody from the Gradual of the second Christ-
mas Mass follow, and then comes a beautifully articulated melisma, one
which on Epiphany we find again over illuminare (q.v.). Over Deus
meus we hear a form which occurs several times, e.g. on the feast of the
Assumption (inclina aurem tuam). After the florid melisma a special
solemnity attaches to the simple recitation on the low / if it is rendered
in a sustained (not heavy, or blunt!) manner and in a careful legato. Over
tuam we find the passage fagf ga a of (miserij-cordiam a third higher.
The closing melisma is quite common; tomorrow we meet it again.

This chant does not in the least sound like the prayer of an outcast,
of one who as a victim to fanatical hatred sees a horrible death staring
him in the face. Instead, it sounds like the prayer of one whose confi-
dence is boundless, of one who is sure of being heard: an echo, this, of
heaven's own songs.

ALLELUIA VERSE (Acts 7: 55)

1. Video caelos apertos, 2. et 1. 1 see the heavens opened, 2. and

Jesum stantem 3. a dextris virtu- Jesus standing 3. at the right hand
tis Dei. of the power of God.

Here a word of the preceding Lesson finds a continuation. Sur-
rounded by enemies raging and furious, Stephen, "full of the Holy
Ghost," was privileged to look upon the glory of God. In this perspective
he forgot all things of earth. He saw Jesus, to whose cause he had dedi-
cated himself completely, and he saw Him standing, as if He had risen
from His throne to help His loyal servant with all His divine power.

We already know the melody from the third Mass of Christmas.
Taking into account the divisions noted there it will suffice to add the
following particulars:

60 St. Stephen, First Martyr

1. Video = 3. a dextris

1. apertos = S. virtutis

2. et Jesum stantem, (4) Dei.

OFFERTORY (Acts 6: 5; 7: 59)

1. Elegerunt Apostoli Stephanum 1. The Apostles chose Stephen, a

levitam, 2. plenum fide et Spiritu levite, 2. a man full of faith and of

Sancto: 3. quern lapidaverunt Ju- the Holy Ghost: 3. whom the Jews

daei orantem, et dicentem: 4. Do- stoned, praying and saying: 4.

mine Jesu, accipe spiritum meum. Lord Jesus, receive my spirit, 5.

5. alleluia. alleluia.

Two scenes comprise the Offertory: the first two phrases portray
the election of St. Stephen as a deacon; the third and fourth phrases
give his prayer while he was being stoned. A solemn quiet hovers about
the opening melody. One must guard against singing it too fast, for it
should tell in a broad festal manner of the act by which the honor and
the order of the diaconate was bestowed upon the saint. He was truly
worthy of being chosen,^ for he was "filled" with faith and with the Holy
Ghost. The setting in with the fifth is more than mere chance; so too the
further progress of the melody with the descending fourth and the
pressus. And how austere is then the close over Spiritu Sanctol The
spirit of the world would certainly be voiced differently.

In the second part one might consider lapidaverunt, whose first three
podatus in the annotated manuscripts are in the broad form, as tone-
painting, as depicting the downward flight of the stones. But immedi-
ately afterwards we meet the same tone-sequences as we had over
plenum. To the descending fourth, and also later over (D6mi)-ne, a third
is added, which makes the melody more virile. The frequent tritones,
though most of them are not obvious, contribute to this same end.
The second half of the phrase is a quiet preparation for what follows.

What fervor and confidence breathe forth from this prayer! It
should be sung with warmth, and above all not too rapidly. After Do-
mine it will be necessary to make a brief pause for breathing. Ac-(cipe)
and (al)-le-lüia remind us of (Spiri)-tu Sancto in the second phrase; spi-
ritum, of lapidaverunt in the third phrase. All the notes after the last
minor pause are to be sung ritardando.

Dom Jeannin^ would assign the entire piece to an Ut-mode with a
close on the fifth. However that may be, it is quite surprising to find*
over levitam, a cadence to c.

1 The word levitam is not found in the Acts, but is the free addition of the composer.

2 Melodies liturgiques syriennes et chaldeennes, p. 133.

St. Stephen, First Martyr 61

About the same time that we hear the saint praying this dccipe
spiritum meum, the priest at the altar is saying: Suscipe, sancte Pater,
hanc immaculdtam hostiam — "Receive, O holy Father. . .this spotless
victim," in preparation for the most holy Sacrifice. Today, on the feast
of the first martyr, we must try to appreciate that which is stressed by
the Secret on the Thursday after the third Sunday of Lent: "We offer
Thee that Sacrifice from which all martyrdom has drawn its source."

COMMUNION (Acts 5: 55, 58, 59)

1. Video caelos apertos, et Je- 1. / see the heavens opened and

sum stantem a dextris virtutis Dei: Jesus standing on the right hand of

2. Domine Jesu, accipe spiritum the power of God; 2. Lord Jesus, re-

meum, 3. et ne statuas Ulis hoc pec- ceive my spirit, 3. and lay not this

catum, quia nesciunt quid faciunt. sin to their charge.

The Communion in its first phrase has the same text as the Alleluia-
verse; in the second, the same as the fourth phrase of the Offertory,
There is a difference, however, in the melodic treatment, much like to
that which exists between the Introit and the Gradual, though not in the
same degree. The piece has wonderful dramatic power. Here one may
nicely see the role played by intervals in plain song. Video sets out with
quiet seconds; over apertos we have a major third. Now the saint's gaze
penetrates further into heaven; he sees Jesus. A fourth stands over et —
and then Jesum stantem dominates the entire melodic line. Thus far the
arsis. Two energetic pressus feature the subsequent thesis. The ardent
Domine uses a fifth and an ascent to high e. The second part of the
phrase is again a thesis. An example of logical development.

The third phrase never extends above a; its largest intervals are
but minor thirds; toward the end only seconds occur. We are told in the
Acts, it is true, that St. Stephen, kneeling, cried with a loud voice:
**Lord, lay not this sin to their charge." But the plainsong melody has a
different end in view. It seems as if the saint's strength were fast ebbing
away; yet before his death he must pronounce this prayer. The melody
seems to melt away also. In the Acts the last four words are not to be
found. But they proceed from the heart of the saint; they unite his sac-
rifice and his prayer with that of the Crucified. Christ was nailed to His
cross outside the city gates. There also was Stephen stoned. In him the
sacrificial power of the Cross achieves its first glorious victory. It is
this same power of the Cross that inflamed countless thousands to follow
the example of the first martyr.

62 St. John, Apostle and Evangelist

ST. JOHN, APOSTLE AND EVANGELIST
(December 27)

INTROIT (Ecclus. 15: 5)

1. In medio Ecclesiae aperuit os 1. In the midst of the church the

ejus: 2. et implevit eum Dominus Lord opened his mouth: 2. and filled

spiritu sapientiae, et intellectus: 3. him with the spirit of wisdom and

stolam gloriae induit eum. Ps. Bo- understanding: 3. he clothed him

num est confiteri Domino: * et with a robe of glory. Ps, It is good

psalter e nomini tuo, Altissime. to give praise to the Lord; * and to

sing to thy name, O Most High.

The text was taken from today's Lesson, and that in turn from the
Book of Wisdom. The Lord has opened the mouth of St. John, has made
him to be an Apostle, an Evangelist, a prophet, the writer of the Apo-
calypse. The Saviour, Wisdom itself, proceeding from the mouth of the
Most High, filled the saint with the spirit of wisdom and understanding.
For years the saint was privileged to hear the words of life as a favored
Apostle; at the Last Supper he drank in wisdom at its source, at the
breast of the Saviour, out of His very heart. Standing at the foot of the
cross, he received the last words of his Master. How deeply they must
have embedded themselves in his heart! He was permitted to take under
his care the Mother of Jesus, the Seat of Wisdom; thus he could learn to
know even more intimately and thoroughly Him who is the fullness of
grace and truth. No one was privileged to taste so deeply of the Lord's
sweetness as he, and no one else has written so profoundly of His divinity.
The Lord clothed him, moreover, with the robe of glory. How beautiful
was this soul in its virginity! So beautiful that it excerised a sort of en-
chantment over the Lord Himself, for St. John was loved more than any
of the other Apostles. How the beauty of this soul grew day by day in
the fervor and ardor of its love, and how splendid, in consequence, must
its robe of glory have become! To thank God for all this is truly a duty
of love.

At the present time this melody is found in the Common of Doctors;
it was, however, originally composed for today's feast. The same is true
of the Offertory Justus ut palma. This Introit is an example of classic
repose, and must be sung very sustainedly. The first phrase has two
members, each of which begins with a neum resembling a podatus; in
each instance this is followed by a tristropha and an accented g. Every-
thing seems to undulate lightly about /, and yet an upward tendency

St. John, Apostle and Evangelist 63

runs through the entire phrase, a tendency which finds a brilliant ful-
filment in the second phrase. The cdfg here becomes fgahb and ace with

the pressus, the only one in the entire piece. After this culmination the
melody again supports itself, as in the first and third phrases, on /. The
synonyms sapientiae and intellectus have similar intonations. Low c over
the latter word serves as an antithesis to high c over eum and at the
same time as a transition to the third phrase. This phrase also descends
to low c, but more gracefully and gently, since each of the last two
neums sets in with the pitch of the preceding. The second half corre-
sponds to ejus at the close of the first phrase. On account ot its range
and the emphasis on the tonic /, this Introit may serve as a standard
example of the (plagal) sixth mode. Of greater moment, however, is the
nobility, the enshrined holiness, which breathes from it.

Pal. mus., Vol. 10, and Mocquereau, Monographies greg., I: U In-
troit "In medio" (Tournai, 1910) discuss the reading and rhythm of this
piece.

GRADUAL (John 21: 23, 19)

1. Exiit sermo inter fratres, quod 1. A saying went abroad among

discipulus ille non moritur. Et non the brethren, that that disciple should
dixit Jesus: Non moritur Sf. 1. not die. And Jesus did not say: He
Sed: Sic eum volo mauere, 2. donee should not die. jl. 1. But: So I will
mniam: 3. tu me sequere. have him remain, 2. till I come: 5.

follow thou me.

The text of the Gradual anticipates today's Gospel. Peter had heard
the Lord's summons: "Follow me!" But when he saw that John was fol-
lowing the Lord, he said: "Lord, and what shall this man do?" Jesus
answered: "So I will have him to remain till I come, what is it to thee?
follow thou me." From these words the disciples gathered that John
was not to die. But the Lord had only intended to convey the thought
that Peter would find death after untold struggles and a bloody martyr-
dom; John, however, was to remain in quiet labor for the extension of
the Church, and, when the Lord would come to receive his soul, would
have a serene death, not that of martyrdom.

In the Gradual the words of the Gospel are shortened, and hence
not readily understood.

The melody is the same as that of Ecee sacerdos magnus and Christus
factus est. It must be said, however, that the divisions in the corpus of
this Gradual are better than in that of Maundy Thursday. In the verse
one expects another ascent after donee, but it is omitted on account of
the brevity of the text.

64 St. John, Apostle and Evangelist

Follow thou me! Filled with love like St. John, we shall interest
ourselves in others and care for them; but when God calls, we shall go
the way He points out to us, without having any regard for others.

Motet over manere: Revue, 23, 99 ff.

ALLELUIA VERSE (John 21 : 24)

1. Hie est discipuhis ille, 2. qui 1. This is the disciple 2. who

testimonium perhibet de his: 3. et giveth testimony of these things: 3.

scimus quia verum est (4.) testi- and we know that true is (4.) his

monium ejus. testimony.

This verse forms the close of today's Gospel. It emphasizes the char-
acteristic mark of an Apostle, expressed by St. Peter before the election
of St. Matthias: the Apostles are witnesses of Christ — "Beginning from
the baptism of John, until the day wherein He was taken up from us,
one of these must be made a witness with us of His resurrection." This
testimony all the Apostles confirmed with their life's blood. In a certain
sense, St. John also was a martyr (cf. his feast on May 6). This is further
justified by the unanimous acclaim of the whole Catholic world, which
today shows its special joy in the testimony of St. John. His testimony
proceeds from ardent love and depicts for us the most sublime portrait
of the Saviour.

This typical Christmas melody is here divided: 1. Hie est = d. et
scimus] 1. discipulus ille = S. quia verum est; 2, qui testimonium perhibet
de his, (4). testimonium ejus.

OFFERTORY (Ps. 91: 13)

1. Justus ut palma florebit: 2. 1. The just shall flourish like the

sicut cedrus, quae in Libano est, palm tree: 2. he shall grow up like
multiplicabitur. the cedar which is in Libanus.

This Offertory is now found in the Common of Doctors, just as the
Introit is. St. John became the teacher of them all. As Evangelist, his
symbol is the eagle. The figure of the palm tree signifies much the same
thing here: his entire being was turned toward the Sun; his life was lived
in heaven, into the deepest mysteries of which he was allowed to peer.
In his virginal purity he was immune to all that is earth-bound or bur-
dening. Everything was filled with light and most pure love. In his ar-
dent nearness to God the sweet fruits of which his writings give evidence
could attain to perfect maturity. The melody itself suggests the palm
with its towering shaft. The second half of Justus is repeated over flore-
bit and in part over (Liba)-no.

St. John, Apostle and Evangelist 65

In the second phrase, however, the cedar is made to reach higher
than the palm. Sicut reminds us of ut pal-fma); ce-(drus) with its ahcdca
is a development of the efgagf at the beginning of this Offertory; (Li)-
bano harks back to (pal)-ma: two or three motives are thus manipulated
here in a smooth and expert manner. Multiplicdbitur repeats the fourth
which was heard three times at the beginning. The melisma following
supports itself on the pressus dag, ggf, and ffe. It pictures the spreading

branches of the cedar; the development of the melody here is lateral
rather than perpendicular.

COMMUNION (John 21: 23)

1. Exiit sermo inter fratres, quod 1. A saying went abroad among

discipulus ille non moritur: 2. et the brethren that that disciple should

non dixit Jesus: Non moritur: 3. not die; 2. and Jesus did not say:

sed: sic eum volo m,anere, donee He should not die: 3. but: So I will

veniam. have him remain till I come.

Here a simple antiphonal melody harks back to the Gospel and
the Gradual. Each of the three phrases lifts the accented syllable to d e:
ille, dixit, volo. Furthermore, the last syllable of Jesus, as in many other
instances where Hebrew words occur, receives the emphasis. Non mori-
tur as well as the four preceding notes are the same in both cases. The
third phrase begins in the same manner as the second; manere is treated
with special fondness. Donee, if set a fifth lower, would have to be writ-
ten with 5b (dcd cbVd). No doubt the composer wished to avoid this; he
therefore wrote the whole piece in a pitch which more closely approaches
that in which it is actually to be sung; that is likely the reason for the
transposition.

Would that we were like St. John, and might always remain so! Vir-
ginal purity adorned his soul. He was filled with a tender and true love
of God and the Blessed Virgin. How touchingly he depicts the love of
God in his Epistles, and above all in the farewell address at the Last
Supper, which he alone records! With most tender solicitude he cared
for the Mother of God, whom he was privileged to take under his pro-
tection. With an affectionate gesture the Church indicates, that Mary
today takes him to herself, for the station is at St. Mary Major. Would
that we also might be and remain thus until the Lord comes! Donee
veniam: that is the last word of today's proper chants. The Lord will
come again in the next Holy Communion; likewise at the evening of our
life. This word should, therefore, be to us, as it was to the early Chris-

Q6 The Holy Innocents

tians, a word of admonition, but at the same time a word of consolation
and joyful expectation.
Rass. gr., 7, 9, 417 ff.

THE HOLY INNOCENTS

(December 28)

INTROIT (Ps. 8:3)

1. Ex ore infantium, Deus, et 1. Out of the mouth of hahes and

lactentium perfecisti laudem 2. of sucklings, O God, thou hast per-

propter inimicos tuos. Ps. Domine fected praise 2. because of thine

Dominus noster: * quam admira- enemies. Ps. 0 Lord, our Lord: *

Mle est nomen tuum in universa how admirable is thy name in the

terral whole earth.

A holy awe hovers over the melody. Hence the three descending and
the three ascending fourths in these two short phrases. The first phrase
with its preponderating g has a cadence much favored by the second
mode; we heard it recently in the Introit of the Midnight Mass of
Christmas. The second phrase, in which / predominates, bears some
affinity to et lactentium of the first phrase.

The Holy Innocents offered God perfect praise; as the Collect of
the feast says, they glorified Him not by words, but by their death. It
is impossible for a creature to show greater glory than this to the Crea-
tor. Furthermore, their praise was absolutely pure. Of them today's
Lesson from the Apocalypse speaks as follows: ''They are virgins...
and in their mouth there was found no lie; for they are without spot be-
fore the throne of God."

Thus should the praise of God resound in the universal Church; it
should be pure and perfect. It ought to be not only an avowal in words,
but rather one which manifests itself in a holy life.

GRADUAL— OFFERTORY (Ps. 123: 7, 8)

Anima nostra, sicut passer, erep- Our soul hath been delivered as a

ia est de laqueo venantium. 'Si. 1. sparrow out of the snare of the

Laqueus contritus est, 2. et nos li- fowlers. ^. 1. The snare is broken,

herati sumus: 3. adjutorium no- 2. and we are delivered: 3. our help

strum in nomine Domini, qui fecit is in the name of the Lord, who

caelum et terram. hath made heaven and earth.

The Holy Innocents 67

Gradual and Offertory have the same text. In the Gradual it is di-
vided into corpus and verse; in the Offertory the first three phrases have
been drawn into one whole, the last phrase of the Gradual being omitted.
Both melodies pulse with rich and radiantly joyful life. The Gradual, it
is true, is a composition of various typical melodies, but here they are
joined. The melody for the Offertory, on the contrary, shows that it
originated from this very text. In the Gradual we find melismatic punctu-
ation on the final syllables of nostra, vendntium, contritus est, sumus, while
the Offertory broadens only the last syllable of sumus.

The Gradual begins solemnly and has a quiet cadence over nostra.
In the Offertory an ebullient, almost rollicking joy characterizes the first
neums. A lightly moving rendition is imperative. Like the lark this song
swings aloft exultant and jubilant; we have escaped from the snare of
the hunter. Erepta est is strongly emphasized in both chants. In the Offer-
tory it is a continuation of the motive over Anima. Over nostra in the
Offertory, first is sung a light bistropha after the clivis gf, followed by a
climacus. With de Idqueo the Gradual acquires the typical form; the
Offertory, however, continues in an exulting strain with the motive of
est, and yet a third time mounts up to high &b. To a certain extent the
last five notes over Idqueo, vendntium, nos, sumus form an antithesis to
this overflowing joy, or rather, bring it to a quiet conclusion.

On the third syllable of Idqueus the Gradual has a florid melisma,
such as we find over et lahorem on the second Sunday of Lent, Audi filia
on the feast of the Assumption (q.v.), and over visi sunt on January 19.
According to this it seems always to occur over the third syllable of the
first part of the phrase. A form occurs in the Offertory with which we
are acquainted from Epiphany (Tharsis); it is repeated over Idqueus
and liberdti. The reduplication of the virga between the two tristrophas
is well substantiated by the manuscripts. Perhaps it wishes to visualize
how cleverly the net had been spread, how well everything had been
prepared.. Contritus est has a triumphant ring; it produces the effect of
irony, when the same neums are repeated over (liherd)-ti. It seems as if
the little birds in their sunny heights, in the ethereal blue, looked down
with a smile upon that which human ingenuity had excogitated. The
melody continues to exult in a spirit of thanksgiving: We are free! Free
for all eternity. Here is inserted a melisma which is not found in the
Gradual for the Assumption; it occurs, however, in the Gradual Ecce
sacerdos magnus. Later we again meet with melodic turns from the
Gradual for the Assumption. By a happy coincidence, the verse attains
its summit at this spot, a brilliant enhancement compared with the pre-
ceding contritus est. The final phrase of the Gradual runs along in a reci-
tative manner, employing podatus to emphasize the word-accents. Do-

68 The Holy Innocents

mini is the only word over which we find a more florid melody; to some
extent also the closing syllable of terram, which corresponds to the final
syllable of the corpus. It is to the Creator of heaven and earth that the
Holy Innocents are indebted for all their happiness.

In the history of souls, the situation described by the verse is fre-
quently repeated. There is more than one Herod. And there are many
innocent children who have happily escaped all the snares of the fowlers
and the deceptive devices of the world. And many, very many, have
again been freed from them and can not sufficiently thank Christ for the
liberty He has granted them.

The feast has a TRACT with a plaintive text; it is composed in the
eighth mode. But if it be a Sunday, instead of the Tract the following
Alleluia-verse is sung.

ALLELUIA VERSE (Ps. 112: 1)

1. Laudate pueri Dominum, 2. 1. Praise the Lord, ye children,

laudate nomen Domini. 2. praise the name of the Lord.

The jubilus has the form a a^. Text and melody have been borrowed
from the second Alleluia-verse of the Saturday in Easter Week. We hear
the melody over Alleluia also on the feast of St. Thomas the Apostle.
Similarly, Laudate pueri recurs in the typical melody of the fourth mode,
for example, in the Alleluia-verse of the third Sunday of Advent.

With a voice clear as crystal the Holy Innocents fulfill this petition
and behest. They cry to us: Ye servants of the Lord, praise the Lord!

COMMUNION (Matt. 2: 18)

1. Vox in Rama audita est, plo- 1. A voice in Rama was heard,

ratus et ululatus: 2. Rachel plorans lamentation, and mourning: 2.
filios suos, 3. noluit consolari, quia Rachel bewailing her children, 3.
non sunt. and would not he comforted because

they are not.

Rachel, an ancestress of the Israelites, wanders about the heights
above Bethlehem, bewailing her captured children as if they were dead.
That occurred centuries before Herod's ruthless destruction of the in-
nocents; it was a type and a foreboding of the sorrow the mothers of
Bethlehem were to experience. But there is one mother's heart which
now, even after many centuries, still feels their grief: the Church. Hence,
in spite of the Christmas season and the feeling of the Sunday, she sings
this pathetic song. The inception on the fifth of the mode, the emphasis

Sunday within the Octave of Christmas 69

on the dominant and the pressus over plordtus are expressions of gripping
sorrow; they almost sound like a shrill outcry.

In the following phrase the minor seconds and the minor thirds
produce a gentler ring. The third phrase in its first half supports itself
on c. The mother's heart is inconsolable, because her children are no
more. However true and deep this sorrow may be, it never becomes
unruly or distraught. With dbg the melody comes to a close; est ends on
d, (ululä)-tus on 6, suos on g. Through this harmony the grief is temp-
ered.

SUNDAY WITHIN THE OCTAVE OF
CHRISTMAS
INTROIT (Wisd. 18: 14, 15)

1. Dum medium silentium tene- 1. While all things were in quiet
rent omnia, 2. et nox in suo cursu silence, 2. and the night was in
medium iter hdberet, 3. omnipo- the midst of her course, 3. thy al-
iens sermo tuus, Domine, 4. de mighty word, 0 Lord, 4. came from
caelis a regalihus sedihus venit. Ps. heaven, from thy royal throne. Ps.
Dominus regnavit, decorum in- The Lord hath reigned, he is clothed
dutus est: * indutus est Dominus with beauty: * the Lord is clothed
fortitudinem, et praecinxit se. with strength, and hath girded him-
self.

The text speaks of the liberation of Isarel from Egyptian slavery
and domination. In the middle of the night came God's almighty word
and freed His people. The angel struck Egypt; to the people of God,
however, he brought liberty. But today these words have an entirely
different import. They tell us of that quiet night in which not only an
angel, but in which the Angel of great counsel, the almighty Word of
God Himself, deserted His royal throne and descended to us from
heaven to be our Saviour. The former was a night of horrors for the
Egyptians. This quiet night is a blessed night for us, in which the angels
sing new songs, bringing the peace of God to men.

The ascent from the depths fits well to the mysterious text. No
little solemnity and majesty is conferred upon the song by means of
numerous fourths.

In the first phrase the first three groups show an ascent, but ever
again bend downwards: cd dgf, gag, gb]?agf, fgac ba, until finally the tris-

70 Sunday within the Octave of Christmas

tropha on c appears as victor. The first and second phrases exhibit a
textual parallelism, which is not observed by the melody. In its first
half, the second phrase recites on c, the third phrase on a. At this junc-
ture the recitation becomes still more sustained. With Domine the ca-
dence does not close as silentium in the first phrase with a clivis, but
changes to a podatus, exactly in the same manner and for the same rea-
son as the word sitis in the Intv oit Gaudete (q.v.). The large pause after
Domine may surprise some. But in this manner the powerful words can
fully exert their effect upon us: The almighty Word came down from
heaven. Similarly the low inception of de caelis seems to cry out to us:
Consider well what this means! We find the same quiet closing cadence
with other Introits of the same mode, for example, in the second Mass
of Christmas.

The Lord is King, even though He is lying in the manger. His robe
of glory is goodness and benevolence, and His strength is love, love even
unto death (Reck).

Very strikingly the psalmodic closing cadence does not set in on
the fifth last syllable, as is the rule, but on the sixth last.

GRADUAL (Ps. 44; 3, 2)

1. Speciosus forma prae filiis ho- 1. Thou art beautiful above the

minum: 2. diffusa est gratia in la- sons of men: 2. Grace is poured

biis tuis. ^. 1. Eructavit cor meum abroad in thy lips. ^. 1. My heart

verbum bonum: 2. dico ego opera hath uttered a good word: 2. I

mea Regi: 3. lingua mea calamus speak my works to the King: 3.

scribae velociter scribentis. my tongue is the pen of a scrivener

that writeth swiftly.

Now has appeared the most beautiful of the sons of men. Whoever
contemplates Him constantly discovers new attractions and has his
heart captivated. But however swiftly his pen may set down the move-
ments of his heart, still more beautiful and sublime things remain to be
said. None of the soul's faculties can gain an adequate comprehension
of Christ's life and still less how it conforms to His essence: Nee lauddre
sufficisl One thing, however, remains constantly before the singer's mind:
"I speak my works to the King."

For the first time in the new liturgical year we meet the third mode
in a Gradual-responsory. Of the various types employed, the one chosen
here is found on the Tuesday after the fourth Sunday of Lent, on the
feast of the most Precious Blood (July 1), and on the feast of the Crown
of Thorns (celebrated in some places on the Friday after Ash Wednesday).

Sunday within the Octave of Christmas 71

The melody toward the end of the corpus and the verse is extra-
ordinarily florid. Compare:

(diffü)-sa est gratia in Idhiis tuis;
(cä)-lamus scribae velociter scribentis.

The clivis at the close is to be prolonged. A variety of neums are
employed before the final word-accent; thus we have a tor cuius and a
bistropha praepunctis over (läbi)-is, while over (vel6ci)-ter there is a tor-
culus resupinus. Then the bistropha follows upon a syllable which is
even separated from the preceding neum by a pause. As may be seen by
comparing other Graduals of this type, the melisma beginning with
a g ab\? g f over tuis and (scri)-bentis must coincide with the word-accent.
As a result, we find the following grouping of endings for this Gradual
(I) and for that of the feast of the Precious Blood (II) :

I. (Idbiis) tu- is.
velociter (scri)- ben tis.

II. (et) sdn- gui- ne.
(tres) u- num sunt.

The dactyls are well fitted to the trochees. Corpus and verse have in
common a sort oi flexa (1) and a sort of middle cadence (2):

1. 2.

I. (for)- ma I. (homi)- num
(cor me)- urn (bo)- num

(Re)- gi

II. (ve)- nit II. (Chri)- stus
(cae)- lo (San)- ctus

(San)- guis

In the corpus the first phrase rises to high e; c dominates the second,
surpassed only once by d. Similarly we hear high e several times in the
verse, while its third phrase has the same melody as the second of the
corpus. The verse foregoes the development which enhances the artistic
worth of Graduals of other modes, as well as that of the third.

In more than one passage of the corpus, we receive the impression
that the piece is composed in the second mode, especially with the words
prae filiis hdmi-(num), Idbiis, gratia. We must assign the final cadence
of the last word a place among the wandering melismas, which are
found in the Graduals of various modes (of the first mode: in the verse
of the first Sunday of Advent over mihi; of the second mode: in the verse
for the Midnight Mass of Christmas over scabellum; of the fifth mode:
in the verse for the first Sunday after Pentecost over (ma)-la; of the

72 Sunday within the Octave of Christmas

seventh mode: in the corpus of the third Sunday after Pentecost over
te). Diffusa might well find place in a piece of the second mode; but with
g e, following upon / g, we are again led from the second mode.

The verse begins with an extremely pleasing motive. Over cor, the
passage gahcbccb of (eru)-ctdvit becomes bcdedeed. The announce-
ment of the sublime word with verbum bonum and the signification of
this word at mea Regi bear the same melody. But that is only accidental.
We are struck by the recitation on a over lingua mea cä-(lamus).

ALLELUIA VERSE (Ps. 92: 1)

1. Dominus regnavit, decor em in- 1. The Lord hath reigned, he is

duit: 2. induit Dominus fortitudi- clothed with beauty: 2. The Lord is
nem, et praecinxit se virtute. clothed with strength, and hath

girded himself with power.

That which was only recited in the psalm-verse of the Introit is de-
veloped here in an energetic manner. We heard this melody for the first
time in the second Mass for Christmas. Over (alle)-lüia the climacus
and pes lead to the light pes subbipunctis, the apex of the piece; in the
second member the climacus g f e with the preceding interval of a fifth
corresponds to it. Both members have the same closing formula. The verse
begins in a most festal manner. Over decorum the notes are to be divided
into quiet two-note groups; induit closes like (ado)— rate Dominum in
the Alleluia of the third Mass for Christmas, and in both cases the fol-
lowing phrase has the same intonation. Through the ascent to g and its
protraction, fortitudinem receives an admirable preparation. Now it can
resound and echo. The close of virtute exhibits the archaic form.

Repeatedly the Church sings of the beauty and the power of Him
who has appeared.

OFFERTORY (Ps. 92: 1, 2)

1. Deus enim firmavit orbem ter- 1. God hath established the world,

rae, qui non commovebitur: 2. para- which shall not be moved: 2. thy

ta sedes tua ex tunc, 3. a saeculo throne, O God, is prepared from of

iu es. old, thou art from everlasting.

The power inherent in this song shows itself in the very first inter-
val, a major third. If we substitute a minor third, the significance of
the major third at once becomes apparent. Expressive of power are the
numerous fourths, and the five tritones, which, ascending or descend-
ing run through the whole. It seems to be a song from another world,
a hymn of eternity and of the throne of God. If God now stands before

Sunday within the Octave of Christmas 73

us as the Creator and Preserver of the universe, then His dignity and
His dominion must be acknowledged by all. Today's Gospel, however,
tells us that many will contradict and condemn it. On this Sunday — for
it was already sung in the second Mass for Christmas — it registers a
protest against this attitude of men; it is a solemn avowal of God's
divine prerogatives.

Qui non in the first phrase is influenced by the preceding orhem. The
second phrase predominates over the first. In God's own good time heaven
and earth will be destroyed, but His throne will stand unshakeable unto
all eternity. Here the rendition must gain in inner warmth and convic-
tion. Care must be had that Deus is not neglected. But above all, follow-
ing the delicate direction of the annotated manuscripts, both torculus of
tunc must be taken broadly. Special solemnity ought also to mark the
ending with tu es.

Today the altar is the throne of God. From it also proceeds the
strength which makes our hearts to become worthy thrones of God. And
we shall pledge unflinching fidelity to God's rights.

COMMUNION (Matt. 2: 20)

1. Tolle puerum et matrem ejus, 1. Take the child and his mother ,

et vade in terram Israel: 2. de- and go into the land of Israel: 2.

fundi sunt enim, qui quaerebant for they are dead that sought the

animam pueri. life of the child.

We are struck at first sight by the passages with which both phrases
close: a c d h a h g gag g and b a c h a b g gag g. The beginnings of the
two phrases also show considerable similarity. Matrem has a tender and
fervent ring.

Here we perceive how the Child has become a sign which will be
contradicted (cf. the Gospel). Already men have sought His life. But
His persecutors have found their death; the Child with His Mother and
St. Joseph, on the contrary, are allowed to return from exile to their
native land.

Since that time, many persecutors have risen against Him and His
Church. But they have all met their doom. Church History might write
a marvelous continuation of Lactantius' work, entitled De mortibus per-
secutorum (Concerning the Deaths of the Persecutors), composed in the
fourth century. Under the protection of our Lady and of St. Joseph, the
Church's special patron, the Church serenely pursues her way to the
Promised Land.

* * * *

74 The Circumcision of Our Lord

THE CIRCUMCISION OF OUR LORD
(January 1)

INTROIT, GRADUAL, OFFERTORY, and COMMUNION as in

the Third Mass for Christmas.

ALLELUIA VERSE (Hebr. 1: 1, 2)

1. Multifarie olim Deus loquens 1. God who (at sundry times and)

in prophetis, 2. novissime diehus in divers manners, spoke in times
istis 3. locutus est nobis inFilio suo. past hy the prophets, 2. last of all

in these days 3. hath spoken to us

by his Son.

Without a doubt the emphatic words in this passage are those of
the second and third phrases. They contain the burden of the joy of
Christmastide : in these days the Son of God has come to us and speaks
to us; in this manner is fulfilled that for which the bygone centuries
yearned and what the prophets foretold. This it is which causes the
Apostle to exult and to celebrate the divine splendor of the newborn
Babe in the Alleluia-verse. We heard his words previously in the Epistle
of the third Mass of Christmas.

The devout and florid melody over nobis tells us that we are the
fortunate ones, since we are privileged to live in the fullness of time; to
us the Son of God addresses His words. The melodic summit, however,
is attained over prophetis. However great the claim these men may have
upon our esteem, placing the emphasis on this word strikes us as some-
what strange.

In quite an unwonted manner a form of expression is here met with
which does not confine itself to the individual words, but reproduces a
single unified feeling — joy over the fullness of time. Of this joy the en-
tire piece sings.

Alleluia develops in an ascending line (arsis), the first phrase in a
descending line (thesis), while the second and third phrases exhibit a
combination of the two. The thesis has a short melody of seven, eight,
and seven notes respectively. The ascending passage d f a c b a d over
-lu- grows out of the preceding f a c g ä g, and continues its effect in df
g f d f over prophetis, in g a f e d d, and in c d f e d f over istis. In the
second member we note an instance of a major descending sixth. In the
subsequent quiet seconds the tension relaxes. We are well acquainted
with the close of the jubilus from the Alleluia for Holy Saturday and
that for the first Sunday of Advent.

Feast of the Holy Name of Jesus 75

The first two words of the verse repeat the melody of the first mem-
"bers of Alleluia and close on the tonic. All other pauses occur on the
dominant, which is somewhat fatiguing. Over Deus two-note groups are
to be sung; over nobis, between the clivis, lightly moving bistrophas.
The whole is to be rendered with considerable warmth. In Filio suo re-
peats the melody of Alleluia with its juhilus.

We are struck by the large range of the piece, which is similar in
this respect to the Gloria in the ninth Mass, which also belongs to the
seventh mode. This melody can be traced to the eleventh century.

FEAST OF THE HOLY NAME OF JESUS

(On the Sunday between January 2 and 5, or, if no
Sunday occurs between these two dates, on January 2.)

INTROIT (Philipp 2: 10, 11)

1 . In nomine Jesu omne genu 1 . In the name of Jesus let every

flectatur, caelestium, terrestrium et knee how of those that are in heaven,

infernorum: 2. et omnis lingua con- on earth, and under the earth: and

fiteatur, quia Dominus Jesus Chri- let every tongue confess that the

stus in gloria est Dei Patris. Ps. Lord Jesus Christ is in the glory of

Domine Dominus noster:* quam God the Father. Ps. 0 Lord, our

admirdbile est nomen tuum in uni- Lord:* how wonderful is thy name

versa terra. in the whole earth.

Today's Introit again is a true overture to the liturgy of the Mass.
The very first words provide the leitmotif: In nomine Jesu. Except that
it substitutes the word Jesu for Domini, the first phrase, text and mel-
ody, has been borrowed from the Introit of Wednesday in Holy Week.
We find a similar melody in the middle and at the close of this phrase,
which also brings the first member of the second phrase to a conclusion.
In the former edition of these chants, the melody from caelestium to in-
fernorum shows a descending line, evidently for the sake of tone-paint-
ing. The notation of the ancient manuscripts, however, shows a reci-
procal movement, and that for internal reasons. It cannot be but that
the inhabitants of heaven bend their knee. And upon earth numerous
souls will always be found who render this homage from a motive of ex-
treme reverence. But the striking thing is, that those in the nether re-
gions also must beiid the knee. Let it be the singer's care to emphasize
this fact.

76 Feast of the Holy Name of Jesus

In the second phrase the melodic line is raised, bringing omnis
lingua ("let every tongue confess") brilliantly to the fore. The original
is still more effective, since it assigns the reason: "He [Christ] humbled
Himself, becoming obedient unto death. . ." Here, however, the reason
forms the second and lower part of the phrase and limps somewhat.
The rendition will compensate for this defect. Beginning with Jesws
Christus ( = the third and fourth syllables of terrestrium) , the two pieces
again have the same text and melody.

"The Lord Jesus Christ is in the glory of God the Father." Thus
does the Introit wish to stress the sublimity of the name of Jesus. This
name is wonderful also upon earth and to be held in honor by all;
but many despise and dishonor it. We shall, therefore, repeat the In-
troit with so much deeper reverence and in the spirit of reparation. What
we today so ardently wish and pray for will one day be realized to its
fullest extent — when the Lord will appear in the glory of the Father.

Rieg, Predigten I, 95 ff.

GRADUAL (Ps. 106:47)

1. Salvos fac nos, Domine Deus 1. Save us, 0 Lord our God, 2.

noster, 2. et congrega nos de na- and gather us from among the na-

tionihus: 3. ut confiteamur nomini tions: 3. that we may give thanks to

sancto tuo, 4. et gloriemur in gloria thy holy name, 4. and may glory in

tua. In. 1. Tu, Domine, pater noster, thy praise. ^. 1. Thou, 0 Lord, art

et redemptor noster: 2. a saeculo our father and redeemer: 2. thy

nomen tuum. name is from eternity.

The preceding Epistle closed with the words: "There is no other
name under heaven given to men, whereby we must be saved." The
Gradual draws out this thought and prays: "Save us, O Lord." The fur-
ther petition (Isa. 63: 16) proceeds from the heart of the exile; it is ex-
pressive of an immense yearning for the homeland and the services of
the Temple. There the pious soul would like to praise the name of the
Lord and to glory but in one thing, the honor of the Lord.

There is close correspondence between the closing syllables of
(Deus) noster and tuo; both are followed by the same ascent of a fourth.
We find the same thing over Domine in the verse (cf. the Gradual for
Quinquagesima Sunday). Tua and tuum, the closing words of the corpus
and the verse respectively, have extraordinarily florid melodies.

The verse begins and closes like the Gradual for the feast of St.
Michael (September 29, q.v.). But from pater to nomen the melody is
borrowed from the verse of Passion Sunday (q.v.). More than usual life
and fluency must characterize the singing of this protracted piece. Pas-

Feast of the Holy Name of Jesus 77

sages like nomini tuo and the tender Tu, Domine allow of great warmth
in their rendition.

If the Introit praised the grandeur of the name of Jesus, the bur-
den of this song is: O God, Thou art my Father and my Redeemer. How
He is Redeemer and Saviour was demonstrated in the healing of the
lame man by the invocation of the name of our Lord Jesus Christ of
Nazareth.

ALLELUIA VERSE (Ps. 144: 21)

1. Laudem Domini loquetur os 1. My mouth shall speak the

meum, 2. et benedicat omnis caro praise of the Lord, 2. and let all
nomen sanctum ejus. flesh bless his holy name.

This melody comes from the Sunday within the octave of Corpus
Christi (q.v.). Laudem Domini, which exerts an influence on the subse-
quent (loque)-tur os meum, corresponds to omnis caro while et benedicat
corresponds to nomen sanctum ejus.

The Alleluia- verse wishes above all to glorify the holy name of Jesus.

OFFERTORY (Ps. 85: 12, 5)

1. Confitebor tibi, Domine Dens 1. / will praise thee, O Lord my

meus, in toto cor de meo, 2. et glo- God, with my whole heart, 2. and I

rificabo nomen tuum in aeternum: will glorify thy name forever: 3. for

3. quoniam tu Domine, suavis et thou, O Lord, art sweet and mild: 4.

mitis es: 4. et multae misericordiae and plenteous in mercy to all that

omnibus invocantibus te, 5. alleluia, call upon thee, 5. alleluia.

The greater part of this melody has been borrowed from the sec-
ond Sunday after Epiphany. An easy explanation offers itself for this:
formerly the feast of the Holy Name was celebrated on that Sunday.
The energetic melody fits very well to the text of the new feast.

Analysis shows that the first phrase is formed out of the first and
second phrases and the close of the third phrase of the original compo-
sition. Inserted there we find the second jubilate with its incomparably
beautiful climax, which, unfortunately, is omitted here. The second
phrase of today's Offertory, marking its summit, corresponds to the
fourth of the original: venite et audite. . .A song of glorification here be-
comes a resounding festal hymn. (Ae)-ternum repeats the melody of
corde in the first phrase. The third and fourth phrases exhibit peculiari-
ties. Just like the Introit, Gradual, and Alleluia, so the Offertory stresses
a special and new quality of the divine Being. While the former empha-

78 Feast of the Holy Name of Jesus

sized God's sublimity and holiness, the latter places His goodness and
mildness and fullness of His mercy in the fore. In this resounding song^
of praise a tender note insinuates itself — rapture at the Lord's sweetness.
Mitis in a way is a repetition of sudvis. Alleluia, here treated as an
independent phrase, usually brings Offertories of the first mode to a.
close during Eastertide; but the original, peculiarly, here has the shorter
form, generally used at the end of Communions.

COMMUNION (Ps. 85: 9, 10)

1. Omnes gentes quascumque 1. All the nations thou hast

fecisti, venient, et adordbunt coram te, made shall come and adore before

Domine, 2. et glorificahunt nomen thee, O Lord, 2. and they shall glo-

tuum: 3. quoniam magnus es tu, et rify thy name: 3. for thou art great

faciens mirdbilia: 4. tu es Deus and dost wonderful things: 4. Thou

solus, alleluia. art God alone, alleluia.

The melody has been drawn from the sixteenth Sunday after Pente-
cost. There is, however, a difference in the phrasing of several passages;
the close over Deus solus is more fluent than in the original, while mag-
nus es tu seems to have been composed specially for this text.

All the nations, says the psalm, shall come and adore. How many
of them have come today? We at least shall glorify His name after He
has entered into us again in Holy Communion. Let us say to Him:
Thou alone art God, art my God!

In content and feeling the Communion is related to the Introit.
We are to glorify God's name because He is great. Thus two virtues are
exemplified in the Mass chants: reverence for the most holy name of
Jesus (God Himself chose it), and love and confidence. With what ten-
der love did not the Mother of God speak this name; and millions of
men have experienced that Jesus is their Saviour and Redeemer.

VIGIL OF EPIPHANY

The chants are the same as those for the Sunday within the octave
of Christmas.

The Epiphany of Our Lord Jesus Christ 79

THE EPIPHANY OF OUR LORD

JESUS CHRIST

(January 6)

The entire liturgy of today's Mass treats of the royal dignity of
Him who has appeared and revealed Himself. Indeed, the feast of Christ-
mas already stresses this dignity. But occasionally it also permits us a
glimpse of the divine Child in the manger (Puer natus est nobis), and
the magic of His charm entrances us. Today everything has the im-
print of Christ's kingship and summons the entire world to pay hom-
age to Him.

INTROIT (Mai. 3: 1)

1. Ecce advenit dominator Domi- 1. Behold the Lord the Ruler is

nus: 2. et regnum in manu ejus, 3. come: 2. and kingdom is in his
et potestas, et imperium. Ps. Deus, hand, 3. and power and dominion,
judicium tuum Regi da: *et justi- Ps. Give to the King thy judgment,
tiam tuam Filio Regis. O God:* and to the King's Son thy

justice.

Over this melody must be inscribed the words: majestic, sublime!
Like a king's mantle it spreads itself over the text. Beginning with the
grand notes of the Per omnia saecula, the introduction to the Preface,
it emphasizes the word advenit increasingly, over dominator leaps an
interval of a fourth, which supports itself on the dominant /, lets this
dominant resound- — it is really the dominant here— and over Dominus
rises above it. One seems to see the ruler making his formal entrance,
letting-his diamonds sparkle. The second phrase again shows an ascend-
ing fourth and the clear dominant, which it accentuates still more by
means of the pressus over manu and ejus. The repetition of the same
motive over these words fits well to the majestic bearing of the whole,
and toward the end brings a modulation of exquisite construction on the
full tone below the tonic. The third phrase gives plastic form to the word
potestas (the descending fourth is to be well brought out) ; several times
it extends above the dominant and closes with a passage corresponding
to Dominus in the first phrase.

We may well adduce, as a parallel to the triple division of the In-
troit, the Christmas hymn: "Lo, how a rose e'er blooming" — no doubt
one of the most beautiful. Here also the first and third phrases have

80 The Epiphany of Our Lord Jesus Christ

corresponding passages, and the middle phrase modulates in the lower
fourth.

We ought not to be astonished at the occurrence of the pressus on
the unaccented syllables in the corresponding passages over (D6)-mi-
(nus) and (impe)-ri-(um). Thus the dactylic words are rendered with
greater ease and majesty, without jerks or friction; nevertheless they
give prominence to the preceding accented syllable by means of the pre-
dominating pes suhhipunctis.

Wagner (III, 286) calls attention to the fact that thi? entire melody
is composed of undulations, each of which attains its melodic summit
on the accented syllable of the principal word: Ecce advenit — domindtor
Dominus — et regnum in manu ejus — et potestas — et imperium.

How the centuries watched for the arrival of this King and how
ardent were their longings! How often have not the prayers and chants
of Advent cried: Veni Dominel What a height did not these yearnings
attain in the great 0-antiphons immediately preceding the feast of
Christmas! Even on the Saturday of Ember Week, in Advent this cry
was wrung from the heart of the Church: "Come, 0 Lord, and show
Thy face to us. Thou that sittest upon the Cherubim: and we shall be
saved"; this Veni acts as a prelude to out Ecce. Now the sighs have been
heard and the longing has been stilled. Now we hear re-echo through-
out the land: "Behold the Lord the Ruler is come." But He does not
come empty-handed. He bears kingdoms in His hands: the kingdom of
truth and of grace and the guarantee for the kingdom of glory. He gives
us a share in His power (potestas). He gives us the power (potestdtem) to
become children of God and therefore co-heirs of His kingdom.

If today kings, princes in the realm of knowledge and research, find
no rest until they come to Him, until they prostrate themselves before
Him, humble their intelligence and will under His scepter, and with an
earnest faith adore Him, the Child, then we see how this Babe reveals
Himself as a royal Ruler, how He captures the hearts of men and fills
them with happiness.

The psalm-verse emphasizes the judicial power of this King in the
form of a wish. Still more does Psalm 71^ — the royal psalm — show how
Christ is the advocate of the poor, how He bestows peace and bread
and rich blessings on them, how He reigns over all nations and all times,
how all the peoples approach to pay Him homage.

As early as the eleventh century the melody of this Introit has been
adapted to the popular Introit Salve sancta Parens^ sung on the feasts

1 Kirchenmusik, 11, 33 ff.; Revue, 17, 75, 35, 13 ff.; N. Sch., 2S1 ; Benediktinische Monat-
schrift, 3, 20 ff.

The Epiphany of Our Lord Jesus Christ 81

of the Blessed Virgin. Thus we greet with the same song both the royal
Child and the queen Mother. In this latter melody we possibly prefer
to sing the melodic forms over the accented syllables Re-(gem) and
(saecu)-ld-(rum), which occur in today's Introit, over the unaccented
syllables (D6)-mi-(nus) and (impe)-ri-(um). Less happy was the placing
of the pes with its fourth, which in today's Introit gives prominence to
the word potestas and its word-accent, on the unaccented syllable of
(sae)-cu-(la).

During the entire octave the same chants are sung; in fact, the en-
tire Proper is the same. But on the octave day itself we hear these words
of St. John the Baptist in the Gospel: Ecce Agnus Dei — "Behold the
Lamb of God, behold Him who taketh away the sins of the world."
Then the Ecce of the present Introit is vested with a new harmony of
marvelous tenderness. The Ruler comes, not to place burdens upon our
shoulders, but to relieve us of them and to place them upon His own
shoulders, as the Apostle says: "Who His own Self bore our sins in His
body upon the tree."

GRADUAL (Isa. 60:6, 1)

1. Omnes de Saha venient, 2. au- 1. All they from Saba shall come,

rum at thus deferentes, et laudem 2. bringing gold and frankincense
Domino annuntiantes. jl. 1. Surge, and showing forth praise to the Lord,
et illuminare Jerusalem: 2. quia '^. 1. Arise and be enlightened, O
gloria Domini super te orta est. Jerusalem: 2. for the glory of the

Lord is risen upon thee.

Rarely is the connection between the Epistle and Gospel and the
intervening chants so close as on the present feast. The Epistle closes
with the words Omnes de Saba venient . . ., with which today's Gradual
opens. The words which compose the Gradual- verse, Surge. . ., occurred
at the beginning of the Lesson. Gifts and light, the two leading thoughts,
are melodically spun out. For the Gradual has the same function as the
chorus in the ancient tragedies. The thoughts ought not to be heedlessly
spoken; they should linger in our minds, penetrate into the heart, rouse
it, and incite it to imitation.

Over (annuntiän)-tes we find repeated the initial motive of Omnes,
which recurs in an extended form over Saba. The inception on the upper
fourth over aurum emphasizes the costliness of the gift. Over thus de-
ferentes we hear a resolved major chord, which occurs three times more
in this corpus, and enhances the harmony of the song the more, in that
it is regularly woven into the melodic woof with extreme dexterity.

82 The Epiphany of Our Lord Jesus Christ

The verse Surge immediately sets in on the upper fifth. It resounds
the more energetically, since at that time Jerusalem did not compre-
hend the call and did not heed the admonition. Its people stayed at home
and let the Magi go to Bethlehem alone, where the latter discovered the
Light of life, the source of their happiness.

In the corpus we sang c a f; more forcibly in the verse d a f, which
recurs again at the end of the florid melisma of Surge. Domini closes in
a similar manner (f d c and d c a). Illuminare ("be enlightened") marks
the summit of the entire song, not only for the eye, but much more so
for the ear. The melody portrays a development and growth like the
day, from the first gray streaks of dawn to its noonday splendor. And
how regular is this gradation! In the upper third the quietly ascending
motive a f g a eis repeated as c a c d /^. This high /^ marks the crowning
point. To this large arsis Jerusalem comes as a lingering thesis; gloria
Domini takes up the musical arsis again and thus points out why Jeru-
salem can become all light, all bliss. The ascending fourth over orta est
shines forth in glittering splendor. But with the final neums of est comes
a pleasant sensation of warm and beneficent light, which streams into
the soul and envelopes it.

We hear this same melody on the feast of Christ the King. (Gre-
goriusbote, 42, 148 ff.).

"All they from Saba shall come." To these omnes we also, who
with the Magi have been called to the true faith, belong. We were en-
lightened in holy Baptism, have entirely become light; at that time the
glory of the Lord appeared above us while countless others still groveled
in the darkness of infidelity. Hence we also bring our gifts — a will of
gold and the incense of adoration. Let us likewise offer to the Lord our
songs of praise and fervent thanksgiving.

Would that all might become light, that the glory of the Lord might
shine over all, and that all might come to Him with gifts and songs!

ALLELUIA VERSE (Matt. 2: 2)

1. Vidimus stellam ejus 2. in 1. We have seen his star 2. in the

Oriente, 3. et venimus cum muner- East, 3. and are come with gifts (4)
bus (4) adorare Dominum. to adore the Lord.

If the Gradual was a complement and continuation of the Epistle,
then the Alleluia-verse acts as a prelude to the Gospel from which it is
excerpted. Even though Herod, and all Jerusalem with him, was per-
turbed at these words of the Magi, only the latter had the courage to
speak them and determination enough to execute them, and to rest only
when they had actually placed their gifts at the feet of the true King.

The Epiphany of Our Lord Jesus Christ 83

The melody was explained in the third Mass of Christmas.
Following the division there given, it will suffice to add these few
indications:

1. Vidimus = S. et venimus

1. stellam ejus = S. cum munerihus

2. in Oriente (4.) adordre Dominum.

OFFERTORY (Ps. 71: 10, 11)

1. Reges Thar sis et insulae mun- 1. The kings of Thar sis and the

era afferent: 2. reges Arahum et isles shall offer gifts: 2. the kings of
Saha dona adducent: 3. et adora- the Arabians and of Saba shall
hunt eum omnes reges terrae, 4. bring presents: a. and all the kings
omnes gentes servient ei. of the earth shall adore him, 4. all

nations shall serve him.

In our mind's eye we see an almost interminable procession of those
bringing their presents. The Magi from the East have found and still
find numerous emulators. These are souls who do not fall short of the
"kings" in readiness and joy of sacrifice, in their royal disposition; souls
who offer everything they have and are as a sacrifice to Christ, who are
a living holocaust, who constitute a perpetual act of adoration. Their
sacrifice unites itself with the Eucharistie Sacrifice like the drop of water
which the priest mixes with the wine in the chalice at the Offertory.
Then comes the Consecration. In Holy Communion Christ Himself be-
comes their sacrificial food, their wedding banquet. For in these gifts,
as the Secret prays, "are offered now no longer gold, frankincense, and
myrrh, but He whom those mystic offerings signified is immolated and
received; Jesus Christ. . ."

This Offertory has two parts consisting of two phrases each, which
represent a grammatical parallelism. The first part speaks of the sac-
rificial.action which kings of particular countries perform, the second of
that of all kings and of all nations. The first refers rather to the external
act, while the second refers to its spirit, the act of adoration.

In the first part both phrases have the same range (f-e) and a simi-
lar ending. Offerent develops itself over adducent. In the second part,
also, the two phrases have the same range (f-d) and a similar ending:
the one time on g, preceded by h, the other time on /, preceded by &[?
Munera Offerent shows a similar relationship. The tense c hb a b h a finds

a pleasant resolution in the subsequent a gg f g g f. It must be said

that this passage, setting in on the low fifth, with its ascending fourth
and the delicate arrangement which follows, is one of the most beau-
tiful of plain songs. It compels the attention of the hearer. The kings

84 The Epiphany of Our Lord Jesus Christ

come not to show their power, not to conquer countries and to subject
peoples, but to submit to the yoke of Christ, to adore Him, and to serve
Him. The piece opens with a fanfare; the two tristrophas connected by
a virga were already met with (cf . the Offertory for the feast of the Holy
Innocents); then astonishment seizes the singer. In the second phrase
the swelling of the melody is to be noted: gab, gac, fgacd, acde,
and then the expanding cadence with its solemn seconds. The second
group over Saha is an extension of the first.

The first part demands a lively tempo; the second will be consider-
ably subdued. The singer is thoroughly imbued with the spirit of rever-
ence and adoration. Into this spirit the three descending fourths (only
occurring here) fit admirably. In the fourth phrase, over omnes and
gentes respectively, a torculus and a light bistropha are to be sung, yet
so that an onward urge runs through the piece to 6b, where a relaxation
of the tension sets in.

It is striking that this Offertory, as do most of those in the fifth
mode, with the exception of that of the fifteenth Sunday after Pente-
cost, does not extend to high /.

The melody is very suitably employed in the votive Mass for the
Propagation of the Faith. In the second part of this extended Offertory
occur motives from the Offertory of the Sunday within the octave of
Epiphany.

COMMUNION (Matt. 2:2)

1. Vidimus stellam ejus in Ori- 1. We have seen his star in the

ente, 2. et venimus cum munerihus East, 2. and are come with gifts to
adorare Dominum. adore the Lord.

The first phrase moves joyously. The second breathes the spirit of
adoration. Only with venimus do we perceive an echo of the joy of the
first phrase. For the closing formula of the first phrase the cadence of
the psalm tone of the fourth mode, h g e, served as a model. The tritone
over Oriente-not so \'ery disturbing since a twofold h has preceded it-
heightens the peculiar, one might almost say the Oriental, effect of this
passage. In three words the unaccented "i" of the second last syllable
regularly receives melodic prominence. The fact that the common people
accented the Latin language differently from the learned class may be
the cause of this; without a doubt plain song was influenced consider-
ably by this so-called "vulgar" Latin.^

1 Caecilienvereinsorgan, 49, 124 ff.; N. Sch. 237.

Feast of the Holy Family 85

FEAST OF THE HOLY FAMILY

(The Sunday within the Octave of Epiphany)

INTROIT (Prov. 23: 24, 25)

1. Exsultet gaudio pater justi, 1. Let the father of the Just One

gaudeat pater tuus et mater tua, 2. exult with joy, let thy father and

et exsultet quae genuit te. Ps. Quam thy mother rejoice, 2. and let her

dilecta tdbernacula tua, Domine that bore thee he glad. Ps. How lovely

virtuteml* concupiscit et deficit ani- are thy tabernacles, O Lord of

ma mea in atria Domini. hostsl* my soul longeth and faint-

eth for the courts of the Lord.

Here we address the divine Child. We rejoice in the good fortune
which St. Joseph and the Mother of God ha\e been chosen to share,
namely, that they can call Him their own, their Child, for whose com-
ing the centuries longed and prayed. It was a purely interior joy, yet so
mighty that before it all the world paled into nothingness. Hence this
jubilant melody.

This piece is composed of various parts of other Introits. The mel-
ody over the first two words we shall hear again in the second phrase
of the Introit for the Wednesday in Easter Week over the words quod
vobis pa-(rdtum), and at the beginning of the Introit on the Friday after
Ash Wednesday. Gaudeat Pater tuus sounds like the passage over the
words de Idqueo pedes on the third Sunday in Lent. Et mater tua, which
limps somewhat, is the same as patris tui on the Wednesday in Easter
Week. The entire second phrase resembles the third for the thirteenth
Sunday after Pentecost. This text, so full of movement and energy, has
received a fitting melody.

The small house in Nazareth for many years sheltered (tdbernacula)
the Lord of hosts; there the angels familiarly came and went. The taber-
nacle, further, is the house of God, in which He dwells with all His
strengthening graces. Toward it we ought to turn with yearning, that
we may also be about His Father's business, as is related in today's
Gospel. Every Christian family, every human heart ought likewise to
be a tabernacle of God.

GRADUAL (Ps. 26:4)

1. JJnam petii a Domino, hanc 1. One thing have I asked of the

requiram: 2. ut inhabitem in domo Lord, this will I seek after: 2. that
Domini omnibus diebus vitae meae. I may dwell in the house of the Lord

86 Feast of the Holy Family

jH. 1. Beati qui habitant in domo all the days of my life. ^. 1. Blessed
tua, Domine: 2. in saecula saecu- are they that dwell in thy house, O
lorum laudahunt te. Lord: 2. they shall praise thee for

ever and ever.

This Gradual borrows its first phrase and half of the second, text
and melody, from the Friday after Ash Wednesday. The last four words
are not given there, but we do find the closing cadence of the corpus.
The melody of the verse, beginning with the third last neum over vi-
deam, is likewise taken from the same Friday. In both phrases, however,
the original avoids the somewhat protracted recitation on c. The second
last syllable extends to high d. But this seems to be the rule when a
Gradual of the present type closes with a dactylic rhythm (cf. orta est
in the Gradual for Epiphany).

In truth, Nazareth was the home of the Lord. What was the Temple
with all its splendor and glory, what its feasts, compared to the liturgy
celebrated in the holy house and the divine praise which ascended thence
to heaven? May the Holy Family obtain for us the privilege of living in
the house of the Lord all the days of our life, that we may be allowed to
join our voices in the unending praise of the Trinity.

ALLELUIA VERSE (Isa. 45, 15)

1. Vere tu es Rex absconditus, 2. l.Verilythouarta Hidden King,

Deus Israel Salvator. 2. the God of Israel, the Saviour.

The following Gospel relates how the Saviour remained for three
days in the Temple, conversing with the doctors and "asking them
questions," pursuing His "Father's business." Then He went down to
Nazareth, concealing His divine dignity and power, and was subject to
Mary and Joseph. Thus was His life spent in secret, in absolute quiet.
As long as He sojourned at Nazareth, the wide world knew nothing of
Him, not even Palestine, not even Jerusalem. When later He chose His
disciples, they knew nothing or very little of Him. And yet He was
King, God, and Redeemer. Even in His quiet and secluded retreat He
was at the work of redemption.

This melody is a jewel of plain song. Alleluia supplies the melodic
material for the first words of the verse. It unites rest and movement.
The first member of the jubilus gains in strength from its energetic
fourths; it has an echo in (ab)-sc6nditus. In its first half the second mem-
ber of the jubilus supports itself on Alleluia, in its second half on the
first member of the jubilus.

Feast of the Holy Family 87

OFFERTORY (Luke 2: 22)

1. Tulerunt Jesum parentes ejus 1. The parents of Jesus carried

in Jerusalem, 2. ut sister ent eum Him to Jerusalem, 2. to present
Domino. him to the Lord.

One feels almost sorry that the wonderfully profound Laetentur
caeli of the Midnight Mass of Christmas had to sacrifice its music to
this purely historical text. But let us inquire more deeply. There is more
here than the narration of a simple historical event. The fact that this
very melody has been chosen suggests another thought. What joy was
felt in heaven over the sacrifice which the Holy Family offered in this
presentation of Jesus! It is just this that transfigures the melody: that
Jesus, Mary, and Joseph offered this sacrifice to the heavenly Father in
complete and joyous resignation to His will. Their sacrificial spirit ought
to show us the sentiments with which we should be animated when we
attend the Eucharistie Sacrifice,

As far as the word-accents are concerned, the adaptation of the
melody is excellent. The perfection of the original with its development
over ante faciem Domini is not attained, it must be freely admitted.
Jerusalem predominates over the more significant sisterent.

COMMUNION (Luke 2: 51)

1. Descendit Jesus cum eis, et 1. Jesus went down with them,

venit Nazareth, 2. et erat suhditus and came to Nazareth, 2. and was
Ulis. subject to them.

Some may wish to see a kind of tone-painting in the descending
line over descendit, and perhaps find the low pitch of suhditus extremely
suitable for this word. As a matter of fact, however, another of the
Christmas melodies has been borrowed here. The brilliant Viderunt of
the third Mass for Christmas served as a model. The adaptation is not
so good. Because the text was too long in some respects and too short
in others, some parts of the melody had to be stretched, others cur-
tailed. Thus (Ndza)-reth is not an entirely happy copy of eis. Then,
while in the original the melody over salutdre has an exultant ring, it
here stands over the insignificant erat. Again, the melody fitted to the
spondees of the original (terrae, Dei) is here distributed over the dactyls
Nazareth and suhditus, with evident harm to its fluency.

This text, so full of meaning, demands a fitting rendition. If we
would desert our imagined greatness, if we would go to Nazareth and
become truly spiritual, then obedience to God and to rightly constituted
authority would not appear so difficult, then that peace which enveloped

88 Second Sunday after Epiphany

and filled the house of Nazareth would come also into our hearts, into
our families, and would permeate whole nations.

SECOND SUNDAY AFTER EPIPHANY

INTROIT (Ps. 65:4)

1. Omnes terra adoret te, Deus, et 1. Let all the earth adore thee,

psallat tibi: 2. psalmum dicat no- and sing to thee: 2. let it sing a
mini tuo, Altissime. Ps. Jubilate psalm to thy name, O Most High.
Deo omnis terra, psalmum dicite Ps. Shout with joy to God, all the
nomini ejus: date gloriam laudi earth, * sing ye a psalm to his

name: give glory to Ms praise.

Gone are the shepherds who knelt before the manger, departed the
Magi who had there adored and offered their gifts. But the spirit of
adoration which animated all of them has remained. It continues to
thrive in the Church. This supplies the theme for the Introits of the
first, second, and third Sundays after Epiphany. Our adoration must
be like mighty granite blocks, over which immense vaults raise them-
selves, resounding with the joyous songs of praise. We are not only to
prostrate ourselves trembling before the divine majesty; each of these
Introits incites us to sing and to rejoice, for we find these words promi-
nent: adoret and psallat.

Melodically, also, these thoughts are entwined into one. Each be-
gins with a similar motive. Psalmum dicat nomini corresponds to omnis
terra adoret, with its ascent to c and the descending fourth. The second
phrase is more serene. Te Deus finds an echo in psallat tibi and even in
tuo. The second last (unaccented) syllable of (Altis)-sime carries groups
of neums, in order that a quieter descent may be possible. We find these
groups always on the second last syllable.

Every nation ought to adore God, to sing to His name, and all the
earth should glorify Him. We know how little this admonition is heeded.
This ought to awake in us the resolution to sing this song with so much
more reverence and joy.

GRADUAL (Ps. 106: 20, 21)

1. Misit Dominus verbum suum, 1. The Lord sent his word, 2. and

2. et sanavit eos: 3. et eripuit eos de healed them: 3. and delivered them
interitu eorum. ^. 1. Confiteantur out of their distress. ^. 1. Let to the

Second Sunday after Epiphany 89

Domino 2. misericordiae ejus: 3. Lord give glory 2. his mercies: 3.
et mirahilia ejus filiis hominum. and his wonderful works to the

children of men.

The corpus of the Gradual has the same melody in its first phrase
as on the first Sunday after Epiphany; the same holds true for the be-
ginning of the verse. In the second phrase we find the pleasant melisma
known to us from the word illuminare of Epiphany. The melody of the
third phrase repeats itself in the first half of the verse over mirahilia
ejus. We are struck by the unusual ending of the corpus.

It is difficult to explain the frequent repetition of the third-intervals
at the beginning of the verse. We met with this construction for the first
time on the second Sunday of Advent, but at that time it was enlivened
by a variety of neums. The clivis alone produces a slight variation in
the melody concealed in the third ca, the fourth eg, and the ascending
fifth /c. Wagner (Stimmen der Zeit, 58, 136j thinks that it wishes to visu-
alize the expansion of the singer's heart, since the liturgical chant recalls
to him his own vocation (confiteri). For the early designation of the can-
tor was confessor (cf. the Collects for Good Friday). An admirable effect
is afterwards produced by the development over misericordiae. The
pressus, it is true, constitute the supports of the melody; still one should
give close attention also to the notes which precede in every instance.
Over ejus occurs a partial motive of eos in the first part of the Gradual ;
(mirahi)-lia resembles eripuit eos. The closing melisma is the same as
that in the second Christmas Mass.

Ecce advenit — "Behold, He is come," constitutes the answer to our
Advent petition of Veni Domine — "Come, 0 Lord." Similarly the present
misit is a fulfillment of our cry: Mitte Domine, quem missurus es — "Send
Him, 0 Lord, whom Thou art about to send." The Lord has sent His
Word, His eternal Word, and the Word was made flesh and dwelt among
us; this Word is Jesus, the Saviour; He heals our wounds and saves us
from destruction.

How can we thank Him fittingly for this favor? Be comforted: He
who has come to us as the mercy of God will Himself direct our song.
In today's Sacrifice he again sings to the Father a perfect song of thanks-
giving for all the wonderful things He has done to men; He hymns
God's wisdom and goodness and power and fidelity, for all these combine
in God's mercy.

ALLELUIA VERSE (Ps. 148: 2)

1. Laudate Deum omnes Angeli 1. Praise ye the Lord, all his

ejus: 2. laudate eum omnes vir- angels: 2. praise ye him, all his
iutes ejus. hosts.

90 Second Sunday after Epiphany

The Introit had incited the entire world to adoration and to the
praise of God; in the Gradual the eternal Word of God Himself fulfills
this service of thanksgiving; in the Alleluia all the choirs of angels join
this hymn. Here truly all sing along in the most profound adoration and
blissful rapture, and the united hosts never weary of crying: Who is
like God? Alleluia!

This melody presents a typical form of the fourth mode; we heard
it for the first time on the third Sunday of Advent (q.v.). It does not,
however, like all other pieces of this type, ascend to 6b on the third
syllable of the teat. Virtutes repeats the preceding formula of ejus.

OFFERTORY (Ps. 65: 1, 2, 16)

1. Jubilate Deo universa terra: 1. Shout with joy to God, all the

2. jubilate Deo universa terra: 3. earth: 2. shout with joy to God, all

psalmum dicite nomini ejus; 4. the earth: 3. sing ye a psalm to his

venite, et audite, et narrabo vobis, name: 4. come and hear, all ye that

omnes qui timetis Deum, 5. quanta fear God, and I will tell you 5. what

fecit Dominus animae meae, alle- great things he hath done for my

luia. soul, alleluia.

This song of thanksgiving is the most animated, if not of plain song
as a whole, then surely of all the Offertories. The pleasant repetition of
the text: Jubilate. . . is paralleled in very few Offertories. Such repeti-
tions are practically unknown in plain song. The first two phrases pre-
dominate not only by reason of their length, but above all through the
joy that wells up from within: The entire earth is to shout with joy. An
effect of tone-painting is produced by the great intervals over universa.
But the singer is more concerned with jubilate. His heart is filled to the
point of bursting; he wishes to have his jubilation resound throughout
the entire world. He wishes to carry away all things with him and bring
them to the throne of God on wings of song. Rapidly the melody falls
into the depths; then expanding, ever expanding, it rushes upward. The
pressus forms — given in the manuscript as trigons — not only divide the
movement, but also supply it with new power and energy. However,
they should not be emphasized too strongly, lest the delicate melodic
line suffer from it. The melody shows a marvelous development and
gradation till the outburst with f^, a twelfth above the lowest note of
the piece. We are struck still more by the force of the passage if we
compare it with a similar passage, for example that over corde in the
Gradual Os justi from the Mass for a Doctor of the Church. A vigorous
tone-sequence relaxes the tension. The only other extended figure we

Second Sunday after Epiphany 91

meet with is that over the second terra. In place of the &b in the first
phrase, the second shows an energetic b.

After this unusual development comes comparative rest and re-
laxation in the third phrase. God's name is pronounced reverently. Its
close with the impetuous pressus already prepares for the following
phrase and has some relation to the third member in the second Ju-
hildte-phrase.

The fourth phrase is an impulsive exhortation to all who fear God.
Its three short expressions: "come, hear, I will tell you," not only tend
to awaken and attract the attention by the delicate interplay of motives,
but they also serve to give us an inkling of powerful movements of the
singer's heart. The motive over omnes has been borrowed from the
third phrase and is introduced like it. Then it gradually dies away, ex-
pressing the contents of the message to expectant hearts in its descent
to d.

In the fifth phrase the singer devoutly ponders all the marvels that
God has wrought in him. This inner agitation is still felt toward the end
over dnimae. The closing alleluia really is shorter than that generally
found in Offertories, but even the oldest manuscripts have the present
form.

This Offertory is also sung on the fourth Sunday after Easter. In-
deed, it may have been originally composed for that Sunday. It cer-
tainly is striking that not a single Offertory from Advent to Easter, not
even those of the great feasts of Christmas and Epiphany, closes with
an alleluia except this Offertory Jubildte. What is more, the Sundays
after Epiphany received their Mass formularies later than did those
after Easter.

Who sings this song? Holy Mother Church. Of her we sang on
Epiphany: on that day the Church was wedded to her divine Spouse.
This Sunday's Gospel also speaks of a marriage. In the Incarnation
Christ assumed a human nature. This the Church knows full well. But
she is also conscious of Christ's deed (quanta) and sufferings, by reason
of which she stands before us pure and immaculate. She knows that in
the Eucharist Christ has presented her with a gift than which no more
sublime can be found in heaven or on earth, and that in this most ex-
alted Mystery (tantis mysteriis), as the Postcommunion so frequently
says, He forever remains the source of her life and strength. She sees
all the saints with whom Christ has embellished her, all the graces ever
bestowed upon man; she looks upon that marvelous bridal array with
which He has adorned her. At this she cannot help singing and shout-
ing for joy and happiness.

92 Second Sunday after Epiphany

(Joseph Haas has taken the melody of this Offertory as the theme
for a violin sonata with organ accompaniment.)

COMMUNION (John 2: 7, 11)

1. Dicit Dominus: Implete hy- 1. The Lord saith: Fill the water-

drias aqua et ferte architriclino. 2. pots with ivater, and carry to the

Cum gustasset architriclinus aquam chief steward. 2. When the chief

vinum factum, dicit sponso: 3. Ser- steward had tasted the water made

vasti vinum bonum usque adhuc. 4. wine, he said to the bridegroom: 3.

Hoc Signum fecit Jesus primum Thou hast kept the good wine until

coram discipulis suis. now. 4. This beginning of miracles

did Jesus before his disciples.

With dramatic brevity the Communion summarizes the Gospel
story. Its melody also is a model of realism. Consider first of all the con-
trast between the first dicit, introducing the Saviour's words, and the
second dicit, introducing those of the chief steward. Already from the
intonation we can gather that we have here to do with something un-
usual. In the tone of extreme astonishment, the singer cries out: "Who
can do such a thing?" With the threefold repetition of the same high
torculus one seems to see the man shaking his head as if unable to com-
prehend. Naturally, this passage demands a lively rendition. Then
there ought to be a considerable pause, after which the second phrase,
relating in reverent astonishment the first miracle, is to follow in a
solemn manner. It differs from the other phrases by reason of its almost
syllabic character. The two parts that compose it are almost alike
melodically. In the second part, however, the tritone, no doubt inten-
tionally, comes into prominence, for here b is stressed, while in the first
part it belongs rhythmically to the preceding accented c; besides, the
effect of the tritone is almost cancelled by the twofold g.

In the first phrase there is nothing striking about the textual treat-
ment of Dominus. It seems that the principle of counting the syllables
was applied here, just as it appears in simple psalmody and at the in-
tonation before some cadences, as well as in the solemn Introit-psalmody
before the closing cadence of most of the modes. But here we have to do
with only three syllables. With this passage compare in the Introit for
the Sunday within the octave of Christmas: silentium and Domine; in
the Introit for the third Sunday of Advent: hominibus and solliciti sitis;
furthermore, in the Introit for Epiphany, although the intervals here
are different: Dominus and imperium. The low inception of implete
necessitates the bending over of the last neum. Thus it becomes appar-
ent that plain song can also create vivid contrasts. The expression be-

Second Sunday after Epiphany 93

ginning with implete recites on the tonic, but thrice reaches down ener-
getically to the lower third; while that beginning with et ferte supports
itself on the dominant a. Over the close of the second architriclinus we
find the same figure repeated as occurs over the first.

Thus in this first public miracle Christ revealed Himself as the Lord
and King of creation. An act of the will, a word from His lips, and Na-
ture obeys — the water changes into wine. Today we also have been wit-
nesses of a miracle of change; but of one much more sublime then is here
related. This was only a type of and preparation for the Eucharistie
transubstantiation. With the former the Saviour began His public
Messianic activity. The consecration at the Last Supper is the final
stupendous miracle He wrought before His death, but it will continue
to the end of days. We have now been privileged to partake of that most
excellent wine, the very blood of Jesus Christ, and thus have received a
share in the supreme Godhead, as the secret of the fourth Sunday after
Easter beautifully puts it. Today He has prepared a marriage banquet
for us. Until now, the last, the Messianic era, the Lord has reserved this
good rich wine. But its inebriating powers only reveal themselves in us
in the measure with which we correspond to our duties (implete hydrias)
and give ourselves over wholly to Christ. This "good wine" is to prepare
us for the change of the earthly man into the spiritual, for the eternal,
blissful nuptials with the heavenly bridegroom, Christ.
* * * *

THIRD SUNDAY AFTER EPIPHANY

INTROIT (Ps. 96: 7, 8)

1. Adorate Deum omnes Angeli 1. Adore God, all ye his angels:

ejus: 2. audivit, et laetata est Sion: 2. Sion heard, and was glad: 3. the

3. et exsultaverunt filiae Judae. Ps. daughters of Juda rejoiced. Ps. The

Dominus regnavit, exsultet terra: Lord hath reigned, let the earth re-

Haetentur insulae multae. joice: *let many islands he glad.

Generally the individual phrases of a plainsong chant either exhibit
a regular gradation or they are so arranged that the central one marks
the summit of the melody. In the present instance, however, the first
phrase with its fourths and high pitch — perhaps induced by the thought
of the angels in the celestial regions—predominates. In any case, the
composer was concerned, above all, to call our attention to the adoring
angels at the beginning of the holy Sacrifice. Here they are not so much
a model for our own worship of God, as they are the source of our pur-
est joy. For here the Father has adorers according to His own mind,

94 Second Sunday after Epiphany

who with their intelligence immerse themselves in God's splendor and
tremble before His immensity; adorers, who, with their whole will
acknowledge their utter dependence upon God. One of their number
wished to contest this, to destroy the harmony. But he was cast into
hell. Now there is perfect accord, and all the angels offer their homage
to God. The Church fSion) hears it and shouts for joy.

Here again we find expressed the two thoughts adordte and laetdta
est Sion. Each of the following Sundays after Epiphany repeats the same
chants, text and melody.

Audivit shows some similarity to Judae: the former has its pressus
on a, the latter on c. With laetdta est Sion two-note groups are to be sung.
In the third phrase et is to be treated as an anacrusis, while the follow-
ing syllable should receive a light secondary accent. After the solemn
first phrase, an energetic rendition should mark the remaining two. The
text must still be viewed in the light of Epiphany. Christ still stands be-
fore us as the **Lord," as the "King." Angels surround and adore Him.
In a verse which was formerly sung in connection with this Introit He is
addressed thus: "Thou are the most high Lord over all the earth: Thou
art exalted exceedingly above all gods." The Church rejoices at His
revelation, at the love with which He calls also the heathens into His
kingdom (today's Gospel), and at the gifts He dispenses. In the primi-
tive Church the healing of the leper in this Sunday's Gospel signified a
type of Baptism; the participation in the heavenly table refers to the
Holy Eucharist ( K.L.).

GRADUAL (Ps. 101: 16, 17)

1. Timebunt gentes nomen tuum, 1. The gentiles shall fear thy

Domine, 2. et omnes reges terra name, O Lord, 2. and all the kings

gloriam tuam. ^.1. Quoniam aedi- of the earth, thy glory. ^. 1. For the

ficavit Dominus Sion, 2. et videhi- Lord hath huilt up Sion, 2. and he

tur in majestate sua. shall be seen in his majesty.

In the Gospel which follows upon this chant, the pagan centurion
of Capharnaum, filled with reverence at the appearance of the Messias,
speaks these words: "Lord, I am not worthy that Thou shouldst enter
under my roof." And Jesus marvels at the greatness of this man's faith,
which makes the pagan appear like a king over against the Israelites,
the "children of the kingdom," as the Gospel calls them. In the marvel-
ous cure of his servant the centurion is privileged to see the glory of the
Lord as a reward for his faith.

Second Sunday after Epiphany 95

The entire picture of the feast of Epiphany again rises before our
eyes. We behold the heathen and even the kings of the earth streaming
to Jerusalem to pay reverent homage to their divine King (K.L.). He
builds Sion, His Church, within which all will find place, from the rising
of the sun to its setting. And all will be allowed to see and partake of
His glory and sit to table with Christ at the Eucharistie marriage ban-
quet. The corpus of the Gradual, especially in its lower ranges, proceeds
from the heart of the humble centurion. Its first phrase corresponds al-
most exactly to that of Maundy Thursday. Over gentes the annotated
manuscripts give almost all the notes a broad form. For the calling of
the gentile world to the way of salvation is the greatest event since the
Epiphany. Thus the neglect of the lower notes likewise is avoided. Sev-
eral modes have in common the caesura over terrae. We find it again in
the verse over (videbi)-tur, as well as in the first part of the Gradual
over tu-(am). Gloriam, despite its low melodic line, is made effective in
the midst of florid neums by its simplicity. Above tu-(am) it will most
likely be necessary to breathe after the fourth eg. This also makes it
easier to sing the following eight notes sustainedly.

At the beginning and at the end the verse recites on /. Over Do-
minus let the singer accentuate the pressus after the clivis and bistropha^
yet so that the following deeper notes a g f are well heard. Compare it
with Domino in the verse for the second Sunday after Epiphany. Over
Sion the brilliant ascent ought to gain still more in warmth in repetition.
Dominus and Sion have a similar cadence structure. It has been found
that the melisma over in mojestdte sua forms the close of thirty Gradu-
als.

ALLELUIA VERSE (Ps. 96: 1)

1. Dominus regnavit, exsultet 1. The Lord hath reigned, lei the

terra: 2. Laetentur insulae multae. earth rejoice: 2. Let many islands

Already in the psalm- verse of the Introit we have heard these words.
In this manner the kingdom of the Lord is repeatedly stressed. And
King He is, according to St. Augustine (Tract. 51 in Joannem), not to
impose burdens upon us, not to collect taxes, not to levy troops, fit
them out and let them die in a battle, but to bring peace upon the earth
and thus make all peoples happy. Even the most distant are to receive
these blessings; rightly, therefore, may they be glad. Here also we hear
another thought of Epiphany: the spread of Christianity.

This melody was explained on the first Sunday of Advent.

96 Second Sunday after Epiphany

OFFERTORY (Ps. 117: 16, 17)

For the text with its explanation, see Maundy Thursday.

In the most ancient manuscript the melody is already set to the
text In omnen terram for the feast of the Apostle Paul (June 30). In our
Graduale this Offertory is given for the feast of the Apostle Thomas
(December 21). It is difficult to discover which is the original composi-
tion.

A few minor melodic variants appear as a result of the different
accentuation in the two pieces. Today's chant has more dactylic forms:
Domini, exaltdvit me, opera.

Both texts have great things to tell. In the one the Gospel is carried
to the very ends of the earth. Drawn on grand lines, the Catholic Church,
embracing all men, stands before us. Here the right hand of the Lord,
mighty and wonderful, maintains government. The Lord, as the Gospel
we have just heard relates, stretched His hand over the leper, touched
him, and said: "I will; be thou made clean," and straightway he was
cleansed of his disease. Innumerable times has the right hand of the
Lord healed the leprosy of sin, and still He continues to heal it; He lifts
us up into the kingdom of grace and of light, awakens us to life, to the
true life, so that the soul is forced to shout with joy at the workings of
God's right hand and to proclaim the works of the Lord.

COMMUNION (Luke 4: 22)

Mirabantur omnes de his quae They all wondered at these things,

procedehant de ore Dei. which proceeded from the mouth of

God.

The real dominant of this piece is that of the eighth mode (c). Only
with de does the melody gradually change over to the seventh mode. Our
general astonishment finds expression in a broad, expansive line. Perhaps
the tritone at the end may intimate what it means when God speaks.
How marvellous has not His "I will; be thou made clean," shown itself
again today! And it can hardly be wondered at that He, the King, de-
clares Himself prepared to accompany the pagan centurion to his sick
servant and to heal him . . . And in the same hour in which He had said:
"Go, and as thou hast believed, so be it done to thee," was the servant
cured. Besides, how sublime was His teaching! He spoke as one who had
power. The common folk treasured His every word. How wonderful
was the consolation He poured into their hearts — He who had been
anointed to announce the Gospel to the poor and to heal wounded hearts.

Manuscript 339 of St. Gall's and 121 of Einsiedeln give another
melody, which belongs to the first mode.

Septuagesima Sunday 97

The fourth, fifth, and sixth Sundays after Epiphany have the same
chants as the third.

SEPTUAGESIMA SUNDAY

INTROIT (Ps. 17: 5, 7)

1. Circumdederunt me gemitus 1. The groans of death surrounded

mortis, dolores inferni circumde- me, the sorrows of hell encompassed

derunt me; 2. et in trihulatione mea me: 2. and in my affliction I called

invocavi Dominum, 3. et exaudivit upon the Lord, 3. and he heard my

de templo sancto suo vocem meam. voice from his holy temple. Ps. /

Ps. Diligam te Domine, fortitudo will love thee, 0 Lord, my strength:

mea: *Dominus firmamentum me- *the Lord is my refuge, and my de-

um, et refugium meum, et liberator liverer.
meus.

The first phrase describes spiritual distress; the second, a raising
of mind and heart to God. The third phrase already speaks of a favor-
able hearing, and leads directly to the fervent and thankful, "I love
Thee."

Who is speaking these words? The early Christians of Rome on
this day marched in solemn procession to the church of St. Lawrence
outside the Wails. That was the stational church; there the divine ser-
vices were held. The opening words of this Mass are, therefore, the
words of St. Lawrence, describing his martyrdom on the gridiron, when
the flames encompassed him like the torments of hell. In this distress
he called upon the Lord, and the Lord heard him, strengthened him,
and filled his heart with festal joy (cf. his feast, August 10). Greater
than the heat of the fire was the flame of divine love in his heart. St.
Lawrence is, moreover, the patron of the catechumens. Those who
formerly were accepted on this day, were instructed during Lent, and
received Baptism on the Vigil of Easter.

In the large cemetery near S. Lorenzo a sigh, as of death, seems
to vibrate in the air. Just so do the first words of this Introit awaken
in us that seriousness and penitential spirit which grows steadily from
this Sunday till we come to those bitter days when the sighs and groan-
ings of death, veritable sorrows of hell, are to come upon our Lord and
Saviour on Calvary and on Golgotha. The Scripture lessons for the
coming week deal with the creation of the world, the fall of our first
parents, and the fratricide. True groans of death encompassed Adam

98 Septuagesima Sunday

and Eve when they had to view that first corpse, their own beloved
child.

Perhaps there still is in these Sundays (Septuagesima, Sexagesi-
ma, and Quinquagesima) a reminder of the final period of the Migration
of Nations (the end of the sixth century), when strange hordes brought
ruin and tears upon Rome and the surrounding territory. It seems that
it was precisely at this time that the pre-Lenten season was incorporated
into the liturgical year at Rome (cf. Grisar, Missale, 56).

The range of the three phrases is limited. The d reaching above the
dominant is merely an embellishing note, and is not emphasized. The
melody never descends below the tonic. Of the twice-sung circumde-
derunt me, one is at the beginning of the first phrase, and the other at
its end. The second one, with its wide sweep of notes, is not so much
tone-painting of circum as an indication of the great torment which
burdens the soul. The last three notes of this phrase are like the ending
found in many Graduals. Here, however, they have not that charming
effect so prominent in the Graduals, because they are introduced differ-
ently. The second phrase begins almost exactly like the first one. In its
second part it becomes quite restless: thrice it leaps up, and thrice it
sinks back again, with intervals of a second, a fifth, and a fourth. But
this ending does not satisfy; it urges onward. And the expected con-
tinuity comes in such a manner that one is reminded of the Psalmist's
words that before we call upon God He is already present to us. The
third phrase swings up immediately to the dominant in a bright and
cheerful manner. Exaudivit is admittedly much like dolores, and sancto
suo resembles -dederunt of the first phrase. Nevertheless, the text demands
a different rendition in each case. As in the first phrase, two drops of a
fourth occur here also, and then the whole flows calmly on to the con-
elusion.

Revue, 8, 89 ff.

GRADUAL (Ps. 9: 10, 11; 19, 20)

1. Adjutor in opportunitatihus 1. The helper in due time, in tri-

in trihulatione: 2. sperent in te, qui hulation: 2. let them trust in thee,

noverunt te-, 3. quoniam non de- who know thee: 3. for thou dost not

relinquis quaerentes te, Domine. ^. forsake them that seek thee, 0 Lord.

1. Quoniam non in finem ohlivio ^. 1. For the poor man shall not he

erit pauperis: 2. patientia pau- forgotten to the end: 2. the patience

perum non peribit in aeternum: 3. of the poor shall not perish for ever

exsurge, Domine, non praevaleat 3. arise, 0 Lord, let not man he

homo. strengthened.

Septuagesima Sunday 99

In the vicinity of S. Lorenzo, Constantine the Great erected a hos-
pital. Perhaps this Gradual was meant to console the inmates of that
institution, to encourage them to trust in God, to beg grace for them to
the end that man, the evil in man, the spirit of darkness, might not pre-
vail.

We, as God's own family, should also lovingly remember those who
are being visited by physical or spiritual ills, by temptations or by
trials.

The verses are taken from Psalm 9, as on the third Sunday of Lent
(whose Gradual begins with the last sentence of today's) and on the
Saturday of the fourth week in Lent. With this latter our present Grad-
ual has perfect similarity of word and music in (opportu)-nitätibus and
in trihulatione. The first non of the verse is like (D6)-mme in the verse
of the other Gradual. Though none of the Graduals in the third mode
are easily understood, the one for today presents special difficulties. It
lacks a calm and ordered development. The third word goes up to e^,
which is never again reached in the corpus. Many fourths occur, but not
a single fifth.

Both halves of the first phrase close with the cadence which we meet
again in the Introit of the first Sunday in Lent. Endings on d, as in the
second phrase, are favored by the third mode. The former dominant h
still occurs, and helps in the formation of the triton, as over Domine.

The beginning of the verse resembles the beginning of the third
phrase in the corpus. Of more than ordinary difficulty is the execution
of the second half of the melisma over non. The rich melody at this
point is in accord with the general rules for Gradual-verses. In the sec-
ond phrase the motive is broadened out and repeated over aeternum.
The last phrase, with its intense exsurge and its impelling fourths, is
most forceful and expressive. The conclusion corresponds to that of the
corpus,

TRACT (Ps. 129: 1,4)

1. De profundis clamavi ad te, 1. From the depths I have cried to

Domine: Domine, exaudi vocem thee, 0 Lord: Lord, hear my voice,

meam. 2. Fiant aures tuae inten- 2. Let thine ears he attentive to the

dentes in orationem servi tui. 3. Si prayer of thy servant. 3. // thou

iniquitates ohservaveris, Domine: shalt observe iniquities, O Lord,

Domine, quis sustinehitl 4. Quia Lord, who shall endure iti 4. For

apud te propitiatio est, et propter with thee is propitiation, and by

legem tuam sustinui te, Domine. reason of thy law I have waited for

thee, 0 Lord.

100 Septuagesima Sunday

The Tract leads us from the hospital to the churchyard of S. Loren-
zo, and prays De profündis both for and with those who are resting there.
It is a call coming from the depths of a soul which feels itself immeasur-
ably separated from God; it is a cry to the Lord. For the soul of the de-
parted can no longer help itself, and the help of others is also limited
since they also must pray De profündis. This plea therefore voices our
human impotence and our great need of help. The repetition of the
"Lord, Lord" is stylistic peculiarity of all petitions, and indicates the
deep-felt need of divine assistance. Do Thou not observe my iniquities,
O Lord! Mark them not for the Day of Wrath; pronounce not a judge-
ment, signed and sealed, upon my sins. Behold how sin is common to
all mortal flesh, that no one is clean, and no one can redeem himself!
Be Thou my Redeemer! For with Thee is propitiation, and the law which
Thou hast made is the promise of a Redeemer: the sacrifices ordained
by the Law foretell the Lamb that taketh away the sins of the world.
And by Thy own word I know that Thou wiliest not the death of the
sinner. In this way de we pray with the poor souls.^

OFFERTORY (Ps. 91:2)

1. Bonum est confiteri Domino, 1. It is good to give praise to the

2. et psallere nomini tuo, Altissime. Lord, 2. and to sing to thy name, O

Most High.

Mother Church is fond of calling the Mass a sacrifice of praise. If
we sing this text today at the Offertory procession, our sacrifice should
be made glorious through our joyous surrender of self. For this very
reason did St. Lawrence rejoice, that he could be sacrificed for Christ.
This joy in giving must never be wanting, not even now when the
alleluia is silenced.

The parallel between the two sentences is evident enough. Psallere
corresponds to confiteri, and Altissime to Domino. But in the second
phrase there is an obvious intensifying, for psallere means not only "to
praise," but connotes also a playing upon the harp, and Altissime is an
elucidation of the preceding Domino. More clearly than the words does
the music tell us this.

Bonum is a short but charming prelude to the whole selection. Con-
fiteri succeeds not only in stressing the accent, but also in bringing the
leading idea of the Offertory well to the fore — evidence again of the
manner in which the musical structure of the chants is guided by the
word-accent and the content of the text. A slight accent should be
given the third c. The second phrase is considerably brighter. It no

M. Faulhaber, Die Vesperpsalmen der Sonn-und Feiertage, p. 120 f ,

Sexagesima Sunday 101

longer rests on the lower a and g, but on c. In fact, it thrice extends
above this, with psdllere even to e^, for both the song and the harp should
sing out loud and clear. The psdllere nomini tuo is taken as one single
thought. The melody rises from g to c each time. In tuo, ch ah a of the
preceding word seems to be re-echoed, unless one should wish to con-
sider them an amplification of Domino and (confite)-ri. The first part of
AUissime is bracketed between the ascending and the descending major
chord / a c. To this the second part must be joined directly, with a slight
pause after the first pressus and after a. The third part should be sung
crescendo to the third pressus. A sense of abiding joy fills the first phrase,
holy enthusiasm is the mark of the second, while the final strains try to
bring out the full flavor of the word AUissime.
Analyses, 7, 20 f.

COMMUNION (Ps. 30: 17, 18)

1. Illumnia faciem tuam super 1. Make thy face to shine upon

servum, 2. et salvum me fac in tua thy servant, 2. and save me in thy

misericordia: 3. Domine, non con- mercy: 3. let me not he confounded

fundar, quo7iiam invocavi te. O Lord, for I have called upon thee.

By Holy Communion the true Sun arose in our hearts, the Sun of
grace, our Redeemer, to transfigure, vivify, and glorify us.

The melody of the first phrase is, so to say, monopolized by the
accented syllables, but in such a way that the logical emphasis is well
brought out in faciem. In the second phrase the pleading changes to an
expression of joyous confidence. God's mercy — how it differs from the
pity shown us by men! "Your mercy," so runs the Lord's accusation
(Osee 6:5), "is as a morning cloud, and as the dew that goeth away in
the morning." But His own mercy is lasting, unstinted, inexhaustible.
Our present melody praises this divine mercy in a manner which might
almost be called exultant. The third phrase is no longer a plea; it is
confiding faith become vocal, calling out, as did Job: "I know that my
Redeemer liveth." I shall not be put to shame. Domine, non repeats the
melody of misericordia. The second half makes use of the melodies of
the first half.

SEXAGESIMA SUNDAY

INTROIT (Ps. 43:23, 26)

1. Exsurge, quare ohdormis. Do- 1. Arise, why sleepest thou, O

minel exsurge, et ne repellas in Lordl arise, and cast us not off to

102 Sexagesima Sunday

finem: 2. quare faciem tuam avertis, the end: 2. why turnest thou thy

ohlivisceris trihulationem nostraml face away, and forgettest our

Adhaesit in terra venter noster: 3. trouble"! Our belly hath cleaved to

esxurge, Domine, adjuva nos, et the earth: 3. arise, 0 Lord, help us

libera nos. Ps. Deus, auribus nos- and deliver us. Ps. O God, we have

tris audivimus: * patres nostri an- heard with our ears: * our fathers

nuntiaverunt nobis. have declared to us.

The Migration of Nations with its dismal consequences may have
been the occasion for these laments. But they are also the prayer of un-
redeemed mankind, of mankind degenerated, a prey to the lower appe-
tites. These words may well have been the agonized cries of those who
watched the waters of the Deluge rising ever higher, for the Breviary
this week tells the story of that great flood. Thus may St. Paul have
prayed, whose church is the station for today, when his disgust with
life well-nigh vanquished him, or when the sting of the flesh caused him
such great torture. These words are the cry of the Apostles, almost word
for word, when their little boat was so wildly tossed by the waves one
stormy night, and the Lord was asleep. So have we also, from sheer
necessity perhaps, often prayed for relief from pain or from the shackles
of evil desires which threatened to drag us downward. Our Introit is
therefore a suppliant prayer from the valley ot this death, a plea for
resurrection, a preparatory song for Easter, for the day of the Rising
(exsurge) of the Lord.

Choral music is often extolled for its calm unimpassioned spirit, for
its sedate dignity, for the lucidity which seems to elevate it above all
that is earthly and makes it a veritable echo of the songs of heaven. And
rightly so. Our present melody is set within the compass of liturgical
song, avoids dissonances and startling contrasts, and deprecates unre-
strained subjectivism. And yet it shows how deeply and sincerely a
chant melody can probe, how^ intimate the relation is between text and
music, and how warm and true its expression.

In the first phrase the first half is ascent (arsis), the second half
descent (thesis). Beginning each half is an exsurge, the first one animated,
the second impetuous, and both followed by a more quiet recitation on/.
In the ascent the melody reaches the dominant, and in the descent it
goes down to the tonic. The cadence occurring here is much favored by
the first and second modes. We may recall having heard it in the Alleluia
of the third Christmas Mass (adordte Dominum). The next phrase shows
by its very first word (quare) that it will extend the range of the preced-
ing. A number of fourths occur here, and also the climax of the piece:
oUivisceris. Though the group of notes for this word is nothing more

Sexagesima Sunday 103

than a synopsis of the melody over the psalm-verse {Deus auribus),
they are most effective here because of their position in the Introit. The
composer had in his heart a feeling somewhat akin to that which forced
from the Saviour's lips the terrible cry: "My God, why hast Thou for-
saken Me?" The almost monotonous trihulationem nostram reminds us
of our daily work, of that deadly sameness which may either numb the
soul or be its constant torture. At adhaesit the melody tries four times
to surge upward, and four times sinks back as if drawn down by a lead-
en weight. The highest notes of the individual groups form a descending
line from dominant to tonic: a g f e d.

Now the singer summons all his strength, storming heaven with
short yet powerful sentences. How telling is the simple syllabic chant
in this instance! The third phrase is melodically like the first; its adjuva
is a simpler form of the second exsurge. The second half cf the phrase
then closes with the anticipated calmness inspired by the subsequent
psalm-verse and psalm, which tells of the providence of God in the days
of the Egyptian bondage, and of the liberation of Israel's children.

K.K.,24:, 13 ff.

GRADUAL (Ps. 82: 10, 14)

1. Sciant gentes quoniam nomen 1. Let the gentiles know that God

tibi Deus: 2. tu solus Altissimus is thy name: 2. thou alone art the
super omnem terram. S/'. 1. Deus Most High over all the earth. ^. 1,
meus, pone illos ut rotam, 2. et sicut O my God, make them like a wheel,
stipulam 3. ante faciem venti. 2. and as stubble 3. before the face

of the wind.

Rumors of wars and threatened invasions of heathen enemies seem
to be referred to in this Gradual. The verse with its request, which
strikes us so oddly, begs God to put the enemy to flight with the same
despatch that is shown by the autumn wind in heaping together the
weeds of the fields and whisking them across the prairie.

By God's grace our enemies are to be robbed of their strength, and
we are to be made strong, that we may learn to overcome all things.
That is St. Paul's instruction in today's Epistle. We are to preserve this
strength throughout our life, and thus show the "gentiles" the enemies
of Christ and those who deny Him — that He is truly God. This Easter
Christ is to achieve victory in us.

The corpus of the Gradual is well planned. There is a well-ordered
widening of the range in the phrases c-a and d-b, as well as in the two
following which range from c-c. The nomen tibi is echoed in Deus. Here
we find also the words Deus and Altissimus given a treatment similar

104 ^ Sexagesima Sunday

to that found in the Offertory of last Sunday. The cadence in Altissimus
is already hinted at in gentes. Both the beginning and the end of the first
phrase of the verse are on the dominant, thereby keeping the melody
unusually high in pitch. Closer scrutiny here reveals many similarities
to the ascent to high /, so much preferred by Graduals of the fifth mode;
for example, the Gradual for Epiphany (illumindre). Upon this upward
surge follows the middle sentence which again relaxes the tension. The
concluding melisma here employed is found also in many other Graduals
of the first mode; e.g., on the tenth and seventeenth Sundays after Pen-
tecost.

TRACT (Ps. 59:4, 6)

1. Commovisti, Domine, terram, 1. Thou hast moved the earth, O

et conturhasti earn. 2. Sana contri- Lord, and hast troubled it. 2. Heal
tiones ejus, quia mota est. 3. Ut thou the breaches thereof, for it
fugiant a facie arcus, ut liber entur hath been moved. 3. That thy elect
electi tui. may flee from before the bow: that

they may be delivered.

Among the foes of whom the Tract makes mention, one naturally
thinks first of exterior enemies, and of the havoc they have caused. In
as far as we have deserved this punishment, it must be acknowledged
as coming from God, and therefore we say, "Thou, 0 Lord, hast troubled
the earth."

But our souls also have been violently moved. How many in the
course of the past year have begun to tread the downward path despite
the high promise which a careful education and a living faith seemed
to hold out! How often have the burning darts of the evil one wounded
and poisoned the soul! Be Thou, therefore, our Saviour (sana), O Lord,
during this pre-Lenten season and during the coming Lent. Let fly Thy
arrows, Lord, for they will pierce the heart of the enemy. We are Thine
elect, and we, therefore, confidently await Thy special protection and
help.

OFFERTORY (Ps. 1(k 5, 6, 7)

1. Perfice gressus meos in semitis 1. Perfect thou my goings in thy

tuis, ut non moveantur vestigia mea: paths, that my footsteps be not

2. inclina aurem tuam, et exaudi moved: 2. incline thine ear, and

verba mea: 3. mirifica misericordias hear my words: 2. show forth thy

tuas, qui salvos fads sperantes in wonderful mercies, thou who savest

te, Domine. them that trust in thee, 0 Lord.

We do not know if it was after the sad experience of his downfall
that David penned the psalm from which these words are taken. But we

Sexagesima Sunday 105

can readily believe that he composed it at that time, if we note the
straightforward fervor of this plea. The chant melody likewise seems to
have originated in a heart which made the repentant acknowledgement
that "it is good for me that Thou hast humbled me, that I might learn
Thy commands." Here is humility at prayer, and deep contrition of
heart, and the fear that one might belong to those whose hearts are
stony ground, who gladly admit the word of God for a time, but give
it no firm rooting, with the result that, as today's Gospel says, "in time
of temptation they fall away."

Therein we see the earnestness of this melody. But it has a touch
of mildness, of spiritual maturity, over it all. There is something appeal-
ing in it, much like a song in the quiet of the evening, after a day of
storm and stress. Now all is transfigured by the love and the pity of God.

This chant is a song of offering; in the early Church it was likewise
a processional song. While it was being sung the faithful advanced to the
altar and presented their gifts. These gifts voiced their sacrificial spirit,
the spirit without which we cannot follow along the path marked out
for us by the Man of Sorrows. In today's Epistle St. Paul shows us clear-
ly along what thorny roads the Lord oftentimes leads His faithful ones.
But he also tells us how all-sufficient God's grace is, how it makes us
strong in the performance of our daily duties. All these considerations
combine to effect a thoughtful and reflective rendition of this chant.

The divisions could hardly be more obvious. Each of the three im-
peratives, perfice, inclina, mirifica, begins a new phrase. The lingering
of the melody at gressus- — Codex 121 of Einsiedeln has an "x" { = ex-
pedare, to wait) after each bistropha, and a "hold" over the clivis — and
the bistropha and tristropha over moveantur all seem to breathe confi-
dence. They speak of quiet perseverance in doing the will of God. Thank-
ful joy is discernible in semitis, a joy which perhaps was found only after
bitter experience. The formula over mea closes the third phrase. Inclina
swings up with impressive fervor. Aurem tuam finds its fuller develop-
ment in et exaüdi verba. Mirifica reminds one of the third phrase in the
Introit for Easter Day. In both instances the melody effectively ends
the foregoing phrase on /, the better to call attention to what follows.
The progressive expansion of the melody in this phrase (f g a) should
be brought out with a crescendo. In fact, the whole phrase must steadily
grow in fervor until it reaches the confident upward look over in te and
the tender Domine.

In earlier times this Offertory had four verses. After each verse the
words mirifica miser icordias were repeated, thus assuring the reception
of this consoling truth in the trusting hearts of the faithful.

106 Quinquagesima Sunday

The Offertory for the feast of St. John Cantius (Oct. 20) has bor-
rowed extensively from this composition.
Revue, 17, 181 ff.

COMMUNION (Ps. 42: 4)

1. Introibo ad altare Dei: 2. ad 1. / will go in to the altar of God

Deum qui laetificat juventutem 2. to God who giveth joy to my
meam. youth.

This is the prayer of the priest at the beginning of Mass, the first
of those prayers which are said at the foot of the altar. In this song the
faithful make use of the same words, for they also may now approach
the altar, there to receive Him who brings joy to their hearts and youth-
ful vigor and energy. Rein vigor ated, the soul may then say with the
Apostle: "I can do all things in Him who strengtheneth me." Life may
bring many trials, and hardships, and disappointments without number;
the soul may have experiences much like those of St. Paul; but there
ever remains the sweet consolation of saying, "I may go to the altar of
God." The altar is the inexhaustible spring of joy and of strength for
all.

A festal glow seems to hover over this melody, a joyousness brought
out by the rising fourths, the clarion call of the dominant, the graceful
intervals ca cbg, cd da adc, the broad arcs held together by the word-
accents as by a keystone: Introibo, ad altare, Dei; and all with a pleasing
variety. The first and fourth divisions move within the tetrachord g-c,
the second moves in the fifth g-d, and the third small division in the
fifth f-c.

This happy melody occurs again on the feast of St. Aloysius and in
the votive Mass of the Apostles.

Revue, 32, 18, f.

QUINQUAGESIMA SUNDAY

"Even more than on the preceding Sundays, there is noticeable
throughout today's Mass a restrained joy of Easter, of victory. The
light of the Easter sun is breaking through the clouds, revealing the
future happenings in the work of our redemption clearly silhouetted
against the sky. In the Gospel the Lord announces that He is going up
to Jerusalem to suffer, to die, and to rise again. In like manner must we
proceed to our own resurrection through suffering and death. Be the
journey ever so difficult, we can make it with Christ, we can carry on

Quinquagesima Sunday 107

by virtue of His strength. When we enter the church today, He becomes
our refuge and our strength, our Leader who will nourish us even now
with the Easter Food, the Food of the strong, in order to bring us through
the desert to the promised land of Eastertide." (W.K.).

INTROIT Ps. 30:3,4)

1. Esto mihi in Deum protedorem, 1. Be thou unto me a God, a pro-

etj^in locum refugii, ut salvum me tector, and a place of refuge, to save

facias: 2. quoniam firmamentum me: 2. for thou art my strength, and

meum, et refugium meum es tu; 3. my refuge; 3. and for thy name's

et proper nomen tuum dux mihi eris, sake thou wilt he my leader and wilt

et enutries me. Ps. In te Domine nourish me. Ps. In thee, 0 Lord,

speravi, non confundar in aeter- have I hoped, let me never he con-

num: * in justitia tua libera me. founded: * deliver me in thy justice.

The melody of this Introit is divided according to content and text
into three parts, thus affording another instance of the influence which
the text has on the chants themselves.

A happy confidence animates the first part of the song. It is not
impetuous joy, not the exultant joy of a victory-crowned hero. It is
deep-seated happiness, the kind which is born of utter confidence. The
endings to the phrases are delicately done. In every case the final note
is prepared for by the preceding note of the same pitch: fgf,f,fec, c,
fdec c. A similar soft effect is produced in most of the accented syllables
by the fact that the note preceding the syllable has the pitch of the
accented one. To this there are but four exceptions — ut salvum, et prop-
ter, tuum, and dux — no doubt because these words are to receive special
prominence. Added to all this we have the warmth of the sixth mode
pervading the whole.

The first phrase is a childlike petition. Beginning with a minor third,
it sinks to c and then rises a fourth. Not until this point is reached does
the melody begin to pulse upward above the dominant. The second half
resembles the first: in Deum is like refugii, and the second member like-
wise rises to a. The endings, too, are very similar.

In the second phrase the situation is reversed. The first half with its
recitative on the dominant is firm and definite; the descent occurs only
in the second half. A pleasant contrast is thus afforded to the first and
last phrases. Like the first and second, the third phrase also has an
ascending fourth, followed by a bistropha. Here, after an apparent calm
on g, the melody rises to a bright c. "Thou wilt be my Leader," is the
choir's exultant song. It is the breaking through of joy too long with-
held. Even if I must walk the path of sorrow, I am not alone: Thou art

108 Quinquagesima Sunday

with me, Thou leadest me, and gladly will I follow. In graceful undula-
tions the melody sinks to the tonic. Thou wilt be not only my Leader;
nay, much more! The emphatic et is really arresting, and has the same
effect here in chant as that which Beethoven achieved in the Credo of
his Missa solemnis where, after an elaboration of et, which heralds great
things to come, he inserts a pause, thereby adding much to the inten-
sity of the passage. In like manner our melody says: Thou wilt even be
my Sustainer. The idea is still more emphasized by the interval of a
fourth, d-g, after the repeated c-f interval. Thou art indeed the Good
Shepherd. I shall henceforth place my entire trust in Thee; never shall I
then be led astray.

Psalm 30, from which this Introit takes its text, was the prayer of
David in his greatest need. Now David is the type of Christ. And when
He was hanging on the cross, Christ prayed one of the verses of this
psalm aloud: "Into Thy hands I commend My spirit." We shall, there-
fore, also pray this Introit with great fervor, and thus come closer to
the very heart of Christ. The melody colors the words even at this early
date with the light of the Easter dawn.

Analyses, VII, 8 fif.

GRADUAL (Ps. 76: 15, 16)

1. Tu es Deus, qui facis mirabilia 1. Thou art the God that alone

sohis: 2. notam fecisti in gentihus dost wonders: 2. thou hast made thy
virtutem tuam. ^. 1. Liherasti in power known among the nations. ^.
hrachio tuo 2. populum tuum, 3. 1. With thy arm thou hast redeemed
filios Israel et Joseph. 2. thy people, 3. the children of

Israel and of Joseph.

We heard many sublime things foretold about the Messias, es-
pecially during the Christmas cycle. Now He Himself speaks of His
suffering: He is to undergo deep disgrace — and death. But we do not
wish to err like the disciples at Emmaus, who said: **We hoped that it
was He that should have redeemed Israel." Hence the solemn profes-
sion in the- Gradual: "Thou art God," and, "Thou alone dost wonders."
How heathen Egypt (gentihus) and Pharaoh rued the day they had to
acknowledge Thy power! How mighty the arm with which Thou didst
redeem Thy people! But all that was mere prototype of the wonders
which Thy redemptive work will effect, of the freedom which Thou wilt
give us, and by means of which Thou wilt make us Thy chosen people.
It is Thy love whieh will accomplish all.

The Pasch of the Old Testament was but a shadowy likeness of the
Christian Pasch with its Easter victory and its Easter joy.

Quinquagesima Sunday 109

If the Graduals were not admittedly made up of typical formulas,
one might easily claim that in this Gradual the text is responsible for
the melodic structure: Thou art (c-g) God (d-h), that dost (e-c) wonders
(g-d) alone (d~c). A rising quint and numerous jpressus give the second
phrase even more force. This melody is in all probability peculiar to the
present text. Its final cadence resembles that over (so)-lus, and the
phrases following begin in both instances with a fourth, in accordance
with the rules for symmetry. The final cadence of the third phrase is
quite common. We hear it again at the end of the corpus in the Gradual
for the third Sunday in Lent. The first phrase of the verse concludes in
the same manner as the body of the Gradual on Passion Sunday. The
florid melisma at the end also occurs in the aforementioned Gradual,
although there it is found in the first phrase. Wagner (III, 381) consid-
ers it a variant of the melisma over non of the verse on Septuagesima
Sunday. The very last tones of the verse agree with (p6pu)-luin of the
preceding phrase.

The rendition should be very animated.

TRACT (Ps. 99: 1, 2)

1. Jubilate Domino omnis terra: 1. Sing joyfully to God, all the

servile Domino in laetitia. 2. In- earth: serve ye theLord with gladness,

träte in conspectu ejus, in exsulta- 2. Come in before his presence with

tione. 3. Scitote quod Dominus ipse exceeding great joy: 3. Know ye

est Deus. 4. Ipse fecit nos, et non that the Lord he is God. 4. He made

ipsi nos: nos autem populus ejus us, and not we ourselves: but we are

et oves pascuae ejus. his people, and the sheep of his

pasture.

This song, in the middle of the pre-Lenten season, is like a breath
of Easter morning; one might almost think it too jubilant. But Holy
Mother Church knows why she asks us to sing in this strain today:
even now we are to rejoice over the graces given us through the Re-
demption; even now we are to thank the Good Shepherd that we are
sheep of His pasture. Here again, as in the Gradual, we acknowledge
that He is God. Only divine love could have prompted the forfeiting of
life for the sake of the sheep; neither we nor any power on earth could
have made us children of God: Ipse fecit nos.

OFFERTORY (Ps. 118: 12, 13)

es Domine, doce me 1. Blessed art tho

as: 2. benedictus es me thy justification

Domine, doce me justificationes tuas: thou, 0 Lord, teach me thy justifica-

1. Benedictus es Domine, doce me 1. Blessed art thou, O Lord, teach

justificationes tuas: 2. benedictus es me thy justifications: 2. blessed art

110 Quinquagesima Sunday

3. in labiis meis pronuntiavi 4. lions: 3. with my lips I have pro-
omnia judicia oris tui. nounced 4. all the judgments of thy

mouth.

The blind man healed by the Saviour followed Him and glorified
God. "And all the people, when they saw it, gave praise to God." We
now add our own song to the chorus of praise coming from the one
healed and from the people; we sing a Benedictus to the Son of David,
whose help the blind man so earnestly besought. To this song of praise
we subjoin the plea, "Teach me!" Our understanding must increase, our
heart must expand if our song is to ring out whole-heartedly. But we
may also ask for the humility which justified the publican (descendit
justificdtus). Teach me to have faith, O Lord, and confidence, the two
virtues necessary for the granting of Thy great gifts: "As thou hast
believed, so be it done to thee"; or, to use the words of today's Gospel,
"Thy faith hath made thee whole." Teach me also that I must suffer
as Thou didst suffer (opportebat pati Christum). Teach me to love, as
Thou didst love. Out of love Thou goest to Thy death, to repay the debt
of honor to the Father and to merit life for us. Teach me as Thou didst
teach St. Peter, in whose church we are assembled today. At first he, too,
failed to understand Thy prediction of suffering and death; but later, by
his martyrdom, he gave proof of the great love he had for Thee. Teach
me love, the love which will make me ascend Calvary and persevere
under the cross. Teach me that love of my fellows which is forgetful of
self and "endureth all things" (Epistle); for love, Thou didst tell us, is
Thy chief commandment.

As in the Offertory for the second Sunday after Epiphany, the
chant here repeats the first sentence, using also the same melody. Not
until the second tuas is there any further addition to it. Over this same
tuas the climax of the whole piece is found. Such repetitions might be
taken alternately by a soloist and the choir, or by a smaller and a larger
group in the choir.

The third phrase is markedly quieter, at first proceeding in seconds
only. After the breathing mark there is first repeated the motive of
phrases one and two over (justificati)-6nes, which is therefore sung three
times, and then the motive which occurs over the second tuas. The
fourth phrase stresses the words omnia and oris with fourths that only
with difficulty they awaken in us any sympathetic response. The high-
est notes of the successive groups over (o)~ris tui form the descending
line c h\? a g f e.

May our lips speak the same words which fell from the lips of the
Lord? Is our heart unspotted? Formerly another verse, which was like-
wise sung a second time with a more ornate melody, belonged to this

Ash Wednesday 111

Offertory: "Let no iniquity have dominion over me;" and in the secret
for today we beg God to "cleanse us from our sins, and sanctify the
bodies and minds of Thy servants for the celebration of this sacrifice."
We choir members shall accordingly try to banish all that is inharmoni-
ous from our souls, that our song may ring out clearly and joyfully, as
did the blind man's in today's Gospel.

COMMUNION (Ps. 77: 29, 30)

1. Manducaverunt, et saturati 1. They did eat, and were filled

sunt nimis, 2. et desiderium eorum exceedingly, 2. and the Lord gave

attulit eis Dominus: 3. non sunt them their desire: 3. they were not

fraudati a desiderio suo. defrauded of that which they craved.

According to content, the first phrase is superior to the second;
the melody, however, makes the second more prominent. Its final ca-
dence very closely resembles the close of the first division in the respon-
sories of Matins which are assigned to the second mode. Its first half
has g as its recitative, its second half, /. The beginning of the third
phrase makes emphatic use of the dominant, followed by the motive
which closes the first phrase; the opening notes of the first are em-
ployed in the second half.

The same melody, but shortened somewhat to accommodate a
shorter text, is found on the feast of St. John Capistran (March 28).

Only that divine Food which was offered to us in this Holy Com-
munion can adequately fill the yearning of our heart, in as far as that is
possible here below. At this holy Banquet we acquire that feeling of full
satisfaction, of perfect composure, which helps us turn a deaf ear to the
deceitful promises of the world. The conviction becomes ever more
clear: God alone suffices. May our longing increase with every recep-
tion of Holy Communion, together with a corresponding deepening and
intensifying of the joy in our hearts! With the strength afforded by this
Food we shall then advance confidently into the promised land of Easter
peace and Easter happiness.

* * * *

ASH WEDNESDAY
A. BLESSING OF THE ASHES
ANTIPHON Exaudi (Ps. 68: 17)
1. Exaudi nos Domine, quoniam 1. Hear us, OLord, for thy mercy

ma est misericordia tua: 2. se- is kind: 2. look upon us, O Lord,
cundum multitudinem miserati- according to the multitude of thy

112 Ash Wednesday

onum tuarum respice nos, Domine. tender mercies. Ps. Save me, 0 God,

Ps. Salvum me fac Deus: quoniam for the waters have come in * even

intraverunt aquae * usque ad ani- unto my soul,
mam meam..

It is a serious time, this season upon which we are now entering.
But in this very first antiphon the Church aims at giving us a consoHng
thought, one which is to sink deeply into our consciousness. The high
range of the notes and the resounding tristrophas give animated voice
to the words expressing God's mildness and mercy. Be our guilt ever so
great, depressing, or shameful, though the floodwaters of sin penetrate
our very soul, the benignity of God and His mercy are greater still. The
miserationum tu-(arum) occurs also on the second Sunday of Lent with
the same notation. Nos Domine is an amplification of -arum.

Of the chants which may be sung during the distribution of the
ashes, we shall here discuss only the last two.

ANTIPHON Juxta vestibulum
(Joel 2: 17; Esther 13: 17)

1. Juxta vestibulum et altare plo- 1. Between the porch and the altar

rahunt sacerdotes et levitae min- the priests, the Lord's ministers,

istri Domini, et dicent: 2. Parce, shall weep, and shall say: 2. Spare,

Domine, parce populo tuo: 3. et ne 0 Lord, spare thy people; 3. and

dissipes ora clamantium ad te, shut not the mouths of them that

Domine. sing to thee, 0 Lord.

Plordhunt — "They shall weep" — is the word which characterizes
the spirit of this chant. The first half of the first phrase rests on /, and
goes beyond it only to lay stress on the word-accent. The e-f preceding
plordhunt, demanded by the rules, serves to combine these two parts of
the melody. Special emphasis is then put on the dominant a in the fol-
lowing group of notes, as well as in the second and third phrases, with
the result that the melody is heavy, depressed. A leaden weight seems to
burden the singer. Parce Domine is an urgent entreaty. We are still Thy
people, despite the fact that we have sinned. Shut not the mouths that
praise Thee, and close not Thy heart against our pleading. Have mercy,
O Lord!

RESPONSOR Y Emendemus (Esther 13; Joel 2)

1. Emendemus in melius, quae 1. Let us amend and do better

ignorantur peccavimus: 2. ne subito those things in which we have
praeoccupati die mortis, quaera- sinned through ignorance: 2. lest

Ash Wednesday 113

mus spatium paenitentiae, et in- suddenly prevented by the day of
venire non possimus. * 3. Attende death, we seek time for penance,
Domine, et miserere: quia peccavi- and be not able to find it. * 3. At-
mus tibi. Adjuva nos, Deus salu- tend, O Lord, and have mercy: for
taris noster: 2. et propter honorem we have sinned against thee. t. 1.
nominis tui, Domine, libera nos. Help us, O God, our Saviour: 2.
* Attende Domine . . . Gloria Patri and for the honor of thy name, O

Lord, deliver us. * Attend, O Lord
. . . Glory be to the Father . . .

Responsories occurring in the Divine Office and in blessings have
the general arrangment ABA. But generally only a part of A is re-
peated. There are even more typical melodies here than in the Gradual-
responsories. The verse with its Gloria Patri is such a typical melody,
and consequently no account is taken of the meaning of the text. The
first half of the verse has the recitation on the dominant together with a
five-syllable middle cadence. The second half recites on the tonic. With-
out exception, the final cadence begins at the fifth last syllable: D6-

S432I 54321

mine libera nos and Spiritui sancto.

The corpus of the Responsory has many typical turns : peccdvimus =
non possimus and also the second -vimus tibi; and spatium paenitentiae =
Attende Domine et misere-(re). The melody greatly resembles the Re-
sponsory Obtulerunt of Feb. 2. But the second phrase of our present
chant has a character peculiar to itself; with its heaped-up fourths it
well represents the excited state of the singer's soul. He is moved by the
words with which the priest placed the ashes on his sinful head: "Re-
member, man, that thou art dust, and unto dust thou shalt return."
Here, as well as on Palm Sunday and on the feast of the Purification,
the Responsory rounds out the first ceremony of the day, and leads over
to the Solemn Mass which follows it.

THE MASS

INTROIT (Wisd. 11: 24, 25, 27)

1. Miser eris omnium, Domine, et 1. Thou hast mercy upon all, 0

nihil odisti eorum quae fecisti, 2. Lord, and hatest none of the things

dissimulans peccata hominum pro- which thou hast made, 2. and over-

pter paenitentiam, 3. et parcens lookest the sins of men for the sake

Ulis: 4. quia tu es Dominus Deus of repentance, 3. and sparing them:

noster. Ps. Miserere mei Deus, 4. for thou art the Lord our God. Ps.

114 Ash Wednesday

miserere mei: * quoniam in te con- Have mercy on me, 0 God, have
fidit anima mea. mercy on me: * for my soul trusteth

in thee.

After the Church has earnestly prayed, both at the blessing of the
ashes and in her chants during their distribution, that God show His
mercy to her children, she here voices the conviction that her prayers
have been heard: "Thou hast mercy upon all, O Lord." His divine heart
is full of pity for the poor, even for the most forsaken. His love for His
creature is lasting, even when this creature turns its back upon its
Creator. Progressing in full-step intervals, the melody has the ring of
conviction, of confident hope. The opening motive is heard again in
omnium Domine and nihil. The note a predominates in the first half of
the phrase, the note / in the second.

In the second phrase, propter paenitentiam emerges rough and
rugged, like a mountain ridge which must first be scaled and crossed
before one can reach the beautiful valley of peace which lies beyond.
God "overlooks" our sins that we may do penance, that we may have
time for introspection, for sorrow and atonement. The Responsory
Emendemus has already told us that God's patience in this matter is not
a license to sin. But if we turn to Him with true contrition He will also
turn to us, will become Deus noster, "our God." The more sincere our
penance and our conversion, the closer will He be to us. The composer
cleverly gives the words Deus noster, at the end of the Introit, the same
melody that paenitentiam has, except that it is a fifth lower. The logical
connection is, therefore, indicated by the melodic correspondence. In
its deeper setting the melody has, moreover, none of that ruggedness or
severity which we noted before. Our God is the God of peace. Contrari-
wise, the effect of paenitentiam is all the more severe because of the
appealing melody over hominum which precedes it. We have already met
this formula in the Introit Gaudete and elsewhere.

The third phrase, despite its brevity, is treated as an independent
sentence. It follows the closing cadence over paenitentiam and precedes
the new sentence opening over quia; the annotated manuscripts, there-
fore, call for a broad rendition of the climacus over parcens. Consolation
and repose pervade this short phrase, but the rising third at its end pre-
pares us for more vigorous lines, and thus serves as a solemn introduc-
tion to the fourth phrase. Here the melody becomes rich in neums; it
breathes a prayer of thanks for the good fortune of those who have been
raised from the slough of sin to the fatherly heart of God. The propor-
tions are worthy of notiee. Tu is divided by the mora vocis, eight notes to
the first part and eight to the second. Dominus and De-(us) likewise

Ash Wednesday-

have eight, and -us and noster seven and eight notes respectively. The
psalm- verse prays in this strain: Since Thou, 0 Lord, hast pity on all,
and lovest everything that Thou hast made, show mercy also to me.
In Thy immeasurable mercy do I place all my hope.
Musica s., 45, 25 ff.

GRADUAL (Ps. 56:2,4)

1. Miserere mei Deus, 2. mise-
rere mei: 3. quoniam in te confidit
anima mea. S^. 1. Misit de caelo, et
liter mit me: 2. dedit in opprobrium
conculcantes me.

1. Have mercy on me, 0 God, 2.
have mercy on me: 3. for my soul
trusteth in thee. ^.1. He hath sent
from heaven, and delivered me; 2.
he hath made them a reproach that
trod upon me.

Corpus and verse have perfect similarity of ending: (me)-a = me. In
the corpus both the first and the second sentences descend to low c. The
second miserere mei is more forceful than the first, but this is probably
due not so much to the text itself as to the rules for melodic development.
The third phrase and the greater part of the second phrase of the verse
are sung in the same manner on the tenth Sunday after Pentecost. In
the first phrase of the verse the prominence given to the high c is the
outstanding feature. Its first half closes with the same formula as that
over the word David in the Gradual Sacerdotes of the second Mass for
a Confessor-Bishop.

The words of the corpus are the same as those we heard in the In-
troit. They would impress on us the fact that we can never have too
much confidence in God's merciful love. The singer thankfully acknowl-
edges the guidance of almighty God and his liberation from the enemy.

TRACT (Ps. 102: 10)

1. Domine, non secundum pec-
cata nostra, f quaefecimus nos: ( — )
neque secundum iniquitates nostras
(■ — ) retrihuas nobis. 2. (Ps. 78: 8,
9). Domine, ne memineris iniqui-
tatum nostrarum: f cito anticipent
nos ( — ) misericordiae tuae, quia
pauperes facti sumus nimis. 3
(Hie geniflectitur.). Adjuva nos
Deus salutaris noster: ( — ) et

1. O Lord, repay us not according
to the sins f we have committed, ( — )
nor acoording to our iniquities ( — ).

2. (Ps. 78; 8, 9). 0 Lord, remember
not our former iniquities: f let thy
mercies speedily prevent us ( — ),
for we are become exceeding poor,

3. (Here all kneel down.) Help us,
0 God, our Saviour: ( — ) and for
the glory of thy name, 0 Lord, de-

116 Ash Wednesday

propter gloriam nominis tui, Do- liver us: f and forgive us our sins
mine, libera nos: f et propitius esto for thy name's sake,
peccatis nostris, propter nomen
tuum.

This tract is not found in the oldest manuscripts. It would seem that
it received its present form no earlier than the twelfth century. The
similar middle cadences are indicated above by the mark f, and the
caesura ( — ). In the first verse the phrasing of the text and the melodic
phrasing are not quite parallel. The second and third verses have much
in common. In the third verse, the introductory notes and the prolonged
clinging to a reveal the underlying emotion of the soul; it is a suppliant
call, heartfelt and urgent. It presents one of the more dramatic moments
of the liturgy, the kneeling of all the faithful to the accompaniment of
this chant. We cry to the Lord: Thy Being and the glory of Thy Name
demand that Thou enter the lists for us and grant us Thy lasting help.

OFFERTORY (Ps. 29: 2,3)

1. Exaltaho te Domine, quoniam 1. I will extol thee, O Lord, for

suscepisti me, 2. nee delectasti ini- thou hast upheld me: 2. and hast
micos meos super me: 3. Domine not made mine enemies to rejoice
clamavi ad te, et sanasti me. over me: 3. 0 Lord, I have cried to

thee, and thou hast healed me.

How can this text belong here, at this solemn opening of Lent? On
Easter Day we should readily understand it as the victorious song of the
Risen One, as a second stanza to the Easter Introit with its tecum sum,
as a song of victory, or as the glorified Saviour's song of exultation after
all the wounds that had been inflicted upon Him. But today it seems out
of place. We must not forget, however, that the Lenten season which
we are now ushering in is but the great preparation for Easter. More-
over, the melody itself does not course upward in extraordinarily bright
and jubilant tones, but adapts itself, more than does the text itself, to
the prevailing spirit of the day.

This was the day on which public sinners were thrust out of the
church to do public penance. Not till Maundy Thursday were they
again permitted to participate in the divine service. This must have
reminded the faithful in a most vivid manner of what they themselves
owed to the grace of God, to that divine help which ever led them on,
which protected them against the allurements of the enemy and the
contagion of sin. The same grace makes them participants today in the
blessings flowing from the Eucharistie Sacrifice.

Ash Wednesday 117

Perhaps this song can be taken as coming from the heart of St.
Sabina, in whose church the station was held on this day. Then it would
be the thanksgiving of the saint for God's help during her martyrdom,
and therefore also an encouragement toward a renewal of the spirit of
sacrifice in us.

Our sincere thankfulness for the grace of regeneration should be
reflected in suscepisti me. This passage, which sounds much like a re-
solved major chord, must not be rendered hastily. Though we might feel
that this chant is of the fifth mode, the whole piece nevertheless con-
tains turns so characteristic of the second mode that to assign it to the
fifth mode with an augmented third (a) over the tonic (f), is hardly de-
fensible. There is, morevoer, a frequent recurrence of the chief repercus-
sion of the second mode and the immediate following of the tonic by the
dominant, which latter is usually broadened out or continued in the
following note-group fhere a — ccc). A skillful rendition of this chant will
obviate the monotony which would otherwise result in such passages.
One should, therefore, avoid giving any prominence to the c in the con-
clusion over sanasti; that note should be comparatively subdued. The
second phrase widens the ascending range, and favors intervals of fourths.
Rather unexpected is the array of neums over the unimportant word
super, just as it was over the last syllable of quoniam. If the melody
here reaches its climax, we must no doubt attribute it to tone-painting,
for that seems to be the purpose of the groups over super ("above,
higher"). Compare the Gradual for the third Advent Sunday, for in-
stance. The close of this second phrase with a g has the effect of a modu-
lation, the kind favored by the second mode. Domine in the third phrase
should not be sung heavily; it should rather indicate a childlike confi-
dence in God. Clamdvi ad te repeats the melody of inimicos meos. San-
asti me calls for an impulsive crescendo.

The transposition of this piece by a fifth is, no doubt, due to the
fact that suscepisti me would, in its normal position, have been written
bb d f d bb h\> c bb 5b, a notation which would appear strange so low on
the staff.

COMMUNION (Ps. 1: 2, 3)

1. Qui meditahitur in lege Do- 1. He who shall meditate upon

mini die ac nocte, 2. dahit fructum the law of the Lord day and night,
suum in tempore suo. 2. shall bring forth his fruit in due

season.

The two phrases have similar endings. But the first speaks radiant-
ly of God's law, and emphasizes the dominant, whereas the second rises
but once to high c. The law of God, His holy word! How willingly we

118 First Sunday in Lent

should open our hearts to it and receive it as the precious seed it is! How
carefully we should cultivate it in loving meditation, and with hearty
good will make it our rule of life! From the quiet of our inmost soul —
the calm, deep melody reminds us of this quiet — ^it will develop outward-
ly in our practical life and bring forth fruits in due season, fruits which
will endure forever, even when eternity begins and time is no more.

But our song is also a song for Holy Communion. The new coven-
ant is sealed by the institution of the Holy Eucharist, and the Saviour's
first commandment is simply: "Do this for a commemoration of Me."
Our meditation on the law of God must also include this command con-
cerning the Blessed Eucharist and all that is bound up therewith. Day
and night we must ponder this great truth and make it the treasure to
which our heart will, according to today's Gospel, ever remain attached.
Then will the life-giving sap and the life-giving strength of Christ, the
true Vine, flow into us and bring forth rich fruit.

The text is taken from Psalm 1. From now until the Friday preced-
ing Palm Sunday the Communion text on week days is taken from the
psalms, from Psalm 1 to 26. On five days, however, the texts are taken
from the current Gospels, and the accompanying melodies are almost
entirely syllabic. Thursdays are likewise exceptions, because originally
the Thursdays in Lent had no Mass of their own.

FIRST SUNDAY IN LENT

In the temptation of Christ narrated in today's Gospel, the tempter
quotes verses of Psalm 90. Now he must hear these verses, applied in
their proper sense, of course, many a time during the Lenten season. A
fine irony is revealed thereby. Today, in fact, the songs are taken ex-
clusively from the ninetieth psalm. But there is another reason for the
profuse employment of this pslam today: it is the song which best ex-
presses confidence in God. Now that the great days of penance and mor-
tification are at hand, and we give ourselves entirely to God, we are, ac-
cording to the teaching of the current liturgy, justified in relying on the
special protection of the Most High. He will guard His own against all
the enemies of the soul, against sin and concupiscence and the evil spirit.
(R. Tippmann, Die Messen der Fastenzeit, p. 27.)

INTROIT (Ps. 90: 15, 16)

1. Invocdbit me, et ego exaudiam 1. He shall call upon me, and I

cum: 2. eripiam eum, et glorificaho will hear him: 2. / will deliver him,
eumiS.longitudinedierumadimple- and glorify him: 3. / will fill him

First Sunday in Lent 119

bo eum. Ps. Qui habitat in adjuto- with length of days. Ps. He that
rio Altissimi, * in protectione Dei dwelleth in the aid of the Most
caeli commorabitur. High, * shall abide under the pro-

tection of the God of heaven.

We have now entered the serious season of Lent, the season of pen-
ance. Much is expected of us during this time. But the prospect should
not dismay us; sadness or weariness are entirely out of place. For we are
not to carry on the fight alone. Now more than ever the Lord will be
our help. We may call upon Him, and He promises to hear us (first
phrase). He will remove all obstacles, all ground for complaint; He will
"deliver us;" He will even — Oh, the wonder of it! — glorify us (second
phrase). And that which He now promises us is, moreover, to be our
lasting possession, is to fill the yearning of our hearts for all eternity
(third phrase).

The words of the Introit found their fulfillment in the Saviour Him-
self. His long and fervent prayer was answered by reason of the piety
with which He prayed. He was freed from all pain and from all His
enemies; He was glorified, and both the fullness of days and the fullness
of joy overflowed into His sacred humanity. That is the wonderful pan-
orama which Mother Church unfolds for us on this very first Sunday in
Lent.

We must also pray this Introit as if it were coming from the hearts
of the catechumens. The station today is at St. John Lateran, the mo-
ther-church of all Christendom, dedicated to St. John the Baptist.
There, on the night preceding Easter, the catechumens will find the
dearest wish of their heart granted; there the Sacrament of Baptism will
remove from them the power of their enemies and free them from the
vicious world and from the darkness of sin. There they will be received
into the Communion of Saints, obtaining thereby a claim to the glory
of heaven.

These thoughts are of themselves sufficient to prevent us from giv-
ing a somber interpretation to the present Introit. The fact that it be-
longs here, to the first Lenten Sunday, will not hinder us from singing
it as a joyous, sunny song, transfigured by the goodness of God.

The first phrase twice touches the note /, but only in passing; in the
main it restricts itself to the tetrachord g-c. The word-accents are well
defined and usually occur on the dominant c. The second phrase is built
around the magnificent glorificabo, which truly sings of glory. Its closing
word is like the first eum, but a bit more restricted. Gl6-(ria) is like
e-(go) of the first phrase, and eripiam resembles invocdbit. The third phrase
begins on the dominant, and assigns to dierum and eum the same nota-
tion that eum of the second phrase has. Adimplebo is the counterpart

120 First Sunday in Lent

of glorificäbo: the former has e as its lowest note, the latter has e as its
highest. All the depths of the soul, be they ever so profound, will find
their perfect satisfaction in the glory of God. Although this phrase is
much like the preceding one, the emphasis given to d in the first half
and the descent to e in the second half succeed in individualizing it.
Parallel sentence structure, clear delineation and presentation of what is
important, pleasing contrasts and cadences: those are the features of
this chant.

The same melody is used on Trinity Sunday and on the feast of St.
Joseph Cupertino.

In the psalm-verse the final cadence, by way of exception, begms
not on the fifth last, but on the sixth last syllable.

Caecilia, 29, 18 L;Gregonushote, 25, 10 fif.

GRADUAL (Ps. 90: 11, 12)

1. Angelis suis 2. mandavit de te, 1. To his angels 2. hath he given

3. ut custodiant te 4. in omnibus charge over thee, 3. to keep thee 4.
viis tuis. ^. 1. In manibus porta- in all thy ways. S^. 1. In their hands
hunt te, 2. ne unquam offendas 3. they shall bear thee up, 2. lest at
ad lapidem 4. pedem tuum. any time thou dash 3-4. thy foot

against a stone.

According to the words of the Epistle, a servant of God must prove
himself "in much patience, in tribulation, in necessities, in distresses, in
stripes, in prisons, in labors, in watchings, in fastings." The Apostle is
describing his own life. But in the introduction he notes this word of
the Lord: "In an acceptable time have I heard thee, and in the day of
salvation have I helped Thee." The verses of this Gradual point to a
special kind of divine help and protection; they are the very verses
quoted by the devil in today's Gospel. But in the Gradual the Church
tells us this: he who does not willfully place himself in danger, who is
not more wise than it behooveth to be wise, but humbly places his con-
fidence in God, for such a one these words will ever remain true. They
are our consolation in all the trials and temptations we may have to
undergo.

God Himself has put us in the care of the angels, of His own angels.
In the prayers of the Breviary this verse resounds throughout the whole
•of Lent.

The melody is a typical one, and is employed for a great variety of
texts. Here we shall discuss only those texts which occur on Sundays
and feast days and in the Requiem Mass. In Paleographie musicale
(Vol. II) are published two hundred and nineteen manuscripts, dating
from the ninth to the seventeenth century, in all of which this melody

First Sunday in Lent

121

is faithfully adhered to, with but negligible variations, for the text
Justus ut palma.

The structure of the melody is psalmodic in character. Both the
corpus and the verse have four phrases, each of which has some sort of
intonation (initium), then a recitation on the dominant either alone or
elaborated, finally a prominent cadence with or without a jubilus. It
must be admitted, however, that there is a lack of that pleasing alter-
nation of simple psalmody with its ascending middle cadence and de-
scending final cadence.^ The corpus has the dominant c, the verse in its
first half the dominant d. This has given rise to the custom of assigning
the melody to the seventh mode. Others again assign it to the fifth mode,
with a close on the upper third (cf . the Gradual for the first Sunday after
Pentecost, Musica s., 45, 105 f).

In the following scheme the letter a) designates the Gradual from
the Mass of a Confessor not a Bishop, b) that from the Mass of the Dead,
c) that from the Mass of St. Matthias, d) that from the Mass of the
first Sunday in Lent, e) that from the Mass of the twenty-first Sunday
after Pentecost, f) that from the Mass of St. Joachim (q.v.), g) the cor-
responding parts of the Gradual for Easter, h) the same from the Gradu-
al for the Midnight Mass for Christmas.

CORPUS

Initium.

Dominant, simple or

Cadence,

with or

ornate

•

without jubilus.

First Phrase

Ju-

stus ut palma flo-

bit.

Re-

quiem ae-

ter-

nam

Ni-

mis hono-

rd-

sunt

An-

gelis

su-

D6-

mine re-

fü~

gi-

Dispersit

de-

dit

Second Phrase

3 4

(7)

sicut

ce-

drus

ba-

do-

na e-

D6-

mi-

ci tu-

De-

man-

dd-

vit

fa-

ctus es

no-

bis

pau-

pe-

ribus

ju-

sti-

ti-

a. .

1 Pal. Mus., Ill, 36 ff.; N. Sch., 203.; Wagner, III, 370 ff.

122

First Sunday in Lent

mut-

ni-

ex-

h) ante

do-

M-

prin-

ci-

6m-

sae-

ge-

Third Phrase

(4)

tipli-

cd-

hi-

tur

lux per-

pe-

tu-

mis confor-

td-

tus

est

custodi-

ant

generati-

sul-

te-

mus

lu-

ci-

fe-

rum

Fourth Phrase

3 4

(8)

D6-

mi-

ni.

ce-

is.

pd-

tus

rum

ni- bus

VI-

tu-

is.

pro-

ge-

ni-
cu-

e.
li.

nu-

te.

VERSE

Initium

Dominant.

First Phase

4....

an-

nun-

tidn-

dum

ma-

me-

mo-

ria

ae-

~^ter-

c)
d)
e)

Di-
In

Prius-

nu-
md-

me-
ni-

rd-
hus

ho^
por-
quam

e
~^td-
mon-

Potens

ter-

Confite

mini

Di-

xit

D6-

minus

Domi- no

me-

Cadence.

(7)

hunt

ne
na

te
tes
ra

First Sunday in Lent

123

Second Phrase

mi-

sericordi-

tu-

am,

rit

_Jw-

stus:

su-

per

~^re-

nam

un-

quam

of^

~Jen-

das

fie-

rent, aut formare-tur

"^ter-

rit se-

men

jus:

sede

dex-

tris

me-

Third Phrase

4 (5) 6

veritd-

tern

tu-

auditio-

ma-

[Text too

short]

[Text too

short]

orhis:

sae- cu

ge-

nerdtio

re-

cto-

rum

gh)

Fourth Phrase

per

no-

dem.

non

ti-

me-

hit.

multi-

pli-

ca-

bun-

tur.

Idpi-

dem

pe-

dem

tu-

um.

saecu-

lum

De-

us.

he-

ne-

di-

ce-

tur.

miseri-

cordi-

jus.

pe-

dum

tu-

rum.

The melody was transposed, since ordinarily the gamut d c e^ d c
would have resulted over mandavit. The motive efdacag in the third
phrase of the corpus is varied somewhat in the first phrase of the verse:
e d ch c a g and efdhcag, and entirely at the end e d ch dh c (a). In
the verse the principal accents receive a gentle preparation through a
pes: por-tdhunt, of-fendas. . . Corresponding passages were indicated by
slurs.

124

First Sunday in Lent

TRACT (Ps. 90)

The entire ninetieth psalm with the exception of verses eight to ten
now follows. Each verse has an almost identical mediant f; if this sign
appears twice in a verse, the mediant occurs twice also. Several verses
have a caesura, indicated by ( — ).

1. Qui habitat in adjutorio Al-
tissimi, t ^^ protectione Dei caeli
commorabitur. 2. Dicet Domino:
Susceptor mens es, t €t refugium
meum, Deus mens ( — ): speraho in
eum. 3. Quoniam ipse liheravit me
de laqueo venantium, ■\ et a verho
aspero. 4. Scapulis suis obumhra-
bit tibi, t et sub pennis ejus spera-
bis. 5. Scuto circumdabit te Veritas
ejus: t non timebis (— ) a timore
nocturno. 6. A sagitta volante per
diem, f « negotio perambulante in
tenebris, f « ruina et daemonio
meridiano. 7. Cadent a latere tuo
mille, t et decem millia a dextris
tuis: t tibi autem (— ) non appro-
pinquabit. 8. Quoniam Angelis suis
mandavit de te, f ut custodiant te
( — ) in omnibus viis tuis. 9. In
manibus portabunt te, ne unquam
offendas f ad lapidem pedem tuum.
10. Super aspidem et basiliscum
ambulabis, f et conculcabis ( — )
leonem et draconem. 11. Quoniam
in me speravit liberabo eum: t P^o-
iegam eum, ( — ) qoniam cognovit
nomen meum. 12. Invocabit me, et
ego exaudiam eum: f cum ipso ( — )
sum in tribulatione. 13. Eripiam
eum, et glorificabo eum: f longi-
tudine dierum adimplebo eum, t
et ostendam Uli salutare meum.

1. He that dwelleth in the aid of
the Most High, f shall abide in the
protection of the God of heaven. 2.
He shall say to the Lord: Thou art
my protector, f and my refuge, my
God ( — ): in him will I trust. 3. He
hath delivered me from the snare of
the hunters, f (I'^d from the sharp
word. 4. He will overshadow thee
with his shoulders, f (I'^d under
his wings thou shall trust. 5. His
truth shall compass thee with a
shield: f thou shall not be afraid
(■ — ) of the terror of the night. 6. Of
the arrow that flieth in the day, f of
the business that walketh in the dark
t of ruin, or of the noonday devil. 7.
A thousand shall fall at thy side, t .
and ten thousand at thy right hand:
t but to thee ( — ) it shall not ap-
proach. 8. For he hath given his
angels charge over thee, f to keep
thee (■ — ) in all thy ways. 9. In
their hands they shall bear thee up,
lest thou dash f thy foot against a
stone. [The phrasing here is not
happy.] 10. Thou shall walk upon
the asp and the basilisk, f o.nd
thou shalt trample under foot ( — )
the lion and the dragon. [This verse
has a proper middle and closing
cadence.] 11. Because he hath hoped
in me, I will deliver him: f / will
protect him, ( — ) because he hath
known my name. 12. He shall call
upon me, and I will hear him: f

First Sunday in Lent 125

with him ( — ) am I in tribulation.
13. / will deliver him, and I will
glorify him: f / will fill him with
length of days, f and I will show
him my salvation.

OFFERTORY— COMMUNION (Ps. 90: 4, 5)

1. Scapulis suis ohumhrahit tibi 1. The Lord will overshadow thee

Dominus, 2. et sub pennis ejus with his shoulders, 2. and under
sperabis: 3. scuto circumdabit te his wings thou shall trust: 3. Ms
Veritas ejus. truth shall compass thee with a

shield.

With the exception of the word Dominus, which is wanting in the
Communion, the two pieces have the same text. Both also exhibit three
well-marked phrases. This is best shown in the Communion, which
closes each phrase with the same cadence, has an ascending line in the
first half of each phrase and a descending line in the second half. Three
parts are also distinguished in the Offertory. The first and third phrases
correspond; by way of contrast the second moves upwards. Here the
motive over obumbrabit returns at the beginning of the second phrase.
We find it also at the beginning of the Communion. The powerful mo-
tive over tibi appears in a varied form with Veritas ejus and (circum)
-dabit.

In the Communion (obum)-brdbit finds an echo in ( circum )-dabit
and Veritas. The responsories in the fourth mode at Matins generally
close the third phrase with the melody sperabis.

The Offertory has a vigorous, rousing ring. In the Communion
there is an admixture of tenderness, of tranquility. But it also manifests
clear joy with the jubilant et sub pennis, just as the Offertory attains a
degree of gentleness through this, that every second neum over cir-
cumdabit sets in on the same pitch with which the preceding one closed.

Scapulis and sub pennis are generally regarded as meaning the same
thing and translated as such. In the clear triple division of the pieces,
in the difference of the first phrase from the third, one may perhaps
leave Scapulis its usual meaning of "shoulders," and refer the phrase to
the strength of divine protection. If, in accordance with the words of
Holy Scripture, the Lord supports the entire universe upon His three
fingers, what confidence ought it not to inspire when He reaches us His
hand, when He protects us with His shoulders and fights for us! The
second phrase makes us feel how securely we are lodged under His wings.
In. the Communion especially the soul exults that it is privileged to rest

126 Second Sunday in Lent

on the bosom of God. In the third phrase we are told: You are protected
on all sides (circum). If God's truth, and His entire truth, encompasses
you, then there is no vulnerable spot left in you; you need fear nothing,
for God's protection will remain true to you.

SECOND SUNDAY IN LENT

In olden times the divine services of the night of Saturday in Ember
Week were prolonged until Sunday morning. For this reason there was
no solemn Mass on the present day. Its formulary was composed only
later (fifth century). With the exception of the Tract, all the chants
have been borrowed from the preceding Wednesday.

INTROIT (Ps. 24:6, 3, 22)

1. Reminiscere miser ationum 1. Remember, 0 Lord, thy bowels

tuarum, Domine, 2. et misericordiae of compassion, 2. and thy mercies

tuae, quae a saeculo sunt: 3. ne that are from the beginning of the

unquam dominentur nobis inimici world; 3. lest at any time our ene-

nostri: 4. libera nos Deus Israel ex mies rule over us: 4. deliver us, O

omnibus angustiis nostris. Ps. Ad God of Israel, from all our tribula-

te, Domine, levavi animam meam: lions. Ps. To thee, 0 Lord, have I

* Deus meus in te confido, non lifted up my soul: * in thee, O my

erubescam. God, I put my trust, let me not be

ashamed.

This song is an expression of deep humility. What would happen to
us if God were not merciful, if His mercy were not eternal! How entirely
dependent upon it we are! Hence we dare to remind Him of His mercies.
He never forgets them; for they are a part of His essence. For this reason
also, the Introit speaks of Thy commiseration, of Thy mercy.

The parallelism between the first two phrases of the text is repro-
duced in the melody. Both phrases vigorously accent the note /; both
have the same range (d-a) and similar endings; finally, misericordiae is
only a repetition of miserationum. In both instances the torculus enlivens
the serene melodic line.

Now begins a new part. The melody also throws ofif some of its re-
serve. In its range of a sixth, the intervals grow larger. The first part
confined itself to thirds only; here we meet with five intervals of a fourth.
Next to /, g is the dominating note. A certain restlessness makes itself
felt. The pious soul looks about herself; she sees herself surrounded by
enemies, wily and formidable, numerous and inexorable. Whoever does

Second Sunday in Lent 127

not acknowledge the Lord (Domine, in the first partj becomes their
slave, is dominated by the world, evil passions, and the devil. We pray:
Do not allow our enemies to rule over us. But we must also add: Let
them never again gain power over us. The more painfully we have been
made to feel the heaviness of their yoke, the more fervent and heartfelt
will be this prayer and this song. We divine what the composer wished
to say with the gamut dg gf over inimici and gfäg g over nostri. Here a
crescendo comes spontaneously.

Then a third time we pray with the ascending fourth: libera nos:
Thou art the God of Israel; Thou hast selected this nation as Thine own
people. Thou art our God also, and hast elected, bought, and redeemed
also us. Deliver us, then, from all our distresses. Be Thou at our side
especially then, O Lord, when that greatest of all trials will come, when
we are about to enter through the narrow (angustiis) portals of death^.

The feeling proclaimed in the very first notes is effectively retained
throughout, but in the second part it becomes more lively.

The psalm-melody recites on a, which up till now had only been
touched transiently, and then rises above it, full of confidence in God.

Caecilia, 29, 19 f.

GRADUAL (Ps. 24: 17, 18)

1. Trihulationes cordis mei di- 1. The troubles of my heart are

latatae sunt: 2. de necessitatibus multiplied: 2. deliver me from my

meis eripe me, Domine. ji/'. 1. Vide necessities, O Lord. i\ 1. See my

humilitatem meam, 2. et labor em abjection, 2. and my labor: 3. and

meum: 3. et dimitte omnia peccata forgive all my sins.
mea.

The text expresses entirely the spirit of the Introit. Indeed, it has
become still more earnest with the reading of the Lesson. There the
Apostle had cried: "This is the will of God, your sanctification." We are
all aware how difficult is this life's task, how the heart, desirous of love,
has to struggle, how arduous the conflicts of life really are. And we fre-
quently feel exhausted and miserable, because we have often added our
personal failings to the burden of life. At the sight of all these miseries,
we address to the Lord this threefold petition: Deliver us, see our ab-
jection, forgive us our sins.

And the melody? It sounds entirely different. It throws a festal
garment over the agitated text. Certain of the fulfillment of its prayer,
it sends rays of beneficent light over a sorrowful countenance and into
a wounded heart- — as a reflection of eternal light.

1 In Khe votive Mass for the grace ef a happy death, this melody forms the second phrase.

128 Second Sunday in Lent

The friendly F-major chord— at least so it strikes us — is often heard,
both in an ascending and in a descending line. Several times occurs the
descending fourth c-g. The close of the corpus corresponds with meis.
The verse repeats its first motive and prolongs it. The melodic develop-
ment of its second and third phrases will be explained on the feast of
the Assumption. Meis in the corpus and meum in the verse tend to pro-
duce the same effect as a modern modulation to A minor. Similarly, we
should like to speak of omnia as a modulation to C major.

TRACT (Ps. 105: 1, 4)

The closing cadences of all the verses, with the exception of the
last, are alike. From verse to verse the range of the melody is extended.

1. Confitemini Domino, quoniam 1. Give glory to the Lord, for he is

bonus: f quoniam in saeculum good: f and forever ( — ) endureth

( — ) misericordia ejus. 2. Quis lo- his mercy. 2. Who shall declare the

quetur potentias Domini: f auditas powers of the Lord: f who shall set

faciei ( — ) omnes laudes ejusi 3. forth ( — ) all his praises'! 3. Blessed

Beati qui custodiunt judicium, f et are they that keep judgement, f and

faciant justitiam ( — ) in omni do justice ( — ) at all times, 4. Re-

tempore. 4. Memento nostri, Do- member us, O Lord, in the favor of

mine, in beneplacito populi tui: f Ihy people: f 'oisit us with thy sal-

visita nos in salutari tuo. vation.

The Gospel, which contains the episode of the Transfiguration,
comes as an answer to the final petition of the Tract. And at the conse-
cration and in Communion the salvation of God descends upon us.

OFFERTORY (Ps. 118: 47, 48)

1. Meditabor in mandatis tuis, 1. / will meditate on thy com-

quae dilexi valde: 2. et levabo manus mandments, which I have loved
meas ad mandata tua, quae dilexi. exceedingly: 2. and I will lift up

my hands to thy commandments,
which I have loved.

Dilexi with its lightly moving torculus dominates the melodic line
and colors the entire piece. Now we hear a song of love, which by love
alone can be fully grasped. For he only can love commandments to
whom the command is an expression of the will of the beloved, who
makes it his care to fulfill all the desires of the beloved, for whom — as
it was with the Saviour — it is a joy to do at all times that which is most
pleasing to the Father. Such is the conviction here expressed. Another

Second Sunday in Lent 129

thought may be added: the commandments lead us higher, away from
the mean things of this earth, up to the Tabor of union with God. Thus
the commandments establish the peace of the heart — indeed, even the
temporal welfare of nations. We shall, then, meditate on Thy com-
mandments and stretch forth our hands to fulfill them with all fidelity.

The piece begins like the pealing of bells. In some places the church
bells have the tones of these first four or six notes. The motive over in
manddtis runs through the whole. It occurs over et leväbo, manus meaSj
and ad manddta. The three-note groups in the second half of the first
phrase tend to enhance the elevated feeling of the piece.

The second phrase is divided in the same manner as the first. Here
also the second half sets in on the dominant. Before it, however, the
melody makes a pronounced modulation to the second under the tonic,
a figure appearing quite frequently in the second mode. The second
dilexi has no addition in the text, like the first. But it seems that the
extended melody says more here than the simple valde. It sings of the
rest and the happiness of the soul which willingly bears the sweet yoke
of the Lord. The second group repeats the motive over (me)-as. Now
follow two groups corresponding to one another. Everything must be
light and tender and fragrant.

The Gospel closed with the words: "This is my beloved Son. . .hear
ye Him." The Offertory is the song of those fortunates who hear the word
of God and do it. Still closer is the connection between the Gospel and
the Offertory of the preceding Wednesday. There the Gospel reads thus:
"Whosoever shall do the will of My Father that is in heaven, he is My
brother, and sister, and mother."

COMMUNION (Ps. 5: 2, 4)

1. Intellige clamorem meum: in- 1. Understand my cry: hearken

tende voci orationis meae, Rex mens to the voice of my prayer, O my

et Deus mens: 2. quoniam ad te King and my God: 2. for to thee

oraho, Domine. will I pray, 0 Lord.

After the Mass I must again descend from the Tabor of union with
God to the affairs of workaday life, from the brilliant heights, where it
was so good to be, to the darkness of this world with its dangers, its
scandals, its temptations, and its sufferings. Stay Thou with me, O
Lord, for the night cometh. With its broad podatus, its lingering on the
dominant, and the stressing of h, this song prays almost with violent
outbursts. How different is this beginning, compared to the simple
Reminiscere of today's Introit! Intende, parallel to Intellige, is simpler;
for this reason voci orationis receives so much more prominence.

130 Third Sunday in Lent

We pray to the King. On Tabor He manifested His royal dignity.
His countenance shone like the sun, His garments became white as snow,
and the Covenant of the Old Law paid homage to Him. But this trans-
figured King is now my King, my God in Holy Communion. From Deus
mens on, the melody with its two- and three-note groups becomes more
serene.

In the second phrase composure gives place to confidence. Ordho is
an evident lifting of the soul to God. With tender sequences and a rhythm
corresponding to that of the first phrase the whole comes to a close.

THIRD SUNDAY OF LENT
INTROIT (Ps. 24: 15, 16)

1. Oculi met semper ad Domi- 1. My eyes are towards the Lord,

num, quia ipse evellet de laqueo for He shall pluck my feet out of

pedes meos: 2. respice in me, et the snare: 2. look thou upon me,

miserere mei, 3. quia unions et and have mercy on me, S. for I am

pauper sum ego. Ps. Ad te Domine alone and poor. Ps. To thee, O Lord,

levavi animam meam: * Deus meus have I lifted up my soul: * in thee,

in te confido, non eruhescam. O my God, I put my trust, let me

not he ashamed.

In the Rome of the early Christian centuries the solemn services
on the third Sunday of Lent were held in the Church of St. Lawrence.
There the Christians gathered and, especially on Sundays, thanked God
for the grace of Baptism and the sonship of God, which they attained
through it. Thither also came the catechumens, those who sought
Baptism. At the church of the deacon St. Lawrence, their patron, they
were examined today, and on seven other days of Lent, about the doc-
trine they had studied, and inquiry was made into their manner of life.
For this reason, also, the present Sunday was called the Sunday of
scrutinies, of examinations. Prayers were said over the catechumens and
the first exorcism performed in order to destroy the power of the devil
in their souls.

Hence the composer of this Introit was concerned in a special man-
ner to give prominent expression to one word, the word which predo-
minates over the rest of the antiphon: evellet — He liberates me, plucks
my foot from the snare, frees me. Whatever of consolation and joy (a
joy like that of Easter) this word contained, was to penetrate into the
heart of the catechumens; at the same time it was to arouse a vehement

Third Sunday in Lent 131

longing for happiness, for the freedom of the children of God. Evellet
takes the part of a leitmotif, receiving a wonderful development es-
pecially in today's Gospel. However great Satan's power may be, a
superior power will take the field against him. Christ will conquer him,
will cast him out from the souls of men and despoil him of the weapons
in which he had placed his trust. Thus prays the Introit: Oculi mei —
my eyes are ever fixed upon the Lord. Text and melody exhibit a pleas-
ing, symmetric construction.

In the first part we look up to God; in the second we beg Him gra-
ciously to look down upon us. Each part, in its second phrase, adduces
a reason. "My eyes are towards the Lord," quia. . . "for He shall pluck
my feet out of the snare;" in the second part: "look Thou upon me,"
quoniam. . . "for I am alone and poor." In the first phrase, the melody,
corresponding to its text, tends upward: Oculi mei. . .and especially
evellet. In the second phrase we must regard it as more than mere co-
incidence that there are four descending fourths over the petition:
Look Thou upon me.

Oculi, setting in with an interval of a fifth, reminds us of the first
word of the Introit for the third Mass of Christmas, Puer. The melody
over me is also known to us from the same Introit. There it occurs over
the word nobis. Similarly the close: sum ego, sounds like that of the
Christmas Introit over Angelus. Then, like imperium in the Christmas
melody, evellet ascends to high /. In the present Introit, however, the
development is more ornate, it is drawn on a grander scale, and the
accents with the frequent pressus forms are more energetic.

With unflinching eye the singer gazes upward to God. This is shown
not only by the protraction of the dominant, but especially by the an-
notated manuscript reaching back as far as the tenth century. Over
semper they demand a broad rendition of all the notes^ — a valuable
psychological indication. We meet the cadence of Dominum again at the
end of the second part over unicus, and in a somewhat extended form
over (miserere) mei. The unsatisfactory cadence at the close of the first
part would lead us to expect a continuation.

The second part, respice — "look upon me" — is melodically more
tender, more fervent, more suppliant, but its range is less extended.
Respice still has a range of a sixth (g-e) ; the subsequent members of the
phrase, however, confine themselves to a fifth (f-c). The harsh tritone
over pauper agrees well with the subdued feeling.

In the psalm-verse a light secondary accent on the third syllable
further increases the rest and the rhythmic clearness. Thus, after the
introductory formula over Ad, quiet two-note groups follow. In the
second half of the verse the significant little word te "(in Thee . . .1 put

132 Third Sunday in Lent

my trust") must not be neglected; still the flow of the whole must not
be interrupted by it.

If, in the first place, the Church prayed in the stead of those who
are preparing for Baptism, she has to pray for many today who after
Baptism have again become the prey of the devil, who have again strayed
into his snares, from which they cannot or will not liberate themselves.
From our own experience we know that he does not very readily resign
his domination over a man; that, like a spider, he spins his webs, employ-
ing our evil propensities and the seductions of the world to ensnare us.
We are well aware of the diflSculty of the struggle and the extent of our
weakness. This calls for much and fervent prayer; we must fix our eyes
on the Lord (Oculi met semper ad Dominum), we must implore Him to
look down upon us in his mercy.

GRADUAL (Ps. 9:20, 4

1. Exsurge Domine, non prae- 1. Arise, O Lord, let not man pre-

valeat homo: 2. judicentur gentes in vail: 2. let the gentiles he judged in
conspectu tuo. ^. 1. /w convertendo thy sight. 111. 1. When mine enemies
inimicum meum retrorsum, 2. in- shall he turned hack, 2. they shall
jirmahuntur, et perihunt a facie tua. he weakened and perish before thy

face.

In every instance, the final syllable of each part has a very florid
melody, two of which are the same: tuo and tua. Extended rhythms,
therefore, bring both these parts to a close. Perhaps the similarity of
the thought expressed by the text must be assigned for the correspond-
ence: in conspectu tuo and a facie tua='m Thy sight. Smaller rhythms
close the first half of each phrase in the first part. Domine and gentes
correspond. After this descent, the second part opens each phrase a
fourth higher. (Cf. the rule for the adaptation of phrases.)

The prayer for divine assistance in the fight becomes still more
urgent here than in the Introit. Man, the evil in man, and the evil one,
must not carry away the victory. We sang the first five words at the close
of the Gradual for Septuagesima Sunday, but with another melody.
Homo alone in both cases preserves some similarity. In plain song it
makes a world of difference in the melodic development whether there
is question of the beginning of a piece or of a phrase working toward a
close. In the first instance the passage shows great agitation, while we
begin the^econd quietly. This song is the continuation of the verses
from Psalm 9, which itself finds a continuation on the Saturday after
the fourth Sunday in Lent. In mode, style, and text, these three pieces
form one whole, pointing perhaps still to that time when, according to

Third Sunday in Lent 133

the testimony of St. Augustine (fifth century), an entire psalm was sung
after the Lesson. In any case, this practice did not extend much beyond
the eighth century, for some of the manuscripts of the period, as those
of Rheinau and Monza, already show the Gradual as consisting only of
the corpus and the verse.

After beginning with the typical forms, the melody develops itself
in an independent manner. For howo the annotated manuscript of the
tenth and eleventh centuries demand a broad rendition of all the notes,
save the first c. This gives the melody a serious, almost violent, ring. In
the Epistle St. Paul had said: "You were heretofore darkness, but now
light in the Lord." This melody impresses the sentiment strongly upon
us: Do not again become darkness; do not again subject yourself to the
yoke of the prince of darkness! Non praevaleat homol Between the pas-
sages judicentur and in conspectu, melodically alike, a rhythm to Domine
interposes itself over gentes.

The verse is a song of thanksgiving for divine help already granted,
and thus anticipates the fulfillment of the preceding petition.

As compared with the corpus, the melody of the verse shows an
amplification. Several times it extends to high e. Over retrorsum the florid
melisma has a victorious ring. A second and third time the motive over
facie is repeated. Before the third repetition, however, we find ascending
groups in pleasing contrast. Whenever plain song repeats a motive, it
generally introduces it differently with the third repetition, or gives it
a different ending.

In the Gospel of this Sunday Christ shows Himself as the valiant
Conqueror, who defends His house, His property, the human soul,
against the attacks of the enemy.

TRACT (Ps. 121: 1, 3)

1. Ad te levavi oculos meos, qui 1. To thee have I lifted up mine

habitas in caelis. 2. Ecce sicut oculi eyes who dwellest in heaven. 2. Be-

servorum in manihus dominorum hold, as the eyes of servants are on

suorum: 3. et sicut oculi ancillae in the hands of their masters: 3. and

manihus dominae suae: 4. ita oculi as the eyes of the handmaid are on

nostri ad Dominum Deum nostrum, the hands of her mistress: 4. so are

* donee misereatur nostri. 5. Mi- our eyes unto the Lord our God, *

serere nobis, Domine, miserere no- until He has mercy on us. 5. Have

his. mercy on us, 0 Lord, have mercy on

us.

From the Introit to the Tract our sentiments of prayer become more
and more fervent. Oculi mei — "My eyes are ever on the Lord:" thus

134 Third Sunday in Lent

begins the Introit. The Tract continues to pray earnestly. In the two-
fold miserere at the end, its sighs attain their summit. The Gospel as-
sures us that this prayer was not in vain. In the healing of the possessed
dumb man God's affection and power manifest themselves to us in a
marvelous manner.

One might be tempted to regard the ascending line over ad te le-
vdvi as word-painting, referring it to the raising of the eyes to God.
Since, however, the Tract Qui seminant of the Mass Intret for several
martyrs employs the same tone-sequence with another text, it will be
well to be careful and conservative with one's explanations. In general
Tracts seldom touch the domain of expressive music.

The second and third verses have the same melody, though a some-
what simpler form. It never extends beyond c. These two verses may be
sung somewhat more softly, to be followed by the fourth and fifth verse
in a more lively style. This Tract reveals no regular construction. Only
the fourth verse has the middle cadence, generally employed in each verse,
with its interval of a fourth, its pressus, and close on /; hence a full tone
below the finale of the mode. Oculos and oculi in the first and fourth ver-
ses, on the contrary, speaking of the eyes of the servants and of the
handmaid, have a descending line. In the second verse, and in the third,
which sounds almost like it, the second last member closes on /, the last
on g. Both notes exert an influence on the preceding neums; / demands
bb, while g calls for h. The typical Alleluia-melody of the eighth mode,
that, for example, of the first Sunday of Advent, exhibits a similar struc-
ture at the end. The last verse harks back to the second and third verses,
makes its petition tender and suppliant by stressing its h]?, and then
renders it impressive by means of the threefold clivis and the accentua-
tion of the fourth, the whole resembling a hurling motion. Codex 339 of
St. Gall's gives these three clives in juxtaposition, while otherwise it
carefully separates the individual neums which do not belong so closely
together. Codex 121 of Einsiedeln places the letter "c" (celeriter, rapidlyj
over the first two clives. Every musician will know how to appreciate
these indications.

OFFERTORY (Ps. 18: 9, 12)

1. Justitiae Domini rectae, lae- 1. The justices of the Lord are

tificantes cor da, 2. et dulciora super right, rejoicing hearts, 2. and sweeter

met et favum: 3. nam et servus tuus than honey and the honeycomb: 3.

custodiet ea. for thy servant will keep them.

Even on the second Sunday of Lent the Church had lovingly sung
of the Lord's commandments. But the sound of the Offertory of the third
Sunday of Lent is still more sweet in the hearts of the faithful and in

Third Sunday in Lent 135

our hearts. It sings along serenely, not taking any audience into con-
sideration; it rejoices in the revealed truth and is an expression of the
soul's good fortune in being able to walk with simplicity and love in the
ways of God. It is the song of a soul firmly grounded, of a soul that has
tasted the sweetness of the Lord. It is like the morning prayer of a child,
fresh as the dew, whose eyes reflect its innocence, and who has as yet
no inkling of the world's wickedness and does not realize how bitter
commerce with it may become.

The motive over Domine runs through the entire piece. We hear it
over rectae, and even before, over justitiae, then in corda, and beautifully
expanded over dulciora. The second phrase modulates to c, which is a
fourth lower than the tonic. While the first and second phrases con-
tented themselves with seconds and thirds, the third phrase also has
fourths. Everything up to the last notes very evidently belongs to the
sixth mode. Suddenly we meet with a surprising melodic turn. Now the
passage agfg gf becomes agf gfe e. Occasionally the masters of poly-
phony also close with an unexpected key, as is shown by some of Schu-
bert's songs. In itself there is nothing peculiar about the ending on e.
In this, or in a somewhat expanded form, it frequently occurs in pieces
of the fourth mode, for example, in the Gloria of the fourth Mass. In
that selection, however, sixteen preceding phrases end on e. But here
final e for the first time comes at the very end. That is the striking fea-
ture. After the bright, open melody of the sixth mode it comes as a ques-
tion, a slight doubt. Is what you say true? Will you remain faithful? Will
you be of the number of those whom the Lord in today's Gospel calls
blessed because they hear the word of God and keep it? In the Gospel
of the present Sunday the Blessed Virgin is set before you as a model.
She deserves the encomium, for she was privileged to bear in her womb
the Saviour, the Word of God, but still more because no one else heard
and observed God's word as she did. Will you keep your promise? In
today's Mass formulary the Missal has a decided and clear custodit: Thy
servant keepeth Thy commandments. In the earlier editions of the Liher
Gradualis (1883 and 1895), published under the supervision of Dom
Pothier, the Offertory patently closed with the sixth mode: agf agf f, as
did also the Medicean edition. The older reading, however, demands
custodiet: He will keep them, is determined to keep them. And the old
melody, closing on the half tone, is far removed from victorious cer-
tainty. It sounds like a fervent petition: Lord, give me the strength for
it through Thy holy Sacrifice.

In the psalm and in the text of the Missal before the words et judicia
tua we find the strange neuter form dulciora: Thy judgements are sweeter
than honey.

136 Third Sunday in Lent

COMMUNION (Ps. 83: 4, 5)

1. Passer invenit sihi domum, et 1. The sparrow hath found her-

turtur nidum, uhi reponat pullos self a house, and the turtle a nest,

suos: 2. altaria tua Domine vir- where she may lay her young ones:

tutum, Rex meus, et Deus meus: 3. 2. thine altars, 0 Lord of hosts, my

beati qui habitant in domo tua, in King, and my God: 3. blessed are

saeculum saeculi laudabant te. they that dwell in thy house, they

shall praise thee for ever and ever.

The Communion offers modal peculiarities. First it closes on a,
showing that it is transposed. But now the question might arise whether
it is a transposition of a fifth or a fourth — actually it is a transposition
of a fifth. Over the closing note is a full step and a minor third. A fourth
lower, this would result in e f^ g e e, impossible to plainsong notation.
A fifth lower, however, it becomes d e f d d — the closing formula of the
first mode. The reason for the transposition lies with pullos. A fifth
lower it would demand an e\?: f e\? g f f g d d. The ancient plainsong no-
tation however, found it impossible to write eb, but could quite easily
transpose a fifth higher to &[?.

Futhermore, the third and first modes are fused here. The intona-
tion of passer and the melody over virtutum point to the third mode.
The closing cadence of the third mode, ccc a c b a, corresponds to c b a
over (vir)-tütum. From Deus meus on the piece moves in the first mode.
Rex meus contracts its interval over (De)-us meus. Here follows a modu-
lation to the full tone below the tonic, much affected by the first mode.

The antiphonal chants for the third Sunday of Lent exhibit various
forms of modulation. The Introit in the seventh mode modulated to the
full tone below the finale after the / over miserere mei; we find the same
in the Tract of the eighth mode after the / over nostrum. The Commun-
ion of the first mode also modulates to the full tone below the finale over
Deus meus, and the Offertory, really in the sixth mode, modulates to
the fourth below the finale over favum. Each time the modulation agrees
with a break in the text, therefore in the thought.

In the three phrases of this piece there is mention of a threefold
kingdom. The first speaks of the realm of Nature, of the birds and the
nests in which they harbor their young. We are struck by the numerous
podatus forms, which may, in the composer's mind, indicate the flutter-
ing of birds. That which is expressed pictorially in the first phrase, in
the second becomes a reality, even though mysteriously, in the realm of
mystery, in the kingdom of grace. From the altar and its Mystery flow
the strength by which the Lord of hosts — the melody stresses this word
— becomes our King, our God. There the soul has found her earthly

Fourth Sunday in Lent 137

home; there she is harbored safely and securely; thence she draws a
marvelous fecundity. Such was the yearning of the catechumens: to be
privileged to draw nigh to the altar. And the penitents, who had to re-
main outside the church during Lent, how will they envy the good for-
tune of those who come out with the Saviour in their heart! The third
phrase refers to the kingdom of glory, to the house of God, where we
shall sing praises for a blessed eternity. How luminous the melody here
is! There we shall sing Alleluia in unending Paschal joy. There we shall
forever sing our joyous thanksgiving for the boon God has bestowed
upon us; for now evellet of the Introit has become full reality. There we
shall sing an everlasting Redemisti nos — Thou hast redeemed us with
Thy blood; our soul has escaped like a bird from the snares of the fowler:
the snare is torn and we are freed. For this happiness the Mysteries of
the altar are to prepare us. Holy Communion gives us the strength
requisite to attain eternal glory. Our praying and singing in the house
of God is a preparation for that more sublime song of eternity. May
God's merciful love one day bring us all together in that celestial choir!

* * * *

FOURTH SUNDAY OF LENT

Even more than on the second Sunday of Advent (q.v.), the station
"at the church of the Holy Cross in Jerusalem," in which the solemn
services were conducted at Rome, has determined the selection of the
liturgical texts of today's Mass. All the chants contain allusions to Sion
or Jerusalem. Only the Offertory in its present form is an exception.

INTROIT (Is. 66: 10, 11)

1. Laetare Jerusalem: et conven- 1. Rejoice, O Jerusalem, and

turn facile omnes qui diligitis eam: come together all you that love her:

2. gaudete cum laetitia, qui in tris- 2. rejoice with joy, you that have

titia fuistis: 3. ut exsultetis, et sa- been in sorrow: S. that you may exult,

tiemini ab uberibus consolationis and be filled from the breasts of your

vestrae. Ps. Laetatus sum in his consolation. Ps. / rejoiced at the

quae dicta sunt mihi: * in domum things that were said to me: * We

Domini ibimus. shall go into the house of the Lord.

The liturgy of this Sunday's Mass is the spring of the Easter liturgy,
the anticipation of Easter joy. The same melodies which close the ar-
dently longed-for Alleluia on Holy Saturday (g c a b a a g), today, like

true overtures, begin the Mass (f bl? g a g f). The joy of motherhood,
which the Church will e^^perience at the baptism of so many new child-

138 Fourth Sunday in Lent

ren, gives this song its bright and festal character. She anticipates their
happiness in the possession of true freedom, and in the fulfillment of
their desires through Christ. It is as if the Lenten season and penitential
sorrow had already disappeared; as if the unrest brought about by
doubts concerning the faith, and disquietude (tristitia), as also the sor-
rows occasioned by the necessities of this present life, had long been
overcome; it appears as if that blessed time in which God will dry away
all tears had already dawned — when we shall be permitted to enter the
Father's house and drink of the cup of solace.

The joys here portrayed are of various intensities. At gaudete this
joy is rather subdued, at laetdre it tends toward fuller expression, and at
exsultetis it attains a glorious climax. But even here the melody observes
a restraint peculiar to liturgical hymns. It contends itself with the range
of a seventh.

Laetdre has h\? for its highest note; this will dominate the third
member of the first sentence. Jerusalem has as its highest note c, upon
which the second member of the sentence supports itself. The clivis on
the last syllable of Laetdre is to be extended somewhat. The conventum
fdcite is almost like the ringing of bells. It may also be interpreted as
the far-reaching sound of the herald's proclamation. We meet it again
on the first Sunday after Pentecost in et pauper sum ego. The first sen-
tence closes with quiet sequences.

The second sentence introduces a new summons to joy. The final
cadence of the solemn tone of the lesson, c g a f, is beautifully continued
over cum laetitia. Between the similar forms over (tristi)-tia and (fu)-
istis, which are characterized by the melancholic effect of the repeated
6b, there is placed on the first syllable of this word an energetic h.

The third sentence returns to the solemn tone of the first sentence
and even amplifies it. The vivid exsultetis closes with the dominant,
while a tristropha prepares for the brilliantly executed satiemini: "you
shall be filled," you shall drink to satiety from the streams of eternal
bliss. The word closes with a kind of modulation in A minor (a h a),
which renders the second part of the sentence with its recurring bi? all
the more effective. The broad intervals, fourths and fifths, also indicate
the fullness of consolation; but this is achieved most effectively by the
rich final cadence which rhymes with the first sentence. This, as well as
the melody over conventum fdcite, might readily be written to five-eighths
time. The final syllable of uheribus is rendered softly. The execution
should bring out the sweetness of divine consolation.

Where so much joy and happiness await us we cannot but join with
all our heart in the sentiment of the verse of the psalm : Laetdtus sum.
That is the answer to the Laetdre of the antiphon.

Fourth Sunday in Lent 139

A^ Sch„ 77; K.K., 24, 29 ff.; Analyses, I, 12 ff.; Rass. gr., 9, 5 fif.;
Caecilia, 29, 20 f.

GRADUAL (Ps. 121: 1, 7)

1. Laetatus sum in his quae dicta 1. / rejoiced at the things that

sunt mihi. 2. In domum Domini were said to me: 2. We shall go into

ihimus. S'. 1. Fiat pax in vir- the house of the Lord. jj\ 1. Let peace

tute tua: 2. Et ahundantia in turri- he in thy strength: 2. And abund-

hus tuts. ance in thy towers.

The corpus has the same text as the psalm-verse of the Introit. The
melodic style, however, is very different. The psalm-verse of the Introit
carries only one note over each syllable of the text, and accordingly re-
mains purely syllabic. The Gradual, however, practically throughout
carries groups of notes over each syllable of the text. The Introit verse
is composed according to a fixed formula, which remains the same in all
Introit psalm-verses of the fifth mode, regardless of the content and sen-
timent of the text. Graduals as a rule, make use of a variety of formulas
and are, therefore, essentially embellishing music. Today, however, the
number of typical formulas is almost negligible, and consequently we
may consider it an original composition.

But also here psalmodic construction is evident:

Intonation Middle Cadence Final Cadence

(dominant) (tonic)

Laetatus mihi ihimus,

Fiat pax tua:

ahundantia tuis.

The first sentence of the corpus is an arsis conceived on a grand
scale. The middle cadence contains a pleasant undulation. The second
sentence is a thesis and a return to the tonic. This made possible a bright
development of the verse. Actually, it contains a petition: Fiat- — "may
it come to pass." What we hear, however, is not a petition and suppli-
cation, but a portrayal of interior and exterior joy, and a cheerful thanks-
giving for these gifts. As to melody, two sentences are to be distinguished:
Fiat pax brings the same rich middle cadence as sunt mihi above, with
the exception that the word pax, so full of meaning, is brought into
prominence more plastically and brilliantly. At tua the melody returns
again to the fundamental of the mode. The second sentence is built up
in a similar way. The middle cadence, however, contains a significant
extension here. The larger intervals and the tarrying on the high seventh
above the fundamental seem to try to give expression to the abundant
fullness of blessing.

140 Fourth Sunday in Lent

The desire of the singer is the attainment of peace and prosperity;
for peace without prosperity is quiet misery, and prosperity without
peace is unenjoyable happiness, as St. Chrysostom says. In the mouth
of the Israelites, returning from exile, this psalm was a jubilant greeting
to Sion. Peace has again entered the hearts of many during these holy
weeks before Easter. They have gone into the house of the Lord, and
God with His grace has again entered into their hearts. They have been
filled with divine consolation in the reception of Holy Communion.

The Gradual is a preparation for the Gospel of this Sunday, which
recounts the miraculous multiplication of the loaves, is a preparation
for the institution of the Holy Eucharist and its never-failing peace.
We hear it again in the votive Mass for peace.

TRACT (Ps. 124: 1, 2)

1. Qui confidunt in Domino sicut 1. They that trust in the Lord shall

mons Sion: f non commovehitur in be as Mount Sion: f he shall not he

aeternum, f Qui habitat in Jerusa- moved for ever f that dwelleth in

lern. 2. Montes in circuitu ejus: f Jerusalem. 2. Mountains are round

et Dominus in circuitu populi sui, about it: f so the Lord is round about

t ex hoc nunc et usque in saecu- His people, f from henceforth now

lum. and forever.

The intervals of fourths over montes endeavor to picture for us the
jagged mountains. Over sui we meet an easily recognizable form of what
Ernst Kurth, in his Grundlagen des linearen Kontrapunktes (pp. 26 fif.),
calls "Schleuderbewegung." We receive the impression that there is a
gathering and concentration of forces in preparation for the leap of the
interval. Codex 339 of St. Gall's here uses only light neums to be sung
straight on, evidently requiring a fluent and impelling rendition, remi-
niscent of the preparatory twirls of a sling.

OFFERTORY (Ps. 134: 3, 6)

1. Laudate Dominum quia be- 1. Praise ye the Lord, for he is

nignus est: 2. psallite nomini ejus good: 2. sing ye to his Name, for

quoniam suavis est: 3. omnia quae- he is sweet: 3. whatsoever he pleased,

cumque voluit, fecit in caelo et in he hath done in heaven and on

terra, earth.

The introductory word Laudate is significant from a twofold con-
sideration: on account of its rich melody and its extended range. Both
these elements, however, are lacking as the melody progresses. It never
passes beyond the range of a fifth. It would seem that it was not so much

Fourth Sunday in Lent 141

the thought of singing and playing for God that occupied the mind of
the author, but rather this thought: "God is good." In a similar manner
does he emphasize, with almost the same melodic turn, the thought:
"sweet is His name" after the motive over psdllite in the Introit of the
first Christmas Mass. It is this thought that gives the chant its sweet
and restful character. It governs also the third sentence, which treats
of the omnipotence of God. A modulation to the full step below the tonic
closes the second sentence. Then omnia rises up solemply, and we ex-
pect a development, but the repetitions over voluit, fecit, and over caelo
et in terra, which are enlivened only by fourths, preserve the quiet char-
acter. No boisterous song which might arouse the listeners should be
allowed here. It is a quiet song, a joyful prayer of thanksgiving for the
goodness of God manifested in the miracle of the multiplication of the
loaves (Gospel) and in the miracle of the Eucharist which is continually
being performed.

The Offertory is the only chant of today's Mass that does not con-
tain an allusion to Jerusalem. Formerly, however, it contained more
verses, the last of which runs thus: "Ye that fear the Lord, praise the
Lord. Praised be the Lord of Sion, who dwelleth in Jerusalem." It was
this concluding word that carried an unusually rich melody.

COMMUNION (Ps. 21: 3, 4)

1. Jerusalerriy quae aedificatur ut 1. Jerusalem which is built as a

civitas, cujus participatio ejus in city, which is compact together: 2.

idipsum: 2. illuc enim ascenderunt for thither did the tribes go up, the

tribus, tribus Domini, ad confi- tribes of the Lord, to praise thy

tendum nomini tuo, Domine. name, 0 Lord.

The word Jerusalem is treated with evident affection. Hence, when-
ever any certain tone is prolonged and the melody lingers about it, it
conveys the picture of a well-grounded city, or at least suggests such an
image. The brilliantly aspiring melody which follows, however, stresses
the point that more important than these external advantages are the
spiritual benefits which this city of peace imparts to its inhabitants. The
climax of the entire piece comes at the words illic enim ascenderunt
tribus with a melody full of sweet harmony, and an excellent expansion
of the motives of ejus in idipsum. In the Rome of the Middle Ages, as
Grisar (Das Missale, p. 46 j says, "even the ascent to today's station
church 'in Jerusalem' was a reality, since it went from the Lateran down
into a valley, then higher up again. Even today, despite the filling in
of the lower parts of this valley, this is still discernible from the course
of the old city walls which are found at that place." The purpose of the

142 Passion Sunday

rising melody, however, is not only to portray. It rings out like the echo
of the joyful songs that the Israelites, dressed for the solemn occasion,
sang on their pilgrimage to Jerusalem; or like an anticipation of the songs
that came from the hearts of the catechumens, when, on the night before
Easter, vested in their white robes^ — the symbol of purity of heart- —
they were permitted to go up to the altar from the baptistry in order
to take part in the sacrificial banquet (participdtio).

In the Epistle of this Sunday St. Paul speaks about the heavenly
Jerusalem. Thither, to our true home, we all direct our pilgrimage.
There we shall find brothers and sisters who know themselves intimately
united with us. And all of us have communion with them (that is how
we may translate the words: cujus participätio). The bread of life is our
viaticum. Therefore bravely on toward the eternal Easter, to never-
ending joy, to the never-ceasing praise of God. When next the solemn
services shall be held at the "Holy Cross in Jerusalem," Good Friday,
with its deeply impressive honoring of the holy cross and its lovable
dwelling on the wounds and the love of Christ, will have come. At that
time, too, the Church will emphasize the fact that through the cross
alone has joy come over the whole world. The joys that run through the
present Sunday also flow from the cross of Christ, as does all peace and
happiness.

PASSION SUNDAY

INTROIT (Ps. 42: 1, 2)

1. Judica me, Deus, et discerne 1. Judge me, O God, and dis-

causam meam de gente non sancta: tinguish my cause from the nation

2. ah homine iniquo et doloso eripe that is not holy: 2. from the unjust

me: quia tu es Deus meus, et for- and deceitful man deliver me: for

titudo mea. Ps. Emitte lucem tua et thou art my God and my strength,

veritatem tuam: * ipsa me deduxer- Ps. Send forth thy light and thy

unt, et adduxerunt in montem truth: * they have conducted me, and

sanctum tuum, et in tahernacula brought me unto thy holy hill, and

tua. unto thy tabernacles.

The forty-second psalm, from which these words are taken, forms a
part of the preliminary prayers of the Mass, on account of its verse: "I
will go unto the altar of God, to, God who giveth joy to my youth." But
even before it was used for this purpose it was sung on the present Sun-
day. We are reminded of this old custom when today, and on the fol-

Passion Sunday 143

lowing days until Holy Saturday exclusive, this psalm is not said at the
foot of the altar lest it be said twice — by the priest and choir.

If we permit the melody to work on us, or even if we merely glance
at the notation, one phrase immediately draws our attention. It is eripe
me — "deliver me!" It is the cry of a heavily oppressed heart. How effec-
tive must it have been formerly, when after each verse of the psalm,
the antiphon and with it this cry of affliction was heard. Along with it,
the second thought of this Introit was stressed, the thought of trust:
"For Thou art my God and my strength." But the entire melodic de-
velopment works up to a climax with eripe me.

Who is it that prays thus? Since today is Passion Sunday, our first
thought is that it is Christ Himself. Today's Epistle tells of Him that
He offered Himself as a spotless victim to the Father by the Holy Ghost.
No doubt, the words or thoughts of this Introit belonged to that Introit,
that introductory prayer, with which our dear Lord and Saviour began
His Passion on Mount Olivet. He sees Himself betrayed by Judas, "the
unjust and deceitful man;" he sees Himself before a tribunal, verily
before a "nation that is not holy." How must His inner Self have cried
to the Father: Judica me — "Judge me, 0 God, and distinguish my cause:"
eripe me — "deliver me!" Apparently this appeal is not heard, nor the
prayer: emitte lucem tuam — "Send forth Thy light," for darkness cov-
ered the face of the earth when the Jews crucified the Lord. He prays:
"Send forth . . .Thy truth;" but will have to cry: "My God, My God,
why hast Thou forsaken Me?" And yet God was His God and His
strength. The Easter sun will come to dispel the darkness of Calvary.
And Golgotha, in spite of its tragedy, was a holy mount and the ante-
room to the sublime tabernacle of glory. And the first song of the risen
Christ is a song of praise to the Father for His fidelity: "I arose, and
am still with Thee."

As Christ prays so the Church prays, for she is one with Him. Thus
also does the individual Christian soul pray. Only too frequently we
perceive ourselves to be an unholy nation, an unjust and deceitful man
that would delude us, deceive us, and turn us away from truth and
fidelity. The more we enter into ourselves by a searching self-examina-
tion, the more fervently shall we cry to our God and our strength: eripe
me- — "deliver me!"

But we also know that in the mystery of the holy Mass God's light
shines before our eyes and His fidelity reveals itself. Here we are upon
His holy mountain, in His tabernacle; we approach closely to Him. He
enters into our soul with His light and His truth.

The first and third phrases have the same ending, while the second
has a similar close a fifth higher over (eri)-pe me. Thus the whole is varied

144 Passion Sunday

and rounded out. There is some resemblance between the first half of
the first two phrases and the second half of the third phrase. The sec-
onds and the minor third in the first phrase begin apathetically. But al-
ready causam meam betrays inner agitation. The sorrow, thus far con-
cealed with difficulty, comes to the surface in the second phrase with
gathering force. "From the unjust and deceitful man deliver me!" With
a, h\?, h, c, the melody works up to d. This results quite naturally in a
forceful crescendo. In the annotated manuscript of the tenth and eleventh
centuries the third phrase is introduced with great delicacy of feeling
with broad notes, over which is placed "t" (teuere, to hold J. Thus im-
pressiveness is added to the subsequent assertion: "for Thou art my God
and my strength." Similarly, on the final syllable of fortitudo, "Thou
art my strength," the same manuscripts have almost all the neums
marked broadly.

GRADUAL (Ps. 142: 9, 10)

1. Eripe me, Domine, de inimicis 1. Deliver me from mine enemies,

m^is: 2. doce me facere voluntatem O Lord: 2. teach me to do thy will,

tuam. 'f. 1. Liberator mens, Do- '^. 1. Thou art my deliverer, O Lord,

mine, de gentihus iracundis: 2. ab from the angry nations: 2. thou wilt

insurgentibus in me exaltabis me: lift me up above them that rise up

3. a viro iniquo eripies me. against me: 3. from the unjust man

thou wilt deliver me.

The Gradual continues the principal petitions of the Introit. Both
cry out: eripe me; both speak of the unjust man (homine iniquo, viro
iniquo). Whereas the Introit had prayed: ""Send forth Thy light," the
Gradual implores the Lord thus: "Teach me to do Thy will." Both are
filled with an unshakable confidence. Deus meus, et fortitudo mea of the
Introit corresponds to liberator meus in the Gradual. In the corpus we
find more supplication: eripe me, while the verse is more expressive of
confidence: "Thou wilt lift up; Thou wilt deliver me." Melodically,
also, the verse represents an increase, as is the case in most Graduals.

The melody belongs to the third mode, which is employed in nine
different Graduals in the period from Septuagesima Sunday to the
Tuesday in Holy Week, while during the entire remaining part of the
liturgical year it occurs only nine times in all. It is composed of varying
formulas, which are adapted in various groupings over different texts.
We have, therefore, to do here with a typical melody, and hence are not
so much concerned with interpretation of the text as with its embellish-
ment. Upon closer inspection, however, several peculiarities may be
noted, among them the plaintive closing motive b a g a f f e, which oc-

Passion Sunday 145

curs over fäcere, iracündis, in me, iniquo, and (eripies) me. Above all,
however, the passage over a viro iniquo produces a striking effect. The
beginning bears some resemblance to that of the third Sunday of Lent.
Meis and tuam with their florid cadences divide the corpus into two dis-
tinct phrases. The latter gave a corresponding ending to the corpus and
verse on the third Sunday of Lent. The verse has three phrases. In many
passages the old dominant of the third mode (h) is still plainly discern-
ible. At the beginning of the verse, cb c da must be regarded as an arsis;
that which follows as thesis. The third member begins here with a con-
traction of the second member and then repeats the thesis like motive
of the first member.

(Cf. the Gradual for Quinquagesima Sunday.)
TRACT (Ps. 128: 1, 4)

1. Saepe expugnaverunt me a ju- 1. Often have they fought against

ventute mea. 2. Dicat nunc Israel: f me from my youth. 2. Let Israel now

saepe expugnaverunt me ( — ) a ju- say: f Often have they fought

ventute mea. 3. Etenim non potuer- against me ( — ) from my youth. 3.

unt mihi: f supra dorsum meum But they could not prevail over me:

( — ) fabricaverunt peccatores. 4. f upon my hack ( — ) the wicked

Prolongaverunt iniquitatem sihi: f have wrought. 4. They have length-

Dominus Justus concidet ( — ) cer- ened their iniquities : f the Lord, who

vices peccatorum. is just, will cut ( — ) the necks of

the sinners.

In every instance the beginning of the verses is different. Special
attention should be paid to that of the first and second verses. To look
upon the florid melody over saepe as mere word-painting, representing
frequency, would indeed betray a too superficial understanding: for if
one remarks how the annotated manuscript, for example Codex 121 of
Einsiedeln, give a broad form to almost every note, how each of the
descending thirds is marked with an episeme and besides this also with
"t" (tenere, to holdj, the thought suggests itself that the singer was
casting a glance backward over all the struggles that had broken in upon
him and was reliving all the hard and bitter things they had brought
to him, and in this mood had sung this heavy melody. Similarly, the
second verse with its threefold "x" (exspectare, to waitj after three groups
of notes, with a broad construction over the last four notes, which more-
over are marked with "t", seems to reveal a similar feeling. After these
serious beginnings we soon meet frequent joyous passages, proper to
Tract-melodies of the eighth mode. The fundamental thought of the

146 Passion Sunday

entire piece is: non potuerunt mihi, which we should like to see given
melodic prominence rather than the second mea. The second last member
closes on /, the last on g. Both notes influence the preceding neums: /
demands 6b, while g calls for h: cc ag a h\? g f, a ca hg g aa g. The typical

Alleluia-melody of the eighth mode, sung, for example, on the first
Sunday of Advent, has a similar closing formula. Toward the end, the
first and third verses have an identical melody; the closing neums of the
second verse also are alike. By the middle cadence with its modulation
to /, the second verse is divided at Israel, the third at mihi, the fourth
at sihi. With dorsum meum the word-accent is prepared by two neums,
exactly as with concidet, and before the expugnaverunt me. Then the sylla-
ble after the accent dies away quietly. In the last verse we find a florid
melisma over the accented syllable of Prolongaverunt, which also occurs
over the second syllable of etenim at the beginning of the third verse.
As happens frequently, plain song resolves the word etenim into its two
constituent parts, et\enim.

The song marks the opening of the mighty struggle upon which
Christ is now entering. From His youth, from His very childhood, He
was harassed, so that He had to be saved by flight from His country.
In the Gospel of Passion Sunday we hear again how His enemies in-
tended to stone Him; indeed, they already had the stones in their hands.
What means did they not employ to render Him and His work odious?
How have not the wicked wrought upon His back at the scourging? How
did they not lengthen their iniquities in that long night and on that
terrible Good Friday? But they did not conquer Him. In spite of their
machinations, Easter Day dawned. As He had been, so has His Church
been worried from her youth, from the days of the first Pentecost, when
the Apostles were scourged, to our own time. The Christians have been
persecuted and slaughtered, churches and cloisters have fallen a prey to
vandalism. The researches of so-called scholars and the intrigues of
diplomats and statesmen have exerted all their powers against her. But
non potuerunt, they were not able to overcome her. Christ has given
His promise and will fulfill it to the end of days: and all the fury of hell
shall not avail against her.

OFFERTORY (Ps. 118: 17, 107)

1. Confitehor tibi, Dowiine, in toto 1. / will confess to thee, O Lord

cor de meo: 2. retrihue servo tuo: with my whole heart: 2. render to

vivam, et custodiam sermones tuos: thy servant: I shall live and keep

3. vivifica me secundum verhum thy words: 3. enliven me according

tuum, Domine. to thy word, 0 Lord.

Passion Sunday 147

This bright, joyous text of the antiphon — and verse which was
attached to it in the most ancient manuscript — may surprise us on Pas-
sion Sunday. It does, indeed present petitions: "enliven me; incline my
heart in Thy testimonies;" but the other thoughts predominate: "Thy
judgements are delightful" (jucunda), and, with a florid melody, "I have
loved Thy law." Thus this Offertory continues the thoughts of the sec-
ond and third Sundays of Lent. We may point out that, from Passion
Sunday on, the Missal does not stress the sufferings of Christ so much
as does the Breviary in its hymns and antiphons. We never find somber
tones exclusively in the Church's mourning. When she thinks of her be-
loved dead, she does not act like those who have no hope; she sees eternal
light rising before them, and asks that this eternal light be theirs. And
the most heartfelt sympathy with the sufferings of the Crucified One
does not hinder her from singing of Christ's resurrection on Good Fri-
day, and from singing of His cross: "For by the wood the whole world
is filled with joy."

The Offertory bears some relation to the Gospel of the Sunday.
Christ is accused by the Jews of having a demon; His enemies condemn
Him as a blasphemer and therefore wish to stone Him. We, on the con-
trary, sing: "I will confess to Thee . . . with my whole heart." In the
Gospel Christ speaks: "Abraham your father rejoiced that he might see
My day: he saw it [in spirit], and was glad." Abraham's longing and joy
has been realized. The day of Christ has come. We see Him and experi-
ence His presence at every holy Mass. Hence the grateful words: "I
will confess to Thee, O Lord, with my whole heart" (first phrase). The
Saviour continues: "Amen, amen I say to you, if any man keep My
word, he shall not see death for ever." This gives us an understanding
of the solemn protestation of the Offertory: "I shall live and keep Thy
words" (second phrase). But humbly and confidently we add: "Enliven
me according to Thy word, O Lord" (third phrase).

The melody has a bright and joyous ring. It is characterized by
symmetry and harmony. The first and third phrases have the same
longer closing formula over meo and Domine, while the second has it a
minor third higher over tuos. These corresponding cadences give to the
whole the qualities of song construction. In each case they already set
in a fourth before the finale: over (cor)-de and (tu)-um with g ff e (d),
over (serm6)-nes with h\? a g (f). A trained ear will recognize a resolved
F-major chord over in to-(to), -o vi-(vam), et custö-(diam), vivifica, ver-
hum. In other instances too this piece shows a predilection for small
formulas: tibi and toto with a descending fourth, as also Domine, vivam,
cust6-(diam). The formula g a /d/ over (to)-to likewise deserves mention;

148 Passion Sunday

it is repeated over (retribu)-e and in a shortened form over verbum as

fgfdf.

If we compare the three phrases of the piece, it can scarcely be as-
serted that any single one of them is more significant than the others
or reveals a greater tension of soul. In this fact, from a purely artistic
point of view, lies the defect of our present Offertory. The fact that th-e
second and third phrases in each case set in with the closing note of the
preceding phrase causes some monotony. The initial motive of the
piece is found frequently; for example, in the Introits Rordte and Gau-
deamus, and in the Offertory Jubilate. In the second phrase the question
arises whether or not a larger pause ought to be made after servo tuo.
Generally we translate: "Render to Thy servant that I may live." This
interpretation is corroborated by the manuscript of St. Gall's (339)
and of Einsiedeln (121), which do not place an episeme over the last
two notes of tuo, as is almost always done in similar passages. They
intend, therefore, that vivam be added immediately. The melody as
such, however, seems to demand a pause. Melodically, vivam et custo-
diam surely belong together. The passage over sermones tuos frequently
recurs in pieces of the fifth and sixth modes (cf. the Introit Requiem).
In the third phrase the cadence secundum is somewhat disturbing, be-
cause it separates the preposition too much from its substantive, unless
the rendition be a fluent one. So much the more pleasant is vivifica
("enliven me") and verbum. The latter is a happy continuation of toto,
while (retribu)-e may be looked upon as a contraction of that word.
Compare also the melodic movement over (in) me in the verse of today's
Gradul with verbum.

N. Sch., 232, 239 f.

COMMUNION (I Cor. 11: 24, 25)

1. Hoc corpus, quod pro vobis 1. This is my body which shall

tradetur: hie calix novi testamenti be delivered for you: this is the
est in meo sanguine, dicit Dominus: chalice of the new testament in my
2. hoc facite, quotiescumque sumi- blood, saith the Lord: 2. this do as
tis, in meam commemorationem. often as you receive it, in commemo-

ration of me.

Christ is Highpriest. He offered Himself to the Father as a spotless
victim as He does today in the Mystery of holy Mass, and sings to Him
a perfect song. With His own blood He accomplished the salvation of
mankind on the wood of the cross, so that whence death came, thence
also life might rise again (Preface of the Cross). He has won eternal
redemption and eternal life, which He bestows upon all those who
group themselves around Him in faith, who hear His word and keep it.

Passion Sunday 149

Some of the melody's peculiarities, no doubt, arise from its affinity
to the Ambrosian Liturgy of Milan, where it is still sung today (Rubs.
gr., 7, 506 fif.)- But it has become much more effective in its Gregorian
dress.

This song takes us into the midst of the scene of the Last Supper,
at its most solemn moment. The words we hear are the most powerful
heard since the creation of the world; words embodying in themselves
wonder upon wonder, effecting the profoundest Mystery of the Holy
Eucharist. Hence we may well expect that the plainsong melody has
great things to tell. But it has still another characteristic. The frequent
succession of three full tones, f g a h (tritone), ascending over voMs
tradetur and over calix novi, and descending over meo sanguine and meam
commemorationem, imparts to the song harsh, painful features. They
seem to remind us of the Saviour's words on the eve of His passion, to
re-create, as it were, the feelings which at that time filled His heart. Not
only did He have a premonition of them, but He foresaw them most
clearly, and felt beforehand all the tortures with which His body would
be afflicted and with which His blood, establishing the New Covenant,
would be shed. This pain is present throughout the piece. With great dif-
ficulty vohis tradetur seems to ascend, as if it had to pause for rest and recu-
perate strength after each full tone. The annotated manuscript here have
three neums with broad markings. By reason of the similar closing for-
mulas over tradetur, Dominus, and commemorationem, one might dis-
tinguish three phrases. The first phrase supports itself on g and only
once extends to h. By its emphasis on b, the second phrase wishes to state
the fact that a new covenant has been called into being. In this phrase
we hear a single c. A new division begins with hoc facite. Emphatically
the melody ascends to c and lets it resound. Manuscript 121 of Ein-
siedeln has here not only an episeme for the first neum, but also "V
(teuere, prolong, draw out this notej. Here the melody appropriately
grows in warmth and solemnity, especially over quotiescumque with its
protracted high e. Over meam the same form returns a fourth lower.
The Lord has given the command which called our liturgy into being,
the command which incites to participation in the sacrificial Banquet,
which builds our altars, and the churches and cathedrals that house them.
It seems as if the light of transfiguration were sweeping over the coun-
tenance of the Saviour, joyful at the immeasurable blessing that the Holy
Eucharist will produce, blissfully contemplating all the love it will wake
in grateful hearts. The harsh ending tells us that Communion is the
fruit of Christ's sacrificial death.

Musica s., 52, 3 ff.

* * * *

150 Palm Sunday

PALM SUNDAY

A. THE BLESSING OF THE PALMS AND THE
PROCESSION

The chants and prayers are arranged as at holy Mass. In place of
the Introit we have the following antiphon

ANTIPHON (Matt. 21:9)

1. Hosanna filio David: bene- 1. Hosanna to the Son of David:

dictus qui venit in nomine Domini. blessed is he that cometh in the name
2. Rex Israel: Hosanna in excelsis. of the Lord. 2. O King of Israel:

Hosanna in the highest.

Here the very first word again supplies the leading thought of the
celebration, the fundamental idea. The blessing of the palms and the
procession anticipate the resurrection. The large interval of a fifth at
the beginning and toward the close of the antiphon tend to rouse and
enhance the festal joy. Philologically the word Hosanna means "save
now, save," and implores a blessing upon the Son of David entering
Jerusalem. But perhaps at that time already, as at present, it was an
expression of jubilation. Therefore, Hosanna in excelsis does not mean
that God is to send down His help from on high. Rather it is an exhor-
tation to the inhabitants of the celestial regions to join in the rejoicing
of the exultant multitude on earth. In the Son of David all of God's
prophecies have been fulfilled. In Him we meet the divine, we meet God
Himself.

This cry has been perpetuated throughout the centuries, and no
Mass is now celebrated in which the King of glory is not greeted in this
manner. With what affection did our most famous composers treat the
Benedictus with its Hosanna.

This melody bears some resemblance to an archaic Greek composi-
tion dating from the second century before Christ.

Moehler, Geschichte der alten und mittelalterlischen Musik, I, 18
(Sammlung Goeschen) and Musica s. 44, 193 ff.

THE RESPONSORIES

Between the Lesson, describing the oasis with its seventy palms,
and the Gospel, which narrates the triumphal entry of Jesus, two re-

Palm Sunday 151

sponsories are inserted, either of which may be sung. In the present
instance both of them strike us as strange. One of them leads us to the
meeting of the Sanhedrin, which determined up®n the death of Jesus.
Its melody reveals a powerful, even passionate dramatic force. The ren-
dition is not easy.

THE SECOND RESPONSORY (Matt. 26: 39, 41)

A, 1. In monte Oliveti oravit ad A. l.On Mount Olivet he prayed

Patrem: 2. Pater, si fieri potest to his Father: 2. Father, if it be po~

transeat a me calix iste. 3. * Spi- sihle, let this chalice pass from me

ritus quidem promptus est, caro 3. * The spirit indeed is willing,

autem infirma: 4. fiat voluntas tua. hut the flesh is weak: 4. thy will he

B. t- I. Vigilate et orate, II. ut done. B. ^. /. Watch and pray, II.

non intretis in tentationem. A. 3. that ye enter not into temptation.

* Spiritus. ... A. 3. * The spirit. . . .

The procession began from Mount Olivet. This responsory speeds
ahead of the incidents in the order of their occurrence and transports us
to the scene of Christ's agony on the same Mount of Olives, thus setting
up a rather somber background to this joyful celebration.

The melody has the form ABA, like the responsory Emendemus
on Ash Wednesday. In A the first half of the first phrase ascends to the
dominant; in the form of a sequence the second half comes to the tonic.
The second and third phrases begin on the dominant. The third closes
with a modulation to the full tone below the tonic. Iste sets the formula
over (Oli)-veti a full tone lower.

B, the verse, has an entirely typical melody. Both of its two phrases
have an introductory formula; then in I the wonted recitation on c
follows which is very brief here on account of the brevity of the text,
together with a frequent five-syllable middle adence; in II recitation

S 4 32 1

on g, and always a five-syllable closing cadence, here from tentationem
on.

Wagner, III, 197 and 343; Johner, Der greg. Choral, 96 and 102.

At the distribution of the blessed palms the antiphons Pueri Hehrae-
orum are sung.

Pueri Hehraeorum, portantes ra- The Hehrew children carrying

mos olivarum, ohviaverunt Domino, olive branches, met our Lord, crying

clamantes, et dicentes: Hosanna in out, and saying: Hosanna in the

excelsis. highest.

152 Palm Sunday

Pueri Hehraeorum vestimenta The Hebrew children spread their

prosternehant in via, et clamahant garments in the way, and cried out

dicentes: Hosanna filio David: saying: Hosanna to the Son of

henedictus qui venit in nomine David: blessed is he that cometh in

Domini. the name of the Lord.

These energetic songs well deserved to become the common pro-
perty of the faithful. They are similar in construction, yet present a

ag f ga a
pleasing variety. The first antiphon sings o-li-va-rum, while the second

a g f f g g
in the corresponding place sings -nebant in vi-a. Especially in the sec-
ond antiphon does the influence of the word-accents on the melody make
itself felt. These songs were very popular formerly.

THE PROCESSION OF THE PALMS

Through their blessing the palm boughs were elevated to the dignity
of sacramentals, capable of mediating grace for us. The blessing, however,
has still another purpose; it is the psychological preparation for the ele-
vated feeling manifested in the palm procession. It explains to us the
symbolism of this procession and asks for the graces which are to pre-
pare us for this solemn act. Then only can real joy and true enthusiasm
quicken us. The palms anticipate triumphs over the prince of this world:
thus the Church, in poetic strain. They announce beforehand that our
Saviour will fight with the prince of death for the life of the world and
that by His death He will conquer. And the olive branches tell us that
in the Son of God the fullness of mercy has been manifested to the world.

Of the charming antiphons which the Church offers us we shall
adduce the following only:

1. Ante sex dies solemnis Paschae, 1. Six days before the solemnity

quando venit Dominus in civitatem of the Passover, when our Lord was
Jerusalem, occurrerunt ei pueri: 2. coming into the city of Jerusalem, the
et in manibus portabant ramos pal- children met him [solemn inception,
marum, et clamabant voce magna emphasis on seconds, but then a
dicentes: 3. Hosanna in excelsis: great development, a clear major
4. benedictus qui venisti in multi- chord over quando ve-(nit), Jeru-
tudine misericordiae: 5. Hosanna salem, occurrerunt]. 2. and carried
in excelsis. palm branches in their hands, and

cried with a loud voice, saying [deep
middle phrase, forming a kind of

Palm Sunday

153

1. Occurrunt turhae cum florihus
et palmis Redemptori ohviam: 2. et
victori triumphanti digna dant oh-
sequia: 3. Filium Dei ore gentes
praedicant: et in laudem Christi
voces tonant per nubila: Hosannal

contrast and making the subse-
quent Hosanna so much the more
effective]. 3. Hosanna in the high-
est [magnificent swellings, both in
the first and in the second group
of Hosanna]. 4. blessed art thou who
hast come in the multitude of thy
mercy [harking back to the melody
of the second phrase and telling
emphasis on multitudine]. 5. Ho-
sanna in the highest [jubilant and
spirited repetition of the melody.]

1. The multitude go out to meet
the Redeemer with flowers and
palms: 2. and to a triumphant con-
querer [how effective is the in-
terval of a fourth and the recita-
tion on the dominant!] they pay
homage: 3. nations proclaim the
Son of God: and their voices rend the
skies in the praise of Christ: Ho-
sannal

Cum Angelis et pueris fideles in-
veniamur, triumphatori mortis cla-
mantes: Hosanna in excelsis.

Let us join with the angels and
children singing to the conqueror of
death: Hosanna in the highest.

What a mighty impression these melodies must have produced
when sung by an immense concourse, rejoicing in their faith! And in
the early centuries Palm Sunday was a solemn popular feast. Thus
attests the pilgrim Etheria (c. 385), and so it was throughout the entire
Middle Ages. Its procession enjoyed the same favor and popularity as
was attained in later centuries by the Corpus Christi procession.

RETURN OF THE PROCESSION

When the procession returns into the church, it finds the doors
locked. Suddenly from the interior of the church a joyous song to the
victorious King Christ resounds, the renowned Gloria laus^, composed
by Bishop Theodulf of Orleans (4-821).

1 C.-O., 46, 45 ff.; Revue, 3, 115 ff.; Civilta catt., 57, II. 3 flf. and 159 ff.

154

Palm Sunday

A. Gloria, laus, et honor, tibi sit A. All glory, praise, and honor he,

Rex Christe Redemptor: B. Cui
puerile decus prompsit Hosanna
pium.

0 Christ, Redeemer King, to
thee,
B. Whom children hailed with joy-
ous song,
Hosanna in sweet melody.

The first halves of the two verses have some resemblance.

The singers outside the church repeat this distich. Then the singers

inside intone:

1. Israel es tu Rex, Davidis et in-
dyta proles: Nomine qui in Do-
mini, Rex henedicte, venis.

1. Thou David's Son of royal fame,
Who in the God of Israel's name
Art come our praise and love
to claim.

Here the verses have the same spirited melody.
After each of the following verses the singers outside the church
add the Gloria laus. Thus there results an energetic alternate song.

2. Coetus in excelsis te laudat
caelicus omnis. Et mortalis homo, et
cuncta creata simul.

3. Plebs Hebraea tibi cum palmis
obvia venit: Cum prece, voto, hym-
nis, adsumus ecce tibi.

4. Hi tibi passuro solvebant
munia laudis: Nos tibi regnanti
pangimus ecce melos.

5. Hi placuere tibi, placeat de-
votio nostra : Rex bone, Rex clemens,
cui bona cuncta placent.

2. The angels host laud thee on high.
All creatures too in earth and sky
And mortal man takes up the

cry.

3. The Hebrews came with

branches fair,

And we with hymns and sup-
pliant prayer

Would in thy gracious triumph
share.

4. Thee on thy way to death they

praise.
To thee exsuUant psalms we

raise,
Who reignest unto endless days.

5. To thee this day, 0 gracious

King,
Whom their devotion pleased, we

sing,
Do thou accept the praise we

bring.

As the procession re-enters the church, the following is sung:

Palm Sunday

155

RESPONSORY Ingrediente Domino

A. 1. Ingrediente Domino in
sanctam civitatem, 2. Hebraeorum
pueri, resurr ectionem vitae pro-
nuntiantes, 3. * Cum ramis palma-
rum Hosanna clamabant in excel-
sis. B. ^. I. Cumque audisset po-
pulus, quod Jesus veniret Jerosoly-
mam, II. exierunt obviam ei. A. 3.
* Cum ramis . . .

A. 1. As our Lord entered the
city, 2. the Hebrew children de-
claring the resurrection of life, 3. *
With palm branches, cried out:
Hosanna in the highest. B. jl. I.
When the people heard that Jeuss
was to come to Jerusalem, II. they
went out to meet him. A. 3. * With
palm branches . . .

The construction here is the same as in the responsory Emendemus
on Ash Wednesday. The third phrase corresponds to the first: civitatem
= clamdbant in excelsis, with a slight simplification in the middle. In the
second and third phrases the joy of the multitude waving palms strives
to go beyond the limits of the typical form. Here again the third phrase
modulates to the full tone below the tonic; the closing cadence also has

five syllables: obviam ei.

B. THE MASS

INTROIT (Ps. 21 : 20, 22)

1. Domine, ne longe facias auxi-
lium tuum a me, 2. ad defensionem
meam aspice: 3. libera me de ore
leonis, et a cornibus unicornuorum
humilitatem meam. Ps. Deus, Deus
meus, respice in me, * quare me
dereliquistil longe a salute mea
verba delictorum meorum.

1. 0 Lord, remove not thy help to
a distance from me, 2. look towards
my defence: 3. deliver me from the
lion's mouth, and my lowness from
the horns of the unicorns. Ps. O
God, my God, look upon me, * why
hast thou forsaken mel far from
my salvation are the words of my
sins.

The jubilant Hosanna is no longer heard. The multitudes have dis-
persed and the Saviour is alone. Even now He experiences what that
lonely hour of vigil on the Mount of Olives will hold for Him. Even now
the feeling, which on the cross will cause Him to cry out: "O God, My
God, why has Thou forsaken Me?" has overtaken Him. In most abject
distress, in the face of a sea of sorrows which unmercifully overwhelms
Him, He cries in this Introit: "O Lord, remove not Thy help to a dist-
ance from Me!" This Introit like others wells up melodically from the

156 Palm Sunday

depths (cf. the luminous Introit for the second Mass of Christmas). Our
Introit receives its somber character more especially from the double
descent of a fifth over Domine ne longe, thus protracting the initial
Domine. A light accent should be placed on the second, not the third,
note of D6-(mine). Tuum exhibits special tenderness: Thou, O Lord,
art the only One that can yet help me.

In the second phrase aspice sounds like the cry of one harassed to
death. Look Thou upon me with the eyes of Thy mercy and of Thine
omnipotence! The Introit for Pentecost has a similar passage. There,
however, scientiam vocis is only a majestic echo of orhem terrarum. Aspice
marks the only high point of today's Introit. At Pentecost the d, which
had already been sung twice, lessens the effect of the interval of a fourth;
in the present piece, however, the interval of a fourth comes abruptly.
The torculus over meam tends to retard and to weaken, making the out-
cry aspice so much the more impressive.

The third phrase no longer exhibits great agitation. It has a range
of only a fifth. Its special means of expression is the repeated emphasis
on the dominant c, and, following the lead of aspice, it stresses the sec-
ond imperative, libera me. How fervent is the petition of the one who is
praying: I am Thy Son, Thy well-beloved Son. The repeated a over de
ore le-(6nis) and the repeated g over unicornu6-(rum) share some of the
impressiveness of the high c. In the Offertory of the Requiem Mass, de
ore leonis with its interval of a fourth and pressus is more effective. Here
it merely repeats the formula of a me, which occurs also over (c6r)-nihus
and in an abbreviated form over auxilium. In this phrase the accent is
placed on libera me. The whole molds itself into a favorite cadence of
the eighth mode. The ascending f a c, so frequently employed in the
eighth mode, is here avoided throughout. Generally it is used to adorn
bright and joyous texts and is found only once in connection with a
supplicating text in the Introit for the sixteenth Sunday after Pentecost
over tola. In a somewhat veiled and descending form we meet it here
over tuum a me.

Quiet resignation characterizes the end of the song. Nevertheless
the prayer wells up once more almost vehemently: "O God, my God,
why hast Thou forsaken Me?" The repetition of the first word already
betrays the interior agitation. Forsaken Me! Now one disciple is about
to betray and sell Me, another to deny Me, then all the rest flee! Even
God Himself seems to forsake Me!

Why has the Lord taken all this sorrow upon Himself? On account
of our sins!

N. Sch., 267 ff.

Palm Sunday 157

GRADUAL (Ps. 72: 24, 1-3)

1. Tenuisti manum dexteram 1. Thou hast held me by the right

meam: 2. in voluntate tua deduxisti hand: 2. and by thy will thou hast

me: 3, et cum gloria assumpsisti conducted me: 3. and with glory

me. i'. 1. Quam bonus Israel Deus thou hast assumed me. jll. 1. How

rectis cordel 2. mei autem pene good is God to Israel, to them that

moti sunt pedes, 3. pene effusi sunt are of right heartl 2. but my feet

gressus mei: 4. quia zelavi in pec- were almost moved, 3. my steps had

catoribus, 5. pacem peccatorum well nigh slipped: 4. because I had

videns. a zeal on occasion of sinners, 5.

seeing the peace of sinners.

The sacred Passion dominates the liturgy of today's Mass. But if
we listen a bit sharply we hear other notes also; if we scrutinize a bit
closely, we discern lights springing up here and there in the night of sor-
rows, foreshadowing a great morning — the dawn of Easter. The Epistle
speaks of the voluntary sacrificial death of Christ, but at the same time
of the glory He has thus won for Himself. Similarly in the Gradual the
gaze of Christ passes to the Paschal solemnity, to His Ascension, when
the Father will unite Him to Himself in glory. Looking back upon His
earthly life. He thanks the Father for His protection. This, even in His
bitterest sufferings, remains the chief sentiment of His heart: "How good
is God!" True, He also thinks of His sufferings; He sees beforehand that
His feet will no longer bear Him, that laden with His cross, He will
stumble and falter, and all this because zeal against sin and zeal for His
Father's glory consumes Him. But the joy of the coming glory trans-
cends all sorrow. This thought was stressed still more in earlier times
when the initial words were repeated. Even in the subsequent Tract,
filled as it is with tragedy, at least the concluding verses speak of the
blessing of the Passion for redeemed mankind.

In .its three phrases the corpus presents three thoughts. The final
syllables of each phrase bear a florid melisma. The second phrase as-
cends upward; to balance this, the third phrase makes the same ca-
dence after gloria as the first phrase. Melodically, a new fourth phrase
begins with assumpsisti, having the same motive which opened the
second phrase. Pauses in the text and in the melody do not entirely
agree. A frequent reversion of the melody from / over d to c character-
izes the first phrase. It is the expression of a quiet resignation.

According to content and sentiment, the first phrase of the verse
still belongs to the corpus. Although we seem to be singing in the first
mode, nevertheless the interval of a fourth over corde, the inception on
the dominant a, and the last five or six notes over videns lead us back

158

Palm Sunday

to the fourth mode. The melody of redis cor de is repeated over moti sunt
pedes; gressus met repeats the formula of (dedu)-xisti me in the corpus.
Other slight repetitions are also found. The verse, moreover, ascends
higher than the first part, which never goes above h\?.

TRACT (Ps. 21: 2-9, 18, 19, 22, 24, 32)

The present Tract seems to be the account of an eyewitness, rather
than a prophetic hymn composed a thousand years before the accom-
plishment of these events.

Here again the mediant is indicated by the sign f; the caesura,

by (-).

1. Deus, Deus meus, respice in
me, t quare me dereliquistil 2.
Longe a salute mea t verba (■ — ) de-
lictorum meorum. 3. Deus meus
clamaho per diem, nee exaudies: f
in node, et non ( — ) ad insipien-
tiam mihi. 4. Tu autem in sancto
hahitas, f laus Israel. 5. In te spera-
verunt patres nostri: t speraverunt
(• — ) et liherasti eos. 6. Ad te cla-
maverunt, et salvi facti sunt: f in te
speraverunt ( — ) et non sunt con-
fusi. 7. Ego autem sum vermis, et
non homo: f opprobrium hominum
( — ) et abjedio plebis. 8. Omnes qui
videbant me, aspernabantur me: f
locuti sunt labiis et moverunt ca-
put. 9. Speravit in Domino, eripiat
eum: f salvum facial eum ( — ) quo-
niam vult eum. 10. Ipso vero con-
sider averunt et conspexerunt me: f
diviserunt sibi ( — ) vestimenta mea,
et super vestem meam miserunt sor-
tem. 11. Libera me de ore leonis: f
et a cornibus unicornuorum ( — )
humilitatem meam. 12. Qui timetis
Dominum, laudate eum: f Univer-
sum semen Jacob ( — ) magnificate
eum. 13. Annuntiabitur Domino
generatio Ventura: f et annuntia-

1. 0 God, my God, look upon me,
t why hast thou forsaken mel 2. Far
from my salvation f are the words
( — ) of my sins. 3. 0 my God, I shall
cry by day, and thou wilt not hear: f
and by night, and it shall not be
imputed ( — ) as folly in me. 4. But
thou dwellest in the holy place, t
the praise of Israel. 5. In thee have
our fathers hoped: f they have
hoped: ( — ) and thou hast delivered
them. 6. They cried to thee, and were
saved : f they trusted in thee ( — ) and
were not confounded. 7. But I am a
worm and no man: t t^^ reproach
of men (■ — ) and the outcast of the
people. 8. All they that saw me have
laughed me to scorn: t they have
spoken with the lips, and wagged the
head. 9. He hath hoped in the Lord,
let him deliver him: f let him save
him ( — ) seeing he delighteth in
him. 10. But they looked and stared
at me: t they parted ( — ) my gar-
ments among them, and upon my
vesture they cast lots. 11. Deliver
me from the lion's mouth: f a^^
from the horns of the unicorn (• — )
my lowness. 12. Ye that fear the
Lord, praise Him: f dH V^, the seed

Palm Sunday 159

hunt caeli justitiam ejus. 14. Po- of Jacob ( — ) glorify him. 13. There
pulo qui nascetur quern fecit Do- shall he declared to the Lord a genera-
minus, tion to come: f and the heavens shall

show forth his justice. 14. To a
people that shall he horn, which the
Lord hath made.

For the Passion the choir sings a simple melody, with middle and
closing cadence. High / is the dominant, prepared for by the low d on
the first syllable of the phrase. The Chronicler closes his melody in every
instance with 6 g ä f, so that almost regularly the choir begins with a
sixth (d).

OFFERTORY (Ps. 68: 21, 22)

A. 1. Improperium exspectavit cor A. 1. My heart hath expected re-

meum, et miseriam:B. 2. etsustinui proach and misery: B. 2. and I
qui simul contristaretur, et nonfuit: looked for one that would grieve to-
3. consolantem me quaesivi, et nan gether with me, and there was none:
invent: C. 4. et dederunt in escam 3. / sought for one to comfort me
meam fel, 5, et in siti mea potaver- and I found none: C. 4. And they
unt me aceto. gave me gall for my food, 5. and in

my thirst they gave me vinegar to

drink.

The whole is divided into three parts, each of which sets in with
low /. In part B the theme is announced. It speaks of profound reproach
— the melody here and here alone descending to low c — and of misery,
reaching its climax over miseriam. These are the two extremes of the
phrase. But He who complains thus is resigned to all things; this is evi-
denced, by the slow and measured ascending seconds, the subsequent
fourths, and the tarrying on high c.

Part B is concerned with the psychic sufferings of Jesus. His heart
beat only for others, consumed itself for others. If anyone, then surely
the suffering Saviour was justified in expecting that all those whom He
had healed, whom He had assisted, whom He had given true peace of
heart would accompany Him on His way of sorrows. He looks about
Him. Where are they? Non fuit. Not one is at hand. Four times the
tenderly complaining motive h d c ee h h pleads for sympathy. But in
vain. Over contristaretur the annotated manuscripts have practically
only simple neums, which demand a fluent rendition. There is here no
question of labored expressions of misery, but rather of subdued, tearful
reproaches. This brings non fuit with all its broad neums into sharper

160 Palm Sunday

relief. No doubt the parallelism of the text necessitated similar intro-
ductions for et sustinui and consolantem. The second et non sets in a note
lower and then ascends to a bewildering high e. The strikingly swift
descent with inveni only heightens the artistic effect of this passage.
That which is not denied the poorest wretch, that bit of heartfelt sym-
pathy which accompanies even the most hardened criminal to his death
■ — this was denied to the Saviour; not a single, mild, loving word, not a
glance of pity alleviated His sufferings. And then as if the tortured breast
could no longer contain all this woe, there escapes from His lips the cry
of this harsh, painful et non inveni. Perhaps such combinations of notes
made a different impression upon the ancients than they do upon us.

Part C gives us an inkling of the tortures which the Saviour, who
was harassed by fever, expressed in His cry: "I thirst." All ages, how-
ever, have seen a deeper import in this cry than the mere expression of
bodily pain. He received vinegar and gall, His tormentors made sport
of His sufferings, they ridiculed Him and laughed at Him, and thus ele-
vated His sufferings to the plane of the infinite. Expressive of these sen-
timents, the melody once more rises to high e and then, as if burdened
with sorrow, descends with harsh tritones.

The quiet phrase et dederunt ... fel interposed between these two
high points shows artistic finesse. It has the smallest range of any of the
phrases (only a fifth). We find no protractions or accents with a pressus,
no fourths, but predominantly seconds and the simple repetition of the
formula which had already been employed over miseriam. The relaxa-
tion here from the high tension of the preceding part affords the singer
an opportunity to gather new strength for that which is to follow. Codex
339 of St. Gall's gives the first seven notes over the word fel a broad form,
thus in a way indicating to us the amount of bitterness latent in this
word. The annotated manuscripts give prominence to the fact that the
thrice-prolonged and accented c over the doleful, subsiding aceto should
not work to the detriment of the lower a; and thus in spite of the stirring,
even violent feelings, the beauty of the melodic line is preserved intact."^

In the most ancient manuscript the Saviour voices His reproaches
in three other verses of Psalm 68, but He also knows that the time of
grace and the fullness of God's bounty has now come.

In the holy sacrifice of the Mass the Sä^viour appears, as it were,
suffering and dying among us. But He ought no longer look in vain for
consolation and sympathy. Let us present ourselves to Him under the
symbols of bread and wine, which the priest now lifts up to God.

N. Sch., 270 ff.

Maundy Thursday 161

COMMUNION (Matt. 26: 42)

Pater, si non potest hie calix Father, if this chalice may not
transire, nisi hibam ilium: fiat vo- pass away, hut I must drink it, thy
luntas tua. will he done.

How suitably this text has been chosen for a Communion song! The
chalice which Jesus accepts here has become for us the chalice of salva-
tion. The blood which we drink flows from the wounds of the Crucified.
In today's Mass liturgy we hear for the first time the childlike word,
"Father," which sets in with a tender bistropha on the dominant. The
passage dc bdc h over hiham ilium corresponds to ag fag g over (po)-test
hie calix. In the minor thirds and the half tone, it is true, we still perceive
something of the painful. But b here partakes of the nature of a leading
note and with melodically logical necessity leads to the c over fiat, to
that heroic word: "Thy will be done!"

It is characteristic of all these chants that the Saviour Himself
speaks to us. He opens His heart to us and lets us gaze into the depths
of woe and shame. He manifests to us His yearning for consolation and
sympathy. How close He has come to us in these texts and still more in
these heartfelt melodies; so close that we almost feel His breath, that
we almost perceive the palpitations of His heart. We have need of such
a Saviour, for He is our consolation. Under the influence of His love and
grace we also shall find the strength to pray: Father, Thy will be done!

MAUNDY THURSDAY

In early Christian ages the faithful were wont to congregate to-
ward evening for the Eucharistie celebration,^ in order thus to become
intimately united to the Saviour in the Cenacle. The Secret used to form
the introduction to the celebration. The Mass of the Catechumens is of
later composition. The Introit is taken from the Tuesday in Holy Week.

INTROIT (Gal. 6: 14)

1. Nos autem gloriari oportet in 1. But it behooves us to glory in

cruce Domini nostri Jesu Christi: 2. the cross of our Lord Jesus Christ: 2.

in quo est salus, vita, et resurrectio in whom is our salvation, life, and

nostra: 3. per quem salvati, et li- resurrection; 3. by whom we are

herati sumus. Ps. Deus misereatur saved and delivered. Ps. May God

nostri, et benedicat nobis: * illu- have mercy on us and bless us: *

1 C. O., 51, 41 ff.

162 Maundy Thursday

minet vultum suum super nos, et may he cause the light of his coun-
misereatur nostri. tenance to shine upon us, and may

he have mercy upon us.

The Introits of Tuesday, Wednesday, and Thursday of Holy Week
speak of the holy cross, but stress also the glorification of the Crucified.
Before the Saviour descends to the depths of His Passion and its affronts,
before the flood of sorrows bursts upon Him, He stands before us in all
His splendor.

The text of this Introit might well be an inspiration for a paean of
triumph and of victory, arousing enthusiasm and advancing in lively
rhythm. But such is not the case. It would seem as if the composer, be-
fore he wrote his song, had meditated with tender sympathy on the
sacred Passion and had come to realize that for many all this would be
in vain. With tears of compassion in his eyes he began to sing with this
tender melody, made almost sorrowful through the thrice-repeated
half-time interval, the Nos autem.

A similar feeling is awakened if we answer the question: Who, then,
are the others? as implied in the opening words: "But it behooves us."
The Apostle has already said that the cross is foolishness to the heathen
and a scandal to the Jew, but how is it regarded at the present time?
The blasphemies of the moderns must fill us with indignation and sor-
row and with a deep sympathy for our wounded Love, we shall strive
to fathom the melody of Nos autem. If we then ask ourselves what our
relation to the Crucified is, how we regard in practice the cross God has
laid upon us, then we shall sing, not with arrogance, but humbly and
modestly: Nos autem.

The major third over oportet is not without purpose. Here it seems
as if the holy cross were being slowly elevated before us; with nostri it
stands before us in all its glory; the cross of our Lord. As the melody
gradually increases, so also must the crescendo grow, till it attains its
greatest ardor with nostri. Especial care must be taken that this high c
be not sung unprepared, not raw and cold and angular, as were the
timbers of the cross on Golgotha.

The second phrase develops and confirms the theme announced in
the first phrase. The human blood which reddens the trunk of the cross
has become for many the drink of "salvation," supplying new life and
courage and strength to overcome sorrow and woe and death. From it
emanates eternal, blessed, glorified life. In the melody the second half
of the first phrase is repeated.

Textually the closing phrase forms a parallel to the second phrase.
Here, as above over autem and often in plainsong, the tristropha serves

Maundy Thursday 163

to set the following word in greater relief: salvdti—"-we are saved."
Liberäti repeats the motive of resurrectio, to which (glo)-ridri and autem
are also related. With evident love the composer tarries on sumus, just
as he gave nostri and nostra above melodic prominence.

The psalm-verse with its somewhat harsh b following upon the ex-
clusive use of &b in the antiphon is a cry for mercy, for enlightenment
and blessing, so that the mysteries of the cross, its sufferings and its love
may be revealed to us.

At the end of days the cross will appear in the clouds of heaven.
To those who courageously took up their cross and followed the Cru-
cified, to those who, sacrificing their all furthered the interests of the
Crucified, this cross will be a boon. Then, indeed, will the cross and the
Crucified in the fullest sense be their salvation, their life, their resurrec-
tion; then will the petition of the psalm-verse become a jubilant song of
thanksgiving. Thou hast had mercy upon us. Now Thy glorious coun-
tenance shines upon us and, overcome with joy, we gaze into the depths
of Thy redeeming love.

Musica s., 45, 49 fif.

Today the Gloria in excelsis Deo is solemnly intoned by the organ
and sung to the accompaniment of the church bells. Today is the birth-
day of the Eucharistie Christ.

GRADUAL (Philipp. 2:8-9)

1. Christus f actus est pro nobis 1. Christ became obedient for us

obediens usque ad mortem, 2. mor- unto death, 2. even the death of the

tern autem crucis. jl. 1. Propter quod cross. ^. 1. Wherefore God also hath

et Deus exaltavit ilium, 2. et dedit exalted him, 2. and given him a

Uli nomen, quod est super omne name which is above every name,
nomen.

The corpus of the Gradual moves predominantly in a lower pitch
about the fundamental note / and descends below it to d and c, thus
giving a also a certain importance. All this would point to the plagal
form of the F (sixth) mode.

The verse has an entirely different character. It strives upward to
the dominant of the fifth mode, sounds it, and even goes a fifth above it.
This fits excellently to the text. In the corpus there is mention of the
lowliness of Christ, in the verse of His glorification.

Whether or not this be an original composition is difficult to say.
The fact that Codex 339 of St. Gall's has only the initial notes of the
florid melismas over ilium and nomen, thus presupposing the existence
of the piece, bears no weight. The corresponding passages in the Gradual

164 Maundy Thursday

for the feast of St. Sylvester, Ecce sacerdos magnus, are likewise indicated
only by their first notes. The fact, however, must not be overlooked
that the melody over nobis works like a cadence, hence that it demands,
or at least will bear, a greater pause. This is not the case in the present
Gradual. Taken by themselves, the first five words do not express an
independent thought. It is different with the Gradual Ecce sacerdos
magnus, which, with the exception of a single passage in the verse, has
exactly the same melody as today's Gradual. The same holds true of
the Gradual Exiit sermo sung on the feast of St. John the Evangelist
(q.v.). Hence, it seems more likely that one of these two Graduals is the
original. Et dedit Uli nomen is also heard in the Gradual for the second
Sunday in Lent and for the Assumption. The close of the verse occurs
in no fewer than thirty Graduals.^

In spite of all this, however, we shall consider today's text and
melody as one whole and render them thus. The corpus expresses grate-
ful love for all that Christ in His abasement did for us. Nobis helps to
produce this effect. The annotated manuscripts give practically every
note here the broad form. The interpretation of Caecilia (29, 49 ff.)
seems somewhat forced when it regards obediens as an agitated melodic
movement and sees in it the natural repugnance which the youthful
heart of Christ felt in the face of death and of the terrible death struggle
He was to undergo. This interpretation would furthermore intimate
that the resolved major chord over usque is restful, insofar as it reconciles
Christ to the terrible duty imposed upon Him by obedience. The de-
scending fourth of crucis may serve to visualize for us how the Saviour
with the cry: "Father, into Thy hands I commend My spirit," bowed
His head and died.

If the corpus narrated the things Christ did for us, then the verse
narrates what the Father did for Christ: exaltdvit ilium — He hath ex-
alted Him. The melody here sounds like the ringing of Easter bells,
vieing with the joys of heaven. The recitation on c over exaltdvit and after-
wards on d over dedit Uli gives a more plastic form to the subsequent
neums. As if in holy protest, we anticipate the glorification of the Saviour's
name which will be blasphemed so terribly in the succeeding days, the
inscription of which we shall find on the cross over the head of the Vic-
tim. Here the melody modulates to c like the middle cadence in psal-
mody. The psalmodic structure, moreover, betrays itself by the intona-
tion at the beginning of the verse and by a sort of flexa on a, the last
note of ilium. At the low inception with quod est we reverently bow be-
fore the holy name of Jesus.

1 Wagner, III, 384.

Maundy Thursday 165

OFFERTORY (Ps. 117: 16, 17)

1. Dextera Domini fecit virtutem, 1. The right hand of the Lord

2. dextera Domini exaltavit me: 3. hath wrought strength, 2. the right
non moriar, sed vivam, et narrabo hand of the Lord hath exalted me:
opera Domini. 3. I shall not die, hut live and shall

declare the works of the Lord.

The selection closes on a, showing that it has been transposed. In
this manner it comes closer to its natural pitch, and consequently its
low passages can be written without the aid of ledger lines.

The three clearly discernible phrases have each as their principal
development the ascent to high d in their second half. A still closer re-
lation exists between the first and third phrases, insofar as they have
their ending on the dominant and employ the same range. Similarly,
the melody over (Dexte)-ra Dö-(mini) is heard in an abbreviated form
over vivam. But virtutem, with its prolonged and accented d and the
descending fourth, produces in consonance with its text a more power-
ful effect than opera. The second phrase closes a major second below the
fundamental — a modulation much favored by the second mode. The in-
ception and continuance on the dominant indicate this thought: I shall
not leave hold of this hand. Over exaltavit the three notes after the bi-
stropha cad are to be united into one figure, after which the pressus is
to be stressed. A lively rendition should characterize the third phrase.
Here annotated manuscripts almost throughout have simple neum forms
and twice mark the melody with "c"(cel€riter, rapidlyj. The word
Domini, recurring thrice, shows us how freely plainsong treats the three
syllables of the word. To the first syllable it assigns notes as follows:
two, four, and one; to the second: five, one, and one; to the third: two,
one, and nine respectively.

Who is it that prays in this manner? In the first instance our thoughts
turn to Christ. It is the eve of His death. He casts a glance in retrospect
upon His Messianic activity and upon all the miracles His divinity
wrought. He looks ahead to that which still awaits him. Well does He
know that the right hand of the Lord will exalt Him, as, indeed, the
Gradual jubilantly announced in its verse. He does not die, but in
death obtains eternal life for Himself and for all the world. And in His
resurrection and glorification, with His Church, He is an eternal, per-
sonal hymn of praise of the great deeds of God. Thus, invested with
power and grandeur, certain of victory. He steps across the threshold
of death.

But we may also consider this Offertory in the light of the Eucharist.
Psalm 117, from which it has been taken, belongs to the number of those

166 Maundy Thursday

which were wont to be sung at the Passover, hence which Christ also
sang at the Last Supper in the Cenacle. The Eucharist is a miracle, an
honor and a glory to the Church, and a fountain of the richest life. Here
is fulfilled the word of the Lord: "He that eateth My flesh . . . hath ever-
lasting life." Hence the Church and with her the Christian soul sings:
Non moriar — "I shall not die, but live." I shall attain to a life of eternal
blessedness, and I shall laud the works of God and forever give Him
thanks for the great things He has wrought in me. But the soul is already
inspired to announce the works of the Lord. For in celebrating the li-
turgy we recount His works and benefits and give thanks in a manner
which is worthy and just and unceasing.

Finally, this song may also be placed in the mouths of the penitents
who today are again received into the church. The most ancient manu-
scripts assign it to the third Sunday post Theophaniam (=Epiphaniam,
q.v.J in connection with the Gospel in which the Lord in such a loving
manner stretches forth His hand and heals the man stricken with leprosy.
With evident delight the melody lingers over the word Dextera. Imagine
the sentiments of thanksgiving and profound joy with which the peni-
tents and their mother, the Church, prayed these words at the moment
of reconciliation! Consequently the text permits of various interpreta-
tions. In this manner we see how the liturgy can be made ever to bear
new fruit. Renewed observation and contemplation of its peculiarities,
its texts, and its melodies always reveals new relations, thus producing
new and profound joy.

COMMUNION (John 13: 12, 13, 15)

1. Dominus Jesus, postquam 1. The Lord Jesus, after he had

coenavit cum discipuUs suis, lavit supped with his disciples, washed

pedes eorum, et ait Ulis: 2. Scitis their feet, and saith to them: 2. Do

quid fecerim vohis, ego Dominus et you know what I, your Lord and

Magisterl 3. Exemplum dedi vobis. Master, have done for youl 3. /

ut et vos ita faciatis. have given you an example, that so

you do also.

In ancient times slaves washed the feet of their lords, and no special
significance was attached to the action. It is entirely different when the
"Lord Jesus," the "Lord and Master," performs this service — He of
whom the Gospel of the present day speaks with such majesty: He
knew "that the Father had given Him all things into His hands, and
that He came from God, and goeth to God." For this reason the Com-
munion begins on the dominant of the mode; and the return to this

Good Friday 167

dominant and the use of the same motive over ego Dominus et Magister
surely does not occur by chance.

A contrast to this melodic curve opening downward is formed by
the curve opening upward, met with for the first time over cum disci-
pulis suis and recurring frequently, indeed, almost too frequently. The
melody would narrate the events of the Communion in a restful tone,
but lays very special stress on one word. The chant had been practically
syllabic; over Scitis, however, it grows into a melisma and ascends ma-
jestically. Godex 339 of St. Gall's prolongs the first four notes. Such a
melody is calculated to stamp itself on our hearts, there to re-echo and
ever again remind us of the example given us by the "Lord Jesus," so
that we may imitate it and become like Him.

If we approach the table of the Lord filled with such sentiments of
of humility and subjection, then surely the Lord will grant us the grace
to realize more fully that which He has done for us.

During the procession with the Blessed Sacrament the hymn Pange
lingua is sung.

We meet the first three words again tomorrow in the hymn for the
adoration of the Cross. St. Thomas used the latter as a model for his
Corpus Christi hymn, whose two final stanzas Tantum ergo and Genitori
are heard at every solemn benediction with the Blessed Sacrament. The
melody^ with its three phrases cannot compare, it is true, with the virile
character of the hymn to the Cross; still, it also is filled with a strong,
quiet joy. In the second and still more in the third phrase this joy is
subdued through reverence for the great mystery. This is shown in the
descent of a fifth, the graded diminution of the range, and the avoidance
of large intervals in the third phrase. Each phrase has its arsis and the-
sis. In the first and third phrases the arsis exerts its influence even in
the second half of the phrase. Concealed in the second and third phrases
is the closing cadence of the fourth mode: ah g e.

GOOD FRIDAY

When at the beginning of the service^ the priest and his assistants
approach the altar they are not accompanied by song; nor does a single
candle burn upon the altar. Clad in black vestments they cast themselves
at the foot of the altar and, with their faces to the ground, pray in

1 Wagner, III, 478, f.

2 C. O., 51, 57 flf.

168 Good Friday

silence. When sorrow overpowers us, then words fail us. And today the
most terrible scene will be enacted, for Christ dies upon the cross be-
tween two criminals. With this announcement the pious soul trembles,
for she remembers the words of the first Tract: The crucifixion is the
work of divine justice, but at the same time it is our work. We are not
innocent of the blood of this Just One. On the cross, moreover, is ac-
complished the separation of the spirits. The cross is the great dividing
point (in medio) of the world's history. The great and final parting will
take place when the Crucified will come again as the Holy One "from
the shady and thickly covered mountain," when His glory will fill the
heavens, and the whole world will resound with His praise.

FIRST TRACT (Heb. 3: 2, 3)

1. Domine, audivi auditum tuum, 1. 0 Lord, I have heard thy hear-

t et timui: t consideravi opera tua, ing, f and was afraid: j / considered
et expavi. 2. In medio duorum ani- thy works, and trembled. 2. In the
malium innotesceris: dum appro- midst of two animals thou shalt he
pinquaverint anni, cognosceris: t made known: when the years shall
dum advenerit tempus, ostenderis. 3. draw nigh, thou shalt he known: f
In eo, dum conturhata fuerit anima when the time shall come, thou shalt
mea: f ^^ i^«> misericordiae ( — ) he shown. 3. In the time when my
memor eris. 4. Deus a Lihano ven- soul shall he troubled: f in anger of
iet, t et Sanctus de monte umhroso mercy ( — ) thou shalt he mindful. 4.
et condenso. 5. Operuit caelos majes- God shall come from Lihanus, f
tas ejus: f et laudis ejus plena est and the Holy One from the shady
Urra. and thickly-covered mountain. 5.

His majesty hath covered the heav-
ens: t o,nd the earth is full of his
praise.

The sign (f) indicates the mediant, whHe ( — ) indicates the cae-
sura. In the first verse the mediant occurs twice. The ascending fourth
d-g with the prolonged / joined to it, which is heard several times, seems
to be a peculiarity of this Tract. The melisma which closes the third verse,
is only found again at the very end of the piece. In the fifth verse we
hear a melody over the first two words which is also sung in the Alle-
luia-verse of Christmastide, for example, in the third Mass for Christ-
mas over the third phrase.

SECOND TRACT (Ps. 139: 2-10, 14)

1. Eripe me, Domine, ah homine 1. Deliver me, 0 Lord, from the

malo: f a viro iniquo ( — ) libera evil man: ■\ from the unjust man { — )

Good Friday

169

me. 2. Qui cogitaverunt malitia in
corde :t iota die ( — ) constituebant
praelia. 3. Acuerunt linguas sicut
serpentes: f venenum aspidum ( — )
suh lahiis eorum. 4. Custodi me,
Domine, de manu peccatoris: f ^^
ah hominihus iniquis ( — ) libera
me. 5. Qui cogitaverunt supplantare
gressus meos: f Absconderunt sup-
erbi ( — ) laqueum mihi. 6. Et Junes
extenderunt in laqueum pedibus
meis: f juxta iter scandalum ( — )
posuerunt mihi. 7. Dixi Domino:
Deus meus es tu: f exaudi Domine
( — ) vocem orationis meae. 8. Do-
mine, Domine virtus salutis meae:
t obumbra caput meum ( — ) in die
belli. 9. Ne tradas me a desiderio
meo peccatori: f cogitaverunt ad-
ver sum me: ne derelinquas me ( — ),
ne umquam exaltentur. 10. Caput
circuitus eorum: f labor labiorum
ipsorum ( — ) operiet eos. 11. Verum-
tamen justi confitebuntur nomini
tuo: t et habitabunt recti cum vultu
tuo.

rescue me. 2. Who have devised
wickedness in their heart: f all the
day long ( — ) they designed battles..
3. They have sharpened their tongues
like a serpent: f the venom of asps
( — ) is under their lips. 4. Keep
me, O Lord, from the hand of the
sinner: f and from unjust ones ( — )
deliver me. 5. Who have proposed to
supplant my steps: f the proud have
hid ( — ) a net for me. Q. And they
have stretched out cords for a snare
for my feet: f by the wayside they
have laid for me ( — ) a stumbling
block. 7. I said to the Lord: Thou
art my God: f O Lord ( — ), the voice
of my supplication. 8. O Lord, Lord,
the strength of my salvation: f over-
shadow my head ( — ) in the day of
battle. 9. Give me not up, from my
desire to the wicked: t they have
plotted against me: do not forsake
me { — ), lest at any time they
should triumph. 10. The head of
them compassing me about: f the
labor of their lips ( — ) shall over-
whelm them. 11. But the just shall
give glory to thy name: t and the
upright shall dwell with thy coun-
tenance.

This Tract describes, above all, the psychic tortures which Christ,
the true Paschal Lamb, underwent when He sacrificed Himself. The
Lesson immediately preceding spoke of the Paschal lamb. At the very
hour in which the blasts of the trumpet from the Temple indicated the
time for the slaughter of the Paschal lamb of the Jews, the true Paschal
Lamb was expiring upon the cross. The heart which had so ardently
loved is betrayed, condemned, and repudiated. The people which Christ
called His own has "the venom of asps under its lips." Raising His
thoughts to God the Father He prays: I said to the Lord: "Thou art
My God," soon to be followed by the cry: "Why hast Thou forsaken
Me?" But He also perceives the blessing that will flow from His suffer-

170 Good Friday

ings. He sees, as the closing verse says, hosts of human beings who have
l)een redeemed through His tortures.

The Lessons and the Tracts serve only as a preparation for the
Passion, the climax of the first act in today's drama. The second act
iDrings the great'prayers of intercession. In these mention is made of the
Confessores, who are named between the ostiaries and the virgins. Some
are of the opinion that those who sing in church are meant here, since
confiteri — the praise of God, is their office.

The unveiling and adoration of the cross make up the third act.

THE UNVEILING AND ADORATION OF THE CROSS

Thrice in an ascending scale the Ecce lignum crucis is intoned by
the priest and continued by his assistants. Then all kneel and, filled with
deepest reverence, sing: "Come, let us adore!"

During the adoration of the cross the choir sings the Improperia,
those subdued, imploring lamentations of an unappreciated and despised
love. No artist has painted the scene of the crucifixion so graphically as
do these simple words and notes. They are the last words of the dying
Messias-King to His people; not the words of condemnation or of judg-
ment, but words calculated to soften stony hearts. They are spoken by
the tender voice of the Author of grace, a voice offering pardon, asking
only for one thing — understanding and love.^

Popule mens, quid feci tibil aut O my people, what have I done to

in quo contristavi tel responde mihi. theel or in what have I afflicted
'f. Quia eduxi te de terra Aegypti: thee: answere me. ^. Because I led
jparasti crucem Salvatori tuo. thee out of the land of Egypt, thou

hast prepared a cross for thy Sa-
viour.

The import of these words — the questions, the petitions, the com-
plaints, the bitter sorrow, and the remnant of hope for the nation's
conversion — has been voiced in a truly marvelous manner by the mel-
ody. With restrained grief it rises from a heart wounded in its holiest
sentiments, swelling perceptibly over aut in quo, then prolonging itself
softly, as if Christ's gaze were fixed questioningly upon His people,
penetrating their souls with all seriousness. The Saviour then progres-
sively describes the love with which He guided His people, how He fed
them with manna, planted them as a most beautiful vineyard. And ever
again we hear the lamentation: Popule meus.

1 c. O., 51, 60 ff.

Good Friday 171

These complaints of the dying Saviour apply to us also. What shall
we answer Him? In our helplessness the Church directs us to reply with
an act of homage to the "holy God," to the "strong God," to the "im-
mortal God," coupled with cries for mercy. Originally, no doubt, Agios
0 theos was addressed to the Holy Trinity; today, however, it is applied
to Christ Crucified. On the cross He became as sin, and immolates Him-
self between two thieves for the sins of the world; we, nevertheless, laud
Him as the "Holy God." On the cross He is an object of misery, weak
forsaken by all, yet we praise Him as the "strong One." On the cross His
discolored countenance already bears the marks of the agony of death,
still we celebrate Him as the "immortal One," and with full voice appeal
to Him: "Have mercy upon us."

This last invocation attains a powerful climax with g a b\? and a b c
up to the prolonged and accented c over eleison. This illustrates beau-
tifully how the high point of a melody is carefully prepared and then
suddenly broken off. Besides c, the notes b and a in this phrase are pro-
longed, just as in the preceding appeals / and a received special accents.
In all probability this melody with the text found its origin in the Orient.

The lamentations of the Saviour will not be silenced, but become
more tender, more heartfelt, more sad. His strength seems to be dimin-
ishing gradually. Let us analyze only a few verses.

l.Ego propter teflagellavi Aegyp- 1. For thy sake I scourged Egypt

tum cum primogenitis suis: et tu with its firstborn: and thou didst
me flagellatum tradidisti. 3. Ego ante scourge me and deliver me up. 3. /
te aperui mare: et tu aperuisti opened the sea before thee: and thou
lancea latus meum. 5. Ego te pavi with a spear hast opened my side,
manna per desertum: et tu me ce- 5. / fed thee with manna in the
cidisti alapis et flagellis. 9. Ego te desert: and thou hast beaten me with
exaltavi magna virtute: et tu me buffets and scourges. 9. / have ex-
suspendisti in patibulo crucis. alted thee with great strength: and

thou hast hanged me on the gibbet

of the cross.

Between the individul verses the choir sings Popule meus.

The melody could scarcely be more simple. It moves within the range
of a fifth and recites in both parts of the phrase on the third. Only the be-
ginning and the close of each half bring some variety. It is a kind of
psalmody having intonation, a flexa with more lengthy verses (Aegypto),
middle cadence with two accents and a preparation; then a second in-
tonation and closing cadence with two accents and a preparation. But
in the final verse over the dactylic word before the last accent an e is

172

Good Friday

placed upon the unaccented syllable. How powerfully this melody moves
along, despite the like-sounding motives of Ego and et tu; or is it perhaps
precisely because of this similarity in face of the powerful textual con-
trast, that the Saviour would say: Since I was so prodigal with My
love for thee, I might have expected some love in return, but thou ... I
Suddenly a new feeling and sentiment is brought to the fore. Thus
far the liturgy gave prominence to thoughts of sorrow, complaint, and
heartfelt sympathy. But now, even on Good Friday, joy makes itself
felt in the antiphon Crucem tuam and the hymn Pange lingua. The resur-
rection-motive which was heard in the first Lesson for today is again
utilized, and over the first four words we hear the melody of the Te Deum:
eg ga a ag ahca. It avoids 6b, which imparted such a tender character
to the Introit of Maundy Thursday, and replaces it with b, which breathes
the joy of victory.

Crucem tuam adoramus, Domine:
et sanctam resurrectionem tuam lau-
damus et glorificamus: ecce enim
propter lignum venit gaudium in
universo mundo. Ps. Deus miserea-
tur nostri, et benedicat nobis: * il-
luminet vultum suum super nos, et
misereatur nostri.

We adore thy cross, O Lord: and
we praise and glorify thy holy resur-
rection: for by the wood of the cross
the whole world is filled with joy.
Ps. May God have mercy on us, and
bless us: * may he cause the light of
his countenance to shine upon usi
and may he have mercy on us.

The festal and elevated feeling of the antiphon continues to resound
in the hymn Pange lingua.^ It extols the cross as noble and rich in bless-
ing, and the death of Christ as a voluntary sacrifice of the Lamb of God.
Of particular beauty are the following stanzas:

Crux fidelis, inter omnes
Arbor una nobilis:
Nulla Silva talem profert,
Fronde, flore, germine: *
Dulce lignum, dulces clavos,
Dulce pondus sustinet.

Flecte ramos, arbor alta,
Tensa laxa viscera.
Et rigor lentescat ille.
Quem dedit nativitas:
Ut superni membra Regis
Miti tendas stipiie.

Faithful Cross] Above all other.

One and only nobU Treel

None in foliage, none in blossom,

None in fruit thy peers may be;

Sweetest Wood and sweetest Ironl

Sweetest Weight is hung on thee.

Bend thy boughs, 0 Tree of glory I
Thy relaxing sinews bend;
For a while the ancient rigor.
That thy birth bestowed, suspend;
And the King of heavenly beauty
On thy bosom gently tendl

1 Revue, 10, 51 ff.

Holy Saturday 173

The melody with its majestic lines and large intervals rises to pa-
thetic jubilation — a striking contrast to the tender and gentle com-
plaints of the Improperia. The first verse is the arsis, the second thesis,
and the third merely a melodic repetition of the second. Thus we find
it has the less artistic form ahh, rare in plainsong. The second and third
verses with their ending dfedd correspond to the close of the first verse
with g cha a. Inter omnes is also related with a c cb ag and (fron)-de, flore
with da ag ed.

A peculiarity of this hymn is its responsorial form. What was origin-
ally the fourth last stanza appears as a refrain and is repeated in whole
or only with its third verse after each stanza; evidently this arrangement
is Syriac in form.-' In the ancient manuscripts of plainsong this hymn,
as well as the following Vexilla Regis, bears the name of its composer,
Venantius Fortunatus (fc. 600) — one of the few instances of an author's
mention.

The liturgy now continues with the Mass of the Presanctified. A
procession is formed in silence, and without song or audible prayer it
proceeds to the chapel or to the sepulchre in which the Blessed Sacra-
ment is preserved. Here, indeed, the sight of the altar adorned with lights
and flowers, fills us with the sentiments of Maundy Thursday. On the
return to the high altar the hymn Vexilla Regis is sung.

Is the descending line of the first verse to imitate the fluttering of
the King's banners? The third verse shows an ascending movement.
The fourth verse in its beginnings is like the flrst, but closes like the
second half of the second verse. This hymn does not attain the warmth
of the Pange lingua, but its structure is of more artistic value.

May Christ Crucified be our light and our strength in life, and our
hope in death! Let us pray that at that moment the petition of today's
first Tract may be fulfilled in us: "In the time when my soul shall be
troubled ... be mindful of mercy."

HOLY SATURDAY

After the blessing of the fire and the incense at the entrance of the
church, the procession proceeds to the main altar. The deacon, follow-
ing the cross, carries a three-branched candlestick decorated with
flowers. He lights one arm of this candle and sings: Lumen Christi — "The
light of Christ." All those participating in the procession kneel and

I Jahrbuch fuer Liturgiewissenschaft, II, 8 f.

174 Holy Saturday

answer: Deo grdtias. This is repeated, as the second and third arms are
lit, always in a higher pitch and with increased joy.

Who will count all those who have earnestly sought after God and
after truth! How often in their stress of soul have they implored on
bended knee the light from above. And when of a sudden it flared up
in their soul, when they recognized Christ, the Risen One, and recog-
nized in His resurrection the most convincing proof of His divinity and
the divinity of His Church, a sincere Deo grdtias welled up from their
hearts; and the more brightly the light of Christ shone into their hearts,
the more they felt themselves enriched in the possession of the truth,
and ever again they cried: Deo grdtias.

We also join in this cry and, united in festal procession, place our-
selves among the followers of this light. It has become for us the light
of life, leading us on to eternal, unending life.

In the magnificent Exultet which follows, the deacon announces the
joy of Easter, chanting the "triumph of so great a King" and the blessed-
ness of redemption.

After the fourth, the eighth, and the eleventh prophecy a Tract is
sung in the brilliant eighth mode. On Good Friday the Tracts were com-
posed in the more serious second mode.

On the way to the baptismal chapel the Tract Sicut cervus is sung.

TRACT Sicut Cervus (Ps. 41: 2-4)

1. Sicut cervus desiderat ad fontes 1. As the har panteth after the

aquarum: f ita desiderat anima mea fountains of water: f so my soul

ad te, Deus. (— ) 2. Sitivit anima panteth after thee, 0 God. ( — ) 2.

mea ad Deum vivum: f quando My soul hath thirsted for the living

veniam, et apparebo ante faciem Dei God: f when shall I come and ap-

meil 3. Fuerunt mihi lacrimae meae pear before the face of Godi 3. My

panes die et node, f dum dicitur tears have been my bread day and

mihi per singulos dies: JJbi est night, f while they said to me every

Deus tuusi day: Where is thy Godi

The yearning of the catechumens for the new life, for the life in
God, receives striking expression here. After the many days of anxious
doubt, after bewailing their estrangement from God, they were now to
appear before His face, were to become His children and receive this
personal God into their heart.

After the blessing of the baptismal fount it was customary in the
early Church to administer solemn Baptism. We might here gratefully
recall our own Baptism and all the great things it brought us, the interior
beauty it conferred upon our soul, and the rare good fortune it bestowed

Holy Saturday 175

upon us in making us children of God. To recall the day of Baptism was
always a source of greatest pleasure to the saints, and Dante's one great
wish was that he be crowned poet laureate in the same place where the
saving waters of Baptism had made him a child of God.

From the baptismal chapel the procession returns to the main altar;
during this time the Litany of the Saints is chanted.

THE LITANY OF THE SAINTS

These invocations afford us a glimpse of the Church triumphant.
They show us the power of baptismal grace when the serious, purpose-
ful, persistent striving of man co-operates with it. All these saints be-
came in their lifetime ideals of moral perfection. Like ourselves, they
had to struggle against such enemies of the soul as the Litany enumer-
ates, against sin and the assaults of the devil. With Christ's grace, how-
ever, they conquered all. And yet, exalted though they be in the pos-
session of high degrees of virtue and blessed in their heavenly home, they
are nevertheless close to us. Together with them we form one holy
Church. Consequently when we cry: 'Tray for us," our petition is not
in vain. Rather the refrain is taken up by our sainted brethren, who have
a great affection toward us, who long for our presence, and whose prayers
and merits are made available to us as a help toward the realization of
the day when we may be joined to them before the throne of God.

The range of the melody of the first invocations confines itself to
the tetrachord g-c, from Pater de caelis Deus on, to the tetrachord a-d.
From Propitius esto on, the melody has the range f-d; from Peccatores
on, the range g-e. Thus the various divisions show a growth in range of
the melody and a steady upward tendency from c to d and e.

After the last Te rogdmus a longer pause is made, so that the Agnus
Dei with its h\?, so striking in this connection, come not too abruptly.
This is the Agnus Dei of Mass XVIII.

If we consider the Kyrie an introduction, a threefold division be-
comes apparent, of which the middle part with its downward movement
forms in a certain sense a contrast to the first and third parts.

To the accompaniment of the Easter Kyrie the priest, clad in joy-
ous white vestments, approaches the altar and presently intones the
Gloria in excelsis Deo. True, we heard it only on Maundy Thursday,,
but seemingly weeks have passed since then. Mighty things have been
accomplished in the meantime, and gripping scenes have been enacted
in the shadow of the cross! But now all that has passed; the joyous ring-
ing of bells announces to all the world the victory and joy of Easter,
the new life in Christ for all mankind and especially for the neophytes.

176 Holy Saturday

The prescribed time of silence is over and the organ again booms forth
to join in the jobilation. Great joy and solemnity accompany the salu-
tation Agnus Dei in the Gloria today, for Christ has shown Himself to
be the true Lamb; He has sacrificed Himself for us.

ALLELUIA

How shall we adequately render this word of praise? We should
like to announce it to the whole world with cries of vehement exultation.
And our chant? The melody sets in with the minor third, known to us
from the Preface. Later editions of plain song that begin with a fourth
are in error. After the first few notes we might surely expect a greater
interval; but the melody again sinks back and repeats the same formula.
This is followed not by a quiet clivis, but an onward-urging pes; finally
there is an interval of a fourth.

Wagner^ has called attention to the fact that the melody over Alle-
agrees with that of the Per omnia saecula saeculorum, and that the ju-
bilus on a bears some resemblance to the Dignum et justum.

All this would depict for us the Church just awaking from a deep
sleep, and not yet realizing that after so many days of enforced silence
she is again allowed to sing Alleluia. The Alleluia is repeated three times,
each time in a higher pitch, making it necessary to begin in a subdued,
low pitch.^ But steadily the joy grows, steadily the jubilation increases.
And once the climax has been reached, the melody continues impressively
on high c with Confitemini (Ps. 117, 1).

1. Confitemini Domino, quoniam 1. Praise ye the Lord, because He

bonus: 2. quoniam in saeculum mi- is good: 2. because his mercy en-
sericordia ejus. dureth for ever.

The first half of either verse has the same close, in which there
seems to re-echo a motive of the preceding Tract. The whole ends with
the final motive of Alleluia. The text is explained in the verse of the
Gradual for Easter Sunday.

TRACT (Ps. 116: 1-2)

1. Laudate Dominum omnes gen- 1. Praise the Lord all ye Gentiles:

tes:'\ etcollaudateeumomnespopuli. f and praise him all ye people. 2.

2. Quoniam confirmata est super Because his mercy is confirmed

nos misericordia ejus : f et Veritas upon us : f and the truth of the Lord

Domini manet in aeternum. remaineth for ever.

1 III, 397

iii, a97.

Another interpretation would hear in this threefold repetition the blast of trumpets.

Holy Saturday 177

We heard this song on the Ember Saturday of Lent. How devout
and joyful it sounded today when at the solemn administration of
Baptism individuals of all nations experienced the plentitude of divine
mercy, when they formed an alliance with the God who is eternally
faithful.

After the priest has received Holy Communion, renewed jubilation
sweeps through the house of God. Alleluia resounds again in a melody
which in its simplicity, its brevity, and its harmony has all the char-
acteristics of a true folksong.

In the Magnificat that follows, the Blessed Virgin assumes the role
of chanter and praises the Lord who has wrought such great marvels
upon us, who has thrust the mighty from their seats and exalted the
lowly, who has filled the hungry with good things and in His mercy has
adopted us as His own children. The full effect of this pleasing, powerful,
and gripping song can only be realized by actual participation in the
services on Holy Saturday morning.

ANTIPHON Vespere Autem

Vespere autem sabhati, quae lu- In the evening of the Sabbath:

cescit in prima sabbati, venit Maria which dawns in the first day of the
Magdalene, et altera Maria, videre week, came Mary Magdalen, and
sepulcrum, alleluia. the other Mary, to the sepulchre:

alleluia.

With lucescit joy overruns the almost typical limits of the melody.

For the dismissal of the community, the deacon does not employ
the usual formula; his heart is too full. He must continue with a twofold
alleluia the Easter jubilation which he intoned in the Exsultet. Go, he
tells us, and bring gladness into a world languishing for want of joy;
carry into it a spirit of goodness and purity, and revivify it with con-
solation and strength.

Our answer is a spirited Deo gratias, alleluia, alleluia. For we realize
what we are taking away with us, and how rich we have become through
Christ and His liturgy. We know that the Church, her divine claims sub-
stantiated by the miracle of the Resurrection, has resisted all the attacks
of violence and pretended learning and come forth victorious. We believe
in the power of truth, in the might of grace; and filled with the spirit
of the primitive Church, filled with the courage and strength of the
martyrs, we cry: Deo gratias, alleluia, alleluia.

178 Easter Sunday

EASTER SUNDAY

INTROIT (Ps. 138: 18, 5-6)

1. Resurrexi, et adhuc tecum sum, 1. / arose, and am still with thee,
alleluia: 2. posuisti super me ma- alleluia: 2. thou hast laid thy hand
num tuam, alleluia; 3. mirdbilis upon me, alleluia: 3. thy knowledge
facta est scientia tua, alleluia, alle- is become wonderful, alleluia, alle-
luia. Ps. Domine prohasti me et luia. Ps. Lord, thou hast proved
cognovisti me: * tu cognovisti ses- me, and known me: * thou hast
sionem meam et resurrectionem known my sitting down, and my
meam, rising up.

The opening word of today's Introit (Resurrexi) brings us directly
to the mystery that is being celebrated. Christ Himself, gloriously risen,
speaks this word to His heavenly Father. He has fulfilled the duty with
which His Father had charged Him, and now He directs His first thought,
His first prayer, to the Father. This took place during that "truly
blessed night which alone deserved to know the time and hour when
Christ rose again from the dead," as the Church sang yesterday in the
Exsultet. Then the Risen One lifted His eyes and heart to the Father and
prayed: Resurrexi et adhuc tecum sum. It is all inner fervor, this melody,
breathing intense love, like a song coming from the quiet, unalterable
depths of eternity itself. Exclusively personal, it has no thought of its
listeners; no impetuous cries of triumph disturb it. But it is not gloomy
or dismal; it is a smile of purest joy. It clothes the text with lights and
colors to which we should otherwise have remained entirely obli\'ious,
and thus it opens up new avenues to the understanding of the Paschal
Mystery.

1. "I arose, and am still with Thee"; that is, I am again with Thee.
From the bosom of the Father, the second Person of the Blessed Trinity
descended to us, assumed a nature capable of suffering, and thus to a
certain extent forsook the glory which knew naught of pain or sorrow.
He was, so to speak, cut off from the glory of the Father. And how keenly
He felt this separation on the cross! But now He is again "in the glory
of God the Father." He contemplates His glory, the boundless, golden,
eternal glory which henceforth is proper to His human nature also. And
He looks into the vastness of future time, which is blessed because all
mankind is to share in His resurrection. The font of salvation is now
opened to all, and its saving waters will bring us to glory, so that we may
be united to Jesus our Head, and may be with the Father as He Himself
is with the Father. Alleluia!

Easter Sunday 179

The real dominant of the melody and of the Resurrexi is /, which
pervades the entire piece as a tristropha; it must be sung very lightly;
it is, so to say, a quivering from very joy. Adhuc tecum sum has g for its
dominant. Five notes precede the word tecum and five follow it. The en-
tire first phrase confines itself to the tetrachord d-g. Its alleluia is also
sung as proceeding from the heart of the risen Christ. But it may serve
in all three phrases as our own cry — a jubilant, expressive Amen to the
words of the Redeemer {Analyses, III, 10).

2. "Thou hast laid thy hand upon me." Even when He was in the
grave the hand of the Father rested protectingly over His Son. Then it
permitted Him to shatter the fetters of death and to arise to a new life.
Perhaps one may also apply these words to the hand of God demanding
justice which weighed so terribly upon the Saviour that it forced from
Him the words: "Only against Me He hath turned, and turned again
His hand all the day" (Lamen. 3: 3). But today Christ substitutes the
glad Alleluia: Alleluia for His sufferings, for His death, and for the
fruits of His redemption.

The calm melody with its strong accent on / may serve as a picture
of the quietly sheltering hand of God. Super and manum remind us of
the first alle-(lüia). Toward the end, the second alleluia must grow in
warmth and thus prepare for the third phrase. The rising melody has
the same end in view. This second phrase has three members, like the
first, but a greater range: d-a.

Now the third phrase may begin with all solemnity. It has four
members, a tone-range of c-a, and a fourth which introduces a sort of
modulation to low c. Amazement seems ever to grow in the heart of the
Risen One. If we abstract from the first note, then the first alleluia is
but a slightly shortened form of et adhuc tecum sum, and the second
alleluia a repetition of the alleluia which follows that phrase.

The gaze of the risen Christ turns back to the days of eternity when
divine mercy conceived the plan (scientia) of redemption. God was to
become man, the Impassible One was to suffer, the Eternal to be de-
stroyed, but from this death a new and fruitful life was to emerge; man-
kind, a nonentity before the majesty of God, was destined to obtain in
the divine person of Jesus eternal reconciliation, unending glorification.
Human power and malice were indeed to triumph for a short time, but
then God's wisdom, omnipotence, and goodness were to assert them-
selves so much the more gloriously. All these apparent contradictions
found a wonderful solution (mirdhilis) in the resurrection of Christ. It
is through this that our faith and our hope have received their founda-
tion and corroboration.

180 Easter Sunday

In the psalm-verse, the God-man once again speaks of the trial
which the Father had imposed upon Him. But He, the second Adam,
stood the test. He is today the Blessed One who has proved Himself,
who is adorned with the crown of life (Jas. 1: 12). Out of His abasement,
out of His repose in the tomb (sessio), the glory of the resurrection
blossomed forth.

Whereas the Phrygian cadences e g f f e of the Introit proper have
a tender ring, the somewhat severe psalmody expresses the virile joy of
victory. Thereupon we tenderly and devoutly repeat the entire Introit.
Thus this chant will impart to our soul genuine Easter joy, restrained,
broad and deep, and we shall thank Mother Church that with this song,
so uninviting at first sight, she leads us into the riches of the Easter
liturgy.

K. K., 23, 29 ff.; Analyses, III, ff.; Choralblaetter, Nr. 3.

GRADUAL (Ps. 117: 24, 1)

1. Haec dies quam fecit Domi- 1. This is the day which the Lord

nus: 2. exsultemus 3. et laetemur in hath made: 2. let us he glad 3. and

ea: ^. 1. Confitemini Domino 2. rejoice therein. ^. 1. Give praise to

quoniam bonus: 3. quoniam in sae- the Lord, 2. for He is good: 3. for

culum misericordia ejus. His mercy endureth forever.

In the Introit the risen Lord spoke to His Father. Here all Chris-
tendom breaks forth in loud rejoicing and praises the Father because
He has had commiseration upon His Son and because the season is now
past in which it seemed that the Father would pity Him no more. To
that terrible Friday, the handiwork of men, succeeded the day which
the Lord hath made. God's heart has again inclined toward His Son,
and now His mercy endures forever. All this is told us by the marks of
the passion on the glorified body of Christ. The blissful life of the di-
vinity has become a permanent acquisition of the sacred humanity.
Christ died once; He dies no more.

How powerfully this song must have impressed the neophytes! In
the early morning hours of Easter Sunday the churches gleamed with
the dazzling white of their baptismal robes, which were perhaps even
more beautiful than the silvery sheen of the Angels at the tomb. For the
first time the neophytes experienced the happiness of being children of
God; now their hearts overflowed with joy and thanksgiving that the
Lord had delivered them from the hand of the enemy (Gradual for the
coming Tuesday). And the assembled faithful rejoiced to know that
the neophytes, for whose enlightenment and conversion they had stormed
heaven for many long years, were now in the possession of baptismal

Easter Sunday 181

innocence and of the true faith. This thought alone was enough to make
well up from their innermost hearts the song: "Give praise to the Lord,
for He is good and His mercy endureth forever."

It was on Easter evening, moreover, that the Lord not only wished
peace to His disciples, but left to the entire world an unfailing source of
peace in the Sacrament of Penance, which He instituted on this very day.
This is the day, therefore, on which He bestowed upon His Church that
great treasure of solace and consolation, which since that time has re-
joiced the hearts of millions. Indeed, "the Lord is good and His mercy
endureth forever."

The melody has much in common with the typical melody which
was explained on the first Sunday of Lent (q.v.). But it also possesses
noteworthy peculiarities. The first motive opens the chant in an almost
dreamy manner; the following Dominus, however, rises up in radiant
tones. Laetemur in ea is more gracefully developed than in the former
melody: c cdc a, dc ded c, ec efdh c. Quoniam bonus soars brilliantly above
all else. The thought of God's goodness permits the singer to forget the
limits to which the melody is otherwise confined. Although there is so
much enthusiasm displayed, there is nevertheless a careful plan. The
melody reaches its peak in Quoniam, and never thereafter does it rise to
/, which has hitherto dominated the tonal line. The repeated e c a, which
we feel to be a minor chord, and the broadening of the low g create a
tension which finds a brilliant resolution in the G-major triad with its
prolonged high g. The clivis which follows serves as transition to the
tender bonus, which is to be rendered with great fervor.

Musica s., 45, 74 ff. and 105 f.

ALLELUIA VERSE (I Cor. 5: 7)

Pascha nostrum immolatus est Christ our Pasch is immolated.

Christus.

This most striking thought of today's Epistle has called into being
one of the most beautiful creations of choral chant. Here the triumphal
shout of Easter is best realized. It is melodic thanksgiving and jubilation
and revelry. For now, in very deed, the great work of our redemption
is an accomplished fact.

Over the Alleluia and in the first four notes of the first phrase of
the juhilus, the melody shows an ascent, which in turn is answered by a
descent in three groups of delightful turns. The first and second member
of the jubilus have an identical ending; the third member in its second
half reminds one of the close of the Alleluia on Holy Saturday.

182 Easter Sunday

The beginning should almost be piano, but should steadily gain in
fervor and warmth. Pascha nostrum: how much grateful love nostrum
shows! Immoldtus must be an exultant shout. The rich melisma has the
form a a^ h c. Let a^ be a resounding amplification of a after which, how-
ever, the next nine notes are to recede somewhat in volume; b in turn
should come a little to the fore, while great eagerness should be evident
in c. Strange to say, a and a^, with a different introduction, however,
and at a lower pitch, are to be found over universi in the last verse of
the Tract on the Ember Wednesday in Lent.

Revue, 31, 33 f.

SEQUENCE

The joyfulness of the Alleluia continues (Sequentia) to resound in
the Sequence, which owes its origin to Wipo (4*c. 1048), an ecclesiastic at
the courts of Conrad II and Henry III. The Alleluia-verse supplies the
theme for the I strophe: Sing the Paschal Victim's praisel With a power-
ful motive, the following two strophes then set in. IIa. A Lamb the sheep
did save-, and Christ back to the Father, sinless, sinners gave. IIb. Death
and Life clashed in mysterious strife; Life's Captain, dead, now lives and
reigns instead.

The four succeeding strophes are a dialogue between the choir and
Mary Magdalen. With the motive beginning an octave lower than that
of IIa (acd), the melody now becomes somewhat more calm. Ilia 1. O
Mary, say, what sawest thou by the wayl 2. The tomb of the living Christ;
and the glory of Him risen. Illb 1. / heard the angelic word: I bowed to
see the bands, the shroud. 2. Christ m/y hope is risen, and He is gone before
you into Galileel

Again the jubilant motive of IIa resounds. It springs from exultant,
unshakable conviction. IV. Christ from the dead is truly risenl Victorious
King, to us kind pity show. Amen. Alleluia. As far as victor Rex the melody
is full of power, upn which a confident miserere with a softer coloring
follows. A hearty Amen, Alleluia brings this marvelous song to a close.

OFFERTORY (Ps. 75: 9, 10)

1. Terra tremuit et quievit, 2. 1. The earth trembled and was

dum resurgeret in judicio Deus, 3. still, 2. when God arose in judgment,
alleluia. 3. alleluia.

We cannot sing this melody too solemnly or too majestically. Al-
though employing the fourth mode, like the Introit, in spirit it differs
radically, being full of force and irresistible power. One is tempted to

Easter Sunday 183

cry out: Though you plant both feet solidly upon the earth, there is no
escaping; you must experience how at some period this solid earth and
all things mundane will be shaken and destroyed. And all the world's
clamor, its pomposity and boasting, its presumption to independence
and autonomy, its singing and exultation will one day become mute
when God comes in judgment. The magnificent Easter triumph which
the Victor Rex gained over His enemies, over death and over all the
powers of this world, guarantees also His final victory. The quaking of
the earth on Easter morn is only a prelude to the mighty cataclysm which
will come to pass at the end of time.

The first phrase ascends gradually. After tremuit it rests on the do-
minant of the mode, depicting perhaps, the fear of all creation. With et
the melody reaches a height seldom attained by the fourth mode and
strains the attention: even the boastful world will at some time come to
feel exceedingly small and dejected. The final neums of this phrase were
also used to conclude the first phrase of the Offertory of the Midnight
Mass at Christmas. The second phrase bears some resemblance to the
first. It also begins and ends with d, closes its first half with a, and twice
reaches high c. Here the melody gains in amplitude and becomes more
expressive of victory, especially at judicio with its quint, the pressus,
and the harsh ghaga. Alleluia in its first member is related to that on
the feast of the Ascension, although the latter is in the first mode. Now
the melody no longer reaches to c — the h which preceded it even becomes
&b — the whole becomes more tender, more personal. He who is one day
to appear as our Judge, today again becomes our Redeemer in the Holy
Sacrifice.

COMMUNION (I. Cor. 5: 7, 8)

1. Pascha nostrum immolatus est 1. Christ our Pasch is immo-

Christus, alleluia: 2. itaque epule- lated, alleluia: 2. therefore let us
mur in azymis sinceritatis et veri- feast with the unleavened bread of
talis, 3. alleluia, alleluia, alleluia. sincerity and truth, 3. alleluia,

alleluia, alleluia.

The first phrase has the same text as the alleluia after the Gradual.
There it overfiows with joy, like a rushing paean of triumph which is to
inundate all the earth; here it is in an intimate Communion song, in
which the exultation is more reserved. There an authentic mode is em-
ployed (7); here a plagal (6). In the former melody everything strives
toward the dominant and above it, while here it centers about the final
note, almost too much so; the lowest note is a fourth below and the
highest a fourth above the finale, as if it had been measured with a rule

184 Easter Monday

(f-c, f-h). But despite this modest means of expression the melody throbs
with the consciousness of fresh life.

It may seem strange that itaque carries so rich a melody, and stranger
still that the neums should fall to the syllable -ta-. This is due to the in-
fluence of early colloquial Latin, which put the accent on the syllable
immediately preceding the enclitic -que. It is quite logical that the word
should have such a rich melody, for it wishes to stress this thought with
special emphasis: Since Christ has ofifered Himself as your Pasch, there-
fore we are able to celebrate the Paschal feast and unite ourselves with
Him in Holy Communion. We are, moreover, to celebrate it in sincerity
and truth. For after the Paschal lamb had been slaughtered in the
Temple, the Jews were no longer permitted to have any leaven in their
houses. In like manner, the old leaven of sin may no longer have any
place in the Christian's heart, now that Christ has offered Himself for
us. Consideration of the sacrificial death of Christ and of the ardent
love that prompted it ought to enkindle us and induce us to lead a pure
and holy life.

Christus is a graceful response to (Pas)-cha no-( strum). The two-
note group in the first alleluia, in the last five notes of (i)-taque and
(equ)-lemur, and the first four notes of d-(zymis) and veri-(tdtis) pro-
duce a pleasing effect. The spirited ascent in the third phrase, which
reaches its summit in the third alleluia, is likewise highly effective.

Musica s., 52, 49 ff.

EASTER MONDAY

INTROIT (Ex. 13:5, 9)

1. Introduxit vos Dominus in 1. The Lord hath brought you into

terram fluentem lac et mel, alleluia: a land flowing with milk and honey,

2. et ut lex Domini semper sit in alleluia: 2. and that the law of the

ore vestro, alleluia, alleluia. Ps. Lord may he ever in your mouth,

Confitemini Domino, et invocate alleluia, alleluia. Ps. Give glory to

nomen ejus: * annuntiate inter the Lord, and call upon his name:

gentes opera ejus. * declare his deeds among the gen-
tiles.

Here the neophytes, who wore their white robes at all the divine
services of Paschal Week, are addressed. Baptism has led them into the
land flowing with milk and honey, into the Promised Land of holy
Church with its life-giving and invigorating sources of grace, with its
sweet consolation. Hence it was that at Baptism they actually were

Easter Monday 18&

given milk and honey to taste. Perhaps the journey they have just com-
pleted was made under a blistering sun and through the burning sand of
the desert. But today their hearts are overjoyed at the loving guidance
with which God has led their souls.

In its first part, the melody shows special favor to vos and fluentem
lac et mel. We are acquainted with the ascent over fluentem from egre-
dientem of the Vidi aquam. It occurs again immediately in the second
phrase over ut lex D6-(mini). Similarly, the close of the first phrase is
found in an abbreviated form over the two last alleluia. Semper shows
special vigor.

After God has led you with such love. He may surely expect His
will to be sacred to you, His law at all times to be in your mouths and
in your hearts and to be accomplished in your lives. Grateful love de-
mands this. But your eternal salvation is likewise assured thereby. It
is just this faithful observance of His law that will lead you through all
the dangers and allurements of the world, and bring you safely home to
the eternal Easter, into the true Promised Land.

We may regard these words as coming from the mouth of St. Peter,
whose basilica is the station for today. By way of admonition he also
raises his voice: Let the life of Christ fill your hearts. "Then it seems as
if a tear flowed down the cheek of Peter" {K. L.).

GRADUAL (Ps. Ill .24., 2)

Haec dies ... [as yesterday]. This is the day . . . [as yesterday].

jl. 1. Dicat nunc Israel, quoniam ^. 1. Let Israel now say that He is

bonus: 2. quoniam in saeculum good: 2. that His mercy endureth

misericordia ejus. forever.

Haec dies resounds throughout Easter Week until Saturday, when
it appears in the form of the Alleluia. Today we may again sing the ju-
bilant quoniam bonus in all its wonderful Easter glory.

ALLELIUA VERSE (IMatt. 28: 2)

1. Angelus Domini descendit de 1. An angel of the Lord descended

caelo: 2. et accedens revolvit la-pi- from heaven: 2. and, coming, rolled
dem, et sedebat super eum. back the stone, and sat upon it.

The first member of the jubilus with its downward rolling move-
ment is a sharp contrast to the upward tendency of the two members
which fiank it. It occurs again, but slightly changed, over de caelo. The
second member of the jubilus recurs over revolvit lapidem. Accedens is
modeled upon alleluia. This piece is assigned to the eighth mode, and

186 Easter Monday

actually closes on g. But if we compare it with the Alleluia now sung on
the feast of the Assumption, then it does not seem improbable that we
here have the C mode with a close on the fifth above.

The angel at the tomb occupies the mind of the Church consider-
ably. We have met him already in the Gospel for Holy Saturday, and
throughout the week he appears in the antiphons for Vespers and Lauds.
Today we see him also in the Alleluia-verse and in the Offertory.

OFFERTORY (Matt. 28: 2, 5, 6)

1. Angelus Domini descendit de 1. An angel of the Lord descended

caelo, et dixit mulieribus: 2. Quem from heaven, and said to the women:

quaeritis, surr exit, sicut dixit, alle- 2. He whom you seek is risen as he

luia. said, alleluia.

At an early date this melody was set to the text Posuisti for the feast
of St. Gorgonius (Sept. 9), was used also for the feast of St. Matthew,
and finally was introduced into the Mass Laetdhitur common to martyrs.
It is also sung on the feast of the Assumption to the text Assumpta est.
He who can abstract from the historical side and look at these Offer-
tories from a purely melodic point of view accordng to the relation of
word and sound and according to their phrasirig, will without much
hesitation place Posuisti first, Assumpta second, and Angelus third. In
the Offertory Posuisti the words coronam and pretioso — "Thou hast set
on his head a crown of precious stones" — receive a most effective treat-
ment. With vitam petiit a new thought begins melodically, to which
tribuisti ei, alleluia is admirably proportioned. In like manner, the cli-
maxes of Assumpta est occur on the words gaudent and collauddntes, while
ungeli and henedicunt, respectively, after the great development bring
pleasant relaxation and rest. Benedicunt, it is true, produces this effect
too dependently. The motive which in the two other Offertories is given
to sicut dixit and to tribuisti ei, respectively, drops away entirely. But
the first phrase of the Offertory for the feast of the Assumption rounds
out beautifully. It will well repay one's efforts to compare the Offer-
tories with one another:

1. a) Angelus Domini descendit

b) Posuisti Domine in cdpite ejus

c) Assumpta est Maria in caelum

2. a) de caelo et dixit mulieribus:

b) coronam de Idpide pretioso:

c) gaudent Angeli collauddntes

Easter Monday 187

3. a) quern quaeritis, surrexit sicut dixit, alleluia.

b) vitam petiit a te, trihuisti ei, alleluia.

c) benedicunt Dominum, alleluia.

In this Offertory, one becomes painfully aware of the omission of
the" ormer verses. Its present form does not entirely satisfy. Happily
today's Gradual gives some indication of the melody of at least one of
these verses.

The melody of the third verse has been adapted to the Offertory
Beäta es virgo, which is now given in the Votive Masses of the Blessed
Virgin from Easter till Pentecost. Permanes does not allow of such an
adaptation;! t is the same as alleluia in the Offertory for Easter Monday.
Surrexit of today's Offertory and Creatorem of the former have identical
melodies.

In today's Offertory we are tempted to invert the two principal
parts, to ging the narrative part first in a subdued manner and then to
swing up to the higher regions (which now occur over caelo and mulieri-
bus) with the words of the angel concerning the resurrection. But even
in its present arrangement the melody appeals, because it has a certain
elegance of movement, fluent melodic line, and charming motivation.
How fine, for instance, is the line d c a gfa a over Domini, the descent
and ascent over descendit and at its close the resemblance to the motive
over (An)-ge-(lus), the contraction of this motive with the first part of
descendit by the notes / gag, the notes a g a c c over D6-(mini), which is
answered hy h g a c c over (muli)-e-(rihus)l The two well-proportioned
groups over (sur)-rex-it expand rhythmically over the second syllable of
alleluia; the alleluia itself with its tense (g) h, whose solution (g) ce
comes only after four notes, produces a delightful effect. We might al-
most speak of an intentional retarding of the leading note. Dixit with
its energetic pressus likewise challenges attention. What was promised
at that time has now become full reality. The Lord is truly risen. These
words, together with the glorious alleluia, constituted the refrain to the
verses. It is somewhat tiresome to meet the frequent close on the tonic;
only three times is there a variation.

The pious women who gave evidence of such noble courage and
tender love in coming to the tomb of the Saviour, well deserve that
their names be mentioned with honor in the liturgy. This happens more
than once in this solemn Paschal Week. Indeed, the Oriental Church
has a special feast on the second Sunday after Easter, called the feast
"of women bearing myrrh." May they teach us how to become true
searchers after God, how to place all our powers in the service of Jesus
and His cause. His Church, and how to approach the altar with the true

188 Low Sunday

sacrificial spirit! At the Eucharistie Banquet the Risen One will then
appear also to us in the splendor of His glory.

COMMUNION (Luke 24: 34)

Surrexit Dominus, et apparuit The Lord hath risen, and hath

Petro, alleluia. appeared to Peter, alleluia.

Today's Gospel tells us: "The Lord hath appeared to Simon"; the
Communion, however, uses the name Peter, which is more familiar to
the people. St. Peter's church was the scene of today's solemn service.
How great is the forgiving love of the Saviour as shown by this appear-
ance! He is almost compelled to demonstrate this love to St. Peter even
on the feast of Easter. To us also the Risen One has appeared today in
Holy Communion.

Apparuit seems like an inversion of the final motive over (Domi)-
nus. In an alleluia unusually long for a Communion, grateful joy finds
expression for the love shown us in the redemption. To d c ah e corre-
sponds a h a g c. It was only to avoid the key 6 b that the melody was
transposed a fifth higher.

LOW SUNDAY

INTROIT (I Pet. 2, 2)

1. Quasi modo geniti infantes 1. As newborn hahes, alleluia:

alleluia: 2. rationdbiles, sine dolo 2. thoughtful, and without guile, de-
lac concupicsite, alleluia, alleluia, sire ye the milk, alleluia, alleluia,
alleluia. Ps. Exsultate Deo adju- alleluia. Ps. Rejoice unto God our
tori nostra: * jubilate Deo Jacob. helper: * Sing aloud to the God of

Jacob.

The newborn child, in accordance with its instinct of self-preserva-
tion, desires the milk of its mother. For this it needs no admonition.
Thus should we also, in order to preserve the supernatural life, have a
spontaneous longing for the nourishment of our souls, for truth, and for
the Holy Eucharist. That is the wish of holy Mother Church. In ancient
times she impressed this strongly upon the neophytes, who had put off
their white baptismal robes yesterday. At present she sings it for first
communicants. And with true maternal solicitude she sings it for us all.
She cries out to us: Preserve the spirit of the children of God, remain
simple, humble, and submissive to Him. Remain rationdbiles, children

Low Sunday 189

of the spirit; do not become children of the flesh. Remain sine dolo; pre-
serve the truth without falsity, and love without envy. And come to
me and nourish yourselves upon the stores which Christ has confided to
me. Then deep joy will fill your hearts; God will be your Helper and you
will rejoice and exult in His sight.

The song is extremely simple, almost naive. After it has risen to the
tonic of the sixth mode (f), it clings to it as if in fear. It moves about
this note, several times descends lower, but always strives toward it
again. This is especially shown with infantes, al-(lelüia). The plagal
form of the F mode could scarcely be evidenced more clearly. Melodically,
rationdbiles, with its harmonious line, is the highest point of the song.
Its constituent notes are but a syllabic part of the psalm-verse of the
Introit: adjutori nostro. The Introit for the vigil of Christmas resembles
this melody to some extent. After sine dolo there is a sort of break. It
is for this reason that in the translation it has not been connected with
the subsequent lac, as some do who translate thus: "Desire after the un-
adulterated milk"; it must be considered a separate phrase. Concwpiscite
is a pleasing variant of (do)-lo. Of the three alleluia the second forms a
contrast to the two others, which are identical with the exception of one
single note. After the preceding d, the first sets in on c, while the third
sets in on d after the preceding c; thus the beginnings are pleasantly
varied.

In the psalm-verse, since the second half of the text is very short,
the melody cannot unfold itself entirely.

FIRST ALLELUIA VERSE (Matt. 28: 7)

1. In die resurredionis meae, 1. On the day of my resurrection,

dicit Dominus, 2. praecedam vos in saith the Lord, 2. / will go before
Galilaeam. you into Galilee.

Manuscript 121 of Einsiedeln assigns this Alleluia to Thursday in
Easter Week. The juhilus has the form a a^ b. It seems that the composer
was much concerned about the words In die, but wanted to give still
more prominence to praecedam vos which soars a fifth above the sur-
rounding melody. This seems rather strange to us, and makes us doubt
whether the composition at hand is entirely original.

There is a free adaptation of text here. The words which are placed
in the mouth of the risen Christ were spoken by the angel on Easter
morning to the women at the tomb: "And going quickly, tell ye His
disciples that He is risen: and behold He will go before you into Galilee;
there you shall see Him." The singular melody is perhaps influenced by
the fact that we have to do here with an extraordinary solemn appear-

190 Low Sunday

ance of the Risen One, at which, according to the testimony of St. Paul,
more than five hundred disciples were present.

SECOND ALLELUIA VERSE (John 20: 26)

1. Post dies octo, januis clausis 1. And after eight days, the doors

2. stetit Jesus in medio discipulorum being shut, 2. Jesus stood in the
suorum, 3. et dixit: Pax vohis. midst of his disciples, 3. and saidi

Peace he to you.

Manuscript 339 of St. Gall's and 121 of Einsiedeln know nothing of
this melody.

The motive which sets in over -luia appears again in the third
member of the juhilus; in the second member it sinks pleasingly a third
lower; the second parts are identical in the first and second members,
but in the third there is a slight difference.

The first two phrases of the verse are clearly psalmodic in structure:

Intonation Middle Cadence Closing Cadence

Post dies octo jdrnds clausis

Stetit Jesus in medio discipulorum suorum

The third phrase repeats Alleluia with its juhilus.

This Alleluia serves nicely as an introduction to the following Gos-
pel. During the eight days after Jesus' appearance in the Cenacle on the
evening of Easter Sunday the disciples, no doubt, asked about Him and
yearned for His presence. For him who seeks, whose heart is filled with
longing, a period of eight days seems a painfully long time. Suddenly
Jesus stands in their midst. He comes with that blessed greeting: "Peace
be with you!" He comes again with His cheering goodness, which seems
to have become even more warm and profound since the resurrection.
In today's Eucharistie celebration this appearance of Jesus will be re-
newed. The Saviour wishes to come to us, to address also to us His joy-
ful Pax vohis, to give us His peace, yes, even to give Himself.

The explanation of the OFFERTORY is given on Easter Monday.

COMMUNION (John 20, 27)

1. Mitte manum tuam, et cog- 1. Put in thy hand, and know the

nosce hca clavorum, alleluia: 2. et place of the nails, alleluia: 2. and

noli esse incredulus, sed fidelis, he not incredulous but believing,

alleluia, alleluia. alleluia, alleluia.

This Communion song reflects in a pleasing manner the goodness of
the Saviour, His winsome, touching love for us^-Here He speaks as to an
invalid whom one wishes to spare all exertion. The melody prefers simple

Second Sunday after Easter 191

seconds and avoids all larger intervals. What a contrast to the impetu-
osity of a Thomas with his pretentious demands! The Good Shepherd very
carefully frees the erring lamb from the thorns in which it is entangled.
The piece must be sung very devoutly and tenderly. And yet, with all
its simplicity, it has its contrasts. Inserted among the Saviour's words
we find a comparatively florid and bright alleluia, with which the melody
also reaches its peak. At the end are two alleluia, which likewise extend
to high Ob. There is also an interval of a fourth between fidelis and
alleluia. These alleluia are the jubilant thanks of the Church for the
Sariour's goodness.

Also to us the Risen One directs these words: "Put in thy hand."
In early times the Christians were wont to receive the Holy Eucharist
in their hands. Our faith enables us also to touch His sacred wounds
and united with Him we cry out in sincere thanksgiving: "My Lord and
my God, alleluia!"

SECOND SUNDAY AFTER EASTER

INTROIT (Ps. 32:5, 6)

1. Misericordia Domini plena est 1. The earth is full of the mercy of

terra, alleluia: 2. verho Dei caeli the Lord, alleluia: 2. hy the word of

firmati sunt, alleluia, alleluia. Ps. theLord the heavens were established,

Exsultate justi in Domino: * rectos alleluia, alleluia. Ps. Rejoice in the

decet collaudatio. Lord, ye just: * praise hecometh the

Tender and mellow tones (thrice the half-tone interval recurs) which
sing of God's mercy mark the beginning of this piece. For today is the
Sunday of the "Good Shepherd." Everything breathes of His goodness
His love, His understanding pity. He knows His own. He acknowledges
every indication of good will; He recognizes our weakness and knows
how to have compassion on us. All the earth must in very deed praise
His merciful love, for He has given His life for everyone. Than this there
is no greater love, as He Himself has declared. The melody develops
very gradually. The notes d-f at the beginning become e-f-g over Do-
(mini) and f-a on the third syllable of alleluia, yet so that the first phrase
rests on /.

A more energetic spirit is evidenced in the fourths of the second
phrase and the accent on g. We are speaking here of God's almighty fiat
This one word sufficed to stabilize the heavens. But to unlock for us the
heaven of divine mercy, the Word of God went to a most cruel death.

192 Second Sunday after Easter

At this thought a heartfelt alleluia — the apex of the melody — must
ascend from our hearts. We summon all the just to join in our song.
The only other time we hear this bright, jubilant melody is at the end
of the Introit of the Rogation Mass and in the more recent Introit for
the feast of St. Paul of the Cross (April 28) . As usual in the fourth mode,
the psalm- verse has a as its dominant. Thus we have the gradation: the
first phrase /; the second g; the psalm-verse a.

FIRST ALLELUIA VERSE (Luke 24: 35)

1. Cognoverunt discipuli Domi- 1. The disciples knew the Lord

Tium Jesum 2. in fr actione panis. Jesus 2. in the breaking of the bread.

SECOND ALLELUIA VERSE (John 10: 14)

1. Ego sum pastor bonus: 2. et 1. / am the Good Shepherd: 2,

cognosco oves meas, 3. ei cognoscunt and I know my sheep, 3. and mine
me meae. know me.

These two Alleluia-verses pave the way for the Gospel. There the
Lord will say: "I know Mine and Mine know Me, as the Father knoweth
Me, and I know the Father." Both Alleluia speak of recognition of the
Lord. The former leads us back to Emmaus and permits us to experience
in ourselves the happiness of the disciples. Their hearts were burning
within them when that mysterious traveling Companion spoke to them.
But now they recognize the Lord Jesus in the breaking of the bread.
Originally this melody was sung to the text Domine Deus, salutis meae,
which is employed at present on the twelfth Sunday after Pentecost.
Its explanation will likewise be found there.

Similarly, the melody of the second Alleluia is not original. In the
ancient manuscripts as well as in the present Gradual it is assigned to
the feast of the holy Martyrs Marius, Martha, Audifax, and Abachum
(January 19). The jubilus of Alleluia exhibits the form ab, cb, d. The
verse repeats the melody of Alleluia and its jubilus over cognosco oves
meas and over et cognoscunt me meae. Since the original is not drawn out,
the similarity of sound between the words prompted this repetition. The
effect is not an entirely happy one, because we hear the same melody
four times. Two small variations, however, should be mentioned. The
beginning of the second and third phrases is lighter than that of Alleluia,
In the same manner, meas avoids the pressus at the close of the jubilus,
for as yet there is here no question of a complete ending. The inception
with the dominant over Ego sum is remarkably effective, even though
we here have a text that has been substituted.

Second Sunday after Easter 193

Christ knows His own as He knows the Father. These words ought to
be for us an infinitely great consolation. The Saviour's knowledge of the
Father includes of itself His immeasurable and unending love for Him,

OFFERTORY (Ps. 62: 2, 5)

1. Deus, Deus mens, ad te de luce 1. O God, my God, to thee do I

vigilo: 2. et in nomine tuo levabo watch at break of day. 2. and in
manus meas, alleluia. Thy name I will lift up my hands,

alleluia.

Christ is the shepherd and bishop of our souls; today's Epistle
applies these terms to Him. He keeps a faithful watch over His sheep,
never resting, never slumbering. Hence it is but fitting that my first
waking thought be directed to Him, that my heart turn to Him at the
first streak of dawn (de luce). And this the more, since on this morning
He again desires to be mine entirely, and wishes me to partake of His
divine life in the Eucharistie Banquet. Just as at the Offertory the priest
lifts up his hands together with the sacrificial gifts of bread and wine, so
shall I also lift up my hands and offer myself as an oblation, singing my
Alleluia in the joy of the Holy Ghost and confiding in the omnipotence
of His grace (in nomine tuo). In early times these sentiments were ex-
pressed by these verses: "I come before Thee, to see Thy power and Thy
glory. Thou hast been my Helper. And I will rejoice under the covert of
Thy wings." In the Offertory the divine Redeemer prays to His heavenly
Father and protests His continual readiness to be sacrificed. Here and
now He becomes the Lamb which is offered for us on the altar.

In the quiet first phrase, luce is the only word which rises to some-
what greater prominence. Is this perhaps to remind us of the sudden
flashing of the light? The tone-sequences over the second syllable are
heard at various times: in the Vidi aquam, where there is mention of
flowing water with aqua ista; in the Offertory Inveni David, when it
speaks of flowing oil with the words dleo sancto. Proper to almost all pieces
of the second mode is the close of the first phrase on c. Only here the
seconds, without any pressus, have not that strong modulatory power
shown, for example, in the Introit Mihi autem for Apostles. In its first
half, the second phrase is somewhat more lively, setting in immediately
on the dominant and taking on a more ornate melody with in nomine
tuo, upon which is placed a fourth as an antithesis to that occurring in
the first phrase. The second part returns to the simple, almost naively
pastoral style of the first phrase, which feeling is strengthened by the
minor third d-f, the usual combination of dominant and tonic in pieces
of the second mode.

194 Third Sunday after Easter

COMMUNION (John 10: 14)

1. Ego sum pastor bonus, alle- 1. I am the good shepherd, alle-
luia: 2. et cognosco oves meas, et luia: 2. and I know my sheep, and
cognoscunt me meae, alleluia, alle- mine know me, alleluia, alleluia,
luia.

We have been allowed to participate in the breaking of the Bread.
In Holy Communion Christ appeared as the true light in our hearts and
has made us happy. Each Holy Communion is a pledge that the Good
Shepherd will not rest until He has successfully led us to the springs of
eternal life. He alone is the Good Shepherd. Hence Ego occupies a very
emphatic position at the beginning of the piece. We shall remain united
to Him, and if other voices entice us and seek to influence our judgment,
then we shall turn to Him alone and listen only to His voice. We know
Him and bend our knees before His presence. He, the "Only-Begotten
of the Father, full of grace and truth," dwells in our hearts as the Word
of God became flesh.

The Communion has the same text as the second Alleluia-verse,
but a different development. The two phrases et cognosco and et cog-
noscunt, it is true, begin with the same motive. But in place of the paral-
lelism in the Alleluia, the melody in the present case over et cognosco
oves meas shows a lively upward swing with the range of a sixth. It por-
trays the great love of the Good Shepherd for His sheep. But et cog-
noscunt has only seconds and its range is but a third: compared to His
knowledge of us, our knowledge of Him will always be fragmentary.
Tenderness breathes from the half-tone intervals at the beginning, and
yet there is also firmness shown in the double note (as found in our pres-
ent version). Cf. Wagner (II, 147) concerning the notation of this pas-
sage in the old manuscripts. In the notation of Montpellier which is given
there, the hook does not belong to the neums, but to the letters ef. Re-
markably simple is the alleluia which is inserted between the words of
the Saviour, and also the two alleluia which are attached at the end,
since this cry usually is sung with great spirit (cf. the alleluia in today's
Introit). Here they strive to be nothing more than the simple melody of
a shepherd in the fields.

Revue, 20, 133 ff.

* * * *

THIRD SUNDAY AFTER EASTER

INTROIT (Ps. 65: 1, 2)

1. Jubilate Deo omnis terra, alle- 1. Shout with joy to God, all the

luia: 2. psalmum dicite nomini ejus, earth, alleluia; 2. sing ye a psalm

Third Sunday after Easter 195.

alleluia: 3. date gloriam laudi ejus, to his name, alleluia: 3. give glory

4. alleluia, alleluia, alleluia. Ps. to his praise, 4. alleluia, alleluia,

Dicite Deo, quam ierribiliasuntopera alleluia. Ps. Say unto God: How

tua, Dominel * in multitudine vir- terrible are thy works, O Lordl *

tutis tuae meniientur tibi inimici in the multitude of thy strength

tui. thine enemies shall lie to thee. "h

A twofold division is made by the melody. The first part is sub-
divided by the imperatives, Jubilate, dicite, and date. Each of these worda
in its own way strives upward to c, and each has its last syllable on f^
the lowest note of this first part. The first and third phrases close on the
tonic; the close of the second on a is a pleasing variation, the first part
of whose alleluia repeats the motive of psalmum. This alleluia may also
be found in Introits of the third mode, for example, that of Wednesday
in Whitsun Week. We may consider the motive over dicite as a model
for the extension over nomini ejus and gloriam laudi ejus.

The threefold alleluia constituting the second part is in effect an-
other imperative: "Praise ye the Lord!" But the melodic line differs
from the imperatives above. First it descends to d, then to c, and finally
soars upward with impelling force to c.

Although the melody has a rather limited range (the first part con-
fines itself to a fifth), still there is something impressive about it. With
its numerous fourths it endeavors to work itself into the hearts of the
people and to propel them into that atmosphere of joy with which it is
itself filled. How vigorously omnis terra is stressed! All countries are to
join in this jubilation. That should, at any rate, be the effect on ourselves
as a result of meditating on the wonderful works of God, on the realiza-
tion of His plan of salvation, the redemption through Christ's death
upon the cross, our predestination to eternal glory. The very thought is
enough to make the entire earth prostrate itself in humble obeisance be-
fore God's face with its heart filled with joy. This will one day come to
pass; at the great final resurrection all the earth will pay reverence to its
King, its Lord, its God. Then those, too, who now boastfully pose as
enemies of Christ and His kingdom, will of sheer necessity throw them-
selves on their knees in adoration, and the entire celestial host will sing
to Him its eternal Alleluia.

FIRST ALLELUIA VERSE (Ps. 110: 9)

Redemptionem misit Dominus The Lord hath sent redemption to

populo suo. his people.

At St. Gall's, in the tenth century, this melody was sung on the
Thursday of Whitsun Week. Codex 121 of Einsiedeln lists it among the

196 Third Sunday after Easter

Alleluia at the end of the manuscripts. We became acquainted with it
and its juhilus in the Christmas season. While the verse has a diffe^^ent
close there, in today's melody the ending runs harmoniously into the
juhilus of Alleluia. Only the Lord can send redemption to His people;
rightly, therefore, are the words Redemptionem and Dominus and their
accented syllables brought into prominence.

SECOND ALLELUIA VERSE (Luke 24: 46)

1. Oportehat pati Christum, et re- 1. It behooved Christ to suffer

surgere a mortuis, 2. et ita intrare these things, 2. and so to enter into
in gloriam suam. Ms glory.

Codex 339 of St. Gall's does not mention this melody; Codex 121
of Einsiedeln, however, assigns it to the Wednesday of Easter Week.
With its rise to the tonic (e), its repetition of the major chord c-e-g, and
the use of similar motives, it reminds one of the Alleluia Amdvit eum in
the Mass for Doctors of the Church. Considered in this light, this Al-
leluia, as well as the Amdvit eum, might be assigned to the C mode, with
its close on the third.

The juhilus has the form a ahb c; part a has a pleasant interchange
of porrectus and torculus, while quiet seconds follow the energetic ascend-
ing fifth in part b. Oportehat reminds us of Alleluia, intrare of the motive
a, mortuis shows the infieunce of h, and in gloriam repeats et ira. Some
have tried to show that the first half of the AWeluia-j uhilus with its low
pitch refers to the suffering (pati) and that the second (higher) half ex-
presses the joy of Easter. As far as musical comprehension of the text is
concerned, we had best consider the rendition from the standpoint of
declamation. We should rather stress Oportehat, and still more pati, and
place special emphasis on the words ita and gloriam. This is the way the
melody develops.

Christ was under no absolute obligation to suffer, but all His suffer-
ing was included in God's plan of redemption, and hence "the servant of
God" (as Isaias calls the Messias) was impelled to fulfill this duty; it
became, so to say, a necessity (Oportehat). Now His work is done. Simi-
larly, the glory of the resurrection had to follow upon His suffering and
death, and it is on this glory that the Alleluia congratulates the Lord.

OFFERTORY (Ps. 145: 2)

1. Lauda, anima mea. Dominum: 1. Praise the Lord, 0 my soul,

2. laudaho Dominum in vita mea: 2. in my life I will praise the Lord:

3. psallam Deo meo, quamdiu ero, 3. I will sing to my God as long as
alleluia. I shall he, alleluia.

Third Sunday after Easter 197

In the first phrase the singer rouses himself to the praise of God
with a fervor which is in no wise obtrusive or spectacular, but which
for that very reason makes a more profound impression on a receptive
spirit. The second and third phrases immediately draw the practical
conclusions: lauddho, psallam. This is the singer's occupation not merely
for the moment, but for all the time of his life; it is his vocation. As long
as blood courses in his veins, as long as his heart beats within his breast,
this sacred obligation should urge him on. For God's mercy attends him
all the days of his life. The verses which formerly accompanied these
verses ran as follows: "I will sing to the Lord as long as I live. Who
keepeth truth forever; who executeth judgment for them that suffer
wrong; who giveth food to the hungry. I will sing to the Lord as long as
I live, alleluia. The Lord lifteth up them that are cast down; the Lord
looseth them that are fettered; the Lord keepeth the fatherless and the
stranger and the widow. The ways of sinners he will destroy. The Lord
shall reign forever; thy God, O Sion, unto generation and generation. I
will sing to the Lord as long as I live, alleluia."

Only the Lord can effect all this. Hence the word Dominum towers
prominently above all else. The ascending endings of the first Dominum
and of mea are necessitated by the lower beginning of the following phrase.
Perhaps the same reason applies for meo. Rhythmically these similar
endings effect a great calmness, to which the identical or at least very
similar intonations of Lauda, psallam, and alleluia contribute. Perhaps
two neums on the unaccented syllable (qudm)-di-(u) are accounted for
by the fact that colloquial Latin preferred to retain the accent on the
stem syllable. The final alleluia is common to all the Offertories of the
fourth mode during the Paschal season. Perhaps it received its form
from the present Offertory, since its fiTst part resembles psallam and its
close mea.

COMMUNION (John 16: 16)

1. Modicum et non videhitis me, 1. A little while, and now you shall

alleluia: 2. Herum modicum, et not see me, alleluia: 2. and again a
videhitis me, 3. quia vado ad Pa- little while, and you shall see me: 3.
trem, aHleluia, alleluia. because I go to the Father, alleluia,

alleluia.

Here the Saviour says to His Apostles: Only a short time remains
until the separation. It will begin in a few hours and will be completed
on the evening of Good Friday. But it will last only a short time, for
they will see Him again on Easter Day. In the first phrase the melody
reflects the sorrow of parting by its stress @n the tonic and by its descent

198 Fourth Sunday after Easter

a fourth below it. In iterum modicum, which sets in on the lofty tenor
and emphasizes it, as well as in the ascending melodic line over videbitis
me, we see expressed the joy of reunion. Between the two sentences, as
is only natural, an alleluia, redolent of the spirit of Easter, is interpolated,
and receives further melodic amplification in the twofold alleluia at the
end of the melody.

When we participate in the Eucharistie Banquet, we cannot see
the Saviour; His divinity and His humanity are veiled. But we can con-
template Him with the eyes of faith. And the purer our heart is, the
deeper does this gaze penetrate. This sight and possession and enjoyment,
it is true, is short-lived (modicum), and here below it will never be per-
fect; it will ever be a modicum. But Christ is going to the Father, and we
may therefore sing a joyous alleluia. He goes to prepare a place for us,
that we may see Him face to face throughout a blessed eternity. But,
according to the words of St. Augustine^, He is also preparing us for
this dwelling. Occasionally we become painfully aware that this work of
preparation is going on. But it is to last only for a little while (modicum)
after which we shall also be allowed to chant the eternal alleluia.

FOURTH SUNDAY AFTER EASTER

The lively expression of joy and thanksgiving for divine assistance
which we find in the Masses for the fourth and fifth Sundays after
Easter are, no doubt, influenced, as H. Grisar remarks (Das Missale im
Lichte roemischer Stadtgeschichte, p. 85), by the general rejoicing which
followed the overthrow of barbarian hordes through divine intervention.
Perhaps there is reference to the raising of the siege of Rome under Witt-
iges (A.D. 538).

INTROIT (Ps. 97: 1-2)

1. Cantate Domino canticum no- 1. Sing ye to the Lord a new can-

vum, alleluia: 2. quia mirabilia tide, alleluia: 2. for the Lord hath

fecit Dominus, alleluia: 3. ante revealed his justice, alleluia: 3. in

conspectum gentium revelavit jus- the sight of the gentiles, alleluia

titiam suam, alleluia, alleluia. Ps. alleluia. Ps. His right hand hath

Salvavit sibi dextera ejus: * et wrought for him salvation: * and

hrachium sanctum ejus. his arm is holy.

A rising line marks the development of the melody. The first part
of the first phrase has a range of a fourth, the second of a fifth; the sec-

1 Tractatus 68 in Joann.

Fourth Sunday after Easter 199

ond and third phrases have a range of a sixth. The motive of Cantdte
Domino recurs over fecit Dominus and the following alleluia. It is not,
however, proper to this Introit. We heard it over sine dolo in the Introit
for Low Sunday. Closer examination, in fact, shows that these two In-
troits are similar in more than one way. They have the same mode and
the same range; the close of the first phrase and almost the entire second
phrase, moreover, show great similarity. Compare:

(novum) alleluia: quia mirabilia fecit Dominus, alleluia, and (in-
fantes) alleluia: rationdhiles, sine dolo.

The small variant here observable shows the refined sense the an-
cients had for forming endings. The formula over sine dolo has its final
torculus a third below the tonic, thus facilitating immediate continuance
of the melody over lac. The alleluia after Dominus, however, brings the
entire second phrase to a close; for this reason the final torculus, suggestive
of pleasant rest, is placed a fourth below the tonic. This at the same time
provides a pleasant contrast to the endings of the first and third phrases.

The third phrase begins with a sort of inversion of the preceding
motive, vigorously stresses reveldvit, and accords still greater prominence
to justitiam suam. According to melodic sense, the second last alleluia
finds its fulfillment in the resolved major chord of the subdominant.
The last alleluia is almost the same as the one which ends the first phrase.

From the obvious similarity of this chant with the Introit Quasi
modo, and from its restricted range, we can readily infer that it is not
intended as a powerful song of victory, but rather a heartfelt song of
thanksgiving for the wonder of wonders which the Father has wrought
in the resurrection of His Son. He made known His justice to all the
nations. He has accepted the expiatory sacrifice of His Son, and has
glorified and transfigured Him because of it; He has manifested His be-
loved Son as the Just One, through whom alone the world can attain to
salvation and justification.

The resurrection must also be ascribed to Christ Himself. For He
indeed has the power to lay down His life and the power to take it up
again. On the cross His right hand was cruelly pierced by a nail and His
sacred arm was most painfully wrenched out of place. But by His own
strength He overcame everything: sin, suffering, and death.

Since today's Gospel and Communion treat of the coming of the
Holy Ghost, we may likewise attribute the marvelous deeds to His
activity, to the glory which, according to Christ's own assertion, He be-
stowed upon Him, and the wonders which He has not ceased to work
in the Church from the first Pentecost until the present time.

Would that we might sing to the Father and to the Son and to the
Holy Ghost a new canticle, with renewed love, renewed joy, renewed

200 Fourth Sunday after Easter

gratefulness, and in the same spirit as the Risen Christ sang the new
canticle of His glorified humanity to the Father on Easter morning. The
deeper we penetrate into God's marvels, the more spontaneously, the
more lively, the more joyously will this song well from our hearts.

FIRST ALLELUIA VERSE (Ps. 117: 16)

1. Dextera Dei fecit virtutem: 2. 1. The right hand of the Lord

dexter a Domini exaltavit me. hath wrought strength: 2. the right

hand of the Lord hath exalted me.

These words are known to us from the Offertory for Maundy
Thursday. At that time they were spoken in anticipation; but now,
after the feast of Easter, they are a glorious reality; each Sunday after
Easter celebrates the victory of the Mighty One, who in the power of
His own arm triumphed over death and sin. On the feast of the Invention
of the Cross the same text is employed in the Offertory. First the Sa-
viour had to be lifted up, nailed to the cross, and only then did He enter
into His glory.

The beginning of Alleluia and the endings over Dei, (vir)-tütem and
Domini exhibit characteristics of the first mode. To the descending line
over the first dextera the ascending line over the second comes as an an-
swer. In the juhilus the formula gdbaga resembles dbcaga over me.

SECOND ALLELUIA VERSE (Rom. 6: 9)

1. Christus resurgent ex mortuis, 1. Christ rising again from the

jam non moritur: 2. mors Uli ultra dead, dieth now no more: 2. death
non domindbitur . shall no more have dominion over

him.

Psalm 117 continues the text of the first Alleluia-verse with the words :
"I shall not die, but live." In the second Alleluia-verse the words of St.
Paul repeat the same thought, correlating it directly with the general
theme of the Easter season. The melody lingers on this one fundamental
joyous thought, that death is now become an impossibility for Christ.
The bitter flood of trial and suffering which overwhelmed Him can never-
more disturb His body or His soul. Now is He "the Prince of Life," as
the Easter Sequence refers to Him, and no power can ever diminish the
plenitude of His bliss.

This thought is expressed by means of parallel phrases, a device
often met with in the psalms. The first phrase uses the principal motives
of Alleluia with its juhilus, ah, ac, d: Christus = Alle- (luia), resürgens =
the expansion of (Alle)-lüia, ex mortuis = jam non moritur = ac and d.
The divisions of this first verse are evident: the arsis to mortuis, here a

Fourth Sunday after Easter 201

logical pause on the dominant of the mode; beginning with jam, the
thesis, and a pause on the tonic. A correspondence exists between the
closing formulas of (re)-sürgens and mortuis. Mors in the second phrase
is not a recalling of the death agony, but a cry of triumphant joy. Boldly
it soars up on a seventh, stresses the high note, then adds an animated
torculus. The repetition sets in with a lively interval of a sixth, an un-
common occurrence in plain song. Then it moves to a victorious comple-
tion in cUmacus groups which, incidentally, should not be sung rapidly.
Non domindhitur repeats Alleluia with its jubilus, thus giving the ju-
bilant melody over mors undisputed first rank.

The modal peculiarity of the piece lies in this, that it is assigned to-
the first mode, but throughout avoids the note h, and that mors resembles
the jubilus of the Alleluia Amdvit eum from the Mass for Doctors of the
Church, assigned to the fourth mode (cf. also the second Alleluia-verse
for the third Sunday after Easter).

On the feast of Christ the King we meet the same melody.

OFFERTORY

The explanation was given on the second Sunday after Epiphany
(q.v.). There is hardly any doubt that originally it was composed for this
Sunday. On the former Sunday it invited the entire world to admire the
love which God showed to men in the incarnation of His Son. But to-
day we exult in thanksgiving for Christ's resurrection and the glory
which it makes accessible also to us. What great things (quanta) are con-
tained in the words of the Apostle! "But God, who is rich in mercy, for
his exceeding charity wherewith he loved us, even when we were dead
in sins, hath quickened us together in Christ ... and hath made us sit
together in the heavenly places" (Ephes. 2: 4 ff.).

COMMUNION (John 16: 8)

1. Dum venerit Paraclitus Spiri- 1. When the Paraclete shall come,,

tus veritatis, 2. ille arguet mundum the Spirit of truth, 2. he shall con-

de peccato, et de justitia, et de ju- vince the world of sin and of justice

dido, alleluia, alleluia. and of judgment, alleluia, alleluia..

Here, for the first time in the Mass-chants after Easter, there is
mention of the Holy Ghost, the Spirit of truth, of His coming and of
His activity. As the Gospel more fully explains. He comes to convince
the world of its sin, the greatest sin, its rejection of the Son of God, its
resistance to the truth taught by the Apostles and the Church and an-
nounced to all the world. He comes also to show it justice, namely, the
justice of the cause of Jesus. He whom the world condemned as a bias-

202 Fifth Sunday after Easter

phemer and a seducer is risen and ascended into heaven; hence He alone
is holy, He alone is just. The Holy Ghost also prepares for judgment. At
the death of Jesus He already dealt a mortal blow to the prince of this
world; but at the final judgment He will fully glorify the Son of God.
Against the proofs adduced (drguet) by the Spirit of truth, no pretentious
learning and no power on earth can prevail. Truth will infallibly conquer.
Hence drguet rightly marks the summit of the melody. For this reason,
also, a twofold brilliant alleluia is added to this serious text, and for the
same reason ille is vigorously stressed. The concluding formula h-a-g
with the weighty full-step intervals in peccäto, justitia, and judicio, can-
not be entirely unpremeditated. The melody over Spiritus veritdtis is a
citation from the beginning of the Communion Ego sum pastor bonus for
the second Sunday after Easter, or vice versa. Both Communions are
also employed as responsories at Matins.^

The antiphon for the Magnificat on Tuesday after the fourth Sun-
day after Easter has the same text and also some melodic resemblance.

Our song must be sincere homage to the Spirit of truth, and at the
same time a defiant challenge to all the vain pretences of a world which
tries to ignore God. Today's Holy Communion will strengthen this re-
solve. As often as we communicate, we announce the death of the Lord
until He will come as the Holy One, the Judge of all the world.

FIFTH SUNDAY AFTER EASTER

(Cf. the remarks at the beginning of the fourth
Sunday)

INTROIT (Is. 48:20)

1. Vocem jucunditatis annun- 1. Declare the voice of joy and let

Hate, et audiatur, alleluia: 2. nun- it he heard, alleluia: 2. declare it

tiate usque ad extremum terrae: 3. even to the ends of the earth: 3. the

liheravit Dominus populum suum. Lord hath delivered his people, alle-

alleluia, alleluia. Ps. Jubilate Deo luia, alleluia. Ps. Shout with joy to

omnis terra : * psalmum dicite no- God, all the earth : * sing ye a psalm

mini ejus, date gloriam laudi ejus. to his name, give glory to his praise.

One might imagine that the Easter joy would gradually diminish
in the successive Introits for the Sundays after Easter, for the more we

Revue, 20, 137.

Fifth Sunday after Easter 203

recede from this feast, the closer we approach the day of the ascension
and the departure of the Lord from this earth. But it does not. Other
rules come into play here. The melodies for the Introits of the first,
second, and fourth Sundays are devout, rather than jubilant. Into these
the brilliant third Sunday is inserted. Now, rising above all these, com^s
the Introit of the fifth Sunday: a clarion call of real Easter joy which
would resound to the uttermost ends of the earth, as if conscious of the
fact that never was there a more consoling message brought to cheer
mankind.

In its first half, the first phrase has an energetic ascent for its arsis,
followed by a similarly proportioned thesis. How delicate the melodic
line here is, avoiding everything rough or severe! By preference the new
neum sets in on the last note of the preceding one (dge-eg-ga-acb, and
the descending ca-ag-gag). After a brief arsis the second half brings a
drawn-out thesis with the tetrachord d-g. Strength is thus gained for a
renewed, powerful ascent. The second phrase begins with the same mo-
tive as the first, but increases greatly in force with the fourth over usque.
The effect is heightened still more by the two identical clives. And now
comes a loud cry of joy with the torculus. It is not only tone-painting,
but the manifestation of long-pent-up, surging joy in the heart of the
singer. The third phrase brings the message itself. One might expect a
still greater enhancement of the melody here. But a further develop-
ment upward is hardly possible, for the third mode, the one selected for
this piece, very rarely reaches above the high e used over extremum. And
a repetition of that note might sound weak. Moreover, how is a royal
message announced? First a fanfare and the rolling of drums, and then
the solemn and quiet proclamation of the message. The greater and the
more unexpected its contents are, the warmer and more mysterious will
T^e its ring. That is the case here. The message announces our freedom
from ignoble bondage, and the cessation of that misery of soul which
once seemed so hopelessly abject because no man could help. It an-
nounces our citizenship in a kingdom whose Ruler is the God of infinite
love. What is more, it promises a life of eternal bliss in this kingdom.
Hence we shall sing these words not so much with rousing joy as rather
with deep emotion and heartfelt thanksgiving. But with the twofold
■alleluia joy breaks forth anew. Over suum it has already reverted to the
motive of the first phrase over audiatur; this it varies pleasantly toward
the end and culminates in the florid neums over the final alleluia.

This melody was adopted for the Introit of the feast of the Im-
maculate Conception; and also, though less happily, for the feast of St.
Anthony Mary Zaccaria (July 5).

Analyses, I, 31 fif.

204 Fifth Sunday after Easter

FIRST ALLELUIA VERSE

1. Sun exit Christus, et illuxit 1. Christ is risen, and hath shone

nobis, 2. quos redemit sanguine suo. upon us, 2. whom he redeemed with

his blood.

In the eternal liturgy of heaven the saints never tire of singing:
"Thou, O Lord, hast redeemed us to God, in Thy blood, out of every
tribe, and tongue, and people, and nation, and hast made us to our God
a kingdom" (Apoc. 5: 9, 10). Little wonder that the Church on earth
again and again intones this hymn. Today we hear it in the Introit and
in this Alleluia. As a city set on a hill cannot remain hid, so this redemit
attracts the attention by its notation and still more by its rendition. It
sets in a fifth higher than the preceding nobis; the following sanguine
begins a fifth lower. Not infrequently plainsong employs this method of
plastic expression (cf . the word aeterni in the Communion Beata viscera
— the Son of the eternal Father whom Mary bore in her womb). Similarly
here the emphasis is: We have been redeemed through the blood of
Christ. Joyful remembrance of this fact urges us to express our thanks
again and again. Here it is done in a simple yet affectionate manner by
the two pressus over sanguine. The conjoined formula repeats the ending
of (illü)-xit nobis. We might delineate the second phrase thus: high-
low; and the first: low-high. The first half of the first phrase enlivens
its simple melodic line with three pressus: feddc, efggf, edffe; the second

half strikes out more boldly. We might, however, expect more light over
illuxit. Four times alleluia with its jubilus varies the tone-sequence
g f e d, and introduces it in three different ways .

By Christ's resurrection our redemption was perfected and sealed,
and if Christ now appears in His splendor, this is a consoling assurance
that we also, as the Apostle told us in the Epistle for Holy Saturday,
shall appear with Him in glory.

SECOND ALLELUIA VERSE (John 15: 28)

1. Exivi a Patre, et veni in mun- 1. / came forth from the Father,

dum: 2. iterum relinquo mundum, and came into the world: 2. again
3. et vado ad Patrem. I leave the world, 3. and go to the

Father.

Seldom does an alleluia begin immediately on the dominant of the
mode, as this one does. The melody soars to heights which but few singers
can reach. It should, therefore, be taken a minor or a major third lower.
Alleluia with its jubilus has the following divisions:

Fifth Sunday after Easter 205

ab a c a^

Al -le - lu - ia\ . . . \ . . . \ . . .

The verse confines itself almost completely to motives a and b:
Exivi a=a}, et veni = a}, iterum = h, (relin)-quo = B}, mundum=a}, et
vado = 2i, ad Patrem=h, Or one might say, more simply, that with the
exception of the last four notes, it repeats Alleluia with its juhilus. The
last thought thus receives an extremely florid melody. The composer
had no intention of giving melodic symmetry to the symmetry of the
text. In veni in mundum he avoided any such effect as the masters of
polyphonic music aimed at in the descendit de caelis of the Credo. Nor
did*he have any intention of working out a contrast between the two
thoughts, a contrast which would express Christ's departure from this
world and His return to the Father in a more brilliant, more jubilant
manner. One and the same spirit pervades the entire piece. In the fre-
quently repeated minor third d-f of the festal melody there lies hidden
a feeling akin to quiet grief, to the pain of separation. The Son of God
left the Father and for a short time bade farewell to the glory that was
His; He came into this world to humiliate Himself and to die. Heaviness
fills the disciples' hearts because the Master leaves them to go to the
Father and will not return until later to take them to Himself.

The text is taken from the Gospel which follows; hence this Alleluia
is a transition and introduction to the Gospel.

If one were to sing the passage vado ad Patrem, even though it re-
sembles many another passage, with more fervor and warmth, as if re-
joicing from one's heart with the Saviour that He is now about to go
back to His Father, no one could take it amiss.

We, in imitation of Christ, have gone forth from the Father and
have been sent into this world in order to fulfill a mission, a mission
which we must never lose sight of, no matter how persistently the allure-
ments of the world cry for our attention. This resolve must ever re-
main firm in our minds: "I must go to the Father; I must seek God in
everything." Then we shall surely find Him, and death itself will not be
able to affright us. With childlike confidence we shall say: "I go to the
Father."

OFFERTORY (Ps. 65: 8, 9, 20)

1. Benedicite gentes Dominum 1. 0 bless the Lord our God, ye

Deum nostrum et ohaudite vocem gentiles, and make the voice of his

laudis ejus: 2. qui posuit animam praise to he heard: 2. who hath set

meam ad vitam, et non dedit com- my soul to live, and hath not suffered

moveri pedes meos: 3. henedictus my feet to he moved: 3. hlessed be

206 Fifth Sunday after Easter

Dominus, qui non amovit depreca- the Lord, who hath not turned away
tionem meam, et misericordiam my prayer, and his mercy from me
suam a me, 4. alleluia. 4. alleluia.

The present Sunday is the last before the feast of the Ascension.
Christ looks back upon His earthly life and His passion. How often His
enemies sought His life! Day and night, as He Himself says. On the
Mount of Olives His soul was sorrowful nigh unto death. Burdened with
the cross, He totters toward Calvary. With a mighty cry He calls to His
Father. But His appeal seems to fall on deaf ears; there is no pity for
His distress. Now, however, He has been heard; He lives again, and it
is a life of glory immeasurable. The Father's grace is poured over His
most sacred humanity as a stream of the "oil of gladness." Now He can
waver no more. No matter how His enemies rage, He will ever remain
the central figure of all history.

We shall, therefore, sing this song in the spirit of Christ, as a con-
tinuation of that canticle which He intoned in the Introit for Easter
Sunday. The two songs are closely related; both express a joy which,,
though outwardly subdued, fills the soul to its very depths. Considering
the melody in this light, we can better understand the absence of melodic
development, the modest range (only a sixth, if we abstract from the
descent to the lower third at the beginning over amovit) despite the length
of the piece, and the repetition of large melodic groups: (no)-strum et
obaudite vo-(cem)= (a)-m6vit deprecationem me-(am), laudis ejus = pedes
meos, et non dedit= commoveri, henedictus = qui non a-(m6vit).

The first phrase, with its almost depressing beginning, is a far cry
from the joyous exultation of the Introit; and yet the two basically ex-
press the same thought. In the second phrase, however, we have a fresh
and animated motive, which may be considered an amplification of
Dominum in the first. There it runs c e g f f; here, especially in the more
simple form over dnimam, d f a g f. In b. slightly varied form it appears
over suam in the third phase.

The chief repercussion of the second mode (d-f) is employed fre-
quently, almost too frequently, / generally appearing as a bistropha or
a tristropha. Special care must be given these notes, lest they sound
clumsy; the whole selection, in fact, should be sung fluently. We may
also make the song our very own, thanking God for the new life which
Easter has brought to us, for the new life of grace which in His mercy
He has perhaps repeatedly conferred upon us when we strayed from the
right path^ He has graciously heard our prayer for mercy and made our
joy complete. Now we are about to offer the holy Sacrifice, the noblest
and most efficacious prayer, in the name of Jesus. That is what promotes

Rogation Days 207

the growth in us of the new life which Christ brought us; that is what
gives us perseverance till the day of our glorification. How rich we are
in Christ. May we never cease praising Him.

COMMUNION (Ps. 95: 2)

1. Cantate Domino, alleluia: 2. 1. Sing ye to the Lord, alleluia:

cantate Domino, et benedicite nomen 2. sing ye to the Lord, and bless his

ejus: 3. bene nuntiate de die in diem name: 3. show forth his salvation

salutare ejus, alleluia, alleluia. from day to day, alleluia, alleluia.

Today, it would seem, the Church is continually exhorting us to
sing, to exult, to offer thanks. This Communion harks back to the happy
melody of the Introit. The crescendo which one naturally expects in the
repetition of the cry Cantate is effected with a graceful broadening of
volume and range. We shall meet Domino again in the Communion for
the feast of the Ascension, nomen in the same chant at the close of the
second alleluia and again at the end of the annuntidte. Bene nuntiate,
which begins a fifth higher than the close of the preceding phrase and
carries a florid melody, fared very well at the hands of the composer.
In annotated manuscripts each clivis is marked broadly. Diem reminds
us of nuntiate. At salutare we see why the piece is transposed; normally,
that is, a fifth lower, we should have eb. With its tritone the melody
here seems to enter a kind of twilight; but this vanishes immediately,
dispelled by the bright alleluia, a fifth higher. The alleluia are not such
as are usually found in Communions, but rather in Introit^ Everything
palpitates and sparkles with life.

Now that the Saviour is in our heart, our song should be most
spontaneous. When the aged Simeon was privileged to look upon "the
salvation of God," a joyous, youthful song surged to his lips. But we
were not merely allowed to see the Lord, but also to receive Him into
our hearts. May our song ascend to the heavens to glorify His holy-
name. Continually He fulfills the promise made in today's Gospel:
"Amen, amen, I say to you, if you ask the Father anything in My
name. He will give it you." How radiantly happy and confident this
assurance should make us!

ROGATION DAYS

For the Exurge, see February 2. Compare what was said on Holy
Saturday concerning the Litany of the Saints.

208 Rogation Days

INTROIT (Ps. 17: 7)

1. Exaudivit de templo sancto suo 1. He heard my voice from his

vocem meam, alleluia'. 2. et clamor holy temple, alleluia: 2. and my cry

meus in conspectu ejus, introivit in before him came into his ears, alle-

uures ejus, alleluia, alleluia. Ps. luia, alleluia. Ps. / will love thee,

Diligam te, Domine, virtus mea: * O Lord, my strength: * the Lord is

Dominus firmamentum meum, et my firmament, and my refuge, and

refugium meum, et liberator meus. my deliverer.

As on the feast of the Epiphany and of the Purification, so also to-
day we have at the beginning of the Introit the use of the significant
past tense: Exaudivit. In the Litany which preceded we often placed the
petition: Te rogdmus, audi nos. We have been heard, and now subjoin
the Introit as a song of thanksgiving. Its first phrase is so sincere and
simple that it brings to mind one who has only recently been relieved
of some great sorrow or pressing anxiety, and finds need to orientate
himself to his new and improved conditions. Only in the second phrase
does the melodic line become more comprehensive and sing of triumphant
joy. Poor though I be, my cry has nevertheless reached His ears and heart,
alleluia. The melody over vocem is repeated over aures. The alleluia at
the end of the first and the second sentences rhyme; meam concludes in
a similar manner. The parallelism of the text is intensified by the melody
of the second phrase.

The two final alleluia also conclude the Introit of the second Sunday
after Easter. Otherwise the Introits of the fourth mode have a different
ending in Paschal time.

The first verse of the psalm from which the Antiphon has been taken
usually constitutes the psalm-verse of the Introit. Today's choice could
not have been more happy. God has approached us with such an in-
surmountable love that we can but meet Him with the heartfelt words:
*'I will love Thee, O Lord, my strength." Thou hast become "my firma-
ment, and my refuge, and my deliverer."

ALLELUIA VERSE (Ps. 117: 1)

1. Confitemini Domino, quoniam 1. Give praise to the Lord, for he

bonus: 2. quoniam in saeculum is good; 2. for his mercy endureth
misericordia ejus. forever.

The text of the Alleluia is the same as that of Holy Saturday, as is
also the melody over the first two parts and, with the exception of the
final vocalize, over the last two words. Even the Tract-form cadence,
which on Holy Saturday concludes both half phrases, is here found over

Rogation Days 209

quoniam. In other respects this verse with its preceding alleluia has a
melody of its own, as well as the atmosphere of gratitude and serenity
which is proper to Introits.

OFFERTORY (Ps. 108: 30, 31)

1. Confitehor Domino nimis in I will give thanks to the Lord ex-
ore meo: et in medio multorum lau- ceedingly with my mouth, and in
dabo eum, qui astitit a dextris pau- the midst of many I will praise him,
peris, 2. ut salvam faceret a per- because he hath stood at the right
sequentibus animam meam, 3. alle- hand of the poor. 2. to save my soul
luia. from persecutors, 3. alleluia.

Those who sing in church do so in the name of the Catholic people.
The singer praises God in medio multorum — "in the midst of many."
Today he sings in the name of all those who have taken part in the pro-
cession, who with him have invoked the saints and have directed to
Almighty God the petitions: Libera nos Domine and Te rogamus, audi
nas. He represents all those Catholics, spread over the entire world,
whose prayers have at one time or other been answered, and who, with
the help of God's saving grace, have been protected against persecution,
violence, and adulation, against cunning and seduction. The saints in
heaven also join our song, for it was likewise through God's grace that
they were liberated from sin and misery and were admitted to eternal
bliss. The one perfect form of thanksgiving, however, is that which Christ
offers to the Father in the holy Sacrifice of the Mass.

The melody over the first three words recalls the beginning of the
Introit Rot ate caeli of the fourth Sunday of Advent. Between the two
conspicuous words Confitebor and nimis there is inserted a simple recita-
tion on a, to which the recitation on g over et in medio multo- corresponds.
The melody following this latter repeats the same figures c ga fa ag gc
as are noted over nimis in ore meo. The idea of divine praise, which per-
meates the first part of the Offertory, is brought to a climax by the special
prominence given the word eum.

The second part of the text, which gives the reason why the singer
feels the urge to praise God, begins with qui astitit. In the Vatican Grad-
ual this second part is not preceded by a major pause; as a matter of
fact, the cadence over eum is not a final cadence. A major pause, more-
over, would interrupt the flowing movement and disturb the inherent
inner joy. Intervals of a fourth become numerous, making effective es-
pecially dexteram and the broad, sonorous salvam. The melody over per-
is found in the Introit of Ash Wednesday, pitched once as

210 Rogation Days

today and once a fifth lower; it recurs in the lower pitch over the final
alleluia of today's Communion. A new expression of joy comes to the
fore with dnimam, and concludes with a quiet cadence over meam. Heart-
felt gratitude, however, expresses itself once more in the florid and
rhymed harmonies of the alleluia. This same melody also concludes the
Offertory of the eighth Sunday after Pentecost.

COMMUNION (Luke 11: 9, 10)

1. Petite, et accipietis: quaerite, 1. Ask, and you shall receive; seek,

et invenietis: pulsate et aperietur and you shall find; knock, and it
vohis: 2. omnis enim, qui petit ac- shall he opened to you: 2. for everyone
cipit: et qui quaerit, invenit: 3. et that asketh receiveth; and he that
pulsanti aperietur, alleluia. seeketh findeth; 3. and to him that

knocketh it shall he opened, alle-
luia.

This melody might well be considered a model of musical tension
with a concomitant relaxation. The very words: "Ask, seek, knock," ex-
pressed as they are in a higher tone of voice, depict this feeling of tense-
ness. The result of heeding these commands: "You shall receive, you
shall find, it shall be opened unto you," will naturally be expressed in a
more quiet and lower tone of voice. This indicates in general the out-
lines of the melodic development in the first and second phrases. The
close of the second aperietur with d ff makes the promise which is given
all the more prominent and trustworthy. A fitting preparation is also
thus afforded the alleluia.

The first and second phrases show many similarities. Both divi-
sions of the second phrase, which are practically identical as to melody,
are an extended form of Petite and invenit, while pulsanti is an abbrevia-
tion of pulsate.

These words of the Saviour, taken from today's Gospel, should find
application not only within the house of God, but in our everyday life
as well. They are fulfilled in a wonderful way time and again at Holy
Mass. We asked the Father for bread and in turn received heavenly
Manna in Holy Communion. We sought out the Saviour and found Him;
we knocked and He opened for us all the treasures of His goodness and
love. Outside the house of God we should also ask for heaven's grace and
blessing; there also, if we seek we shall find Him, and if we knock it shall
be opened to us. The more intimately we remain united with our Euchar-
istie Saviour, the more abundantly will He give us all that is conducive
to our eternal salvation.

The Ascension of Our Lord 211

THE ASCENSION OF OUR LORD

INTROIT (Acts 1: 11)

1. Viri Galilaei, quid admiramini 1. Ye men of Galilee, why wonder

aspicientes in caelumi alleluia: 2. you, looking up to heavenl alleluia:

quemadmodum vidistis eum ascen- 2. he shall so come as you have seen

dentem in caelum, ita veniet, 3. him going up into heaven. 3. alle-

alleluia, alleluia, alleluia. Ps. Omnes luia, alleluia, alleluia. Ps. O clap

gentes plaudite manihus: * jubi-' your hands, all ye nations: * shout

late Deo in voce exsultationis. unto God with the voice of joy.

When we met the Saviour at Christmas, we greeted Him with the
seventh mode. The motive dc ed dd over the accented syllable of Galilaei
reminds us also of nohis in the Introit for the third Christmas Mass.
Now the seventh mode leads the Lord back to the Father, who today
will speak that long-promised word: "Now sit Thou at My right hand."
On Bethlehem's fields once the angels sang; today we again hear angels.
They seem to have a special preference for the seventh mode in plain-
song. Their words are addressed to the Apostles, who find it impossible
to turn their eyes away from heaven, whither their dearest Lord and
Master has ascended. And here the angels do not say, as the Acts of the
Apostles report: ^'Why stand you looking up to heaven?" but: Quid ad-
miramini aspicientes- — "Why wonder you, looking up to heaven?" This
word also supplies the key to the understanding of this Introit. The
Apostles may not stand still and rest. Now is the time of labor, of strife,
of suffering. Now they must fulfill the commission with which the Lord
charged them. Now they must sow the seed in tears, in sweat, and in
sorrow. Not till later will the time come for repose, for blissful contempla-
tion of God. Perhaps the angel wished to stress another thought: "It is
diflacult for you to realize that your dearest Lord has departed from you.
You cannot but wonder, and it is wonder that tends to make you sad.
But be comforted! He will come again; you will see Him; and never
again lose sight of Him. Just as true and real as His ascension is today^
will His return be with power and majesty." This consoling thought,
finds expression in the jubilant cries of alleluia. And St. Luke tells us
(24: 52) that the disciples returned to Jerusalem "with great joy."

This rejoicing seems to increase still more in the psalm- verse: "Oh^
clap your hands with joy, all ye nations." When the Holy Father enters;
St. Peter's (today's station, by the way, is at St. Peter's), the enthusiasm
and the applause of the people is surprisingly vehement and inspiring.
But how trifling even that will appear, when compared to the greeting

212 The Ascension of Our Lord

which will be shouted out by all the peoples of all the centuries when
Christ will again appear at the end of the world!

Today we also exult and rejoice, because the work which the Father
gave His Son to do is now perfected. His glorification is ours also. He has,
in the words of today's Communicantes, set at the right hand of the Fa-
ther's glory the substance of our frail human nature which He had taken
to Himself, and He says to the Father: "Father, I will that where I am,
they also may be whom Thou hast given me."

The. melody calls for an easy and joyous rendition. Codex 121 of
Einsiedeln gives evidence of a fine esthetic sense by employing light
neum constructions everywhere except over alleluia, and in five places
notes a "c" (=celeriter) and once "st" (^statim) over this chant.

The neums over Galilaei reminds us of the intonation of the solemn
melody for the psalm-verse. One might also assert that there is a correla-
tion between the first of the three last alleluia and the middle cadence
of the psalm-melody (plaudite manihus), although there is an obvious
difference between the pes with accented d and the clivis with accented
/. Moreover, in the alleluia this / is sung a second time, which individua-
lizes it still more. It marks the summit of the entire piece. In the ren-
dition, this climacus, and all the alleluia in fact, demand a most hearty
rendition. Our joy should be voiced wholeheartedly. The rhythmic mo-
tive over admiramini, dedc c (4 plus 1), runs through the entire piece,
recurring over aspici-(entes), vidlstis e-(um), (ascendent tern in cae — and
over the second caelum. After the accented syllable of aspicientes the
melody sinks a fifth. This makes the following line, expressing the
heavenward gaze of the disciples, more effective.

In the second phrase, the melody moves lightly about c. Neverthe-
less quemadmodum and ita veniet are brought well to the fore. Special
gravity and majesty are produced by the pause on c. The quiet second
alleluia forms a contrast to the enthusiastic first alleluia, while the third
strikes a mean between the other two.

Revue, 21, 107 ff.; Analyses, III, 28 ff.; Der Chorhote, 2, 26 ff.

FIRST ALLELUIA VERSE (Ps. 46: 6)

1. Ascendit Deus in juhilatione, I.God is ascended with jubilee, 2.

2. et Dominus in voce tubae. and the Lord with the sound of a

trumpet.

For the melody, see the third Sunday of Advent. Like the verse for
the Introit, this text is taken from Psalm 46, which is eminently suited
to the Ascension. It was originally sung after a victory gained by the
Israelites, and was meant to tell how the God of the Covenant, en-

The Ascension of Our Lord 213

throned upon the ark, was borne to Mount Sion amid the acclaim of His
people and the sound of trumpets. At that time the Lord was invisible.
Today He ascends to heaven before the eyes of His disciples: videntihus
Ulis, according to the words of the fifth antiphon at Vespers. Alleluia-
verse and Offertory give prominence to the significant word Ascendit.
As a parallelism to them we may mention the Alleluia-verse and the
Offertory of the feast of the Assumption, where Assumpta est ("she
was taken up") stands first. He, our Lord and Saviour, ascended on high
by His own power, accompanied by much rejoicing. This joy is above all
in His own soul, which, only a few short weeks ago, was sorrowful unto
death upon this very Mount of Olives. Joyous shouts of angels likewise
surround Him; some angels are escorting Him and others are awaiting
Him in heaven. Then there is also the ineffable joy of the saints whom
He is leading to their reward.

Perhaps its seems strange that the word Dominus appears as an in-
dependent melodic phrase. On the third Sunday of Advent the heart-
felt et veni and on Pentecost et creahüntur, both complete thoughts, occupy
this place. But here, too, the word Dominus is to be especially stressed.
For Christ has shown Himself the Lord over life and death, over nature,
grace, and glory; He is the living Ark of the Covenant, which bears in
its heart the law of redemptive love and the manna of eternal life, and
is now entirely immersed in the radiant light of glory.

SECOND ALLELUIA VERSE (Ps. 67: 18, 19)

1. Dominus in Sina in sancto, 1. The Lord is in Sinai, in the
ascendens in altum, 2. captivam holy place, ascending on high, 2.
duxit captivitatem. he hath led captivity captive.

This song also presupposes a victory over the foes of God's people;
several of the enemy are being led along in the triumphal procession as
captives. In this victory the Lord has revealed Himself in His majesty
as on Mount Sinai, when He gave Moses the Decalogue. Still more glo-
riously and majestically Christ today mounts above all that is earthly
and makes His entry into the heavenly court. By a happy coincidence, the
most significant neum of this piece stands above the word ascendens. St.
Paul comments on this psalm-verse: "Now that He ascended, what is it,
but because He also descended first into the lower parts of the earth?
He that descended is the same also that ascended above all the heavens,
that He might fill all things" (Ephes. 4: 7-10). Now He leads captives
captive. Sin, death, and hell, which formerly made man their captive,
have become His booty. But also those who had previously been confined
to limbo as in captivity today enjoy the privilege of entering into blissful

214 The Ascenion of Our Lord

captivity with Christ. "And the Mount of Olives, the place of ascension
to heaven, expands over the entire earth; each hour the joyous multi-
tude of the freed, newly captured children of God, now gloriously going
to their home, grows larger. Those liberated from purgatory and limbo
were the first to chant this Alleluia of the Ascension. The Apostles and
the disciples, who saw the glory of this ascending Master, have joined
them to augment the choir, and at their side millions are singing before
the throne of God, the palm of victory in their hands. A yearning to
join this choir and sing this wondrous Alleluia pervades the heart of
every Christian" {Caecilia, 29, 65 ff.).

OFFERTORY (Ps. 46: 6)

This Offertory has the same text as the first Alleluia; its melody,
however, is original. By quiet seconds it solemnly ascends upward. One
seems to see the radiant form of the Lord rising from the earth and ma-
jestically soaring up to heaven. Rightly does this spot mark the climax
of the piece. This line must be sung very sustainedly. A great crescendo
must develop, which is to swell to forte over juhilatione. In the second
half of the first phrase the feeling changes slightly. The Lord ascends in
jubilation. What broad lines the melody here assumes; how it rings and
echoes with its pressus with the stress on high c! And still, how solemn
the closing cadence is! In the verse which was formerly joined to this,
the enthusiasm is even greater. We there find the following passage:

aGG ccc Gccc Gccc aFG GaG GaG
in voce ex- sul- ta- ti- 6- nis.

The second phrase begins with the same motive as in. The sequence
acgg rounds out to the pleasant agcaa, which calls for full and satisfying
tones. Alleluia is the usual closing word in Offertories during the Easter
season. Compare the alleluia of Easter Sunday, whose solemn pathos
re-echoes in our present melody.

With the sound of trumpets the Lord ascended. With the sound of
trumpets He will come again, and mightily will they then call out (Tuba
mirum spargens sonum.) Today, however, at least in spirit, we go with
joyful heart to the altar of sacrifice to participate in that great proces-
sion which accompanies the Saviour on His ascent into heaven.

In the ancient manuscripts this Offertory is assigned to the Sunday
within the octave of the Ascension. In place of it was sung the Offertory
Viri Galilaei, having the same text as the Introit. Its melody resembles
that of the Offertory Stetit Angelus for the feast of St. Michael (Septem-
ber 29). Ascendit has the same richly descriptive melody as ascendentem
in the Offertory formerly sung on this feast.

Sunday within the Octave of the Ascension 215

COMMUNION (Ps. 67: 33, 34)

Psallite Domino, qui ascendit Sing ye to the Lord, who mounteih
super caelos caelorum ad Orientem, above the heaven of heavens to the
alleluia. east, alleluia.

The texts of the first Alleluia and the Offertory are taken from Psalm
46; those of the second Alleluia and the Communion from Psalm 67.
From the standpoint of mode, however, the Offertory and the Com-
munion belong together. Again we meet a prominent rising line over
ascendit super. But it is more effectual here, preceded and followed as it
is by two short, low-pitched phrases. Plainsong, it seems, likes to assign
high notes to super. Caelos and caelorum are similarly treated.

"We believe that Christ has ascended to heaven, has gone up toward
the rising sun. Similarly do we, when we go to the altar, to the sacrificial
banquet, go toward the rising sun; for the church should have its high
altar facing eastward. Then we sing psalms to the Lord, our hearts filled
with -sincere thanksgiving.

SUNDAY WITHIN THE OCTAVE OF THE

ASCENSION

INTROIT (Ps. 26: 7, 9)

1. Exaudi, Domine, vocem meam, 1. Hear, 0 Lord, my voice with

qua clamavi ad te, alleluia: 1. tihi which I have cried to thee, alleluia:

dixit cor meum, quaesivi vultum 2. my heart hath said to thee: I

tuum, vultum tuum Domine re- have sought thy face, thy face, 0

quiram: 3. ne avertas faciem tuam Lord, I will seek: 3. turn not away

a me, alleluia, alleluia. Ps. Do- thy face from me, alleluia, alleluia,

minus illuminatio mea, * et salus Ps. The Lord is my light, * and

mea: quem timehol my salvation: whom shall I f earl

In the present instance the melody of the psalm-verse in a way
eclipses that of the antiphon. Although it preserves its recitative and
syllabic character and has no such groups of neums as the antiphon,
nevertheless, on account of its high pitch, its stressing of the dominant
a, its ascent to high g in both halves of the verse, it possesses a brightness
and freshness which is lacking in the antiphon. Instead, the antiphon
breaths a lyric tenderness. Perhaps it is a longing for the Spouse of the
Church, for Him whose countenance is no more visible since Ascension
Day. And when the Church looks about her on earth, what does she see?

216 Sunday within the Octave of the Ascension

A thousand dangers surging up against her! Now she can only implore
heaven that the Lord turn not away His eyes, His grace, His high favor
from her. How different is the present text from those of the fourth and
fifth Sundays after Easter! And the change in the spirit of the melody is
even more striking. In accordance with the Master's instructions, the
disciples, together with Mary, the mother of Jesus, are assembled in the
Cenacle, fervently praying for the Consoler, the Holy Spirit, who is to
strengthen them so that they may bear witness to Christ. Heartfelt
prayer: that is the basic idea of the antiphon.

The psalm-verse has a bright and hearty ring, as if Pentecost had
already arrived and all fear for the sufferings of the apostolate had van-
ished: "The Lord is my light and my salvation. Who, then, can make
me afraid?" It sounds like the answer to the suppliant Exaudi. In the
mystery of the Holy Eucharist, which is truly an anticipation of the
Parousia, the final coming of the Lord, all the longing of the Church is
satisfied. Even now His eternal light illuminates the pathway of life,
our round of daily work; and we are invested with His strength.

The antiphon begins with a motive proper to the third mode. Com-
pare, for instance, the beginning of the Introit for the fifth Sunday after
Easter. In its normal position, that is, a fifth lower, we should have
here dd e\^ c f. It is on account of this eb that the piece was transposed.
The motive over clamdvi ad te, which always descends before an accented
syllable and thus gives prominence to the latter, is heard again in the
second phrase over quaesivi and in the third over avertas. The petition
is thereby made all the more urgent. Worthy of note also is the gradation
of introductory intervals: g c at the beginning of the first phrase, a d at
the beginning of the second, a ef from me to allehiia.

In earlier times the station was at the church called Sancta Maria
ad Mdrtyres, the former Pantheon. It was there that the picture of the
Lord's face, called Veronica nostra by Dante, was preserved in a coffer
secured with thirteen keys. Later this casket was transferred to St.
Peter's. How significant and appropriate it was to sing this Introit, in
which there is such frequent mention of the Lord's face, before this
picture!^

FIRST ALLELUIA VERSE (Ps. 46: 9)

1. Regnavit Dominus super gentes: 1. The Lord hath reigned over all

2. Deus sedet super sedem sanctam the nations: 2. God sitteth on his
suam. holy throne.

1 Schuster, The Sacramentary, II, 379.

Sunday within the Octave of the Ascension 217

The juhilus presents a graceful interplay of motive with the cli-
macus + pes and the climacus + clivis. Its middle part is the most pro-
minent. Setting in a fifth higher than the ending of the preceding word,
as super omnes does, the word Deus receives still greater prominence by
its ascending melody, which again goes over into a climacus -\- clivis.
Perhaps there is attempted tone-painting here, as in other pieces con-
taining this word (cf. the Communion for the Ascension and the Gradual
for the third Sunday of Advent). The two ascending dives over Re-
receive an augment over -gnavit. This melody does not say much con-
cerning God's kingly rule over all nations; Deus must therefore be made
so much the more impressive. The entire piece is to be sung with a quiet
and measured movement.

As King over all the world, Christ is enthroned at the right of the
Father. We rejoice in His glorification. God's beauty now transfigures
His most sacred humanity.

SECOND ALLELUIA VERSE (John 14: 18)

1. Non vos relinquam orphanos: 1. / will not leave you orphans:

2. vado, et venio ad vos, 3. et gaude- 2. / go and I come to you, 3. and
hit cor vestrum. your heart shall rejoice.

After the somewhat cold first Alleluia, we here have a song full of
consolation, soothing the pain of separation and banishing the feeling
of loneliness and isolation, a song of glad returning. "Through the Holy
Ghost the Lord will come into our inmost heart, will be one with us,
will be much closer to us than He was formerly to the Apostles when He
dwelt among them in the flesh. Our heart will feel His nearness and will
rejoice." {W. K.)

Here we have one of the most devout melodies cast in the first mode ;
no doubt, it purposely avoids a greater range in order to penetrate the
more readily into our heart.

Alleluia consists of two groups which are almost identical: a lower
one within the tetrachord c-f over the first two syllables of Alle- and a
higher one with the tetrachord /-6b over the two final syllables -Mia.
The two groups complement each other and form a symmetrically con-
structed whole.

The juhilus^ has the form a a a^ b. Designedly the fifth d-a marks
the peak of the theme of the juhilus; in an energetic line it combines all
that precedes. Its first note begins Alleluia; the second closes it; more-
over, these two notes predominate in both groups. The theme of the
juhilus^ is taken from the figure over -luia, the higher group. This expresses

1 Wagner (III, 412) gives a fine explanation of the divisions.

218 Sunday within the Octave of the Ascension

most fully its character of an overflowing of joy inspired by God. The
descending climacus is repeated. It seems a third climacus would like to
join, but suddenly the melody bends backward. The general rule, that
the selfsame formula should not be employed more than twice in the
same way, is here adhered to not only in the smaller detail, but is also
observed on a larger scale in the form a a a^ b of the entire juhilus. At
first a^ is little more than a repetition of a, but the pressus after the first
four notes causes the melody to veer over to the thesis, which reaches
completion in the two smaller mutually corresponding groups that fol-
low. The high points of the successive figures form the stepwise descend-
ing line h\> a g f, an effective form of cadence structure. A similar ar-
rangement is found in the Alleluia for the twenty-third Sunday after
Pentecost.

In the verse, Non relinquam resembles alleluia; in vado the melody
rises to an accented bb, thus becoming strikingly tender and gentle. The
descending group over venio reminds us of Alle-. The verse melisma on
the accented syllable of gaudebit presents a succession of descending
two-note figures (dives) in its first part; in the second part it has ascend-
ing podatus until it comes to a close on a.

The OFFERTORY was explained on the feast of the Ascension.

COMMUNION (John 17: 12, 13, 15)

1. Pater, cum essem cum eis, ego 1. Father, while I was with them,

servaham eos, alleluia: 2. nunc I kept them whom thou gavest me,
autem ad te venio: 3. non rogo ut alleluia: 2. hut now I come to thee;
tollas eos de mundo, sed ut serves 3. / pray not that thou shouldst take
eos a malo, alleluia, alleluia. them out of the world, hut that thou

shouldst keep them from evil, alle-
luia, alleluia.

Let us first consider this piece from a musical viewpoint only. The
final alleluia is the same as the one which occurs at the end of the first
phrase. Ut serves eos a malo, together with the penultimate alleluia, is
practically nothing more than a shortened repetition of ut tollas eos de
mundo. And this entire third phrase bears considerable resemblance to
the second half of the first. Hence two large phrases can be distinguished
melodically, each of which has two parts. In the first. Pater, cum essem
cum eis and nunc autem ad te venio, the melody tends vigorously upward
to a height rarely attained by the fourth mode. The second phrase glides
downward on an easy decline, enlivened only by the word-accents. Ad
te venio with its accented c marks the summit of the piece. Hence, we
may not compare it with eis of the first phrase, since in the latter word

Whitsunday 219

the note a, rather than c, bears the accent. Venio, setting in a third above
the tonic, stands out very prominently, and is excellently suited to its
text: "Now I come to Thee." It is a veritable reaching up of the Sa-
viour's arms to His heavenly Father, a taking wing and leaving this
realm of space and time, a song which wells up from the heart after a
difficult mission happily fulfilled. Truly can He say to the Father: "I
have finished the work which Thou gavest Me to do."

It seems strange, therefore, that cum essem cum eis should receive
a similar melody. Why the great expansion over these words? Did the
composer perhaps first sing ad te venio and then try to create a parallel
in the first half of the first phrase?

A special tenderness, as if coming from the very heart of Jesus Him-
self, is revealed in the second half of each phrase. With what motherly
care He shielded His disciples from everything that might have harmed
them when His enemies sought to exploit their ignorance and inexperi-
ence! When He was immersed in a world of suffering on the Mount of
Olives, how concerned He was that nothing happen to His disciples!
Those who were entrusted to Him He again confides to the hands of the
Father and implores Him to keep them out of harm's way. The two
alleluia at the end continue these heartfelt desires of Jesus.

In the Cenacle, after the first Eucharistie Banquet, Jesus had prayed
thus. In Holy Communion we are again "given" to Him. Now within
us He prays to the Father, as He taught us to pray in the final petition
of the Lord's Prayer: that we, laboring in the world and for the good of
the world, may remain untainted by its spirit; that we may be in the
world like a ray of the sun which, though it furnishes light and warmth,
nevertheless remains free of the sin that is committed in its light.

Rass. gr., 7, col. 420.

WHITSUNDAY

INTROIT (Wisd. 1 : 7)

1. Spiritus Domini replevit or- 1. The Spirit of the Lord hath

hem terrarum, alleluia: 2. et hoc filled the whole earth, alleluia: 2.

quod continet omnia, scientiam ha- and that which containeth all things

bet vocis, alleluia, alleluia, alleluia. hath knowledge of the voice, alleluia,

Ps. Exsurgat Deus, et dissipentur alleluia, alleluia. Ps. Let God arise,

inimici ejus: * et fugiant, qui oder- and let his enemies be scattered: *

unt eum, a facie ejus. and let them that hate him, flee from

before his face.

220 Whitsunday

The very first word tells us that today's feast is dedicated to the-
Holy Ghost and His marvelous workings. In the same manner the first
word at Christmas (Puer) directed our attention to the divine Child,
and the first word of the Introit for Easter (Resurrexi) indicated the
song which the Risen One sings to His Father. What a tender and de-
vout ring that melody had! Today, however, our song tells of a power-
which sweeps everything before it, of a force which nothing can with-
stand. There is a feeling of mystery about its low-pitched beginning..
But then the melody expands with tempestuous speed, expands until it
fills the entire earth. But it is no devastating hurricane, breaking the
nations as a reed and making poor humanity cry out in despair. It ra-
ther resembles a storm of spring, imparting new strength to an aging
world, from which new creations rise: the marvel of the Catholic Church,
the phenomenon of holiness on the sinful earth, the prodigy which bears
God in its heart as the sweet guest of the soul. Hence, in spite of all its
impetuosity and power, this song is extremely pleasant to our musical
sense. Upon the broken D-minor tritone over Spiritus follows the bril-
liant F-major tritone over replevit, over the penultimate alleluia, and in
a descending line over -rum, alle-(lüia). A profusion of light pours out
from the C-major chord, descending from the upper e^, and gleams
again, though in a milder form to correspond with the more serene text,
over hahet vocis as e^ca.

"The Spirit of the Lord hath filled the whole world." In the be-
ginning He moved over the waters, put life into inert matter, disposed
and ordered it, and thus perfected creation. On the day of the Incarna-
tion He descended upon the most pure Virgin and consummated the mir-
aculous creation of Christ's humanity. On Pentecost He perfects the
new creation of the Church founded in Christ's blood and by His love
and His power makes her exceedingly fruitful. He fills the entire world
not only in its length and breadth, but also in its depth, with the riches
of His grace and His most intimate union. He is the Spirit of the "Lord,"^
of the Father and the Son, God of very God.

For a discussion of the text of this Introit, cf. Wagner, II, 66^
Compare also the first phrase with the second antiphon of today's Ves-
pers. With replevit a broadly expanding crescendo should set in. One must
exult with the universal Church. It is not mere word-painting, such as
one finds, for instance, in C. M. Weber's Oheron in the passage "rund
um die ganze Welt" ("round about the world") in the aria "Ozean, du
Ungeheuer." In this chant we have rather a glimpse into eternity, and
an enraptured wonderment at the greatness, the wisdom, and the power
of Him who fills the whole earth.

Whitsunday 221

Et hoc in the second phrase is a slavish translation of the Greek, in
which language Pneuma (Spirit) is a neuter noun. We should naturally
'expect et hie here, taking the masculine Spiritus into consideration. After
et hoc a very short pause for breathing is to be recommended. Then
quod cdntinet omnia is to be sung straight on; and even after the last
word the pause should be very slight. In this manner the gradation
g a c^(dmnia), hc^ d}(scienti-), a d} (-am habet) is brought out more clear-
ly. The cadence after vocis requires a resolution and receives it in the
following alleluia. For this reason the three alleluia may not be con-
sidered as an independent third phrase, although their length might
tempt one to do so; they must be taken as a necessary conclusion and
coda-like extension of the second phrase. There is some resemblance
iDetween the two phrases. Taking the principal notes into consideration,
one might sketch them thus:

First phrase: dfaf fac dVc gc af fag;

Second phrase: fgc d^e^c a af fag.

With the exception of one note, the final alleluia is the same as the
one at the end of the first phrase. With its limited range and fourfold
stressing of a it harmonizes with the alleluia after vocis and is the expres-
sion of quiet joy, while the penultimate alleluia with its bright ring and
the accentuation of the tenor c harks back to the jubilant festal spirit
of the entire antiphon.

Since the Holy Ghost sustains and rules all things, nothing can be
hidden from Him. He hears everything, all verbal and all silent longing,
and every sigh for glorification which goes through creation as a whole
and through each individual soul. He hears our singing and praying, too,
all of it, and accepts it graciously.

Perhaps there was still another thought in the mind of the compo-
ser today. The Holy Ghost is the Spirit of knowledge; He has the most
perfect possible knowledge of Himself. But He has also the power and the
means to manifest His being. As God once revealed Himself on Sinai
amid thunder and lightning, so He makes Himself known today in the
fiery tongues, in the roar of the mighty wind, in the impressive sermon
of the prince of the Apostles, and in the miracle of tongues wrought
upon the Apostles.

Psalm 67, of which only the intonation here appears, portrays the
history of Israel from the time of its liberation from Egypt to the es-
tablishment of God's kingdom on Sion, as a triumphal procession which
God Himself leads through the desert to the consternation of His enemies

222 Whitsunday

and for the glory of His people {W.K.). Today the psalm is for us a con-
fiding look into the future. The Church realizes that she has many ene-
mies who hate her and who do all in their power to destroy her. Thus
it was already on the very first Pentecost, and thus it will remain through-
out the centuries. But the Church knows no fear: God fights for her.
When He arises and shows His flaming countenance, all the enemies are
instantly dispersed. The final victory is to the Church. Hence she sings i
Gloria Patri et Filio et Spiritui Sancto.

Whoever lives himself into this song seems to feel that the Spirit
of the Lord filled also the heart of the composer and bestowed upon him
this power of song. May the Holy Ghost likewise fill our hearts, that our
chant may penetrate into the hearts of the faithful like Pentecostal
grace!

Revue, 7, 172 ff.; 23, 135 ff.; Analyses, IV, 21 ff.; Mus. divina, 1, 9
ff.; Choralhlaetter, No. 5.; Tribune de Saint-Germain, 11, 203 ff.

FIRST ALLELUIA VERSE (Ps. 103: 30)

1. Emitte Spiritum tuum, 2. et 1. Send forth thy Spirit, 2. and

creabuntur: 3. et renovabis faciem they shall be created; 3. and thou
terrae. shall renew the face of the earth.

Today there is a clear connection between the Alleluia and the pre-
ceding Lesson, a relationship which is not so obvious on some other days,
and often is lacking entirely. In a vivid, captivating manner the matvel
of Pentecost was held before our eyes. How wondrous were its effects.
The Spirit had descended upon the Apostles, who a short time before
were much like the lifeless clay of Adam's body before God had breathed
a soul into it. Now they have become a new creation; they are filled with
life, wisdom, courage, and energy; are determined to carry the richness
of life which they received to the ends of the world and renew the entire
earth. Oh, may He come again, this Holy Ghost, and again effect a new
creation! That is the suppliant cry of the present Alleluia-song.

How vitally necessary the Holy Ghost is to us! And how many men
there are who know nothing of Him, who no longer know the meaning
of spirit and grace and purity and the supernatural life. They have lost
all religious sense. The material world alone captivates them. Would
that the Spirit who in the beginning swept over the waters, might once
again sweep over this matter and vivify it! How fervently this petition
rises from the heart of the Church! And yet we clothe it in the jubilant
cry of Alleluia, because we know that we have a right to this Spirit in
virtue of the fact that we have been redeemed.

Whitsunday 223;

SECOND ALLELUIA VERSE

1. Veni Sande Spiritus, reple 1. Come, Holy Spirit, fill the

tuorum cor da fidelium: 2. et tui hearts of thy faithful: 2. and kindle^
amoris in eis ignem accende. in them the fire of thy love.

This melody must be numbered among the most impressive and
most beautiful in the entire Graduale. "Here all kneel"— that is the
simple rubric. And when at high Mass the bishop with his assistants
kneel down at the throne, when all those in choir bend the knee, then
this one wish is uppermost: Would that I might sing this chant with that
deep fervor with which it was first conceived and then sung throughout
the centuries, with that depth and ardor with which the Blessed Virgin
called upon the Holy Ghost during the novena preceding Pentecost Day!
Like the dew from heaven its tones should sink into the hearts of the
faithful.

It seems almost presumptuous to analyze this melody; one fears to.
dissect so fragrant a flower. There is a threefold accent in the alleluia with
its juhilus: the second time with an interval of a fourth, the third time
with an interval of a fifth. Twice the ending is formed with c d, once
with e d. The alleluia furnishes the theme, the verse the variations..
Veni resembles alleluia. That which follows, as far as fidelium, derives
its melodic material from the second member. Et tui amoris utilizes the
motives of the third phrase. It is impossible to sing this passage too
tenderly; and yet one ought to introduce a crescendo in the repetition.
For the longing after the pure, deep, faithful, enrapturing love of the
Holy Ghost is ever increasing. After the development has reached its
climax, the quiet thetic forms efedcd should diminish in volume. With
the pressus, which occur several times in the piece, blunt increase in
volume must be avoided. It must be prayerful throughout: humble,
reverent, yet confiding withal.

The Sequence is composed of five double strophes^, each of which
is made up of three spondaic verses. According to the latest investiga-
tions, its authorship must be assigned to Stephen Langton, chancellor
of the University of Paris (»1-1228).

In its first verse the first strophe uses the melodic material of the
second alleluia, c d e f e d c d', it h, therefore, its melodic continuation,
just as in content it is a further development of the Alleluia's fervent
supplication. Thus we have here a Sequentia (continuation) in the full
sense of that word. From the depth of our indigence the motive rises, is
heard a fourth higher in the second verse, and with a change of interval

1 Wagner, I, 274.

224 Whitsunday

in the third verse, thus presenting the form a a} a?. The interval of a
sixth between the second and third verses is quite rare in plainsong.
Surprising, too, is the rise of the final syllable of the word at the end of
the verse. The same thing occurs in some of the following pairs of stro-
phes. The first pair of strophes sings of the Holy Ghost as the source of
light and oi the soul's riches:

la. Come, 0 Holy Spirit, come; lb. Come, thou father of the poor,

And from thy celestial home Come, thou source of all our store,

Shed a ray of light divine. Come, within our bosoms shine.

The second pair of strophes sets in on the dominant and with joy-
ful confidence rises an octave above the tonic. They praise the Holy
Ghost as the source of consolation in trials and sufferings. Here the ren-
dition ought to be somewhat more forceful:

2a. Thou of all consolers best, 2b. In our labor rest most sweet.

Thou, the soul's most welcome guest. Grateful coolness in the heat.
Sweet refreshment here below. Solace in the midst of woe.

The third pair of strophes sets in on the octave, a proceeding un-
known to the classic period of plainsong composition and hardly to be
found before the eleventh century. How stirring is this plea for the
saving light! The passage ddcbcdcat the beginning was taken over,
it seems, from (in la)-b6re requies. In the third verse, bb a g f corresponds
to d c & a of the first:

3a. 0 most blessed light divine, 3b. Where thou art not, man hath

Shine within these hearts of thine, nought,

And our inmost beings fill. Nothing good in deed or thought.

Nothing free from taint of ill.

Thus far the Sequence was almost continually rising and expanding.
In the subsequent pair of strophes the melody describes a curve and be-
comes appreciably more tender. Graceful harmony marks the lines of
the first and second verses: bab cbag=fef gfed.

The third verse is almost the same as the opening motive in the
Sequence for Corpus Christi (Lauda Sion). This is the only pair of stro-
phes which close on the tenor. Care must be taken that the first note of
each verse be not prolonged, otherwise a trivial three-eighths time will
result :

4a. Heal our wounds; our strength 4b. Bend the stubborn heart and will

renew; Melt the frozen, warm the chill;

On our dryness pour thy dew; Guide the steps that go astray.
Wash the stains of guilt away.

Whitsunday 225

After this decrease in range and volume, the former liveliness and
impressiveness returns in the final pair of strophes: in fact, it is even
increased. Fiery and turbulent as the flashing of the tongues of fire in
the "mighty wind" is the ring of the first and last members; they can
well bear to be sung forte. They have descending fifths at the beginning,
and endings which correspond to one another (acha = dfed). The middle
verse is more quiet. The final strophe again sets in on the octave. Just
as the very first strophe insistently prays Veni four times, so the last
pair four times has da: Give, O Holy Spirit!

5a. Thou on those who evermore 5b. Give them virtue's sure reward,

Thee confess and thee adore Give them thy salvation, Lord;

In thy sevenfold gifts descend. Give them joys that never end.

Amen. Alleluia.

The composer of this song was a veritable harp of God, on which
the Holy Ghost Himself played. Its tones will continue as long as man-
kind looks up in heartfelt prayer to the "Father of the poor."

Whoever realizes the neediness of his own heart, whoever can sym-
pathize with all that moves the heart of his fellow man, whoever reflects
while he peruses the text and the melodic development, upon the work
of the Holy Ghost in souls and in the Church, will of his own accord
arrive at the rendition which is most suitable for this magnificent song.

OFFERTORY (Ps. 67: 29, 30)

1. Confirma hoc Deus, quod opera- 1. Confirm this, 0 God, which

tus es innohis:2. atemplo tuo, quod thou hast wrought in us: 2. from
est in Jerusalem, 3. tibi afferent thy temple, which is in Jerusalem
reges munera, alleluia. 3. kings shall offer presents to thee,

alleluia.

On Christmas (first and third Masses), on Easter, and on Pente-
cost the Ofifertory belongs to the fourth mode. But how varied is the
feeling! At Christmas it is a meditative, blissful, intimate song, not in-
tended for the big outside world; at Easter, a melody full of power and
weight, a pean of victory; and now, on Pentecost Day, a fervent yet
joyously moving prayer, calling upon the Holy Ghost much like today's
second Alleluia. Solemnly the melody increases over the first words. Hoc
presages great things. The strange beginning of Deus only tends to make
the petition the more intensive: God alone can supply our needs. To
the ending with the pressus at the close of the first half of the verse cor-
responds that of the first phrase over nobis. With the tristropha, the only
one in the piece, the melody reaches its peak. Most thankfully we ac-

226 Whitsunday

knowledge the great things which God has worked in us. And we beg
that these magndlia Dei may not be taken from us, that the Spirit of
grace may estabb'sh and "confirm" us against all attack from within
and from without, that the life of grace may more and more penetrate
our entire being, may spiritualize and transfigure it, so that, like the
sacrificial gifts which are now placed upon the altar, Christ may through
the working of the Holy Ghost be glorified in us by our putting on His
spirit of sacrifice. With what deep emotion we ought to chant this song!
Over operdtus es the torculus gag, must predominate. Then we must
take care that in nobis be not harsh and blunt; it should rather be sung
with special warmth.

In its first half the second phrase also closes with a pressus as the
first did, continues with /, and also reaches high c, though only once.
Tuo and est correspond. The melody makes the phrase more independent
than it actually is. Here we are, no doubt, to think of the new Jerusalem
which the Spirit of God has bestowed upon us, or of the Cenacle with its
marvels, or of the wonderful sanctifying activity of the Catholic Church.

If the Spirit can again be active in our souls, can establish and
"confirm" them, what, then, will His effect be? Simply this, that we
shall function properly as participants in the kingly priesthood, and
shall offer our gifts, not in a sorrowful or forced manner, but magnani-
mously, in the joy of the Holy Ghost. Tibi and reges have a similar ring.
Offerent is rightly assigned a prominent position. The three torculus over
munera are arranged in climactic order. Alleluia repeats the melody of
hoc Deus in the first phrase.

The first phrase adverts to the things which God has done for us,
while the second reminds us of the dignity and burden of our kingly
priesthood.

Revue, 3, 3 ff.

COMMUNION (Acts 2: 2, 4)

1. F actus est repente de caelo 1. There came suddenly a sound

sonus advenientis spiritus vehemen- from heaven as of a mighty wind

lis, ubi erant sedentes, alleluia: coming, where they were all sitting,

et repleti sunt omnes Spiritu Sane- alleluia: 2. and they were all filled

to, loquentes magnolia Dei, alle- with the Holy Ghost, speaking the

luia, alleluia. wonderful works of God, alleluia,

alleluia.

In most Masses the Ite missa est harks back to the melody of the
Kyrie. In a similar way this Communion reminds us of the festive en-
thusiasm of the Introit. With striking clearness it portrays in the first

Monday in Whitsun Week 227

phrase the sudden coming of the Holy Ghost. One seems actually to
hear the mighty wind in the recurring fifths and the ascent to / with
its interval of a fourth. That is word-painting which, although it vio-
lently urges us along, is nevertheless enjoyable. In spite of all His might
and power, the Spirit who comes is the Spirit of order, of life, and of
love.

The structure of the Communion is strikingly plain, and its affilia-
tion to psalmody unmistakable. The two phrases have in their first half
an energetic and lively ascent with the tenor d, and in their second half
a more quiet, meditative spirit with the proper tenor c and a descent to
the tonic. This division extends even to the two final alleluia: the first
shows an animated upward movement, the second closes quietly.

The first phrase speaks of the coming of the Paraclete, the second
of His activity. One becomes aware of the freshness and liveliness with
which Factus est sets in, if one transposes the pes from the final syllable
to the accented syllable and notes the contrast. With Puer in the Christ-
mas Introit such a procedure is very suitable to praise the dear Christ-
child, but here a more energetic rhythm is called for. As for the rest,
the word-accents play the leading role in the formation of the melody.
The second phrase is less sparkling, less striking than the first. Never-
theless, with its bright, joyous ascent over Spiritu Sancto, with the ac-
centuation of magnalia, with its florid melody and the tritone 6-/, im-
pelling us to admiration of the marvel here recounted, it has a beauty
all its own. Filled with the divine life, with the Holy Ghost, the Apostles
are impelled to praise and glorify the great things God has done, just as
Mary, who is sitting in their midst, filled with the Holy Ghost, sang her
Magnificat and glorified God, who had done "great things" (magna) to
her.

"In a certain way, the miracle of Pentecost becomes visible in Holy
Communion. The Holy Ghost, it is true, does not come in the form of
fiery tongues, but in the form of bread He enters into our hearts; for
Christ is filled with the Holy Ghost. And although the species disinte-
grate, the Paraclete wishes to remain with us, to take hold of us spirit-
ually, and fill us with holy enthusiasm" (W.K.).
* * * *

MONDAY IN WHITSUN WEEK

In content the INTROIT is closely related to that of Easter Mon-
day. Today, too, the neophytes are to shout with joy over the "honey-
sweet" mystery of the Holy Eucharist. For the explanation of the
melody, see the feast of Corpus Christi.

228 Monday in Whitsun Week

FIRST ALLELUIA VERSE (Acts 2: 4)

1. Loquehantur variis Unguis 1. The apostles spoke in divers

Apostoli 2. magnalia Dei. tongues 2. the wonderful works of

God.

Again and again the Church, marvels, this week, at the astounding
miracles of tongues. Repeatedly she reminds us of God's almighty rule
in the history of mankind in general and of each individual soul in par-
ticular.

The alleluia has two parts, the first of which confines itself to the
tetrachord c-f, while the second reaches up to high c. We met a similar
melody on the Sunday after the Ascension. The first member of the ju-
hilus shows a fine manipulation of the motive: f g ah\? a g and efgdgf;
the second member also has two related tone-sequences. Loquehantur is
a further development of alle- while -luia and the greater part of the
jubilus are repeated as far as Unguis. Before this word a short pause is
indicated, while in the corresponding passage in the jubilus we have a
half pause, which is well justified by the pressus with the modulation to
c. Here, however, the related words variis Unguis are to be joined to-
gether as closely as possible. Apostoli may also be regarded as the con-
tinuation of -hiia, but here the threefold c far outweighs the / which be-
gins the group. For this reason we do not sing h\? here, but a strongly
accented h. It is interesting to note the display of power resulting from
the / with its subsequent 6b, and the c with its subsequent b.

OFFERTORY (Ps. 17: 14, 16)

1. Intonuit de caelo Dominus, 2. 1. The Lord thundered from

et AUissimus dedit vocem suam: 3. heaven, 2. and the Most High gave

et apparuerunt f antes aquarum, his voice: 3. and the fountains of

alleluia. waters appeared, alleluia.

The Offertory is borrowed from Tuesday in Easter Week. Through-
out the octaves of Easter and of Pentecost we hear the rushing foun-
tains of water, reminding us that we were reborn out of water and the
Holy Ghost. Hence it is that the melody reaches its highest point in the
third phrase of our present chant. A grateful and joyous spirit pervades
the entire piece.

The close of alleluia corresponds with Dominus in the first phrase.
This and the second phrase have the same range, but a different melodic
development. In its second half the second phrase closely follows the
tone-sequences of the first mode. A light secondary accent on the last
note of vo-(cem) will help to clarify the rhythm. The preceding notes

Trinity Sunday 229

may be considered as a simplification of the motive bb g f e d f f over
caelo; the first two neums over this word are heard again over (apparu)
-e-(runt).

On Pentecost the Lord let His voice be heard in a special manner:
suddenly from heaven (de caelo) came the noise of a mighty wind. But
it was not like the reverberation of thunder, for it marked the coming
of the Holy Ghost, of Love itself.

COMMUNION (John 14: 26)

Spiritus Sanctus docehit vos, alle- The Holy Ghost shall teach you,

luia: quaecumque dixero vohis, alle- alleluia, whatsoever I have said to
luia, alleluia. you, alleluia, alleluia.

The words of the Saviour may be regarded as a solemn solo, and
the cries of alleluia as the grateful, joyous answer of the community.

The intrusion of the first alleluia is somewhat disturbing to the clear
psalmodic construction of this antiphon, which has an obvious intona-
tion, middle cadence on the tenor, and a final cadence. The accented
syllable consistently occupies a higher position than the following
syllable. Thus the melody follows the natural declamation of the words.

Christ, who has just come into our hearts in Holy Communion,
addresses us as He once did His disciples: Let yourselves be instructed
by the Holy Ghost. He will lead you to all truth, and the truth will
make you free and happy. Alleluia.

To announce the "great things of God" (magnolia Dei) in the liturgy
ought to be for us a sacred and sweet duty, to which we should dedicate
ourselves heart and soul.

TRINITY SUNDAY
(The first Sunday after Pentecost)

It was not until 1334 that this feast was extended to the universal
Church. As early as the eighth century, however, the Mass formulary
had been composed for a votive high Mass in honor of the Holy Trinity.
In the earliest manuscripts we can therefore find the chants for this
feast. But in great part they are only accommodations of melodies from
other texts. The Introit has its melody from the first Sunday of Lent,
the Gradual and the Offertory from the feast of SS. Peter and Paul,
and the Communion is a free adaptation of the Comvaunion Feci judicium
from the second Mass for a Virgin Martyr.

230 Trinity Sunday

In and by Himself God is infinitely happy. A sea of delight issues
from the Father to the Son, and from both of these it overflows upon
the Holy Ghost, and again flows back from Him. And yet it seems that
something in the essence of the infinite God seeks for some further
complement. Nothing is wanting to His perfect happiness, but He
would share His love with others and pour blessings, grace, and happi-
ness upon them from His own overflowing Heart. Every act of God to-
ward His creatures is therefore an act of charity. Still more resplendent,
however, does God's mercy appear when He offers reconciliation and
forgiveness to sinful man after he has trodden God's holiness underfoot,
when He renovates the temple of the soul which man in his folly has
wasted and destroyed, and adorns it with His gifts of grace. We can never
sufficiently thank God for this great love. What a price He paid for our
redemption! Today, then, we hear this phrase repeated in the Introit,
Offertory, and Communion: "He hath shown His mercy to us." The
entire Mass formulary becomes one great "Glory be to the Father. . ."
as a conclusion to the work of redemption begun at Christmas and
brought to completion at Pentecost. Each of today's chants begins with
an exhortation to praise God; Introit: Benedicta; Gradual, Alleluia-
verse, and Offertory: Benedictus; Communion: Benedicimus. Few Mass
formularies exhibit such unified structure.

INTROIT (Tob. 12:6)

1. Benedicta sit sancta Trinitas, 1. Blessed be the Holy Trinity and

atque indivisa Unitas: 2. confitehi- undivided Unity: 2. we will give

mur ei, quia fecit nobiscum miseri- glory to him, because he hath shown

cordiam suam. Ps. Domine Dominus his mercy to us. Ps. O Lord, our

nosier: * quam admirabile est no- Lord: * how wonderful is thy name

men tuum in universa terral in the whole earth.

The melody was explained on the first Sunday of Lent. Its adapta-
tion here is not an entirely happy one. Particularly unfortunate is the
fact that the ascending melody over the accented syllable of glorificdbo
eum is here fitted to the unaccented syllable (confite)-bi-(mur ei). It seems
that the seven syllables of this text were parcelled out to the seven
groups of notes which are carried by the seven syllables of the original
with no reference to the word-accent. Furthermore the second half of
the first phrase begins with the motive which in the original brings the
first phrase to a close. Nevertheless, the entire feeling of the original is
admirably suited to that of our present Introit: it is a joyously moving
song of thanksgiving.

Gregoriusblatt, 28, 106 fif.; Gregoriusbote, 25. 10 f.; Revue, 7, 124 flf.

Trinity Sunday 231

GRADUAL (Dan. 3: 55, 56)

1. Benedictus es, Domine, qui 1. Blessed art thou, O Lord, who

intueris ahyssos, 2. et sedes super beholdest the depths, 2. and sittest
Cherubim, jll. 1. Benedictus es Do- upon the Cherubim, f. 1. Blessed
mine, in firmamento caeli, 2. et art thou, O Lord, in the firmament
laudabilis in saecula. of heaven, 2. and worthy of praise

forever.

There are times, many times in fact, when we stand face to face
with inscrutable mystery. The most eminent naturalists, for instance,
have made statements such as this: "It is something we do not know
and never expect to know." Mysteries there are also in the human heart;
yes, even in the depths of our own heart. But for the world's Creator
there is no mystery: all things are evident to Him. In the Epistle we have
just heard the words: "Of Him, and by Him, and in Him, are all things."
He need inquire of no one. He knows what is in man. He is the Searcher
of the hearts and the reins, and before Him the darkness is as the noon-
day brightness (Ps. 138: 11). Even the most noble creatures in the
spiritual creation, the Cherubim, stand infinitely lower than He and are
privileged to be His footstool. God reigns above all; who can praise Him
worthily? Yet behind the ramparts of heaven a marvelous song resounds
unceasingly. It is the praise and glory which each person of the Most
Holy Trinity offers the others. They alone perfectly realize how praise-
worthy God is. This song re-echoes unto all eternity, and the angels and
saints of heaven join in with this never-ending Gloria Patri ....

The melody has been borrowed from the feast of SS. Peter and
Paul. Instead of in firmamento caeli the ancient manuscripts read in thro-
no regni tui: Blessed art Thou on the throne of Thy empire.

ALLELUIA VERSE (Dan. 3: 52)

1. Benedictus es, Domine Deus 1. Blessed art thou, 0 Lord God of

patrum nostrorum, 2. et laudabilis our fathers, 2. and worthy of parise
in saecula. forever.

The Gradual is the only song today which does not treat explicitly
of God's mercy, but of His infinite splendor. In the Alleluia-verse this
same thought is emphasized. The merciful love of God is, however, im-
plicitly contained in the reference to the patriarchs and prophets of the
Old Law, which was but a prelude to the fullness of grace of the New
Covenant. Even in the most ancient manuscript the melody, which was
explained on the vigil of Christmas, is assigned to this Mass.

232 Corpus Christi

OFFERTORY (Tob. 12: 6)

1. Benedictus sit Deus Pater, 1. Blessed he the Father, and the

unigenitusque (2.) Dei Filius, 2. only-hegotten{2.)SonofGod2.and

Sandus quoque (3.) Spiritus: 3. also {d.)the Holy Spirit: 3. because

quia fecit nohiscum misericordiam he hath shown his mercy towards us.
suam.

The figures in parentheses indicate the fine divisions in the original
melody for the feast of SS. Peter and Paul, and show that our present
Offertory has little regard for the proper phrasing. It is gratifying to
note, however, that the words Benedictus, Pater, unigenitus, Spiritus, and
nohiscum are brought clearly into the foreground. Similarly, the melodic
development over Sanctus quoque may well serve to increase our rever-
ence for the Holy Ghost and the entire mystery of the triune God.

Let us give thanks! But let us do so mindful of the fact, mentioned
in the today's Secret, that our thanksgiving can be acceptable only if
God's grace is working to make of us an eternal sacrifice to Himself!

COMMUNION (Tob. 12: 6)

1. Benedicimus Deum caeli, 2. 1. We hless the God of heaven, 2.

et coram omnihus viventihus con- and before all living we will praise

fitebimur ei: S. quia fecit nohiscum him: 3. because he has shown his

misericordiam suam. mercy to us.

The first phrase is very faithful to its original (see p. 229) ; not so the
second. The melody over qua fecit, which here opens the third phrase,
forms the close of the second phrase in the original. Here again the
phrasing is not entirely happy. Small heterogeneous pieces compose the
last part: nohiscum is like scuto in the Communion for the first Sunday
of Lent; the close is found in a number of chants, for example in the In-
troit for the tenth Sunday after Pentecost over in aeternum.

We still are numbered among the living who can praise and thank
God. In each holy Mass the triune God makes holy our sacrificial gifts
and converts them into the sacrifice of Christ, and in the sacrificial Ban-
quet the Father and the Holy Ghost, together with the Son, join them-
selves to us, and thus prove that their life and mercy are truly infinite.

CORPUS CHRISTI

With the words Exsultdte— jubilate of the Introit-verse is announced
the theme of today's feast, of the Mass, and of the procession which

Corpus Christi 233-

follows. The psalm from which these words have been taken was once
sung at the feast of Tabernacles, which was celebrated in the open, in
tents constructed of boughs in memory of the tent-life of Israel in the
desert. Hence it also refers to the dwelling of God with us in the desert
of this world, and to today's festive procession in the open over a path
decorated with boughs {W.K.). Today Mother Church's heart overflows
with joy — with joy that extends beyond the confines of the church
building. All Nature is to exult with her. And, conversely, Nature, with
her trees now wearing their most beautiful green, with her wreaths and
garlands, is allowed to make a solemn entry into the church. For this is
also her festal day. From her the Saviour has selected the two species,
bread and wine, under the appearance of which He gives Himself to us.
In 1264, under Pope Urban IV, this feast was extended to the uni-
versal Church; its liturgy was composed by St. Thomas Aquinas {"i- 1274).
The melodies have been borrowed from earlier Sundays or feasts; the
following Introit, for instance, has received both text and melody from
the Monday in Whitsun Week.

INTROIT (Ps. 80: 17)

1. Cihavit eos ex adipe frumenti 1. He fed them with the fat of

alleluia: 2. et de petra, melle satura- wheat, alleluia: 2. and filled them
vit eos, 3. alleluia, alleluia, alleluia. with honey out of the rock, 3. alle-
ys. Exsultate Deo adjutori nostro: * luia, alleluia, alleluia. Ps. Rejoice
jubilate Deo Jacob. to God our helper: * sing aloud to

the God of Jacob.

Profound awe and reverence for the true Manna marks the beginning
of this piece; yet it sounds like the joyous ringing of bells. This Manna
is the nourishment of our souls! That is the thought of the first phrase,
which never extends beyond the tenor, but twice descends to low a. The
accented syllable of adipe carries only a single note, while the following
unaccented syllable has a tristropha. We meet this construction rather
frequently. Compare, for example, the Introit for the fourth Sunday
after Pentecost (Illumindtio), the Offertory for the fifteenth Sunday after
Pentecost (Dominum), the Offertory for the sixteenth Sunday after
Pentecost (Domine), the Communion for the seventeenth Sunday af-
ter Pentecost (Domino).

The second phrase augments the initial motive of the first phrase:
acdf becomes cdfg over melle; and, as further development, dgffga.
Rightly does saturdvit mark the summit of the piece. Before the melody
reaches it, however, there is a retarding motive (cf. dolo on Low Sunday),
downward bent, making the development of saturdvit all the more bril-

234 Corpus Christi

liant. This second phrase speaks of the sweet consolation which the
Holy Eucharist brings to us; of the spiritual satiety which strengthens
us against all the allurements of the world. The three alleluia may be
regarded as an independent phrase. Here the ascending fourth over
saturdvit is answered by a descending fourth. The second alleluia closes
on c, like eos above; on account of its e it can very effectively modulate
to a full tone below the tonic. This song must proceed from a heart in
which joy reigns supreme.
N. Sch., 295 ff.

GRADUAL (Ps. 144: 15, 16)

1. Oculi omnium in te sperant, 1. The eyes of all hope in thee, O

Domine: 2. et tu das Ulis escam in Lord: 2. and thou givest them meat

tempore opportuno. ^. 1. Aperis tu in due season, f. 1. Thou openest

manum tuam: 2. et imples omne thy hand: 2. and fittest every living

animal henedictione. creature with thy blessing.

God is the Creator and the Preserver of the natural world. But He
is still more concerned about preserving and promoting the life of the
soul. If we look at Him today, if by our steady gaze we become one, so
to speak, with the altar and the Blessed Sacrament, then He will not let
us wait in vain, but will bestow upon us streams of blessing and of vital
power.

In the manuscript the melody with this text is assigned to the twen-
tieth Sunday after Pentecost. The corpus of the Gradual and the verse
have the same florid closing cadence: opportuno — henedictione. The first
phrase of the corpus unfolds until it reaches the tenor and closes with a
cadence known to us from the fourth Sunday of Lent: mihi. Over (il)-lis
the final groups of neums appear a third lower. It is surprising to see
that the unaccented syllable of Aperis carries such a florid melisma. P.
Wagner (II, 66) thinks that the melody was originally composed for a
Greek text and only later transferred to a Latin one; this opinion, how-
ever, is contested by CO. (49, 126). A similar line of pressus, but with a
finer grouping, is met with in various Tracts, for example the second
verse of the first Tract on Good Friday over medio, and in several Gradu-
als, that of the second Sunday after Epiphany over ( miser ic6rdi)-ae in
the verse. Manum resembles the first half of (Dömi)-ne, while imples
reminds us of (tempo)-re. The entire piece calls for a lively rendition.

According to K.L. the Gradual and the Alleluia- verse have the fol-
lowing mutual relations: the Gradual is taken from the Old Testament,
treats of Nature, and tells of God the Provider, who hears His creatures

Corpus Christi 235

saying their grace before meat. The Alleluia-verse is taken from the
New Testament, is a prelude to the Gospel, and treats of grace and of
the Food of the soul.

ALLELUIA VERSE (John 6: 56, 57)

1. Caro mea vere est cibus, et 1. My flesh is meat indeed, and

sanguis mens vere est potus: 2. qui my blood is drink indeed: 2. he that

manducat meam carnem, et hihit eateth my flesh and drinketh my

meum sanguinem, in me manet et blood, abideth in me, and I in him.
ego in eo.

With what earnestness the disciples on the way to Emmaus be-
sought the Lord to remain with them, for the night was approaching!
Here our Saviour not only gives us the assurance that He will remain
with us, but that He will remain in us when we are united with Him in
Holy Communion. Thus the indefectible Light itself, the Light which
can never be dimmed, is within us! Our souls will be the house where
Truth dwells, where falsehood can never intrude. We shall be filled with
the life and strength from which all the saints, whom we rightly ad-
mire, have drawn. Hence He truly is what our hungering and thirsting
soul needs in life and still more in death. Our present song expresses
thanks for these many graces.

Alleluia with its jubilus has the form abc; no inner relationship
exists between it and the melody of the verse. Several times during the
year we meet this melody: first, on Corpus Christi; second, on the feast
of the Transfiguration; third, on the feast of St. Lawrence; fourth, on
the feast of St. Michael (second Alleluia); and fifth, on the feast of the
Holy Rosary. In the most ancient manuscripts it is found with the text
Laetdbitur Justus: "The just shall rejoice in the Lord, and shall hope in
Him: and all the upright in heart shall be praised." The melody is en-
tirely begotten of the text, an energetic song of exultation, which leaves
this earth far below it and soars up to the ethereal blue — describing the
joy and the delight of the singer. The original, unfortunately, is no
longer sung. In it the beauty and clarity of the structure, which is psal-
modic in character, is better revealed. Two phrases begin with an in-
tonation and then have a florid middle cadence. In the first phrase there
follows not a mere recitation on the tenor, but a very ornate melisma
with a repetition; finally comes the closing cadence. The melody of
alleluia with its jubilus is joined to the last words of the verse to form
the third phrase. In the first part of the original an independent thought
is expressed: "The just shall rejoice in the Lord," thus fully justifying
the pause on the dominant after the middle cadence. But b towers above

236

Corpus Christi

the two a parts. A brief survey will show the relation between the ori-
ginal composition and the adaptations mentioned and numbered above.

FIRST PART

Intonation

Middle Cadence

Laetdhitur

Justus

in Domino

1. Caro mea

vere est cihus

et sanguis meus

2. Candor est

lucis

aeternae

3. Levita

Laurentius

honum opus

4. Concussum

est mare

et contremuit

5. Solemnitas

gloriosae

Virginis

Florid Melisma

Closing Cadence

Et sperd-

-hit in eo

1. vere est potus, qui

manducat

meam carnem

2. et speculum sine md-

-cu-la

3. operd-

-tus est

4. terra

[without closing
cadence]

5. Mariae ex semine

SECOND PART

Ahrahae.

Intonation

Middle Cadence

Closing Cadence

et lauda-

-huntur

omnes

1. et Mbit

meum

sdnguinem

2. et

imdgo

honitdtis

3. qui per signum

crucis

caecos

4. [irregular]

uhi Archdngelus

Michael descende-

5. ortae

de trihu

Juda

THIRD PART

recti corde

1. in me manet et ego in eo.

2. illius.

3. illumindvit.

4. -hat de caelo.

5. clara ex stirpe David.

The structure is clearest in the verse Laetdhitur. Of the others, verse
2, that is, that of the feast of the Transfiguration, bears the closest re-
semblance. The third also is good. In 1, a new thought begins with the

Corpus Christi 237

melisma that is repeated, thus handicapping the effectiveness of the
melody; for its upward surge, about which there can be no doubt in this
type of Alleluia, is thereby weakened. The third part, whose melody is
formed somewhat differently, does not give the feeling of a finished
organic whole in which all parts are attuned to one another.

SEQUENCE

The Sequence owes its origin to St. Thomas Aquinas. In superb
language it enunciates the dogma of the Holy Eucharist. Its accompany-
ing melody was composed by Adam of St. Victor ( "f c. 1192). In its
original form it was a hymn to the cross, for which the Alleluia Dulce
lignum (May 3) supplies the initial motive (egagchag). In the double
strophe Dogma datur and quod non capis this motive returns a fourth
higher ( egagchag = dcdcfedc). All the strophes close on the tonic and
most of them with the formula ag fg g. Occasionally this is preceded by
ah or ch. Less often we have c ag fg g or ga fg g. The individual verses
close on the dominant or on c. Toward the end the closings on the domi-
nant increase; the final double strophe has it thrice.

At Beuron this chant is sung in six minutes. This observation is
not made with any intention of prescribing a set tempo, but merely to
show that even this Sequence takes a comparatively short time to sing.

la. Praise, 0 Sion, praise thy Saviour, * Shepherd, Prince, with
glad behavior, * Praise in hymn and canticle: lb. Sing His glory without
measure, * For the merit of your Treasure * Never shall your praises fill.

2a. Wondrous theme of mortal singing, * Living Bread and Bread
life-bringing, * Sing we on this joyful day: 2b. At the Lord's own table
given * To the twelve as Bread from Heaven, * Doubting not we firmly
say.

3a^. Sing His praise with voice sonorous; * Every heart shall hear
the chorus * Swell in melody sublime: 3a^. For this day the Shepherd
gave us * Flesh and Blood to feed and save us, * Lasting to the end of
time.

3b^. At the new King's sacred table, * The new Law's new Pasch
is able * To succeed the ancient Rite: 3b^. Old to new its place hath
given, * Truth has far the shadows driven, * Darkness flees before the
Light.

4a. And as He hath done and planned it, * "Do this," hear His
love command it, * "For a memory of me." 4b. Learned, Lord, in Thy
own science, * Bread and wine, in sweet compliance, * As a host we
offer Thee.

238 Corpus Christi

5a. Thus in faith the Christian heareth: * That Christ's Flesh as
bread appeareth, * And as wine His Precious Blood: 5b. Though we feel
it not nor see it, * Living Faith that doth decree it * All defect of sense
makes good.

6a. Lo! beneath the species dual * (Signs not things), is hid a
jewel * Far beyond creation's reach! 6b. Though His Flesh as food a-
bideth, * And His Blood as drink — He hideth * Undivided under each.

7a. Whoso eateth It can never * Break the Body, rend or sever; *
Christ entire our hearts doth fill: 7b. Thousands eat the Bread of Heav-
en, * Yet as much to one is given: * Christ, though eaten, bideth still.

8a. Good and bad, they come to greet Him: * Unto life the former
eat Him, * And the latter unto death; 8b. These find death and those
find heaven; * See, from the same life-seed given, * How the harvest
differeth!

9a. When at last the Bread is broken, * Doubt not what the Lord
hath spoken: * In each part the same love-token, * The same Christ,
our hearts adore: 9b. For no power the Thing divideth^ — * 'Tis the sym-
bols He provideth, * While the Saviour still abideth * Undiminished as
before.

10a. Hail, angelic Bread of Heaven, * Now the pilgrim's hoping
leaven, * Yea, the Bread to children given * That to dogs must not be
thrown: 10b. In the figures contemplated, * 'Twas with Isaac immo-
lated, * By the Lamb 'twas antedated, * In the Manna it was known.

11a. O Good Shepherd, still confessing * Love, in spite of our trans-
gressing,^— * Here Thy blessed Food possessing, * Make us share Thine
every blessing * In the land of life and love: lib. Thou, whose power
hath all completed * And Thy Flesh as Food hath meted, * Make us,
at Thy table seated, * By Thy Saints, as friends be greeted, * In Thy
paradise above.^

OFFERTORY (Lev. 21 : 6)

1. Sacerdotes Domini incensum 1. The priests of the Lord offer

et panes offerunt Deo: 2. et ideo incense and loaves to God: 2. and
sancti erunt Deo suo, 3. et non pol- therefore they shall he holy to their
luent nomen ejus, alleluia. God, 3. and shall not defile his

name, alleluia.

1 Transl. by Msgr. Henry, in Britt's Hymns of the Breviary and Missal. (Benziger Bro-
thers 1922.)

Corpus Christi 23&

Through Holy Orders priests- — and they alone — have received the
power to offer the Sacrifice of the New Covenant. Consequently their
lives must be holy. But they act as the mediators of our Sacrifice, and
for this reason we, too, must be holy. Let bread and incense be the
symbols of our labor, our prayer, and our sacrificial spirit. If we rise
superior to selfishness, to worldly pleasure, to the world's way of think-
ing and acting, and go up to the altar of sacrifice with hearts vibrant
with pure love of God, like incense, which seeks only what is above and
is consumed for God, then are we a kingly priesthood, a holy nation.

The melody has been borrowed from Whitsunday (see p. 225), fits
fairly well to the text whose content is related to it, and has received a
rather good adaptation.

COMMUNION (I Cor. 11: 26, 27)

1. Quotiescumque manducahitis 1. As often as you shall eat of this

panem hunc, et calicem hibetis, bread and drink the chalice, you

mortem Domini annuntiabitis, do- shall show forth the death of the

nee veniat: 2. itaque quicumque Lord, until he come: 2. therefore

manducaverit panem, vel biberit whosoever shall eat this bread or

calicem Domini indigne, reus erit drink the chalice of the Lord un-

corporis et sanguinis Domini, alle- worthily, shall be guilty of the body

luia. and blood of the Lord, alleluia.

The Offertory took its melody from Whitsunday. It was natural,
then, to borrow the Communion melody from the same Mass. But there
is a great difference in content and spirit between the two. Here the ren-
dition should be inspired by the intensely serious text.

Taking only the text into consideration, this Communion is a direct
continuation of the Communion for Passion Sunday (p. 148). E\ery
Eucharistie celebration, every Holy Communion announces the death of
the Lord. Bread and wine are consecrated separately. By virtue of the
words of consecration, under the species of bread the Body of the Lord
is represented, as it were, bloodless and lifeless, just as the Blood of the
Lord is, so to say, separate in the chalice. But our faith tells us that
under both species Christ is totally present. Christ is present: how pure,
then, must be our heart! What a frightful sacrilege does he commit who
communicates unworthily! For him the bread of life and the chalice of
salvation open the door to destruction, to damnation.

After the impressive Domini we may not disregard the significant
indigne. After corporis or after erit a very slight pause is recommended.
The words donee veniat receive an independent melodic phrase. Therein
is voiced the guarantee that the Holy Eucharist, the holy Sacrifice, and

240 Sunday within the Octave of Corpus Christi

Holy Communion, with their infinite blessings will be preserved in the
Church and will continue until the end of time, until the Lord will come
for the final jugdment. Then shall we see Him as He is, face to face, and
with inefifable bliss we shall be allowed to immerse ourselves in His glory.

The alleluia at the end, which sounds rather strange after the words
of the text, is demanded, first of all, by the analogy with the Introit and
the Offertory. Secondly, it softens the seriousness of the words and gently
leads back to the fundamental idea of the entire feast, the mentis jubi-
Idtio, to the grateful exultation of the heart, which again is given full
play in the procession.

Musica Sacra, 52, 85 f.

* * * *

SUNDAY WITHIN THE OCTAVE OF CORPUS

CHRISTI

INTROIT (Ps. 17: 19, 20)

1. F actus est Dominus protector 1. The Lord hath become my pro-

meus, et eduxit me in latitudinem: lector: and hath brought me forth in-

2. salvum me fecit, quoniam vo- to a large place: 2. he saved me,

luit me. Ps. Diligam te Domine because he was well pleased

fortitudo mea: * Dominus firma- me. Fs. I will love thee, 0 Lord, my
mentum meum, et refugium meum, strength: * the Lord is my strong-
et liberator mens. hold, and my refuge, and my de-

liverer.

When the evening of his life was approaching, David looked back
upon all that the long years had brought him. There had been much
suffering; many had been inimical to him; bitter woe, the torture and
affliction of turbulent passions, had saddened his heart. But by far out-
weighing all this was the help which God had bestowed upon him, the
protection which had come upon him from on high. Hence he cries out
with a grateful heart: "The Lord has become my Protector! I will love
Thee, O Lord, Thou my strength!"

The saints in heaven voice the same sentiments: "The Lord hath
become my Protector, and hath brought me forth into a large place."
Their happiness now is boundless. They are forever freed from all that
is small and mean and imperfect, from all that formerly oppressed them,
from all that was defective. Now they enjoy perfect liberty. They have
been saved, and forever sing a canticle of grateful love.

Sunday within the Octave of Corpus Christi 241

We who still tarry upon earth surely have every reason to thank
God for having become our Protector, for having led us into the open,
into the perfect liberty of the children of God, and for having become
our Redeemer from a motive of pure love. Our thanks ought to be es-
pecially sincere when we think of the Eucharistie Saviour and of the
protection which His grace affords us against all the enemies of our soul,
against whatever oppresses it, weakens it or obscures its vision. How
entirely is He who was made flesh become our protector in the Holy
Eucharist! What love will He not show us in this Sacrament until the
very end! When we consider this, then surely the words Diligam te must
well up from our inmost hearts. I shall attempt to repay Thy infinite
love with my own poor love. Thou art my strength against all the vio-
lence of my unchecked nature. Thou art my refuge and my rescue, to
whom I may have recourse in my every need.

In the first phrase joy continually tends toward development, until
the motive over eduxit me attains its full measure with the words in
latitudinem. It is the song of one who suddenly finds himself free and in
broad daylight after a long imprisonment in a narrow, dark, and dank
dungeon. It ought not cause surprise that this same melody occurs in
the Introit Stdtuit. Here also it transfigures that loftiest of all themes:
the dignity of the priesthood. The ascent at protector mens bears some
relation to the Dominus prope of the Introit Gaudete (Third Sunday in
Advent): it is also somewhat reminiscent of the beginning of the In-
troit on the feast of St. Stephen.

The construction is apparent at first sight. Of the two phrases which
compose the piece, the first has its half cadence and its full cadence on
the doiminant (a), the second at times on the tonic of the mode (d). The
first phrase exhibits an arsis laid on a grand plan, while the second is a
clear thesis. Whereas / is banned from the first half of the first phrase,
the note h\? occurs four times; the second half is influenced by high c,
and h occurs thrice. At eduxit the two podatus are to be interpreted
broadly. The first phrase has a descending fourth (d-a) over eduxit; the
second phrase two descending fourths (g-d). The motive over me fecit
is heard again over voluit with a quiet closing formula which releases the
tension of the fourths.

GRADUAL (Ps. 119: 1, 2)

1. Ad Dominum, cum tribularer, 1. In my trouble I cried to the

clamavi, 2. et exaudivit me. jl 1. Lord, 2. and he heard me. jll 1. 0

Domine, libera animam meam a Lord, deliver my soul from wicked

labiis iniquis, 2. et a lingua dolosa. lips, 2. and a deceitful tongue.

242 Sunday within the Octave of Corpus Christi

This Gradual continues the thoughts of the Introit and is a joyfully-
animated song of thanksgiving for favors granted. A retrospective glance
at the help which the singer has received from God's bounty gives him
courage confidently to present his new petitions in the verse. Wicked
lips afflict him also, speaking what is unjust (Idhiis iniquis), accusing
him without cause, and calumniating him. And even if the Epistle for
the Sunday says: "Wonder not if the world hate you," this hate, never-
theless, presses heavily upon the soul. Others come with honeyed words,
but they are false (lingua dolosa); they wish to deceive and seduce. Lord,
save me from this peril!

The ordinary construction of Graduals, which assigns a plagal
mode to the corpus and the corresponding authentic mode to the verse,
is followed here in the first words Ad Dominum; but then the melody
immediately changes over to the authentic form and emphasizes it al-
most more than the verse. The verse thrice closes on the tonic; the
corpus never. The melody over dum trihuldrer has for its schema the
middle cadence of the simple psalm-tone of the fifth mode / a c-d c;
that over exaudivit, the close of the solemn tone of the lessons, c g a f,
which receives still greater amplification in the verse over lingua. In the
verse care must be taken that the bistropha and the two tristrophas be
interwoven into the whole in an elastic yet subdued manner. The sec-
onds over libera dnimam should have a soothing effect. We hear the same
sequence of tones over meam that appeared in the close of the corpus of
the Gradual. Ldhiis and the central group of notes over dolosa are re-
lated. The melismas over iniquis have been taken over from those over
clamdvi in the first part. In the ancient manuscripts this Gradual is as-
signed to the Friday after the second Sunday in Lent.

ALLELUIA VERSE (Ps. 7: 2)

1. Domine Deus meus, in te 1. 0 Lord my God, in thee have I

speravi; 2. salvum me fac ex omni- put my trust; 2. save me from all

bus persequentibus me, 3. et libera them that persecute me, 3. and de-

me. liver me.

The Alleluia with its jubilus has the form a b b-^. Alleluia is the ar-
sis; the jubilus is the thesis. Twice the descent is retarded and held to-
gether by a pressus. In the verse three great curves swing upward as
arses, to which a triple descending thesis corresponds.
Arsis Thesis

1. in te speravi 1. salvum me fac

2. ex omnibus 2. persequentibus me

3. et libera (me) 3. me

Sunday within the Octave of Corpus Christi 243

The closing neum of each arsis, ah c a a, returns in the closing neum
of the thesis a fifth lower as d efd d. The close of the third strophe (me)
is in a richer strain, thus swelling the melody of the thesis considerably.
It resembles to some extent the juhilus of alleluia. With this melodic
arrangement that of the text naturally does not agree, as is readily ap-
parent from its punctuation. A little difficulty is experienced in the be-
ginning of the verse Domine Deus mens. It possesses the character of a
thesis, although no arsis actually precedes it. One might say that it is a
free repetition of the thesis of the juhilus.

Domine Deus suggests quiet repose in the fatherly arms of God; in
te speravi, a most firm trust in Him who is the Author of earthly changes,
who directs and governs them all. However great the difficulties that
arise, this trust in God remains unshaken. Omnihus and lihera may per-
haps suggest the tribulations of the Psalmist who, pursued by his ene-
mies, places all his confidence in God alone. The rich melismas on the
last word, with their downward movement, speak of rest. This impres-
sion is strengthened when alleluia with its juhilus is repeated.

OFFERTORY (Ps. 6:5)

1. DomÄne convertere, et eripe 1. Turn to me, O Lord, and de-

animam meam: 2. salvum me fac liver my soul: 2. 0 save me for thy
propter misericordiam tuam. mercy's sake.

Marked by a special style and a childlike naivete of tone, this Offer-
tory stands alone among all the Offertories. Only the Offertory Do-
mine in auxilium of the sixteenth Sunday after Pentecost is related to
it, for it follows the same mode, the sixth, and confines itself almost to
the same range. Soon, however, it shows a tendency to form melismas,
while here syllabic chant predominates with a trustful adherence to the
tonic /. The stressed syllable tends to form a pes; twice indeed it be-
comes a torculus. The second phrase bears the same features as the
first, although the melody is somewhat more ornate. The closing neums
of the third last and the second last syllable are freqnuetly emphasized
in the sixth mode. It would almost appear as if the melody wished to
tone down the strong expression eripe me ("loose me from"). Salvum me
foe has an entirely different coloring from the petition in the Alleluia-
verse. The theme of the whole might be put thus in the words of Mori-
kes: "0 Lord, into thy hands let all things be placed^ — the beginning
and the end."

But when we consider the Gospel, how it was selfishness which kept
the invited guests from the "great banquet," then we shall pray earnest-
ly: O Lord, free me from blindness and delusion, from all dangers that

244 Sunday within the Octave of Corpus Christi

threaten my soul, and let me taste what Thou hast prepared for me in
Thy banquet.

The two additional verses which are given in the old manuscripts
for the Monday after Passion Sunday are similarly suggestive of rest.
Only the word Domine of the first verse is somewhat more ornate. In the
second part of the second verse the melody assumes the brighter color-
ing of the fifth tone and even becomes melismatic over the second last
word, ossa. The confident salvum me fac propter misericordiam tuam
brings the whole to a close.

COMMUNION (Ps. 12: 6)

1. Cantaho Domino, qui bona 1. / will sing to the Lord, who

tribuit mihi: 2. et psallam nomini giveth me good things: 2. and will
Domini altissimi. make melody to the name of the

Lord most high.

As is apparent from the closing note a, this piece was transposed a
fifth higher, since the final interval is a full step. Ordinarily the ending
would run thus: d e d. li the beginning of the piece is transposed a fifth
lower, then we have b 6 e\? c e\>. According to the old notation, this eb
could only be written a fifth higher, namely as bb. Besides acting as the
passing note, the eb also plays the role of tenor. On the Wednesday of
Ember Week in Lent the Offertory, which is composed in the fourth
mode, begins almost exactly like the melody over Cantdbo Domino. Why
was not the Communion composed in a similarly easy style? Evidently
because it had in view what was to follow. For from qui bona on, the sec-
ond tone, to which the entire piece is assigned, makes itself heard. In
the Introit for the fourth Sunday after Pentecost, which certainly be-
longs to the second mode, the passage qui bona tribuit mihi recurs over
the words: et salus mea, quem timebo. The combination of the fourth and
second mode — here effected by c (ordinarily /) — signifies an ascent over
against the tenor eb which preceded it. And only after the singer has
lived himself into the new mode does the b = e occur twice, although
each time as passing note, so that compared to the preceding 6b = eb, it
is not at all disturbing.

In the second part of the Communion, the melody shows a rise
seldom found in a plagal mode. The name of the Most High must be
glorified. He, although infinitely superior to all that is mundane, has
deigned in His love to look upon man. Yet more. He has associated him-
self most intimately with man; He has become one with him in Holy
Communion. He could not bestow a greater good (bona tribuit) than
Himself — all His holiness, all His merits, graces, and gifts above measure.

The Most Sacred Heart of Jesus 245

Were we able fully to comprehend this immense boon, how our hearts
would exult! In this manner we must conceive the joy expressed in the
melody. If the formula for this Sunday's Mass were not much older
than that for the feast of Corpus Christi, we should be tempted to say
that it is an echo of the jubilation with which we paid our homage to the
Eucharistie Lord as He moved through the streets several days ago.
And if we are depressed because we are unable to thank God as is His
due, then we possess the sweet consolation that the Saviour in our
breasts is our canticle of praise- — that He offers adequte praise to the
Father for us. Manuscript 121 of Einsiedeln endeavors to bring closer
to us the full meaning oiAltissimi, by giving the four torculus and the two
deepest notes — the second mode is wont to indulge in these plunges — a
broad marking.

* * * *

FEAST OF THE MOST SACRED HEART OF
JESUS
(Friday after the Octave of Corpus Christi)

In the seventeenth century, St. Margaret Mary Alacoque, of the
Order of the Visitation, strove earnestly to obtain the recognition and
institution of the present feast. Only in 1856 did Pius IX prescribe its
celebration for the universal Church. Pius XI gave it an octave and
raised it to the same rank as the feasts of Christmas and Ascension. It
was assigned a new Mass formula and Office by a decree of January 29,
1929. The present Mass formula has various points in common with the
Mass Miserehiiur hitherto prescribed for the universal Church and the
Mass Egredimini permitted to some localities. The thought which per-
vades today's feast is indicated by the Preface. In that beautiful compo-
sition the pierced Heart of our Lord is glorified as the sanctuary of di-
vine liberality, from which flow streams (torrentes) of mercy and grace.

INTROIT (Ps. 32: 11, 19)

1. Cogitationes cordis eius in 1. The thoughts of his heart to all

generatione et generationem; 2. ut generations; 2. to deliver their souls

eruat a morte animas eorum et alat from death and feed them in famine,

eos in fame. Ps. Exsultate justi in Ps. Rejoice in the Lord, O ye just, *

Domino, * rectos decet collaudatio. praise hecometh the upright.

The words of the Introit point to the significance of the Sacred Heart
of Jesus in the history not only of the world but of the individual soul.
That it might deliver humanity from eternal death, the Heart of Jesus

246 The Most Sacred Heart of Jesus

itself went into death. In order to appease the hunger of souls and bring
salvation to the world, this Heart offered its very flesh and blood, yes,
its own Self together with its overflowing truth and love. And this offer-
ing was not an isolated event of the remote past only, but continues
from generation to generation — in generatione et generationem. To be an
inspiration at all times and daily to bring divine consolation is the con-
stant yearning, desire, and will of the Sacred Heart. How manifold have
been its experiences with the souls of men and how varied the reactions
to its all-embracing love! There have always been and will always be
souls that requite love for love by making a complete oblation of self.
But there are also the great number of those who close their souls to the
influences of divine love, who are irresponsive to the many gifts of grace,
and who show themselves faithless even to the point of hatred. In spite
of all this, the Heart of Jesus has not become embittered; although
wounded, it continues to pour forth the riches of its merciful love. It
is ever faithful, prepared to give help in generatione et generationem. As
the Mother of God sings of the mercies of the Lord that continue from
generation to generation, so the Preface of today reminds us that the
fire of love in the Sacred Heart continues to burn without interruption.
The words et generationem should not be sung too hastily. As the
melody develops, our grateful love should likewise develop. This will be
effected the better, the more we realize how much the merciful love of
God means to us throughout our life. And just as this love embraces all
creation, we would desire all creation to rejoice and sing the praises of
the Sacred Heart. The fact that numberless holy souls in heaven and
on earth join in our song of jubilation is a matter of encouragement and
comfort to us. As members of this great family of God we employ the
words of Psalm 32 to express our sense of gratitude to divine Providence
that it has created all things, that it directs and knows all things, and
that it is ever present to help us in attaining our eternal salvation. The
initial verses of this same psalm describe the joy of the just, the conclud-
ing verses the rejoicing of our own soul, for "in His holy name we have
trusted."

Like the text, which is composed of different verses of the same
psalm, the melody is a combination of various parts of several Introits.
The melody over Cogitationes Cordis eius in generatiö-(ne) shows some
similarity to that over Domine refugium fadus es nobis a generati6-(ne)
at the beginning of the Introit for Tuesday after the first Sunday of
Lent. The fact that both excerpts end with the same word may have
brought about this association. The following et generationem repeats in
abbreviated form the melody over conventum fdcite in the Introit Lae-
tdre of the fourth Sunday of Lent.

The Most Sacred Heart of Jesus 247

The entire second phrase et eruat is the same as the third phrase of
the Introit Laetdre. In the original melody, exsuUetis depicts a feeling of
jubilation, the accented syllable of satiemini is effectively emphasized,
while the wide intervals of a fourth and fifth, together with the agree-
able melody which stresses the word accent of consolationis, give us a
premonition and experience of the fullness of divine consolation. On ac-
count of its abbreviated text, today's new Introit had also to contract
the original melody.

GRADUAL (Ps. 24: 8, 9)

1. Dulcls et rectus Dominus, 2. 1. The Lord is sweet and righteous:

propter hoc legem dabit delinquen- 2. therefore he will give a law to
tihus in via. '^\ 1. Dirigetmansuetos sinners in the way. ^. 1. He will
injudicio, 2. docebit mites vias suas. guide the mild in judgment: 2. he

will teach the meek his ways.

The Epistle depicts St. Paul on bended knee praying for us to the
Father of our Lord Jesus Christ that our inner man might be strength-
ened and that Christ might dwell in our heart, and that,- rooted and
founded in His love, we should comprehend the glory of our vocation
and the charity of Christ which surpasses all understanding. This divine
charity forms the theme of the present Gradual, the words of which
afford us great comfort. God is good to His creatures and faithful: He
is all-high, all-powerful, all-sublime, and awe-inspiring (Wolter, Psallite
sapienter, I, 330). The psalm excerpt which forms today's Gradual con-
tinues with the words: "All the ways of the Lord are mercy and truth."
Indeed, the Lord is merciful and faithful even to those who err in the
way' — or as others would translate: who fail against the law. And with-
out doubt, to this class we must also ascribe ourselves, the more so if we
carefully and truthfully scrutinize the actions of our own life. Notwith-
standing the complaint of our Saviour in the Reproaches of Good Fri-
day: "Thou art become to Me exceeding bitter," He remains dulcis,
sweet and gracious. Notwithstanding His complaint: "All have turned
from righteous ways," He remains faithful, and wills not the death of
the sinner. Out of the fullness of His love He gives us the Law, imparts
to us enlightenment and grace, affords us the means whereby we can be
absolved from the guilt of sin that we might again realize peace in our
souls, and gives us the strength to order our life in accord with His di-
vine will. If we but allow Him to lead and guide us, then surely will
His charity also permeate our being. His words will teach us how to be-
come meek and humble, and will instill into us a desire to share with
others His peace and contentment. On our part, let us promise this good

248 The Most Sacred Heart of Jesus

and faithful God henceforth to remain true to His ways, those straight
paths that lead to eternal life.

The melody over et rectus Dominus might be derived from the
Gradual Concupivit rex of the Mass Vultum tuum (the second for a Vir-
gin not a Martyr). The florid neums over et are found over the signifi-
cant rex in the latter Mass. It is more probable, however, that today's
melody is to be sought in the Gradual of the twenty-second Sunday
after Pentecost (q.v.). At any rate, the beginning over Dulcis (ecce) and
the entire melody from delinquentibus to the end is taken from that
Gradual.

A note of importance seems to permeate the entire melody. Dulcis
is sung somewhat slowly and subdued. The thoughts suggested at the
beginning of the text are well accommodated to the range of a fifth over
Dominus. The neums over mansuetos are also employed over (inquirent)-
tes on All Saints. The coda of judicio is identified as a wandering melis-
ma. The rich vocalization over suas occurs frequently as a termination
of Graduals in the first mode.

ALLELUIA (Matt. 11: 29)

1. Tollite jugum meum super vos 1. Take my yoke upon you 2. and

2. et discite a me, quia mitis sum learn of me, because I am meek

et humilis cor de: et invenietis re- and humble of heart: and you shall

quiem animabus vestris. find rest to your souls.

That burdened souls might find their rest in Him is the great desire
of our divine Saviour. To this end He pleads with us that we take His
yoke upon ourselves and follow His example. Consider the yoke which
He bore! Fully conscious of His divine dignity and majesty He humbled
Himself and descended to the lowest depths of humiliation and abjec-
tion; He became an object of bitterest scorn, underwent most cruel and
painful tortures, and climaxed His life by death upon the cross. But He
bore this yoke willingly. He embraced His cross lovingly and kissed it
tenderly. And now He pleads with us to bear our yoke submissively, to
lose our own will in His divine will, to subject our desires to His divine
dispensation, in fine, to accept our state of life with its concomitant
hardships as something which is to the advantage of our souls, as the
yoke appointed for us to bear. Then we shall find rest to our souls.

The Gradual melody is the only one of today's Mass which is not
modeled on some other melody. The sincerity and warmth which char-
acterize its first part make it immediately appealing. Alleluia with its
jubilus has the form a + b + c (c^). Thepressus on aa, gg and ee enliven

The Most Sacred Heart of Jesus 249*

the movement. Tollite jugum me-(um) is similar to -leluia with its ju-
bilus. The motive over Tollite recurs in a slightly modified form over
ju-(gum) and quia. The melody over (me)-um super vos and (qui)-a
mitis sum shows an effective rhyme which, with its tender melody re-
miniscent of the Improperia of Good Friday, fits the text well. Although
the melody at the conclusion is effective harmoniously, it all but isolate»
the humilis corde which follows and with which it is logically connected.
In view of this, the pause after mitis sum should be made very short.
The richly developed melody over et and its inception of a sixth after
the first pause recurs, with the exception of the first three notes, over
re-(quiem). The same might be referred to that over mors in the Alleluia
of the fourth Sunday after Easter. The melodic distinction given the
word requiem is well merited. Its somewhat austere character indicates
that this rest can be attained only at the price of constant vigilance.

The Tract for votive Masses after Septuagesima employs recognized
typical forms. Lengthy vocalizes are avoided except at the very end.
The descent of a fourth at the beginning of the third phrase happens
rarely at this place in Tracts. The text as such mirrors the underlying
thought of the feast: the goodness and love of the Sacred Heart.

The Alleluia for Paschal time is the same as that for All Saints (q.v.).

OFFERTORY (Ps. 68: 20)

1. Improperium exspectavit Cor 1. My heart hath expected re-

meum et miseriam, 2. et sustinui proach and misery, 2. and I looked
qui simul mecum contristaretur et for one that would grieve with me
non fuit; 3. consolantem me quae- hut there was none: 3. and for one
sivi et non invent. that would comfort me, and I

found none.

The Gospel led us to Golgotha and pictured to us our dead Saviour
"whom they have pierced," whose side they opened with a spear. Un-
concerned about strict chronology, the Offertory permits us to listen to
a last word which the dying Christ directs to mankind. Text and mel-
ody repeat the first three phrases of the Offertory of Palm Sunday
(q.v.) and give us an insight into that which the Heart of Jesus endured.

Even today Christ awaits — but in vain — many who come not.
They have neither time nor heart for Him; neither is there a grateful
remembrance of that love for which He underwent a most cruel death.
Let us, therefore, share His grief with Him the more intimately. By a
worthy rendition of this touching song we shall move the faithful as-
sembled in the house of God to correspond more fully to the expecta-
tions of the Sacred Heart.

250 The Most Sacred Heart of Jesus

OFFERTORY for Votive Masses during Paschal Time

(Ps. 37: 7, 9)

1. Holocaustum et pro peccato 1. Burnt offering and sin offering

nonpostulasti;tuncdixi:Eccevenio. thou didst not require: then I said,

2. In capite lihri scriptum est de Behold I come. 2. In the head of

me ut facer em voluntatem tuam: 3. the hook it is written of me that I

Deus meus, volui et legem tuam in should do thy will: 3. O my God, I

medio cordis mei, 4. alleluia. have desired it and thy law in the

midst of my heart, 4. alleluia.

The melody is taken from the Offertory for the Dedication of a
Church (q.v.). With a slight variation in its concluding text, this same
melody was sung in the Sacred Heart Mass Egredimini and from there
passed over to the text of the present Mass. In the original there are
three phrases differing from one another in text and sentiment. The
first phrase portrays a simple heart (in simplicitate cordis) joyfully bring-
ing sacrifice. Today's Offertory emphasizes the words pro peccdto. The
second phrase of the original further stresses the ''great joy," the en-
thusiastic spirit of sacrifice, which unites the people with its king, David.
Today, by happy chance, the gradation of melody takes place over the
words voluntatem tuam. The third phrase of the original brings a fervent
prayer: "Preserve this will of their heart." The closing syllable of vo-
luntatem ftoday: medio) once more vibrates with the joy of the first two
phrases. Domine Deus ftoday: cordis mei) reverts to the charming sim-
plicity of the first phrase.

In reality there is one main thought which permeates the entire
Offertory of the new feast. Mankind throughout the centuries has ex-
pended great care and energy in its sacrificial services. Yet after calm
reflection it must admit that all its offerings and sacrifices do not suffice,
and can neither efface nor compensate for the soul's guilt. But then a
voice from heaven resounds: Behold, I come and achieve an offering of
limitless efficacy, which entirely satisfies the demands of God, a sacrifice
which is all adoration, all atonement, all praise of God. Thy command,
O my God, is my will and the desire of my Sacred Heart. And these glad
tidings of the Heart of Jesus we realize again and again in the sacrifice
of the Mass. As an Offertory song these words then have a special im-
port and make a direct appeal to us. When Christ says: "I come," let
lis answer: "I will go with Thee." When He says volui — "I have desired"
— let us answer: "I also desire; may Thy law be deeply inscribed in my
heart and pervade my life, my very being. Enkindle in my heart the fire
-of Thy love for sacrifice."

The Most Sacred Heart of Jesus 251

COMMUNION (John 19: 34)

1. Unus militum lancea latus 1. One of the soldiers with a spear

eius aperuit, et continuo exivit opened his side, and immediately
sanguis et aqua. there came out hlood and water.

Like the Offertory, the Communion emphasizes the thought of
Christ's sufferings. The soldier who opened the side of Christ certainly
had no premonition of the blessings his action presaged. The Heart of
Jesus is opened and will remain open forevermore, "a rest for the pious
and a refuge of salvation for the penitent" (Preface). The water and
blood which flowed from His side are symbols of the graces bestowed in
Baptism and in the Holy Eucharist.

The melody resembles that of the feast of St. Boniface (June 5).
The adaptation of the text on that feast is more happy and more fluent.
The melody over militum lancea la- corresponds to that over sanguis et
a-(qua).

COMMUNION for Votive Masses during Paschal
Time (John 7: 37)

1. Si quis sitit, venial ad me et 1. If any man thirst, let him come

bibat, alleluia, alleluia. to me and drink, alleluia, alleluia.

There are many voices to entice the one who is seeking happiness,
but these voices, as a rule, lead only to disillusionment and bitter dis-
appointment. One alone has the right to call us who at the same time
has the power to satisfy our desires, and that one is our divine Saviour,
whose Sacred Heart embodies within itself the plenitude of all happi-
ness. He gives us a foretaste of this happiness in Holy Communion,
which in turn prepares us for an eternal happiness where in unending
joy and gratefulness we shall sing: Alleluia, alleluia.

The strikingly simple and concise melody models itself on the Com-
munion of Low Sunday, as comparison of the following will show: quis
sitis and Mitte . . . tuam, veniat ad me and et (cla)-maverunt, et hibit all.
all. and sed fidelis all. all. The word me is emphasized to good advantage
and has the effect of a leitmotif. It recalls to mind the goodness and love
with which the Sacred Heart received the doubting Thomas, who was
permitted to lay his hand in the side of the Saviour and feel the pulsing
of His Sacred Heart. Filled with faith and happiness let us exclaim with
him: "My Lord and my God!" Would that we might sing the praises of
the Sacred Heart with that feeling, yes, if possible with that perfection,
with which the Saviour sang the praises of God while on earth.

252 Third Sunday after Pentecost

THIRD SUNDAY AFTER PENTECOST
INTROIT (Ps. 24: 16, 18)

1. Respice in me, et miserere mei, 1. Look thou upon me and have

Domine: 2. quoniam unicus et mercy on me, 0 Lord: 2. for I am

pauper sum ego: 3. Vide humili- alone and poor. 3. See my abjection

tatem meam, et lahorem meum, 4. et and my labor. 4. and forgive me all

dimitte omnia peccata mea, Deus my sins, O my God. Ps. To thee, O

meus. Ps. Ad te Domine lezavi Lord, have I lifted up my soul: * in

animam meam: * Deus meus, in thee, my God, I put my trust; let

te confido, non erubescam. me not be put to shame.

**At that time the publicans and sinners drew near unto Jesus to
hear Him" — thus the Sunday's Gospel. And they heard from Him that
word for which their souls were famishing: the call of the Good Shepherd,
who opened His compassionate and forgiving heart even to them; who
would not rest till He had found the lost sheep and pressed it to His
bosom. Where such love is shown, confiding prayer again becomes easy.
Not by chance has the sixth mode been selected for the sweet melody of
today's Introit, which runs entirely in this vein. The text, it is true,
speaks of loneliness and distress of heart, of misery and suffering, and
requests forgiveness of all sins. But over all this the melody spreads a
warm, invigorating light, issuing from the very heart of the Good Shep-
herd. Assurance of being heard pervades all, in accordance with the psalm-
verse: "In Thee I trust, let me not be put to shame."

In the first half of the first phrase occur the petitions Respice and
the ascending miserere, both words supporting themselves on the tone
/. Besides placing special stress upon the petitions by the fifth above
the tonic, the second half of the phrase gives their reason: "I am alone
and poor." Unicus repeats the motive of Respice a fifth higher, and the
striking pauper sum ego stands in the same relation to it as the more
modest miserere to Respice. Its execution must do full justice to the me-
lodic ascent. It is very expressive of thanks. The concluding notes re-
mind us of the first announcement of Easter in the Introit Laetdre at
the words et conventum fdcite, and of salutdri tuo, with which we laud
God's blessedness on the first Sunday after Pentecost. As a smile among
tears, so is this melody to the text. At first the second phrase adheres to
c with some pertinacity, which is to be expressed by a crescendo, es-
pecially since the fourths c-g and g-c impel toward it. But the down-
ward movement, at first only alluded to, is carried into effect by aaa
(vide humi-), ggg (-litatem), ff (meam) as far as fddc, as a contrast to the
upward tendency of the first phrase. Et labor em, by its emphasis on the

Third Sunday after Pentecost 253

tonic, re-establishes the equilibrium. The third phrase has not only the
same range as the second, but also some melodic resemblance: witness
the descent to c, which is answered by a melodic reversal over peccdta.
Quiet now steals over the heart of the singer. Thirds are the greatest
intervals in the melody. From the Requiem Mass we are already ac-
quainted with the seconds that occur in the closing formula, which also
are sung in the above-mentioned Introit Laetdre with the words diligitis
earn.

GRADUAL (Ps. 54: 23, 17, 19)

1. J acta cogitatum tuum in Do- 1. Cast thy care upon the Lord,

mino: et ipse te enutriet. i^ 1. Dum and he will sustain thee, j^ 1. Whilst

clamarem ad Dominum, 2. exaudi- I cried to the Lord, 2. he heard my

Vit vocem meam ab Ms, qui appro- voice from them that draw near

pinquant mihi. unto me.

In the Epistle we heard St. Peter: ''Cast all your care upon Him
[the Lord], for He hath care of you" (1 Pet. 5: 7). Almost the same
words are employed in the corpus of the Gradual. Leading us away
from the affairs of our workaday existence, the melody rapidly brings
lis to Him "who shall sustain us." According to the indications of the
manuscripts, we are to interpret the four notes over Dö-(mino) broadly,
thus showing our unshakable trust in God. This first part, ending on the
dominant, bears all the markings of an arsis. From et ipse on, the thesis
begins with the employment of the conventional formulas. The first
part is terse — a bold, confident shaft (jacta) — while the second sings
with great freedom and evident joy of the divine Sustainer. In the verse,
Dum clamarem and exaudivit receive the same melodic treatment. The
Saviour's words come to mind here: "As thou hast believed, so be it
done to thee." From the Graduals for Laetare Sunday and for the feast
of St. Cecilia we are acquainted with the formula over Dominum. We
should prefer to hear it over exaudivit ("He has heard me"). Twice more
the closing formula of clamarem recurs over exaudivit and his, which
seems to mar the construction somewhat. The ornate groups of neums
over mihi beautifully enlarge upon the close of the corpus which we
heard over enutriet.

With but few changes, the melody of this Gradual has been bor-
rowed from that for the feast of St. John Damascene (March 27).

ALLELUIA VERSE ( Ps. 7: 12)

1. Deus judex Justus, fortis et 1. God is a just judge, strong and

patiens: 2. numquid irascitur per patient: 2. is he angry every dayl
singulos diesl

254 Third Sunday after Pentecost

To judge from the pauses indicated, allehiia with its juhilus has
five parts. A rising motive is repeated thrice almost in the same style,
but each time takes a different development and a different thesis. The
half pause between the third and fourth members produces a disturbing
effect, hampering the musical development of a melody which beyond
doubt belongs to the finest to be found in the Graduale. Care must be
taken not to rush too precipitately to the higher notes. Not without
reason does Codex 121 of Einsiedeln assign a broad construction to the
rising notes. Nevertheless, the rendition must not drag; the exultation
which pervades this chant must be clearly indicated. The two first mem-
bers of alleluia are characterized by the ascending fourth and fifth and
the descending fourth and by a strong emphasis on g, the tonic of the
mode. In the second part of the juhilus c predominates. A similar rela-
tion exists between the two parts of the following verse. In the first part
the two first members of alleluia are twice repeated over Deus judex
Justus and fortis et. In the latter case, the descending fourth is replaced
by a full note. But after the rising fifth, the development is different
each time, and the climax is reached over pdtiens. The fact that this word,
speaking of God's longanimity, receives prominence, tempers to some
extent the text of an Alleluia-verse which is unusually serious, and in-
troduces us to the consoling Gospel in which the Good Shepherd, full of
tenderness and long-suffering, pursues the erring lamb and does not rest
until He has placed it upon His loving shoulders. If then the verse, con-
tinuing in two closely corresponding parts, voices the question "Is he
angry everyday?" we must recall the beginning of the Epistle of the
Sunday: "Be you humbled, therefore, under the mighty hand of God;
that He may exalt you in the time of visitation." But the whole again
ends with alleluia.

While plainsong in general is very adept in joining individual
phrases and parts of phrases, we here find, less happily all the beginnings
of the melody on the tonic.

OFFERTORY (Ps. 9, 11-12, 13)

1. Sperent in te omnes, qui no- 1. Let them trust in thee who

verunt nomen tuum, Domine: 2. know thy name, 0 Lord: 2. for thou

quoniam non derelinquis quaerentes hast not forsaken them that seek

te'. 3. psallite Domino qui habitat in thee: 3. sing ye to the Lord, who

Sion: 4. quoniam non est ohlitus dwelleth in Sion: 4. for he hath not

orationem pauperum. forgotten the cry of the poor.

A fifth marks the range for the first three phrases: the first going
from g-d, the second and third from f-c. Hence, the song produces no

Third Sunday after Pentecost 255-

great tension. One is almost tempted to say that the lamb on the shoul-
ders of the Good Shepherd is singing its song of thanksgiving in a re-
served and unostentatious manner, and is urging us to trust in God. It
has understood what today's parable wishes to teach; it has come to
know the Saviour in His most winsome, most appealing character. The
triple repetition of the cheerful motive with which the piece began —
over nomen, quaerentes, and psallite — fits very well to the modest style
of the whole, although it is each time developed in a different manner.
Both neums over tuum are marked broadly in manuscript 121 of Ein-
siedeln and thus help to call particular attention to the word. Truly, he
who has come to the full knowledge of Christ can do nothing else than
place his entire trust in Him; for "God does not forsake those who trust
in Him." This conviction is shown especially by the restful seconds
which bring the second phrase to a close. Yea, He pursues His sheep
even though they do not seek Him, for He wishes to bring them peace
and happiness. The calm recurring seconds over habitat in Sion breathe
the same spirit of peaceful indwelling in God. Still the final / of this pas-
sage is a surprise, one to make us meditate, suggesting perhaps the
thought: Do you fully realize what this means: God dwells in Sion,
dwells in you, dwells in His Church, and is prepared to offer Himself
again for you in the holy Sacrifice of the Mass? The closing phrase has
a character all its own. Possessing a range of an octave, it effects a cer-
tain elaboration of the motive : over quoniam non, ed ga hah; over ohlitus,
fe fg aga; over orationem, cdf eg aa, and with this word seems to try to
picture how our prayer rises from the depth of misery directly to God.
Pduperum presents the same melody, though a fifth lower, with which
the first phrase over Domine closed.

COMMUNION (Luke 15: 10)

Dico vohis: gaudium est Angelis I say to you: There is joy hefore

Dei super uno peccatore paeni- the angels of God upon one sinner
tentiam agente. doing penance.

Significantly this piece begins immediately on the dominant of the
mode. For Jesus is speaking, and He speaks a new word, a word full of
consolation. Who would think that when a sinner does penance there is
an increase in the joy of the angels in heaven, and that this joy is re-
newed as often as a human heart is brought to look into itself and is
converted (super uno)l

The first part is developed about the note c; the second, about a.

Codex 121 of Einsiedeln has a broad virga and "t" over est, where-
by a ritardando is indicated, with evident good effect.

256 Fourth Sunday after Pentecost

At St. Gall's, at Einsiedeln, and in some other places this Sunday's
Communion was sung on the twenty-second Sunday after Pentecost,
today's being replaced by Ego clamavi. This Communion, however, fits
well to the Gospel of the Sunday, and at the same time acts as an ad-
monition to those faithful to whom the liturgy of the Mass has not yet
brought reconciliation with God and true interior peace.

If the text is clearly enunciated, it will be seen how well the simple
melody brings the word gdudium into prominence.

There is joy in heaven, and peace in the heart of him who has again
found his way back to God. The Father of the prodigal son crowns His
kindness by preparing the most sumptuous banquet for him in Holy
Communion.

FOURTH SUNDAY AFTER PENTECOST

INTROIT (Ps. 26: 1, 2)

1. Dominus illuminatio mea et 1. The Lord is my light and my

salus mea, quem timehol 2. Do- salvation: whom shall I f earl 2. The

minus defensor vitae meae, a quo Lord is the protector of my life: of

trepidahol 3. qui tribulant me in- whom shall I he afraidl 3. My

imici mei, ipsi infirmati sunt, et enemies that trouble me have them-

ceciderunt. Ps. Si consistant ad- selves been weakened and have

versum me castra: * non timebit cor fallen. Ps. If armies in camp should

meum. stand together against me, * my

heart shall not fear.

Few selections in the entire Graduale have a melody so easily un-
derstood, so lucid in structure, and of such regular development as this
Introit. From the introduction to the Preface we are familiar with the
opening motive, which recurs throughout the entire piece. It begins the
second phrase a fourth higher, and comes to a climax in the third, being
heard also over a quo. Thus all three phrases are closely knit together.
No lengthy pause must be made between them; they must follow one
another in a lively, almost impetuous sequence, as an expression of most
complete confidence in victory. Perhaps the early Christians sang this
song in the dim, wan atmosphere of the catacombs. But the hearts of
those who sang were full of light: for Christ had enlightened them. And
even if their brothers and sisters above were led to martyrdom and
thrown before the beasts, inwardly they possessed the courage and
strength of lions: the victorious Lion of the tribe of Juda had imparted
His fearlessness to them. Self-possessed and unafraid they entered the

Fourth Sunday after Pentecost 257

lists against the entire world, contemning death. For they were invested
with the firm conviction that all these attacks would be repelled by the
Church and that all their enemies, though they now appeared as mighty
hosts strongly encamped (castra), would finally collapse utterly.

The manner in which the interrogative pronouns quern and a quo
are melodically treated has given rise to special theoretical explanations
on the handling of interrogatives in chant compositions (Gregoriusblatt
1920, 33 fif.; N. Sch. 248 j. It remains to be seen if this procedure is jus-
tified. Let it be noted, however, that the entire passage et salus mea,
quern timebo with its descending close agrees with qui bona tribuit mihi
in the Communion for the second Sunday after Pentecost, in which
there is not the slightest idea of interrogation. Similar instances, for ex-
ample the Offertory Inveni David servum meum, could be quoted. On
the other hand, the interrogation in trepidabo produces a very marked
effect. It sounds like a challenge. And though foes may summon (tribu-
lant) all their forces, naught shall come of it. How telling is the compari-
son between the stormy tribulant and the simple infirmdti sunt with its
delicate irony! All the mighty fortresses which are built to hinder the
advance of the Church tumble down like houses of cards. One is re-
minded of the verse, "The arrows of children are their wounds" (Ps. 63:
8). Ceciderunt closely resembles the closing word timebo of the first phrase.
Over illumindtio and infirmdti the principal as well as the preceding
secondary accent is short, whereas the following syllable always has
more than one note. In the first nocturne of this Sunday's Office the
story of David and Goliath is related. There stood the giant, a terror to
the entire Jewish host (si consistant adver sum me castra). David alone
showed no fear. The Lord was his light and his salvation! And how miser-
ably did that colossus come to grief (infirmdti sunt)l A stone from Da-
vid's sling sufficed to lay him low.

GRADUAL (Ps. 78:9, 10)

1. Propitius esto, Domine, pecca- 1. Forgive us our sins, 0 Lord, 2.

tis nostris: 2. nequando dicant lest the gentiles should at any time

gentes: 3. Ubi est Deus eorumi say: 3. Where is their Godl ^ 1.

^ 1. Adjuva nos, Deus salutaris Help us, O God our Saviour: 2.

noster 2. et propter honorem nom- and for the honor of thy name, 0

inis tui, Domine, libera nos. Lord, deliver us.

The fourth, fifth, and sixth Sundays after Pentecost have the three
Graduals in the same succession as they occur in the liturgy of the
Ember Saturdays of Lent and of September. At St. Gall's and other
places these seem to have been sung also at a second Mass on the Ember

258 Fourth Sunday after Pentecost

Saturday in Whitsunweek. They belong to the fifth mode. The structure
of the text is brought out plastically by the melody. A quieter, simpler
style distinguishes the corpus of the Gradual from the more extended and
ornate melismas of the verse. Compare the close of the first phrase of
the verse (nosier) in the Gradual for the fourth Sunday. The verses of
all three Graduals have the same closing melisma; in fact, from cca ha
they are identical and only minor variations occur before that. This
melisma forms the final phrase in about thirty Graduals. Abstracting
from this, however, one must admire the richness of form, the variety,
and the harmony of these verses. As we know, the ornate melismas after
the first words of the verse are a part of its peculiar style. Here a wonder-
ful opportunity is offered the singer to put forth the best that is in him.
Perhaps here as in many other places, it should be made clear that the
praise of God occupies the first place, and that the petitions fin the pres-
ent selection exdudi and libera) ought to be subordinated to this primary
purpose. Rendered in this spirit they will, humanly speaking, produce
the greatest impression on the heart of God. Melodically, the thoughts
salutdris noster (God is our Saviour), Deus virtutum (God of hosts), and
Domine refugium (the Lord is our refuge) stand forth in the most bril-
liant light.

All three Graduals have the first word accented on the second syll-
able. It is clearly shown here that the accent tends to raise the tone.
The first syllable is a minor third lower in every case. And the bistropha
or the pes quassus over the accented syllable would seem to indicate
that the accent, besides prolonging the tone, also strengthens it.

This Gradual (Propitius esto) is also sung on the Thursday after
the second Sunday in Lent. Its theme is as follows: Because of our sins
we deserved punishment and castigation. But should this misfortune
fall upon us who are Thy people, O Lord, then the Gentiles would say
that our God is too weak and powerless to shield us. Thus, 0 Lord, it
is in reality a question of Thy honor. In order to preserve and increase
this, do Thou save us, O Lord!

Domine forms the answer to esto. We meet a textual turn in the
Offertory for the fourth Sunday after Pentecost similar to that here
employed with ne quando dicant gentes. Naturally, we should expect a
tenser conclusion here. The question uhi est Deus eorum? seems to have
been worked into the rising movements of uhi and eorum. It is almost
impossible to decide whether the composer intended this as such, or
whether an established formula was employed. Then one might still ask
why such a suitable formula was selected. Adjuva nos harks back to the
beginning of the verse in the Gradual for St. Stephen. Toward the end
of that verse one finds the same recitation on the tonic, which is here

Fourth Sunday after Pentecost 259

replaced by the extended recitation on the dominant note at the be-
ginning of the verse. Special care must be taken that these passages be
not hurried. Correctly woven into the rhythmic whole, they produce a
marvelous effect. But there is nothing restful about the inner melismas
over honorem. Here the singer must let himself be captivated by the
urge of the melody, which only begins to subside gradually after the
tor cuius, in which high f occurs, is reached. Many will not be able to
sing these florid groups in one breath; they may make a short pause
after the fifth note over (ho)-n6-(rem).

GRADUAL for the fifth Sunday after Pentecost
(Ps. 83:10, 9)

1. Protector noster aspice Deus: 1. Behold, 0 God our protector:

2. et respice super servos tuos. f 1. 2. and look on thy servants, jl 1.

Domine Deus virtutum, 2. exaudi 0 Lord God of hosts, 2. give ear to

preces servorum tuorum. the prayers of thy servants.

This same Gradual is sung on the Monday after the first Sunday
in Lent. Between noster and aspice an interval of a sixth occurs — a
somewhat rare occurrence in chant. This song is a longing prayer for a
gracious glance from the eye of God. The corpus as well as the verse
have the same closing melisma. One may find the entire passage exaudi
preces servorum tuorum, text and melody, repeated in the Gradual for
the feast of the Dedication of a Church. According to Codex 121 of
Einsiedeln, all eight notes over preces are to be sung broadly.

GRADUAL for the sixth Sunday after Pentecost
(Ps. 89: 13, 1)

1. Converter e, Domine, aliquan- 1. Return, 0 Lord, a little; 2. and
tulum, 2. et deprecare super servos he entreated in favor of thy servants,
tuos. Ill 1. Domine, refugium f actus jll 1. Lord, thou hast been our
es nobis, 2. a generatione et pro- refuge, 2. from generation to genera-
genie, tion.

Only the syllable -ver- comes into prominence in the Gradual Con-
vertere Domine; in other respects it resembles the beginning of the Grad-
ual for the fourth Sunday after Pentecost in the two opening words.
The text prays very modestly: "Lord, turn to us, only a little." Never-
theless, the heart of the singer beats somewhat faster, and he sings
these words with marked impressiveness. Super servos tuos has been taken
from the preceding Gradual. On the feast of SS. Peter and Paul, Trinity

260 Fourth Sunday after Pentecost

Sunday, Immaculate Conception, and on certain other days, the entire
verse is sung. The burden of today's prayer is this: May God, who
throughout the centuries has seen all human beings in their trials and
their pain, in their struggles and their suffering, and who has through-
out assisted them with His grace — how many in heaven could tell of
His powerful help! — be merciful also to us. His servants!

ALLELUIA VERSE (Ps. 9: 5, 10)

1. Deus, qui sedes super thronum 1. 0 God, who sittest upon the

et judicas aequitatem: 2. esto re- throne and judgest justice: 2. he
fugium pauperum in trihulatione. thou the refuge of the poor in tribu-
lation.

Few alleluiatic verses are so well developed as this one. It belongs
to the very essence of such verses to distribute the ornate melismatic
groups over several words. The rich melody over thronum seems to fit
the text extremely well, and portrays fittingly the grandeur of the throne
of the Almighty. But borrowing of a Gradual melody is very apparent
here: viz., from a verse on the Sunday within the Octave of Epiphany
over pacem, and from the verse in the Mass Salus autem, of the Com-
mune Sanctorum, over the word corde. The most ancient manuscripts
do not give this Alleluia for the Sunday's Mass, and it cannot be traced
back farther than the eleventh century. One point, however, deserves
attention. The verse ends on the petition: esto refugium ("be Thou the
refuge of the poor in tribulation"). But here there is no cry for deliver-
ance: it is exclusively a glorification of God's might. This is the prayer
of petition in its noblest form, in accordance with the Psalmist's behest:
"Cast thy care upon the Lord and He will sustain thee."

The motive after the first pause in the jubilus of alleluia repeats
itself a step lower after the second pause. A second time we have the
formula h c a g, with a conclusion much resembling a coda. Alleluia is
therefore composed in the form a b b^. The verse begins with the first
motive of alleluia.

The text can be linked up with the preceding Epistle. In the pas-
sage read, the Apostle speaks of the deep longing that runs through all
creation, the yearning for the liberty and the glory of the children of
God. This same longing and sighing pervades the Alleluia- verse with its
petition.

OFFERTORY (Ps. 12: 4, 5)

1. Illumina oculos meos, ne un- 1. Enlighten my eyes, that I may
quam ohdormiam in morte: 2. ne- never sleep in death: 2. lest at any

Fourth Sunday after Pentecost 261

quando dicat inimicus mens: prae- time my enemy say: I have pre-
valui adversus eum. vailed against Mm.

Two voices are discernible in this Offertory. One proceeds from a
soul in the most dire need, abandoned and persecuted. Its prayer is as
fervent and as urgent as can be. In the oldest manuscripts this Offertory
is assigned to the Saturday before the third Sunday in Lent, and still is
sung on that day. The Gospel story of the Prodigal Son immediately
precedes it. Hence the prayer seems to proceed from the soul of the
Prodigal. Surely moments and hours were not lacking when in his soul
almost all the light was extinguished, when the frightful darkness of the
night, of despondency even, seemed to overpower him, when the mocking
laugh of his enemies already rang in his ears: Praevdlui — "Now I have
Thee in my power. All attempt to escape is futile." But far greater than
the strength of the enemy was the omnipotence of divine love and of
divine mercy. We may also think of those who are walking along the
edge of a precipice and who, when the light fails, are dashed down the
abyss, beyond all hope of salvation; of those who, caught in a complex-
ity of temptations, do not even realize their situation. For them also
the Offertory prays: Illumina. A note of melancholy is apparent in the
melody. The singer is conscious of his condition and it makes his prayer
ever more intense. Over me-(os) we have g b\? a h\} g f, proceeding from
} a g äf d over Illü-(mina); ne-(qudndo) is then added as a development.
Now the melody recedes as if exhausted. But with morte it receives new
strength. Their very importance causes the three c's to be heard. Hence
the rhythmic markings of the manuscripts emphasize the fact that the
four succeeding low tones be given a broad rendition. This makes the
passage very effective. After the / over me-(os) breath may be taken,
and a new start made with the second /.

The second phrase corresponds almost exactly to the first, with
the twofold division and subdivision of each member into two parts,
and has practically the same length. Because of its position at the be-
ginning of the second phrase, the second nequdndo is given a different
melodic treatment. The repetition of the same motive over dicat and
inimicus, with the heavy accent upon the high c, is evidence of the
keen feeling in the heart of the singer. As often as the following phrase
begins with d, a concluding / as over me-(us), is the general rule.

But now, in the stirring praevdlui, a second voice is heard. It comes
as a call from hell, as a precipitate dash upon the victim, a horrible en-
twining in the tentacles of some frightful monster, a descent into the
eternal night of death. Here a g c c c g e over morte in the first phrase
occurs a fifth lower with the notes d e c f fff d e c. A cold shiver seizes us.
Here drama and realism are portrayed as one would scarcely expect to

262 Fourth Sunday after Pentecost

find them in plainsong. The passage might have a paralyzing effect upon
us, did we not know that in the holy Sacrifice God's power will be made
evident, mightily overcoming every enemy of our soul, and bringing us
every needed grace. Of this divine strength we become partakers in
Holy Communion. In the ancient manuscripts this Offertory has the
following conclusion: "Look upon me and hear me. I will praise the
Lord, who has bestowed His graces (bona) upon me." Praevdlui seems
in a certain sense an allusion to yesterday's Magnificat antiphon: Prae-
vdluit David in Philistaeum. David conquered the Philistine with a sling
and a pebble from the brook. But it also mentions the source of this
heroic strength when it adds: in nomine Dömine—"'m the name of the
Lord."

The similarity of ending over morte and eum is still more accentu-
ated in the old manuscripts, since morte as well as eum has a virga and
a climacus (not a pes suhhipunctis in the one case). Over eum in the
motive of meus, (e g f ef f f) expands into g a g d f f f.

A better effect will be obtained if the piece is sung a tone higher.

COMMUNION (Ps. 17: 3)

1. Dominus firmamentum meum, 1. The Lord is my firmament, and

et refugium meum, et liberator my refuge and my deliverer: 2. my
meus: 2. Deus meus adjutor meus. God is my helper.

In content, in feeling, and in mode this Communion is much like
the Introit. We now go out into everyday life with its demands upon our
energies — but God is our strength. Soon we are again threatened by
dangers and death-dealing arrows — but God is our refuge. If we meet
opposition interiorly — God is our helper. Just now He has again become
my God (Deus meus) in Holy Communion. Hence I have every reason

to be consoled. "May the Sacrament we have received_ be our sure

defense" (Postcommunion).

Quickening and strengthening confidence pervades this melody.
This is already indicated by beginning on the dominant of the mode;
also by the accumulation of the pressus of which there are no fewer than
seven in this short chant. One is immediately struck by the similar end-
ings over firmamentum meum and adjutor meus. But the opening f ef df c
over Dominus, repeated a third higher over Deus as a g a f e d, has a
very definite appeal. To this must be added the sober descent and con-
fident ascent over refugium meum and the victorious, well-prepared
accent over liberator. It is a song of joyful and unshakable confidence
in God. In this manner the Apostles might have sung after the miracu-
lous catch of fishes related in today's Gospel. Fired with this confidence,

Fifth Sunday after Pentecost 263

they went forth into the wide world to become fishers of men. At the
behest of God they cast out their nets, and never was their work done
in vain. Their trust in God was without any if or hut; it was solid as
granite and bright as the rays of the sun (Oberhammer, III, 106).

FIFTH SUNDAY AFTER PENTECOST

INTROIT (Ps. 26:7, 9)

1 . Exaudi, Domine, vocem meam, 1 . Hear, O Lord, my voice with

qua clamavi ad te: 2. adjutor mens which I have cried to thee: 2. he

esto, ne derelinquas me, neque de- thou my helper, forsake me not, nor

spicias me, Deus salutaris mens. do thou despise me, 0 God, my

jll. Dominus illuminatio mea et Saviour. S^. The Lord is my light,

salus mea: * quem timehol and my salvation, * whom shall I

fearl

The first half of the first phrase moves in the lower range in simple
seconds. Are they the expression of reverence before the majesty of God?
Or of that quiet confidence which places all things in the hands of God?
Has the singer, perhaps, quieted down only after much difficulty, so
that now, during his singing of the Introit, the consciousness of his bur-
den breaks upon him afresh? In the second half of the first phrase a
certain agitation makes itself felt, not so much in the descending as in
the ascending thirds. The annotated manuscripts, moreover, indicate a
broad rendition of all the neums over qua clamavi, as an expression of
grievous affliction. Still the singer rouses himself to confidence in the
almost brilliant adjutor meus esto with its swelling melody. No such
marked pause, however, may be made after derelinquas me as after esto.
Both petitions— "forsake me not, do not despise me" — must follow
rapidly one upon another. The similar passages qua clamavi: ga fd dc e,
despicias : ga fd eg e and salutaris meus : ga fg eg f, however simple they
may be, still contribute their share toward making the whole more
unified. Deus is the direct antithesis to esto. The closing formtion ad te
bends the otherwise expected clivis (compare the close of the antiphon
with meus) to a podatus, an almost universal rule in chants of the fourth
mode when the following phrase begins with low d, or still lower. P.
Wagner (III, 338) thinks indeed that in the treatment of the respon-
sories of the Office, the ascending fourth (or fifth) after d is the deter-
mining factor. The present case, as well as the passages non credis, quia,
and est, alleluia, in the Communion Tanto tempore (May 1), perhaps

264 Fifth Sunday after Pentecost

permit of a broader interpretation of the above rule. In any case, Wag-
ner is correct when he observes {ihid. 339): "The highly developed sense
of the early singers for an effective and natural concatenation of melodic
members reveals itself to the observer again and again" (cf. above p. 6).

The somewhat oppressive mood of the antiphon is lightened in the
psalm-verse with its high dominant and cheerful h. By this contrast the
otherwise typical melody adds a hearty "Yea" and "Amen" to the text:
"The Lord is my light and my salvation."

How often has not that call for assistance, Exdudi, winged its way
to heaven! And each time it had its own ring, and each heart gave it
its own coloring, and every sorrow gave it its own accent of confidence
— from the radiant hopefulness of a child's prayer to the poignant cry
of some stricken heart tempted to despair. Choral chant has some
knowledge of this also. It would be worth our while to compare, for in-
stance, the treatment of exdudi in the Introits of the Tuesday after the
fourth Sunday in Lent and of the Sunday after Ascension, in the Gradual
for the feast of the Dedication of a Church, and in the Ofifertory of the
Monday after the third Sunday in Lent.

For the Gradual see p. 259.

ALLELUIA VERSE (Ps. 20: 2)

1. Domine, in virtute tua laeta- 1. In thy strength, 0 Lord, the

bitur rex; 2, et super salutare king shall joy; 2. and in thy salva-
tuum exsultahit vehementer. tion he shall rejoice exceedingly.

The upward tendency of Alleluia is cut short by the lively down-
ward movement in the first member of the juhilus, only to appear so
much the more firmly and powerfully afterwards. It is not difficult to
distinguish the two motives, which gracefully complement each other:
the first tends upward, while the second is characterized by its vigor-
ous accent.

I gf

h\? a g

hb g f

da f

f 9 f

bb g f

f d c

1 '

d f e

9 f d

c c d

7c a

f ci 9

c c c

a g a

99 f

In the verse, Domine borrows its melody from Alleluia, and virtute
from the third member of the juhilus. Here the verse reaches its zenith;
it mentions the source of all life, of all purposeful activity, the fountain
inexhaustible. In the first phrase the singer is filled with jubilation. But
that which follows is quite unexpected. What does the ornate melody
over the insignificant et mean? One is tempted to assume that we here

Fifth Sunday after Pentecost 265-

have a borrowed melody, one which originally belonged to some other
text. In contrast, how fitting is the use of this melody on the feast of
the Most Pure Heart of the Blessed Virgin Mary (in some places this
feast is celebrated on the third Sunday after Pentecost) with the words:
Magnificat dnima mea Dominuml This is the first phrase; in the second
we meet the rich melody in question over the words et exsultdvit. If we
now sing these rich melismas with the word et, we treat them as a juhi-
lus of alleluia and sing them in the spirit of exsultahit which occurs only
later on. In any case, the presentation must be very flexible. We must
consider this phrase as the expression of unbounded joy, which does not
confine itself to individual words. After the climacus c h\? a g, high c is
to be sung straight on both times without any lengthening. In this
manner, exsultahit vehementer gives expression to the melody of alleluia
and the juhilus with genuine rejoicing.

OFFERTORY (Ps. 15: 7, 8)

1. Benedicam Dominum, qui tri- 1. / will hless the Lord, who hath

huit mihi intellectum: 2. provide- given me understanding: 2. / set

ham Deum in conspectu meo sem.- God always in my sight: 3. for he is

per: 3. quoniam a dextris est mihi, at my right hand, that I he not

ne commovear. moved.

This melody offers an opportunity to observe how plainsong can
give new and refreshing variations to the same motive. Beginning with
/, it works its way up to c, now in steps of seconds, now in major and
minor thirds, and then descends again to the lower tones. Compare qui
mihi — intellectum — provideham Deum — in conspectu meo — quoniam — a
dextris. One might readily consider these passages a simplification of the
solemn motive with which the piece began — 6 ddahagaccca. Let
there be no pause after henedicam, but add Dominum immediately with
a good crescendo. In general, the whole chant demands a lively presen-
tation. It is a song of thanksgiving for divine illumination, for insight
into God's economy, into the mysterious workings of grace in the in-
dividual soul and in the entire Church. It is the joyful song of the pil-
grim who sings of his resting place in God; also a song of victory over
the enemies of the soul. For since God is with us and in us, how can
there be any faltering? Hence we hear nothing of fear or pusillanimity^
of sadness or weariness. Our God-given insight into the riddle of life
helps us in every emergency; it makes us joyful, courageous, and con-
fident of salvation. In this spirit the melody must be sung. Neverthe-
less, certain portions should be given broader interpretation in accord-
ance with the rhythmic indications in the manuscripts; (intel)-lectumy

266 Fifth Sunday after Pentecost

meo, and semper are to be treated in this manner. Strange to say, the
clivis is marked with "c" (celeriter — rapidlyj, where a slower rendition
might be expected. Mihi again descends to low c, thus giving the third
phrase the same range as the first. It is characteristic of the authentic
modes that the tonic of the mode, which was used twice in the beginning
of the piece and avoided after that, here makes its reappearance. The
melisma over commovear gains in perspective when we compare the
group g f g f f d of the first member with the group g f g f f e in the sec-
ond, the former being a preparation for the latter. A crescendo is to
mark g f a g f. The following group, with its sober seconds, then leads
over to the conclusion.

Some singers may find it necessary to pause for breath after con-
spectu meo, as well as after dextris est.

COMMUNION (Ps. 26:4)

1. Unam petii a Domino, hanc 1. One thing I have asked of the

requiram: 2. ut inhdbitem in domo Lord, this will I seek after; 2. that
Domini omnibus diehus vitae meae. I may dwell in the house of the

Lord all the days of my life.

If we wish to sing this text according to its sense, we shall empha-
size the very first word Unam, and still more hanc. Later, when we
come to speak of the goal whither all our longing tends, special stress
should be laid upon inhdhitem and domo Domini. The melody develops
exactly according to these ideas. It seems only natural that the piece
should begin on the dominant. At hanc the suppliant soul with all its
ardor cries out: "O Lord, grant me but this one thing!" Then peace en-
velopes it, reflected by seconds progressing in the style of a sequence
according to the common formula. The next phrase, beginning a fourth
higher, introduces a new arsis based on the dominant. The thesis takes
its inception with omnibus; vitae meae forms a grateful response to re-
quiram. The melody over Domino is repeated note for note in the In-
troit for the third Sunday in Lent over the word Dominum. Similarly,
the adjacent half-phrase in both songs has the same movement; in our
present selection, however, the highest note receives particular em-
phasis.

Even if we are obliged to leave the church after the Sacrifice today,
we nevertheless remain in union with our Lord and with the Church.
For the Master of the house has united Himself to us in Holy Com-
munion. And just this one desire is His, that He may dwell in our hearts
by His grace and remain there all the days of our lives, until He may ofifer

Sixth Sunday after Pentecost 267

us a lodging in His heavenly mansion where we shall no longer lack any-
thing, where our every longing will be perfectly satisfied in the con-
templation and possession of Himself.

SIXTH SUNDAY AFTER PENTECOST

INTROIT (Ps. 27: 8, 9)

1. Dominus, fortitudo plebis 1. The Lord is the strength of his

suae, et protector salutarium Chris- people, and the protector of the sal-

ti sui est: 2. salvum fac populum vation of his Anointed: 2. save, O

tuum, Domine, et benedic hereditati Lord, thy people, and bless thine

tuae, et rege eos usque in saeculum. inheritance, and rule them forever

Ps. Ad te Domine, clamabo, Deus Ps. Unto thee will I cry, O Lord: *

meus, ne sileas a me: * ne quando my God, be not thou silent to me,

taceas a me, et assimilabor descen- lest if thou be silent to me, I become

dentibus in lacum. like them that go down into the pit.

Today's Introit begins in the same manner as that for the fourth
Sunday after Pentecost, and is also cast in the same mode. The usque
in saeculum and the preceding (fortitü)-do plebis suae resemble ceciderunt
in the former. The present Introit, however, differs greatly in develop-
ment and in sentiment. The range of the former is from low a to high
b\?; here it is only from a to g, beyond which it never goes. In the former
there is but slight difference between the individual phrases, and one
experiences something almost oppressive— as if the psalm-verse, which
speaks of those who descend into the pit, supplied the leading thoughts
for the singer. Still, the fourths over (fortitudo) plebis and especially
over (pro)-tector, as well as the vigorous accents of suae and rege follow-
ing the frequent stress of the dominant and the return to the tonic, pro-
duce an enlivening effect. They energetically express the thought: We
are Thine inheritance, 0 Lord, and Thou shalt be our King!

Two musical phrases are distinguishable, each beginning with low
a and again returning to it after having reached their peak with g. Here,
even more than elsewhere, we must be guided by the text, which is most
thought-provoking. In the first part David praises the Lord as the
"strength of His people" and gratefully recalls the armor of divine
grace which has been bestowed upon him, the Lord's anointed. It is
also a prayer of thanksgiving. The second part is a prayer of petition.
But the king's petition is not for himself; it is for his people, or, more
correctly, for the people of God. He says to Him: It is Thy people. Thy

268 Sixth Sunday after Pentecost

inheritance, which Thou hast acquired for Thyself. Thus he adduces
for it the most forcible recommendation possible. These words of the
second part have been incorporated in the Te Deum, except that in
saeculum is replaced by in aeternum.

This Introit exhorts us who are assembled for divine service not
to think only of ourselves and our own personal needs, but rather of the
entire people of God, of that corporate whole to which we are privileged
to belong. The solemn annointings at Baptism and Confirmation im-
press upon us that we are the elect of God, the inheritance which He so
dearly purchased at the cost of His own blood. With these sentiments
we should sing salvum fac, henedic, and rege.

The petition made in the psalm receives wonderful fulfillment in
the Gospel. It is impossible for the Saviour to remain mute; He cannot
look upon the sufferings of His people in silence. Hence He speaks the
consoling word: "I have compassion on the multitude." He does not wish
His people to resemble those shepherdless ones who go to destruction.
He is ever providing the necessary nourishment, lest they faint on the
way. The blessing which He pronounces over the seven loaves and the
few fishes really refers to His people. He leads them to rich pastures, so
rich that even after the four thousand are sated, an abundance still re-
mains. All that was there enacted materially is only a symbol of His
wondrously compassionate work in the Holy Eucharist.

This Introit is to be sung at least a fourth higher and in a lively
tempo.

For the GRADUAL see p.. 259.

ALLELUIA VERSE (Ps. 30: 2, 3)

1. In te, Domine, speravi, non 1. In thee, 0 Lord, have I hoped, ^

confundar in aeternum: 2. in tua let me never he confounded: 2. de-

justitia libera me, et eripe me: 3. liver me in thy justice, and release

inclina ad me aurem tuam, 4. ac- me; 3. how down thine ear to me,

cetera, ut eripias me. 4. make haste to deliver me.

The beginning of this verse forms the conclusion of the Te Deum;
the second part of the Introit of the Sunday made a similar allusion. It
is not necessary to add that the Te Deum was not the source of these
texts, but that they were taken from the twenty-seventh and thirtieth
psalms. Melodically, the words in te Domine sperdvi and inclina ad me
aurem tuam are the same; similarly non confundar and eripe me, as well
as accele-(ra) and eripi-(as). At aeternum there is an evident caesura,
fully justified by the text, for a new part begins with in tua. Then fol-
low petitions based on the invincible confidence in God which was ex-

Sixtk Sunday after Pentecost 269

pressed in the first part. Hence the pause after eripe me must not be too
prolonged; the melody does not come to a final close here any more than
at confundar, which has the same melody and which is followed merely
by a short pause. The same is true with the large pause after tuam,
which corresponds to the half pause after sperdvi above. Both parts
have the range of a sixth. By way of exception, the verse bears no as-
sonant relation to alleluia or its juhilus. At confundar and the correspond-
ing eripe, the six notes before the quilisma are to be sung broadly ac-
cording to Codex 339 of St. Gall's; this adds weight to the words. In
alleluia also, the first three notes over -le- and -M- are to be sung broad-
ly. Thus a modest ascent is achieved — ascensiones pudicae, as the an-
clients put it. Of special beauty is the simple yet harmonious recitation
over libera me; centrally placed, it produces the effect of a mellow solo
in the midst of a powerful male chorus. This also tends to make the
petition so much the more striking.

For the OFFERTORY see Sexagesima Sunday, p. 104.

Today we might combine this prayer with the Epistle of the Sunday.
The Apostle tells us that Christ was awakened from the dead through
the glory of the Father; he exhorts us for this reason to walk in newness
of life and to look upon ourselves as men who, having died to sin, now
lead a life unto God. We are indeed conscious of human frailty, but we
know also the desire of the Christian soul to live in newness of life and
for God alone. Hence the soul prays in deep humility, but at the same
time with full confidence in the might of divine grace: "Make perfect
my steps in Thy paths." The Offertory is a processional: we carry our
"gifts" to the altar; this procession is the symbol of the course of our
lives.

In the holy sacrifice of the Mass the Lord continually repeats the
marvel of His benevolence and renews the sacrifice of the cross. He be-
stows graces upon us, that through our concelebration of the Mass, we
may effectually die to sin and grow together with Christ both in the like-
ness of His death and also in the likeness of His resurrection, as today's
Epistle has it.

COMMUNION (Ps. 26:6)

1. Circuibo, et immolabo in ta- 1. / will go round, and offer up

bernaculo ejus hostiam jubilationis: in his tabernacle a sacrifice of jubi-

2. cantabo, et psalmum dicam Do- lation: 2. / will sing, and recite a

mino. psalm to the Lord.

The beginning is filled with awe, and reminds one of a reverential
bow. But then the singer is impelled to pour forth his jubilation vigor-

270 Seventh Sunday after Pentecost

ously and enthusiastically. The holy Sacrifice with all the honor it gives
the Holy Trinity, with all the blessings it brings to souls, especially in
the sacrificial Banquet, has become a sacrifice of jubilation. Filled with
these sentiments, the pious soul prepares to return again to the life that
awaits its outside. There also it will not forget to sing and play before
the Lord and to remain a cheerful giver.

The melody rises in a well-graduated ascent, its highest points
forming the ascending line c d e f g a. How clearly hostiam juhilationis,
with its recitative on high g and the graceful conclusion, rings out! The
second phrase returns more to the spirit of the introductory Circuibo.
But in dicam the song reasserts the tone of jubilation. Both phrases
close with the same formula. The reason for the transposition to c is
found in the beginning of this chant. Usually we should have f c e\?. We
are here dealing with a formula which begins many pieces, especially
antiphons of the eighth mode. Thus the Magnificat antiphon for the first
Vespers of Christmas, set a whole step lower, begins as follows:

f c e\, f g f f g f f

Cum ortus fuerit

The same holds true of the beginning of the Introit for the first Sun-
day of Advent.

SEVENTH SUNDAY AFTER PENTECOST

In comparison with the preceding Sundays, a change of feeling now
becomes apparent in the antiphonal chants. The former were serious,
entreating, imploring confidence. Now they have a tone of joyous exul-
tation.

INTROIT (Ps. 46:2)

1. Omnes gentes, plaudite mani- 1. 0 clap your hands, all ye na-

hus: 2. jubilate Deo in voce juMla- tions: 2. shout unto God with the

tionis. Ps. Quoniam Dominus ex- voice of joy. Fs. For the Lord is most

celsus, terrihilis: * Rex magnus high, he is terrible: * he is a great

super omnem terram. King over all the earth.

The exhortation to be glad, to shout aloud for sheer joy, could
hardly be expressed better than in these words of the Introit. It is the
triumphal shout of Easter. The melody, however, is not correspondingly
impetuous, and can scarcely be regarded as a substantial enhancement
of the text. The sixth mode, the one used here, is mild and limpid in
character. Besides, in its plagal form, it usually has very narrow limits

Seventh Sunday after Pentecost 271

in the higher range, and here is especially unpretentious. Only once
does it go beyond the dominant a in the brilliant jubilate which, with its
a ch c a, can be regarded as a development oi f a g a f over Omnes and
(exsultati)-ö-(nis) . Otherwise it rests upon the tonic /, and several times
descends below it. Only well-known formulas come into play. Omnes
resembles Stetit Angelus in the Offertory of September 29, while plaudite
mdnibus employs the common formula of the Alleluia-verse of Christ-
mastide: for example, that of the third Christmas Mass over adordte
Dominum or that of the Introit of the preceding Sunday over plehis
suae. Just as an actual clapping of hands, in accordance with the sum-
mons of the Introit, is entirely out of question in the Roman liturgy, sa
also is the indicated joyfulness quite restrained and subdued.

Perhaps the psalm-verse, which speaks of the "terrible" God, re-
moved some of the rich coloring of the antiphon. Although this text
must be considered a most serious one, and although it may be true that
reverence and joy constitute the extremes of all true church music, still
it must be noted here that all the other verses of the psalm in question
glorify the Lord with great jubilation as the victorious God who pro-
cured our salvation.

Each Sunday recalls to mind the marvelous victory which Christ
achieved on Easter morning, that victory which He also intends should
be ours. That is the reason why the most high God makes such intimate
contact with us in the Eucharistie mysteries; that accounts for the fact
that almighty God treats with our souls so respectfully: that He may
fully realize the marvels of His resurrection and glorification in us.

Manuscripts 339 of St. Gall's and 121 of Einsiedeln omit this psalm-
verse and substitute the fourth verse, Suhjecit — "He hath made the
peoples subject to us."

GRADUAL (Ps. 33: 12, 6)

1. Venite, filii, audite me: 2. 1. Come, children, hearken to

timorem Domini docebo vos. ^. 1. me: 2. / will teach you the fear of

Accedite ad cum et illuminamini: the Lord. Si. 1. Come ye to him and

2. et fades vestrae non confunden- he enlightened; 2. and your faces

tur. shall not he confounded.

Only when the soul is permeated with the fear of God will the ex-
hortation of the Apostle in today's Epistle: "Now yield your members
to serve justice, unto sanctification" (Rom. 6: 21), and that of the Lord
in the Gospel, to do the will of the Father who is in heaven and to bring
forth good fruits, be carried into effect. This lesson is brought home
forcibly in the corpus of the Gradual. The first phrase shows an upward

"272 Seventh Sunday after Pentecost

tendency, while the second is, in the main, a descent of thirds: b c a f

g a f — e f d — e c, and exhibits a very common coda. The verse calls at-
tention to our good fortune in being permitted to approach so closely to
our God in the mysterium of the Mass, to be enlightened by Him, to
be radiant with His own blessedness. This melody is explained on June
29. Let us only note here how spiritedly the important words eum and
illumindmini sing out their full joy in the topmost notes of the melody.

ALLELUIA VERSE (Ps. 46: 2)

1. Omnes gentes plaudite mani- 1. 0 clap your hands all ye na-

hus: 2. jubilate Deo in voce exulta- tions: 2. shout unto God with the
tionis. voice of joy.

It seems as if this ornate melody were a recompense for the re-
straint of the Introit which has the same text as above. Alleluia rises in
thirds: d-f, f-a, a-c. In the jubilus, the second member resembles the
first, except that the beginning and the end differ somewhat. The verse
is composed of two parts. In the first 6 b dominates, while the second is
marked by a sharply contrasted b. But the difference is still more sharply
defined. Omnes already introduces the third mode, which changes only
with mdnibus, from whence a sort of modulation leads back to the first
mode. The second part, on the contrary, stresses the Doric b. After the

pause, b\? c g g f over gen-(tes) is raised to c d b\? b\} g. We may divide the
melismas over plaudite into three groups, of which the second is a repe-
tition of the first. Why is the quilisma with a missing in the first group?
Perhaps because the third g-b}? has a brighter effect than the simple
seconds, and hence is better suited to the first summons, plaudite. The
melody tends upward, but only to sink back again. After the second /
aca, it emphasizes c and then soars above it. These notes must come
prominently to the fore. A clear understanding of the melodic grada-
tion is evidenced in manuscript 121 of Einsiedeln by the broad torculus
and the pressus in this passage. This is the summit that was to be at-
tained: it must therefore be brought out strongly. We hear the entire
strain repeated in the jubilus of the Alleluia Amdvit eum Dominus in
the Mass for Doctors of the Church. There also the melody, after a
twofold repetition, soars above its highest note. The Alleluia, however,
is assigned to the fourth mode. As for the strange manipulation of the
text, which assigns rich melismas to the unaccented syllable (pldu)-di-(te),
it must be remarked that the popular Latin, no doubt, exerted its in-
fluence by stressing the unaccented "i" in the second last syllable; other
examples of this may be found in the words spiritum, vidimus, and
muneribus.

Seventh Sunday after Pentecost 273

We are introduced into another world by the second phrase with
its stressed tritone, marked with a lengthened virga and a pressus with
"t" (teuere, to holdj in manuscript 121 of Einsiedeln. Keen mountain
air seems to surround us; these impetuous seconds are surcharged with
energy. It is like the exultation of men who are returning from the
bitter strife and perils of war. Only when the melody again enters upon
the juhilus does the tender &b reappear. Into this verse put all your joy
at having been redeemed. (K.L.)

OFFERTORY (Dan. 3: 40)

1. Sicut in holocaustis arietum et 1. As in holocausts of rams and

taurorum, et sicut in millibus ag- bullocks, and as in thousands of fat

norum pinguium: 2. sic fiat sacri- lambs; 2. so let our sacrifice be

ficium nostrum in conspectu tuo made in thy sight this day, that it

hodie, ut placeat tibi, 3. quia non may please thee: 3. for there is no

est confusio confidentibus in te, confusion to them that trust in

Domine. thee, O Lord.

It is surprisingly rare to find Offertory and Secret mutually com-
plementary in thought. Today, however, the relation between the two
is unmistakable. Hence we shall immediately subjoin the Secret: "O
God, who hast ratified the divers victims of the Law by one perfect sac-
rifice: receive the oblation of thy devoted servants, and hallow it with
a blessing like to that wherewith thou didst hallow the gifts of Abel; so
that what each has offered in honor of thy majesty may avail for the
salvation of all." Both Offertory and Secret speak of the numerous sac-
rifices that were offered in the Old Dispensation. But it was precisely
this variety in the kinds of sacrifice that showed the insufficiency of all
of them. It was only the unique Eucharistie Sacrifice that finally brought
perfection and infinite value. Sacrifice is offered to the glory of the di-
vine majesty; hence the Offertory prays that God may find it accept-
able. It should, however, also redound to our salvation, and for this
reason the Offertory continues: "There is no confusion to them that
trust in Thee." Naturally, our motives in offering the oblation must be
pure. It does not suffice to cry "Lord, Lord" (cf. the Gospel); we must
immolate our will to the will of God, and formulate this resolve in our-
selves: "May all things be done that God wills and in the manner in which
He wills them" {Katholische Kirchenzeitung, Salzburg, 1927, p. 265).

This Offertory is an excerpt from the prayer which Azarias and
the three youths recited in the fiery furnace. The entire prayer, as well
as the subjoined canticle Benedicite, which is said in Lauds for Sunday,
does not occur in the original Hebrew text. St. Jerome incorporated it

274 Seventh Sunday after Pentecost

into the Vulgate from Theodotion's Greek translation. The young men
in the furnace are no longer able to offer sacrifice in order to obtain God's
mercy. Hence they tender Him their contrite and humble spirit. Their
inner disposition is to compensate for the sacrificial gifts. May their
sacrifice today be in the sight of God as if they came with rams and
bullocks, with thousands of fat lambs, that He may find pleasure in it.
{Theologie und Glaube, 19, 409 ff.)

The melody is pleasingly restful, preferring intervals of seconds.
In the passages Sicut in holocdusto arietum and (si)-cut in millihus agno-
rum pinguium there are seconds only; they also predominate in the last
phrase. Considering the length of the piece, the range is quite limited.
Some resemblance to this Offertory, both in melody and text, is seen in
that of the eighteenth Sunday after Pentecost, but the latter has a more
extended range. Both avoid high /, which is wont to occur rather fre-
quently in the fifth mode, especially in Graduals. It is heard in only one
Offertory- — in that of the fifteenth Sunday after Pentecost in the expres-
sive passage: "With expectation have I waited for the Lord." This
Sunday's Offertory is more subdued. It almost appears as if the words
which immediately precede our present text occupied the mind of the
composer: *'In a contrite and humbe spirit may we be accepted" — ^words
which find their full significance in the Offertory prayers of the Mass.
They also help us here in evoking the proper disposition for singing this
piece.

To the first Sicut with f g a hi? a, the second with a c d e d corre-
sponds. Similarly, the cadence at the end of pinguium is repeated over
sacrificium nostrum. The only large interval occurs in this second phrase,
over in con-(spectu). The text reminds us of that passage in the Canon
of the Mass which the priest, bowing profoundly, recites after the con-
secration: "We most humbly beseech Thee, almighty God, command
these things to be carried up by the hands of Thy holy Angel to Thine
altar on high, in the sight of Thy divine majesty (in conspectu divinae
majestdtis tuae)." This petition is effectively answered. The Eucharistie
Sacrifice ascends straight to heaven, and God finds pleasure in it. For
it is the Sacrifice of His well-beloved Son. God graciously accepted the
oblation of the three youths in the fiery furnace. But what of our sac-
rifice? Sic fiat sacrificium nostrum — "May our sacrifice be offered up in

Thy sight that it may be pleasing to Thee." We mean not only the

sacrifice which we offer up as singers at divine service; but the sacrifice
of our lives as well. We must be permeated with the spirit of Christ.
How earnestly therefore, we should voice this petition! Once it has been
granted, we can have no more reason to be afraid, for the Lord provides
for us. We hear the same motive repeated over pldceat tibi, non est con-

Eighth Sunday after Pentecost 275

füsio, confidentihus in te, and somewhat simplified over Domine, the first
and last time with a slight variation. Its ascending line symbolizes the
confident lifting of our eyes to God. The smooth descent c a g a f seems
to indicate a trustful placing of ourselves in the fatherly arms of God.

With the similar closing neums over (DomiJ-ne with their repetition,
compare the twofold f a c a in the Alleluia-verse over plaudite and the
passage over (sanctificdvi) te in the Gradual for the feast of St. John the
Baptist. Everything breathes of rest and blissful happiness.

COMMUNION (Ps. 30:3)

1. Inclina aurem tuam, 2. ac- 1. Bow down thine ear, 2. make

celera, ut eripias me. haste to deliver me.

Special impressiveness is added to this simple prayer by the five-
fold repetition of one single motive, although with a little variation each
time. The passage g a g f g a a over tuam becomes g a gf eff over (acce)-
lera, g a g f g over eru-(as), over (eru)-as first simply g a g f, and then
g a g f e. "Bow down Thine ear!" For now Thou art so near to me in
Holy Communion. Better than myself dost Thou know all my diffi-
culties and perplexities, all the dark recesses of my spirit, all that remains
since the time when I was yet "a servant of sin" (Epistle). Thou know-
est all the perils that threaten me from false prophets and their wiles,
all that hampers me in fulfilling the will of Thy Father faithfully and per-
severingly (Gospel). I know that without Thy grace I can do nothing;
hence I cry now, as in the prayer Deus in adjutorium which begins the
canonical hours: accelera — make haste to deliver me from all evil and
confirm me in all good.

EIGHTH SUNDAY AFTER PENTECOST
INTROIT

See February 2 for the explanation. Proceeding from a jubilant
heart, this Introit is a song of thanksgiving for God's merciful love, for
all the graces which have become our portion in the midst of His Temple,
in the Church which He founded. Who can comprehend the greatness
of His gifts; who can number them, from that first great grace of divine
adoption in Baptism, to that of the present day, when the Eucharistie
Saviour again imlores mercy upon us and makes us more intimate par-
takers of the sonship of God! Never shall we be able to praise and glorify
this great God as He deserves.

Revue gr., 9, 136 ff.

276 Eighth Sunday after Pentecost

GRADUAL (Ps. 30:3)

1. Esto mihi in Deum protec- 1. Be thou unto me a God, a pro-

torem, et in locum refugii, 2. ut tector, and a place of refuge, 2. to

salvum me facias. Si. 1. Deus, in save me. S^. 1. In thee, 0 God, have

te speravi, Domine, 2. non con- I hoped, O Lord, 2. let me nsver he

fundar in aeternum. confounded.

The corpus of the Gradual shows the influence of melismatic punc-
tuation in the grouping of the neums at the end of (protect6)-rem, in
(refügi)-i with its similar conclusion, and in the close of (fdci)-as. The
melodic development is gradual but constant. While the first half has a
range of a ninth, the second phrase has a range of a tenth. A refreshing
effect is produced by the very unusual turns over refügi-(i) and salvum
me. The authentic form is strongly emphasized in the verse; it never de-
scends lower than the tonic and vigorously stresses the dominant c. Al-
though, melodically speaking, Domine opens the second phrase of the
psalm-verse, it is actually drawn to the first phrase by the incomplete
cadence.

We are not allowed to live according to the flesh. That is the ad-
monition of the Epistle. Consequently, we stand in need of the pro-
tecting grace of God and a place of refuge in His holy Church in all our
difficulties, be they interior or exterior. We are to place all our trust in
God, that firm trust which emanates from the spirit of sonship of which
the Epistle speaks.

ALLELUIA VERSE (Ps. 47: 2)

1. Magnus Dominus, et lauda- 1. Great is the Lord, and exceed-

hilis valde, 2. in civitate Dei nostri ingly to he praised; 2. in the city of
in monte sancto ejus. our God, in his holy mountain.

These selfsame words have been heard in the psalm-verse of the
Introit. Here, however, nimis is replaced by valde, and the word nostri
is entirely omitted. Several translations of the Scriptures prior to St.
Jerome give this valde. In the Introit the contemplation of God's essence
raised the singer to brilliant heights (secundum nomen tuum). In the
same manner the melody here seems to attempt to soar to the regions
where God dwells (magnus Dominus). It is seldom that the seventh mode
essays such flights. We should expect a close on the tonic with valde. In-
stead of this, however, the motive which opened the verse, and which
has already been heard over Alleluia, is repeated. In the second phrase
of the verse we have a repetition of the juhilus of Alleluia. Since no con-

Eighth Sunday after Pentecost 277

elusion follows as yet, Dei has a quite simple melody. Strikingly simple
is also the syllabic chant over in monte sancto ejus.

Alleluia with its juhilus has the form a h b c c^; the climacus resu-
pinus forms the nucleus of the entire group. Care must be taken that
the third member be more than a mere echo of the second, although the
conclusion cd cdd is to be sung more quietly both times, somewhat in
echo fashion. In place of the minor third of c, the member c^ has a fifth,
which brings the whole to a vigorous close. The h members predominate
over the c members. Some resemblance to this Alleluia is found in that
of the fourth Sunday after Pentecost. The most ancient manuscripts do
not contain this melody.

OFFERTORY (Ps. 17: 28, 32)

1. Populum humilem salvum fa- 1. Thou wilt save the humble

cies, Domine, 2. et oculos super- people, O Lord, 2. and wilt bring

borum humiliabis: 3. quoniam quis down the eyes of the proud; 3. for

Deus praeter te, Dominel who is God, but thou, O Lordi

The rite of oblation at Mass, with its washing of the hands, is well
calculated to arouse and deepen true humility in us. Only "in the spirit
of humility and with a contrite heart" is it possible for us and our sac-
rifice to find acceptance with the Lord. Humility alone leads to prudence,
to the prudence which, according to today's Gospel, is characteristic of
the children of light. Thus endowed, however, we may confidently hope
for deliverance.

From the very beginning of the first phrase the melody grows with
each succeeding word, until it soars to jubilant heights with salvum
fades. Thus we sang in the Introit Laetdre at the words conventum fdcite
(cf. p. 137) as well as in the Introit In virtute tua at the word laetabitur,
in both of which joy is the predominant note. Here, too, we are filled
with hope while awaiting salvation from the Lord. A similar cadence
with a fifth over Domine occurs twice in the Offertory Gloriabuntur of
June 26, which is sung several times in the course of the year.

Superborum in the second phrase accords somewhat with humilem
of the first. As salvum fades is brought into prominence there, so humi-
liabis is stressed here. A feeling of victory, confidently overcoming all
obstacles, pervades the melody. This impression is strengthened by the
rhythmic four-note groups.

The third phrase, imitating the first two, begins on /. The half
tone over Deus tends to accentuate the question, "Who is God?" Prae-

278 Eighth Sunday after Pentecost

ter te, which follows, makes the phrase sound like the battle cry immor-
talized in the name of St. Michael. "Thou alone art the Lord:" that is
the meaning of the passage over Domine. The motive over the first eight
notes expands in the following group and again contracts in the two neums
immediately preceding -mine. We find the same concluding cadence in
the Mass for Rogation Days. In this phrase, the somewhat harsh end-
ing of the first Domine of the Offertory is tempered by the intercalated
a. Just as the Lord is terrible in His dealings with the proud, so is He
gracious and affable to the humble of heart.

Humilem may, however, also be understood of an entire people
that is lowly. Thus the Offertory points out the antithesis between the
Epistle and the Gospel: the spiritual man versus the earthly man; the
children of light versus the children of this world. ( K. L.) What is more
elevating than the divine grace which is infused in those who participate
in the sacrificial Mystery!

COMMUNION (Ps. 33: 9)

1. Gustate et videte, quoniam 1. Taste and see that the Lord is

suavis est Dominus: 2. beatus vir, sweet: 2. blessed is the man that
qui sperat in eo. hopeth in him.

This antiphon is composed of only two phrases. Both have a marked
rise in their first parts, with a pause on a. Their second parts are identical:
sperat in eo corresponds with (su)-dvis est Dominus. Still each little
phrase has its peculiarities. The first is a lively exhortation; hence the
rise to high c and the tarrying there with a double tristropha, a neum
rarely used in the Communion. The exhortation is to resound and to
penetrate into all hearts. The second phrase is a simple assertion and
never rises above a.

This is the oldest Communion song to be found with its psalm in all
the liturgies, oriental as well as occidental. How heartfelt it must have
sounded, coming from the lips of those who were returning from the
altar with the sweetest and most savory of foods in their hearts! What
longing it must have awakened in the souls of the faithful who were
still on the way to receive Holy Communion!

Whoever loves the Eucharistie Saviour will not only gladly and
frequently carry this exhortation into effect, but will also, as far as he is
able, make others partakers of this same great joy.

The Greek equivalent for sweet is chrestos; hence the play on words:
Taste and see that it is Christ fChrestos) the Lord. {K. L.)

Ninth Sunday after Pentecost 279

NINTH SUNDAY AFTER PENTECOST

INTROIT (Ps. 53:6-7)

1. Ecce Deus adjuvat me, et Do- 1. Behold, God is my helper, and

minus susceptor est animae meae : the Lord is the protector of my soul

2. averte mala inimicis meis, S. in 2. turn hack the evils upon mine

veritate tua disperde illos, protec- enemies, 3. and cut them off in thy

tor meus, Domine. Ps. Deus, in truth, O Lord my protector. Ps. Save

nomine tuo salvum me fac: * et in me, 0 God, by thy name, * and de-

virtute tua libera me. liver me in thy strength.

Man's weakness is great, and many a sad experience confirms the
fact that the admonition in today's Epistle, "He that thinketh himself
to stand, let him take heed lest he fall," is not sufficiently taken to heart.
Clever and tireless enemies seek out the weaknesses of man in order to
destroy the life of his soul. Nevertheless, we must not grow despondent,
iorEcce Deus adjuvat me — "God is my helper;" such is the clear and as-
suring theme of the Introit. Ecce, with its start on the dominant {N.
Sch., 51) of the mode, wishes to say: "Do not consider only the enemies
of your soul, but look especially, or better, look exclusively to God. He
will be your Helper." Therefore it is not without reason that the c over
Deus is doubled and that Dominus in the second part of the first phrase
is made emphatic by a fourth. If the Lord God is for us, who can op-
pose us? The manuscripts indicate with special markings that the notes
over Deus adjuvat me should be given a broad interpretation. Hence
they rightly demand a solemn rendering of this passage to express our
deeply-rooted confidence. From the second phrase on (averte), a certain
restlessness and apprehension becomes evident. Perhaps it is holy anger,
calling for vengeance. Some relationship exists between the passages
over mala and illos. But the manuscripts wish above all to emphasize
the pressus over illos. Hence the bistropha with its succeeding clivis are
here marked with "c" {celeriter, rapidly); or "st" (statim, immediately)
is interpolated between the bistropha and the clivis, while in the corre-
sponding passage over mala "t" (tenere, to prolong j and an episema are
placed over the clivis. The called-for acceleration of the neums which
precede the pressus makes the latter stand forth prominently. Only with
protector meus, which may be considered a prolongation of est animae
meae, does the confidential feeling of the beginning return to the text
and still more to the melody, which closes with well-known and pleas-
ing seconds.

More than once the effect of the melody is heightened by what we
may call the "resolved" F-major scale.

280 Ninth Sunday after Pentecost

Here the question is very pertinent: Is a Christian allowed to pray
thus: averte mala — "turn back the evils upon mine enemies"? If these
words proceeded from personal hate, then indeed they would be un-
christian, and such a prayer would never find acceptance in the sight
of God. Even David refrained from laying hands upon Saul when the
latter was powerless before him. But since God desires the salvation of
our souls, the enemies of our souls are also the enemies of God, and for
that reason are we allowed to beseech God to render His and our ene-
mies harmless, and to let their efforts toward the destruction of souls
and the kingdom of God come to naught. Has not God promised His help
to those who approach Him with confidence? Hence we call upon His
fidelity (veritate), on His goodness and love, and leave it entirely to His
wisdom how He will supply us with help against our foes. If, however,
there is question of the interior enemies of salvation, such as self-deceit,
concupiscence, lust, and so forth, then these words lose their question-
able character, and we are allowed to use them in serious and earnest
prayer. When we have to deal with exterior dangers, such as ignorance
and seduction, then we give averte mala its proper meaning by adding
et in veritate tua disperde illos: subdue Thy foes through Thy truth, gain
them over to Thy truth, destroy ignorance, save the wayward! (Reck,
II, 150.)

GRADUAL (Ps. 8:2)

1. Domine Dominus noster, 2. 1.0 Lord, our Lord, 2. how ad-

quam admirabile est nomen tuum mirable is thy name in the whole

in universa terral 111. Quoniam ele- earthl jll. For thy magnificence is

vata est magnificentia tua super elevated above the heavens.
caelos.

One can hardly claim that this melody exhibits any melodic turns
which do not occur also in other similar selections; nevertheless, melody
and text are happily matched. Deep reverence marks the beginning of
the piece. With quam admirabile joy is added to amazement. Reverence
seems to predominate with nomen tuum, while in universa terra again
has a lighter coloring. Thus there is a delightful interplay of reverence
and joy. In the Gradual for the feast of the Dedication of a Church we
sing the same melody over inaestimdbile as we do here over admirabile.
Est disturbs the even flow somewhat. We find that the melody over
(univer)-sa also closes the corpus of the Gradual in the third Christmas
Mass. In both cases the same idea is enunciated. The verse begins with
an evident ascent, which one might wish to see extended in magnificen-
tia to high /, as in other Graduals, but the short text does not allow it

Ninth Sunday after Pentecost 281

here. The composer was more intent on giving a satisfactory conclusion.
With (elevdta) est- — most likely the composer did not intend tone-paint-
ing-— the torculus is to be taken broadly in every instance. A unified im-
pression is given the whole by the repetition of the form ä g g c c over
admirdbile, in universa, elevata, and magnificen-(tia) .

ALLELUIA VERSE (Ps. 58, 2)

1. Eripe me de inimicis meis, 1. Deliver me from mine enemies,

Deus mens: 2. et ah insurgentibus 0 my God: 2. and defend me from
in me libera me. them that rise up againt me.

There was mention of the enemies of the soul in the Introit. Here
we meet them again, and they induce the singer to beseech God fervent-
ly for deliverance and salvation. The same text is set to music in the
Offertory for Wednesday after Passion Sunday. An ornate melisma oc-
curs over insurgentibus in both instances. That of the Alleluia- verse^
however, cannot compare with the dramatic effect produced by the Offer-
tory. In the latter we see clearly how the foes go forth in battle array,
how their number ever grows, how things come to such a pass that God
alone is able to help. The word receives a quieter construction in the
Alleluia- verse. Its first two members are identical. The coda-like close
with its seconds in both parts strives to still all excitement. In spite of
this, however, unrest is again felt to some extent in the third member
with its fourth and the descent to low a. In the annotated manuscripts
the neums over Eripe and Deus meus in the first phrase are given the
broad form. Sorrow oppresses the singer. His prayer flows from a heavy
heart; at least that is what the rhythmic marks indicate. But the Revue
Gregorienne (9, 112) remarks: "At the thought of God, the soul forgets
its incipient fear. It is so conscious of the divine presence that when it
sings Deus meus it no longer thinks of the enemies it spoke of just before.
It lets itself be rapt into pure contemplation." In all this praying and
beseeching it must not be forgotten that the petition is framed by Alle-
luia. In the melodic turn over inimicis meis we are reminded of the
effective passage de ore leonis in the Offertory of the Mass for the Dead
— effective because it enhances the earnestness of the phrase. Until the
repetition of the juhilus is reached with libera, all pauses close on the
tonic. Though this is somewhat inartistic, it fits quite well into the quiet
mood of the entire phrase. The Alleluia has the form a b h^.

The melody is of very ancient provenance. As early as the eleventh
century it was fitted to the words Ave Maria in the Advent votive Mass
of the Blessed Virgin.

282 Ninth Sunday after Pentecost

Today's OFFERTORY was explained on the third Sunday of Lent.
On the present Sunday, however, after the threatened destruction of the
city of Jerusalem in the Gospel, we shall sing it in a somewhat more sub-
dued fashion and more fervently ask for the grace of fidelity.

COMMUNION (John 6: 57)

1. Qui manducat carnem meam, 1. He that eateth my flesh, and

et hibit sanguinem meum, in me drinketh my blood, dbideth in me

manet, 2. et ego in eo, dicit Domi- 2. and I in him, saith the Lord,
nus.

Today's Epistle was "written for our correction," that the same
fate may not befall us which was visited in a horrible manner upon the
many Israelites who fell victims to the temptations of idolatry, of for-
nication, of murmuring against God. A like effect is produced by the
Sunday's Gospel, in which Jerusalem is made to hear the announcement
of its annihilation because it did not recognize the things that were unto
its peace. For this reason we ought to pray with special fervor before
Holy Communion: "Make me always cleave to thy commandments,
and never suffer me to be separated from thee." But hark! In Holy Com-
munion Christ will be to you a word of solace, a word that will take from
you all fear, and will make you feel perfectly safe: "He that eateth My
flesh, and drinketh My blood, abideth in Me." Be not afraid; His love,
His grace. His help will always be at hand. The melody begins with an
almost supernal simplicity. In the second half-phrase the first half-
phrase is given a more elaborate form. The endings of the parts of the
phrase (meam and meum) are characterized by corresponding formulas.
No doubt this is the technical reason why the more important words
carnem and sanguinem do not stand out so prominently. Now follows the
expressive in me manet with a descending fourth, which must be given
special warmth. It is answered by a rising fourth in ego in eo. Thus both
thoughts are placed in strong relief: Thou in me and I in Thee. The
prolonged &b at the beginning of dicit, which has been avoided thus far,
wishes to impress upon us the "Thus saith the Lord." His word is of
unfailing efficacy and harbors in itself the fullness of consolation.

This song is sung also on the Thursday after the second Sunday of
Lent. In olden times it was used on the fifteenth Sunday after Pente-
cost, and in place of it was sung Primum quaerite, which is now em-
ployed on the fourteenth Sunday.

* * * *

Tenth Sunday after Pentecost 283

TENTH SUNDAY AFTER PENTECOST

INTROIT (Ps. 54: 17, 18, 20, 23)

1. Cum clamarem ad Dominum, 1. When I cried to the Lord, he

exaudivit vocem meam, ah his qui heard my voice, against them that

appropinquant mihi: 2. et humi- draw near to me; 2. and he who is

liavit eos qui est ante saecula, et before all ages, and remains for

manet in aeternum: 3. jacta cogi- ever, humbled them: 3. cast thy

tatum tuum in Domino, et ipse te care upon the Lord and he shall

enutriet. Ps. Exaudi, Deus, ora- sustain thee. Ps. Hear, O God, my

tionem meam, et ne despexeris de- prayer, and despise not my suppli-

precationem meam: * intende mihi, cation: * be attentive to me and

et exaudi me. hear me.

Each of the three phrases closes with the same melodic formula.
Besides, the first and second phrase also have the preceding neums in
common over (appropin)-quant mihi and aeternum. In general, a close
relation exists between these two phrases, even exteriorly, since both
are made up of three members, while the third phrase has only two;
and their interior relation is still more intimate. The first phrase speaks
of the fruits of prayer; the second of the manner in which prayer is heard.
Hence, these two preliminary statements may serve as two premises,
from which the third follows as a conclusion; therefore "cast thy care
upon the Lord!"

The first phrase with its upward striving expresses both an earnest
petition and the tension of soul which accompanies it. Then comes a
thankful, brilliant exaudivit: I have been heard. The second phrase
several times extends beyond the highest note of the first. In the small
phrase qui est ante saecula we twice hear the fourth g-c, and once the
fourth a-d. We get some inkling of the eternity of God, which is without
beginning, from the large intervals. Some purely syllabic passages occur
in the third phrase. Its melodic line is the symbol and expression of a
certain effort, a conquering of the difficulties which present themselves
to wavering, doubting, short-sighted human beings who ought to live
entirely by faith and throw all their care upon the Lord. If this is done
— how quiet and sure is the tone of the seconds over et ipse te\ — then
He will nourish and sustain us with paternal affection and will royally
reward all our hopes and expectations. Even today we shall see the ful-
fillment of these words in the sacrificial Banquet.

We may sing the words of the psalm- verse in the spirit of the pub-
lican of whom the Gospel makes mention. He does not confide in himself;
he does not look upon himself as just. He realizes, moreover, that God

284 Tenth Sunday after Pentecost

would have enough reason to despise his prayer. But it is just this
humble consciousness of his own sinfulness that guarantees the granting
of his petition. He went to his house justified.

This Introit is also sung on the Thursday after Ash Wednesday.

GRADUAL (Ps. 16:8, 2)

1. Custodi me, Domine, ut pu- 1. Keep me, O Lord, as the apple

pillam oculi: 2. suh umbra alarum of thine eye: 2. protect me under the
tuarum protege me. Sf. 1. De vultu shadow of thy wings, jl. 1. Let my
tuo judicium meum prodeat: 2. judgment come forth from thy
oculi tui videant aequitates. countenance: 2. let thine eyes he-

hold the things that are equitable.

In the liturgical evening prayer called Compline we each day hear
the words used in the corpus of the Gradual. Whoever can pray thus
knows that he is dear to the heart of God. How careful we are that not
even a speck of dust enters our eye! We may expect the same and even
greater anxiety and love on the part of God toward our soul, for its wel-
fare and salvation. The present melody proceeds from such a disposi-
tion. A pleasing repose hovers over its beginning. One seems to hear
melodies of the low plagal mode with the dominant /. The same holds
true of the quiet sequences of seconds over oculi. But through it all a
flash of light, which proceeds from pupillam, is discernible.

In the second phrase we gaze at a new picture — a picture of wings,
of mighty pinions, under which we seek protection. Here the melody is
broadly delineated, becoming the outburst of a heart that knows what
a hidden life in God means and that prays for this boon with full con-
fidence.

A new mood appears in the verse; it is a resolute prayer, such as
can come only from a heart that rests securely in God and is conscious
of no grave offense. Are we sinful men allowed to address God thus, the
Omniscient who never judges from appearances, to whom the inner-
most secrets of the heart are open? Strictly speaking, Christ alone with
His most pure and immaculate heart can pray in this manner. But
Christ makes our concerns His own and makes supplication for us to
the Father. With a courageous upward swing the melody at the very
beginning ascends to the dominant a and beyond it, with a strong accent
on high c. The corpus had a similar treatment, but here it is more lavish-
ly employed, so that the verse series as an enhancement of the corpus,
although both have the same range. The first phrase is well divided and
has a cadence o^er prodeat corresponding admirably to the text. It must

Tenth Sunday after Pentecost 285

be admitted that the well-marked cadence on the tonic over tui is not
so happy. The text here allows no marked pause. After the first pause
over tui a sort of sequence of thirds begins, which was still more em-
phasized in earlier times, since after the pause not a doubled c of the
same pitch was sung, but a lower note, most likely h c, as the graphic
representation of the neums seems to demand. Thus the original se-
quence of notes would he h c a g, a hi? g f, g a f d. The conclusion of ae-
quitaiem also occurs on the seventeenth Sunday after Pentecost, on Fri-
day of the Ember Week in Lent, on Sexagesima Sunday, and in the Gra-
dual Sacerdotes.

ALLELUIA VERSE (Ps. 64: 2)

1. Te decet hymnus, Deus, in 1. A hymn, O God, becometh thee

Sion: 2. et tibi reddetur votum in in Sion: 2. and a vow shall be paid
Jerusalem. to thee in Jerusalem.

We are well acquainted with these words from the psalm-verse of
the Introit Requiem; here in the Alleluia- verse, however, they must re-
ceive a more brilliant and livelier interpretation than in the funeral
Mass. But even there no gloomy rendition should disfigure them. Here
we have a song of praise, a grateful paying of vows, witnesses of just so
many favors granted. The choice of the lively seventh mode and what
has the effect of a bright major chord in alleluia is most happy. A cor-
respondence exists between the endings of the second and third mem-
bers of the jubilus. Te decet hymnus is chanted with emphasis on the
accented syllables. From the standpoint of melody, we have two phrases,
of which the first extends as far as votum, building on the psalm-melody
of the seventh mode to the middle cadence inclusive. This appears again,
more richly developed, over Sion and is repeated over votum. The in-
cisions, over Deus and reddetur resemble a flexa. Over Jerusalem the
closing melisma is particularly ornate. Here not only the jubilus of alle-
luia is repeated, but we find numerous neums interpolated before it,
which usually prolong the upper note of the fourths c-f into a tristropha
or a pressus. It is not easy for the singer to live himself into these me-
lismas. They are foreign to our feelings and cannot readily be developed
and for this reason they demand a limpid, fluent presentation. Perhaps
this ornate melody already foreshadows the idea which was formulated
in the later Middle Ages by Bishop Sicard of Cremona {•h 1215) in his
work entitled Mitrale (Migne, P. L., 213, 394): "Almost in every in-
stance when the word 'Jerusalem' occurs in a song, long neums are at-
tached to it, in order to give a picture of the exultation of the heavenly
Jerusalem."

286 Tenth Sunday after Pentecost

In the most ancient manuscripts this Alleluia has yet a second
verse, whose melody was used with the Alleluia on the feast of St.
Alexius (July 17), but without the extraordinarily ornate closing me-
lisma. In its second half the juhilus of the verse resembles that of the
fourteenth Sunday after Pentecost.

For the OFFERTORY see the first Sunday of Advent.

The publican did not even dare to lift his eyes to heaven. But he
had elevated his heart to God (dnimam meam levdvi), and God deigned
to look upon the sinner. On account of his sins, the publican felt him-
self forever estranged from God, but in His loving-kindness God was
near to him. His prayer was inspired with great confidence, and he was
not confounded. He went to his house justified, his heart filled with di-
vince grace and peace. Whoever prays as this publican did will not be
put to shame.

"In the holy Sacrifice the parable of the Gospel renews itself. You
entered the church as a humble publican; in the Kyrie and the Gradual
you struck your breast: that was your pilgrimage to Sion (Alleluia-
verse); now gracious words of pardon fall from the mouth of the Lord"
(K.L.).

COMMUNION (Ps. 50:21)

1. Acceptahis sacrificium justi- 1. Thou wilt accept the sacrifice

tiae, 2. oUationes et holocausta, of justice, 2. oblations and holo-
super altare tuum, Domine. causts, upon thine altar, 0 Lord.

Soon the priest will pronounce these words in the Placeat: ''May
the homage of my bounden duty be pleasing to Thee, 0 Holy Trinity;
and grant that the sacrifice which I, though unworthy, have offered in
the sight of Thy majesty, may be acceptable (acceptdhile) to Thee."
Such must be the prayer of the sacrificing priest. But the sacrifice which
Christ has just offered finds gracious acceptance in heaven, as the
Church well knows. Hence the determined and joyful beginning of the
melody. It is the sacrifice of justice, the fitting sacrifice, which Jesus
Christ "the Just" has offered; the sacrifice which has again reconciled
the offended justice of God. It is in truth a burnt offering in which the
love of Christ to the Father consumed itself; a holocaust, since Christ
Himself was unable to give more. To this sublime sacrifice, which was
now offered on the altar (how pensive the melody becomes here!), are
added our sacrificial gifts (oUationes): all the renunciations, all the suf-
ferings courageously borne, the persevering performance of our duty we
have placed on the paten and in the chalice. Taken up into Christ's

Eleventh Sunday after Pentecost 287

oblation, as the drop of water into the wine at the Offertory, and united
with Christ's sacrifice, these gifts find acceptance before the Lord.

The cadence over justitiae is typical in responsories of the fourth
mode. No doubt its close on e-f and not f-e (as in Domine) is employed
to effect an easier and more flexible union of the first and second phrases.
This cadence has also appeared over Acceptabis in a shortened form.
Here the concluding e-f is found for the same reason as above. The
member which immediately follows begins with d and an interval of a
fourth, just as the second period is always introduced in the responsories
of the fourth mode. In this Communion, therefore, as in many others,
the structure of the responsories is imitated. The second phrase is more
quiet, with a strong accent on /. Only with the expressive altdre is any
prolongation noticeable. We sing this same song on the Thursday after
Ash Wednesday.

The presentation should be lively and joyful.

"In the sacrificial banquet the publican receives a pledge of his
justification. Ite, missa est — he goes to his house justified" (K.L.).

* * * *

ELEVENTH SUNDAY AFTER PENTECOST

INTROIT (Ps. 67: 6, 7, 36)

1. Deus in loco sancto suo: 2. 1. God in his holy place: 2. God

Deus qui inhabitare facit unanimes who maketh men of one mind to

in domo: 3. ipse dabit virtutem, et dwell in his house: 3. he shall give

fortitudinem plebi suae. Ps. Ex- power and strength to his people,

surgat Deus, et dissipentur inimici Ps. Let God arise, and let his ene-

ejus: * etfugiant, qui oderunt eum, mies be scattered: * and let them

a facie ejus. that hate him flee from before his

face.

The text of the antiphon is divided into three phrases, which divi-
sion the melody faithfully observes. An upward tendency is apparent in
the first and third phrase, while the contrary is true of the second; the
latter is melodically more significant. Hence we have here the form
ABA. The need for contrast is based on purely musical grounds, since
the text offers no reason for it.

Three thoughts are presented: (1) God abides in His holy places:
in heaven, in the Church, in the heart of him who has the life of grace.
We owe Him reverence and adoration. (2) God wishes to unite all those
who enter His house into one family, into one heart. This phrase breathes

288 Eleventh Sunday after Pentecost

of love. (3) If the mystery of strength already abides in this unity, then
God provides special power (Exsurgat) for the struggle against His foes,
who are at the same time ours.

First phrase: Like the Introit of the ninth Sunday after Pentecost,
this one also begins immediately on the dominant,^ with a descending
line to the tonic. A vigorous emphasis marks the word Deus. Care must
be taken that the doubled notes be not too prolonged. The rest of the
phrase is solemn and reverential. Each of the disyllabic words has the
accented syllable lengthened, so that the whole sounds like a succes-
sion of solemn spondees — Deus, loco, sancto suo. The final clivis over
(lo)-co corresponds to that over (sanc)-to. They must not be made too
short.

Second phrase: Here, as in the preceding phrase, the word Deus
is marked by its accent and melodic independence; and just as the for-
mer properly begins only with in loco, so does the latter with inhahitäre.
After Deus a short pause or prolongation is not at all out of place. This
second Deus is more tender and quiet than the first, a fitting introduction
to this phrase, which no longer speaks of the majesty of God, but of
His goodness. Both word-accents in each of the two members, inhahi-
täre and undnimes, have a correspondingly important musical accent.
The second porrectus must be sung more lightly than the first; then must
follow a steady crescendo to the musical climax, which speaks of the
workings of divine mercy with the word facit. Let only a slight prolonga-
tion be made on the clivis of (fa)-cit. A still better effect is obtained if
the two members— facit and undnimes — are joined without a pause. In
case of need, breath might be taken, imperceptibly, before facit. If a
full pause is given after domo and only a half pause after suo, this must
not cause confusion. We are not dealing here with mathematical values.
The cadence on domo permits of no long pause; it urges forward to com-
pletion.

Melodically speaking, the third phrase has two members, of which
the second comprises the words plehi suae. The first bears some resemb-
blance to the first phrase of the antiphon and has, moreover, the same
spirit of solemn affirmation. Happy trustfulness is suggested by the
accented dominant and the fourth. A sharp, clear pronunciation of the
consonant "t" before the "v" will contribute much to bring out the
symmetry between dabit and virtutem. This part moves in the four-note
range a-d, emphasizing the c, while the following et fortitudinem, employ-
ing a similar range (f-hb), stresses a and for the first time strikes &b.
The cadence closes a part of a phrase, but not the entire piece, and

1 N. Sch., 52.

Eleventh Sunday after Pentecost 289

therefore no considerable pause is allowed after it. In its upward move-
ment, plehi suae reminds us of qui inhabitdre in the first phrase. The
principal accent on ple-(hi) occurs with its highest neum, h\?c. A broad
construction should be given to the cadence-like torculus over su-(ae).
Revue, 24, 170 ff.; Analyses, 5, I, 3 ff.

GRADUAL (Ps. 27: 7, 1)

1. In Deo speravit cor meum, et 1. In God hath my heart confided,

adjutus sum: et refloruit caro mea, and I have been helped: and my

2. et ex voluntate mea confitebor Uli. flesh hath flourished again, 2. and

j[. 1. Ad te, Domine, clamavi: 2. with my will I will give praise to

Deus meus, ne sileas: ne discedas a him. ^. 1. Unto thee have I cried,

me. O Lord: 2. 0 my God, be not thou

silent: depart not from me.

A marvelous effect is produced here in the steady development of
the melody and the comparatively rapid close after the climax has been
reached. The first phrase is quiet, confined to a fifth; it is only the low
c at the very end that brings an expansion with a modulation in the pla-
gal form of which the F mode is so fond. It is like a quiet retrospect on
the working of God. But now thanksgiving and jubilation come to the
fore: "With my will I will give praise to Him." This phrase begins a
sixth higher — a rare occurrence in plainsong — and extends far above a,
the peak of the first phrase. And yet the thanksgiving here expressed is
not so joyous and ringing as that of many other pieces. The note &b,
which dominates the phrase, has a tendency to hold back the exultation,
and the close over Uli is more like an indecisive faltering than a song of
joy.

After an introductory formula, the verse has the same ornate me-
lismas as are heard on Maundy Thursday and on other days. The first
part of the Gradual modulates to low c; by way of contrast the verse
goes up to high c. Thus far there is no difficulty in following the melodic
development. But the following petitions, ne sileas, and ne discedas (the
latter has a common closing formula) have no intrinsic relation with
one another or with that which precedes. Ne sileas, moreover, loses
much of its effectiveness simply because the preceding melody is already
developed in so splendid a manner.

Who is to sing this song? If it is true that every Sunday is a minia-
ture Easter, then it is true especially of this Sunday. The Epistle which
precedes our present Gradual again impresses upon us the fact that
Christ died for our sins, that He arose from the dead on the third day
according to the Scriptures, that He appeared to Peter, to the eleven,

290 Eleventh Sunday after Pentecost

and to more than five hundred brethren. We may, therefore, place this
song in the mouth of the Risen One. Its first phrase resembles the spirit
of the Easter Introit. "My flesh hath flourished again." How radiant is
Christ in His springtime beauty and splendor, after His body has under-
gone the most horrible sufferings! How sweet is this song of thanksgiving
when it comes from the heart of Jesus! In the verse, the risen Christ
seems to look back on His sufferings and His abandonment, when the
Father seemed to turn a deaf ear to His Deus mens and to be immeasur-
ably distant. But in ancient times the present Gradual did not close with
these petitions. To round out the piece the corpus of the Gradual was
repeated in the spirit of reconciliation, thus making it more like a song
of thanksgiving.

With these same words St. Paul might have given thanks that by
the grace of God he is what he is, and that this grace has not remained
inoperative in him — thoughts which close today's Epistle. We all have
good reason to give thanks from the bottom of our hearts, because we
have been saved by the same good tidings. In like manner does the
deaf-and-dumb man of today's Gospel thank the Lord, for He did not
remain silent, but pronounced His almighty Ephpheta — *'Be thou
opened!"

ALLELUIA VERSE (Ps. 80: 2, 3)

1. Exsultate Deo adjutori nostro 1. Rejoice to God our helper, 2.

2. jubilate Deo Jacob: 3. sumite Sing aloud to the God of Jacob: 3.
psalmum jucundum cum cithara. take a joyful psalm with the harp.

Alleluia has the form a b c. Similarly, a begins the first and third
phrases of the verse. In each case, however, the treatment of the word-
accent is different, with corresponding differences in the dynamics. Ex-
sultate and sumite are admittedly nothing more than introductions to
the words which follow them. The imperative which begins the second
phrase also rises a fourth above the opening note. Principal and second-
ary accents are treated in the same way as in exsultate (=jubiläte). In
the b-member, e d e f d and b a b c d c correspond. The passage over
Deo is heard again over nostro and (Ja)-cob, while (adjut6)-ri occurs in
an extended form over psalmum and jucundum. Were it left to us we
should most likely in all three cases have distributed the neums as with
psalmum, instead of placing a single note on the accented syllable and
an ornate melisma over the closing syllable. In the votive Mass of the
Most Pure Heart of Mary during Paschal time, the melody is sung in
the same fashion; the alleluia for the twenty-third Sunday after Pente-
cost also bears a slight resemblance to it.

Eleventh Sunday after Pentecost 291

If we sang the Gradual in the spirit of Easter as coming from the
heart of the risen Lord, then this Alleluia ought to be the expression of
our joy at having received the help of God's grace in holy Baptism. In
that Sacrament He freed us from sin, made us to speak and understand
spiritually, and in the Holy Eucharist He makes us sharers in His divine
life. When we hear the words of this verse and of the whole psalm, the
strains of the Introit Cihavit eos for Monday in Whitsun week and for
Corpus Christi seem to resound again in our hearts, for they sing of the
Saviour's Eucharistie love for us, and urge us to teach the whole world
how to share in our joy.

OFFERTORY

This Offertory was explained on Ash Wednesday. We continue to
offer thanks for the grace of Baptism. The "Ephpheta" of today's Gos-
pel, together with the ceremonies that attended it, has been incorporated
into the rite of Baptism, and has produced its effect in us in the most
sublime sense. "Be thou opened!" the priest cried, and our ear opened
itself to the word of God, our tongue loosed itself for the praise of God,
and our eye looked upon the marvels of grace which God had worked
in our soul. We were made children of God and heirs of heaven, partakers
of Christ unto life eternal. If a prayer of thanksgiving forced itself to
the lips of him who had been deaf and dumb, then surely we must pray
and sing: I will extol Thee, 0 Lord, for Thou hast protected me; Thou
hast received me into Thy Church, hast broken the power of my mortal
enemy and hast begun to heal the wounds of original sin. Mayest Thou
remain with me, that my enemies may no longer rejoice over me.

COMMUNION (Prov. 3: 9, 10)

1. Honora Domino de tua sub- 1. Honor the Lord with thy sub-
stantia, 2. et de primitiis frugum stance, 2. and with the first of all
tuarum: 3. et implebuntur horrea thy fruits: 3. and thy barns shall be
tua saturitate, 4. et vino torcularia filled with abundance, 4. and thy
redundabunt. presses shall run over with wine.

These four phrases are like so many strophes of an intimate and
appealing song, one over which the good odor of the earth, the fragrance
of gardens and of fresh wine seems to hover. According to the text there
are two pairs of phrases: the first two mention what we are to do; the
other two speak of the generosity with which God will repay us. While
the third phrase expresses astonishment over God's bountiful goodness,
the second soars upward in the spirit of self-sacrifice. The first and

292 Twelfth Sunday after Pentecost

fourth phrases have the same range, both descend to c and have the
same extended finale.

The first phrase has the same beginning as today's Gradual. Over
tua and substantia the first / ought to be prolonged. You are not to offer
any kind of gift, but the noblest, the best, the first fruits. This grada-
tion of thought is paralleled by that of the melody in the second phrase,
while the warm-toned cadence over primitiis, which also exerts some in-
fluence on that which follows, speaks with the tender, cordial voice of
love. The ending of tudrum corresponds with that of the first and fourth
phrases. In the third phrase the melody becomes even more luminous
than in the second. We are struck by the sudden beginning of horrea
with an interval of a fourth, as if it were a cry of wonder at the im-
mensity of God's goodness! Vino in the fourth phrase closes on a pes
and the following word begins a fifth lower, a frequent occurrence in
pieces of the first and eighth mode (cf. the Introit Gaudete, p. 27, and
the Introit Dum medium silentium, p. 69.). The Revue Gregorienne calls
this musical turn a "smiling interrogation mark." Torculdria, reminding
us of impledntur, brings the joyous answer. Here again the secondary
as well as the principal accent receive very curt treatment.

Clearness and joy characterize the melody, rather than solemnity.
Holy Communion is the life-giving bread, the never-failing wine which
gives strength to the soul.

Would that we choir directors ever derived new energy from the
celebration of the sacred Mysteries, in order to glorify the Lord with
all our strength (substantia) and to offer Him the noblest and the best!

Revue, 24, 174 ff.; Analyses, 5, 7 ff.

TWELFTH SUNDAY AFTER PENTECOST

INTROIT (Ps. 69:2, 3)

1. Deus, in adjutorium meum 1. Incline unto mine aid, 0 God:

intende: 2. Domine, ad adjuvandum 2. O Lord, make haste to help me: 3.

me festina: 3. confundantur et let mine enemies be confounded and

revereantur inimici mei, qui quaer- ashamed, who seek my soul. Ps.

unt animam meam. Ps. Avertantur Let them be turned backward, and

retrorsum, et eruhescant: * qui co- blush for shame, * who devise evils

gitant mihi mala. against me.

All the canonical hours of the daily Office open with the first two
phrases of the Introit and are generally sung in a rather simple style.

Twelfth Sunday after Pentecost 293

In the present instance the melody climbs to unusual heights, which is
already indicated by the use of the C clef on the second line. The first
two phrases are impelled onward by great anxiety of soul; they voice
the most abject misery. We can imagine how the man in today's Gospel
cried for assistance after the robbers had beaten him almost to death.
He had seen the priest approach and confidently looked forward to being
rescued. But the priest passed by, indifferent. Similarly had he seen the
Levite coming toward him, but he also kept aloof. How he must have
cried then to God for help: Intende, imploring Him to send relief at
once, for he was bleeding to death: festinal

By means of the pressus over Deus and the strengthening of the
note over (adju)-t6-(rium), special emphasis is placed on the first phrase,
while the whole step below the c gives it unusual force. We shall better
understand the melody if we picture it written a fourth lower: its es-
sential notes then would hegcägdfgacdc and ä f ä g g at the end.
These are tone-sequences with which the eighth mode has made us well
acquainted. The second phrase, which ought to be compared with the
rich Offertory on the Thursday after the fourth Sunday in Lent, could
be transposed in the same manner. We should then have an /^ over mei.

To judge merely from the melodic structures, the third phrase is the
most calm. But in the development of the motive of confunddntur over
reveredntur, and in the prominent syllabic chant, a tension is evident
which is readily felt by the singer, a tension which calls for release in
the second half of the phrase and especially stresses the important
words dnimam meam. A host of evil spirits go about the world, seeking
the ruin of souls (cf. the prayers after Mass). Evil men assist them in
their task. Many hardly realize the dangers by which they are surrounded,
or with what terrifying speed they are rushing to perdition. For them
the Church prays with motherly solicitude and cries to heaven: Deus
in adjutoriuml May the strength of the enemies be broken and their
influence come to naught!

In the Epistle we hear the Apostle admonishing us: "Not that we
are sufficient to think anything of ourselves, as of ourselves; but our
sufficiency is from God." And the Collect remarks that it is only by
virtue of God's grace that His faithful serve Him loyally and worthily.
All this urges us to pray the more fervently: Deus in adjutorium meum
intendel

GRADUAL (Ps. 33:2, 3)

1. Benedicam Dominum in omni 1. / will hless the Lord at all

tempore: 2. semper laus ejus in ore times: 2. his praise shall he ever in
meo. jl. 1. In Domino laudabitur my mouth. ^. In the Lord shall my

294 Twelfth Sunday after Pentecost

anima mea: 2. audiant mansueti, et soul he praised: 2. let the meek hear,
laetentur. and rejoice.

This melody is marked with irregularities. It has not that lucid
construction so evident in Graduals of the fifth and sixth modes, which
places the principal melodic ascent in the verse. Here the ascent is found
in the corpus, which several times goes up to / and even to g, whereas
the verse reaches / only once. Surprising, too, is the closing of the corpus
on c ah a, the usual ending of the transposed Doric mode. Not only is
the ending Doric; the entire extended phrase in ore meo with the pre-
ceding ten notes is sung in the Gradual of the tenth Sunday after Pente-
cost, which belongs to the first mode, over the words protege me. This is
no doubt one of the longest accommodations in a strange mode. Not
quite so extended is the appropriating of the second group of notes over
mansueti, which is taken from the third mode. Here one may also com-
pare the second and third groups over the word meus in the Gradual
for Passion Sunday. The close of mea and mansueti recurs in the Grad-
ual Justus ut palma, which is ascribed to the second mode, over the word
multiplicdhitur and before per noctem. The melody over lauddhitur dnima
mea bears a great resemblance to that over lauddhimur tota die on the
twenty-third Sunday after Pentecost, which latter is, however, set a
fourth higher. In both cases there is question of the seventh mode.

The importance of the melismatic punctuation again comes promi-
nently to the fore. Compare (D6mi)-num, (tempo )-re, (e)-jus, (me)-o; in
the verse, (D6mi)-no, (me)-a, (mansue)-ti, (laeten)-tur. Over Domino
the verse has the same melody as the first part of the Gradual over
Dominum.

Mode, style, and text of this Gradual find their continuation in the
Gradual Clamaverunt of the Mass Salus autem. Both are taken from the
thirty-third psalm. Compare the remarks on the Gradual for Septua-
gesima Sunday.

The Graduals Domine, praevenisti on March 19 and Benedicta on
July 2 are assigned to the fourth mode, no doubt because the first part
of the Gradual, which is to be repeated, closes on e. The verse belongs
undoubtedly to the first mode. One would expect to find the determining
factor after the close of the corpus. Since, however, in ancient times the
first part of the Gradual was not repeated after the verse, but the verse
Clamaverunt — clearly belonging to the seventh mode, as is also indicated
in our Graduale — followed, the entire piece was assigned to the seventh
mode with good show of reason.

The Psalmist stresses the point that we are to praise God at all
times. For in Himself God already is lauddhilis nimis. He can never be
praised sufficiently. If we then consider His love for us and His bene-

Twelfth Sunday after Pentecost 295

ficence, the obligation of thanking Him must weigh heavily upon our
souls and ever inspire us with new love. What immense riches we pos-
sess in Christ! Of this today's Epistle reminds us when it shows that the
New Dispensation is far superior to and more glorious than the old,
and that God's grace has called us and qualified us for this New Law.
But especially in the house of God ought our singing and praising so to
resound, that it "may arouse joy in the hearts of the faithful." St. Bene-
dict in his Rule (Chapter 47) stipulates that only he should be allowed to
sing or read in choir who can fulfill this task to the edification of those
present. He should do it with humility, dignity, holy fear, and in obe-
dience. In the same manner we ought to perform our sacred service for
the honor of God and the joy and edification of the faithful.

ALLELUIA VERSE (Ps. 87: 2)

1. Domine Deus salutis meae: 2. 1. OLord the God of my salvation:

in die clamavi et node coram te. 2. / have cried in the day, and in

the night before thee.

Alleluia has the form a b c c^ The frequent pressus are introduced
in various ways. Over (Al)-le-(lüia) a group of four notes precedes the

pressus; the same is true of the close of the juhilus: e f e d ee — g a g a gg.

In the b-member, groups of three notes precede: c h a cc — g a h aa; in

c and c\ groups of two notes: g a cc — h g aa. The effectiveness of the
melodic line will be increased if the pressus be not accented too strongly;
in fact, the preceding notes should be stressed a little more. The address
to God composes the first phrase of the verse. Here there is melodic
tenseness, ascending until it closes on the old dominant of the third
mode. "Thou art the God of my salvation." This grateful avowal is the
best recommendation for the petition which follows. The pressus helps
to make the plea more impressive. The extreme limits of this descending
curve give the melodic line c h a g f e, which is, however, enlivened by
thirds. Domine Deus must be sung solemnly. The annotated manuscripts
here have broad markings almost exclusively.

In connection with the Gospel which follows, this song sounds like
a cry for the redemption of a world sick unto death.

On the feast of the Precious Blood and of St. Benedict Joseph
Labre (April 16) the same melody is sung.

We here have poignant sorrow transfigured by the Paschal Alleluia.
Our thoughts revert to Mother Church, sorrowfully awaiting the day of
her resurrection. Perhaps your own soul will have to sing a similar
Alleluia chant. (K.L.)

296 Twelfth Sunday after Pentecost

OFFERTORY (Ex. 32: 11, 13, 14)

1. Precatus est Moyses in con- 1. Moses prayed in the sight of

spectu Domini Dei sui, et dixit: 2. the Lord his God, and said: 2.

precatus est Moyses in conspectu Moses prayed in the sight of the

Domini Dei sui, et dixit: II. 3. Lord his God and said: II. S. Why,

Quare, Domine, irasceris in po- O Lord, is thine indignation en-

pulo tuol 4. Parce irae animae tuae: kindled against thy people'! 4. Let

5. memento Abraham, Isaac et the anger of thy mind cease: 5. re-

Jacoh, quihus jurasti dare terram member Abraham, Isaac, and Jacob,

fluentem lac et mel. III. 6. Et to whom thou didst swear to give a

placatus est Dominus de maligni- land flowing with milk and honey,

täte, quam dixit facere populo suo. III. 6. And the Lord was appeased

from doing the evil, which he had
spoken of doing against his people.

Here everything — the content, the construction, the expression —
is on a grand scale. One can almost see the palpitations of the singer's
breast, as it rises and sinks under the excessive emotions that rush in
upon his soul. Everything is at stake: the salvation of an entire people.
God has threatened it with destruction because it adored the golden
calf. He had promised Moses, however, that He would make him the
father of a new and better people. Hence Moses threw everything into
the balance to save his people, the very nation which had so frequently
embittered his life. That was spirit of the spirit of God! Here was shown
a mercy akin to that of the Good Samaritan of the Gospel.

The three divisions of the piece are indicated in the above transla-
tion: I. Introduction; II. Supplication of Moses; III. Response.

I. We can divine the meaning of this prayer at the very outset.
The beginning of In con-(spectu), with its low fifth, lets the prayer as-
cend from the very depths of the soul. The form over Dei sui with its
tritone occurs in a varied shape over (i)-rasceris, in populo, and tuae,
besides coming in the repetition. Over the first dixit we meet the closing
neums frequently used in the eighth mode. Compare the passage over
surrexit in the Offertory for Easter Monday. We find the same first
phrase repeated in the Ambrosian Antiphonary (Paleographie musicale,
VII, 197J. The words Precatus and Moyses are slightly amplified by the
addition of a clivis; the close of dixit, on the contrary, has been con-
siderably shortened.

II. Violent agitation is expressed by the cumulation of fourths,
bistrophas, tristrophas, pressus, and tritones. Ever more vehement be-
comes the beating of the singer's heart. As if to storm the gates of heaven
itself, he now cries: Memento] Lord, Thou hast pledged Thy word. Thou

Twelfth Sunday after Pentecost 297

canst not destroy us. The fourth over Quäre becomes a fifth, then a sixth,
and the agitation grows apace, until some relaxation is afforded with
the descending fifth over (Ja)-coh. Nevertheless, the tension is still
evident in terram. In the presentation, a short pause must be made after
lac. The heaping of neums over the twice-sung et strikes us rather oddly.

III. The third part begins with the tone of assurance. We regard
this passage as a resolved major chord. Malignitä-(te) is placed between
two motives of like sound. The rich melody over populo with the de-
velopment 6 a ch g, ä c a 6 af assures us that Israel is again God's people.
Quiet seconds form the close. The avoidance of tritones is no doubt
intended.

Moses is but a weak type of Christ and His redemptive work.
Christ not only prayed for us: He gave Himself completely for us. He
can, therefore, not only point to the promises of God; He can show His
wounds and the blood which was shed "unto the remission of sins," as
the priest prays at the consecration. He is the "High Priest who came
to effect a reconciliation in the time of God's wrath." Hence He also
expects of us that we assist at the holy Sacrifice in the spirit of reconci-
liation and with a love which is not self-centered, but is prepared to
immolate itself for others.

COMMUNION (JPs. 103: 13, 14, 15)

1. De fructu operum tuorum, Do- 1. The earth shall he filled with

mine, satiabitur terra: 2. ut educas the fruit of thy works, 0 Lord: 2.
panem de terra, et vinum laetificet that thou mayest bring bread out of
cor hominis; 3. ut exhilaret faciem the earth, and that vjine may cheer
in oleo, 4. et panis cor hominis con- the heart of man: 3. that he may
firmet. make the face cheerful with oil: 4

and that bread may strengthen man's

heart.

As last Sunday, so today again we have a harvest song, a song of
thanksgiving for the blessings of grain, wine, and oil which God has
bestowed upon man. His paternal goodness not only supplies the neces-
saries of life; it aims also at bringing joy to our heart: twice this thought
is expressed here. It is precisely in these passages that the melodic cli-
maxes occur. Joy wants to pour itself out, communicate itself, and in-
flame the hearts of others. It receives special emphasis not only through
its high position, but also through the pressus, the only one used in this
Communion, in contrast to that of last Sunday. Besides this contrast,
in spite of the fact that it employs the same sixth mode, this Commun-

298 Thirteenth Sunday after Pentecost

ion has a quieter melody, a more limited range, and smaller intervals,
for even fourths are excluded. All is more unassuming here; but at the
same time more intimate and cordial. The entire first phrase confines
itself to seconds, and the chant is almost purely syllabic. The second
phrase has / for its recitative, with emphasis of the accented syllables.
It is the word-accent, in fact, which usually determines the melodic de-
velopment: f g a f over educas, f g h\? ah\} a over vinum, a c aa g a over
laetificet. The third phrase retains the joyous spirit of the second and,
in spite of its brevity, has individual charm in the consonant passages
€ah\?gagfggf over (ex)-hilaret and f d e f ded c d dc over in oleo.
With et panis we should like to see a new phrase begin on account of
the text and the melodic arrangement. Here we have the rare case of a
phrase ending wit a half tone (e f). Although the e before the final note
accords with our ideas of harmony, still the ancients considered a close
with a half tone an imperfection.

The Eucharistie allusion of these verses becomes most evident when
they are used in a Communion song. For how many has the Eucharist
stilled the longings of the heart, satisfied the craving for heavenly food!
For how many has it been the source of joy and inspiration. The fruit
of Thy works 0 Lord, the Eucharistie Sacrifice, has satisfied the long-
ings of our soul. There we see Christ as the Good Samaritan. Wine and
oil He pours into our wounds, and a love that knows no limits. When
we read at the end "that bread may strengthen man's heart," then let
us pray: O my Saviour, now I must again go forth into life with its
struggles, its trials, its many temptations. Take Thou my troubled
heart into Thy hand and impart to it strength, constancy, and fidelity.

THIRTEENTH SUNDAY AFTER PENTECOST

INTROIT (Ps. 73: 20, 19, 23)

1. Respice, Domine, in testamen- 1. Have regard unto thy covenant

turn tuum, et animas pauperum and forsake not to the end the souls

tuorum ne derelinquas in finem: 2. of thy poor: 2. arise, O Lord, and

exsurge Domine, et judica causam judge thy cause, and forget not the

tuam: 3. et ne ohlivscaris voces voices of them that seek thee. Ps.

quaerentium te. Ps. Ut quid Deus Why, O God, hast thou cast us off

reppulisti in finem: * iratus est furor unto the end: * why is thy wrath

tuus super oves pascuae tuael kindled against the sheep of thy

Thirteenth Sunday after Pentecost 299

Violent emotions stir the heart of the singer today. Apprehension
that God may turn away forever His face from His wayward people
seizes it; fear that He may break the covenant, mankind's only hope,
because so many have become unfaithful to it. Hence this violent, al-
most passionate, clamoring, especially in the second part over exsurge
Domine. "Perhaps it was the dire distress, caused by the migration of
Nations, that forced this lamentation from the Church; we might now
substitute as her reason the sinfulness of so many of her children"
{K. L.). The singer knows, however, that he can pray in the name of
the whole Church: we are Thy people. Thy poor, the lambs of Thy pas-
ture, this matter is Thy concern. And that consoles him for God will
not abandon His Church to any hostile power, and no malice or evil
scheming can ever prevail against her.

Today's Gospel tells the story of the lepers' cleansing. With what
loud voices did they not cry: "Jesus, Master, have mercy on us!" But
even more urgent than this will be the plea of him who has experienced
what is the leprosy of the soul, what a shameful thing sin is, how it im-
poverishes man utterly, and what a terrible thing it is to desert one's
'Creator and to break the covenant so solemnly ratified. Our present
song is born out of this bitter realization. But there is confidence in it
also: The divine Shepherd of souls does not forget us. He does not for-
sake us, for behold, in the holy Sacrifice He comes down upon the altar
and gives Himself as food to His poor sheep!

The melody will gain in lucidity if we consider the pause after
causam tuam the same as that after testamentum tuum. Thus are formed
two parts; the first half dramatically enlivened by the imperatives Re-
spice, exsurge, and judica; while the second half with ne derelinquas, ne
oUiviscdris, and the emphasis on the dominant c, is considerably more
quiet. Toward the end the chant again becomes more insistent by rea-
son of the pressus over derelinquas and quaerentium.

The first half of the phrase forcefully presents the three most im-
portant words; the second half avoids all larger intervals. It is the suppli-
ant petition of the "poor." The final cadence is borrowed from the
fourth mode. After the turbulent exsurge Domine, et jüdica sets in on
the dominant, just as in testamentum after Domine above; tuam is an
abridgment of tuum; ne ohliviscdris harks back to et jüdica; voces closes
•on c, like tuorum above.

GRADUAL (Ps. 73: 20, 19, 22)

1. Respice, Domine, in testa- 1. Have regard, 0 Lord, to thy

Tnentum tuum: 2. et animas pau- covenant, and forsake not to the

300 Thirteenth Sunday after Pentecost

perum tuorum 3. ne ohliviscaris end the souls of thy poor, jl. 1.

in finem. ^. 1. Exsurge Domine, 2. Arise, O Lord, 2. and judge thy

et judica causam tuam: 3. memor cause: 3. remember the reproach of

esto opprohrii servorum tuorum. thy servants.

With the exception of the last phrase, the Introit and Gradual have
the same wording. But how different is the mood the latter expresses!
Here Respice and the entire first phrase have a quieter tone, although
the second phrase is more lively than et dnimas pauperum in the Introit.
In the Gradual the prayer of the "poor" becomes more perceptible by
means of the &b after the h, which immediately precedes, through the
stressing of the minor third, but especially by the urgent fourths and
the emphasis on &!? and c. Then the melody presents a regular cadence,
quite uncalled for by the text. The pause should be very short. Songs
adorned with many neums, such as Graduals and Alleluias, naturally
have more divisions than other pieces. Thus what was one phrase in the
Introit is here divided into three melodic phrases. The third phrase be-
gins like in testamentum above, but imparts a special fervor to the pe-
tition. There are but few fifth-mode Graduals which are so animated
in their first part as this one.

The verse, however, is typical throughout. The final neums of Do-
mine come to a climax with increasing power. Few singers will be able
to chant the whole on one breath. In case of necessity, breath might be

taken after d e ddh. Causam in the second phrase repeats the final neums
of Domine and those over et jü-(dica); tuam presents the same motive
thrice, and then adds a cadence. Opprohrii reiterates the cadence of
(tu6)-rum from the first part of the Gradual. We Thy servants have be-
come a laughing stock, an object of contempt to Thy enemies. Forget
us not, desert us not; judge Thou Thy cause! This is not sung in the
vigorous style of the Introit, however, but with a typical Gradual-
melody which is predominantly joyful in character.

ALLELUIA VERSE (Ps. 89: 1)

1. Domine, refugium f actus es 1. Lord, thou hast been our refuge:

nobis: 2. a generatione et progenie. 2. from generation to generation.

This Alleluia comes like a song of thanksgiving for the granting of
the petitions mentioned in the Gradual. Would that we might hear the
prayers of all the nations of the Christian centuries thanking God that
He has provided a place of refuge in His Church, a shelter against the
darts and arrows of the evil one, an asylum of rest after the sorrows and
hardships of life, a haven where the soul, hungering for truth and grace,

Thirteenth Sunday after Pentecost 301

may find sustenance! If we could hear all these songs of thanksgiving,
from those which were sung in the catacombs to those we now hear in
all the churches of Christendom, how our hearts would be aflame with
gratitude for all that God means to us in His Church.

Alleluia has four members, each of which ascends to high e. That
is also the upper limit of the first phrase. The second phrase, however,
soars above it to /. In the first and third members of Alleluia a slight
pause occurs on the note h. We meet the second neum of the second
member again over es and no-(his). Domine rises in majestic seconds.
In refugium a concatenation of motives is apparent: d e d h and c d 6 a
are joined to one another by c d c h. The cadence over refugium, which
recurs in a shortened form at the end of ( generali )-6ne, seems almost too
final for a word in the middle of a sentence. The ornate neums over
( generali )-6ne sound as if they were borrowed from the words Juxta est
Dominus of the Gradual Clamaverunt. The melodic line, here crowned
by a tor cuius, is more graceful than that of the Gradual with its pressus.
Et harks back to a.

OFFERTORY (Ps. 30: 15, 16)

l.Inte speravi, Domine; 2. dixi: 1. In thee, O Lord, have I hoped:

Tu es Deus meus, 3. in manihus 2. / said: Thou art my God, 3. my
tuis tempora mea. times are in thy hands.

In content and melody this Offertory strongly resembles that of
the first Sunday of Advent. Like the latter it ascends from the depths,
from the acknowledgment of human indigence and helplessness. In both
pieces Domine receives similar treatment. The close over tempora mea
can also be regarded as a variant of that over dnimam in the other Offer-
tory. But the singer will soon discover the difference between the two.
In the first place, today's Offertory is more serene. Similar or identical
tone-sequences are found in the ending of speravi, over (Dö)-mi-(ne),
over Deus and meus. Our present melody avoids large intervals — the
greatest is a third — as well as modulation to c, so much favored by the
second mode. This melody is also brighter in character. The develop-
ment with dixi and in manihus may not be very apparent, but still one
readily senses the freedom that underlies it. It is the song of carefree
confidence. In spite of its length, the melody of the first Sunday of Ad-
vent never reaches high a, as today's does.

There is great similarity in the compass of the three phrases. In
the first phrase the first note, lengthened by a quilisma, is extremely
effective, especially in this text. In the second phrase the podatus after
the tristropha should receive a good accent; the same over Tu. The cli-

302 Thirteenth Sunday after Pentecost

max over Deus mens is obvious enough. This is really the sense of the
melody: O God, Thou art my God. After mens a short pause is allow-
able. Everything strains toward further development with in mdnibus.
It seems but natural that f g d g a f (manibus) should follow d e f e d
(Deus) and d e f g f e (mens). A slight secondary accent may be placed
on the fifth note over md-(nihus). Quiet yet effective two-note groups
thus make up this half of the phrase.

Included in the gifts which we bring to the altar is the oblation of
ourselves to God; we confide entirely in Him, and place in His hands
both life and death, both time and eternity. There we shall be safe
(W.K.). At a nuptial Mass the spouses similarly place their entire lives
in God's hands, for this Offertory is also sung in the Mass Pro Sponso et
Sponsa. And even if we are conscious of the leprosy of sin with which
we are afflicted, we know for certain that to our suppliant cry, "Jesus,
Master, have mercy on us," He will reply with His almighty word:
"Arise, go thy way: for thy faith hath made thee whole."

Special beauty attaches to the verses which formerly were sung in
connection with this Offertory: (1) "Make Thy face to shine upon Thy
servant; save me in Thy mercy. Let me not be confounded, O Lord, for
I have called upon Thee." (2) "O how great is the multitude of Thy
sweetness, O Lord? Which Thou hast hidden for them that fear Thee!
Which Thou hast wrought for them that hope in Thee, in the sight of
the sons of men." And each verse closed with the joyfully confiding re-
frain: In mdnihus tuis tempora mea.

COMMUNION (Wisd. 16: 20)

1. Panem de caelo dedisti nobis, 1. Thou hast given us, 0 Lord,

Domine, habentem omne delecta- bread from heaven, having in it all

mentum, 2. et omnem sapor em that is delicious, 2. and the sweet-

suavitatis. ness of every taste.

It is the Lord who has given us the Holy Eucharist. That is the
first thought suggested by the melody, which progresses almost step-
wise, emphasizing /-/, g-g, a~a, c-c, until the word Domine surmounts
it all. Pronounce the words of this phrase distinctly and see how well
the chant follows the natural development of the text. The Bread of
heaven hast Thou given us, O Lord! Only Thou wast able to give it.
Thy wisdom alone could conceive such a gift; Thy love alone could be-
stow it upon us. In very truth, "Thy sustenance showeth forth Thy
sweetness to Thy children," as the subsequent verse of the Book of
Wisdom puts it.

Fourteenth Sunday after Pentecost 303

The second thought is: This Bread is full of sweetness. The text
alone rings with the joy of it, but the melody strives to make it still
more prominent. Omne in the second half of the first phrase is sung on
the dominant. (According to a stylistic requirement which is generally
observed in florid songs such as Graduals, a new melodic phrase is here
formed for the same thought.) Its first half is characterized by the pre-
dominating d; the second is introduced by a surprising fifth and closes
with the cadence customary with the fifth and sixth modes.

We have again been made partakers of this precious food from
heaven. That is the Lord's answer to our supplication and lamentation
in the Introit. He does not forget or forsake us. He comes into our
hearts, bringing His peace, which contains all sweetness in itself. Would
that we might thank Him as we ought! This heavenly food is to prepare
us for heaven, for a heavenly life even on this earth. Its sweetness will
detach us from all earthly joy.

FOURTEENTH SUNDAY AFTER PENTECOST

INTROIT (Ps. 83: 10, 11)

1. Protector nosier aspice, Deus, 1. Behold, 0 God, our protector,

et respice in faciem Christi tui: 2. and look on the face of thy Christ: 2.

quia melior est dies una in atriis for better is one day in thy courts

tuis super millia. Ps. Quam di- above thousands. Ps. How lovely are

lecta tabernacula tua, Domine vir- thy tabernacles, O Lord of hostsl *

tutuml * concupiscit, et deficit ani- my soul longeth and fainteth for

ma mea in atria Domini. the courts of the Lord.

The first phrase has a middle cadence on the finale and a final
cadence on the dominant after an emphatic b. It is dominated by the
petitions aspice and respice. Aspice is not an outcry, as it is in the In-
troit for Palm Sunday; nevertheless the fourth and the accented c make
it quite insistent. Without God the weakness of man is indeed wont to
fall, as today's Collect tells us. It is extremely difficult constantly to
comply with the admonitions of today's Epistle and to crucify our
flesh with its vices and concupiscences. Assistance from above is ab-
solutely necessary if we would folllow the dictates of the spirit always
and in all things. Hence this aspice and respice. But Christi tui receives
still greater stress. When we have congregated in the house of God
(atriis tuis), we may pray to Him: We are Thy anointed. Thy Christ;
we belong to the mystic body of Christ, having become conformable

304 Fourteenth Sunday after Pentecost

to the image of Christ through sanctifying grace. Hence we may expect
Thy special protection. The love which Thou bearest to Thy Son Christ
overflows upon Thy chidren, the Christians, Thy anointed ones.

In singing this piece care must be had that the low d over (Pro)-
te-(ctor) be not slighted. It is the beginning of a crescendo which must
increase till it reaches c. Perhaps this d e f g a served as a model for the
f g a c d c over (fdci)-em Christi; it is heard again over super mil-ilia).

The beginning of the second phrase on &b tends to make the closing
melisma of the preceding tui mellow and tender (cf. N. Sch., 249). For
here we are speaking of the consolation that our soul so eagerly receives
in church, in the house of God. Here we ever become more conformable
to the image of Christ; here our soul finds its true home in the heart of
God. Were it to taste all the joy of the world for a thousand days or a
thousand years, it would still be homesick and would long for its true
happiness — union with God. The 5b over quia and over the similar
melior is influenced by the following/, just as later c over una calls for h.
Una is emphasized, but millia has the richest melisma of the entire
composition. But however grateful we may feel for the treasures of grace
which are available in God's holy place, still a yearning fills our hearts
for that great day which shall know no evening, for the contemplation
of Christ (in fdciem Christi).

GRADUAL (Ps. 117: 8, 9)

1. Bonum est confidere in Do- 1. It is good to confide in the

w,ino, quam confidere in homine. ^ Lord, rather than to have confidence
1. Bonum est sperare in Domino, 2. in man. ^. 1. It is good to trust in
quam sperare in principihus. the Lord, 2. rather than to trust in

princes.

An antithesis exists between God and the world; that was the theme
of the Introit. In the Epistle flesh and spirit, in the Gospel God and
Mammon are placed in opposition. The Gradual loudly proclaims the
same thought. And were worldlings endowed with all power and wealth,
they would yet remain mere men, mortal men, incapable of bestowing
upon us lasting happiness. David, the composer of Psalm 117, knew
this from his own experience as well as from the history of his nation.
God alone is the source of true happiness of heart: His fidelity is never
wanting; His riches are boundless; His love is eternal.

Hardly a single musical turn is found in the corpus which does not
occur also in other Graduals of the fifth mode. Thus the beginning of
the first phrase bears great resemblance to that of the fourth and sixth
Sundays after Pentecost. The first phrase of the* verse is also much like

Fourteenth Sunday after Pentecost 305

the second phrase of the Gradual for the second Sunday in Lent (q.v.).
Its second phrase echoes the second phrase on the fourth Sunday after
Pentecost. The melodic development is not influenced by the meaning
of the individual words; it is purely harmonic, or, better perhaps, it
portrays but one sentiment: that of joyous confidence in God.

ALLELUIA VERSE (Ps. 94: 1)

1. Venite, exsultemus Domino: 1. Come, let us praise the Lord

2. juhilemus Deo salutari nostro. with joy: 2. let us joyfully sing to

God our Saviour.

Alleluia has the form a b c; in the same manner the verse opens
with a and closes on c. Melodically, two sentences can be distinguished,
each with an intonation (Venite, salutari), middle cadence (Domino,
nostro), and final cadence (Deo, and the closing neums over nostro). The
melody has therefore different divisions than the text. Over exsultemus
we meet the accented / for the first time, preceded and followed by a
minor third, which is again sung over Deo and several times over nostro.
On the tenth Sunday after Pentecost the second half of this extremely
ornate melisma also occurs at the close of the Alleluia- verse. There,
however, the crowning notes are only f g f d, while here they are g a f d.
Formerly this Alleluia had yet another verse (Wagner, III, 402 f.).

In the early Christian centuries this song was sung during the pro-
cession which led the newly baptized to the baptismal font each day
during Easter Week. For was it not the fountain of supernatural life and
bliss? Was it not there that the Lord had shown Himself as the Saviour?
This salvation and happiness flowed from Christ's death and resurrec-
tion. The verse is indeed an appropriate song for Sunday. In connection
with the Mass formulary of today, it reveals the choice made between
God and the world: "Venite, exsultemus Dominol" (Cf. Kirche und
Kanzel, 1927, 289 f.)

OFFERTORY (Ps. 33: 8, 9)

1. Immittet Angelus Domini in 1. The angel of the Lord shall en-

circuitu timentium eum, 2. et camp round about them that fear

eripiet eos: 3. gustate et videte, quo- Mm, 2. and shall deliver them: 3. 0

niam suavis est Dominus. taste and see that the Lord is sweet.

The three phrases composing this song have a very modest range:
the first and third confine themselves to a sixth; the second to a fifth.
There is here no dramatic scene, no vehement cry for help; it is rather
a song of consolation and confidence. Even though the world surges

306 Fourteenth Sunday after Pentecost

about us, enticing or threatening, we have nothing to fear, for God is
our Helper. We must take care not to make any considerable pause be-
tween the first two phrases, which compose the first part of the Offertory.
In content and spirit the second part resembles the Introit. There we
sang: "Better is one day in thy courts above thousands"; now we re-
affirm the same thought with: "O taste and see that the Lord is sweet."

We are reminded of the Vidi aquam, which we sing at the sprinkling
of the holy water during the Easter season, in the introductory formula
over Immittet, which occurs also at the beginning of the Communion
Hoc corpus of Passion Sunday. The passages over Angelus and (^i)-
menti-(um) are almost identical. Each syllable of the word Domini be-
gins with the same motive, which is, however, continued in a different
manner on the final syllable. (E)-ripiet and est have a similar melody.
Following the analogy of like passages, the Benedictines of Solesmes
indicate the rhythmic division cd he da f over (eir)-cüitu, (vi)-de-(te), and
D6-(minus). In the final alleluia of the Offertory for the Rogation Mass,
the same formula is employed. According to the monks of Solesmes the
grouping of the neums has a melodic, rather than a musical, signification.
From gusidte on, the second part is more lively, as well as richer melo-
dically. As a result of their fourths, d-a, c-g, the imperative forms gus-
idte and videte effect a similar impression.

Holy angels form a protecting wall about us. But Christ Himself is
the Angel of the Lord, the Angel of the great counsel, as He is called in
the Introit for the third Mass of Christmas. He comes in the mystery of
the Mass, descending upon the assembled congregation. He comes with
all His love, all His power, and frees us from all that may harm soul or
body. But it is not only His presence that is to delight us: the angels
of the Lord invite us: gusidte et videie. In Holy Communion He becomes
our very food. These are the words which form the oldest and most
cherished Communion-song of the early Church (cf. the Communion
for the eighth Sunday after Pentecost).

COMMUNION (Matt. 6:33)

1. Primum quaerite regnum Dei, 1. Seek first the kingdom of God,

2. et omnia adjicientur vohis, dicit 2. and all things shall he added unto
Dominum. you, saith the Lord.

The Communion wishes to impress firmly upon our minds the final
thought of today's Gospel. In our whole mode of life, in our inner soul
as well as in our external dealings with others, the kingdom of God, of
Christ the King, is to be formed and realized. That alone is the guarantee

Fifteenth Sunday after Pentecost 307

of true peace and welfare and happiness. Then all things else will be
added. Thus saith the Lord.

The melody is not so much a fervent exhortation as an expression
of trust in the fulfillment of these words, or even of hearty thanks for
all that divine Providence has in store for us. Regnum Dei is made im-
pressive by means of a chord resembling a tritone. For everything de-
pends upon this, that God, God exclusively, be acknowledged and
obeyed as the true King.

We may sing the last two words somewhat softly, thus placing the
preceding more prominently in relief.

Plainsong delights in using the turn g b a g which occurs over Dei.
The school of Palestrina, however, avoids it on account of the leap made
from the accented first note of the group of four.

There is some resemblance to this melody in the Communion for
the feast of St. Andrew the Apostle.

FIFTEENTH SUNDAY AFTER PENTECOST

INTROIT (Ps. 85: 1, 2, 3)

1. Inclina, Domine, aurem tuam l.Bow down thine ear, 0 Lord, to

ad me, et exaudi me: 2. salvum fac me, and hear me: 2. save thy servant,

servum tuum, Deus mens, speran- O my God, that trusteth in thee: 3.

tern in te: 3. miserere mihi. Do- have mercy on me, O Lord, for I

mine, quoniam at te clamavi tola have cried to thee all the day. Ps.

die. Ps. Laetifica animam servi Give joy to the soul of thy servant: *

tui: * quia ad te, Domine, animam for to thee, O Lord, have I lifted up

meam levavi. my soul.

Deus meus, sperantem in te forms the melodic nucleus of this Introit.
Confidence in God is its theme. From this the many petitions, the many
imperatives, receive their character: Thou art my God; in Thee I trust.
Calmly, and with a wealth of assurance, the seconds ascend to high c.
At the end of each word, however, a slight bending back of the melody
occurs: g-f, h-a, c-a; in this manner the thesis that follows is prepared
for and introduced. It is quite impossible to sing this passage too fer-
vently or too ardently. Confidence is sustained by reverence, and here
we pray: Deus meus. In the first and third phrases, as well as in the
psalm-verse, Domine must be well delineated.

The first phrase supports itself on a, the second on g, the third on /.
The first half of the first phrase is made forceful by a; while the second

308 Fifteenth Sunday after Pentecost

half surprises us by its descent into the lower range. We have met the
same intonation in various other chants. After the accent with the
pressus, the remaining notes over Domine are modest and tender in char-
acter.

In the second phrase the three notes over salvum are to be stressed.
The concatenation of the thirds a-f, g-e, f-d characterizes the third
phrase, as do also the low notes in its second half. It almost sounds like
a De profündis, a call from the depths of human helplessness. Clamdvi
is a suppliant cry and resounds throughout the day. Over miserere, as
frequently happens, principal and secondary accent have only one note,
while each of the following syllables has three.

Whoever examines his conscience according to the admonitions of
today's Epistle will feel himself impelled to pray as this chant does. For
we find it extremely difficult to persevere, to do good untiringly, to take
care that we be not tempted. It is hard for us to bear the burdens of
others; each of us finds his own burden^ — the responsibility for all his
acts of commission and omission — heavy enough. Surely we have every
reason to cry to God: "Bow down Thine ear, hear me, heal me, save me,
have mercy on me!" But we ought also to pray with confidence. There
should be no gloomy coloring to our song, not even in the third phrase.
In the verse the Psalmist himself dares to pray: "Give joy to the soul
of Thy servant."

Let us consider the final words of the psalm- verse: "To Thee, O
Lord, have I lifted up my soul." Is it true? Is my prayer and song an
elevation of my being, of my whole personality, to God? Is it truly a
Gloria Patril

Revue, 9, 111 f.

GRADUAL (Ps. 91: 2, 3)

1. Bonum est confitere Domino 1. It is good to give praise to the

2. et psallere nomino tuo, AUissime. Lord: 2. and to sing to thy name, 0

jif. 1. Ad annuntiandum mane, 2. most High. '^. 1. To show forth in

misericordiam tuam, 3. et veritatem the morning 2. thy mercy, 3. and

tuam per noctem. in the night thy truth.

Both parts of the Gradual have the same prolonged close: AUissime
= per noctem, except that the unaccented syllable -si- in the first word
has a clivis of its own. The beginning of the corpus and the ascent over
confiteri with the cheerful major scale have a pleasant ring. From then
on, however, the melody moves within the tetrachord a-d, and several
times repeats d c h c. Here a fluent presentation and a proper empha-
sizing of the significant accents will avert the danger of monotony.

Fifteenth Sunday after Pentecost 309

In the verse we meet the melody with which we are acquainted from
the verse for Maundy Thursday; it is marked by the vigorous final ca-
dence over mane. Any considerable pause after mane is incompatible
with the text.

The beginning of this verse alone is proper; the rest, as far as miser i-
cordiam inclusive, is sung on the fourth Sunday after Pentecost. Compare
also the verse for Maundy Thursday. Mane has an energetic final ca-
dence, which in other pieces agrees with the divisions of the text. No
lengthy pause is allowable here — one of the few instances in which the
divisions of melody and text do not coincide. Tuam is known to us from
the passage over Dominus in the Gradual for Easter Sunday and from
tuam in the Gradual for the feast of the Assumption. Et veritätem tuam
has been taken over from the Gradual Justus ut palma, both text and
melody; an appropriation, consequently, from the second mode. In both
Graduals the verses have the same wording, but up to this point the
melody differs. Per noctem again veers back, rather abruptly, it must be
admitted, to the fifth mode.

In the psalms the mercy and fidelity of God are frequently combined.
Today's Gospel mentions an extraordinary instance of His mercy.
"When the Lord had seen, being moved with mercy toward her [the
widow]. He said to her: 'Weep not'." God does not exercise His mercy
at particular moments; it accompanies us, as Psalm 22 says, all the days
of our life. In Psalm 32 we read: "All his works are done with faithful-
ness." God's fidelity, however firm and unshakable it may be, has noth-
ing about it that is either difficult or irksome. It is the fidelity of a merci-
ful God. For this great favor we can never thank Him sufficiently. The
hour of dawn drives home this truth most forcibly. For at that time
particularly is God's mercy made manifest in the liturgical Sacrifice
with especial splendor. Throughout the entire day, and even during the
night (per noctem), this song ought never to cease. Even when the
night of bitter woe breaks in upon us we should hold fast to the mercy
and fidelity of God, and thereby sublimate and transfigure all our sor-
rows. This Gradual is like the prelude to the praise given by the as-
sembled throng in today's Gospel: "There came a fear upon all of them,
and they glorified God, saying: A great prophet is risen up among us,
and God hath visited His people."

ALLELUIA VERSE (Ps. 94: 3)

1. Quoniam Deus magnus domi- 1. For the Lord is a great God, 2.

nus, 2. et Rex magnus super om- and a great king over all the earth,
nem terram.

310 Fifteenth Sunday after Pentecost

Quoniam — "for" — introduces the reasons for the glad Alleluia call.
Because God is so great, so sublime, we are impelled to glorify His great-
ness in new ways. There is nothing we are more in need of than an ever-
expanding, ever-widening and deepening concept of the Deity. This is
what we intend to impress upon the minds of the faithful by this song.
Over the word magnus, in both instances, the melody seems to hover
lovingly. In the Alleluia for the eighth Sunday after Pentecost we also
laud God's immensity. On that day the melody wishes rather to extol
His sublimity; today, however, the fullness and extent of His power. He
is Lord and King over the entire world. His power reaches even where
that of all men, be they the mightiest earthly rulers, is weak and in-
effectual. Death itself is not exempt. When He says Surge — "arise,"
Death must give up his victims. Now God uses His regal power in order
to render us happy; hence the joyful tone.

This Alleluia was formerly sung in the Easter procession. It has
the structure a b c ( = a^) d ( = b^) and the archaic form, which does not
round off the close of the verse with the melody developed by the ju-
hilus.

The psalmodic construction of the seventh mode is still evident in
the verse. The two phrases composing it have like introductions: Quo-
niam Deus and et Rex; a similar middle cadence, which in the first phrase
is on the fifth above the tonic (magnus), and in the second phrase, as
in many other Alleluias of the seventh mode (e.g., that of the fourth
Sunday after Pentecost), upon the third above the tonic (rex magnus);
finally, very similar closing cadences, Dominus and omnem. Terram has
a melody by itself, which in its beginning harks back to magnus of the
first phrase, and in its cadences agrees with the close of the Alleluia-
verse on the feast of the Dedication of a Church. In its beginning, om-
nem employs a melodic turn which is proper to the Alleluias of the
second mode (see, for example, that of the third Mass of Christmas).

OFFERTORY (Ps. 39: 2, 3, 4)

1. Expectans expectavi Dominum, 1. With expectation I have waited

et respexit me: 2. et exaudivit de- for the Lord, and he had regard to

precationem meam, 3. et immisit me: 2. and he heard my prayer, 3.

in OS meum canticum novum, 4. and put a new canticle into my

hymnum Deo nostro. mouth, 4. a song to our God,

In the Gospel we heard the narrative of the miracle wrought at the
city gate of Naim. We do not know if the youth's mother had a lively
faith in the omnipotence of Jesus, and if she was, perhaps, expecting
Him to come to her aid. But of this we are certain: the Lord looked upon

Fifteenth Sunday after Pentecost 311

her lovingly, and tenderly said: "Weep not!" And we know that she
sang a new song to Him, such as had never before come from her heart,
when she could again look into her son's animated eyes and when the
Lord placed the warm hand of her child into her own. It was a song of
praise to God.

St. Augustine comments upon this Gospel: "That her son was called
again to life was the joy of the widowed mother; that the souls of men
are every day called to life is the joy of our Mother the Church." Fre-
quently Mother Church has to wait a long time, has to pray much, be-
fore the mercy of God reawakens the souls of her children to life. But
daily she must also thank Him for such marks of kindness. Today's
Offertory is a song of thanksgiving coming from the very depths of her
maternal heart. God Himself has placed it upon her lips. Furthermore,
in the Holy Eucharist He has given her the most perfect song of praise
and thanksgiving that can ascend to heaven.

The melody over the first three words vividly pictures the raising
of the eyes to God, the begging for His grace; it is almost too noticeable,
in fact. For the theme of today's Offertory is not expectation and long-
ing, but rather thanksgiving: He has looked upon me, He has heard me,
He has placed a new canticle into my mouth.

The first phrase has a range of a seventh and two endings on c.
Respexit me has a triumphant ring. Dominum receives the same treat-
ment, for example, as ddipe in the Introit for Corpus Christi. The sec-
ond phrase confines itself to a range of a fifth and never extends beyond
d. It has its endings on a and repeats the same thought as the second
part of the first phrase. The third phrase, with a range of a sixth (g-e),
begins with the same sparkling motive as respexit in the first phrase
and closes still more brilliantly than the former with a modulation to c.
Its joy overflows into the fourth phrase. In this passage the tonic of the
mode appears for the very first time. Over Deo g a and d ch g are to be
sung broadly and solemnly. The whole chant must be delivered in a
lively fashion.

COMMUNION (John 6: 52)

1. Panis, quern ego dedero, caro 1. The bread that I will give is

mea est 2. pro saeculi vita. my flesh 2. for the life of the world.

Vita — "life!" That is the last word of today's proper chants. Christ
is our life. He showed Himself to be the Ruler of life by reawakening the
youth of Naim. He is our life in the Holy Eucharist, the living and life-
giving Bread. Only through Him can the world attain to life and only by
His power can its life be increased and developed.

312 Sixteenth Sunday after Pentecost

Holy joy welled up from the heart of the Saviour when He spoke
the prophetic words we sing here. This joy is reflected by the brilliant
and exultant melody. It attains its summit and greatest expansion pre-
cisely over the word vita. The thought, "life of the world," forms an in-
dependent musical phrase, being, however, strongly influenced by the
melody over mea est in the first phrase. Here we have a descending fourth,
followed by a pes and a clivis, while in the former instance there was a
descending fifth with a descending pes and cUmacus. These sequences
of tones and the surprising beginning over Panis are well calculated to
rouse in our souls reverent astonishment at the marvels spoken of. For
this reason, too, the word ego is especially emphasized by the melody.

The two phrasec «iiffer in this, that the first supports itself in the
first half on a and reaches low a four times in its second half, while the
second phrase in its first half stresses g and four times strikes high c.

Some time— thus we hope and pray — the Risen One will also cry
to us: "I say to thee, arise," and will lead us into the life of eternal
blessedness. For this is His solemn promise: "He that eateth my
flesh, and drinketh my blood_ I will raise him up in the last day."

SIXTEENTH SUNDAY AFTER PENTECOST

INTROIT (Ps. 85: 3, 5)

1. Miserere mihi Domine, quo- 1. Have mercy on me, 0 Lord, for

niam ad te clamavi tota die: 2. quia I have cried to thee all the day: 2.

tu Domine suavis ac mitis es, et for thou, O Lord, art sweet and

copiosus in misericordia omnibus mild, and plenteous in mercy to all

invocantihus te. Ps. Inclina Do- that call upon thee. Ps. Bow down

mine aurem tuam et exaudi me: * thine ear to me, O Lord, and hear

quoniam inops et pauper sum ego. me: * for I am needy and poor.

This Introit begins like the Introit Laetdhitur Justus, now in the
Common of a Martyr not a Bishop, which in the old manuscripts opens
the Mass for the feast of St. Vincent. There it is a cry of joy; here a
prayer for mercy. How can the two be reconciled? Perhaps we may ex-
plain today's melody in the same manner as we did that for the third
Sunday after Pentecost. The acknowledgment that God is good and
mild and overflowing with mercy, and the mood produced by it is all
contained in the first phrase. There is no misery portrayed in the melody,
no inner strife. Assurance fills the singer's heart: my Redeemer lives
and His heart is open to my incessant (tota die) prayer. How touching
and how tender is the melody of the second phrase! With its minor thirds

Sixteenth Sunday after Pentecost 313

and semitones it seems to proceed from the heart of Jesus Himself. If
major thirds and whole steps be substituted in their place, it will soon
become apparent what the composer's intention in this passage was.
We seem to hear the Saviour Himself singing: mitis sum — I Myself am
goodness and mildness. And this goodness, this mildness, this mercy is
infinitely boundless in width and depth; it is inexhaustible. To impress
this upon the hearts of the faithful so well that it will never be forgotten,
in any condition or state of life, not even when oppressed by sin, that is
the aim of today's Introit. Someone has said of this melody that the cry
for mercy continually grows more unrestrained. (Betende Kirche, p. 366).
The melody, however, does not place any special stress upon this point.
It wants to console, to encourage, to instill confidence. What a deep im-
pression copiosus must have made when, in former times, it was repeated
after every verse!

On the Friday after Passion Sunday, the melody for the Introit be-
gins like today's. At its very beginning, however, instead of an interval
of a fourth it has a third; but that chant, it must be noted, belongs to
the fifth mode. The spirit of the Introit Miserere is predominantly joy-
ful. In the first half of the second phrase the presentation must obviously
be more tender and cordial. According to the annotated manuscripts,
(su)-ävis ac mitis is to be prolonged slightly. Copiosus must be sung with
all possible brilliancy. One readily notes some resemblance to henigna est
misericordia in the first antiphon for the blessing of the ashes on Ash
Wednesday, which is filled with the same spirit; also the similarity be-
tween (Dö)-mine and ( miser ic6r)-dia. The composer seemed almost too
careful in his plan of giving the second syllable of a dactyllic word more
than one note. The melody thus avoids all ungraceful angles.

Whoever sings and prays in the spirit of this melody can never feel
entirely poor or miserable. For in the holy Sacrifice of the Mass the
fountains of eternal mercy are unceasingly operative.

GRADUAL

The explanation of the Gradual will be found under the third Sun-
day after Epiphany. In the Epistle St. Paul depicts the richness of the
glory of Christ, which He bestows upon us ''abundantly," so that we
are filled "unto all the fullness of God." In return for such goodness we
can only reverently thank God and with the Apostle "bend the knee to
the Father of our Lord Jesus Christ." In the new Sion, which is His
Church, we behold His glory and experience His gracious dealings with
us.

The Apostle speaks to us as a prisoner, as a symbol of the suffering
Church in her earthly exile. Around her the darkness grows ever deeper^

■314 Sixteenth Sunday after Pentecost

but in the same degree she gains in grace and glory. Affliction should
purge the members of the Body, should cause their love and faith to in-
crease, and thus lead them into the depths of Christ and into His glory.
In this manner the Lord "builds" His new Sion, His glorified Church,
of well-known stones; there He will dwell as Victor and King.(Bomm,
Volksmessbuch).

ALLELUIA VERSE (Ps. 97: 1)

1. Cantate Domino canticum no- 1. Sing ye to the Lord a new can-

vum: 2. quia mirahilia fecit Domi- tide: 2. for the Lord hath done
nus. wonderful things.

The reverent surprise with which the Gradual began, continually
mounts in the course of the piece and finally develops into a song of joy.
It continues in the Alleluia in a bright tone and with gentle persuasive-
ness, striving to captivate hearts, urging them on to joy in the Lord.
Were we to strive to contemplate the wonderful things of God, the mar-
vels of His grace, of His mysteries, the prodigies of the Eucharistie Sac-
rifice; were we to make an earnest effort to penetrate into this world,
then this song would give new stimulus and energy every time we should
assist at Mass. Then our whole soul would sing out this melody as a
small recompense to God for the gift of His only-begotten Son.

Over Cantate the melody swells as far as the pressus on c; then it
relaxes somewhat, only to prepare for a greater climax with Domino,
Our song is intended for the Lord, and for Him alone. The third sig-
nificant word of this verse, mirabilia, is made prominent like the first
two, but it may be sung with still greater warmth. The tempo must, of
course, be quite lively.

So far as the melody is concerned, this Sunday's Alleluia is much
like that of the twenty-second Sunday after Pentecost. Both have the
same twofold division, clearly indicated by the melody. It is difficult to
determine which is the original composition. The probability seems to
favor the twenty-second Sunday after Pentecost, for in the most an-
cient manuscripts the Alleluia Cantate Domino is not mentioned, while
in manuscript 121 of Einsiedeln the text is given, but without any
neums, although a place was reserved for their insertion. Three small
variants seem to be mere printing mistakes:

Sixteenth Sunday Twenty-second Sunday

(D6mi)-no gf Dominum ge

(D6)-mi-(nus) fgaga (e6)-rum faga

Sixteenth Sunday after Pentecost 315

Over the second last word:
bistropha tristropha

preceded by low d.

The preceding note was added, perhaps, because plainsong does not
generally begin a new phrase with a tristropha, or because the longer
text brought a change with it. Final gf sounds decidedly more pleasant
and provides for a better sequence. For this reason we have after Domino
a pause cutting the two middle lines, while that after Dominum cuts
only the topmost line.

Revue, 21, 97 ff.

OFFERTORY (Ps. 39: 14, 15)

1. Domine, in auxilium meum 1. Look down, O Lord, to help me:

respice: 2. confundantur et reverean- 2. let them he confounded and

tur, qui quaerunt animam meam, ashamed that seek after my soul to

ut auf er ant eam: 3. Domine, in take it away: S. look down, 0 Lord,

auxilium meum respice. to help me.

Both text and melody of the first part are presented twice. The
twenty-third Sunday after Pentecost offers the only similar case. It re-
minds us of the early practice of repeating a part (usually the last) of the
antiphon after every verse that was joined to the Offertory. It should be
noted how beautifully this repetition is introduced by the tense, forward-
urging cadence over eam. The melody has a narrow range, is tender and
fervent. Its simplicity is surpassed only by that of the Offertory of the
second Sunday after Pentecost. Numerous pressus, however, make it
fairly eloquent. The text would allow of a quite different melodic treat-
ment, and has in fact found such also in plainsong. Compare the turbu-
lent Communion Erubescant et reveredntur on the Tuesday of Holy Week,
or the indignant Communion Confundantur superhi from the Mass Lo-
quebar in the Common of a Virgin and Martyr. But all such excitement
is foreign to the Offertory for this Sunday.

Who prays thus? Surely it is the soul that knows how its adversary
the devil goes about, seeking (quaerens) whom he may devour; the soul
that sees itself surrounded by foes whom it cannot overcome by its own
strength. It looks to the Lord, to Him who loves it and can give it all
things, and begs for a loving glance and assistance. When we think of
the words addressed by our Saviour to Saul the persecutor: "Why per-
secutest thou me?" and infer from this that He regards Himself one with
the Church in all that threatens and harasses it, then we may place these
words upon the lips of the Saviour Himself, who is now to offer Himself

316 Sixteenth Sunday after Pentecost

again upon the altar. Then we may be certain that Christ prays thus
to the Father for us; and so we sink readily into the quiet atmosphere
of the melody. We enter into its spirit even more when the repetition
Domine in auxilium meum respice is sung tenderly and devoutly. Now
we understand why all three phrases are given about equal importance:
a strongly contrasting phrase in the middle would be somewhat dis-
turbing. The same motive occurs over qui quaerunt and ut duferant. The
word-accent is especially emphasized by the fourth and the prolonged
note. Over in auxilium, however, no fourth occurs. Perhaps this is due
to the fact that in this instance two syllables precede the word-accent,
while in both other cases a single syllable precedes.

The two verses which the ancient manuscripts add to this Ofifertory
on the Friday after the second Sunday in Lent had an unusually ornate
melody on their last word. So much the more impressive must have
been the simple Domine, which is likewise repeated in the manuscripts.

COMMUNION (Ps. 70: 16, 17, 18)

1. Domine, memorahor justitiae 1. 0 Lord, I will he mindful of

tuae solius: 2. Dens, docuisti me a thy justice alone: 2. thou hast taught

juventute mea, 3. et usque in senec- me, O God, from my youth, 3. and

tam et senium, Deus, ne derelin- unto old age and grey hairs, O

quas me. God, forsake me not.

Let us first of all consider the middle phrase: Deus, docuisti me a
juventute mea. It takes its inception a fourth higher than the preceding
note, adheres to the dominant high c, has a group of two and of three
notes over me-(a) and the preceding syllable, and a pleasing harmony.
It is a soul's grateful expression for the loving care that God has taken
of it from its youth to the present day, even until today's Communion,
for this is a Communion song. Whoever considers all this sees the debt
of gratitude become infinitely great. But he finds his consolation in Him
who has come in Holy Communion, whose thanksgiving is infinite in
value.

The first and last phrases are not so cheerful; in fact, one must say
that they are almost heavy, depressing. This results from the frequent
descent of the melody to low d, the accentuation of the tonic g, and the
repetition of the same formula: Memorahor =senectam, justitiae = senium,
and the same motive a fourth higher over solius =( de )-re-(linquas).
The thought of God's justice may become extremely oppressive, as
well as the prospect of lonely old age here referred to. And the repetition
of senectam and senium compels us to think of all the unwelcome con-
comitants of old age. When loneliness creeps into my heart, when those

Seventeenth Sunday after Pentecost 317

desert me on whose love I had reckoned, or if they shall have left this
life before me, when in the evening of my life the awful meaning of Thy
justice, O God, flashes up in my mind, when the very thought of Thy
loving kindness since the days of my childhood only tends to increase
my responsibility, and when the night approaches, then, O God, be
Thou at my side, desert me not. However great the similarity of the
first and third phrases may be, still the latter shows an evident develop-
ment, an increase of feeling, an intensely prayerful attitude. Usque must
be sung slowly and impressively; so also Deus with the pressus, which
corresponds to the single note in the first phrase over tuae; then the ex-
pansion of fga over so-(lius), corresponding to the twofold f a c over ne
de-(relinquas). Hence this third phrase must have a more tender ring
than the first. Even though the thought of God's justice is appalling,
still it is not entirely devoid of consolation. It would be a mistake to
consider this melody an outgrowth of anguish or despondency. In His
justice God places no greater burden on any man's shoulders than he is
able to bear. Men often judge harshly, because frequently they overlook
the circumstances which lessen the grievousness of the offense. God knows
all things; He, and He alone, knows the true motives behind every act.
His justice, moreover, is always tempered with mercy.

"This Communion portrays an entire life's history: the Saviour of
thy childhood, thy youth, thy manhood, thy old age" {K. L.).

SEVENTEENTH SUNDAY AFTER

PENTECOST

INTROIT (Ps. 118: 137, 124)

1. Justus es, Domine, et rectum 1. Just thou art, O Lord, and thy

judicium tuum: 2. faccum servo tuo , judgment is right; 2. deal with thy

secundum misericordiam tuam. Ps. servant according to thy mercy. Ps.

Beati immaculati in via: * qui Blessed are the unde filed in the way:

ambulant in lege Domini. * that walk in the law of the Lord.

We begin today's Introit with an act of faith; "Thou art just, O
Lord, and all that Thou commandest and orderest is just." With this
declaration all questioning, all scrutiny, all doubt is silenced. And the
ultimate decision which God will announce on Judgment Day is like-
wise just. The closer we come to the end of the liturgical year, the more
frequently does the Church hold this thought of the great judgment be-
fore our eyes. Shall we be able to endure it, this manifestation of God's

318 Seventeenth Sunday after Pentecost

justice? If we consider this, then we shall think it a kindness on God's
part that we are now allowed to appeal to His mercy: now we under-
stand why the melody of the second phrase is so stirring, almost turbu-
lent: we seem to stretch out to grasp the merciful hand of God. His
justice alone can return to us the purity which we perhaps lost on the
difficult and dangerous journey through life. It is His merciful love alone
that can give us the requisite strength henceforth to remain true to His
commandments, especially to that principal one mentioned in today's
Gospel — love of God and of neighbor.

The rapid ascent of the melody to high e is quite common in In-
troits of the first mode; for example, Salus autem and Sapientiam from
the Mass for several Martyrs, and especially the Introit Suscepimus
Deus, which is sung on the eighth Sunday after Pentecost and on Feb-
ruary 2. There we find a similar beginning with a fifth and the same
melody over the words (mi)-seric6rdiam tuam as we have here over
judicium tuum. In the former piece, however, the development is drawn
on larger lines and is easier of comprehension, while in today's Introit
tuo leads over to the conclusion somewhat too suddenly. The pause after
iuo is justified only by the necessity for taking breath. The melodic con-
tinuity—compare e c a c with the subsequent c af g f- — is thereby broken.
Far better would be the effect if the whole could be sung without any
interruption. In a large choir, the individuals might breathe at different
places. Tuo is also the only word with melodic shifting, since the accented
syllable is lower than the following syllable. The ending of the second
phrase expands the closing motive of the first phrase a fifth lower.

Revue gr., 11, 123 ff.

GRADUAL (Ps. 32: 12, 6)

1. Beata gens, cujus est Dominus 1. Blessed is the nation whose

Deus eorum: 2. populus, quern God is the Lord: 2. the people whom

elegit Dominus 3. in hereditatem he hath chosen for his inheritance,

sihi. f. 1. Verho Domini caeli f. 1. By the word of the Lord the

firmati sunt: 2. et spiritu oris ejus heavens were established, 2. and hy

3. omnis virtus eorum. the spirit of his mouth 3. all their

power.

If the sevenfold unity of which the Epistle has just spoken binds us
all together; if we walk worthy of the vocation to which we are called;
if we support one another with all meekness, humility, patience, and
charity; if v/e are careful to keep the unity of the spirit in the bond of
peace, then are we a blessed nation, then God is our God^we are His
inheritance and He, the Eternal, will one day be our inheritance and
reward exceeding great.

Seventeenth Sunday after Pentecost 319

The first phrase of the verse corresponds to the second in the Introit
for the second Sunday after Easter (cf. p. 191). God's almighty word
has called into existence the heavens with their innumerable stars and
thus created a world of light and order and harmony. If we bring our
wills into perfect accord with that of God, then we call into being in our
interior and around us a cosmos of marvelous light, order, and harmony.

In the corpus each of the three phrases ascends to c. Emphasis is
added in the third phrase by the h. The love of God which led Him to
predestine us to glory is apparently alluded to here. Over sihi fg fd fa is
interposed between two identical members. The first four notes are again
used to bring the piece to a close. At the beginning of the verse, a pre-
liminary / prolongs its effect in the subsequent h\>; then the accented c
calls for h. The cadence over Domini is found in pieces of various modes.
Here, as above with Dominus, the pressus before the final note effective-
ly enhances the close. The words caeli firmäti sunt are brought well to
the fore. Ejus has a cadence like Dominus above. Mention was made of
the same closing melody in the Gradual for the tenth Sunday after Pen-
tecost.

ALLELUIA VERSE (Ps. 101: 2)

1. Domine, exaudi orationem 1. OLord, hear my prayer, 2. and

meam, 2. et clamor meus ad te let my cry come unto thee,
veniat.

The Alleluia has the form a b b^. The first part of b is repeated on
a reduced scale in b^, while the second part is expanded. Both phrases
open on a, as well as the repetition with ad te. Exaudi bears the middle
cadence in the first phrase; meus in the second. Meam and (veni)-at carry
the final cadences. The psalmodic construction is unmistakable. Special
vehemence issues from the cry exaudi. On the twenty-third Sunday after
Pentecost we meet it in exactly the same form.

When we hear the words of the Gospel: "Thou shalt love the Lord
thy God with thy whole heart," then there is need to pray for love; and
when we hear the passage concerning Christ's divinity, then there is
great need to pray for faith.

OFFERTORY (Dan. 9: 17, 18, 19)

1. Oravi Deum meum ego Daniel 1. I, Daniel, prayed to my God,

dicens; 2. Exaudi, Domine, preces saying: 2. Hear, O Lord, the

servi tui: 3. illumina faciem tuam prayers of thy servant: 3. let thy

super sanctuarium tuum: 4. et pro- face shine upon thy sanctuary: 4.

320 Seventeenth Sunday after Pentecost

pitius intende populum istum, su- and favorably look down upon this
per quern invocatum est nomen people upon whom thy name is in-
tuum, Deus. voked, 0 God.

In the first phrase the one who prays mentions his name — a rare
occurrence. The introduction is quiet, never going beyond the tenor of
the mode (a). Daniel prays to his Lord and God in the oppression and
the hardships of the Babylonian captivity. His beloved people, once the
elect of God, is pining away in a strange land, beaten and scattered.
Hence that emphatic cry of the melody: Exdudi — "Hear, 0 Lord, the
prayers of thy servant!" After the large interval of a fourth follow quiet
seconds, thus making Exdudi all the more impressive. Preces accords
with Deum in the first and populum in the fourth phrase. At the end,
tui is turned upward (e f) because the following phrase begins with dg.
In the second phrase, only exdudi receives prominence; the third phrase
initiates a greater development. For was not this the prophet's most
bitter grievance, that the sanctuary in Jerusalem had become a heap of
ruins? Oh, let Thy glorious countenance once more regard this spot, the
the place which Thou Thyself hast chosen! The melodic turn c ga ef ga
over super sanctud-(rium) is frequently employed in Graduals belonging
to the third mode. Tuam, like tuum in the fourth phrase, is accentuated.
The first part of the fourth phrase, however, is made still more impressive.
The passage dg dg g at the beginning of the third phrase becomes gc dc c
here. "Favorably look down upon this people," that is, the chosen people.
It is Thy people, bearing Thy name. The tone-sequence fg cd combines
istum and super, according to the rules which effect contrast in uniting
phrases or parts of phrases in the first and eighth modes. Deus repeats
its first member. An ornate closing melisma, such as the one here, is
practically a stylistic necessity in Offertories.

For these modern times Daniel's Offertory prayer is also most op-
portune. We confidently hope to emerge from the present collapse of
spiritual faith and Christian morals with the help of God's grace; we
long for the religious renascence into the realm of the "King of Love,"
for that rebirth which must be effected, however much the foolish and
malicious world may oppose it. Mankind must find the true answer to
the two momentous questions which have been its greatest concern
throughout history, the two points brought up in today's Gospel: the
question of the greatest commandment and that of the person of Christ.
(Oberhammer).

In the Eucharistie Sacrifice, Christ, the Son of the Living God,
does look favorably upon us. There He manifests His infinite love to the
Father and to us.

Eighteenth Sunday after Pentecost 321

COMMUNION (Ps. 75: 12, 13)

1. Vovete, et reddite Domino Deo 1. Vow ye, and pay to the Lord

vestro, omnes qui in circuitu ejus your God, all you that round about
affertis munera: 2. terrihili, et ei him bring presents: 2. to him that
qui aufert spiritum principum: 3. is terrible, even to him who taketh
terribili apud reges terrae. away the spirit of princes: 3. to

the terrible with all the kings of the

earth.

Few Communions have such a serious text as this one. Generally
they speak words of consolation and of the goodness of God, or present
our humble yet confident petitions. Here, however, God is twice called
"the Terrible," before whom all the kings of the earth tremble. He ap-
pears here, as in the Introit, as the judge of the earth (to whom today's
Gospel also makes reference) when the Lord says to His Lord — the Fa-
ther to His Son — that He will subdue all His enemies and make them
His footstool. He will crush all the obstinacy of earthly potentates, will
take their courage from them — or, as others translate it, will rob them
of their breath^ — all their pride and self-esteem will be as nothing in the
sight of His glory and majesty.

The first terribili sets in on the dominant, and with its major third
is the most significant word of the entire melody, just as the phrase
which it opens surpasses the other two. In the first phrase, the increase
of the melody over the first three words seems to parallel the thought:
you must not only make vows: rather you must keep and fulfill them.
Over Dominus the word-accent has only a single note, while the follow-
ing unaccented syllable supports a tristropha, a common occurrence.
Over in circuitu ejus the melody describes a semicircle as if imitating
the sense of the words. The second terribili likewise begins on the domi-
nant and then reverently bows before the majesty of God.

The fear of the Lord, of Him who will one day judge the whole
world, must also underlie our activity in church music. In our worship
we can never be too reverent. For, while we live, we can receive into our
hearts Christ, our Saviour, our Redeemer and Consoler, whose greatness
we adore, whose arrival for judgment we await.

EIGHTEENTH SUNDAY AFTER PENTECOST

Up to the seventeenth Sunday after Pentecost inclusive, the In-
troits were taken from the psalms. Beginning with the present Sunday,

322 Eighteenth Sunday after Pentecost

the text will be taken from other books of Holy Writ, with the exception
of the Introit for the twenty-second Sunday. Upon closer examination,
all the texts sung today, the Alleluia-verse excepted, appear as parts of
an ancient formulary for the Dedication of a Church:^ with the Introit
and the psalm- verse Laetdtus sum. . . we enter the house of the Lord;
the Gradual with the words of the same psalm and the Offertory treat
of the altar and the sacrifice; the Communion urges us to bring our sac-
rificial gifts and to offer our worship in God's house. Just when this for-
mulary was transferred to the present Sunday is not known. In very
early times this Sunday followed immediately upon the autumnal
Ember Days; since the services of Ember Saturday were prolonged
throughout the night till morning, the day did not have a Mass proper
to it.

INTROIT (Ecclus. 36: 18)

1. Da pacem, Domine, susti- 1. Give peace, 0 Lord, to them that

nentihus te, 2. ut prophetae tui patiently wait for thee, 2. that thy

fideles inveniantur: 3. exaudi preces prophets may he found faithful: 3.

servi tui, et plehis tuae Israel. Ps. hear the prayers of thy servant, and

Laetatus sum in his quae dicta of thy people Israel. Ps. / rejoiced

sunt mihi; * in domum Domini at the things that were said to me: *

ibimus. we shall go into the house of the

Lord.

To be a Christian, as Cardinal Newman remarks, is to keep on the
lookout for Christ. Again holy Mother Church invites us to maintain
this watchfulness. In fact, she considers it one of her most important
and sublime duties. She is especially alive to this obligation during Ad-
vent and toward the end of the liturgical year. We belong to those who
await the Lord (sustinentihus te), who prepare for His coming and are
predisposed by the action of divine grace. It is for this reason that we
today pray for peace and all that comes in its train. As the palsied man
in this Sunday's Gospel longed to be cured, and only attained full re-
covery and true peace after the Lord said to him: "Thy sins are forgiven
the»," so in the Introit we cry Da pacem and toward the end of Mass,
Dona nobis pacem. Streams of peace will the Lord cause to flow into the
hearts of men — so the prophets sang. Lord, show that they are Thy
prophets (tui), the men whom Thou hast sent, and therefore fulfil what
Thou hast promised by them.

1 In the fifth century the dedication of a church in honor of St. Michael was celebrated
at Rome on September 30 (later the twenty-ninth) and the Sunday occurring about this
time was called the first post natale hasilicae s. Angeli or simply post sancti Angeli (G. Morin
Les veritables origines du chant greg.).

Eighteenth Sunday after Pentecost 323

Lend an ear to the prayers of Thy servant. By the mouths of the
prophets, the Messias had had Himself pictured as the servant of God.
Therefore the Father was well pleased in Him. He still prays in the same
way for us today and again becomes our Mediator in holy Mass, and this
assures the acceptance of our prayers. Not in vain do we await Him: He
will come. He who is our peace enters our heart in Holy Communion,
bringing us peace and the pledge of life eternal. Hence the joy we ex-
perience when we are told that we may enter into the Lord's house.
What riches it lavishes upon us every day!

The first phrase is reminiscent of the Introit Rordte caeli, with which
it is also closely allied in spirit. Identical with it is the first phrase of the
well-known Introit Stdtuit. The continual use of h\> in the first and sec-
ond phrases tends to make the melody tender and devout, while the
frequent repetition of the same motive or of a similar one makes it im-
pressive. This motive is composed of the notes äh\? g ä g over (Dö)-mine,
which remains the same in its first part, but changes slightly in its sec-
ond over susti-(nentihus), tui, preces, tuae. It produces its greatest effect
over tuae, because it sets in here with a major third, while in the other
cases only a whole step precedes. The petition: "We are Thy people,"
gains in intensity thereby.

GRADUAL

For the explanation of this chant see the fourth Sunday of Lent.
Today we thank God with the Apostle for the grace which is given us in
Christ Jesus, for in Him we have become rich in all things. But our
thoughts and our longings also extend beyond to the house of God in
heaven, to His peace and blessedness. "The incense which curls upward
at the Gospel and my uplifted hands are both symbols of my yearning
for heaven" {K. L.). We may also be confident that God will make us
steadfast to the end, that we may be "unto the end without crime, in
the day of the coming of our Lord Jesus Christ."

ALLELUIA VERSE (Ps. 101: 16)

1. Timebunt gentes nomen tuum, 1. The gentiles shall fear Thy
Domine: 2. et omnes reges terrae name, 0 Lord: 2. and all the kings
gloriam tuam. oj the earth Thy glory.

Alleluia has the form a b b c c^. The b shows an upward tendency,
c goes downward, while c^ is a union of arsis and thesis. Part a opens
the verse; b, c and c^ are heard again over nomen tuum, and with slight
variation over terrae. Thus Alleluia supplies the theme for the verse.

324 Eighteenth Sunday after Pentecost

The first phrase of the verse has a range of a seventh. One rarely
sees a descent like that to h over Domine. The second phrase has the
wide range of a tenth, and is dominated by the word reges. The singer
wishes to say that not only all the nations will pay homage to the Lord,
but also the kings: all the kings of the earth will worship God. What is
their paltry glory, even if they be veritable sun gods, compared to that
which Christ will reveal at His final coming? Before Him all things will
crumble into dust. There will be no dallying about the ceremonial of
reception. Only one thing will remain to be done: to bend the knee and
adore, to tremble in reverence before Him who alone is the Lord, the
King of glory.

With a feeling of certainty that could scarce be greater, the melody
proclaims this truth: Timebunt, "they shall fear." This faith is most
deeply engraved in the consciousness of the Church. She looks forward
with confidence to the coming of her King: already today she greets
Him with the cry of Alleluia.

OFFERTORY (Ex. 24, 4-5)

1. Sanctificavit Moyses altare 1. Moses consecrated an altar to

Domino, 2. offerens super illud the Lord, 2. offering upon it holo-

holocausta, 3. et immolans victimas: causts, 3. and sacrificing victims:

4. fecit sacrificium vespertinum in 4. he made an evening sacrifice to

odorem suavitatis Domino Deo, 5. the Lord God for a savor of sweet-

in conspectu filiorum Israel. ness, 5. in the sight of the children

of Israel.

According to the context, the participles offerens and immolans are
closely akin. A great caesura, however, is introduced into the melody
by the cadence over (holo)-cdusta, and further on prominence is given
to et immolans which is hard for us to grasp. Similarly, in relation to
the other phrases, the third receives undue amplification. Here we can-
not apply as a measure of perfection the carefully planned and artistic
development which we so admire, for instance, in Graduals of the fifth
mode. In spite of this, however, the melody has beauties of its own.

The first word is simply narrative, confines itself to a tetrachord
(f-h). What we now feel to be a bright major chord, we hear over altare
and odorem and in a descending line over (con)-spe-(ctu). The soothing
close of (Dd)-mino echoes somewhat over (vi)-ctimas, (vesper )-tinum,
and Deo. To the descending fourths at the beginning and end of the
second phrase, the strongly accented ascending fourth over (ho)-lo-
(cdusta) comes as an answer. Over illud two bistrophas are to be sung
after the clivis, followed by an accented torculus. The third phrase is in-

Eighteenth Sunday after Pentecost 325

t reduced like Moyses above. (Suavi)-tdtis resembles (holo)-cäusta; D6-
(mino) repeats the first four notes of the last-mentioned word. The
fourth phrase abounds with groups of neums and in its lower part brings
a delightful new movement. It is extremely rare in plainsong that a

melody closes on the leading note f g e f gg f.

Is this descent of the melody to signify the deep impression which
the sacrifice of Moses made upon the Israelites? God had given His law
upon Mount Sinai. The sacrifice was now to ratify the covenant which
God had made with His people. The New Testament has been sealed
in like manner by bloody sacrifice, by an evening (vespertinum) oblation,
for it was about the ninth hour when Jesus bowed His head on the
Cross and gave up the ghost. This sacrifice is renewed at Mass. What
a high consecration (sanctificdvit) attaches to the altars of our churches!
How sublime the Sacrifice that is offered upon them! With what pleas-
ure does not our heavenly Father regard it! Then is fulfilled what the
priest asks for at the offering of the chalice— it ascends with the savor
of sweetness. And we are allowed to be witnesses (in conspectu) of this
mystery. What is more, we ourselves are drawn into the mystery. We
become, as today's Secret says, partakers of the one supreme Godhead.

COMMUNION (Ps. 95: 8, 9)

1. Tollite hostias, et introite in 1. Bring up sacrifices, and come

atria ejus: 2. adorate Dominum in into his courts: 2. adore ye the Lord
aula sancta ejus. in his holy court.

The first phrase speaks of an action; the second of the spirit with
which that action is to be performed. Tollite sets in on a high pitch: let
there be no hesitation, no indifference in the offering of the sacrifice or
in the sacrificial procession! The two imperatives Tollite and introite
have the same note progression, d c h, and consequently they are also
closely related melodically. Hostias towers above both these words. The
third member of the phrase is quieter, never extending beyond c and the
modest interval of a minor third.

The solemnly descending line in the second phrase expresses the
idea of adoration — a profound bow, a prostration before the majesty of
God. In the annotated manuscripts each of the clives over the words
(ado)-rdte Dominum is marked with a hold, thus enhancing the impres-
sion of reverence. But the solemn spirit is made less formidable by the
fact that each new clivis opens on the same note with which the pre-
ceding closed.

In the church our humble gifts of bread and wine are converted into
the Losd Himself; under the sacred species we adore Him who offers

326 Nineteenth Sunday after Pentecost

Himself for us and gives Himself to us in Holy Communion. In aula is
related to ejus of the first phrase. It closes on &b like the second ejus,
while sancta closes on c. Instead of the quiet, solemn two-note groups
of the preceding member, we here have three-note groups. The sus-
pended close on &b may serve to remind us that we are still awaiting the
eternal courts of God, the eternal liturgy of heaven. With one exception,
the accented syllable is always higher than the following syllable.

K. L. translates and explains Tollite hostias thus: "Take unto your-
selves the hosts!"

NINETEENTH SUNDAY AFTER PENTECOST

INTROIT

1. Salus populi ego sum, dicit 1. / am the salvation of the

Dominus: 2. de quacumque trihu- people, saith the Lord: 2. in what-

latione clamaverint ad me, exaudi- ever tribulation they shall cry to me,

am eos: 3. et ero illorum Dominus I will hear them: 3. and I will he

in perpetuum. Ps. Attendite popule their Lord forever. Ps. Attend, O

meus, legem meam: * inclinate my people, to my law: * incline

aurem vestram in verba oris mei. your ears to the words of my mouth.

The Introits after Pentecost thank God for graces bestowed and
rejoice in His splendor and greatness. At the same time they are often
prayers of petition and supplication; in fact, all those from the second
Sunday on are of this kind. Today, on the nineteenth Sunday, as also
on the twenty-third Sunday, God answers all these cries; He responds
to the petition of Psalm 34: "Say to my soul, 'I am thy salvation'. "
Today He says: "I am the salvation of the people," and on the twenty-
third Sunday: "I think thoughts of peace." On both Sundays God Him-
self speaks^ — both times with the same introductory formula: dicit
Dominus. The Introit for the twenty-third Sunday is more intimate, for
not only is the Lord Himself speaking, but He is speaking directly to us,
is addressing us. Today's chant, however, is more general in tone.

Calmness and goodness are suggested by the seconds and the
minor thirds in the first phrase: I am the salvation of the people, the
savior in tribulation, the protector in dangers, the only true happiness
of the people. In the Holy Eucharist God is "our salvation, our life, and
our resurrection." He not only heals all the wounds of the soul; He im-
plants in it the germ of immortality, of an eternal life in glory. The in-
troduction shows some resemblance to the beginning of the Introit for
the fourteenth Sunday after Pentecost. Similarly, ad me and eos in today's

Nineteenth Sunday after Pentecost 327

melody are related to una in the former; in perpe-ftuum) reminds us of
super mil-(lia) in the same piece. Dominus finds a corresponding motive
over (per)-petuum at the end of the melody. At the end of the first
phrase, however, the clivis is converted to a pes, because the subsequent
phrase begins on low d. The distribution of the neums over Dominus
here and in the third phrase, as well as over perpetuum, results from the
fact that plainsong is not fond of dactylic endings, but prefers spondees.
{N. Sch. 233 f).

The second phrase with its interval of a fourth and its harsh a h
is not intended to portray distress, but rather to emphasize, clearly and
definitely, that when the need is greatest God's assistance is nearest.
Clamaverint ad me and exaudiam eos have almost the same melody: to
the measure of our faith and confidence God's generosity will correspond.
There is a slight but noteworthy difference, however. Over (ex)-äu-
(diam) we might have sung g ga g as over (cla)-mä-(verint); the equal
accentuation on the two words would have suggested this. Since, how-
ever, a different construction was preferred, and the melody descends
to e, the only one of this phrase, and has a quilisma after /, it is evi-
dently intended to emphasize the words: "I will hear them."

In its first half the third phrase harks back to the quiet style of the
first. But there follows immediately a portrayal of God's eternal fidelity,
of His indefatigable desire to help. Hence the fourth and the accent on
high c. We may consider the closing neums over (Dömi)-nus as a varia-
tion of those over (e)-go sum, ad me and eos.

Since God declares Himself ready to assist us everywhere and at
all times, we should also willingly accept the admonition: "Attend, O
My people, to My law!" His law assures us of temporal and eternal
happiness. And if He, the Lord, is so prepared to help us, then we ought
to be proud to acknowledge His sovereignty always and in all things.

GRADUAL (Ps. 140:2)

1. Dirigatur oratio mea sicut in- 1. Let my prayer he directed as

censum in conspectu tuo, Domine. incense in thy sight, O Lord, f 1.

Si 1. Elevatio manuum mearum 2. The lifting up of my hands 2. as an

sacrificium vespertinum. evening sacrifice.

David is far from the sanctuary, sunk in poverty and distress. He
yearns to offer a sacrifice to the Lord. But there is nothing at hand.
Hence he lifts up his hands, his prayer, his whole soul, to God.

We may look upon today's Eucharistie celebration as the solemn
evening sacrifice at the close of the liturgical year. Just as formerly the
Christians prayed with outstretched arms and extended hands, and as

328 Nineteenth Sunday after Pentecost

the priest still lifts up the sacrificial gifts, so do we now raise our hearts
to God. This new oblation of ourselves, this new love for Him, should
in this infinite Sacrifice ascend in His sight as clouds of aromatic in-
cense. {W. K.).

In imitation of incense, this energetic song strives higher, ever
higher; it is tone-painting on grand lines. Upon Dirigatur with gd d d
follows oratio mea with gc h d d e f, then sicut incensum with cd eg g;
then in the verse Elevdtio with c d g f g a; similarly mdnum. As an anti-
thesis to this we meet a rhythmic motive, generally in the lower part
of the range, first at the close of (Dirigd)-tur as c d aa g, in like manner
in the expanded (tu)-o, in the verse over Elevdtio f d cc a, again in the
same word f g ee d, and finally over medrum with its diminished chord

dfddh and the h which here serves as a leading tone, and which receives
its natural resolution in the c immediately following. The same relations
obtain at the conclusion, with (vesperti)-num.

The corpus of the Gradual has five members; the last, however, is
little more than a coda. At the end of the second and third phrases we
find a forward-urging clivis. The fourth member corresponds to the
first in its tendency to move in the lower part of the range.

In the verse we have an evident enhancement of the melody. One
might well think of Moses, who, praying on the mount with outstretched
arms, procured victory for the Israelites. He was not allowed to drop
his arms; similarly this present melody, although it sinks from time to
time, always strives upward again with energetic accents, till medrum
brings a relaxation of the tension. In the last phrase this upward ten-
dency again becomes apparent twice. It is principally this which dif-
ferentiates it from the almost identical close of the Gradual on Laetare
Sunday. The entire melody of the verse has been adopted for that of
the feast of the Sacred Heart.

ALLELUIA VERSE (Ps. 104: 1)

1. Confitemini Domino, et in- 1. Give glory to the Lord, and call

vacate nomen ejus: 2. annuntiate upon his name; 2. declare his deeds
inter gentes opera ejus, among the gentiles.

Most Alleluias reach their full development only in the verse. On
the third Sunday after Pentecost and on the present Sunday, however,
it takes place in the jubilus. And it is just today that the verse might
well have lent itself to a solemn denouement. Who can suffi^ciently
praise God's deeds of kindness! Formerly this song was sung in the
Easter procession. How often in the course of centuries has God shown

Nineteenth Sunday after Pentecost 329'

Himself the salvation of His people! Who could number the times He
did so, or thank Him sufficiently? How this song should resound through-
out the entire earth, so that even the heathens (gentes) might hear it.
But there are also various degrees in thanksgiving and praise, with cor-
responding variance in form. Gratitude cannot always be jubilant, as
the Confitemini on Holy Saturday is, for instance, or the Gradual for
Easter Sunday. In the present instance the exultation confines itself to
the range of a seventh and several times repeats the tonic and the do-
minant, a and c respectively' — if we are really dealing here with the
second mode. Perhaps it is fundamentally the key of F, with the con-
clusion taking a chord in terce position. If in place of the do clef we were
to substitute the fa clef on the same line, then the note h\? would occur
over et (invocdte) and over the closely allied 6-(pera). To avoid having
the notation set too low, the piece was transposed a fifth higher.

The rendition should be cheerful and lively. In its first part the
Alleluia resembles that for the feast of the Dedication of a Church
(Adordho). Domino repeats the melody of Alleluia. There is very little
difference between the two phrases; both close the first part on g. An-
nuntiate is well drawn out. The clives which occur at the close hark back
to a similar figure over (ohlivi)-scdris in the Gradual for the thirteenth
Sunday after Pentecost. Throughout this chant the word-accents are
given due prominence. This melody has been accomodated to the verse
for the feast of St. John Capistran in Paschal time.

OFFERTORY (Ps. 137: 7)

1. Si ambulavero in medio tri- 1. If I shall walk in the midst of

hulationis, 2. vivificabis me, Do- tribulation, 2. Thou wilt quicken
mine: 3. et super iram inimicorum me, 0 Lord: 3. and Thou wilt
meorum extendes manum tuam, 4. stretch forth Thy hand against the
et salvum me fecit dextera tua. wrath of mine enemies, 4. and thy

right hand shall save me.

If in the Introit the Lord said: "I am the salvation of the people::
in their every distress will I hear them," then the Offertory says Amen
to this assertion. And so it is: whatever be my distress and tribulation,
in a world full of sensuality and allurements, at a time when many have
lost the true life of the soul, sanctifying grace, or have not even a con-
cept of it, being entirely destitute of the "wedding garme«it" — among
so many who are estranged from Thee, Thou wilt yet save me, wilt
preserve the life of my soul, and in the end grant me life eternal. The
evening mood which pervades today's liturgy teaches us how we may
use this Offertory as the evening-prayer of life. At the last hour we shall.

330 Nineteenth Sunday after Pentecost

experience the most dire distress; then the rage (ira) of our foes will be
increased, for they are well aware that all depends on these final moments.
But we place all our trust in the holy Viaticum. That will be our defense
against the evil one and will lead us safely to eternal bliss. And when the
priest extends his hand over us in Extreme Unction, then God's hand
rests protectingly upon us (extendes manum tuam), so that we may
happily attain our eternal salvation.

Logically the first and second phrase belong together; they should
therefore not be separated by too great a pause. Beginning and end of
the two phrases are alike. In these two phrases, as well as in the later
ones, we meet numerous fourths. These give life and buoyancy to the
piece. To this must be added the strengthening of (vivifi)-cä-(his), which
gives added impressiveness to our Amen. The third phrase has a be-
ginning similar to the first, descending like it to low d. We are acquainted
with the melody over extendes from the Offertory of Easter Monday:
Surrexit. In the spirit of Easter, confident of victory, the singer bursts
out into a joyous strain over manum tuam. He knows what it means to
have God's almighty hand resting upon him. Tuam calls for a continua-
tion. The simple recitative et salvum me which follows, set as it is in the
midst of a florid melody, has an especial solemn character and must not
be sung too rapidly. Over tua the melody is to be divided into two
bistrophas and a clivis, followed by an energetic pressus.

The same melody has been accommodated to a shorter text for the
feast of St. Phihp Neri.

COMMUNION (Ps. 118: 4, 5)

1. Tu mandasti mandata tua 1. Thou hast commanded thy

custodiri nimis: 2. utinam dirigan- commandments to he kept most dili-

tur viae meae, ad custodiendas gently: 2. Oh, that my ways he di-

justificationes tuas. rected to keep thy justifications.

This song sets in on the dominant of the mode, thus emphasizing
the first words: Thou hast given Thy commandments. Thou indeed hast
a right to do this, for Thou art the Lord. But Thy commandments are
the source of our joy and happiness. Would that we might ever realize
this and ever walk faithfully along the way Thou hast marked out for
us! Solemnity, even majesty, marks the beginning of the first phrase,
and the quint with cu-(stodiri) emphasizes the same feeling. According
to the annotated manuscripts the notes over (ni)-mis are to be given a
broad rendition.

By the frequent repetition oi h\? the second phrase is made tender,
almost oppressively so, for the singer knows that he has not always di-

Twentieth Sunday after Pentecost 331

rected his steps according to God's ordinances. It pains him to realize,
that, hke the men in today's Gospel, he has given more care to his fields
and his business than to the invitation to the King's banquet. Bitterly
he repents the fact that he has several times lost the wedding garment.
Hence, filled with contrition and the consciousness of his own weakness,
he asks for God's grace. In the spirit of the following Postcommunion
he prays that the salutary effects of the Holy Eucharist may serve to
free him from his evil inclinations, may renew him in Christ and make
him imitate Christ, so that he may always cling to God's command-
ments. The second half of the third phrase has seconds exclusively.
Justificati-(6nes) faithfully repeats the melody of (cus)-todien-(das). All
in all, it is a simple, humble prayer.

* * * *

TWENTIETH SUNDAY AFTER PENTECOST

In the Epistle for today the Apostle gives us the guiding principles
for all our work with ecclesiastical music: "Be ye filled with the Holy
Spirit, speaking to yourselves in psalms and hymns, and spiritual can-
ticles, singing and making melody in your hearts to the Lord: giving
thanks always for all things, in the name of our Lord Jesus Christ, to
God and the Father" (Eph. 5: 18-20).

INTROIT (Dan. 3: 31, 29, 35)

1. Omnia quae fecisti nobis, Do- 1. All that thou hast done to us,

mine, in vero judicio fecisti, 2. quia OLord, thou hast done in true judg-
peccavimus tibi, et mandatis tuis ment: 2. because we have sinned
non obedivimus: 3. sed da gloriam against thee and we have not obeyed
nomini tuo, 4. et fac nobiscum se- thy commandments; 3. but give
cundum multitudinem misericordiae glory to thy name, 4. and deal with
tuae. Fs. Beafi immaculati in via: * us according to the multitude of thy
qui ambulant in lege Domini. mercy. Ps. Blessed are the undefiled

in the way: * who walk in the law

of the Lord.

It is rare that the preliminary prayers and the Introit accord, for
in origin and development they are quite distinct from one another. On
this Sunday, however, the agreement could scarcely be more manifest.
At the foot of the altar the priest, bowing profoundly, prays: "I have
sinned," while the choir sings: "We have sinned against Thee and have
not obeyed Thy commandments." Thus prayed Azarias in the fiery
furnace at Babylon, acknowledging his guilt together with that of his

332 Twentieth Sunday after Pentecost

people. He solemnly confesses also that God is absolutely just (in vero
judicio) in punishing His sinful people with exile and all the hardships
accompanying it. How much lamenting and murmuring would be
stilled if we would contritely acknowledge our guilt and, like Daniel
and the thief on the cross, humbly confess: We indeed suffer justly, for
we receive the due reward for our deeds!

Large intervals and strong emphasis on the dominant characterize
the peculiar style of the first phrase. It is as though the singer felt the
mighty hand of the Lord. To a great extent this phrase sounds like the
second in the Introit for the tenth Sunday after Pentecost.

The second phrase is more subdued. Only twice, in fact, does it
reach the tenor: "We have sinned against thee and we have not obeyed
thy commandments." In contrast to the c of the first phrase, a, a third
below the dominant, here predominates.

The third phrase and the beginning of the fourth, on the contrary,
exhibit great solemnity in the slowly ascending seconds, in the stress on
the dominant, in the repetition of the same, and the similar melodic
lines over da gloriam and nomini: "Give glory to Thy name." But how
can any new splendor be added to the name of God? How can it gain in
dignity? In this, simply, that God pities and forgives, that He pours
upon us the full measure of His mercy. Hence it is that the Introit prays
so solemnly, so fervently, so earnestly, especially with the words et fac.
Similar sentiments are expressed in the preliminary prayers: "Show unto
us, O Lord, Thy mercy, and grant us Thy salvation." In order to lessen
the monotony of the neums over secundum multitudinem within the tetra-
chord e-a, it is well to stress the neums appearing over the word-accents.
Misericordiae is much more effective: a longing expectation of God's
mercy. If the first part of the Introit spoke of a just God, the second
part turns to a merciful God. Before the beginning of the fourth phrase
the melody descends to low d. Thus is created a contrast, which makes
the following phrase so much the more effective, (cf. p. 4).

Then the psalm-verse sings of the happiness attendant upon a
spotless mode of life. To a certain extent such a life is a foretaste of the
life to come, and this thought confers a special consecration and a solemn
ring to our song of praise (Da gloriam nomini tuo).

The syllables which carry the accent are higher in almost every
instance than those immediately following; often also higher than the
syllable which precedes the accented one.

GRADUAL

This melody was explained on the feast of Corpus Christi. Perhaps
it is a remnant of a prayer at the agapae or love feasts, at which the

Twentieth Sunday after Pentecost 333

early Christians were wont to assemble at the close of the liturgical
celebration. It sighs after the future heavenly country and its present
guarantee, the holy Eucharist. (K. L.).

ALLELUIA VERSE (Ps. 107: 2)

1. Paratum cor meum, Deus, 1. My heart is ready, O Lord, my
paratum cor meum: 2. cantabo et heart is ready: 2. / will sing, and
psallam tibi gloria mea. will give praise to thee, my glory.

Here we have an echo of the Epistle: "singing and making melody
in your hearts to the Lord." The melody was explained on the fourth
Sunday of Advent. With the present text the second paratum, in its
repetition, receives a fine melodic augmentation. Sad to say, the number
of those whose hearts are really so prepared is small. Even among those
who have been called to sing in the house of God the heart often lags far
behind the voice.

This thought ought to spur us on to praise God with our whole
heart. With good reason we sing twice: "My heart is ready!" We do not
sufficiently realize the fact that God is our glory, that He, the infinitely
sublime God, lowers Himself to our level, lifts us out of the dust, and
makes us partakers of His divine life. This is so great an honor that no
one in the whole wide world could bestow the like upon us, a nobility
no one but God could confer. Thus He becomes our glory, our pride;
and the very thought should urge us to sing of Him and to praise His
goodness with all our heart.

OFFERTORY (Ps. 136: 1)

1. Super flumina Babylonis, 2. 1. Upon the rivers of Babylon, 2.

illic sedimus et flevimus, 3. dum there we sat and wept, 3. when we
recordaremur tui, Sion. remembered thee, O Sion.

Babylon and Sion — what a contrast! There heathenism with all its
abominations; here the site of the holy temple of God in all its glory,
with its many songs and festivities. There exile, a strange country,
poverty and want; here home with its loved ones. In that far country
homesickness was always gnawing at one's heart: how could one play
or sing the songs of the Lord?

But what is Babylon compared to the great Babylon of the Apo-
calypse, and what is Sion compared to the heavenly City. The earthly
Babel with its coarseness, its filth, its passions, its seductions- — and the
heavenly Sion with its luminous beauty and purity, its peace, and its
eternal Alleluia! He who is filled with a lively faith and has a deep un-

334 Twentieth Sunday after Pentecost

derstanding of all that Babel signifies, is seized with insatiable longing
for the heavenly Sion. And especially now in late autumn, when the
fading leaves fall from the trees, and when so much in nature is dying
ofif, there wells up in the heart of the true child of God an intense yearn-
ing for the home beyond, where all is different, where there is eternal
spring, eternal life, eternal love.

It is of this homesickness that our piece is singing. How beauti-
fully have the two thoughts flumina Bahylonis and Sion at the beginning
and at the end of the song been drawn out! And then this recurrent rise
and fall of the melody, stretching out, as it were, toward eternal life,
only to sink back again! Each of the three phrases reaches high c, but
only in passing; it occurs only once in the middle phrase. The average
pitch is a. No violence, no impassioned or explosive grief is expressed;
only a very subdued wailing and weeping. Care must be taken that the
tempo be not too slow. Bahylonis sounds a bit like restrained rage. Over
illic both neums must be prolonged. As if pressed down by pain, the mo-
tive over sedimus and flevimus sinks ever lower — d h c a, g a h\?a, f g a g.
The closing cadence of flevimus continues that of flumina. Over recorda-
remur (surely the appropriate spot!) the only high pressus occurs, tes-
tifying to the unemotional character of the piece in general. One might
wish that tui were more pregnant with meaning. In its very simplicity,
however, with the repetition of the same motive, this song succeeds in
telling us much. It was in Sion, above all places, that the singer wished
to pour forth his grief and his yearning. He repeats the neums of dum
recordaremur and, proceeding in almost dreamlike fashion, his voice dies
away as if it were stifled in tears. We who are now singing are still in a
strange land, but we are allowed these songs of home, these echoes of
the heavenly songs, for they are to us a source of consolation. We know
that through Christ we have become citizens of heaven and that He will
come again into our hearts as a new pledge of future glory. In a few
moments He will appear before our eyes in the mystery of the Mass;
and in the sacrificial banquet we are united with Him and with all
heaven.

Babel sings and plays and shouts and dances, entirely oblivious of
the heavenly Sion. But we want to belong to those who, homesick yet
optimistic, are ever striving to reach the fatherland beyond.

COMMUNION (Ps. 118: 49, 50)

1. Memento verbi tui servo tuo, 1. Be thou mindful of thy word to

Domine, in quo mihi spem dedisti; thy servant, 0 Lord, in which thou

2. haec me consolata est in humili- hast given me hope: 2. this hath

■ täte mea. comforted me in my humiliation.

Twenty-First Sunday after Pentecost 335

In the Offertory there was a breath of Memento mori. Here we dare
to ask God to remember us, but we do it humbly and reservedly, in the
manner in which the repentant thief on the cross spoke his memento. It
is a consolation for us to be allowed to pray thus. The three similar end-
ings: Domine, dedisti, mea reflect quiet and confidence. The turning of
the clivis over Dominimtoa pes is necessitated by the low d which opens
the following melody. Large ascending intervals would be disturbing;
hence the melody avoids them. Servo with its descending fourth gives a
pleasing development: second a-g, third a-f, fourth g-d. The accentua-
tion of the dominant is the only evidence that the heart of the singer is
really beating somewhat more rapidly. With its h and its pressus, the
second phrase has about it something new, something reassuring, which
soars above the entire preceding melodic line. It restricts itself to in-
tervals of seconds. The half-step progressions toward the end agree ad-
mirably with the text. It is a humble prayer, one which encourages us
to rely entirely on the grace of God.

To the official at Capharnaum the Saviour spoke the consoling
words: "Go thy way, thy son liveth." And he fulfilled His promise. This
ought to enkindle confidence in our hearts; a firm hope in Him must re-
vive and strengthen our weary soul. God keeps His word! May the Word
of God, the Word Incarnate, which has entered our hearts in Holy Com-
munion, grant us grace and strength to observe His word and keep also
the word which we have pledged to Him.

This piece well demonstrates how plainsong prefers to treat the
principal word-accent lightly and briefly; thus verhi tui servo and mihi;
this rule extends even to the secondary accent over consolata (Mocque-
reau, Nombre II, 221).

For the rhythm of the first phrase cf. N. Sch. ,34.

TWENTY-FIRST SUNDAY AFTER
PENTECOST

INTROIT (Esther 13: 9, 10, 11)

1. In voluntate tua, Domine, uni- 1. All things are in thy will, 0

versa sunt posita, 2. et non est qui Lord, 2. and there is none to resist

possit resistere voluntati tuae: 3. tu thy will: 3. for thou hast made all

enim fecisti omnia, caelum et ter- things, heaven and earth, and all

ram, et universa quae caeli ambitu things that are under the cope of

continentur: 4. Dominus univer- heaven: 4. thou art the Lord of all.

336 Twenty-First Sunday after Pentecost

sorumtues. Fs.Beati immaculati in Ps. Blessed are the nndefiled in the
via: * qui ambulant in lege Domini. way: * who walk in the law of the

Lord.

A fleeting glance at the melody shows that it attains to no great
heights. The piece moves below the dominant of the fourth mode, below
a, almost throughout. Not until the verse does the dominant play an
important role. But this, in turn, necessitates a lower pitch for the anti-
phon. An unmistakable gravity pervades the whole. A glance at nature
out in the open, no doubt, will awaken the same feeling. Late autumn
brings great changes: a multitude of beings vibrant with life must perish;
violent gusts of wind sweep the withered leaves from the trees; many a
flower has been vanquished by the frost and droops its head as if tired
of life. Everywhere the picture of change, of death. One alone remains
immutable, immortal, eternal: the God of peace. All things are in His
hand; by His will are they directed and governed.

Thoughts such as these help to give us some inkling of the mean-
ing of the melody. This chant wished to sing of nothing but repose, re-
minding us of the sea which, although it can rage and foam and toss,
today is calm and placid, hardly disturbed by a ripple.

The first phrase really has / for its dominant, like the Introits for
the second Sunday of Lent, for Easter, and for the second Sunday after
Easter. The first phrase confines itself to a third. Very slowly the melody
begins to increase. The range of the first phrase is c-g, of the second
d-a, of the third and fourth c-a; there is, therefore, some development
in the melody. The accented syllables with few exceptions carry a pes
or an expansion of the pes. But there are various degrees of accentuation,
according as the first note of the pes is of the same pitch as the preceding
one (voluntdti in the second phrase j, a second lower (voluntdte tua in the
first phrase j, a second higher fthe first universa), or a third higher fthe
second universa). Here, as in possit, the pes encompasses a third. Non
is still more strongly accented. No one can long resist the divine will.
Many indeed now shout out their "I will not serve"; they wish to dis-
regard the admonition of the Apostle in today's Lesson: "Take unto
you the armor of God, that you may be able to resist (resistere) in the
evil day, and to stand in all things perfect." Against many such St.
Stephen's complaint might well be directed: "You always resist the Holy-
Ghost." But when the Lord will come at the last day for the universal
judgment, then this non will receive an absolute value; no longer Wjjj
anyone dare to offer any resistance. Such thoughts are suggested by tj^
liturgical year which is now rapidly coming to its close.

The ascending fourth d-g over non is balanced by the descending
<a-e over possit. Variation in the melody is secured by this e; any other

Twenty-First Sunday after Pentecost 337

interval would tire. The second phrase begins on the low d and is joined
with the preceding by means of the ascending e /.

The third phrase gives the reason why God can demand perfect
obedience. Everything that the heavens and the earth contain owes its
existence to His almighty will alone. Omnia and ambitu have a similar
ring; caelum et terra and universa are practically identical, for they ex-
press related thoughts. In the rendition these passages must follow ra-
pidly one upon another with a strong, though not exaggerated, emphasis
on the word-accent. The formula at the end of continentur always stands
over the final syllable of a word (compare omnibus in the Introit for the
second Sunday in Lent; and Israel, mihi, sibi in the Tract for Passion
Sunday, where the formula is still more developed).

Special solemnity should characterize the final phrase with its rever-
ent close: Dominus universorum tu es. Care must be taken that the tempo
be not too slow. Strangely enough, the climacus repeats the same notes,
g f e, while similar passages, for example, the ending of the Introit for
the second Sunday of Lent, have the much more pleasing formula ä g f
g f e e.

In the psalm-verse the good fortune of those is praised who dispose
their entire lives according to the holy will of God. Thus was rewarded
the fidelity of Mardochai, whose prayer is used as the antiphon of to-
day's Introit. God averted from him and from his people the evil which
Aman contemplated, and made them to see days of gladness.

GRADUAL (Ps. 89: 1. 2)

1. Domine, refugium f actus es 1. Lord, thou hast been our refuge,

nobis, 2. a generatione et progenie. 2. from generation to generation.

^. 1. Priusquam monies 2. fierent, i'. 1. Before the mountains 2. were

aut formaretur terra et orbis; 3. a made or the earth and the world was

saeculo, 4. et in saeculum tu es formed; 3. from eternity 4. and to

Deus. eternity thou art God.

Perhaps someone is tempted to see tone-painting in the florid melody
over montes — the rising mountains, the depressed valleys, and finally
the highest peaks. In Graduals, however, one must be extremely care-
ful about making pronouncements of this kind, and more especially here,
for our present chant is entirely typical; a melody frequently used and
here adopted note for note. It was explained on the first Sunday of Lent.

The Gradual-verse belongs to that small number of pieces in which
the phrasing is not entirely satisfactory, since the divisions of the text
and the melody do not correspond. The words Priusquam montes fierent
belong together, but the melody makes an extended cadence over monies

338 Twenty-First Sunday after Pentecost

and begins a new melodic part with fierent. Farther down one feels in-
stinctively that, after the large cadence over terra, et orhis limps along
without much meaning. As a matter of fact, all Graduals of this type
begin a new division with the bistropha which is here placed over et. In
Paleographie musicale (II, 43) the following musical division is indicated:
Priusquam montes \ fierent aut formaretur terra et orhis; it places the large
cadence, which the Vatican Gradual sets over terra, on the word orhis.
Codices 339 of St. Gall'« and 121 of Einsiedeln have the same phrasing
as the Vatican Gradual.

One easily notes the relation between the Gradual and the preceding
Epistle. In the latter St. Paul writes to the Ephesians concerning our
struggle against the deceits of the devil, who comes armed with fiery
darts. Where shall we find a shelter to protect ourselves? The Gradual
presents uncounted multitudes to our gaze: generations upon genera-
tions come before God's throne as if to offer thanks, and they make this
profession: "Thou, 0 Lord, hast become our shelter, our place of refuge.
Under Thy protection we were shielded against all the enemies' thrusts.
For who could have harmed us, seeing that Thou wast for us? Thou art
the eternal God, who wast before the hills were made, and unto all ages
is Thy might."

ALLELUIA VERSE (Ps. 113: 1)

1. In exitu Israel de Aegypto, 2. 1. When Israel went out of

domus Jacoh de populo harharo. Egypt, 2. the house of Jacoh from

a harharous people.

As has already been mentioned in the introduction, no inner rela-
tionship exists between the Graduals and the Alleluia- verses. On the
present Sunday, however, one may be established. The Gradual treats
of God's benign dealings with all peoples, while the Alleluia speaks of
His loving care for one nation. That Israel was allowed to depart from
Egypt, from the nation under whose dominion it had to suffer terribly;
that the opposition of a Pharaoh (cf. the Introit) was broken; and, to
supplement the thought from the second verse of the psalm, that it could
enter the Promised Land — all this was the ordinance of God. Formerly
this song was sung in the procession of thanksgiving which each day in
Easter Week led the neophytes to the baptismal font. There they had
been freed from the Egypt of unbelief and darkness and from the slavery
of the prince of this world, and had been led into the Promised Land of
the Church, whose means of grace offer infinitely more than the land
flowing with milk and honey. But the procession itself also has a sym-
bolic meaning. It represents the departure from this world of ours and

Twenty-First Sunday after Pentecost 339

the entrance into the heavenly Jerusalem. For this reason Psalm 118,
the first verse of which is here employed, is sung in some localities at
funerals. This eschatological conception fits extremely well to the
thoughts which permeate the close of the liturgical year.

Psalm 113, from which this verse is taken, was among those said at
the eating of the Paschal lamb, which Christ Himself therefore sang
with His Apostles at the Last Supper before His exitus, before His de-
parture from this earth.

Cardinal Schuster (The Sacramentary, III, 180) comments strikingly
on the words de populo harbaro: "As far as purely exterior culture is con-
cerned, the Egyptians were far in advance of the Jews. And yet the sub-
jects of the Pharaohs are called a barbarous people by the Scriptures.
For material and artistic progress is not the only criterion of true culture,
but rather spiritual life and spiritual development. From this standpoint
the Israelites far surpassed the most famous nations of antiquity and
thereby proved that their faith was supernatural."

The melody over the word alleluia sounds as if it might have been
borrowed from the fourth mode. As a matter of fact, the Alleluia Amavit
eum from the Mass for a Doctor has almost an identical tone-sequence.

Twice more in the juMlus we meet the pressus dd c; it confers a strong
accent. In every instance, however, it is introduced differently, thus
avoiding monotony. The juhilus has two parts, the first of which has
three subdivisions: the fourth in subdivision b is rounded out by means
of connecting notes in b^; in c the motive thus produced appears a second

higher. We shall have to consider the repetition of d ff an augmentation
rather than an echo.

Neither alleluia nor its verse is conspicuous for any particular ardor.
But a lively tempo is to be recommended, for we are singing a song of
thanksgiving. Very striking is the development over ex Aegypto with a
fifth on the insignificant ex and then the descending fourth. We are to
consider, it seems, what the words "out of Egypt" really signify. The
chord of resolution over populo has a joyous ring.

OFFERTORY (Job 1)

1. Vir erat in terra nomine Job, 1. There was a man in the land

2. simplex et rectus, ac timens whose name was Job, 2. simple and

Deum: 3. quem Satan petiit, ut upright, and fearing God: 3. whom

tentaret: 4. et data est ei potestas a Satan sought that he might tempt:

Domino in facultate et in came 4 and power was given him from

ejus: 5. perdiditque omnem sub- the Lord over his possessions and

stantiam ipsius, et filios: 6. car- his flesh: 5. and he destroyed all

340 Twenty-First Sunday after Pentecost

nem quoque ejus gravi ulcere vul- his substance and his children: 6.
neravit. and wounded his flesh also with a

grievous ulcer.

With its purposely restricted range, this piece expresses heartfelt
sympathy for the patient Job. This compsasion must be all the more
noble, since here are portrayed the sufferings of a man who was "simple
and upright, and fearing God," who really had not deserved his mis-
fortunes personally, and who stands before us exhibiting an imcompar-
able greatness of soul. When we regard this melody we can understand
why the ancients called the second mode elegiac and used it extensively
in the antiphons of the Office of the Dead.

The Vatican Gradual divides this piece into six phrases, of which
the first, third, and fifth begin with almost the same motive. The similar
passages over simplex and rectus serve to emphasize the same thought.
This similarity holds good of facultdte and et in came further on. In the
Introit we were able to point out a like procedure. With quem Satan the
melody takes on a new and tenser turn, even though the formula over
tentdret, which recurs over filios, over vulnerdvit, and in an expanded
form over Domino, again relaxes the tension somewhat. So much more
effective is the fourth phrase, et data, in whose first half high d plays the
role of dominant. The twofold division in facultdte and et in came is more
fully developed in the fifth and sixth phrases. A deep melancholy is
manifested in the final phrase with its prominent accents, its repetition

of the same motive ccb ag a, which was heard over ut in the third phrase.

The piece has been transposed by a fifth, most probably only for
practical reasons, in order to render ledger lines unnecessary.

At the present time we have just this one verse. In the Antiphonary
of St. Gregory several more verses follow, in which the dramatic element
becomes almost passionate. This is apparent even exteriorly from the
frequent textual repetitions, which are otherwise quite rare in plainsong.
The last verse, a vehement cry for the joy which every human heart
demands, nine times repeats the words ut videam bona (cf. Wagner, I,
110, and especially III, 430 f.).

Job is a figure of Christ, and his sufferings are a type of Christ's
sufferings. For this reason the Book of Job was read during Holy Week.
Even on his couch of suffering Job protests his innocence, but his friends
do not believe him and assert that his sins are the cause of this awful
visitation of God's justice, which afflicted him so much that he had to
cry out in his distress. In the same manner Christ, who is Holiness it-
self, suffers for our sins, which He took upon Himself in merciful love.
He too is jeered at in His agony. If with this Offertory we enter the in-

Twenty-First Sunday after Pentecost 341

ner circle of the sacrificial action in which Christ renews the sacrifice of
the cross upon the altar, then we may not entirely forget the sufferings
which the delicate and tender body of Christ and the soul of "the most
beautiful of the children of men" had to undergo upon the cross. We shall
again draw new strength and courage from holy Mass in order to bear
all our sufferings and trials with perfect resignation to God's will.

COMMUNION (Ps. 118: 81, 84, 86)

1. In salutari tuo anima mea, et 1. My soul is in thy salvation

in verhum tuum speravi: 2. quando and in thy word have I hoped: 2.
fades de persequentibus me judi- when wilt thou execute judgment on
ciumi 3. iniqui persecuti sunt me, them that persecute mel 3. the
adjuva me, Domine Deus meus. wicked have perscuted me: help me,

0 Lord my God.

The phrase has a quiet melody. It is not so expressive of longing
and yearning as of childlike confidence which places all things in the
hands of God. One would hardly suspect, from the mood of this phrase,
that a storm, such as the second and third phrases speak of, can still
disturb the soul. The inception on the dominant a over quando and the
tarrying on this note are like an urgent knocking at the door of mercy.
How often has this quando, "when" — "when, 0 Lord, will our deliver-
ance come?" — risen in fervent pleading to heaven! We have here an
instance in which an extremely common form, the recitation on a single
note, becomes the means of powerful expression, for all the other words
of this text touch the dominant only transiently, while over quando it
receives particular stress. Thus the second phrase and the still more
climactic third phrase sound like the cry of a hunted soul which finds
shelter only with its Lord and God.

In the third phrase, first half, we find the formula of psalmody
proper to the Introit-verses of the first mode. And it is precisely here
that the piece reaches its climax.

It seems that the similar closes of the phrases over speravi, judi-
cium, and meus are to breathe calm into the turbulent soul. The qui-
lisma over (judl)-ci-(um) is very striking.

We are making this a Communion song; for now the "salvation of
God" is come to us, and we may place all our trust in the incarnate Word
of God now dwelling within us. No matter how long the time of proba-
tion and trial, how numerous or unjust our aggressors may be, the Lord
will come on His great day to judge them all.

342 Twenty-Second Sunday after Pentecost

TWENTY-SECOND SUNDAY AFTER
PENTECOST

INTROIT (Ps. 129:3, 4)

1. Si iniquitates ohservaveris Do- 1. // thou shall observe iniquities,

mine, Domine quis sustinebiti 2. O Lord, Lord, who shall endure itl

quia apud te propitiatio est, Deus 2. for with thee is propitiation, 0

Israel. Ps. De profundis clamavi ad God of Israel. Ps. From the depths

te Domine: * Domine exaudi vo- I have cried to thee, 0 Lord: * Lord,

cem meam. hear my voice.

How difficult we find it to forgive and forget! What efforts it costs us
to condone a wrong, and to bear no malice when a request for forgive-
ness is made! What if God were to treat us in this manner! What if He
would immediately mete out punishment after every sin? Who would
be able to stand it? God indeed looks upon (ohservaveris) our sins and
weighs them in the balance of His holiness and justice, but His mercy
prevents His justice from punishing sin on the instant and also from
punishing a repented sin in the manner it deserves. Thus also this In-
troit, like that of last Sunday, shows us God's absolute greatness, but
here it is pictured in the pleasing light of comprehending love that is
both merciful and forgiving.

The divisions of the melody are evident enough. To the soaring
ascent of the first phrase, a second, filled with rest and relaxation, an-
swers. All three members of the first phrase close on the half tone b c.
Domine here carries the same melody as in the Introit for the twentieth
Sunday after Pentecost, with this difference that there it closes with
c h, instead of with b c as in the present melody. There the second phrase
begins with a higher note; here on a lower. The very same reason holds
for the close of sustinehit. Here again the following phrase sets in a third
lower. It might also be pointed out that we have to do with a question,
and that the tension contained in a question naturally evolves itself in
an ascending melodic movement. If we could have had our own way
about it, we should perhaps have given more prominence to the signi-
ficant quis than is done here. If the first half of the phrase has c for its
dominant, then the second receives special force from its dominant d.
Care must be taken that the recitation be not too precipitous on this
d; in fact, a moderate martellato might be recommended. It seems as if a
trembling before God's holiness pervades the melody.

The second phrase, however, brings rest. It never extends beyond
c and has only minor thirds and seconds in the beginning. Over the
accented syllable of propitidtio the melody becomes an expression of

Twenty-Second Sunday after Pentecost 343

fervent thanks; it comes to full bloom in the more florid melismas over
the word Deus. Only with God can we find such judgment and forgive-
ness. The final groups of neums are frequently seen at the close of the
Introits of the third mode (cf. the Introit for the fifth Sunday after
Easter and that for the tenth after Pentecost). The last two groups of
neums represent a rhythmically united and inseparable whole; they
always occur over the two final syllables. That explains the peculiar
treatment accorded Israel. All in all, this Introit well agrees with the
spirit of All Souls' Day and is very fitting at the end of the liturgical year.

With the same confidence with which we sing the Introit we are
also to sing the psalm- verse. And though I should be sunk in the abyss
of utter need and utter helplessness, still shall I cry to Thee, 0 God,
and Thou wilt not despise my humble supplication.

The Introit also teaches us to look with humble confidence to that
great day, mentioned twice in today's Epistle, when Christ Jesus will
reappear on earth.

GRADUAL (Ps. 132: 1, 2)

1. Ecce quam honum, et quam 1. Behold how good and how

jucundum habitare fratres in unum! pleasant it is for brethren to dwell
jl. 1. Sicut unguentum in capite, together in unity, f. 1. It is like
2. quod descendit in harham, 3. the precious ointment of the head,
harbam Aaron. 2. that ran down the beard, 3. the

beard of Aaron.
The Epistle shows with what "tender love" the Apostle regarded
the community at Philippi, what heartfelt wishes for this community
inspired him — an ideal picture of shepherd and flock. Would that it
were so everywhere! Would that all who congregate in the churches on
Sundays were bound together spiritually in an enduring bond! This is
the happy condition which the Gradual tries to portray.

Ecce at the beginning of the piece is full of meaning; the melody
has something important to tell us. Habitare with its quint is just as
pregnant. In this phrase, a is a sort of tonic supporting the ascending
melody. Unum receives prominence from its pressus; the two subse-
quent notes, a g, are to be sung broadly according to the annotated
manuscripts. The closing melisma with the rhythm efdfagagefg
is an abbreviation of the ornate formula which ends the first part of
the Gradual on the seventeenth Sunday after Pentecost. This first part
has also been adopted as the Gradual for the vigil of the feast of the
Immaculate Conception.

Florid melismas and a rising melodic line characterize the verse.
On All Saints' Day we meet the neums which occur here over (unguent)-

344 Twenty-Second Sunday after Pentecost

tum over (iniquiren)-tes. The coda of (cäpi)-te belongs to the wandering
melismas and occurs in almost all modes in the form of a cadence. The
ornate melody over (Aa)-ron frequently closes Graduals (compare
Timete for All Saints' Day and Domine praevenisti for the feast St. of
Joseph and in the Common of Abbots). A typical Alleluia melody of
the third mode, illustrated on the twentieth Sunday after Pentecost,
has the same ending.

The melody of the verse is in no way tone-painting; it is almost too
imposing for the text which it accompanies; it disregards the typical in
the text; it practically disregards Aaron himself, the one on whom the
balsam flowed from beard to garment on the day of his consecration. It
aims primarily at portraying the blessings of the Communion of Saints,
the unity of the Church, the streams of grace and holiness and glory
which flow from the mystic Head, Christ, in loving generosity and with
unutterable sweetness upon all His members.

In the ancient manuscript this melody is assigned to the feast of
the martyrs John and Paul (June 26); it was also sung — according to
Codex 121 of Einsiedeln — in a votive high Mass De Caritäte: for Charity.

ALLELUIA VERSE (Ps. 113: 11)

1. Qui timent Dominum, sperent 1. They that fear the Lord, let

in eo: 2. adjutor et protector eorum them hope in him: 2. he is their
est. helper and protector.

Compare the melody of the Alleluia- verse for the sixteenth Sunday
after Pentecost with that of today. Without doubt we should have given
melodic preponderance to the second phrase of our present text. The
melody does not sound like an exhortation, but speaks rather of a com-
forting sense of security under the protecting hand of God.

St. Paul opened the Epistle with the words: "We are confident in
the Lord Jesus, that He who hath begun a good work in you will perfect
it unto the day of Christ Jesus." The verse generalizes this same thought.
If the fear of God brings forth the same fruits as it did with the Philip-
pians; if it leads to this, that "charity may more and more abound in
knowledge and in all understanding"; if one is "sincere and without
offense unto the day of Christ," filled with the fear of the Lord — then
this fear serves "unto the glory and praise of God," then there is good
reason for the confidence which regards God as the indefatigable Helper
and universal Protector unto the day of the coming of Christ.

OFFERTORY (Esther 14: 12, 13)

1. Recordare mei, Domine, omni 1. Remember me, O Lord, thou

potentatui dominans: 2. da ser- who rulest above all power: 2. and

Twenty-Second Sunday after Pentecost 345.

monem rectum in os meum, ut pla- give a well-ordered speech in my
ceant verba mea 3. in conspectu mouth, that my words muy he
principis. pleasing 3. in the sight of the

prince.

Everything, her own welfare as well as that of her people, depended
on the audience which Esther was to have with the king; of this she was
well aware. For this reason she turned in fervent prayer to Him who
exercises dominion over all rulers, who knows also how to direct the
heart of kings according to His own will. The melody emphasizes the
words Recorddre and still more Domine. Then it lingers on g with stately
solemnity, here again stressing God's immensity and majesty. This first
phrase, as well as the first half of the second, which repeats motives
taken from the second part of the first phrase, moves quite sedately.
Now, however, the unrest in Esther's heart can no longer be concealed.
"0 Lord, I rely entirely upon Thee and upon Thy wisdom. Place the
right words on my lips that I may find favor." These words are brought,
out with a vivacity that is almost dramatic. (Plä)-ceant repeats the mo-
tive of me-(um), but this renders the petition all the more impressive.
The melodic finale is composed of two words. Over conspectu, however,
the melody is drawn out indefinitely. Such drawing out comes as a sur-
prise at the end of an Offertory which has this florid closing melisma as
its most prominent feature, and especially since there seems to be prac-
tically no development of the melody at hand. The melisma has the
following grouping: a b a c d(= ^b). Here there is need for clear division,
correct accent, and dynamic shading. In group a, a torculus with an
apostropha is to be sung, then a torculus and a tristropha. As far as pos-
sible, / ought to recede in favor of the other notes. In groups b and d,
however, when the note / occurs with the pressus, it is to be stressed.
In c, the note g may receive an accent. In d, the growth of the intervals
■ — third, fourth, fifth — demands an increase in volume. Perhaps we may
consider this somewhat strange passage as a repeated impulse to self-
encouragement, for the interview at the palace, and a diminution of
energy, for purposeful reflection, until in the final member with its
pressus and growing intervals, the clivis g f and the podatus f g (both of
which are to be well accented) definitely bring back the feeling of full,
determination.

Now Esther is the Church. She acts as our mediatrix. With her
and in her Christ, who lives forever, prays, in order to intercede for us
in the holy Sacrifice of the Mass. He knows which word finds favor in
the Father's sight; for He Himself is the Word of the Father, that most
beloved Son in whom the Father is well pleased.

346 Twenty-Third Sunday after Pentecost

We singers of the Church's chants, however, shall cry out: Give me
to sing worthily, O Lord! The words which we pronounce are such as
can please Thee, for they are mostly Thy words, words which Thou hast
spoken or inspired. But also our melodies must ring true if they are to
please Thee. And they will have the correct ring if we but conform our
lives to that which we say with our lips.

COMMUNION (Ps. 16:6)

1. Ego clamavi, quoniam exau- 1. / have cried, for thou, 0 God,

disti me Deus: 2. inclina aurem hast heard me; 2. Oh, incline thine
tuam, et exaudi verba mea. ear, unto me and graciously hear

my words.

In the first phrase the singer gratefully acknowledges that as often
as he called upon God he found relief. The descending melody over
clamavi sounds like the confession of one's own helplessness and insuf-
ficiency. So much the more surely and convincingly does it soar up

over quoniam, using the motive of ego: f g, g a, g a h, hh c, a d d, with a
slight bending back of the melodic curve. The melody should therefore
be rendered accordingly. Now follows the almost turbulent petition, in
which the melody soars a third above the dominant of the eighth mode:
"Oh, incline also today Thine ear to me and graciously hear my prayer.
Behold, I now bear Thy beloved Son in my heart. I pray in His name,
in union with Him, and He intercedes for me. Do Thou hear Him!"
On exaudisti there is an ascending fourth, a-d, and over exaudi a descend-
ing fourth, d-a.

If a song is supposed to be natural, direct, alive, true, and warm,
then this song meets all the requirements. It is, therefore, hard to under-
stand why this expressive melody was appropriated for the text used
on the feast of the Holy Shroud (celebrated in some places on the Fri-
day after the second Sunday of Lent): "Joseph buying fine linen, and
taking him down, wrapped him up in the fine linen."

TWENTY-THIRD SUNDAY AFTER
PENTECOST

INTROIT (Jer. 29: 11, 12, 14)

1. Dicit Dominus: Ego cogito co- 1. The Lord saith: I think thoughts

gitationes pads, et non afflictionis: of peace, and not of affliction: 2.

Twenty-Third Sunday after Pentecost 347

2. invocabitis me, et ego exaudiam You shall call upon me, and I will
vos: 3. et reducam captivitatem hear you: 3. and I will bring back
vestram de cunctis locis. Ps. Bene- your captivity from all places. Ps.
dixisti Domine terram tuam: * Lord, thou hast blessed thy land: *
avertisti captivitatem Jacob. thou hast turned away the captivity

of Jacob.

The words of today's Introit are an excerpt from the letter which
the Prophet Jeremias wrote at God's behest to the captive Jews at
Babylon. They must have been a soothing balm for those tired and
wounded hearts, God had experienced untold infidelities and offenses
at the hands of His chosen people, and yet He thinks thoughts of peace
and not of affliction. He still promises to hear their prayers, still promises
to bring them back from their captivity into the Promised Land.

We are not yet in the Promised Land. The deathlike picture of all
nature in this bleak November vividly brings the fact home to us. We
know it also from the affliction of heart which frequently weighs more
heavily upon us than captivity: we are exiles, living in that state of flux
called time. Suddenly a word strikes our ear, enters our heart; a word
not spoken by man, for men are powerless: it is the Lord, and He speaks
of peace. He pronounced this word when He sent His beloved Son upon
earth; He published it by the mouth of an angel on Christmas night.
And how often Christ the Saviour uttered His Pax vobisl He is still
uttering it today, and suiting the action to the word.

Majesty marks the opening of the melody; the theme is blessed
peace. Over cogitati6-(nes) the motive of the beginning is repeated, fol-
lowed by the bright major chord; then its tones sink again, sweetly,
blissfully, like rays of sunshine into our heart. God thinks thoughts of
peace. Would that we, too, might always think them! But how often
we fail to recognize what serves unto our peace, and thus force the Lord
to discipline us (affiictionis), until, made homesick once more by our
desolation of soul or by some external affliction, we transfer our affec-
tion and longing to Him who alone can be our peace, our happiness. The
cadence over affiictionis is the same as that which is repeated twice in
the Introit Requiem. It places before him who is conversant with plain-
song the thought of those stfll awaiting the full peace of the Lord in
purgatory. All the melodic pauses and incisions in this first phrase fall
on the note /. The melody loses somewhat in variety thereby, but it
preserves the quiet feeling which is proper to this phrase. This phrase,
moreover, towers far above the other two: its text is longer, its range is
more extended, its neums are more ornate. The usual thing in chant,
however, is to have the phrases more nearly in climactic order.

348 Twenty-Third Sunday after Pentecost

The second phrase is restricted to a fifth. A contrast is formed by
the h in the first phrase and 6b in the second. There is a certain unrest
in invocdhitis ("you shall call upon me") which soon is eased by the
dominant-like fivefold 6b which seems to say: Be comforted, the Lord
will grant your prayer; you have, it is true, often forgotten Him, have
despised and deserted Him, but He thinks only of your peace.

In the third phrase, with its range of an octave, the tonic / plays a
prominent part. Perhaps this is to indicate the oppression of captivity,
just as is done with the same word in the Offertory for the third Sunday
of Advent by lingering on the dominant. In the second half of the phrase,
however, de cunctis rises with such firm assurance that neither men nor
circumstances can weaken it. Even to those who have gone farthest
astray, the road to their fatherland, to reconciliation, to peace, will not
be closed. Indeed, the Lord Himself proffers His guiding and protecting
hand (reducam); He Himself wishes to lead them home (cf. Reck, II
378). Happy he who grasps this hand!

First the Lord says: "I will hear; I will bring back." With the aban-
don of faith the congregation immediately responds with words which
assume that the promise is already fulfilled: "Lord, Thou hast blessed
the land: Thou hast turned away the captivity of Jacob." The church
into which we are now filing is already heaven for the community; the
processional entrance itself becomes in a certain sense an anticipation
of the procession of the just, when, after the Last Day, they will follow
Christ into full glory. The house of God, into which we enter now for
the celebration of the sacred Mysteries, is heaven upon earth. We are
coming closer to the Parousia: though it is still sacramentally veiled, it
is already pre-realized in the Eucharist (Jahrbuch fuer Liturgiewissen-
schaft, IV, 148 f.).

This is the Lord's promise: "I will hear; I will bring back." And in
the regions of bliss— for it is November, the month of All Saints — thous-
ands of the blessed make joyous melody, because He has led them to
eternal peace, to freedom, and to the glory of the children of God.

GRADUAL (Ps. 43:8, 9)

1 . Liherasti nos, Domine, ex 1 . Thou hast delivered us, 0 Lord,

affligentihus nos: 2. et eos qui nos from them that afflict us: 2. and
oderunt, confudisti. jl. 1. In Deo hast put them to shame that hate
laudahimur tola die, 2. et nomini us. f. 1. In God we will glory all
tue confitehimur in saecula. the day, 2. and in thy name we will

give praise for ever.

Twenty-Third Sunday after Pentecost 349

In the Epistle we heard the words: "But our conversation is in
heaven; from whence also we look for the Saviour, our Lord Jesus
Christ, who will reform the body of our lowness, made like to the body
of His glory." With unhesitating faith, as if this were already effected,
Holy Church sings in the Gradual a spirited song of freedom and thanks-
giving. All those who opposed and hated her have fallen. Even our
bodies, which were the source of untold miseries, may now, in recom-
pense for renunication and suffering and mortification, expectantly look
forward to the transfiguration of Christ. If we read in the same Epistle
of the enemies of Christ, that their glory is in their shame, then God is
the pride and glory of His children; Him will they praise for all eternity.

The two phrases of the corpus of the Gradual place the activity of
God at the beginning and at the close: Liberdsti — confudisti. Those who
afflict and hate are in the center. In both phrases the psalmodic con-
struction of the melody with intonation, recitation on c, a sort of middle
cadence with its close on the dominant d or the mediant b respectively,
and final cadence on the tonic, is still recognizable. The formula over
the first nos recurs in the verse over (tu)-o, while the neums over confu-
(disti) remind us of those over (D6mi)-ne. The ending over (confu)-disti
employs a motive frequently heard in Graduals of the fifth mode. Com-
pare the passage terra in the Gradual for the third Mass for Christmas.
Here the motive sets in on g, but has instead of the half tone c b (in the
fifth mode) the full tone d c.

The verse has the same florid melisma over Deo as the Gradual-
verse for the third Sunday of Advent (q.v.). Rightly does lauddbimur
tola die mark the climax of the piece. The second part of the verse is
comparatively simple and quiet, the chant being almost syllabic. The
motive over confitebimur is repeated over in saecula. We find the same
closing m«lisma on the Sunday within the octave of Epiphany.

ALLELUIA VERSE (Ps. 129: 1, 2)

1. De profundis clamavi ad te, 1. From the depths I have cried to

Domine: Domine exaudi vocem thee, O Lord, Lord, hear my voice,
meam.

The words Alleluia and De profündis and Domine of the verse have
the intonation of the ornate Introit-psalmody as their model. Conse-
quently there is hardly any justification for speaking of tone-painting
with the words De profündis in spite of the upward movement. Its form
a b b b^ c c^ resembles that of the Alleluia for the Sunday after Christ's
ascension. In b^, however, the pressus does not occur on e, but on c. The
melody of the verse has two independent members, of which each has
an intonation, a sort of middle cadence, and a closing cadence. Exaudi

350 Twenty-Third Sunday after Pentecost

is an enhanced form of the supplicating clamavi. It was sung in the
same spirit on the seventeenth Sunday after Pentecost; the Alleluia-
verse for the eleventh Sunday likewise bears considerable resemblance
to our present one.

If we say that today's Gradual is sung by the choir of the blessed,
by the Church triumphant, then the Alleluia with its verse is sung by
the Church militant and the Church suffering. We have not yet reached
the goal of perfect liberty. Many things handicap us. And a great many
children of the Church have drawn far away from God. But no abyss is
so deep that God's merciful love cannot reach down to its very bottom.
God will stretch forth His helping hand to everyone who proves that
he has at least some good will. For He heals those who have been afflicted
for many years, as the Gospel says; even the dead He brings back to
life.

There is nothing oppressive about the melody; in fact, there is a
certain throb and swing in it. As to the text, we must think not so much
of the Office of the Dead as rather of one of the songs which the Jews
sang on their pilgrimage to Jerusalem. And for our dear departed we
have but one wish: that they may complete their pilgrimage to the
heavenly Jerusalem as soon as possible.

OFFERTORY (Ps. 129: 1, 2)

1. De profundis clamavi ad te, 1. From the depths I have cried

Domine: 2. Domine exaudi oratio- out to thee, O Lord: 2. Lord, hear

nem meam: 3. de profundis clamavi my prayer: 3. from the depths I

ad te, Domine. have cried to thee, O Lord.

The Offertory has almost the same text as the Alleluia-verse; here,
however, we have the word orationem instead of vocem. A much more
earnest tone pervades the melody. Out of the depths the melodic line
comes forth, almost as in the Offertory for the first Sunday of Advent.
As in the former melody, so here, too, it strives upward. But repeatedly
it sinks back to the tonic, on which all the pauses are made, and even
below it. There is something almost painful in te with its b, which is
generally avoided in Offertories of the second mode. In the ancient an-
notated manuscripts each note over clamavi, with the exception of the
quilisma, carries a broad marking. It is a cry coming from a heart bur-
dened with grief. In the second phrase the melody twice begins with
the dominant and rises above it. As in the Alleluia so here, too, the cli-
max occurs on the word exaudi. In both pieces clamavi has a similar
melody. (Ex)-äudi repeats the form of Domine; the florid meam is char-
acteristic of Offertories. To the ascending motive over De profundis the

Twenty-Third Sunday after Pentecost 351

descending /d c a at the end of meam comes as an answer; it then bends
upward to c c d to prepare for the low beginning of the third phrase,
which is an exact repetition of the first. Formerly the two following
verses of Psalm 129 (Fiant aures tuae and Si iniquitdtes) were also sung
with this Offertory; between each pair were interpolated the words De
profündis clamdvi at te, Domine, which also brought the whole to a close.
These verses only tended to increase the earnestness of the composition.
With the Gospel as a background (the healing of the woman troubled
with an issue of blood and the awakening of the daughter of Jairus) our
cry ascends to the Lord. In a life filled with sickness, disease, lamenta-
tion for the dead, our yearning for perfect redemption and absolute
freedom from all species of misery is most intense. This longing comes to
the fore in spite of all the self-denial and willing submission we may have.
It will accompany our every good deed. I am still wandering in the
depths; my life is spent in a desert where tears and sorrows are my lot.
But some day I shall be quiet and happy, and like the healed woman
and the child of Capharnaum brought back to life, I shall thank the
Saviour, and I shall live on with all the others who have arisen.

COMMUNION (Mark 11: 24)

1. Amen dico vohis: quidquid 1. Amen I say to you: Whatso-

orantes petitis, credite quia ac- ever you ask when you pray, he-
cipietis, et fiet vohis. lieve that you shall receive, and it

shall he done to you.

In the two half-phrases which constitute this song, the first part in
both instances extends above the range of the second part. Each incep-
tion, if we disregard the introductory formula, is on the dominant:
quidquid, credite, et; this gives the piece an added feeling of assurance.
The endings show a descending line: vohis = a, petitis = g, accipietis=f
vohis=ed. It is to be noted that the accented syllables are always higher
than the succeeding syllables, and generally carry several notes. Amen
is a striking exception. The form d a 5b, over its second syllable, is in
all other cases on the accented syllable, for example, Suscepimus, Gau-
deamus, Praeceptor. The same might easily have been done here. Perhaps
the Greek pronunciation of Amen, which accents the second syllable,
influenced the present arrangement. But more important than this de-
tail is the bold continuation the melody makes with its leap of a fourth.

August majesty marks the beginning of this chant. Here He speaks
who rules over all things, who has in His hand life and death, time and
eternity, who needs but will and things are made, who can grant all
that is asked of Him. Here is the answer He makes to our petitions in

352 Twenty-Third Sunday after Pentecost

the Alleluia-verse and in the Offertory. Here He renews the promise
given in the Introit: "You shall call upon me, and I will hear you." But
we must pray, pray with confidence, with full certainty of being heard.
Now at the end of the liturgical year, when the Apostle admonishes us
in the Epistle to "stand fast in the Lord," a great need makes itself felt:
the prayer for perseverance, the prayer for life eternal, the prayer that
our names also may be inscribed in the Book of Life (Epistle). He has
again heard the petition of the Lord's Prayer: "Give us this day our
daily bread." We have received Him (accipietis), the Bread of Life. He
has come into our hearts in Holy Communion. That is our guarantee
that sometime we may also enter upon eternal life.

special Feasts Of Our Lord
And The Saints

(Proprium de Sanctis;

ST. ANDREW, APOSTLE

(Nov. 30)

INTROIT (Ps. 138: 17)

1. Mihi autem nimis honor ati 1. To me thy friends, O God, are

sunt amici tui, Deus: 2. nimis con- made exceedingly honorable: 2.

fortatus est principatus eorum. their principality is exceedingly

Ps. Domine, prohasti me, et cog- strengthened. Ps. Lord, thou hast

novisti me: * tu cognovisti sessio- proved me and known me: * thou

nem meam, et resurrectionem meam. hast known my sitting down, and

my rising up.

At the Last Supper Christ said to His Apostles: "I will not now call
you servants: for the servant knoweth not what his Lord doth. But I
have called you friends: because all things whatsoever I have heard of
My Father, I have made known to you" (John 15: 15). He initiated
them into those profound mysteries of His divinity, otherwise imper-
vious to the mind of man. He imparted to them powers that not only
pierced but elevated into the very heavens. Never was there a truer
friend and never has friend given so generously as Christ gave to His
Apostles.

Christ's Bride, the Church, shares the sentiments and emotions of
her divine Founder. And hence she exclaims on the feasts of the holy
Apostles: "To me Thy friends, O God, are made exceedingly honor-
able." With splendor she honors the Apostles in her divine services, al-
though the feasts of the Apostles are no longer days of obligation.
Numberless churches have been dedicated to their memory! Together
with the Queen of the Apostles, their name is daily invoked during the
sacrifice of the Mass!

Solemn and ever-increasing awe pervades the melody until it reaches
its proper climax on the accented syllable of honordti. It is a truly festal
melody requiring a worthy, joyful rendition. The feeling of awe is even
more vividly expressed in the preceding nimis with its descending in-

354 St. Andrew, Apostle

terval of a fourth, which recurs again at the words (tu)-i, De-(us), and
introduces the modulation to c.

The second phrase is characterized by a strong accentuation of the
tenor /, which is here the true dominant. The power which God has given
his Apostles and through them to the Church will endure to the end of
days, and no other power either on earth or in hell will prevail against
it. With an interval of a fourth the second nimis begins immediately on
the dominant, while confortdtus repeats the motive of hono-(räti). Twice
the melody ascends to a, where it is particularly effective over eorum.
The triple repetition of c d f g over the words Mihi autem ni-('mis),
(a)-mici tui, and (prin)-cipdtus is so skillfully interwoven with the whole
that it is scarcely noticeable.

In the psalm-verse the Apostle himself prays to the Lord. It was a
source of wonderful consolation to him to know that amid all his toils
and labors the eye of his beloved Master followed him and saw all that
he had done and suffered for Him. In a martyr's death the Apostle has
stood the test (prohdsti me) victoriously.

This Introit is sung also on the feasts of the Apostles SS. Thomas,
Matthias, Barnabas, within the Octave of SS. Peter and Paul, James
the Elder, Bartholomew, Luke, Simon, and Jude.

The melody was made use of extensively in the Introits for the feasts
of St. Ignatius the Martyr, of the Stigmata of St. Francis of Assisi, and
of the Holy Innocents. Compare also the Gradual for the feast of St.
Matthias,

For an explanation of the Gradual Constitues see the feast of SS,
Peter and Paul.

ALLELUIA VERSE

1. Dilexit Andream Dominus 1. The Lord loved Andrew 2. in

2. in odor em suavitatis. the odor of sweetness.

In the oldest manuscripts we find this melody given for the present-
day Alleluia Justus ut palma in the Common of Abbots. It is difficult to
determine which of the texts inspired the melody. We might conceive the
florid melisma over the word odorem as tone-painting of the word cedrus
in the Alleluia Justus ut palma, imitative of the giant growth and the
wide spread of the branches of this tree. The melody for today's Gradual
is the same as that on the feast of the Purification and on the Friday
and Saturday of the Pentecostal Ember Days.

The melody of Alleluia tends to reach a climax. This climax, which
is repeated by the melody, is indicated by the climacus at the beginning

St. Andrew, Apostle 355

of the juhilus. The varied progression of the second cUmacus, first / g
and then c d, is charming indeed. The pressus is characteristic of the
second and third members of the juhilus. The figure d f e d c in the sec-
ond member becomes g af e din the third member, which latter, besides
being strengthened, is provided with an upbeat in the fourth member.

The verse sets in with grand solemnity on the dominant a. Dilexit —
Andrew was beloved of the Lord- — is expressive of something great and
happy. The melodic turn over (Andre)-am Do- was noted previously in
the last member of the juhilus. The extended melisma over odorem is of
pellucid construction. A suggested grouping might combine the second
clivis with an unextended cli7nacus where a division point is then ob-
served, thus: cegab\?gäefed \ fegefec\edfd. Several of the

old manuscripts declare in favor of this method of phrasing. The joining-
of climacus and clivis rounds off the melody in a pleasing manner. Care-
ful examination, however, shows that all annotated manuscripts declare
in favor of the phrasing given in the Vatican Gradual. The first note of
every second clivis is lengthened. Thus, before resting on the tonic d
of this descending curve, the voice imparts a special relief to the clives
a-e, g-e and f-d, thereby adding particular charm to the melody. Odo-
(rem) is sung with a crescendo which diminishes as we approach the final
f-d. The repetition is sung in the same manner. The two accordant
groups which follow are subjoined in a fervent and delicate manner so
as to make the effect of the whole that of sweet-scented balsam. These
and other considerations might induce us to consider Dilexit Andreanh
an original composition.

Revue gr., 8, 135 ff.; 9, 58 ff.

OFFERTORY (Ps. 138: 17)

1. Mihi autem nimis honorati 1. To me thy friends, 0 God, are

sunt amici tui Deus: 2. nimis con- made exceedingly favorable: 2. their
fortatus est principatus eorum. principality is exceedingly strength-

ened.

Holy Mother Church finds it difficult to realize fully the dignity
and power which Christ bestowed upon His Apostles. For this reason
the same text that we have in the Introit is repeated here. The melodic
development is also very much the same, although the Offertory, as
becomes its meditative character, is more impressive. As in the Introit,
the first phrase up to nimis shows a gradual development. The melody
then descends, giving the following honorati, which is inclosed within
the limits of an interval of a fourth, an opportunity to develop more fully.

356 St. Andrew, Apostle

The second half of the first phrase in both Introit and Ofifertory is serene
and thetic in character. A solemn reverential awe pervades the nimis
of the second phrase, which reaches its climax over confortatus est and
£6rum.

The powerful motive over autem nimis with its resolved major
chord f a c, its tristropha cec and the extended intervals of a fourth
c-g-c are heard again over (confor)-tdtus est, and with a slight variation
over (princi)-pdtus eorum. The three first syllables of confortatus and
principätus employ the same melodic figure; likewise the closing figures
of the first (ni)-mis and (eö)-rum, (De)-us and est.

COMMUNION (Matt. 4: 19, 20)

1. Venite post me: faciam vos 1. Come ye after me: I will make

fieri piscatores hominum: 2. at Uli you to he fishers of men: 2. And

continuo, relictis retihus et navi, they immediately, leaving their nets,

secuti sunt Dominum. and their boat, followed the Lord.

In the first sentence the Lord summons Peter and his brother An-
drew, while the second sentence relates how both of them immediately
heeded His call. The Lord calls them from the midst of their life occu-
pation-— they were at the moment letting down their nets into the sea —
to an entirely new vocation, one which as yet lay veiled before them. This
new calling demanded of them numerous sacrifices and labors and bitter
disappointments — innumerably more than their previous vocation —
and finally determined their death on the cross. Hearing the word of
Christ and obeying it was for them, however, but the work of a moment.
The melody beginning on the dominant emphasizes this thought, and its
continuance on the dominant realizes for us the enduring sacrifice they
are bringing. It is not difficult to conceive that they were very fond of
their fishing nets and intimately attached to their little ship! Although
the word navi does not occur in the Gospel, we are grateful for its inser-
tion here so that, realizing the greatness of their sacrifice, we may ap-
preciate it the more fully. The first phrase is the more quiet, although
there is a certain solemnity in the twofold descent of the interval g-d
and the ascending g-c: here the Lord, the King of the Apostles, is speak-
ing.

This expressive melody is as a fresh breeze from the sea. Together
with the Communion of the Vigil Dicit Andreas, it forms one of the
gems of the Graduale.

The Immaculate Conception of the Blessed Virgin Mary 357

FEAST OF THE IMMACULATE CONCEPTION

OF THE BLESSED VIRGIN MARY

(December 8)

INTROIT (Isa. 61: 10)

1. Gaudens gaudebo in Domino, 1. / will greatly rejoice in the

et exsultabit anima mea in Deo meo : Lord, and my soul shall he joyful in

2. quia induit me vestimento sa- my God: 2. for he hath clothed me

lutis: et indumento justitiae cir- with the garments of salvation: and

cumdedit me, 3. quasi sponsam with the rohes of justice he hath

ornatam monilihus suis. Ps. Exal- covered me, 3. as a hride adorned

taho te, Domine, quoniam suscepisti with her jewels. Ps. / will extol thee,,

me: * nee delectasti inimicos meos 0 Lord, for thou hast upheld me: *

super me. and hast not made my enemies to

rejoice over me.

The Immaculate Virgin herself, radiant in the light of grace, soar-
ing guiltless over a world laden with sin, the very spouse of God adorned
with all-wonderful jewels, introduces today's festal Mass. She knows,
however, the source of her beauty and is aware of her singular dignity.
She knows that great things have been done unto her. Sin, which up to
that time had infected every human being born into this world, was
held in abeyance from the time of her conception; while the earth was
covered with darkness, the Almighty clothed her in light. Hence in the
Introit she chants her gratitude to God, a Magnificat, as it were, in its
original setting. Today she sings: Gaudens gaudeho in Domino; later on:
Magnificat anima mea Dominum. Today we hear: Et exsultdhit anima
mea in Deo meo, while the mountains of Judea re-echo the words: Et
exsuldtvit spiritus meus in Deo salutdri meo. Today it is Quia induit me;
later on: Quia fecit mihi.

How shall this melody be rendered? Without doubt it should have
a ring of sincerity and graciousness emanating most tenderly from the
depths of the soul; it should be characterized by solemnity yet be joy-
ful, coming withal from a being all light, all grace, elevated to the prox-
imity of God.

The melody, however, was not originally intended for this text.
Excepting the neums of the last few words, it is taken from the Introit
of the fifth Sunday after Easter. There it is a song of victory, of liberty,
of thanksgiving, which we fittingly place today on the lips of the Blessed
Virgin. For this reason also text and melody are of the same mold.

358 The Immaculate Conception of the Blessed Virgin Mary

The first sentence begins softly and tenderly on the half step e-/
and the minor third, whence the intervals are extended to the dominant
c. Domine is full of joyful movement, designating as it does the source
from which all this happiness emanates. Summarizing it all in a word,
we might exclaim: Joy in the Lord! The second half of the first phrase
reflects the parallelism of the text (gaudebo — exsultahit) in the melody,
which becomes more fervent over the words Deo meo. Here the soul
fuses, as it were, with its God. And well may Mary sing in this singular
strain, for the angel will shortly say unto her: "The Lord is with thee!"

Like the various members of the first phrase, so the second phrase
and the first half of the third phrase form parallel verses. The initial
motive is similar to that at the beginning of the Introit. In a word, with
the argument which it introduces, a more definite sounding double /
replaces the corresponding tender e f. The interval of the fourth a-d
leading over to the dominant creates a bold transition. In the first phrase
this transition is soon abandoned, while here it is made the continual
support of a new movement, which has a tense preparation over vesti-
mentis, reaches its climax on the tor cuius c e d, and then closes with un-
diminished power. These phrases are an outcry of ecstatic jubilation
over the salvation that has come to the Blessed Virgin. She is indeed
the first and most beautiful fruit of salvation; Christ has clothed her
with the mantle of justice. In the first phrase the closing cadences over
Domino and meo were on e, over salutis and me they are on g.

The melody of quasi sponsam offers a new thought. The Blessed
Virgin is represented as "a bride adorned with her jewels." These words
are sung on the descending melody with such charming humility as only
the ancilla Domini, the handmaid of the Lord could sing them. And not-
withstanding the miracles of grace which had been wrought upon her,
she ever remained the humble handmaid of the Lord. Unceasing grati-
tude, however, urges her on, and once more she receives the great graces
of which she has been made the recipient, once more she gives vent to
her feelings of amazement, joy, and gratitude.

In the psalm-verse the Blessed Virgin addresses her God directly:
*'I will extol Thee, O Lord, for Thou hast not made my enemies to re-
joice over me." Reference is here made to the hereditary foe of the hu-
man race, the devil, who in hellish glee mars newly created souls with
the stain of sin. Today, however, his song of triumph is silenced, for,
with his head crushed, he lies powerless under the foot of the Virgin.
The repetition of the Introit fittingly projects the image of the Mother
of God into the background of this picture and completes it in every de-
tail.

The Immaculate Conception of the Blessed Virgin Mary 359

GRADUAL (Jud. 13:23)

l.Benedicta es tu,Virgo Maria, a 1. Blessed art thou, 0 Virgin

Domino Deo excelso, 2. prae omni- Mary, by the Lord the most

bus mulieribus super terram. ^. 1. God, 2. above all women upon the
Tu gloria Jerusalem, 2. tu laetitia earth, f. 1. Thou art the glory of
Israel, 3. tu honorificentia populi Jerusalem, 2. thou art the joy of
nostri. Israel, 3. thou art the honor of our

people.

The text of the Gradual is intimately connected with the high
honor paid to Judith after her victory over Holofernes. In like manner
Mary is presented to us in the role of victor over sin. She is the solitary
boast of our tainted nature, the blessed among women. Hence, mil-
lions salute her today in terms of highest reverence and glowing love:
Thou art our pride, our joy, our crown of honor.

In the Introit Mary was the person speaking; in the Gradual she is
the person spoken to.

The present melody was composed for the text Constitues of the
feast of SS. Peter and Paul. The adaptation could not have been more
happy. The text of the day imparts to the melody fresh energy, a full-
ness of joy and enthusiasm. How full of reverence the words Benedicta es
tu, how ardent and lovely the Marial The extended development due to
the word-painting over omnem terram in the original fits perfectly to the
word excelso. Gloria Jerusalem revels in astonishment, admiration, and
delight.

ALLELUIA VERSE (Cant. 4: 7)

1. Tota pulchra es, Maria: 2. et 1. Thou art all fair, O Mary: 2.

macula originalis non est in te. and there is in thee no stain of

original sin.

In relation to the preceding Gradual, it is rather difficult to assign
a definite position and sentiment to the present chant and to character-
ize it properly. It must be sung neither heavily nor slowly, but rather
with a spirit of naive joy and admiration. The melody is not original to
this text, but was sung in the 12th century on the feasts of the
Assumption and St. Agnes.

If we combine alleluia and jubilus into one in accordance with the
pauses, there will be four members. Alleluia is amplified in the second
member and repeated at the end of the third and fourth members as a
soft refrain. The -luia is characterized by a contrary ascending move-
ment, being somewhat extended at the beginning of the third member

360 The Immaculate Conception of the Blessed Virgin Mary

and correspondingly abbreviated at the beginning of the fourth member.
The pressus serve to enliven the melody. A comparison might be drawn
between the ascending melody previous to the refrain and the last
Kyrie of Masses 9 and 10.

The first phrase of the verse is beautifully rounded off. Tota pre-
pares for the spiritual warmth given pulchra, while Maria ends the
phrase like to the glow of a mild sunset. How beautiful is Mary, imma-
culately conceived! Indeed, she has been the inspiration of a Murillo
and numberless others, and yet the essence of her beauty defies the skill
of every artist.

The first and only express mention of original sin in today's feast is
made in the second phrase. The groups ag ach g over ori- correspond to
geh cde a over macula. Most singers will be obliged to breathe at this
place. What follows presents some further difficulties as to comprehen-
sion and rendition. The torculus and climacus must be considered as
organic, linking elements. The sentence is to be taken as a whole. The
emphasis on macula must not be wrongly interpreted, for we might em-
phatically exclaim: Original sin — is not in thee!

Revue, 6, 160; 26, 277 ff.; Analyses, 8, 25 ff.

OFFERTORY (Luke 1:28)

1. Ave Maria, gratia plena: 2. 1. Hail Mary, full of grace: 2.

Dominus tecum: 3. henedicta tu in the Lord is with thee: 3. blessed art
mulierihus. Alleluia. thou among women. Alleluia.

We have here the rare instance where a new melody has been com-
posed for the Mass text of a later feast. The melody was written by the
Benedictine Dom Fonteinne and adapted by his confrere Dom Pothier.
Fervor, delicacy, and sublimity combine to effect an harmonious whole.

Ave begins soft and tender, reverently continuing the salutation of
the Angel which concludes the Gospel of today's feast. With what joy
might God Himself today have saluted Mary who, like an early morn-
ing dawn, shedding light in the wake of a receding darkness, prefigures
the dissolution of the dark night of sin at the approach of the Sun of
salvation. We, too, greet thee, mild and gracious Lady, in thy imma-
culate conception and in thy life of motherly solicitude to become an
eternal dispenser of grace and mercy. As in the Gradual, Alleluia, and
Communion, the word Maria is here treated with evident love.

Gratia begins in a somewhat dreamy mood, but waxes increasingly
powerful, as though the singer had joyfully glimpsed in Mary's soul the
broad, shoreless expanse of her many graces. Part of the melody is

The Immaculate Conception of the Blessed Virgin Mary 361

reminiscent of Maria in the Gradual. The modulation to c is likewise
peculiar to chants of the fifth mode.

The second phrase is more serene, never going beyond c. It contains
a mysterious allusion to the dignity of that divine motherhood which
conveniently demanded the immaculate conception of the Blessed Vir-
gin.

The third phrase, on the other hand, sets in with brilliance imme-
diately. Thou art the promised one, the blessed, the chosen among all
the daughters of Eve. Be thou praised, alleluia! The melody over this
last word is similar to that over Maria of the first phrase. The descent
to low d is peculiar to the eighth mode. The piece might be more effec-
tive if low d did not occur in each of the three phrases.

Comparison of today's Ave Maria with that of the fourth Sunday
in Advent will be very instructive. The final phrase of that composition
is lacking here. The fact that mulieribus there is not final, as it is in the
present case, would make the use of its melody for today impossible.
This may also have occasioned the new composition for this f^ast.

COMMUNION

1. Gloriosa dicta sunt de te, 1. Glorious things are told of-

M aria: 2. quia fecit tibi magna qui thee, 0 Mary: 2. for he who is
potens est. mighty hath done great things unto

thee.

The melody was originally composed for the text Dico autem vohis
of the Mass Sapientiam for the Common of many Martyrs. In the early
ages it was the melody for the Communion of the feast of St. Hippo-
lytus, who is commemorated two days before the feast of the Assump-
tion of the Blessed Virgin. It may possibly have been borrowed from the
former for the Communion Optimam partem of the Assumption, and
thence transferred to today's feast. Here there is a more faithful ad-
herence to the original than on the Assumption, where the text of the
second phrase is somewhat abbreviated. The festive, serene character of
the melody seems to have been inspired by the text. The motive gab
egg over the third syllable of Gloriosa undergoes a slight change over
magna and enlarges over qui potens est. The descent to low d over tibi,
a fourth below the tonic, which is characteristic of the eighth mode,
forms the antithesis to the interval g-c. This formula is well known
from the psalmody of the first mode with final cadence D ad lib. Anno-
tated manuscripts have leniter — gliding downward gently — written at
this point. On the feast of the Immaculate Conception the Communion
closes with an accent on the third last syllable, necessitating a slight;

362 St. Thomas, Apostle — Purification of the Blessed Virgin

change in the melody. On the feast of the Assumption and in the original
melody the close is more energetic and effective.

Scripture, the Church in her liturgy, and her saints speak in glow-
ing terms of the Blessed Virgin. And yet it is impossible to narrate and
portray all the great things that God has wrought in and through Mary
from the day of her conception and how she has proved herself to be
the Mother of mercy. The closing phrase of the Communion reminds us
once more that it was only the omnipotence of God which made it pos-
sible for Mary to enter this world pure and without the stain of original
sin on her soul.

Having received our Lord in Holy Communion we should with
grateful hearts repeat the words of the Magnificat: "The Lord hath done
great things unto me." Surely, it is a wonderful condescension that
God almighty deigns to come into our souls.

ST. THOMAS, APOSTLE
(December 21)

When this feast is of the second class only, it is not celebrated on a
Sunday of Advent.

For the Introit refer to the feast of St. Andrew, and for the Gradual
to that of St. Matthias. The Alleluia is proper. Its opening melody oc-
curs on the feast of the Holy Innocents. The Offertory is sung on the
feast of St. James (July 25). The Communion is the same as that on
Low Sunday, Alleluia being omitted.

PURIFICATION OF THE BLESSED VIRGIN
OR CANDLEMAS

(February 2)

The first chant of today after the blessing of the candles extols
Christ as the light of the gentiles. The procession as also the liturgy of
the Mass, would glorify Him as the King of light. True, He makes his
entrance into the Temple as a babe in arms, clinging and looking to His
mother. Similarly our own thoughts and sentiments revert to that same
blessed Mother. It is not without reason that the Church has chosen
the title "Purification of the Blessed Virgin Mary" for today's feast.

Purification of the Blessed Virgin or Candlemas 363

LUMEN (Luke 2: 32)

Lumen ad revelationem gentium, A light to the revelation of the

et gloriam plehis tuae Israel. gentiles, and the glory of thy people

Israel.

Both parts of this vigorous antiphon are well balanced. In the sec-
ond half/ a serves merely as an introduction for the accent on gl6riam=
Lumen. The first half closes with a g ä g f, the second half with ä ah a g.

A kind of rondo form results from the repetition of this antiphon
after each of the verses of the Nunc dimittis (Luke 2: 29-31), which has
ever been heard in the Church since the day the aged Simeon sang it in
the joy of the Holy Ghost.

1. Nunc dimittis servum tuum, 1. Now thou dost dismiss thy
Domine * secundum verhum tuum servant, O Lord * according to thy
in pace. word in peace.

2. Quia viderunt oculi mei * sa- 2. Because my eyes have seen *
lutare tuum; thy salvation.

3. Quod parasti * ante faciem 3. Which thou hast prepared *
omnium populorum: before the face of all peoples:

4. Gloria Patri .... 4. Glory he to the Father ....

(The customary intonation must be omitted at the beginning of
the third verse on account of the brevity of the text.)

It is somewhat surprising that the final cadence G, that is, c b c a g
is employed, since in the Antiphonale the cadence c a c d c is used for
this antiphon (the fourth in Lauds for February 2) and as often as the
antiphon begins on c.

The present feast is a connecting link between Epiphany and Easter.
Today. Christ, the Light, enters the Temple, where at some future time
He will solemnly proclaim: I am the Light of the world. Mankind, how-
ever, prefers darkness to the light and is bent upon extinguishing it in
its heart. Christ became a sign unto many, but was contradicted; at the
crucifixion the Light of the world was overshadowed by darkness. On
Holy Saturday, however, the triumphant cry Lumen Christi, followed
by a grateful Deo grdtias, is heard.

EXSURGE DOMINE (Ps. 43: 26)

Exsurge, Domine, adjuva nos: et Arise, 0 Lord, help us, and de-

lihera nos propter nomen tuum. Ps. liver us, for thy name's sake. Ps.

Deus, aurihus nostris audivimus: * We have heard, O God, with our

patres nostri annuntiaverunt nohis. ears: * our father shave declared to us.

364 Purification of the Blessed Virgin or Candlemas

The first notes of this antiphon are well known to us from the Per
omnia saecula. Similar melodic treatment are accorded ddjuva nos and
the definitive libera nos: the e following the former acts as an impellent
for the latter. The present Exsurge is devoid of the stormy excitement
and the feeling of abandonment by God depicted in the Introit of Sexa-
gesima. True, today's chant is impressive— the repetition of the same
formula emphasizes this — but it is simpler, more ardent, more confident.
It is also sung on Rogation Days immediately before the procession.

Of the various antiphons sung during the procession, we take note
of the following one only.

ADORNA

In the first two phrases the second half repeats the melody of the
first half.

1. Adorna thalamum tuum, Sion O Daughter of Sion, adorn thy
et suscipe Regem Christum: 2. bridal chamber, and welcome Christ
amplectere Mariam, quae est cae- the King: 2. greet Mary with loving
lestis porta: 3. ipsa enim portat embrace, for she, who is the very
Regem gloriae novi luminis: sub- gate of heaven, 3. bringeth to thee
sistit Virgo, adducens manibus Fi- the glorious King of the new light.
Hum ante luciferum genitum: 4. Though in her arms she bears a Son
quern accipiens Simeon in ulnas begotten before the day star, yet ever
suas praedicavit populis Dominum she remaineth a pure virgin. 4,
eum esse vitae et mortis, et salva- Hers was the Child whom Simeon,
torem mundi. taking up into his arms, declared

unto all peoples to be the Lord of
life and death, the Saviour of the
world.

Sion, in the first verse, refers to the Church. In the second verse the
singer is inspired by the thought of the "King of the new light," and
thenceforward the melody becomes brighter.

Special emphasis is given the word eum, for He is the Lord. The
whole produces the effect of a royal hymn, a festive echo of Christmas-
tide, which delighted in singing of Christ the King. The identical form
of the motive over Sion recurs four times; that over gloriae three times;
that of novi luminis over (ad)-dücens manibus, and again with a slight
change over Dominum eum esse.

According to Wagner (I, 51, and 207) these chants are of Greek
origin. Rass. gr., is of a different opinion (8, 193, and 438 ff.; 9, 51 ff.).

Purification of the Blessed Virgin or Candlemas

365

RESPONSUM (Luke 2: 26, 27, 28, 29)

1. Responsum accepit Simeon a
Spiritu Sancto, non visurum se
mortem, nisi videret Christum Do-
Tnini: 2. et cum inducer ent puerum
in templum, accepit eum in ulnas
ßuas, 3. et benedixit Deum, et dixit:
4. Nunc dimittis servum tuum,
Domine, in pace.

Simeon received an answer from
the Holy Ghost, that he should not
see death before he had seen the
Christ of the Lord; 2. and when they
brought the Child into the temple,
he took him into his arms, 3. and
blessed God, and said: 4. Now dost
thou^ dismiss thy servant, 0 Lord, in
peace.

In comparison with the foregoing, the present chant is much more
quiet and reserved. It reflects the reverent, serene happiness of the aged
Simeon. The motive over the word Simeon with its pressus, swelled as
it were with ardent desire, recurs over Sancto and templum. A second
motive appears over Domini and dixit, which is somewhat more de-
veloped over Domine and artistically so over pace. In the same manner
the aged Simeon feels himself rich with the fullness of divine peace. A
third motive introduces the second and third phrases, and partly also
the fourth phrase.

On re-entering the church, the following Responsory is sung.
OBTULERUNT

A. Obtulerunt pro eo Domino par
turturum, aut duos pullos columbar-
um: * Sicut scriptum est in lege
Domini.

B. I. Postquam impleti sunt dies
purgationis Mariae, secundum le-
gem Moysi,

II. tulerunt Jesum in Jerusalem,
ut sister ent eum Domino.

A.
Patri .

Sicut scriptum est, . .Gloria

A. They offered for Him to the
Lord a pair of turtledoves, or two
young pigeons: * As it is written in
the law of the Lord.

B. I. After the days of the puri-
fication of Mary, according to the
law of Moses, were fulfilled,

II. they carried Jesus to Jerusa-
lem, to present Him to the Lord.

A. * As it
to the Father .

written. . .Glory be

5 4 3 2 1 5 4321

The division of syllables eum Domino and (Spi)-ritui Sancto is
readily recognized. The construction is identical with that of the Re-

366 Purification of the Blessed Virgin or Candlemas

sponsories Emendemus on Ash Wednesday and Ingrediente on Palm
Sunday. The melody is closely related to that of the former. Compare
also the Response In monte Oliveti of Palm Sunday.

Let us attend the holy Sacrifice with the same disposition that
Mary had when offering her Child in the Temple.

INTROIT (Ps. 47: 10, 11)

1. Suscepimus, Deus, misericor- 1. We have received thy mercy, 0

diam tuam in medio templi tui: 2. God, in the midst of thy temple: 2.

secundum nomen tuum Deus, ita et according to thy name, 0 God, so

laus tua in fines terrae: 3. justitia also is thy praise unto the ends of

plena est dextera tua. Ps. Magnus the earth; 3. thy right hand is full of

Dominus, et laudabilis nimis: * in justice. Ps. Great is the Lord and

civitate Dei nostri, in monte sancto exceedingly to he praised: * in the

ejus. city of our God, in his Holy Moun-
tain.

With these words the priest might have greeted the first entrance
of our Lord in the arms of His Mother into the Temple; with the sound
of the trumpets the Levites might have saluted Him, and with jubila-
tion the entire populace might have bade Him welcome. But, alas! the
priests know no songs to honor Him, the trumpets of the Levites are
silenced and the people have no word of welcome to offer. Simeon alone
sings his immortal Nunc dimittis, and the prophetess Anna rejoices
with him — then silence again in the Temple.

In this majestic melody, the Church offers that which Sion denied
its King. She values the fact that He came with a heart full of tender
mercy and that she is privileged now to receive Him for whom the cen-
turies had prayed: "Show us, O Lord, Thy mercy." In the Postcommun-
ion of the first Sunday of Advent she still prayed: "May we receive. . .
Thy mercy," and continued this petition throughout the week. Today
her prayer is heard, and with a grateful heart she cries: Suscepimus —
we have received. In like manner, to the Advent petition Veni — Come,
she could joyfully respond on Epiphany: Ecce advenit — Behold He is
come.

Let the very confines of the earth resound with His praises. And
even though the infant hand be small, it embodies within itself the full-
ness of that righteousness from which we also have received, and by
which we are made children of God. For this reason, despite His humble
appearance, the Church greets Him with the words of the psalm- verse i
"Great is the Lord, and exceedingly to be praised."

Purification of the Blessed Virgin or Candlemas 36T

At first glance our attention is attracted by the extended intervals
at the beginning of the second phrase. It would seem as though the singer
wished to clarify our notion of the majestic essence of God. The entire
middle phrase overtops the first and third phrases rather prominently.
The cadence over fines terrae, which forms the close of the first phrase
as well, imparts to both a well-rounded finish.

In the first phrase a is the predominant note, c being sounded only
in passing. The second phrase is dominated by c, the third by /. Briefly,
we might say that the first phrase is characterized by f-a, the second
by a-c, the third by d-f. An apparently insignificant but important note
forms the transition to the third phrase. Despite an indicated major
pause here, the note effecting the transition makes for a short rest only.
Codex 121 of Einsiedeln inserts at this place "st" {statim, at once)
which in modern music corresponds to an attaca subito. The third
phrase should be rendered in broad, full tones, every word being given
due prominence.

Today's Introit forms the favorite chant of many singers. K. K.y
23, 3 ff.; Revue gr., 9, 136 ff.

GRADUAL (Ps. 47: 10, 11, 9)

1. Suscepimus, Deus, misericor- 1. We have received thy mercy,

diam tuam in medio templi tui: 2. 0 God, in the midst of thy temple:

secundum nomen tuum, Deus, ita 2. according to thy name, 0 God, so

et laus tua in fines terrae. ^. 1. also is thy praise unto the ends of

Sicut audivimus, 2. ita et vidimus, the earth. S^. 1. As we have heard,

2. in civitate Dei nostri, in monte 2. so we have seen, in the city of our

sancto ejus. God, and in his holy mountain.

This corpus repeats the text of the first two phrases of the Introit
and bears some melodic similarity to it: (tu)-am tem-(pli), secundum
no-(men). In general, this part is characterized by solemn serenity. The
melody of the verse is practically the same as that of Maundy Thurs-
day. The florid melisma over ilium of the latter is unhappily wanting
here.

The prophecy of Malachias (Lesson of the feast) has been realized,,
and "we have received Thy mercy, 0 God." In His holy temple we be-
hold Him, the Angel of the covenant, the Angel of the great counsel
(Introit of the third Mass of Christmas). And this is the house of God,
in which we render Him homage and offer Him our worship of adora-
tion.

368 Purification of the Blessed Virgin or Candlemas

ALLELUIA VERSE

1. Senex puerum portahat: 2. 1. The old man carried the Child:

Puer autem senem regehat. 2. but the Child governed the old man.

The melody was explained on the feast of St. Andrew.

Like Simeon we also should be governed by the divine Child; He
alone should be our Lord and our King. Our soul in consequence will
he endowed with a maturity attained comparatively seldom even by
advanced age; it will radiate inner purity, sound judgment, and stead-
fastness. We can then apply to it the words of St. Ambrose speaking of
St. Agnes: "a brilliance of mind unrestrained." In all humility let us
pray as did Cardinal Newman even before his conversion: "I loved to
choose and see my path; but now, lead Thou me on."

The TRACT which is sung while the blessed candles are being
distributed has the same text and the same divisions as the Nunc di-
mittis. The Antiphon Lumen is added as a fourth verse.

OFFERTORY (Ps. 44:3)

1. Diffusa est gratia in labiis tuis 1. Grace is poured abroad in thy

2. propter ea benedixit te Deus in lips: 2. therefore hath God blessed
aeternum, 3. et in saeculum saeculi. thee forever, 3. and for ages of ages.

At the beginning of the Christmas season we referred these words
to the charm and beauty of the divine Child (see Gradual of the Sunday
after Christmas). Today, at the close of the Christmas season, these
same words glorify the Mother of the divine Infant. It has ever been the
wish of the artist to portray the exterior charm of the blessed Mother,
but never has the ideal conception of her been successfully materialized.
To comprehend fully the beauty of her soul one would needs require
eyes of faith and a soul as pure and rich in graces as Mary's. The Arch-
angel Gabriel at first sight of her exclaims: Ave, gratia plena — "Hail,
full of grace." This angelic salutation is developed and paraphrased in
the first phrase of the Offertory. The term plena corresponds to diffusa.
Would that we might sing this melody with the reverence and glowing
love of the Archangel! Following the low-pitched and rather reserved
introduction, gratia continues in a bright, ascending melody. The cli-
macus here and over läbi-(is) later must be sung crescendo. Tuis modu-
lates into a full step below the tonic. The second phrase, which is a
development of the Archangel Gabriel's benedicta tu, terminates in the
same manner. Following the ascending intervals of a fourth in the first
phrase we have here descending intervals of a fourth. The melody

Purification of the Blessed Virgin or Candlemas 369

c d cc g a is re-echoed in the following g h aa g g a. Deus should be given

the expression it demands. The word aeternum is accorded particular
splendor. The preceding torculi c d c reach their climax in d e c. The
final cadence should be sung broadly.

In the third and final phrase the singer, dwelling emphatically on
high c, would conclude his pean by describing for us eternity, endless
in extent. As in the second phrase, the neums here should be given pre-
cedence over the bistropha and tristropha. This finale is well rounded
off, having a conclusion similar to that of the first two phrases. The
Lessons of some feasts of the Blessed Virgin ascribe to her the words:
*'I shall not cease in all eternity." And truly, she will be blessed for all
eternity and will ever be the dispenser, the mediatrix of blessings. She
will never cease to console, to succor, and to heal.

The present feast invests the person of the Mother of God with a
peculiar charm. She appears as if transfigured by sorrow. She realizes
what the offering of her Son in the temple presages, for she hears there
the ominous words: "And thy own soul a sword shall pierce." And addi-
tional beauty and charm is imparted to her soul by the royal response:
Fiat — Be it done. As the Mother of Sorrows she becomes the fountain-
head of blessing and consolation for mankind.

In the oldest manuscripts this melody is noted on the feast of St.
Agnes (January 21). The tempo should be bright, the rendition light
and airy.

COMMUNION (Luke 2: 26)

Responsum accepit Simeon a Spi- Simeon received an answer from

ritu Sancto, nan visurum se mor- the Holy Ghost, that he should not
tern, nisi videret Christum Domini. see death, until he had seen the

Christ of the Lord.

The melody is narrative in character. Its musical fine is defined by
the word-accents.

As in response to his ardent expectation and prayer, Simeon re-
ceived a special inspiration of the Holy Ghost, and what thus far he had
beheld merely in spirit became for him today a blessed reality. He was
privileged before his death to look upon the "Christ of the Lord," to
take Him into his arms, to press Him to his bosom. In Holy Communion
we too may look upon Christ and receive Him into our hearts. My Blessed
Saviour, be Thou my light and consolation in the hour of death and re-

370 St. Matthias, Apostle

ceive me into eternal bliss! And Thou, O Mother of God, from whose
hands Simeon received the Saviour, be Thou to me at that moment the
Mother of light! Amen.

ST. MATTHIAS, APOSTLE
(February 24; in leap years, February 25)

The INTROIT is the same as on the feast of St. Andrew.
GRADUAL ((Ps. 138: 17, 18)

1. Nimis honorati sunt amici tui 1. Thy friends, 0 God, are ex-

Deus: 2. nimis confortatus est prin- ceedingly honorable: 2. Their prin-

cipatus eorum. 'f. 1. Dinumerdbo cipality is exceedingly strengthened,

eos: 2. et super arenam multiplica- jl. 1. / will number them: 2. and

huntur. they shall he multiplied above the

The melody was explained on the first Sunday of Lent. In the
original Hebrew version these verses are referred to the mysterious coun-
sels of God and to the power by which they are realized. Who is there
to number them, who can fathom their depths, or who can fully appre-
ciate them for the blessings they bring? Certainly no one was so thor-
oughly imbued with their spirit as the Apostles to whom the Saviour
revealed all that He had received from His Father (John 15: 15).

He shared with them His rights of sovereignity. They became
founders of holy catholic Church, whose children are as numerous as
the sands on the sea.

TRACT (Ps. 20:3, 4)

1. Desiderium animae ejus tri- 1. Thou hast given him his souVs

buisti ei: f et voluntate labiorum desire: f and hast not withholden

ejus non fraudasti eum. 2. Quoniam from him the will of his lips. 2. For

praevenisti eum in benedictionibus thou hast prevented him with bless-

dulcedinis. 3. Posuisti in capite ings of sweetness. 3. Thou hast set

ejus t eoronam de lapide pretioso. on his head f a crown of precious

stones.

The present melody should be compared with that of the Tract on
the feast of St. Joseph. Several formulas are repeated: Tribuisti e-(i) in
the first verse is identical with in benedicti6-(ne) of the second verse,

St. Matthias, Apostle 371

-rum ejus in the first verse with coronam of the third verse; eum in the
first verse is similar to -one of the second verse.

We might conjecture that St. Matthias, on the morning when
Christ chose His Apostles, entertained a secret desire to become an in-
timate friend of the Master and be numbered among the twelve. Our
Lord tendered him a cordial invitation, and by selecting him to supplant
Judas, placed on his head a crown of precious stones.

The OFFERTORY is the same as that on the feast of the Apostles
SS. Peter and Paul (q.v.).

COMMUNION (Matt. 19: 28)

1. Vos, qui secuti estis me, sede- 1. You who have followed me

Mtis super sedes, 2. judieantes shall sit on seats, 2. judging the
duodecim trihus Israel. twelve tribes of Israel.

The melody places special stress on the word vos. You, My faithful
Apostles, in company with Me shall one day judge the world. The mel-
ody over tri-(hus) is extended over super — possibly a matter of tone-
painting, as in the Gradual of the third Sunday of Advent over the
same word. The climax of the entire melody is realized over sedes, where
there is question of the thrones of the Apostles. The word-accents over
judieantes and duodecim are well defined. Preceded by a pressus the
melody descends twice to low c, followed both times by an interval of a
fourth. This cadence is very effective wherever an independent thought
is brought to a close. This is not the case here, however, especially over
the word duodecim. With the special prominence given the dominant /
we should expect the second mode rather than the first. This melody is
not found in manuscripts 339 of St. Gall's, 121 of Einsiedeln, or H. 159
of Montpellier.

The text, with an additional dicit Dominus: "saith the Lord,"
forms the Communion for the feast of St. Bartholomew. The melody
there, in the second mode, is very simple and almost entirely syllabic;
nevertheless it accentuates the words super sedes, and particularly the
important word judieantes (by means of recitation on high g).

Christ is speaking to His faithful Apostles. He to whom the Father
hath given all judgment (John 5: 22), could not bestow a greater dis-
tinction than to assign them thrones next to His own seat of judgment,
thus making them participants in His judicial power. He who has said:
"Who heareth you, heareth Me," promises by the mouth of His Apostles
eternal salvation to all who hear and observe their teaching, and eternal
damnation to all who despise it, because in so doing they despise Christ.

372 St. Joseph, Spouse of the Blessed Virgin Mary, Confessor

ST. JOSEPH, SPOUSE OF THE BLESSED
VIRGIN MARY, CONFESSOR

(March 19)

INTROIT (Ps. 91: 13, 14)

1. Justus ut palma florebit: sicut 1. The just shall flourish like the

cedrus Libani multiplicahitur: 2. palm tree: he shall grow up like the

plantatus in domo Domini, in atriis cedar of Lihanus: 2. planted in the

domus Dei nostri. Ps. Bonum est house of the Lord, in the courts of

confiteri Domino: * et psallere no- the house of our God. Ps. It is good

mini tuo, Altissime. to give praise to the Lord: * and to

sing to Thy name, 0 most High.

St. Joseph is the ideal just man. Already the Gospel calls him just,
thereby proclaiming his saintliness. His soul reflects the Sun of justice.
He is like the palm tree, modest, deriving next to nothing from the
earth, rising from comparatively barren soil, but growing heavenwards
and absorbing the light of the sun. In childlike simplicity he gave him-
self entirely to God. Fond of silence, not a single word of his is recorded.
Like a flower which blossoms forth and displays its beauty in silence, so
his life unfolded itself in its accomplishments in all quietness. Like the
cedar which spreads its branches far and wide in protection, his life was
characterized by faithfulness and firmness of character.

The second phrase indicates the fountainhead from which such a
life can draw its great beauty and power; it is none other than the temple
of God, the union with God and His holy will, the life in heaven. How,
wonderfully the holiness of Joseph developed when Providence trans-
planted him into God's garden at Nazareth, into the most intimate
union with Jesus and Mary. He was privileged to pray, to speak, to as-
sociate and to labor with them for many years. That was the court of
heaven, the house of God on earth (domus Dei nostri).

There, in company with Jesus and Mary, Joseph celebrated liturgy
and glorified the name of the most High. Certainly if any prayer was
ever good and perfect, it was that of the Holy Family.

Transplanted into heaven, this saint has all the more become like
the palm tree which refreshes us with its luscious fruit. There he is be-
come like the cedar under whose spreading branches the great family of
the Church is well protected.

Both phrases contain parallelisms quite characteristic of Hebrew
poetry. The word palma corresponds to cedrus, florebit to multiplicdbitur,

St. Joseph, Spouse of the Blessed Virgin Mary, Confessor 373

domo to dtriis. Both phrases have practically also the same divisions.
The first part of the first phrase rests on /, the second part on a. In the
second phrase / is again predominant, g occurring occasionally.

Peace and serenity, which are the prerogatives of the just man,
pervade the entire antiphon. Justus fashions a motive of its own and
forms the grammatical as well as the spiritual subject of the Introit.
The melody of this Introit must not be rendered in a heavy manner but
rather airily and at the same time with great delicacy. The strophici
over florebit should be sung decrescendo. The motive over ut palma is
amplified over cedrus Libani; c d f f becomes c d f g a a. The tarrying on
the dominant a might suggest the idea of multiplicity, extension, and
expansion of branches. The first syllable of multiplicähüur forms a rhyth-
mic upbeat followed by several groups of two notes: da, dc, da, ga, gg,

fg, fg-

The second phrase is characterized by serene quiet and firmness.
The melody over domo (Domini) is echoed over domus (Dei), while that
of the reverential Dei is repeated over nostri.

In the old manuscripts this melody occurs on the feast of St. Ste-
phen, Pope. It will be instructive to compare the first phrase with the
Offertory of the feast of St. John the Apostle.

GRADUAL (Ps. 20:4-5)

1. Domine, praevenisti eum in 1.0 Lord, thou hast prevented

henedictionihus dulcedinis: 2. po- him with blessings of sweetness: 2.

suisti in capite ejus coronam de Thou hast set on his head a crown

lapide pretioso. jl. 1. Vitam petiii of precious stones, jll. 1. He asked

a te, 2. et tribuisti ei longitudinem life of thee, 2. and thou hast given

dierum in saeculum saeculi. him length of days forever and ever.

St. Joseph was privileged to see and to hear the divine Saviour.
Many kings, however, as an indulgenced prayer mentions, looked in
vain for Him whom they so ardently desired to hear but were not per-
mitted to hear. St. Joseph, moreover, was not only privileged to see and
hear Him, but also to carry Him in his arms, to kiss Him, to clothe and
protect Him— indeed, a singular blessing. Beyond doubt, his life was
not devoid of sacrifice and suffering. He experienced great anxiety the
night he fled with the Child to evade the evil eye of Herod. Herod lost
his crown, but St. Joseph now wears a crown of precious stones the like
of which has never been worn by an earthly king. In union with Jesus
and Mary he enjoys a bliss which is eternal and indestructible.

In manuscript 339 of St. Gall's this Gradual is assigned to the
feast of St. Adrian. Later it was embodied in the Common of holy Abbots.

374 St. Joseph, Spouse of the Blessed Virgin Mary, Confessor

The first phrase of the corpus ascends majestically when telling of
the blessing which surpasses all understanding. The distribution of notes
■over henedictionihus is striking. Principal as well as secondary accents
have each only one note, whereas in each case the syllable following has
2, 5, and 5 notes respectively. The motive over (praeve)-nisti eum is re-
peated in practically the same form over pretioso and in accordantly ex-
tended form over -bus dulcedinis and ejus coronam. Over -(tü)-dinem in
the verse, this motive assumes the form fdec c. In place of the descend-
ing fourth g-d, posuisti and Vitam have the fourth a-e. The melody over
posuisti repeats itself over lapide. The last three groups of neums over
-(6)-so form the jubilus in the typical Alleluia of the fourth mode which
is sung, for example, on the third Sunday of Advent. The pressus, how-
ever, is missing here before the last note.

The high c over vitam should be sustained rather than abbreviated.
The tempo is gradually accelerated; the last three notes, however, are
retarded. The Alleluia of the Tuesday after Easter greets the risen Sa-
viour (Surrexit) with the same melisma. The melody over et trihuisti ei
recurs over dierum in saeculum. An attempt at tone-painting reveals
itself in the retarded notes over (longi)-tüdinem. The Gradual of the
twenty-second Sunday after Pentecost, and with minor variations the
Alleluia-verse of the fourth Sunday of Advent and the twentieth Sun-
day after Pentecost, close with the melody over saeculum. This verse is
written in the first mode, which also prevails in the corpus. The final
comes somewhat as a surprise.

TRACT (Ps. Ill: 1-3)

l.Beatus vir, qui timet Dominum: 1. Blessed is the man that feareth,

t in mandatis ejus cupit nimis. the Lord: f he shall delight exceed-

2. Polens in terra erit semen ejus: ingly in his commandments. 2. His

generatio rectorum henedicetur. 3. seed shall he mighty upon earth:

Gloria et divitiae in domo ejus: et the generation of the righteous shall

justitia ejus manet in saeculum he hlessed. 3. Glory and wealth shall

saeculi. be in his house: and his justice re-

maineth forever and ever.

In its second half each verse has the same formula which, descend-
ing to the tonic, sets in one syllable before the word-accent: -tis ejus,
rec-torum, -a ejus. The first and second verse have the same final cadence,
a change from & to 61? being introduced. The melodies of the second and
third verse are identical up to the florid close over saeculum saeculi.

Happy St. Joseph, who in the fear of the Lord, even at the cost of
great sacrifice, promptly and joyfully carried out every commandment

St. Joseph, Spouse of the Blessed Virgin Mary, Confessor 375

of God. Can we find another house or home possessing the fame and
spiritual wealth of the house of Nazareth? What great and innumerable
blessings have been bestowed upon the entire world by this house!

The old manuscripts assign this composition to the feast of Pope
Gregory the Great.

OFFERTORY (Ps. 88: 25)

1. Veritas mea et misericordia 1. My truth and my mercy are

mea cum ipso: 2. et in nomine meo with him: 2. and in my name his
exaltahitur cornu ejus. horn shall he exalted.

This piece marks the only place in the Gradule where the Fa clef
is on the fourth line. This would indicate that the melody has a strong
tendency to descend. The first half of the first phrase with a range of but
five note moves in intervals of seconds and thirds (repercussion); the
second half has one interval of a third, with the other intervals seconds.
Over the word ipso the melody modulates to a full step below the tonic
— a turn much favored by the second mode. The second phrase has a
range of an octave and comparatively large intervals; there are, how-
ever, fewer neums on individual syllables than in the first phrase. The
melody over -cordia recurs over mea, and in an abbreviated form over
ejus.

The melody is solemn and well sustained, which is all the more
fitting particularly when the word of God is quoted.

God redeemed His promises in the mystery of the Incarnation and
thereby exemplified His fidelity and mercy. St. Joseph was chosen the
guardian of this mystery. The text, however, may also bear a particular
application to the saint. He possesses the Truth of that God who said:
"I am the Truth." With him are the merciful Heart of Jesus and she
whom we greet as the Mother of mercy. He was privileged to spend
years in the most intimate companionship of Jesus and Mary. God
ordained him (Preface of feast) to be the Spouse of the Virgin Mother
of God and placed him, his faithful and prudent servant, at the head of
the family, that he might be the foster father of the Only-Begotten,
conceived of the Holy Ghost. The eternal decrees provided for the exal-
tation of this humble and hidden Saint of God, and determined him the
protector of the universal Church. Such is the providence of God, por-
trayed by the triumphant ring of the melody with its major chord over
nomine meo.

The old manuscripts assign this number to the feast of Pope St.
Marcellus.

376 The Annunciation of the Blessed Virgin Mary

COMMUNION (Matt. 1: 20)

1. Joseph, fill David, noli timer e 1. Joseph, son of David, fear not

accipere Mariam conjugem tuam: to take unto thee Mary thy wife: 2.

2. quod enim in ea natum est, de for that vjhich is horn in her is of

Spiritu Sando est. the Holy Ghost.

Both phrases have similar divisions. The first phrase begins on g~c,
tarries on d and g, and concludes on the tonic. The second phrase begins
on g-d, makes a half-pause on d and with a florid melisma closes on the
tonic. The significant words Maria and Spiritu are well emphasized in
both phrases. The melodic distinction given to est at the end of the two
half-phrases is conspicuous and provocative of thought. The original is
embodied in the Communion Eruhescant of the Monday of Holy Week.
The first phrase develops freely in its first half. After that there is an
apparent correspondence between various members of today's Com-
munion and the Communion Eruhescant: accipere Ma-(riam) and gra-
tulantur ma-(lis), (c6n)-jugem tuam and (ma)-lis meis, in 'ea natum and
(indu)-dntur pudore, est and (-ti) -a. Spiritu is again treated more freely,
while Sancto est corresponds to (ad)-versum est.

Indeed, the Communion text holds glad tidings for St. Joseph, fol-
lowing as they do the painful anxieties and doubts and fear he experi-
enced. Now he will not need to separate himself from her whom he re-
garded as the purest of Virgins and whom he loved with the chastest
love. The close relation with the supernatural and miraculous paralyzed
his soul, St. Bernard says. (Oberhammer, II, 247). He has been initiated
by the Angel into the mystery of the Incarnation, into the miraculous
operation of the Holy Ghost in the womb of his Spouse — the Holy Ghost
ever co-operates at the celebration of the Holy Eucharist. May He also
prepare our hearts that they become worthy to receive the Son of the
purest of Virgins!

THE ANNUNCIATION OF THE BLESSED
VIRGIN MARY

(March 25)

This is one of the most ancient feasts of the Church and can be
traced back to the fifth century. Its chants are contained in the oldest
manuscripts, while the Mass as such is post-Gregorian.

The Annunciation of the Blessed Virgin Mary 377

INTROIT (Ps. 44: 13, 15, 16)

1. Vultum tuum deprecabuntur 1. All the rich among the people

omnes divites plehis: 2. adducentur shall entreat thy countenance: 2.

regi virgines post earn; proximae after her shall virgins he brought to

ejus adducentur tibi in laetitia et the King: her neighbors shall he

exsuUatione. Ps. Eructavit cor meum brought to thee in gladness and re-

verbum bonum: * dico ego opera joicing. Ps. My heart hath uttered

mea regi. a good word: * I speak my works ta

the King.

The words of the psalm-verse are heard frequently during the course
of the ecclesiastical year, bur scarcely ever are they so full of meaning as
today. Most ardently heaven and earth awaited the word which the
Virgin of Nazareth was to utter! And today it is spoken, a good word,
a word which drew down from heaven the Son of God and gave us in
Mary a loving Mother; a word, which imparts to her soul a new beauty.
And when the Word was made flesh, Mary became the Mother of God.
Truly sublime in her dignity of motherhood, she is almost more noble
when uttering the simple words: Ancilla Domini — "I am the handmaid
of the Lord." She is not only prepared to give the Word of God a human
body, human life, but also ready to share with Him poverty, persecu-
tion, insults, and suffering.

Heaven and earth vie with one another in paying her homage.
While the mighty of heaven salute her in the Archangel Gabriel, the
kings of earth prostrate themselves before her, offer their crowns at her
shrine, and implore her blessing.

As if in deferential obeisance, the melody descends gracefully and
ascends in a similar manner. The whole is characterized by a suppressed
affection, a holding of one's breath, as it were, in the presence of the
majesty of Him whom Mary carries in her womb: super quern Reges
continehunt os suum.

The second phrase introduces a new line of thought. The angel de-
clares unto Mary, but she avows that she knows no man. What an ideal
of perfect virginity to strive for! Following in her footsteps (post earn),,
countless virgins (virgines) have given their hearts and their undivided
love to the King of Kings. The accented syllable here, as is frequently
the case, has but one note while the syllable following has several. The
same holds good with regard to the secondary accent on deprecabuntur
and adducentur. The melody moves in simple fashion within the tetra-
chord d-g. The first half of the third phrase likewise confines itself to a
tetra chord (c-f). The interval of a fourth over adducentur harks back to
(di)-vites of the first phrase. Over laetitia a bright joy characterizes the

378 The Annunciation of the Blessed Virgin Mary

melody and depicts for us the serene happiness that the chaste soul of
the Mother of God experiences when immersed in the contemplation
of the Deity.

In the oldest manuscripts this Introit is assigned to the first of
January, and bears the superscription Statio ad Sanctam Mariam; it is
likewise assigned to today's feast, to the feast of the Assumption of the
Blessed Virgin, and, as if by way of illustrating the second and third
phrases, to the feasts of St. Agnes (January 21) and St. Euphemia
(September 16). It forms the Introit of the second Mass in the Common
of a Virgin at the present time.

GRADUAL (Ps. 44:3, 5)

1. Diffusa est gratia in Idbiis tuis: 1. Grace is poured abroad in thy

2. propter ea henedixit te Deus in lips; 2. therefore hath God blessed
aeternum. ^. 1. Propter veritatem, thee forever, jl. 1. Because of truth
et mansuetudinem, et justitiam: 2. and meekness, and justice; 2. and
et deducet te mirabiliter dextera tua. thy right hand shall conduct thee

wonderfully.

The words of the Gradual refer in the first place to the Messias; a
part of them is thus sung on the Sunday within the octave of the Na-
tivity. Considering the close relation which exists between Child and
Mother, however, the Liturgy refers them to the Mother also.

Mary has on this day proffered a wonderful word which has won for
her a further blessing, yea, the plenitude of all blessings. The eternal
Son of God will become her Child.

Her word a blessing to the world imparts;
Mankind it saves from Satan's fiery darts.
— G. Dreves

The text of the corpus forms the Offertory for the feast of the Puri-
fication, the Alleluia-verse for the feast of St. Lucy (December 13), and
the Communion for the feast of St. Anne (July 26). The first phrase
rises to unwonted heights. A particularly happy coincidence is the fact
that just today the words Idbiis tuis are sung with such intensity of ex-
pression. The tonal as well as the harmonic foundation of the second
half of the second phrase is formed by /, and the high point of the mel-
ody which heretofore was b, now becomes 6b.

The text of today's verse introduces also the Gradual on the feast
of the Assumption and forms likewise the Alleluia-verse for the Mass of
a Virgin not a Martyr. The introductory is known to us from the verse
of the second Sunday of Lent. The melody forms a splendid climax over

The Annunciation of the Blessed Virgin Mary 379

the final syllable of mansuetudinem, then returns deftly to the tonic.
The et justitiam is reminiscent of Epiphany; that which follows, of the
feast of the Assumption; the conclusion, of the second Mass of Christmas.

TRACT (Ps. 44, 11—13, 10, 15, 16)

1. Audi, filia et vide, et inclina 1. Hearken, 0 daughter, and

aurem tuam: f quia concupivit rex see and incline thy ear: f for the
( — ) speeiem tuam. 2. Vultumtuum king hath greatly desired ( — ) thy
deprecahuntur omnes f divites beauty. 2. Thy countenance entreat
plebis: f filiae regum in honore shall all f the rich among the
tuo. 3. Adducentur regi virgines people: t the daughters of kings in
post eam: f proximae ejus ( — ) the honor. 3. After her shall virgins
afferentur tibi. 4. Adducentur in be brought to the king: f her neigh-
laetitia, et exsultatione: f adducen- bors ( — ) shall be brought to thee. 4.
tur in templum regis. They shall be brought with gladness

and rejoicing: f Ihey shall be
brought into the temple of the king.

The first verse is identical with the verse of the Gradual on the feast
of the Assumption. The last three verses are practically the same as the
text of the Introit.

As usual, the middle cadence precedes the sign (f), while the cae-
sura precedes the sign ( — ).

DURING PASCHAL TIME

FIRST ALLELUIA VERSE (Luke 1: 28)

1. Ave Maria, gratia plenxi, Do- 1. Hail, Mary, full of grace: the

minus tecum: 2. benedicta tu in Lord is with thee: 2. Blessed art
mulieribus. Alleluia. thou among women. Alleluia.

This text with its melody is already found in Codex 121 of Ein-
siedeln. Most likely it was original to the ninth Sunday after Pentecost.

SECOND ALLELUIA VERSE (Num. 17: 8)

1. Virga Jesse floruit: 2. Virgo 1. The rod of Jesse hath blos-

Deum et hominem genuit: 3. pacem somed: 2. a virgin hath brought
Deus reddidit, in se reconcilians forth God and man: 3, God hath
ima summis. Alleluia. given peace, reconciling the lowest

with the highest in himself. Alleluia.

380 The Annunciation of the Blessed Virgin Mary

The text as such forms a beautiful panegyric, and, coupled with its
sweet melody, is like a bouquet of fragrant blossoms which becomes a
genuine delight to the singer. Alleluia with its juhilus forms the theme,
and is repeated with variations in the verse. The introductory resembles
the Alleluia Dulce lignum on May 3. The first half of the melody over
-lu- is repeated over virga, is developed over se reconcili-(ans), and sim-
plified over (reddi)-dit. The second half of the same melody terminates
phrases and half-phrases no less than five times, and yet this repetition
is ever delightful; in most cases these phrases have a varied introduction.
The first part of the juhilus has an interval of a fifth; the concluding
part has the same range. This interval reappears over Jesse and over
pacem. All combine and effectively depict for us how^ God alone can grant
the inestimable treasure of peace. The second part of the juhilus produ-
ces an after-effect at (Vir)-go.

Today, in the womb of the purest Virgin, abject human nature is
espoused to the Word of the Most High, and thus, "reconciling the low-
est with the highest in Himself, God hath given peace" to the disturbed
world.

OFFERTORY— COMMUNION

Both of these chants are identical with those of the fourth Sunday
of Advent: Ave Maria and Ecce Virgo. At Mass the priest introduces the
Pater noster with the words: "Taught by the precepts of salvation, and
following the divine commandment, we make bold to say: Our Father
. . . ." Instructed by a like divine command the Archangel Gabriel ap-
proaches Mary with the salutation Ave. Filled with reverence for the
Virgin he dares pronounce these words only as God's messenger. We
likewise should pray and sing these words imbued with the sentiments
of the Archangel.

Today is realized the first part of the Communion text, for on this
day the Angel declared unto Mary and she conceived of the Holy Ghost.
Today the Word was made flesh, became our Emmanuel, God with us,
and dwells among us. This union of Divinity and humanity in the per-
son of the divine Word is indissoluble. The soul indeed separates from
the body on Golgotha, but Divinity and humanity can never be separ-
ated in Christ. Thus has human nature been elevated to a place of singu-
lar dignity and blessing. And in Holy Communion this same Christ
comes into our hearts with His Divinity and with His humanity.

St. Mark, Evangelist — SS. Philip and James the Younger 381

ST. MARK, EVANGELIST
(April 25)

The Introit opens with the word Protexisti. In it the Evangelist
gives expression to his gratitude to God for the protection which he has
been given against his enemies and persecutors (particularly at his
martyrdom). The melody repeats identical and similar forms and re-
quires lively rendition. The tonic of the seventh mode is found only at
the beginning and at the end of the antiphon.

The first ALLELUIA VERSE and the OFFERTORY are the
same as those on the feast of the Apostles Philip and James (May 1).

The second ALLELUIA VERSE Posuisti describes in a beautiful
and tuneful melody how God has placed on the head of the saint a crown
of precious stones. The verse repeats the motives of Alleluia and its
juhilus: abed. Posuisti corresponds to a, Domine to b c and the first
part of a; ejus is an extended form of c, a free repetition of which is given
over coronam; de läpide pretiöso repeats the entire melody of alleluia and
the juhilus.

The melody dates back to the twelfth century.

The COMMUNION Laetdhitur Justus belongs to the most effective
and worth-while chants of the Graduale. It rouses to the height of en-
thusiasm. The introductory motive / gga gf becomes fa ag cc a eg over
in Dö-(mino), and Jac e^d^c^ over et sperdbit. Such is the song of a faith
that knows neither enemy nor difficulty. After a quiet, contrasting me-
lodic descent, the jubilant Alleluia with its fac^ dV^eVe^d^c^ brings the
piece to a close. Even as the beginning of the members of each phrase
depict exuberant joy, so the final groups with their rhymes -mino, corde,
-luia and the sequences recti and -Mia with ca&bc&l? ga h\>a g fg dgf
breathe the peace of a soul united to God.

Revue, 20, 138.

H« * * *

SS. PHILIP AND JAMES THE YOUNGER,
APOSTLES

(Mayl)

It was on this day during the pontificate of John III (661-674)
that the Church of the Twelve Apostles at Rome, which possessed relics
of the two Apostles Philip and James, was dedicated. The same date
commemorated the deliverance of Rome by Narses from the Gothic

382 SS. Philip and James the Younger

king Totila. The resulting joy of the populace is clearly expressed in
the Introit.

INTROIT (Neh. 9:27)

1. Clamaverunt ad te, Domine, in 1. They cried to thee, 0 Lord, im

tempore afflictionis, 2. et tu de caelo the time of their tribulation, 2. and
exaudisti eos, alleluia, alleluia. Ps. thou heardest them from heaven,
Exsultate justi in Domino: * rectos alleluia, alleluia. Ps. Rejoice in the
decet collaudatio. Lord, ye just: * praise hecometh the

upright.

These words of the Introit we can readily apply to the Apostles-
Philip willingly heeded the call of the Lord: Do thou follow me! In fact,,
whosoever would follow Jesus, and particularly he who is called to the-
apostolate, must walk the way of the cross and be prepared for sacrifice-
and suffering. The Lord and Master clearly predicted this for the Apostles.
In their own country they were driven out of the synagogues, scourged^
and dragged to civil courts; in foreign countries where Providence as-
signed them fields of labor, they were subjected to poverty, privation^
and persecution. The first phrase recounts how often these same Apostles
cried to the Lord for help, while the second phrase notes that their prayers^
were heard. The assurance of the Lord that He would be with them all
days never failed them, even in that supreme moment when they cli-
maxed their life with a martyr's death. Death, however gruesome^
brought the fulfillment of their only wish, union with their divine Mas-
ter. Hence, the psalm-verse breaks forth into jubilation.

After the solemn intonation and the effective emphasizing of Do-
mine we should expect further development. The melody continues
modestly, however, and moves quite regularly within the range of the
D plagal mode. The two alleluia are those which usually conclude the
Introits of the second mode. The modulation over eos into a full step
below the dominant is quite in place.

FIRST ALLELUIA VERSE— OFFERTORY (Ps. 88: 6)

1. Confitehuntur caeli mirahilia 1. The heavens shall confess thp

tua, Domine: 2. etenim veritatem wonders, 0 Lord: 2. and thy truth
tuam in ecclesia sanctorum. in the church of the

Who, we might ask, are the heavens and who the community of the
saints? In first order we might place the starry firmament, proclaiming
as it does by its beauty and its harmonic laws, the glory and the fidelity
and the power of God. Pope St. Gregory, commenting on the words of

SS. Philip and James the Younger 383

the psalm: "The heavens are confirmed by the word of the Lord," tells
us that by the term "heavens" we are here to understand the Apostles.
They derive their power from the divine Spirit; failing this, they could
never have dared to oppose the powers of the world. The community of
saints, according to the favorite interpretation of St. Paul, are the
(first) Christian communities. It was to them that the Apostles first
proclaimed the wonderful deeds of the Lord. They were made to share
particularly the miracle of His divine incarnation, the wonders of His
goodness, humility, meekness, and compassionate, never-tiring, un-
selfish love. The Apostles carried the truth of Christ to the ends of the
world and taught that He alone is the truth which makes us free and
happö^, that He remained faithful even unto death.

In heaven, the saints without ceasing proclaim the operations of
God's miraculous power and fidelity in them. True, they had to suffer
persecution for justice' sake — the Epistle of the day indicates this —
but now they are in heaven, "are numbered among the children of
God, and their lot is among the saints" (Epistle).

The Offertory has the same text as the Alleluia-verse with the ex-
ception of the word etenim; the latter is compensated for by two alleluia
at the end of the piece. Both compositions are in the seventh mode, have
the same structure and similar melodies over mirahilia; both emphasize
the word caeli, the Offertory particularly, with a view toward word-
painting.

The juhilus has the form a a^ b. The melody over alleluia recurs
over Confitebuntur, while that over mirahilia recurs in fine symmetry
over veritdtem tuam. The first phrase is constructed in psalmodic form,
having intonation, middle cadence on the dominant, and final cadence
on the tonic. The etenim repeats its melisma. The fact that the second
syllable of this word has neums may be ascribed to the pronunciation
of the vulgar Latin which separated compound words into their com-
ponent parts, thus: et — enim.

The Offertory surpasses the Alleluia in boldness of movement and
display of enthusiasm. The melody is characterized by the fiery zeal
with which the Apostles spoke of the wonderful deeds of God and with
which they infiamed others. It depicts the influence of Apostolic teach-
ing spread to the very confines of the world. The intervals of a fourth es-
pecially are effective. The second phrase, which begins with the same
motive as the first, is more quiet. The cdccgcc over (sanc)-t6rum is ex-
tended to cc dcd cc g a ccc over the first alleluia and to ede cc g a ccc over,
the second alleluia.

384 SS. Philip and James the Younger

SECOND ALLELUIA VERSE (John 14: 9)

1. Tanto tempore vohiscum sum 1. So long a time have I been with

et non cognivistis mel 2. Philippe, you, and have you not known me'!
qui videt me, videt et Patrem meum. 2. Philip, he that seeth me, seeth

my Father also.

The melody was explained on the vigil of Christmas.

These words of the Saviour, filled with loving complaint, call to
mind the prayer of St. Augustine: Noverim Te — would that I knew Thee,
and knew the Father in Thee! Every day that I am granted to serve
and dwell in Thy house let me grow in knowledge and love of Thee, so
that my song and prayer may become ever purer, deeper, and more per-
fect.

COMMUNION (John 14: 9, 10)

1 . Tanto tempore vohiscum sum, 1 . So long a time have I been with

et non cognovistis mel 2. Philippe, you, and have you not known met 2,

qui videt me, videt et Patrem meum, Philip, he that seeth me, seeth my

alleluia: 3. non credis, quia ego in Father also, alleluia: 3. believest

Patre, et Pater in me estl alleluia, thou not that I am in the Father,

alleluia. and the Father in mel alleluia,

alleluia.

The first two phrases of the Communion, which form the text of
the Alleluia-verse, as well as the third phrase, are taken from the Gos-
pel. The first part is tinged with the sadness which the Saviour must have
felt when speaking these words. The melodic figure over tempore recurs
over Philippe and that over cognovistis me again over (Pa)-trem, alle-
luia).

The above selection serves also as a Responsory at Matins. This is
at times mirrored in the responsorial character of the melody. Accord-
ing to Wagner (III, 338 f.) the piece has three musical periods, the first
of which closes with the word credis. The second, which has an energetic
upward tendency, begins with quia ego on low d. The preceding musical
period should then, if we consider the need and rules for contrast when
combining phrases, close with e f. This is actually the case in the present
instance with credis. The same reason might explain the notation over
est which immediately precedes the first word of the third musical period.
In this case, however, the interrogatory form of the sentence which
closes with an upward inflection, should also be given due consideration.
The two alleluia which form the third musical period in many Respon-
sories include the most important motives. The ascent of the melody in

The Finding of the Holy Cross 385

the third phrase is similar to that of the Communion on the Sunday
after the Ascension, and reminds us of the Ascension of our Lord to His
heavenly Father. Taken as a whole, there is something about the melody
that demands respect and reverence, at the same time filling us with
holy astonishment.

To know our Saviour is to imitate Him. How well, then, can we
apply to ourselves the gentle reproof and urgent exhortation to a more
faithful imitation, as the first phrase of the Communion indicates! In
Holy Communion the Saviour gives us a new and deeper understanding
of His essence and of His intimate union with the Father. Together with
the Father and the Holy Ghost He comes into our heart, and imparts
to us the necessary strength to follow in His footsteps without faltering.

THE FINDING OF THE HOLY CROSS

(May 3)

The Mass is post-Gregorian. The Introit and the Offertory are the
same as those on Maundy Thursday. But what on that day was still
prophecy is now become reality. The Crucified has shown Himself to be
our salvation, our life, and our resurrection. He who was exalted on the
cross is now elevated to the glory of the Father. He will die no more, for
He is now in possession of the eternal life of glory. A complete trans-
figuration was effected with the dawn of an Easter morn, with the jubi-
lant ring of an Alleluia.

FIRST ALLELUIA VERSE (Ps. 95: 10)

1. Dicite in gentibus, 2. quia 1. Say ye among the gentiles, 2.

Dominus regnavit a ligno. that the Lord hath reigned from the

wood.

During the Christmas season the words: "The Lord hath reigned,"
in conjunction with the phrase: "He is clothed with beauty," were of
frequent occurrence. Today, however, in place of the second phrase, we
supply the following: "The Lord hath reigned from the wood." During
the first Christian centuries it was generally believed that these words
had been quoted from the Psalter. The Jews had even been accused of
deleting them from the Psalter. The fact of the matter is that they
form a later addition, albeit, full of deep meaning. The inscription on
the cross bore witness that the Lord is King. The Saviour Himself, in
fact, called the day of His crucifixion the day of His exaltation and

386 The Finding of the Holy Cross

triumph. For Him the cross is the royal throne whence He draws all
things unto Himself, the throne of grace which all may approach with
confidence. The early Middle Ages delighted in making the cross of
precious metals studded with gems, and placing a golden crown on the
head of the Crucified.

The melody is sung with the same text on Friday of Easter Week,
and again on Saturday of Pentecost Week with the text: "It is the spirit
that quickeneth, but the flesh profiteth nothing." The alleluia has the
form a b b^. The first phrase, which has the mode-rate range of a fourth,
moves about the tonic. The second phrase has a more extended range.
The 6 d c g ä g f over -(lü)-ia becomes h c b g ä h a over -te, and f g f e
fed over D6-. Regnavit is an extension of b and closes with the final ca-
dence of the Alleluia of Holy Saturday.

SECOND ALLELUIA VERSE

1. Dulce lignum, dulces clavos 1. Sweet wood, sweet nails, hear-

dulcia f er ens ponder a: 2. quae sola ing a sweet weight: 2. which alone

fuisti digna sustinere Regem cae- wast worthy to hear the King of

lorum, et Dominum. heaven, and the Lord.

The first phrase is like a solemn echo of the refrain which is inserted
after every second stanza of the hymn sung during the Adoration of the
Cross on Good Friday. The full import of the phrase for today's feast is
indicated by the words Flecte ramos of that hymn. There the cross is be-
sought to relax its native tension and rigidness and become a soft and
quiet place of rest for the King of heaven; the cruel nails are entreated
not to inflict pain, but to consider the sweet burden it is their privilege
to bear.

The touching melody, the first phrase of which especially should be
rendered delicately, is characterized by tenderness and fervor. The
melody over alleluia recurs over dulce lignum. It likewise introduces the
Lauda Sion on the feast of Corpus Christi. The second part of the first
phrase bears some similarity to the first Alleluia- verse. The second
phrase emphasizes the thought that the cross alone was worthy to bear
the King of heaven. The melody over sustinere is similar to that of the
first member of the juhilus.

This cross of our Saviour has sweetened the bitter trials of this
life and made them bearable, it has lightened the many heavy burdens
under which mankind labors, it has reconcüed souls with the hard lot
which has been made their portion. Therefore: Hail to thee, thou sweet
Cross!

Solemnity of St. Joseph 387

COMMUNION

1. Per Signum Crucis de inimicis 1. By the sign of the cross, from

nostris 2. libera nos, Deus noster, our enemies, 2. deliver us, O thou
(alleluia). our God, (alleluia).

The circumstances of the times and the fear of the Lombard inva-
sions into Roman territory very likely occasioned this prayer, the con-
tent of which was already expressed in the Secret. In the Old Testament
the destroying angel passed the houses of those whose doorposts were
sprinkled with the blood of the sacrificial lamb. The cross of Christ,
crimson with the blood of the true Paschal Lamb, is a source of terror to
all the enemies of Christ and of our soul. We will be safe against all
attacks of the enemy if we place ourselves under its protecting arms, if
we look confidently to the Crucified and model our life on His life of
obedience unto death.

In Holy Communion our souls are sprinkled with the blood of the
same Christ, thus protecting us from all spiritual harm.

On the Monday after the fourth Sunday in Lent this melody is
sung to the text: "From my secret sins cleanse me, 0 Lord: and from
those of others spare Thy servant." Today's petition for deliverance,
libera wos— "deliver us" — is made particularly impressive by its interval
of a fifth, and by emphasizing and accentuating high e with a double
pressus. The beginning of this second phrase, then, implies a lively gra-
dation of melody in comparison with that over de inimicis nostris, where
c predominates. The word noster also receives special prominence, and,
like the three preceding parts, has the same florid melody with a double
pressus. The a gagf over Crucis seems to recur as e decb over -ra nos.

This melody is also sung on the feast of the Most Pure Heart of
Mary. Its origin is most likely to be found in the Communion Dilexisti,
which is now in the Common of a Holy Woman not a Martyr; in the old
manuscripts it is given on the feast of the Assumption. Per signum Cru-
cis is identical with Dilexisti, and -eis nostris with -titiam; -ra nos re-
sembles -disti nos, while Deus no- resembles iniquitd-(tem).
* * * *

SOLEMNITY OF ST. JOSEPH

(Spouse of the Blessed Virgin Mary, Confessor,

and Patron of the Universal Church.)

AFTER EASTER

Today's feast dates back to the year 1847. Since the time of Pius
X it has been celebrated on the Wednesday of the second week after

388 Solemnity of St. Joseph

Easter. In some places it is celebrated on the third Sunday after Easter.
The feast was formerly known as the Patrocinium — the Patronage
of St. Joseph. The same thought persists in the liturgy of the Mass for
today, which celebrates him as the patron of the universal Church. It
is in this sense that the word Protector in the Introit and the first Alleluia-
verse and the word Patrocinium in the second Alleluia-verse is to be
taken. The Offertory, moreover, is a hymn of thanks for the blessing
and protection which the saint has imparted to the Church. God gave
him the sublime office of protector of the divine Child, that he might
guard Him against all dangers and enemies, and might nourish and
foster Him. The small house of Nazareth, however, has now grown to
be the universal Church, and the love which St. Joseph centered on the
divine Child now embraces all those who belong to the mystical body
of Christ.

INTROIT (Ps. 32:20, 21)

1. Adjutor et protector noster est 1. The Lord is our helper and

Dominus: 2. in eo laetahitur cor protector: 2. in him our heart shall

nostrum, 3. et in nomine sancto rejoice, 3, and in his holy name we

eius speravimus. 4. Alleluia, alle- have trusted. 4. Alleluia, alleluia,

luia, Ps. Qui regis Israel, intende: Ps. Give ear, 0 thou that rulest

* qui deducts velut ovem, Joseph. Israel: * thou that leadest Joseph

like a sheep.

The Introit Salve sancta parens for various feasts of the Blessed
Virgin takes its melody from the feast of the Epiphany. In like man-
ner the melody of the second and third phrases of the Introit for today
is taken from the Introit of the third Christmas Mass. With the latter
melody we greet on this occasion the royal Child with His Mother, and
on another the Child with His divinely appointed foster father.

The first phrase sings the praises of God for the help and protection
he has deigned to grant us through the mediation of St. Joseph. The
word protector is given prominence melodically. The emotional laetahi-
tur, the vigorous cor, and the trusting speravimus of the second and
third phrases have such well-adapted melodies, that we might be led to
suppose an original composition. Through an association of ideas nomine
sancto eius recalls vocdbitur nomen eius of the Christmas Mass. The first
alleluia repeats the melody of laetahitur, while the second has the same
close as the Christmas Introit.

The verse reminds us of the loving guidance with which God led
the Israelites, especially the patriarch Jacob and the Egyptian Joseph,
who is the prototype of St. Joseph. With still greater love God guides
and directs St. Joseph and all who are entrusted to his care.

Solemnity of St. Joseph 389

FIRST ALLELUIA VERSE

1. De qnacumque trihulatione 1. In whatever tribulation they

clamaverint ad me, exaudiam eos, shall cry to me, I will hear them,
2. et ero protector eorum semper. 2. and he their protector always.

The melody makes frequent use of the intervals c-e-g with pauses
mostly on g and e. It might thus be assigned to the ancient C mode,
which, like the Popule mens, closes on d (cf. Jeannin, Melodies syriennes
et chaldeenes, Leroux, Paris, p. 124). As early as the eleventh century it
was sung in honor of the Cross, to the text beginning with Nos autem.
The three pressus serve as so many pillars for the buoyant melody of
the jubilus. The melody over De quacumque is repeated over clamaverint,
while that over exaudiam is similar to (pro)-tector eorum {Revue, 3, 163).
A peculiar joy should characterize our rendition of the two phrases in
which St. Joseph speaks to us in a reassuring manner and we, in turn,
gratefully acknowledge his loving protection.

SECOND ALLELUIA VERSE

1. Fac nos innocuam, Joseph, de- 1. Obtain for us, O Joseph, to

currere vitam: 2. sitque tuo semper lead an innocent life; 2. and may it
tuta patriocnio. ever be safe through thy patronage.

The text forms a distich. The melody, however, is not influenced by
its metrical form.

The original melody dates from the eleventh century. A feeling of
earnest entreaty and of lofty aspiration pervades the melody, depicting,
as it were, anticipation of an ascension to heaven. Well adapted to the
pleading character of the text is the soaring melody at the close.

Faultless and pure was the life of St. Joseph to whose care God en-
trusted the Virgin of Virgins and the Christ Child, who was innocence
itself. The melodies over Fac nos and Joseph show similarity. The florid
melisma over tu-(ta) has the form a b c. Part a has rhymelike conso-
nance to which b with its descending line forms a contrast; c is made
up of semper tu-(ta) and vitam.

Being mindful of our own helplessness, we should sing this melody
with great fervor. When entreating St. Joseph to be our protector at all
times, let us not forget the great need we shall have of his protection in
the hour of death. An atmosphere of glad and trusting hope in the faith-
ful, and often proven, love of St. Joseph will then pervade our chant.

Revue, 9, 131 ff.

390 Solemnity of St. Joseph

OFFERTORY (Ps. 147: 12, 13)

1. Lauda, Jerusalem, Dominum: 1. Praise the Lord, 0 Jerusalem:

2. quoniam confortavit seras por- 2. because he hath strengthened the
tarum tuarum: 3. benedixit filiis bolts of thy gates: S. He hath blessed
tuis in te. 4. Alleluia, alleluia. thy children within thee. 4. Alle-

luia, alleluia.

The phrasing of the text is both clear and distinct. The first phrase
is an exhortation to Jerusalem to render praise to God, the second and
third phrases give the reasons for this exhortation, while the fourth
phrase comprises a joyous Alleluia. Lauda is not so much a call to an
energetic awakening as to sober reflection: Jerusalem, city of peace, re-
flect and realize, how according to the implication of your very name,
you have every reason to praise your God. God has so strengthened the
bolts of your gates that enemies shall storm against them in vain. He has
given you a powerful protector in St. Joseph. The melody over the
accented syllable of confortavit is invigorating and triumphant. The
musical turn c be ac ga a immediately preceding and introducing this
word is very charming. St. Joseph not only protects the Church from ex-
ternal enemies, but mediates for her inner life and well-being (in te) rich
graces and blessings from which all her children may draw. The veins
through which these graces and blessings flow to the individual are the
Sacraments of the Church. The melody now becomes more quiet, more
simple, one might say more intimate. The second part of each of these
phrases shows various similarities:

gag

Do-

mi-

num

abca

gfag

se-

ras

por-

td-

rum

gfag

fi-

li-

tu-

is.

The first Alleluia is an earnest, almost timid cry of joy, following
which the melody develops brilliantly and joyfully. The pressus, which
are each preceded by four-note groups, form the points of support for
the rich melisma. These four-note groups invariably set in a third higher
than their preceding note. There is also a group over -ia similar to the
one at the close of the first phrase.

COMMUNION (Matt. 1: 16)

1. Jacob autem genuit Joseph, 1. Now Jacob begat Joseph, the

virum Mariae, 2. de qua natus est husband of Mary, 3. of whom was

Nativity of St. John the Baptist 391

Jesus, qui vocatur Christus. Alle- born Jesus, who is called Christ,
luia, alleluia. Alleluia, alleluia.

The above enumeration brings to completion the genealogy of
Christ. Although Jesus is called the Son of David, the Gospels refer to
St. Joseph as the son of David also, thus indicating his royal lineage.
Over and above this, he stands in closest relationship to our Lord by
reason of his inner disposition, and by the fact that he was the worthy
consort of the Mother of God.

The melody is taken from the Communion on the vigil of St. An-
drew. The dramatic, sparkling vivacity of the original, its feeling of ex-
ultation and joy in the cry: "We have found the Messias," obviously
cannot be developed with the present modest text. Where the original
has: Invenimus Messiam, qui dicitur Christus, today's text has: natus
est Jesus, qui vocatur Christus. This close textual relationship may have
occasioned the choice of the melody. Unhappily there is an interval of
only a fourth over Jesus, while the corresponding word in the original
has a fifth. In three instances only does the melody here extend beyond
the dominant of the eighth mode, while it becomes the mainstay for the
fuller developed second phrase. Low / over the second Alleluia forms the
antithesis to high / over natus.

The holy names of Jesus, Mary, and Joseph, in whatever sequence
they may appear when combined in one sentence, should always be
precious and dear to us.

THE NATIVITY OF ST. JOHN THE BAPTIST

(June 24)

INTROIT (Isa. 49: 1, 2.)

1. De ventre matris meae vocavit 1. The Lord hath called me by my

me Dominus nomine meo, 2. et name from the womb of my mother,

posuit OS meum ut gladium acutum; 2. and he hath made my mouth

3. sub tegumento manus suae pro- like a sharp sword; 3. in the shadow

texit me, 4. et posuit me quasi sa- of his hand he hath protected me,

gittam electam. Ps. Bonum est con- 4. and hath made me as a chosen

fiteri Domino, * et psallere nomini arrow. Ps. It is good to give praise

tuo, Altissime. to the Lord. * and to sing to thy

name, O most High.

392 Nativity of St- John the Baptist

In the Introit St. John tells of the wonderful things that God has
wrought in him. His is the voice of one crying in the wilderness — au-
stere, earnest, solemn. This is graphically depicted by the melody which
is devoid of drama, rather restrained, has no noticeable gradations, and
employs only few, albeit artistic, forms. The melody, moreover, must
be sung in a low pitch, since the verse with its high dominant precludes
any transposition upward. A feeling of gratitude is nevertheless appar-
ent, and the whole is pervaded by a joyous ring like an echo of the joy-
ous and bright Magnificat which the Mother of God sang in the house
of St. John's parents. Our rendition, especially of the numerous bi-
strophas and tristrophas should not be slow and cumbersome. Rhyth-
mical manuscripts indicate no less than nine celeriter (rapidly), and sel-
dom employ sustained neums.

The motive over (n6mi)-ne meo recurs over (prote)-xit me and
(p6su)-it me. Acutum and manus suae correspond imitatively to (posu)-
it OS meum. The second posuit is identical with protexit. The porrectus
over these two words are resolved into three single notes over tegumento.
The endings over meum, (a)-cütum and suae have rhythmic similarity.

The melody is assigned to the first mode. As a matter of fact, the
actual dominant is that of the second mode, /, not a of the first mode.
There is, moreover, the tone range from low a to high &b, and the de-
scent to low a which is characteristic of the second mode. These con-
siderations indicate not the first mode but the plagal form, the second
mode. If in spite of this the melody is nevertheless assigned to and sung
in the first mode, this is evidently done in consideration of the fact that
the introduction of the Introit employs a form typical of the first mode.
(Cf. Pueri Hehraeorum, p. 151). But even then, a rule formerly observed
directed that the final cadence of the psalmody should adapt itself to
the beginning of the antiphon.

The earnestness and sobriety of the present melody become more
apparent if we consider the great joy radiated in the text and melody
of the Introit Ne timeas of yesterday's vigil. We should naturally ex-
pect an intensification of this joy in the Mass of the feast. This seeming
paradox vanishes, however, if we advert to the fact that the Introit of
the vigil depicted an angel from heaven as speaking, while today it is
St. John, entering upon an austere and sacrificial life which will end in
martyrdom, who speaks. And St. John's one wish is to diminish, that
Christ may increase.

The text is taken from the prophet Isaias and refers primarily to
the coming Messias. When "the angel declared unto Mary" — therefore,
before the actual birth of Christ (De ventre matris meae) — the name of
Jesus was given Him for the first time. God endowed Him with all that

Nativity of St. John the Baptist 393

was necessary to carry out His vocation. His preaching (os meum) car-
ried with it irresistible authority which struck His enemies near by like
a "sharp sword," and those at a distance like a "chosen arrow." This
sword, however, is sheathed and the arrow is in the quiver and will be
used only when and how God wills; but then they will strike true and
without fail.

These words of Isaias the Church applies to St. John; today he
makes them his own. Like our Saviour, St. John was also called by
name while still in the womb of his mother. After he had been conceived
an angel addressed him with the name John — "God has shown His
mercy." It was this mercy of God that freed him from original sin al-
ready in the womb of his mother and filled him with the Holy Ghost.
Even before the Sun of Justice has risen, It penetrates with Its sancti-
fying rays the soul of St. John and makes it holy. In the course of time
God leads him into solitude where great souls are prepared and matured
for their vocation. The penitential austerity he practiced throughout
his life fitted him well for preaching and demanding penance of others.
His words smote like a "sharp sword" and "a. chosen arrow" all that was
unclean and vulgar. He carried out the will of God with the abandon
and lightning speed of an arrow. This is the picture of St. John who
today sings the earnest words of the Introit.

In contrast with the antiphon, the verse is joyous and jubilant. In
it the Church gives expression to that happiness which the Angel pro-
phesied would mark the birth of St. John, and sings the praises of the
Lord for all the miracles of grace wrought upon our saint.

Musica sacra, 45, 125 flf., Caecilia, 31, 85 ff.

GRADUAL (J er. 1:5,9)

-In the corpus of the Gradual the person of God is portrayed as
speaking; in the verse, the person of the prophet Jeremias, whose words
are allotted to St. John. With the Introit taken from Isaias and the Gra-
dual from Jeremias we have the two greatest prophets of the Old Tes-
tament represented on the feast of St. John, who "is more than a pro-
phet." Like the Introit, the Gradual describes the operations of God's
grace and love in preparing St. John for his sublime vocation and sanc-
tifying him (sanctificavi te) "in his mother's womb." Introit and Gra-
dual have thus many points in common.

The corpus exhibits textual parallelism.

1. Priusquam te formarem in 1. Before I formed thee in the

utero, novi te: 2. et antequam exires bowels of thy mother, I knew thee:
de ventre, sanctificavi te. 2. and before thou earnest forth out

of the womb, I sanctified thee.

394 Nativity of St. John the Baptist

The second phrase, in repeating the thought of the first, explains
and develops it further. Just because God "knew" St. John, He also
"sanctified" him (sanctificdvi te). The principal thought: "I have sanc-
tified thee," is brought into plastic relief by the melody. In the first
phrase the melody moves about the tonic / and is consequently low-
pitched; in the second it rises to the dominant of the mode. This latter
is given special emphasis over sanctificdvi and te. The intonation Prius-
quam corresponds to the melody over dntequam exires, which is a fifth
higher. The fact that the accented syllable of Priusquam has only one
note, while the other two syllables have several notes, is probably due
to the fact that vulgar Latin was wont to pronounce compounded words
as separate words. According to the rules of grammar the words should
be accented priusquam, etenim, circumdate; chant, however, accents
them prius-quam, et-enim, circum-ddte.

The text of the verse reads as follows:

1. Misit Dominus manum suam. 1. The Lord put forth his hand, 2.

2. et tetigit os meum, 3. et dixit and touched my mouth, 3. and said
mihi. to me.

At the end of the third phrase we are prompted to ask the question:
What did God say? A colon was formerly placed after the words "said
to me," and the Alleluia with its verse was then considered their logical
continuation. The fact is, however, that Gradual and Alleluia do not
combine to form one whole; they are each assigned to a different mode,
at least in the present case. Moreover, the words of Zachary as con-
tained in the Alleluia-verse could hardly be ascribed to our Lord to
whom the words of the Gradual refer. The term "Gradual responsory"
implies what the answer to the above question will embody. After dixit
mihi, the text Priusquam. . .sanctificdvi te of the Gradual should be re-
peated. Needless to say, this sequence was alien to the mind of the pro-
phet Jeremias.

The melody sets in brightly on the dominant, about which it weaves
a pleasing melody, and should be sung with a lively tempo. After the
graceful descent and ascent over suam, the arsis comes to a sharply ac-
cented close on the dominant. The thesis, which introduces a relaxation,
begins with et tetigit. The close over dixit mihi is quite common (cf. the
Gradual of Epiphany).

ALLELUIA VERSE (Luke 1 : 76)

1. Tu, puer, Propheta Altissimi 1. Thou, child, shalt he called the
Docaheris: 2. praeihis ante Domi- Prophet of the Highest; 2. thou shalt
num par are vias eius. go before the Lord to prepare his ways.

Nativity of St. John the Baptist 395

Here the father of St. John depicts in prophetic vision the honor
and dignity which will accrue to his God-given child and the pre-emi-
nence it will be accorded over all other prophets. These latter beheld the
Messias only in the distant future; St. John, however, can point with
his finger to "the Lamb of God who takes away the sins of the world."
He is privileged to prepare the way upon which the Messias will enter
when seeking to find that which was lost.

There is something intimate and homely about the melody. It has
a Christmas spirit about it, such as we frequently heard in the Alleluia
from the third Christmas Mass up to Epiphany. This fact also indicates
the intimate relation which exists between the birth of Christ and the
birth of St. John. The twofold division Tu puer and praeihis, propheta
and Dominum is well known to us.

There can be no thought of an original composition here. All other
Alleluia melodies of this type have the melismas that are here over pro-
pheta, either at the end of a phrase or at least at the end of a member of
a phrase. The caesura after propheta (immediately preceding Altissimi
with which it is intimately connected), however, is somewhat disturbing.
Melodic considerations most likely occasioned the change of text. The
composer did not choose the wording of the Benedictus-verse: Tu Puer
. . . praeihis ante fdciem Domini as found in all, even the oldest, trans-
lations of the Bible, but a shorter one. A close study of this type of
Alleluia will show precisely that our melody can be employed only with
a sentence structure which has six word-accents of two or three syllables
each. The usual wording of the Benedictus-verse has an additional ac-
cent. And hence the composer, in order not to mutilate the musical form
or to detract from its effectiveness, arranged the text in favor of musical
form — a procedure of comparatively frequent occurrence in the old
chant. The present Alleluia did not exist before the eleventh century.
Prior to that a different text was used .

OFFERTORY (Ps. 91: 13)

1. Justus ut palma florehit: 2. 1. The just man shall flourish

sicut cedrus quae in Libano est, like the palm-tree: 2. he shall grow
multiplicahitur. up like the cedar of Lihanus.

The melody depicts the palm and cedar of Libanus in such a clear
and perceptible manner that we can readily visualize them as standing
before us, pointing upward, elevated above all that is earthly, and com-
pletely immersed in a warm flood of sunlight. In a similar manner we
might speak of the saints of God. Since their habitation is in heaven,
they have no further need of anything earthly. Among such is St. John,

396 Nativity of St. John the Baptist

the beloved disciple of Christ, to whose feast the oldest manuscripts
assign our present melody. St. John the Baptist also grew like the palm
in a lonely, barren desert, and like the cedar developed strength in pre-
paration for his difficult vocation. In this he persevered bravely and
vigorously until his life was crowned with a martyr's death.

For further explanation, see the feast of St. John the Evangelist.

COMMUNION (Luke 1 : 76)

1. Tu, puer, Propheta Altissimi 1. Thou, child, shall he called the

vocaheris: 2. praeibis enim ante Prophet of the Highest: 2. for thou
faciem Domini parare vias eius. shall go before the face of the Lord

to prepare his ways.

The Communion has the same text as the Alleluia, and to a great
extent the same melody. In regard to the latter we need but make the
following comparison:

Communion Alleluia

Tu puer = Tu puer

parare = Altis-(simi)

vias eius = -simi vocaheris

We might be inclined to think that, since Alleluia and Communion
have the same text, the melody of the former had some influence on that
of the latter. The fact of the matter is, however, that in the oldest manu-
scripts the Alleluia has a different text and melody. From an artistic
standpoint, the Communion melody is rated higher than that of the
Alleluia. The word propheta is impressive^ — annotated manuscripts have
a broad podatus over the accented syllable — while the melody, with its
high a, depicts wonderment over the honor and dignity of this child of
grace. A holy admiration has overtaken the father of St. John; at the
same time a proud paternal joy vibrates through the melody. This joy
is especially apparent over praeibis for, among all prophets, St. John
alone was permitted to be a contemporary of the Messias. He was per-
mitted to go before the Saviour and prepare His ways. The low descent
over parare with its pressus recalls to us the difficulties and trials St.
John experienced in preparing the way for the Lord.

Codex 121 of Einsiedeln assigns this Communion to the first (au-
thentic) mode, probably because in the same mode was sung the verse
which continues the text of our Communion: ad dandam scientiam — "to
give knowledge of salvation to his people, unto the remission of their
sins."

If this hymn should be for us a true Communion prayer, we shall
also enter into its sentiments and beg St. John to prepare the way for

SS. Peter and Paul, Apostles 397

the Lord into our heart and to invest our being with that humility which
at one time prompted him to exclaim: "I ought to be baptized by Thee,
and comest Thou to me?" (Matt. 3, 4) and by which he adjudged him-
self unworthy to loose the latchets of the shoes of Christ.

SS. PETER AND PAUL, APOSTLES
(June 29)

This feast, as indicated by its Collect, has always celebrated both
Apostles simultaneously. Indeed, both had, as Pope St. Leo indicates
(Migne, P. L., 54, 427 f.), the same calling, the same labors, and the
same end. It is their combined feast, a feast of the papacy and of the
Church, commemorating the victory of the cross over heathendom and
paganism.

The dramatic sense of the Church is well demonstrated in the con-
struction of the Mass formulary. First of all are cited the words of St.
Peter in the Introit of the Mass. Then in the corpus of the Graudal and
in the Offertory it is we who, filled with holy wonder over the dignity ac-
corded the Apostles, address ourselves to almighty God. The verse of
the Gradual offers our felicitations to the Church on the Aposles and the
unbroken line of Popes which God has given her. In the Alleluia and
Communion we finally hear Christ Himself speaking to Peter. All of
these texts are characterized by a direct approach, devoid of any pre-
paratory remarks.

INTROIT (Acts 12: 11)

1. Nunc scio vere quia misit Do- 1. Now I know in very deed that

minus Angelum suum; 2. et eripuit the Lord hath sent his angel, 2. and

me de manu Herodis, 3. et de omni hath delivered me out of the hand of

expectatione plebis Judaeorum. Ps. Herod, 3. and from all the expec-

Domine probasti me, et cognovisti tation of the people of the Jews. Ps.

me: * tu cognovisti sessionem meam Lord, thou hast proved me, and

et resurrectionem meam. known me: * thou hast known my

sitting down and my rising up.

With the words of the Introit St. Peter makes public the experi-
ences of his soul at the time he was miraculously liberated from prison.
The text and thought serve nicely as a prelude to the clear text of the
Epistle which follows, and which is likewise taken from the Acts of the
Apostles. Peter is in prison, the universal Church the meanwhile praying

398 SS. Peter and Paul, Apostles

for his deliverance. God then intervenes miraculously, but only at the
last moment, for the beheading of St. Peter was to have taken place on
the following morning. Divine intervention often comes only when,
humanly speaking, every other resource has been exhausted. Peter, ever
trusting, is not perturbed; he removes his sandals, takes off his mantle
and lays himself down to sleep. An angel enters his cell, loosens the
chains that bind him, and bids him put on sandals and cloak. Together
they pass by the iron gate which opens of itself. St. Peter, however, does
not realize the meaning of these happenings; to him they seem unreal
and dreamlike. It is only after the angel has accompanied him for some
distance and then vanishes that he comprehends the situation and knows
that he has been saved.

The melody over nunc is somewhat dreamlike. Very quickly, how-
ever, the soul of the Apostle grasps the reality of the situation. "In very
truth the Lord has sent His angel and He has liberated me." The melody
begins piano, grows rapidly, and over quia misit breaks forth like a ra-
diant sun which has triumphantly pierced a persistent fog. Manuscript
121 of Einsiedeln places an emphatic "t" (tenere, hold) over the virga
of quia. In the main, however, the tempo should be lively, and the ten-
dency to lag, especially in several passages, must be avoided. If we make
the joy of the Apostle our own, we will sing his hymn with a thankful
and rejoicing heart. All three phrases begin with /; the close of the sec-
ond and third have some similarity with that of the first. The repetition
over de (omni) of the initial motive over Nunc is the more noticeable in
manuscript 121 of Einsideln, since there we have in both cases a bistro-
pha and a porrectus. The four intervals of a fourth which follow — al-
ternately ascending and descending — have an effect like irony on the
eagerness of the Jews, who feel certain of their prey. Their well-laid
plans are now become like a torn spider's web. All three phrases, be it
once more mentioned, should be rendered fresh and lively. The con-
struction of the melody may possibly have been influenced by the use
of the tetrachords d-g over Nunc and et de, g-c over scio vere and expec-
tatione, e-a over de manu Herodis and Judaeorum.

In the psalm- verse the Apostle expresses gratitude for the guidance
of divine Providence. While he lay bound in prison he was not forgotten;
his liberation was effected and with it went the grant of a new life. The
text of the verse, taken from Psalm 138 and well adapted to the feasts
of the Apostles, reminds us of the Easter Introit. In fact, the deliverance
of St. Peter is effected by none other than the risen, transfigured Christ.
Numerous popes might have reiterated these same words of St. Peter.
Death and affliction threatened them also, but the Lord protected His
representative even to the extent of miraculous intervention (Kramp

SS. Peter and Paul, Apostles 39^

Messlüurgie und Gottesreich, III, 294). With subtle reserve St. Luke re-
marks that St. Peter, having been liberated from his prison in Jerusalem,
went into another land (in dlium locum). Divine Providence led him to
Rome. The Lesson from the Acts which follows is like an attestation, a
record of the birth of the Church in Rome, the mother and teacher of
all Churches. (Schuster IV, 301).

GRADUAL (Ps. 44: 17, 18)

1. Constitues eos principes super 1. Thou shalt make them princes

omnem terram: 2. memores erunt over all the earth; 2. they shall re-

nominis tui, Domini. ^. 1. Pro member thy name, 0 Lord. jll. 1. In-

patribus tuis nati sunt tibi filii: stead of thy fathers, sons are born

2. propter ea populi confitebuntur to thee: 2. therefore shall people

tibi. praise thee.

Reverentially the melody announces a wonderful work of God, a
great distinction that God has conferred upon His Apostles: He has
created them princes. With awe the melody bows low before such great
dignity. The mora over/, d, e, and c should be given due attention. The
Apostles are to conquer the world. The inception of a fifth, the stressing^
of the dominant c, the ascending fifth g-d, the descending c-f depict for
us this Apostolic conquest which embraces all lands and all peoples.
The melody is withal peaceable and reassuring, for He who chose and
commissioned the Apostles, came into this world to preach the Gospel
to the poor, "to heal the contrite of heart" (Luke 4: 18), In this self-
same spirit the Apostles should subdue and bring peace to the world.
They know and recognize the Prince of peace, know His name and un-
derstand the real nature of His being. His likeness is too deeply engraven,
on their souls that they should ever forget it. And that His holy name
might be made known to the limits of the earth and be praised and rever-
enced by all nations, they pledged themselves even to the shedding of
their life's blood. Today, when the universal Church renders praise and
homage to these Apostle-princes, she does so with the consciousness
that she is giving praise to the holy name, that Peter is moved by the
same spirit which prompted Paul to say: "By the grace of God I am
what I am."

The motive over nominis tu-(i) is repeated over Domine, after which
the bistropha of (tu)-i is pleasantly developed. Following tui a breath
will evidently be necessary. By observing the mora on a which follows
the pause in the melody over Domine, quiet two-note groups will be
effected. The close of Domine recalls that of principes and terram. The
latter two, however, are more closely related: fga gg f rises to gac bb a.

400 SS. Peter and Paul, Apostles

In holy wonderment the singer now contemplates the Church and
pours forth his praise of her wonderful fruitfulness in saints, apostles
and confessors. Special emphasis might well mark the word filii —
designating the Apostle-princes — as also the word confitehuntur; tech-
nique of composition calls for florid melismas at the beginning of the
verse, resulting in the extended melody over pdtribus tuis. The bistropha
on a divides the first member of this melody into two groups which,
liowever, are not in harmony with one another. The energetic c h a c h
g a corresponds to the more soft h\? a g ä g f g.

The melismas after the second pause enhance one another and reach
their high point on /, which is twice extended. The nati following should
be sung broadly, while filii should be given especial warmth even though
the melody is not very effective. Manuscripts 339 of St. Gaul and 121 of
Einsiedeln seem to have sensed this and give the first eight notes over
filii the broad form. To be sure, this typical form is always found in
Graduals of the fifth mode. To illustrate we might refer to preces in the
Gradual Protector noster of the fifth Sunday after Pentecost, although
there the melody really belongs to a significant word. The c a h g g a c
d c over propterea answers the cah\?gfgac over (ti)-hi. In the first case
b is qualified by the following c; in the second 6 b by the following /.

The melody of the present Gradual is also sung on the feast of the
Blessed Trinity. Where today we have a definite break in the melody
after terram — demanded by textual punctuation — the Gradual of
Trinity Sunday continues without interruption in its first phrase the
melody over memores. A similar continuation over Cherubim in the same
Gradual is somewhat unpleasant. A happier result was achieved in the
verse. The melody of today's verse has been adapted almost perfectly
to the verse on the feast of the Immaculate Conception.

Rassegna, 2, 241 ff.; Revue, 7, 206 ff.

ALLELUIA VERSE (Matt. 16: 18)

1. Tu es Petrus, et super hanc 1. Thou art Peter, and upon this

petram 2. aedificabo Ecclesiam rock 2. I will build my Church,
meam.

The adaptation of this Christmas melody for use during the sum-
mer cycle was already noted on the feast of the Nativity of St. John.
This may explain the fact that in some churches the present feast was
celebrated on December 27 or 28.

In the Gospel, the text of which combines intimately with that of
the Alleluia, Peter professes his faith in our Lord with the following
words: "Thou art Christ, the Son of the living God." And as a reward for

SS. Peter and Paul, Apostles 401

this profession of faith, Christ answers him: "Thou art Peter, and
upon this rock I will build My Church." To these words of Christ the
text of the Alleluia acts as a prelude. The inception on the dominant
and the development over Tu es Petrus produces a truly festal ring. The
series of pressus over aedificdho might depict a structure firmly built of
well-fitting granite stones, which like the melody over Ecclesiam meam,
proudly and triumphantly raises itself on high. With a joyful heart we
conclude the whole by a repetition of Alleluia.

OFFERTORY (Ps. 44: 17, 18)

1. Constitues eos principes super 1. Thou shall make them princes
omnem terram: 2. memores erunt over all the earth: 2. they shall re-
nominis tui, Domine, in omni pro- member thy name, 0 Lord, through-
genie et generatione. out all generations.

The Offertory text adds to the corpus of the Gradual the words in
omni progenie et generatione, which form the closing verse of the psalm
in question. If in the Gradual the word memores makes the assertion
that the Apostles will ever remember the holy name of our Lord, in the
Offertory it gives assurance that every tribe and generation will sing the
praises of this same holy name. Universal praise, however, was made
possible only by the fact that the Apostles carried this name to the
ends of the earth, thereby making all people happy, for God alone is
the salvation of the world.

This solemn, royal hymn should not be sung too fast, yet it must
be enlivened by festal joy. The numerous fourths especially should be
emphasized. The initial motive dg ach cdc c over super omnem becomes
efg ga che and efg gahc over -rati6-(ne). Tui in the middle of the piece has
a closing cadence; hence we must distinguish three phrases of practical-
ly equal length. The three consecutive groups of three notes over con-
stitues, over the closely related in omni at the beginning of the third
phrase, and over omnem enliven the entire piece. As in the Gradual, the
composer here also gave special prominence to .principes and omnem
terram. The entire first phrase with its effective close on / inspires a con-
viction that this kingdom founded by God need fear neither revolution
nor overthrow. It stands immovable because it was established by One
who is eternal. A spirit of recollection characterizes the beginning of
the second phrase. Presently, however, the melody waxes bright and
joyful at the thought of the divine name; the repetition of the same
motive over nominis is descriptive rather of the trepidation this name
inspires. Finally the soft melody over tui gives us a foretaste of the
sweetness of the Lord. The f d g h a g over me-(mores) corresponds to

402 SS. Peter and Paul, Apostles

the f d f a g e over erunt. The consciousness of the universality of the
Church induces word-painting by means of large intervals over in omni
progenie. After omni there may be need for a pause. The intervals of a
fourth should be sung broadly; likewise, according to the annotated
manuscripts, the rhombus over (proge)-ni-(e) and (generatiö)-ne.

COMMUNION (Matt. 16: 18)

Tu es Petrus, et super hanc pe- Thou art Peter: and upon this

tram aedificaho Ecclesiam meam. rock I will huild my church.

This same melody is sung on the feast of the Holy Trinity; the
phrasing, however, differs somewhat. Four phrases were formed from
the three of today and various minor divisions introduced that are not
altogether satisfactory. The close over terram constitutes the middle
member of Unigenitusque. The impulsive onward movement over me-
mores is there halted by a major pause after filius. The closing cadence
over tui furthermore has lost its significance. In the former feast this
cadence — together with the melody over in omni which follows it —
forms a continuous melody over the words quoque spiritus. Finally the
repetition of the melody of Benedictus and Spiritus over nohiscum is
rather tiring. The adaptation of the present melody to the feast of the
Trinity is found already in manuscript 339 of St. Gall's.

The text brings us once more the words of Christ: Tu es Petrus.
Through the worthy reception of Holy Communion we also become an
integral part of the Church, we pulsate with her innermost life, and are
bound to her in a most intimate manner. Today we can only thank God
for this grace which he has vouchsafed to us, as well as for all the graces
which He bestowed on St. Peter, His vicar on earth, and on all the
sovereign Pontiffs.

The melody is very simple. The one major interval is that of a fourth
over Petrus; beyond this there are only minor thirds and seconds. The
motives over (aedificd)-ho and Eccle-(siam) are antithetical. Would that
the entire body of the faithful might be congregated as one unit to sing
this hymn; each individual could then realize the more fully how he
forms an element in that one, holy, catholic and aspostolic Church of
which Christ said: This is My Church.

In past centuries the Communions of the vigil and the feast were
interchanged. The gripping melody of the Communion of the vigil
would set off the Mass liturgy of today's feast very effectively.

The Most Precious Blood of Our Lord Jesus Christ 403

THE MOST PRECIOUS BLOOD OF OUR
LORD JESUS CHRIST

(July 1)

This feast was first prescribed for the universal Church in 1849,
and its present date determined by Pius X. Formerly it was commemo-
rated on Passion Sunday.

INTROIT (Apoc. 5:9, 10)

1. Redemisti nos, Domine, in 1. Thou hast redeemed us, O

sanguine tuo, ex omni trihu, et Lord, in thy hlood, out of every

lingua, et natione: 2. et fecisti nos tribe, and tongue, and people, and

Deo nostra regnum. Ps. Miseri- nation, 2. and hast made us to our

cordias Domini in aeternum can- kingdom. Ps. The mercies of the

tabo: * in generationem et genera- Lord I will sing forever: * / will

tionem annuntiabo veritatem tuam show forth thy truth with my mouth

in ore meo. to generation and generation.

This, as the Apocalypse indicates, is the song of the saints in heaven,
the song that continues to resound for all eternity. And only an eter-
nity will suffice to render gratitude for our redemption through the Blood
of Christ, for our gracious vocation to be members of the kingdom of
Christ. This song has celebrated the advent of every human soul into
the midst of the saints, and has been re-echoed by such out of every
tribe, tongue, people, and nation as have attained the heavenly Jeru-
salem. Ineffective and feeble though our chant and our gratitude on
earth may be, it is consoling to know that this selfsame song is ren-
dered with the fullest perfection by the saints in heaven. Our goal should
be to strive for the ideal of this choir of heavenly singers; to become as
faithful and persevering subjects of the heavenly king as they are.

The beginning of the melody recalls that of the Introit Cognovi
which is sung on the feast of a Holy Woman neither Virgin nor Martyr,
and in the old manuscripts is assigned to the feast of St. Sabina (August
29). The beginning of the Introit of May 12 also bears some similarity to
the present melody. In each case the word Domine marks the high point,
and today especially emphasizes the fact that God alone through the
shedding of His precious Blood effected our deliverance from sin and
death. The only and somewhat soft bb is found over tuo. The classical
age of choral composition would, without any further ado, have sung
here the closing cadence of the fourth psalm tone: a b g e. Nevertheless,
the combination with bb is already found in the Introit of SS. Peter and

404 The Most Precious Blood of Our Lord Jesus Christ

Paul over suum. In the second phrase, of the words trihu, lingua, populo,
natione, the first and third form the arsis while the second and fourth
form the thesis. In imitation of the passage caelestium, terrestrium et in-
fernorum of the Introit In nomine Domini of Wednesday in Holy Week,
we should have expected a gradation here. The close over natione never-
theless is very effective and permits a greater modulation in the three
phrases, all of which have the same range. A lively and joyful melody
begins with etfecisti. Torculus and bistropha should be sung over (popu)-
lo. The third phrase predominates over the other two, its melody at-
taining melismatic richness. Some similarity exists between et fecisti nos
Deo of today's Introit andetfac nohiscum secundum of the Introit of the
twentieth Sunday after Pentecost; also between nostro regnum, and the
close of the Introit of the fifth Sunday after Easter and the tenth Sunday
after Pentecost.

The tempo can be taken quite lively. In the psalm- verse the major
accents should be given prominence. Softer secondary accents on gene-
rationem and annuntidbo will give the melody a nice, even flow.

GRADUAL (1 John 5: 6, 7, 8)

1. Hie est qui venit per aquam et 1. This is he that came by water
sanguinem, Jesus Christus'. 2. non and blood, Jesus Christ: 2. not by
in aqua solum, sed in aqua et water only, but by water and blood,
sanguine, jif. 1. Tres sunt qui tes- jl. 1. There are three who give tes-
timonium dant in caelo: 2. Pater, timony in heaven; 2. the Father, the
Verbum, et Spiritus Sanctus, 3. et Word, and the Holy Ghost; 3. and
hi tres unum sunt. 4. et tres sunt these three are one. 4. and there are
qui testimonium dant in terra: 5. three who give testimony on earth:
Spiritus, aqua, et sanguis, 6. et hi 5. the Spirit, the water, and the
tres unum sunt. blood; 6. and these three are one.

The first two phrases of the above text are wanting in all of the old
Greek manuscripts and in the best manuscripts of the Vulgate. They
are a later explanatory addition (Comma Johanneum).

The melody is the same as that of the Gradual for the Sunday with-
in the octave of Christmas (q.v.). Corresponding passages of the two
Graduals are grouped in the following scheme:

1. Hie est qui venit (per aquam) et sanguinem

2. Speciosus for-ma prae

1. Jesus Christus: non in aqua solum, sed

2. hominum: diffusa est gratia, in

The Most Precious Blood of Our Lord Jesus Christ 405

1. aqua et sanguine. ^. Tres sunt, qui

2. Idhiis tuis. '^\ Eructdvit cor

1. Testimonium dant in caelo: Pater Verhum

2. meum [audivimus: patres nostri

1. est Spiritus Sanctus: et hi tres unum sunt.

2. annuntiaverunt nobis] dico ego

1. Et tres sunt, qui testimonium dant in terra

= above: Tres sunt, qui testimonium dant in caelo

1. Spiritus, Aqua, et Sanguis: et hi tres unum sunt.

2. opera mea regi:. . .velociter scribentis.

The melody over per aquam, in parentheses above, cannot be sub-
stantiated in the Gradual of the Sunday within the octave. The melody
from caelo to sanctus is taken from the Gradual verse of the Tuesday
after the fourth Sunday in Lent; the corresponding text above is en-
closed in brackets. The same melodical treatment accorded the two
Tres sunt. . .is in no wise wearisome. In fact, the present arrangement is
much more effective than had the melody over lingua mea calamus
scribae been adapted to Tres sunt. In this case, the composer happily
chose identity of melody for an identical text.

At the baptism of Christ in the waters of the Jordan, the Father
and the Holy Ghost proclaimed Him the Son of God. His own claims
that He was our Lord and Saviour He attested by shedding His blood
for us. The water and the blood that flowed from His pierced side — of
which we read in the Gospel — bore witness that He offered Himself for
us as a sacrifice of propitiation. To these supernatural, invisible witnesses
of His divine mission, we add the earthly, visible testimony of the opera-
tions of the Holy Ghost through grace, the waters of Baptism, and the
bloody death of Christ on the cross. The testimony which these three
witnesses bear is all in accord.

ALLELUIA VERSE (1 John 5:9)

1. Si testimonium hominum ac- 1. If we receive the testimony of

cipimus, 2. testimonium Dei majus men, 2. the testimony of God is
est. greater.

The melody is taken from the twelfth Sunday after Pentecost
(q.v.). It differs from the latter in the close over (accipi)-mus — where

406 The Most Precious Blood of Our Lord Jesus Christ

the present text has a dactyl, the original has two trochees. In the
original, moreover, the first phrase is rightly given melodic superiority,
while today, in accordance with its import, the second phrase is given
prominence. The manner of rendition will aid to proper interpretation.

The text is a continuation of the Gradual text, as if to indicate that
Alleluia and Gradual were to form one composite whole. — St. John here
adduces proof that Christ was already conceived and born as the Son of
God; He did not become such through His Baptism.

OFFERTORY (1 Cor. 10: 16)

1. Calix henedictionis, cui bene- 1. The chalice of benediction which

dicimus, nonne communicatio san- we bless, is it not the communion of

guinis Christi estl 2. et panis quem the blood of Christi 2. and the bread

frangimus, nonne participatio cor- which we break, is it not the par-

ports Domini estl taking of the body of the Lordl

The priest raises the chalice a first time at the Offertory. Soon
after he raises it again, but higher and in a more solemn manner. He has
blessed the chalice, spoken over it the words of transubstantiation, and
it now contains the blood of Christ. At the tinkling of the small bell
the assembled congregation bends its knee in profound adoration. And
wonderful to contemplate, we mortals are permitted to unite most in-
timately, with this blood, and by partaking of it can in very truth be-
come blood-relations of Christ. 0 truly precious blood that imparts such
nobility and dignity! And the consecrated host which is broken, 'Is it
not the partaking of the body of the Lord?" The interrogatory form with
its double nonne is for us the expression of our deepest conviction that
we believe this word spoken by the Son of God, than which nothing can
be more true.

This conviction is reflected also in the melody, the phrasing of which
is determined by the text. The first phrase with a range of a ninth is
especially well developed melodically, due perhaps to the fact that it
refers to the blood of Christ. The second phrase which is more quiet
and lower-pitched has a range of a sixth. The second nonne corresponds
to the first, but is a fifth lower. Just why the former has not the porrectus
toward its close like the latter is difficult to see. In the rendition, the
conclusion of each nonne should be extended, or even a short breathing
space inserted. The gradual growth of the melody in the first phrase:
Calix: c-g; benedictionis: c-a; cui benedicimus: d-b\>', nonne. . .est: d-d^
is very effective. The melodic flourish over the last syllable of communi-
catio is pitched a third lower over the corresponding participatio. A simi-
lar condition obtains with est at the close of the first and second phrases.

Visitation of the Blessed Virgin Mary 407

This ascending close at the end of a selection is rarely found. It occurs
with the Alleluia Tollite jugum of the new Sacred Heart feast, Opporte-
bat of the third Sunday after Easter, Post partum of the votive Mass of
the Blessed Virgin, and occasionally with the Amen of the third and
fourth mode. The interrogatory form may have influenced the melodic
construction. Otherwise the general rule for the conclusion of readings
and lessons obtains, that is, when no Tu autem, Domine follows, the usual
closing form of a declarative sentence is used, and not that of a question.

COMMUNION (Heb. 9: 28)

1. Christus semel ohlatus est ad 1. Christ was offered once to ex-

multorum exhaurienda peccata; 2. haust the sins of many; 2. the sec-
secundo sine peccato apparehit ex- ond time he shall appear without
pectantihus se, in salutem. sin to them that expect him unto

salvation.

The first phrase is similar to the Hoc corpus of Passion Sunday (q.v.).
As a kind of leitmotif, the intimate connection between the sacrifice of
the cross and the Eucharistie Sacrifice is stressed melodically. Over
ohlatus est the melody of the original might have been assumed without
change; the major third was most likely introduced to give prominence
to the word-accent. Seemingly motives from the Communions Jus-
torum dnimae (June 21) and Primum quaerite (fourteenth Sunday after
Pentecost) were adapted to the second phrase.

In Holy Communion Christ enters our souls. His love for sinners
prompted Him to veil His majesty under the ordinary form of bread
and wine. When He shall come again, however, when He "shall appear
a second time," it will radiate splendor and power. And this splendor
and power He will share with those who expect Him, and who have
become one with Him in Holy Communion; He will be to them a source
of eternal happiness and salvation. The gradation, apparent in the text,
is easily recognizable and actualized in the melody. In place of the
suppressed dominant h of the first phrase, the second phrase has the
brighter c.

* * * *

THE VISITATION OF THE BLESSED VIRGIN

MARY
(July 2)

The Franciscan Order celebrated this feast already in 1263. The
Council of Basle made it obligatory for the universal Church.

408 Visitation of the Blessed Virgin Mary

Several texts of the Mass are not taken from Holy Scripture. For-
merly the Introit Vultum tuum and other chants of the Annunciation
were sung on this feast. The Gradual and Alleluia have been taken over
from the Greek Liturgy^.

INTROIT

1. Salve, sancta Parens, enixa 1. Hail, O holy Mother, who

puerpera Regem: 2. qui caelum ter- gavest birth to the King 2. mho
ramque regit in saecula saeculorum. governeth heaven and earth for ever
Ps. Eructavit cor meum verhum and ever. Ps. My heart hath uttered
honum; * dico ego opera mea Regi. a good word; * I speak my works to

the King.

Today was sung the most beautiful song ever conceived by man;
it proceeded from a heart burning with the fire of purest love. Never
has mankind heard a more perfect or elegant hymn of praise than the
Magnificat, the song with which the Mother of God today greeted
Elizabeth. Her self-abandon in God and her fervor of heart ought to be
the ideals toward which we should strive in our singing. The activities
of her entire life, as the words opera mea Regi in the verse indicate, were
centered on the heavenly King. Only when our own lives are likewise
dedicated to almighty God will our offering of song approach the inner
reality and perfection of the ideal set for us today by the Blessed Virgin.
The more important element of the Introit is not the verse, which repre-
sents Mary as speaking, but the antiphon in which we direct our praises
and salutations to the Virgin, as the Mother of "the King who govern-
eth heaven and earth for ever and ever." These sentiments of respect
and awe for the dignity of the divine motherhood should characterize
our rendition of Salve. This same Salve should also be an expression of
heartfelt gratitude for the many visitations of divine grace which, due
to Mary's intercession and solicitude, our soul has experienced.

For an explanation of the melody see the Introit of Epiphany.

The text is taken from the Easter hymn of Sedulius (Book II,
verses 63, 64). The second hexameter, which originally closed with tenet
per saecula cujus, was changed, and in place of tenet we have regit. This
is the only Introit which has metrical form.

Wagner, I, 69; Revue gr., 23, 167 ff.; CO. 47, 129 ff.

GRADUAL

1. Benedicta et venerabilis es, 1. Thou art blessed and venerable,

Virgo Maria, 2. quae sine tactu O Virgin Mary; 2. who, without

1 Schuster IV, 317.

Visitation of the Blessed Virgin Mary 409

pudoris, inventa es Mater Salva- any violation of purity, wert found
toris. 111. 1. Virgo Dei Genitrix, the mother of our Saviour. ^. 1.0
quern totus non capit orhis, 2. in Virgin Mother of God, he whom the
tua se clausit viscera f actus homo. whole world is unable to contain,

2. being made man, enclosed him-
self in thy womb.

The melody (cf. March 19) is very expressive and well adapted to
this text. The corpus is dominated by the stirring melody over Maria,
while the verse has its fervent Virgo — a wondrous hymn of praise to the
Virgin Mother of God. We begin the first phrase in a suppressed tone
but lively tempo, and then continue Virgo Maria with bright and sunny
warmth. If possible, sine tactu pudoris should be sung without pause for
breath; the delicacy of its text calls for fine tonal shading. The same
melody — more rounded out, however — recurs over Mater Salvatoris.
After the tender and extended melody over virgo, care must be taken
that the important words Dei Genitrix be not stunted. The development
of the melody over quern totus non capit orbis differs somewhat from the
original. Keeping the above remarks in mind, we might now compare
-rabilis es and Salvato-, sine tactu and -venta es, pudoris and mater, Ge-
nitrix, quern totus and tua se clausit viscera. The melody over orbis sug-
gests word-painting; that over homo, the abasement of the Son of God in
His Incarnation.

The melody is not influenced by the fact that the verse is a distich.

ALLELUIA VERSE

1. Felix es, sacra Virgo Maria, 1. Thou art happy, O holy Virgin

2. et omni laude dignissima; 3. quia Mary, 2. and most worthy of all

ex te ortus est sol justitiae, Christus praise: 3. because from thee arose

Deus noster. the sun of justice, Christ our God.

**And blessed art thou that has believed." These are the words
with which Elizabeth addresses the Mother of God. Alleluia preludes
this thought with melodies of holy jubilation and triumph in God the
Saviour, who has poured out streams of light and grace upon the soul
of Mary. From her arose "the Sun of justice." The celebration and
import of today's feast conjures up in our minds a picture of the glori-
ous morning sun rising to the accompaniment of myriad choirs of birds
and transmuting by the touch of its magic ray the prosaic, ragged moun-
taintops into peaks of gold.

When Elizabeth had heard the salutation of Mary, the infant re-
joiced in her womb, and, filled with the Holy Ghost, she extolled the

410 Visitation of the Blessed Virgin Mary

Mother of God. Would that our chant were likewise inspired by the
Holy Ghost, so that it might be rendered in a manner worthy of her
high dignity. The gradual intensification of the melody, especially through
the pressus a c d, should be brought out in the rendition. Over (alle)-
lü-(ia) two-note groups (ac ac) should be sung before the pressus. The
c which is merely sounded here, receives a compensation in the first
member of the jubilus, where it is especially accented and extended.
The appended cUmacus should be given prominence; the following
neums will then form the thesis. The pressus d with its energetic fifth
then comes to the fore; this is followed, in turn, by a relaxing thesis.
The third member is also introduced by means of a pressus. The ensuing
joyful passage should not be forced. After the two groups of two over
(sa)-cra, e d c should be rendered in a full and satisfying manner. The
second phrase has practically the same melody as alleluia with its ju-
bilus. The third phrase, over against the ascending movement of the
two previous phrases, takes a pleasant turn downward. After all, how
mysterious is the birth of the eternal Sun from the "holy Virgin Mary."
The first four notes over ortus should be taken as a preparation for the
two following groups: g a c a g and efgfe. The intonation of a fifth over
sol gives the word merited prominence.

The melody can be traced to the eleventh century.

OFFERTORY

1. Beata es, Virgo Maria, quae 1. Blessed art thou, 0 Virgin

omnium portasti Creatorem: 2. Mary, who didst hear the Creator of
genuisti qui te fecit, 3. et in aeter- all: 2. Thou didst bring forth him
num permanes Virgo. who made thee, 3. and thou remain-

est a Virgin forever.

The Offertory continues with new melodies the salutation of Eliza-
beth to the "Mother of God." Mary bore the Creator of the world; she
brought forth Him who had created her. These two thoughts are empha-
sized by giving melodic prominence to Creatorem and fecit. Another
thought, however, dominates the spirit of the Offertory as a whole. It
is the inspiring and wondrous beauty of the Virgin Mother, who alone
of all creatures was privileged to combine the dignity of motherhood
with the radiant luster of virginity. Virgin (Virgo) thou art and virgin
thou wilt remain (permanes) in eternity. These considerations induce us
to sing her praises in holy wonderment.

The above interpretation we should like to apply to the present
Offertory. The study of original sources, however, shows that this
melody has been borrowed, and is therefore not original. In the old manu-

Visitation of the Blessed Virgin Mary 411

scripts we find it on the feast of St. Gorgonius (September 9) and on
Easter Monday. On the former feast it forms the melody over the words
Magna est . . . of the third verse for the Offertory Posuisti, while on the
latter it is found over the words Jesus stetit ... of the third verse for the
Offertory Angelus Domini. The Easter Monday composition is prob-
ably the original one. The final alleluia, which is sung only in the votive
Masses of the Blessed Virgin during Paschal time, has a melisma truly
festal and triumphant in character.

In its general mood and atmosphere the present Offertory is much
akin to the Magna est of the above mentioned feast. In each case the
melody depicts amazement at the wonderful things God has wrought
in a human soul and admiration for its consequent worth and beauty.
A rare instance of recitation in monotone is exemplified in this Offer-
tory over quae omnium por-(tdsti). The same holds true for the above
Magna est over the words in salutari.

The melody over Bedta es not only forms the introduction for the
above verses, but for the Offertory of Easter Monday and of the feasts
of St. Gorgonius and the Assumption. The high d over Virgo should be
slightly retarded; the interval of a fourth will in this way be made more
effective. In the final member of Virgo the descending fourth g-d forms
a contrast to the ascending fourth a~d in the two foregoing members.
Maria should be sung with warmth and fervor, and the two final clives
somewhat retarded. The monotone recitation of quae omnium portd-(sti)
should be measured rather than rapid. The melody over creator em is
found also in the Offertories Angelus Domini, Posuisti, and Assumpta
est. Its two bistropha, which are to be slightly retarded, should combine
the well-defined groups of four notes. The melody depicts for us the
greatness of Mary who bore in her womb and in her arms Him who not
only created but also sustains the world. The interval c-g, which is to
be retarded, divides the melismas over fecit into two unequal parts, the
second of which can be considered an extension of the first. Mary, al-
though a mother, remains a Virgin for all eternity; this is the theme of
the final phrase with its large intervals. Permanes should be phrased
like the final Alleluia of the Offertory on Easter Monday.

COMMUNION

1. Beata viscera Mariae Virginis, 1. Blessed is the womh of the Vir-

2. quae portaverunt aeterni Patris gin Mary, 2. which bore the Son of
Filium. the eternal Father.

All of today's chants, the majority of which are characterized by
direct approach, begin by glorifying the Virgin Mary. They not only

412 Visitation of the Blessed Virgin Mary

breathe a joyous love for her beauty and greatness, but a reverent awe
for her great and singular privilege as well. These sentiments also per-
vade the Communion. Mary bore "the Son of the eternal Father." The
melody over aeterni — extending beyond the entire tone line — begins
significantly with a fifth, while the following word begins a fifth lower,
as if to say: the Son of Mary surpasses the limits of time and space and
is beyond that which is earthly and human.

Virginis marks the climax of the first phrase. The notes f, f g, g a
over the accented syllables of the preceding words lead gradually to the
melodic climax at a h\?. These accents become more plastic and the me-
lodic line more enlivened as the melody, following the individual accents,
descends. Care should be taken not to accent the b\?, but to give the pre-
ceding a somewhat of an accent; this will produce the effect of two tor-
culus. The phrase closes on the dominant. The second phrase is not so
happily constructed. The cadence over portaverunt, for instance, is ab-
solutely final. According to the import of the text, however, only a slight
pause is permissible here. The first phrase was characteristically ethereal
and light. The second phrase begins more quietly, in an almost depressed
manner, and yet Mary bore in her most pure womb the sweetest burden,
bore it while sunk in contemplation. The first phrase speaks of our love
for the childlike trust in Mary; the second, of our adoration and rever-
ence for the eternal Son of God, who became her Child. The partial
cadences over (vi)-scera, (porta )-verunt and (Fi)-lium are similar.

This Communion is of later composition, dating from the eleventh
century.^

The text of the Communion forms part of the closing prayer recited
at the end of the hours of the Divine Office. Today's feast affords pos-
sibly the only instance where none of the Mass texts are taken from
Holy Scripture, although some of them remind us of scriptural passages.
The present Communion, for instance, might remind us of the woman
in the Gospel who extolled the womb that bore Christ (Luke 11: 27).

Holy Communion, whereby we receive into our hearts the Son of
the eternal Father, will then become a source of inner joy (Bedta) to us,
if we follow the example of the Mother of God and are numbered among
those who not only hear but also preserve the Word of God in their
hearts. Then will our soul also experience a blessed and holy visitation.

1 Revue, 24, 6 ff; Analyses, 5, 16 fl.

St. James the Elder, Apostle 413

ST. JAMES THE ELDER, APOSTLE
(July 25)

The INTROIT is the same as that on the feast of St. Andrew,
while the GRADUAL is that of the feast of SS. Peter and Paul (q.v.).

ALLELUIA VERSE (John 15: 16)

1. Ego vos elegi de mundo, ut 1. I have chosen you out of the

eatis et fructum afferatis, 2. et world, that you should go, and
Jructus vester maneat. should bring forth fruit, 2. and

your fruit should remain.

The text of the Alleluia is taken from the words of our Lord at the
Last Supper. Christ there reminds His Apostles of that morning when,
after having spent the entire preceding night in prayer, He chose them
as His disciples. By His teaching He freed them from the spirit of the
world and instilled into them a burning love for immortal souls. He
commissioned them to go out into the world and sow there the seed of
the word of God that should bring forth fruit in due season. They re-
sponded and in their own time showed themselves to be a fruit well-
ripened by much prayer and many sufferings. The world was not only
to hear their words, but also to see realized that which the Gospel had
worked and brought to maturity in their own persons; and precisely for
this reason have their preaching and labors and sufferings been of last-
ing worth. There is every reason then to sing this Alleluia with a grate-
ful heart.

In the oldest available manuscripts today's melody is written with
the text Justi epulentur. It is there found among the melodies per cir-
culiim anni, from which the chanter might choose at pleasure. In the
modern Graduale it finds its place in the Mass Sapientiam (Common of
many Martyrs). The melody was also adapted to the text Ego diledo
for the feast of the Most Pure Heart of Mary.

Alleluia with its juhilus has the form a and b, a^, a^, c, d. The final

member, however, with its /// gag ef eed is rhythmically in close relation
to the preceding member c. There is also great similarity between Ego
and member a. The present text is well adapted to the original melody.
Elegi is duly emphasized; mundo, which modulates to a full step below
the tonic, combines the two half-phrases. A similar melody, but devoid
of the concluding pressus, recurs over fructum. The double command,
expressed by the words eatis and afferatis, has melodies much akin to
one another. The melody over fructus is like an admiring look upward

414 St. Anne, Mother of the Blessed Virgin Mary

to the harvest of gathered fruits. In the original the latter word is re-
placed by delectentur— "let them rejoice." Its florid melisma, reminiscent
of the Gradual verse Vitam on the feast of St. Joseph, has three members,
the beginnings of the first two of which are similar. The third member
with its three pressus carries the major accent, and extends to a fifth
above the preceding and following member.

OFFERTORY (Ps. 18:5)

1. In omnem ten am exivit 1. Their sound hath gone forth

sonus eorum: 2. et in fines orhis into all the earth; 2. and their words
terrae verba eorum. unto the ends of the world.

The^text in the original does not refer to vocal sounds but rather
to the light waves which, emanating from the heavenly bodies, sweep
the whole world. The Gospel, which the Apostles carried to the ends of
the earth, is like this brightening, warming, healing, and life-giving
light. According to legend St. James brought its doctrines to far-away
Spain, at that time considered the edge of the world. During the Middle
Ages crowds of pilgrims journeyed to his tomb and considered this visit
as sacred and solemn as a pilgrimage to the Holy Land, to the places
sanctified by the sufferings and death of our Lord.

The melody was explained on the third Sunday after Epiphany.
Comparison might also be made with that of the Offertory of Maundy
Thursday.

The COMMUNION is the same as that on the feast of St. Mat-
thias.

ST. ANNE, MOTHER OF THE BLESSED

VIRGIN MARY

(July 26)

This feast was introduced into the Roman liturgy under Gregory
XIII, in the year 1584. All of its chants are taken from older feasts. The
Introit Gaudeamus (cf. the Assumption) naturally inserts the name of
St. Anne. Codex 339 of St. Gall's assigns today's Gradual, Alleluia, and
Communion to the feast of St. Lucy (December 13). The latter feast
has at present a different Communion. The Offertory is taken from the
feast of St. Prisca (January 18).

St. Anne, Mother of the Blessed Virgin Mary 415

GRADUAL (Ps. 44: 8)

1. Dilexisti justitiam, et odisti 1. Thou hast loved justice, and

iniquitatem. t. Propterea unxit te hated iniquity. ^. Therefore, God,
Deus, Deus tuus, oleo laetitiae. thy God, hath anointed thee with the

oil of gladness.

Here, as also in the Alleluia, the text is directed to the saint of the
day. Not only does the Church accord praise, but Christ Himself glo-
rifies her. Simple though the hfe of St. Anne may have been, she never-
theless accomplished the work of self-sanctification and had the courage
and resoluteness to employ all those means necessary "to love justice,"
and out of love to practice this justice at all times. She was a worthy
mother to that child whom we extol as the Mirror of Justice and as the
Mother of fair love. God, therefore, annointed her with the oil of glad-
ness. She could become just and holy, however, only with that help of
God's grace given to her as a reward for her faithful love. But her soul
must have experienced a very special gladness when she was privileged
to become the mother of the Mother of God. We also were anointed with
God's grace in holy Baptism and in Confirmation so that we might
likewise love justice and hate iniquity. And he who co-operates with
this grace, will in the end be anointed with the oil of everlasting, im-
perishable gladness.

The melody has a wonderful gradation: Dilexisti c-g, justitiam
c-c^, odisti f-d}, propterea f-e^. The introductory melody reminds us of
Dirigdtur from the nineteenth Sunday after Pentecost. The melody over
-tdtem recurs over Deus, that of propterea over laetitia. The close is iden-
tical with the juhilus of the Alleluia which follows. An intervening quiet
undulation about the tonic g is reminiscent of the peace of God.

ALLELUIA VERSE— COMMUNION (Ps. 44: 3)

1. Diffusa est gratia in labiis 1. Grace is poured abroad in thy

tuis: 2. propterea henedixit te Deus lips: 2. Therefore hath God blessed
in aeternum. thee forever.

With true southern naivete, Schuster (IV. 378) comments on this
text: "The grace which St. Anne brought the world is none other than
the Virgin Mary. Grace was poured abroad in her lips insofar as she was
often permitted to kiss the Virgin Mother and the Christ Child. In
order to describe the intimate relations of SS. Joachim and Anne with
the Saviour, the Greeks apply to her the endearing epithet of 'Grand-
mother of God'."

416 St. Anne, Mother of the Blessed Virgin Mary

The Alleluia employs the typical melody of the eighth mode (cf.
the first Sunday of Advent). The intonation of the second phrase is fol-
lowed by a lengthy recitation on the dominant c.

The Communion begins like a Gradual of the fifth mode. We might
compare it with the beginning of the Communion of the fourth Sunday
after Pentecost. The word propterea here, as well as in the Gradual, re-
ceives special prominence. The close over aeternum resembles passages
in the sixth mode, well known especially from the Introit Requiem. Its
final member rhymes with tuis.

Grace and harmony are poured abroad also in the melody.

OFFERTORY (Ps. 44: 10)

1. Filiae regum in honore tuo: 1. The daughters of kings in thy

2. astitit regina a dextris tuis in glory: 2. the queen stood on thy right

mstitu deaurato, 3. circumdata in gilded clothing, 3. surrounded

varietate. with variety.

The faithful bear their offering to the altar at least spiritually.
Among these there is many a royal soul that joyfully offers and dedicates
itself to the heavenly King. But at the altar Christ has a still more
stately escort of honor. For, previous to the consecration, the prayers
of the Canon mention the names of holy men, to which the names of
holy virgins and women ennobled by their martyrdom are added after
the consecration. In the first place (In primis), however, is mentioned
the name of "the glorious and ever- virgin Mary, Mother of our Lord
and God Jesus Christ" (Canon of the Mass). The Offertory describes
her as the queen "in gilded clothing, surrounded with variety." Glitter-
ing gold symbolizes that purest love glowing in her heart, while the graces
and privileges she received from God and the virtues she nurtured,
clothe her with charming variety. This queen is the child of St. Anne,
and all the honor which is bestowed on the child accrues to the honor
of the happy mother. She shows herself today a royal daughter, and
heaven and earth pay her homage.

In the first phrase both torculus should be discreetly emphasized,
and after the second, the clives; bistropha and porrectus are then sung.
In this manner the oft-repeated d in the torculus receives its proper
value. Similar, but a step higher, is the development over tuo. The cli-
macus with its e here indicates the climax: "The daughters of kings in
thy glory." The vibrant bistropha of the second phrase call attention to
the appearance of the queen. Here h, which so far had been avoided,
occurs for the first time; it recurs over varietate. Quiet, solemn groups of
two notes are sung, followed by a somewhat more rapid rendition of a

The Transfiguration of Our Lord Jesus Christ 417

dextris. The motive over regina is abbreviated over in vestitu, and de-
veloped over circumdata. The ornate deaurdto might depict for us a heavy-
gold brocade. The melody here attains its greatest range. Like the first
phrase, the second closes on the dominant c which, as a matter of fact,
plays an important role throughout the melody. The third phrase re-
peats the formula h^ c a g c^ and continues it immediately. The tonic e
of the third mode, to which this melody is ascribed, appears only as a
final note. The lowest note of the third phrase then is e, of the second /,
and of the first g.

This is one of the sublimest Offertories in plain chant, characterized,
as it were, by the festive splendor of an Eastern sun.

THE TRANSFIGURATION OF OUR LORD
JESUS CHRIST

(August 6)

In the Occident this feast can be traced to the seventh century
while in the Orient it was celebrated on various days since the eighth
century. The present date was assigned to it by Callixtus III in 1458 in
the victory that St. John Capistran and George Hunyadi won over the
Turks at Belgrade (Keller, Heortologie, p. 81).

INTROIT (Ps. 76: 19)

1. Illuxerunt coruscationes tuae 1. Thy lightnings enlightened the

orhi terrae; 2. commota est et con- world: 2. the earth shook and

tremuit terra. Ps. (88, 2) Quam di~ trembled. Ps. (88, 2) How lovely

lecta tabernacula tua, Domine vir- arethy tabernacles, O Lord of hosts. *

tutum. * Concupiscit, et deficit My soul longeth and fainteth for

anima mea in atria Domini. the courts of the Lord.

For the older feasts it was a general rule that when the antiphon
was taken from the Psalter, the verse was taken from the same psalm.
Later feasts, as that of today, seemingly ignore this rule.

The flood of light which enveloped our Lord on Tabor, or rather,
which emanating from His divinity had transfigured His human nature,
in all likelihood occasioned the choice of the first psalm-verse. The
effect of this unusual but happy spectacle caused St. Peter to exclaim:
"Lord, it is good for us to be here . . . Let us make here three tabernacles."
The second psalm- verse again calls this happiness to mind. As a matter
of fact, God does occasionally impart to us His illuminations and con-

418 The Transfiguration of Our Lord Jesus Christ

solations. But they should serve to show the more clearly that our last-
ing home is not on this earth; they should enkindle in us a yearning and
desire for an eternal transfiguration in heaven, the true home of our
soul. To be sure, in order to attain this we must walk the same path
that Christ has walked: suffer, and so enter into glory.

The shaking and trembling of the earth mentioned in the second
verse of the antiphon should induce us to look beyond Tabor to the end
of time when Christ will come again in great power and glory. At that
moment not only Moses and Elias and the three Apostles, but all man-
kind just risen from the grave, will see Him in His glory and offer Him
homage. The ardent longing of all the just is centered on that great day
when "the body of our lowness will be made like to the body of His
glory" (Philipp. 3, 21), on that transfiguration at their entrance into
the courts of heaven.

The Introit for the feast of St. Lawrence seems to have served as a
model for this Introit; compare for instance Illuxerunt and Confessio,
corrusca- (Hones) and pulchritudo, (corruscaj-tiones tuae and conspectii
eius, contremuit terra and (sanctificati)-6ne eius. In the original melody
the first phrase closes by tarrying quietly on the dominant, while here
it is supplemented with the words orhi terrae, whose melody is evidently
modeled on that over terra. These two words must be sung somewhat
more broadly. The melody over commota est is energetic and forceful.

GRADUAL

Text and melody were explained on the Sunday within the octave
of Christmas. We can scarcely picture to ourselves the Christ Child in
the manger without giving thought also to the transfigured glory of His
divinity. On Christmas we consider above all else His human charm
and entrancing beauty. Today, however, we contemplate the divine
element which transfigures the Son of Man. Never before did a human
form radiate such supernatural beauty as did Christ's on Tabor. He
who would sing praises of this King of glory must needs do so with the
feelings of deepest emotion and reverential enthusiasm.

ALLELUIA VERSE (Wisd. 7: 26)

1. Candor est lucis aeternae, 2. 1. He is the brightness of eternal

speculum sine macula, 3. et imago light, 2. the unspotted mirror, 3. and
honitatis illius. the image of his goodness.

The shining countenance and the transfigured appearance of Jesus
on Tabor were irradiations of the divinity which dwelt in Him. This
divinity, in turn, was naught but the reflected splendor of the eternal

The Transfiguration of Our Lord Jesus Christ 419

light of the Father. The Father sees in the Son the reflection of His own
Being, the brightness of His own eternal light, His own overflowing
goodness and endless perfections which suffer neither diminution nor
decrease. And then, as if in recognition, He exclaims: "This is My be-
loved Son in whom I am well pleased." These same words are in a cer-
tain sense also directed to us, for by them, as the Collect of the day in-
dicates, we are assured of our perfect adoption as sons. Would that we
might show ourselves worthy of this distinction and become spotless
children of light, true images of divine goodness!

The melody, although not proper to the text (cf. Corpus Christi),
is well adapted and gives it a lucid and joyful signification.

OFFERTORY (Ps. 111:3)

I.Gloria et divitiae in domo eius: 1. Glory and wealth shall be in

2. et justitia eius manet in saecu- his house: 2. and his justice re-
lum saeculi. Alleluia. maineth forever and ever. Alleluia.

The divine Saviour was very fond of speaking about His Father's
house. The treasures and riches of this heavenly mansion and the gran-
deur of His own glory are celebrated today, especially by St. Peter in
the Epistle: "We were eye-witnesses of His majesty. For He received
from God the Father honor and glory; this voice coming down to Him
from the excellent glory: This is My beloved Son in whom I am well
pleased, hear ye Him" (2 Pet. 1: 16-19). With these words the heavenly
Father spoke His solemn approbation and canonization of the Son of
man and of the works He would perform. In the display of His zeal for
justice and for the honor of His Father, Christ will even suffer death
and thus merit for His human nature endless riches and glory. And those
who tread with Him the path of justice will, as the Collect says, become
His co-heirs and the sharers of His glory.

The melody of the first phrase is simple, giving prominence to the
word-accents only. The second phrase is more developed and utilizes
the florid melismas taken from the Offertory Desiderium over the words
coronam .... The latter Offertory is found in the Common for holy
Abbots. In the old manuscripts it is assigned to the feast of St. Eusebius.

COMMUNION (Matt. 17: 9)

Visionem quam vidistis, nemini Tell the vision you have seen to

dixeritis, donee a mortuis resurgat no man till the Son of man be risen
Filius hominis. from the dead.

So that the glory of His majesty might be revealed only at the op-
portune time, Jesus forbade His disciples to tell of this vision. The dis-

420 St. Lawrence, Deacon and Martyr

ciples could hardly expect that the publication of such a miraculous
event would obtain credence; without doubt they would be scoffed at as
visionaries and dreamers. Our Lord could not permit the manifestation
of His holiness to become a subject of ridicule. After He had risen from
the dead, however, and had thus proved Himself to be the Son of God,
then the knowledge of His transfiguration would no longer cause sur-
prise. The fact that He had predicted not only His death but also His
glorious resurrection would then serve to confirm and corroborate His
divine dignity (J. B. Hirscher, Betrachtungen ueher die sonntaeglichen
Evangelien, p. 170.).

The event on Mount Tabor, however, was only a type of the beauty
which the transfigured Saviour displayed on Easter morning, which
henceforth needs to be kept secret no longer. Easter morn has come,
and today we make public the experience of our Lord on Tabor. Holy
Comunion, which gives us a foretaste of the happiness of Tabor, is the
seed of our own transfiguration and the pledge of our glorious resurrec-
tion at the end of time.

The melody is practically syllabic throughout and duplicates the
Magnificat antiphon of the first and second Vespers for the second Sun-
day of Lent. The only difference lies in the pes over (h6)-mi-(nis); the
antiphon in a somewhat monotonous manner signs all three syllables of
the word on the tonic d.

ST. LAWRENCE, DEACON AND MARTYR
(August 10)

All of today's chants, with the exception of the Alleluia, are found
in the oldest manuscripts.

INTROIT (Ps. 95:6)

1. Confessio et pulchritudo in 1. Praise and beauty are before

conspectu eius: 2. sanctitas et mag- him: 2. holiness and majesty in

nificentia in sanctificatione eius. His sanctuary. Ps. Sing ye to the

Ps. Cantate Domino canticum no- Lord a new canticle: * sing to the

vum: * cantate Domino omnis terra. Lord, all the earth.

Sung in the vast and beautiful basilica which houses the tomb of
St. Lawrence, this chant undoubtedly creates a lasting impression. As a
matter of fact, the above text may quite possibly have been chosen with
special reference to this beautiful structure, which was designated a

St. Lawrence, Deacon and Martyr 421

basilica speciosior by Pelagius II (578-590). During the past century
Pius IX effected many restorations on it and, after his death, was buried
according to his express desire next to the relics of the holy archdeacon.
Beautiful though the basilica may be, the soul of the saint is yet more
noble and more precious. His life, his charitable undertakings, and above
all his martyrdom, were a public avowal of his love for Christ, and will
ever continue to be a song of praise of wondrous beauty. His soul shone
forth in all the beauty of its purity, sanctity and sacrifice. Radiating the
splendor and sublime magnificence of divine grace, it became a source
of joy to God Himself. Hence all creation is invited to sing "to the Lord
a new canticle."

In the melody youthful freshness vies with dignified solemnity. With
the former there is an upward tendency over confessio e d g a c c, over
in conspec-(tu) e f g c c, over magnificen-(tia) f g a c c, and over (sanc-
tifi)-cati6-(ne) e f a c c. It thus employs variations of one motive only,
meanwhile emphasizing high c, the dominant of the mode. On the other
hand, the quiet seconds over (magnificenti)-a and the reverential half-
steps over sanctifi-(cati6ne) bespeak solemnity. In conspectu eius, text
and melody, is also found in the Introit of the Saturday before the sec-
ond Sunday of Lent.

Care must be taken that high c is not made to predominate, but
that the preparatory and following notes form the melody proper.

GRADUAL (Ps. 16:3)

1. Prohasti, Domine, cor meum, 1. Thou hast proved my heart, 0

2. et visitasti node. ^. 1. Igne me Lord, 2. and visited it hy night. 'jH. 1.

examinasti, 2. et non est inventa in Thou hast tried me hy fire. 2. and

me iniquitas. iniquity hath not been found in me.

The Benedictus antiphon of the morning Office is composed of a
part of St. Lawrence's prayer: "On the gridiron I have not denied Thee,
O Christ." The text of the Gradual continues this prayer. In truth, it
was not an insignificant test that he underwent when he was scourged
and tortured and subjected to a slow and extremely painful death on the
glowing gridiron. Many others subjected to the same test failed to prove
themselves, and after the dark night of pain there came for them the
darker night of apostasy. The heart of St. Lawrence, however, burned
with love for Christ; it rejoiced to suffer and give its all for Him. The
saint's night knew no darkness, but radiated instead a wondrous light.

Today the saint looks back upon his martyrdom and is moved to
sing this hymn to God. The corpus, with its lower pitch and range of
c-c^, according to some interpreters would first depict for us the saint's

422 St. Lawrence, Deacon and Martyr

feeling of melancholy over his tortures, and later the feeling of joy over
his triumph. Neither text nor melody, however, give occasion for this
interpretation, although it is true and very obvious that in contrast to
the corpus, the verse portrays a noticeable gradation of melody. The
melody over cor meum recurs on the feast of the Assumption over justi-
tiam, while that over visitästi seems to be entirely original. In the verse
Igne is given effective emphasis. The florid melismas over the accented
syllables of examindsti and inventa show the following close relationship:
bag agf ace and fdh cag abcc. The melody reaches its climax over et non
est inventa, where, in an assured, we might almost say conscious, manner
it rises stepwise to a height not frequently found in Graduals. By means
of large intervals it then descends. Indeed, the soul of St. Lawrence was
that purest gold which is tried by fire.

The same text recurs in the Introit on the octave of the feast, due
attention being given to the rules of style proper for Introits. The use
of the same melody for both Gradual and Introit — once in the seventh
and a second time the eighth mode^ — was accomplished by the editors of
the Medicean Gradual.

ALLELUIA VERSE

1. Levita Laurentius, honum opus 1. The levite Lawrence wrought a

operatus est, 2. qui per signum good work, 2. who by the sign of the
crucis caecos illuminavit. cross gave sight to the blind.

Impelled by his ardent love of God St. Lawrence manifested sin-
cere love for the poor and suffering. Of his many charitable works this
verse only mentions that he gave sight to the blind, not indeed by his
own power, but by the sign of the cross. Would that we might color our
rendition of this chant with the sentiments which those who were healed
must have experienced. Let us also ask a blessing of the saint, so that,
with hearts enlightened, we may better comprehend and meditate the
words of the Gospel which is about to be sung.

OFFERTORY

The Offertory has the same text, the same phrasing, with a major
pause before the dominant of the respective mode, the same tonal range,
and the same close on e as the Introit. The two chants differ in charac-
ter, however. High c, which permeates the Introit with is bright ring,
occurs but once in the Offertory. In its place we have bistrophas and
tristrophas on low /. In fact the entire piece is more deliberate, more re-
served, more solemn. Similar sequences are repeated at (pulchritü)-do
and (e)-jus, over the close of the first eius and the first half of the second

St. Lawrence, Deacon and Martyr 423

eius, over (säncti)-tas and (magnifi)-cen-(tia). Rhythmical groups are
likewise repeated. Thus, for instance, we find four groups of two and
three over magnificenti-(a), and three groups of two and two with an
emphasis on the pes over sanctificati-(6ne). The pes forms the arsis, while
the clivis forms the thesis. This arrangement brings about a threefold
undulatory movement, and serves as a preparation for the brilliant word-
accent to which three neums give prominence.

The inner spiritual reality that transpires in the Eucharistie Sac-
rifice, which is directly introduced by the offering of the oblation, makes
itself felt from the very outset. Thus the words of the Offertory tell us:
the Eucharistie Sacrifice is the noblest hymn of praise and beauty (con-
fessio et pulchritüdo) that can be rendered to the Most High. According
to the words of the Canon of the Mass, it renders to the Blessed Trinity
all honor and glory. In this sacrifice the pure, holy (sanctitas), spotless
sacrificial Lamb offers Himself. To the Church it represents the foun-
tainhead of all the wonderful splendor (magnificentia) which she possesses
in her saints, for from it they drew their "every heavenly blessing and
grace" (Canon of the Mass).

COMMUNION (John 12: 26)

1. Qui mihi ministrat, me sequa- 1. // any man minister to me, let

tun 2. et ubi ego sum, illic et min- him follow me: 2. and where I am,
ister meus erit. there also shall my minister he.

This Communion is now assigned to the Common of a Martyr not
a Bishop; it originated, however, with the feast of St. Lawrence. The
text repeats the words of our Lord in today's Gospel.

St. Lawrence was filled with a burning desire to imitate and follow
his divine Saviour even unto death. As his bishop, St. Xystus, was
being led to martyrdom, he was filled with an intense longing to make
the supreme sacrifice with him whom he had so often served at the offer-
ing of the Eucharistie Sacrifice. Only then was he satisfied when told
that after three days he should follow (me sequatur) in the footsteps of
the martyred bishop. He went to his death and his heart rejoiced: "Now
is my joy full," he said, "because I am become a martyr (hostia) for
Christ's sake."

The melody of the first phrase is filled with sweet harmony, as if
Christ were speaking invitingly to the saint: Behold, I am with you;
through self-denial and suffering you will come closer to Me. The sec-
ond phrase might be an explanation of the first in the sense that the
disciple who shares the lot of his master must be prepared to endure also
suffering and persecution. E^o rises in a solemn manner. Annotated manu-

424 The Assumption of the Blessed Virgin Mary

scripts give the first four and the last two notes of this word the broad
form, thereby knitting the melodic line more closely together. The pro-
nounced upward tendency of the melody would depict for us Christ as
^ enthroned above the clouds, elevated above all pain, sorrow, and per-
secution; and he who ministers to Him shall attain to these same heights.
As if in joyful longing for that happiness, illic is given a comparatively
rich melody. The low pitch of minister, however, reminds us that only
humble service will realize this longing in us.

THE ASSUMPTION OF THE BLESSED
VIRGIN MARY

(August 15)

The present Mass formulary of the feast is post-Gregorian, the
Gradual alone being found in the oldest manuscripts. Formerly the In-
troit Vultum tuum (now sung on the vigil), the Offertory Offerentur of
the feast of St. Agatha (today Afferentur), and the Communion Di-
lexisti of the Common of Holy Women were sung. This entire older Mass
formula is found as late as 1511 in a Graduale printed by Pforzheim at
Basle.^

The Introit, Alleluia, and Offertory have this characteristic, that
they hold out the angels to us as models whom we may imitate in prais-
ing the Mother of God. We can easily imagine the feelings of joy with
which they greet their queen today and lead her triumphantly into the
heavenly courts. United in spirit with these angels we also rejoice in
honoring and felicitating the Blessed Virgin upon the distinction and
honor which is accorded her on this feast. Fundamental to the beauty
and grandeur of today's celebration is the consoling conviction that this
same queen of heaven ever remains to us a Mother of mercy.

INTROIT

1. Gaudeamus omnes in Domino, 1. Let us all rejoice in the Lord,

diem festum celehrantes sub honore celebrating a festival day in honor

beatae Mariae Virginis: 2. de cuius of the blessed Virgin Mary: 2. for

Assumptione gaudent Angeli et whose Assumption the angels re-

1 R. Molitor, Choralwiegendrucker, p. 62.

The Assumption of the Blessed Virgin Mary 425

collaudent filium Dei. Ps. Eructavit joice and give praise to the Son of
cor meum verhum bonum: * dico God. Ps. My heart hath uttered a
ego opera mea regi. good word: * I speak my works to

the king.

"A bright, clear and inspiring melody, distinguished not so much
by its deep and mystical appeal or its tender fervor as by its joyous,
festal character. It displays a brilliant development, a uniformly simple
— we might say naive- — construction, and a clear and calm assurance of
victory in its every phrase. Like the beautiful morning sun which rises
without effort above the mountain peaks and floods the earth with its
golden rays, this hymn of joy springs from the depths of loving souls to
sing the triumphs of the Blessed Mother."^

Originally the melody was composed for a Greek text on the feast
of St. Agatha. It soon attained popular favor and was sung on a number
of feasts.

Text and melody have two phrases. The first phrase summons the
entire Church militant to rejoice in the Lord, for "it is a festival day in
honor of the blessed Virgin Mary." The second phrase depicts the joy
of the Church triumphant in the victory of Mary over death, "for whose
Assumption the Angels give praise to the Son of God." Each phrase has
two members, each of which in turn has two sub-members. Both major
members of the first phrase close on a high pitch : Domino, Virginis. The
second phrase repeats over Assumptione and collaudent the ascending
musical line of the first part. The melody here develops according to the
declamatory accents that intelligent rendition would demand. The de-
velopment and division of the piece might be pictured graphically as
follows :

Gaudeamus omnes in Domino,
Diem f. c. s. honor e Mariae Virginis:
d. c. Assumptione gaudent Angeli,
et collaüdant Filium Dei.

We might take note at once of the two motives that run through
the entire Introit. The first occurs over sub honore, Assumptione, and
with a variation, over collaüdant and in Domino. It begins with the in-
terval f-g and ascends by means of a lively torculus (once by means of a
pes subhipunctis) to c, thus recalling Gaudeamus. The second motive with
its quiet seconds occurs over Dei, again a full tone higher over (An)-
geli, and finally a fourth higher over (D6)-mino.

1 C. O., 50, 147.

426 The Assumption of the Blessed Virgin Mary

"Let us rejoice — in the Lord." The high points of the melody are
not reserved to the accented syllables alone. The significant in Domino
— "in the Lord" — for instance, is very prominent, and rightly so, since
even the most solemn feast of the Blessed Virgin is a feast of our Lord
also. It is this very thought, in fact, that forms the burden of the invi-
tatory prayer at Matins: "Come, let us adore the King of Kings, whose
virgin Mother was today bodily assumed into heaven." The same
thought recurs once more in the second phrase of the Introit— the
angels glorify God because He has honored, crowned, and transfigured
His Blessed Mother.

The first phrase begins solemn and festal in character, the stress of
voice increasing gradually up to the word Domino over which a and h
are given special emphasis. Soft accents mark the words di-(em) fe-
(stum) ce-(le)-brdn-(tes), the thrice recurring double / especially being
sung very lightly. This entire member should be rendered fluently. The
member following is characterized by a progressive ascent and a gradual
swell of the melody up to Virginis, which has a refreshing h. The double
c over (Mari)-ae, the only mention of the name of Mary in the entire
piece, should be rendered with warmth rather than with volume.

In the second phrase, a minor accent is placed over the second
syllable of (As)-sump-(ti6ne). The porrectus over Ange-(li) carry the
melody and should be somewhat emphasized. The dynamic high point
of the phrase centers over collaudant. A further secondary accent stresses
the third note over Fi-(lium).

In the verse Mary casts a retrospective glance over her earthly
existence. The Fia^— "Behold the handmaid of the Lord"^ — which she
spoke on the day of the Annunciation was indeed a good, a happy word.
This sentiment pervaded her entire life and she knew not to speak any
other word than: "My works to the King" — and to Him alone.

Analyses, 7, 13 fif.; Revue 7, 232 ff.

GRADUAL (Ps. 44: 5, 11, 12.)

1. Propter veritatem et mansue- 1. Because of truth, and meekness,

tudinem et justitiam: 2. Et deducet and justice: 2. and thy right hand

te mirabiliter dextera tua. 1^. 1. shall conduct thee wonderfully, jl. 1.

Audi, filia, et vide, 2. Et inclina Hearken, O daughter, and see, 2.

aurem tuam: 3. quia concupivit rex and incline thy ear, 3. for the king

speciem tuam. hath greatly desired thy beauty.

The Gradual employs numerous typical formulas. The melisma over
justitiam was recently heard on the feast of St. Lawrence over cor meum.
The melody of the verse up to the first tuam is the same as that of the

The Assumption of the Blessed Virgin Mary 427

second phrase, while the first half of the third phrase repeats that of the
Gradual verse for the second Sunday of Lent. The melody for these
first two phrases of the verse as also the close over speciem tuam is com-
mon to other Graduals. The satisfaction and joy which the rendition
which this piece affords should not, however, suffer on that account.
Taken as a whole, it is really a masterpiece of musical composition and
a jewel in the setting of today's feast. It prepares and carries out its
various musical gradations carefully and methodically, and reaches an
artistic climax in the first phrase of the verse.

The first four words have a range of the major third f~a, and should
be sung piano, almost pianissimo. Over et justitiam there is at first the
range of a fourth, later that of a fifth; the melody as such, however,
maintains itself on the newly found 6t>. This melody should be given a
crescendo which gradually diminishes toward the close until the five last
notes become next to aspirates. After the / of the third syllable most
singers will find need for a pause.

The second phrase has in the main a range of f-c, although after
the astonishing descent at dex-(tera) the melody ascends to high d, a
range of a seventh. Fluent rendition will be facilitated by giving the
second note before the syllable -ra a light secondary accent. The motive
over -(bi)-liter is repeated and strengthened over -ra. In case of necessity
a pause might be made after the second bistropha over dex-; here the
corpus attains its greatest range, that of an octave d-d^.

The verse begins with a resolved major triad and immediately as-
cends to high d which is accented emphatically. The thrice descending
d^ a f has as complement the twice ascending fa c d^. We might here
picture to ourselves the angels coming down to the Mother of God on
earth and, having paid their court and invited her to the heavenly king-
dom, returning thither and mustering other choirs of angels to prepare
for her reception. Relying on authoritative manuscripts, some of the
Graduals have the eleventh note (c) over fi- prolonged and thus effect
a fine proportion. On the tristropha the melody seems to seek strength
necessary for the bold ascent to high e. Progressively the melody expands
in a brilliant manner until it reaches high / over inclina. These various
high points of the melody, however, should not be overemphasized as
such; rather should an entire group or a complete torculus be developed
as an integral part of the whole melody. Aurem begins piano. This is
followed by a large crescendo over tuam, where the modulation to a fifth
above the tonic, which was only indicated over filia, is evident. The mo-
tive over inclina is repeated over concupivit; it has ascending fourths in
place of the descending fourths over filia. After the preparatory notes
over (tu)-am have been sung, the group beginning with g should be

428 The Assumption of the Blessed Virgin Mary

emphasized, then the group beginning with a, and finally the double c.
Regarding the application of rhythmic motives in this Gradual, cf.
N. Sch., 240 f.

The beauty of the virtues of Mary are described in a series of pic-
tures in the Epistle. She is likened to "a. cedar, a cypress tree, a palm
tree, a rose plant, an olive tree, a plane tree." She resembles "a sweet-
smelling cinnamon and aromatical balm." Among her many virtues,
the Gradual calls especial attention to the following three: her truth —
she is the realization of the divine dispensation of God; her meekness —
she is the clement, pious, and sweet Virgin; her justice — she is the mir-
ror of divine justice. And therefore now, with a choir of angels as an es-
cort, she is assumed into heaven in a miraculous manner.

In the verse the angels call out to her: Audi, filia — "Hearken, O
daughter." During her earthly life there were hard and bitter words
which cut deep into the innocent soul of the Blessed Mother; every word
that grieved her divine Son wounded her heart likewise. Many were the
heart-rending sights she had to experience: the abject poverty of the
stable at Bethlehem, her Son dying on the cross and finally dead in her
arms. But the bleak winter of this life has passed— and all suffering is
ended; a perpetual balmy spring has come. Now she hearkens to heaven-
ly hymns, contemplates the heavenly bliss, and receives the heavenly
crown to adorn her head. The King greatly desires her beauty. All the
beauty and sublimity of her soul is now displayed in heaven, and the
Almighty has bestowed upon her body the brilliance of His own trans-
figuration.

ALLELUIA VERSE

1. Assumpta est Maria in caelum: 1. Mary is assumed into heaven:

2. gaudet exercitus Angelorum. 2. the angel hosts rejoice.

Following as it does an artistic Gradual, the Alleluia, although rich
in neums, might pass as a popular hymn. It soon becomes a favorite
with singers, especially youthful singers. A song of bright jubilation
emulating that of the angels, it sounds modern in its major tonality and
close on c. It is nevertheless one of the oldest chant melodies we have.
Originally it was sung to the text Te gloriosus Apostolorum chorus (cf . the
Alleluia on the feast of St. Bartholomew, Apostle, and St. Matthew,
Evangelist), and was finally adapted for use on the Dedication of a
Church during Paschal time. Its adaptation to the text on the feast of
the Assumption is so happy that we might judge it to be an original
composition.

The Assumption of the Blessed Virgin Mary 429

The melody over Alleluia, exclusive of its juhilus, has two sections,
the first of which reaches its climax on the pressus and recurs in the
second member of the juhilus. In chant practice the two sections should
be taken successively as shown in the following scheme:
cd efgdag g
All- e lu. . .and
cd efgdag g

The second section is further developed in the first member of the
juhilus, which in turn has two members that are well rounded off by the
climacus. The second member of the juhilus is an abbreviated form of
all which precedes.

The tone material for the first part of the verse as well as the ener-
getic accents over est and Ma-(ria) are taken from the melody of the first
part of Alleluia. This first phrase moves quietly, is almost narrative.
Groups of two notes should be sung over est and -ria in. The melody
here has a strong cadencing tendency and is more effective than in the
original. Beginning with gaudet, the exuberant joy of the angel choirs
again makes itself felt. The melodic figure over exercitus is identical with
that over Alleluia', its arrangement differs somewhat, since, on account
of the "i" in the latter word, a liquescent climacus is placed between the
two vowels. The choir will experience some difficulty setting in with
Angelorum. The juhilus of Alleluia recurs over -lo-. A little discrepancy
arises here. According to a so-called "golden rule" it is neither allowed
to retard nor to pause before the various syllables of the same word,
consequently neither before -rum. On the last note of the corresponding
torculus resupinus in the juhilus of the Alleluia, however, a mora vocis
was made. In order to reconcile both renditions, Revue (24, 149 ff.) sug-
gests that this retarding in the juhilus be made light and short (cf . also
Revue, 11, 165 ff.).

Although the Alleluia Angelus Domini of Easter Monday and Verho
Domini of the Wednesday of Pentecost Week are quite similar to the
present melody, they are nevertheless assigned to the eighth mode be-
cause of their close on g. They really belong to the fifth mode, as does the
Alleluia of today.

OFFERTORY

1. Assumpta est Maria in caelum: 1. Mary hath heen taken up into

2. gaudent Angeli, 3. collaudantes heaven: 2. the Angels rejoice, 3. and
henedicunt Dominum. hlessing God, praise him with one

voice.

430 The Assumption of the Blessed Virgin Mary

This text, like that of the Introit and the Alleluia, is non-scripturaL
For an Offertory this is rather singular. It occurs four other times on
feasts of the Blessed Virgin: Bedta es, on the feast of the Visitation;
Recorddre, on the feasts of Mount Carmel and the Seven Dolors; and
Felix namque, in the votive Mass of the Blessed Virgin during the Christ-
mas season. To these four should be added the Offertory Protege on the
feast of the Exaltation of the Cross, and Domine Jesu Christe of the Re-
quiem Mass.

The melody was explained on Easter Monday. It was quite prob-
ably adapted to this text in the eleventh century.^ The intonation bears
some resemblance to the melody over collaudant in the Introit; this is
only fortuitous, however. The whole rivals by its warmth and vivacity
the Gradual and the Alleluia.

The Gospel narrates the meeting of Jesus with Mary and Martha,
the sisters of Lazarus. The blessed Virgin was both Martha and Mary
to our Lord. As a Martha she served Him with a tireless love and carried
out all such duties which the needs of a child might demand of its mother.
As a Mary she sat at His feet hearkening to His every word and absorb-
ing the divine truths that fell from His lips. She chose the better part
which was not taken away from her. What constituted this better part
forms the theme of the Offertory: she was assumed into heaven, angels
the while rejoicing and praising the Lord. Would that we could realize
in our person the voice and spirit of the angels in singing the praises and
celebrating the triumph of the Mother of God!

COMMUNION (Luke 10: 42)

1. Optimam partem elegit sihi 1. Mary hath chosen for herself

Maria, 2. quae non auferetür ah ea the best part: 2. which shall not be
in aeternum. taken from her forever.

The Communion refers back to the Gospel and points out to us its
significance for the present feast. To the original text the composer here
added the words in aeternum at the end. The melody was explained on
the feast of the Annunciation.

Eternal happiness is the only true happiness. Such eternal happi-
ness is the reward which God bestows upon Mary today. True, He made
her the recipient of numerous graces; it was only by cooperating faith-
fully with every grace, however, that Mary finally attained the blessings
of eternal salvation.

1 Revue, 4, 163; Rassegna, 2, 341 ff.

St. Joachim, Father of the Blessed Virgin Mary, Confessor 431

The highest good which we can choose on earth is Holy Commun-
ion: therein is contained heaven with its eternal happiness. "He that
eateth this bread shall live forever."

* * * *

ST. JOACHIM, FATHER OF THE BLESSED

VIRGIN MARY, CONFESSOR

(August 16)

This feast, introduced into the Roman liturgy under Julius 11
(1503-13), is now invariably celebrated on the day following the Assump-
tion. Thus also in the liturgy, father and child stand in close relation-
ship to one another.

INTROIT (Ps. 111:9)

1. Dispersit, dedit pauperihus:
2. jusHtia ems manet in saeculiim
saeculi: 3. cornu eius exaltabitur
in gloria. Ps. Beatus vir qui timet
Dominum:* in mandatis eius cupit
nimis.

1. He hath distributed, he hath
given to the poor: 2. his justice re-
maineth forever and ever: 3. his
horn shall he exalted in glory. Ps.
Blessed is the man that feareth the
Lord: * he shall delight exceedingly
in his commandments.

The Introit is taken from the vigil of St. Lawrence, where the text
is descriptive of the great exertions of that saint, of his self-sacrificing
service to others, and of his paternal devotion to the poor of Rome.
While tradition also extols the tender and self-sacrificing love of St.
Joachim, we can readily picture to ourselves the contemporaneous
poverty in which he lived. Without doubt, he sheltered in the person
of the Virgin Mother the greatest riches this world possessed; in fact^
he himself was a model of justice (Introit). On the other hand, the home
he provided was evidently poor in the goods of this world, as is evidenced
by the poverty which accompanied Mary and Joseph to Bethlethem on
the first Christmas. St. Joachim was therefore always solicitous to pro-
vide by the labor of his hands the necessaries of life for his own, these
truly poor in Christ. Now he is exalted in glory, and his justice endures
as a shining model for us.

The melody has a brisk and joyful swing; this is already exemplified
in the use of numerous fourths. Each phrase also gives melodic promi-
nence to high e. Beyond this, however, the phrases do not vary greatly.

432 St. Joachim, Father of the Blessed Virgin Mary, Confessor

In the first phrase, g has a predominating influence; in the second, / is
effective in relation to 6b; in the third, h is stressed while c g e are the
most conspicuous notes. Although every phrase of the text terminates
with a dactyl, the melody nevertheless gives neums to the second last
syllable of each. Cornu sets in a fourth higher than the close of its pre-
ceding phrase. There can be no thought of word-painting, however,
since we find the same figure over (magnifi)-centia in the Introit of the
feast of St. Lawrence. Dispersit is sung gca gcc; (paupe)-ri-(hus), on the
other hand, has three quiet groups of two notes.

GRADUAL (Ps. 111:9, 2)

1. Dispersa, dedit pauperihus: 1. He hath distributed, he hath

2. justitia eius manet in saeculum given to the poor: 2. his justice re-
saeculi. ^. Potens in terra 2. erit maineth forever and ever. ^. 1.
semen eius: 3. generatio rectorum Mighty upon earth 2. shall he his
4. henedicetur. seed 3. the generation of the right-

eous 4. shall be blessed.

The corpus is identical with the first two phrases of the Introit.
The text of the verse has an especially bright ring. How mighty has the
child of St. Joachim become as the queen of heaven and mistress of earth,
the terror of evil spirits and the joy of the just. The very King of Kings
humbles Himself before her and becomes subject to her; generations will
ever sing her praise and never cease to cry: "Blessed art thou among
women and blessed (Benedicetur) is the fruit of thy womb, Jesus."

The melody is of the type explained on the first Sunday of Lent.
Both text and melody are taken from the vigil of St. Lawrence.

ALLELUIA VERSE

1. 0 Joachim sancte, coniux 1. 0 holy Joachim, spouse of

Annae, pater almae Virginis, 2. hie Anne, father of the glorious Virgin,
famulis ferto salutis opem. 2. assist now thy servants unto sal-

vation.

In the eleventh century this melody was sung to the text 0 quam
metuendus est (Dedication of a Church). The beginning of the verse re-
peats the motive over -le. This same motive with its torculus is repeated
a fifth higher over coniux, and with a slight variation over almae. The
first member of the jubilus is echoed over sanctae.

The Vatican Gradual, both textually and melodically (typical
figure dc fga), combines sancte with Joachim; according to the Missal,
however, it belongs to Annae (sanctae).

St. Joachim, Father of the Blessed Virgin Mary, Confessor 433

The verse adduces various reasons for confiding in the intercession
of St. Joachim. He is a saint, the spouse of St. Anne, and the father of
the Blessed Virgin Mary. His intercession on our behalf will merit the
sympathetic support of the Mother of God. And he himself, moved by
the petitions which his servants present to him, will implore from God
the grace of our salvation.

OFFERTORY (Ps. 8: 6, 7)

I.Gloria et honor e cor onasti eum: 1. Thou hast crowned him with

2. et constituisti eum super opera glory and honor: 2. and hast set him
manuum tuarum, Domine. over the works of thy hands, 0 God.

Florid neums give especial prominence to honore and Domine. These
two words, in fact, summarize the content of the entire Offertory: Hon-
ored by God. The melody as such is very effective, especially in its rise
to and frequent use of high c. The song is like an act of solemn homage
to the saint. The introductory motive over -n6-(re) is repeated imme-
diately, then once more over -(i)-sti and md(-nuum), and, with a slight
variation over (-nä)-sti eum. The first half of the first phrase closes on g,
since the following intonation begins on /; in a similar manner, its sec-
ond half closes on / since the following intonation begins on the higher
a (rule of adaptation of phrases). While the first phrase has a range of
a fifth, that of the second is much more extensive. The second phrase,
which begins with the high-pitched and strongly accented motive a
cc da over et constituisti, comes to a close a fifth lower with d ff fgd over

-mine. The low-pitched melody over super opera stands out in strong
contrast to its two adjoining high-pitched melodies.

In old manuscripts this Offertory is assigned to the vigil of the
Apostle St. John, when it was sung in the early morn of the feast itself.

During his lifetime St. Joachim was made custodian of God's most
beautiful handiwork. As a reward for his faithful service, the Lord has
bestowed upon him immortal glory.

COMMUNION (Luke 11: 41)

1 . Fidelis servus et prudens, quem 1 . O faithful and wise steward,

constituit Dominus super familiam whom his Lord setteth over his

suam; 2. ut det Ulis in tempore tri- family; 2. to give them their meas-

tici mensuram. ure of wheat in due season.

Older manuscripts assign this melody to the feast of St. Gregory
the Great. Prior to this, however, it was already sung on the feast of
Popes Urban and Sixtus.

434 St. Bartholomew, Apostle

The melody grows systematically, ga hg dc c becoming ch cd d and
finally dc de dec; following this, c becomes the actual dominant. The
rhyme at the end of the first and second phrases is also very effective,
cd ch gg becoming cd ch gag g. Both phrases have three divisions. The
second phrase has a richer development than we ordinarily find in a
Communion. Over tritici the Vatican Gradual calls for a slight retarding
after c and a, thus resulting in three groups, of which the first and third
form the arsis.

If ever a household deserved the name of Family of God surely it
was the one over which St. Joachim presided. God himself appointed
Joachim its head, and insofar as its sole aim was the greater glory of God,
it was truly God's family (familiam suam). The needs of this family,
imposed upon St. Joachim by divine decree, were served by him with
such thoughtfulness and fidelity that he has become a model for us and
an object of universal admiration.

Christ has also united Himself with us under the form of bread
(tritici). According to His human nature He came to us from the most
pure womb of Mary. Mary, however, was the child of St. Joachim and
St. Anne. May their intercession procure for us (Postcommunion) in
the present life the graces of God, so that in the life to come we may be
sharers in eternal glory.

ST. BARTHOLOMEW, APOSTLE
(August 26)

INTROIT, GRADUAL and OFFERTORY are the same as those
on the feast of St. Andrew.

ALLELUIA VERSE

1. Gloriosus Apostolorum chorus 1. The glorious choir of Apostles,

2. te laudat, Domine. 2. praises thee, O Lord.

The text is taken from the Te Deum. In the words of the Collect
God ''has given us a reverent and holy joy in this day's festival." The
Alleluia, which refers to the glorious and venerable choir of Apostles,
gives lively expression to this joy. In the Gospel we are told that our
Lord devoted to prayer the entire night which preceded the election of
His Apostles. During the years in which these Apostles were associated
with Him, He imparted to them a wealth of truth and of power. They
in turn served Him in holiness and justice, even though — as in the case

The Nativity of the Blessed Virgin Mary 435

of today's saint — a martyr's crown awaited them at the end of their
laborious lives. Glorious indeed is the choir of the Apostles.

The melody was heard only recently on the feast of the Assump-
tion. The second last and last syllables of the first word should not be
retarded. The brevity of the text did not permit after laudat the usual
repetition of the melody over alleluia.

The COMMUNION was explained on the feast of St. Matthias.

THE NATIVITY OF THE BLESSED

VIRGIN MARY

(September 8)

In Rome this feast dates back to the pontificate of Sergius I (687-
701); it was celebrated by the universal Church only some time after
the ninth century. The chants are identical with those of the feast of the
Visitation.

How noble was the vocation of the Virgin Mother! Her body and
soul had been made a worthy habitation for the Saviour by almighty
God Himself. Beautiful and pure, stainless and perfect she came from
the master-hand of God. Happy and content in her inner perfections,
she brought supernatural happiness to a poor deluded world. Her birth-
day is made the occasion of solemn rejoicings. In the Introit she is greeted
with Salve, in the Gradual with Benedicta es tu, in the Alleluia with
Felix es, and in the Offertory and Communion with Bedta.

THE EXALTATION OF THE HOLY CROSS
(September 14)

In the Orient today's feast was celebrated as early as the fourth
century. In the Occident it became known in the eighth century, and
then only gradually.

The INTROIT and the GRADUAL are taken from the Mass of
Maundy Thursday. The ALLELUIA-VERSE is the second from the
feast of the Finding of the Holy Cross (May 3), from which feast the
COMMUNION also has been taken. Something akin to the spirit of
autumn pervades this feast, an expectation of that great day when the
cross will appear in the clouds of heaven as the sign of the "Son of man.'*

436 The Nativity of the Blessed Virgin Mary

OFFERTORY

1. Protege, Domine, plehem tuam, 1. Protect thy people, O Lord, by

per Signum sanctae Crucis, ah om- the sign of the holy Cross, from the

nihus insidiis inimicorum omnium: wiles of all their enemies: 2. that

2. ut tibi gratam exhibeamus servi- we may render a service pleasing

tutem, 3. et acceptabile fiat sacri- unto thee, 3. and that our sacrifice

ficium nostrum, alleluia. may be acceptable in thy sight,

alleluia.

The sentiment of the Offertory is similar to that of the Commun-
ion, but places greater stress upon the protection from the enemies of
the soul. These enemies must not hinder us from the service of God,
must not disturb our interior peace, must not rob us of the joy in God's
service, must not delude us with the enticements and seeming joys of
the world, must not induce us to desert our recognized duty and be-
come unfaithful. Against all these dangers may the holy cross protect
us and strengthen us in perseverance and fidelity in the service of God.
If in this manner our service becomes pleasing to the Lord, then our
worship and the union of our sacrifice with the Eucharistie Sacrifice will
also become pleasing to Him.

Something akin to melancholy pervades the melody. It has a very
modest development. Despite its length, its greatest interval is a third.
The first and second phrases begin with the same descending motive.
Abstracting from this, the first half of the first phrase confines itself to
the range of a fourth, the second half to a fifth, as does also the third
phrase. The second phrase alone has a range of a sixth. Over exhibeamus
servitutem the melody of per Signum sanctae Crucis is extended and de-
veloped, while that of sacrificium is simplified. Only the first syllable of
this word receives any special accent. Omnibus insidiis resembles ac-
ceptabile fiat. An enlivening effect is produced by the pressus, particu-
larly over Signum. Crucis and the corresponding passages.

The whole should be rendered as a fervent prayer, without strong
accents. It should breathe the conviction of a soul conscious of its own
weakness in the face of the evil one, but firmly reliant on the power of
Christ's cross. In sentiment it is closely allied to the Offertory Domine
Jesu Christe of the Mass for the Dead, which likewise belongs to the
second mode.

Revue, 16, 114.

The Seven Sorrows of the Blessed Virgin Mary 437

THE SEVEN SORROWS OF THE BLESSED

VIRGIN MARY

(September 15)

INTROIT (John 19:25)

1. Stahant juxta crucem Jesu 1. There stood hy the cross of

mater ejus, et soror matris ejus Jesus, his mother, and his mother's

Maria Cleophae, 2. et Salome, et sister Mary of Cleophas, 2. and

Maria Magdalene, i^ Mulier, ecce Salome, and Mary Magdalen, jt/'.

filius tuus, dixit Jesus; * ad dis- Woman, behold thy son, said

cipulum autem: Ecce mater tua. Jesus; * to the disciple, however:

Behold thy mother.

The peculiar style of this text makes it unsuitable for composition.
At the beginning of the first phrase we have the predicate, whereupon
follows a fourfold subject. True enough, the Mother of Jesus is given
first place. For it is she alone who on this day deserves our attention,
our love, and our sympathy. She is deserving of first mention. Rightly,
also, do the words Mater ejus dominate the melodic line of the first-
phrase. But beyond this the piece can really no longer develop, or ra-
ther, it shows development where we least expect it, namely, over
Maria Cleophae. There is, however, a melodic reason for this. The In-
troit Stdtuit for the feast of a Martyr and Bishop and of a Confessor and
Bishop, served as a model for this Introit. Stahant= Stdtuit, mater ejus=
ut sit Uli, Maria Cleophae= sacerdotii dignitas, (Ma)-gdalene = aeternum.
The leading thought of the original is sacerdotii dignitas — "the dignity
of the priesthood." Here the melody moves along solemnly in a recita-
tive tone, a third above the dominant, and flows into a festal cadence.
Thus the tone-sequences occur above Maria Cleophae, which certainly
is not the textual apex of the present Introit. Perhaps the identical
initial syllable Std-(tuit)=Std-(hant) brought about this association of
melodies. Nor would this be an isolated instance. Some of the newer
feasts borrow their melodies from older feasts with which they are
closely related in the liturgical year.

In spite of this, however, we should not overlook the fact that to-
day's Introit contains much that is delicate and beautiful. The melody
over juxta crucem Jesu is noble and tender; over mater ejus, almost
pathetic. This passage should be made emphatic with a slow, but not
dragging, tempo; it must create the correct atmosphere for today's
feast. It ought to express a tender sympathy with the Mother of sorrows,
for Mary must witness the death of her only Son on the wood of the

438 The Seven Sorrows of the Blessed Virgin Mary

cross. Many a mother may well say of her child: My one and all! But
Mary alone has the right to speak these words in their fullest sense. Her
Child dies, dies in unspeakable agony, while she must stand by, unable
to ojBfer any help! Her sorrow and pain but increase the desolation of her
divine Son. Mary, however, desires to stand there, to remain there, de-
sires to participate most intimately in the great sacrifice which her Son
is offering for the salvation of the world.

The second half of the first phrase is free composition at the be-
ginning, like et Salome in the second phrase. The first phrase closes on
on the dominant a, and uses this as a base from which to ascend higher.
The second phrase never extends beyond a. Similarly et Salome and
Maria introduce and stress the word-accent. The low pitch of the sec-
ond half of the latter phrase may suggest the picture of Mary Magdalen
kneeling at the foot of the cross.

The verse is not taken from the psalms, as is customary with other
Introits, but from the Gospel. The dying Saviour is speaking directly.
He appoints His mother the mother of St. John and of us all. What
feeling and sentiment is contained in this simple, typical melody!

GRADUAL

1. Dolorosa et lacrimahilis es, 1. Thou art sorrowful and worthy

Virgo Maria, 2. stans juxta cru- of tears, O virgin Mary, 2. standing

cem Domini Jesu Filii tui Redemp- near the cross of the Lord Jesus, thy

toris. ^. 1. Virgo Dei Genitrix, son, our Redeemer. ^. 1. 0 virgin

quem totus non capit orhis, 2. hoc mother of God, he whom the whole

crucis fert supplicium, auctor vitae world doth not contain, 2. heareth

factus homo. this punishment of the cross, the

author of life, made man.

The melody was explained on July 2 and is admirably suited to this
text.

To be blunt of feeling, St. Paul remarks, is a mark of paganism.
This was not the case with the heart of Mary, St. Bernard says, neither
should it be with her servants. How we are to participate in her sorrow
who was "worthy of tears" (the first meaning of the Latin lacrimabilis),
is told us in the Sequence,

Oh, the bitter irony of it! He whom the heavens and earth can not
contain is nailed to the cross. In the Lamentations He complains: "He
hath built against Me round about, that I may not get out: he hath
made My fetters heavy;" and: "The author of life is fallen a victim to
death." And His mother weeps.

The Seven Sorrows of the Blessed Virgin Mary 439

ALLELUIA VERSE

1. Stabat sancta Maria, caeli 1. Holy Mary, the queen of

Regina, et mundi Domina, 2. juxta heaven, and mistress of the world, 2.

crucem Domini nostri Jesu Christi stood by the cross of our Lord Jesus

dolorosa. Christ, full of sadness.

The melody dates from the eleventh century and was originally
sung to the text Stabunt justi. Here again the identical initial syllable of
Stabunt and Stabat may have influenced the selection of the melody.
With the climacus of the jubilus, the first three notes should be taken
together, the fourth should receive a slight secondary accent; the same
holds true of the notes of the climacus in the verse, made striking both
by their prolongation and their melody. Compare, also, the delicate
structure of a similar formula in the second Alleluia of Pentecost over
amoris. First Stabat sancta is simplified, then expanded over caeli Regina.
In contrast to the high bb, the second phrase has a low a.

' Who would believe that this weeping woman^ — together with her
Son an object of ridicule — is the queen of heaven and the mistress of
the world? And yet the world has seen nothing more noble than this
woman — how she bears her pain and stands beneath the cross. Gradual,
Alleluia, and Sequence stress this point: stans and stabat. Truly, she de-
served to become the queen of heaven and mistress of the world.
Revue, 6, 160.

SEQUENCE

Jacopone da Todi (Hhc. 1306) was long credited with the author-
ship of this sequence. Cogent reasons, however, point to St. Bonaven-
ture (*i* 1274). The melody owes its origin to the Benedictine, Dom
Jausions (4-1868). It strikes a note of heartfelt sympathy without be-
coming sentimental. It possesses a beauty all its own, but does not at-
tain the artistic height of the text, the communicative warmth of its
feelings, the delicate swelling and contraction of its mood, and the
pleasantness of its rhythm. The melody, no doubt, would have been
enhanced had it followed the text more faithfully. The strophes show
too little individualism, even though they avoid lengthy repetitions.
Every choirmaster will experience that, although sung frequently, the
Sequence never attains its full possibilities.

The text has two major divisions and a short conclusion. These,
however, have had no influence on the formation of the melody. The
first part comprises the first four double strophes and considers the
Mother of sorrows beneath the cross of her Son. Melodically, it sur-
passes the second part.

440

The Seven Sorrows of the Blessed Virgin Mary

From the first to the fourth double strophe, the melody has in-
creasingly greater intervals (fifth, sixth, seventh, octave). The quint at
the beginning of the second double strophe is especially happy. Like-
wise the descent to c &b « in the third double strophe.

FIRST PART

la. Stabat Mater dolorosa
Juxta crucem lacrimosa
Dum pendebat Filius.

la. At the Cross her station keep-
ing,
Stood the mournful Mother

weeping
Close to Jesus to the last.

lb. Cujus animam gementem,
Contristatam, et dolentem,
Pertransivit gladius.

lb. Through her heart, His sor-
row sharing,
All His hitter anguish hearing,
Now at length the sword hßd
passed.

2a. O quam tristis et afflicta
Fuit ilia henedicta
Mater Unigenitil

2a. Oh, how sad and sore distressed
Was that Mother, highly hlest
Of the sole-begotten Onel

2b. Quae moerehat et dolebat,
Pia Mater dum videhat
Nati poenas inclyti.

2b. Christ ahove in torment hangs;
She heneath heholds the pangs
Of her dying glorious Son.

3a. Quis est homo qui non fleret,
Matrem Christi si videret
In tanto suppliciol

3a. Is there one who would not
weep
Whelmed in miseries so deep
Christ's dear Mother to heholdl

3b. Quis non posset contristari,
Christi Matrem contemplari
Dolentem cum Filiol

3b. Can the human heart refrain
From partaking in her pain,
In that Mother's pain untoldl

4a. Pro peccatis suae gentis
Vidit Jesum in tormentis.
Et flagellis suhditum.

4a. Bruised, derided, cursed, de-
filed.
She beheld her tender Child:
All with bloody scourges rent.

46. Vidit suum dulcem natum
Moriendo desolatum
Dum emisit spiritum.

4b. For the sins of His own nation
Saw Him hang in desolation,
Till His Spirit forth He sent.

The Seven Sorrows of the Blessed Virgin Mary

441

SECOND PART

In this part all the strophes have a range of a sixth. Melodically
related are the second verses of the seventh and eighth double strophes,
the third verses of the seventh and tenth strophes, the first verse of the
eighth strophe and the second of the tenth strophe. The eighth strophe
forms its third verse like that of the fourth strophe. Strophe 6b has the
internal rhyme: Tui nati vulnerati, tarn dignäti pro me pati; similarly
strophe 8b: Fac utportem Christi mortem, Pdssionis fac consortem. The
frequently recurring fac ("Obtain for me this grace!") gives the text a
childlike and prayerful aspect. It receives special fervor and intimacy
through the various appellations with which Mary is addressed: "Mo-
ther, fount of love," "Holy Mother, Virgin of all virgins. Virgin."

Eia Mater, fons amoris,
Me sentire vim doloris
Fac, ut tecum

5a. O Thou Mother, fount of lovel
Touch my spirit from above;
Make my heart with thine ac-
cord.

5b. Fac ut ardeat cor meum, 5b.

In amando Christum Deum,
Ut sibi complaceam.

6a. Sancta Mater, istud agas, 6a.

Crucifixi fige plagas
Cordi meo valide.

6b. Tui nati vulnerati, 6b.

Tam dignati pro me pati,
Poenas mecum divide.

7a. Fac me tecum pie flere, 7a.

Crucifixo condolere,
Donee ego vixero.

7b. Juxta crucem tecum stare, 7b.

Et me tibi sociare
In planctu desidero.

8a. Virgo virginum praeclara, 8a.

Mihi jam non sis amara:
Fac me tecum plangere.

Make me feel as thou hast felt ;
Make my soul to glow and melt
With the love of Christ my Lord^

Holy Mother] pierce me

through;
In my heart each wound renew
Of my Saviour crucified.

Let me share with thee His

pain.
Who for all my sins was slain.
Who for me in torments died.

Let me mingle tears with thee.
Mourning Him who mourned

for me.
All the days that I may live.

By the Cross with thee to stay.

There with thee to weep and

pray.

Is all I ask of thee to give.

Virgin of all virgins bestl
Listen to my fond request:
Let me share thy grief divine»

442

The Seven Sorrows of the Blessed Virgin Mary

Sh. Fac ut portem Christi mortem,
Passionis fac consortem,
Et piagas recolere.

8b. Let me, to my latest breath,
In my body bear the death
Of that dying Son of thine.

Fac me plagis vulnerari,
Fac me cruce inebriari,
Et cruore Filii.

9a. Wounded with His every
wound.
Steep my soul till it hath
swooned
In His very Blood away.

^b. Flammis ne urar succensus.
Per te, Virgo, sim defensus
In die judicii.

9b. Be to me, O Virgin, nigh.

Lest in flames I burn and die,
In that awful Judgment Day.

THIRD PART

In the conclusion we pray to Christ crucified for a happy death in
the name of His Sorrowful Mother:

10a. Christe, cum sit hinc exire,
Da per Matrem me venire
Ad palmam victoriae.

10b. Quando corpus morietur^
Fac ut animae donetur
Paradisi gloria.
Amen. Alleluia
C. 0., 50, 153 ff.

10a. Christ, when Thou shalt call me
hence,
Be Thy Mother my defense.
Be Thy Cross my victory.

10b. While my body here decays,
May my soul Thy goodness

praise,
Safe in paradise with Thee.
Amen. Alleluia

OFFERTORY (Jer. 18: 20)

1. Recordare, Virgo Mater, in 1. Remember, 0 Virgin Mother, of

•conspectu Dei, 2. ut loquaris pro God, 2. to intercede on our behalf,

nobis bona, 3. et ut avertat indig- 3. and to turn away His anger from

nationem suam a nobis. us.

In the Offertory we address to the Mother of God the words which
the sorely tried prophet Jeremias speaks to the Lord in behalf of his
ungrateful people. She stood beneath the cross of Jesus and looked into
His glazing eyes. She heard Him pray: "Father, forgive them!" And she
prayed with Him. She intercedes for us, for us who are the cause of those

The Seven Sorrows of the Blessed Virgin Mary 443

unspeakable sorrows her motherly heart had to bear. She bears us no
ill will, but with the solicitous heart of a mother she implores God to
avert His just anger from us.

As once she prayed beneath the cross, so now she prays in heaven
for us, in conspectu Dei, before the face of Him who suffers no more, but
has entered into His glory. Even today during the sacred Mysteries she
will intercede for us, and when the bell at the consecration announces
that He has once more become present among us, then Mary implores
abundant graces on our behalf. So long as there is a human heart that is
sighing and struggling and suffering, Mary does not weary of interced-
ing for it, until the time when she will bring us all into the blissful pres-
ence of her divine Son.

In a few of the ancient manuscripts the present text and melody are
found as the second verse of the Offertory for the twenty-second Sunday
after Pentecost. In Codex H. 159 of Montpellier this composition was
inserted later. This melody exhibits the technique of thematic execu-
tion as few others do. Over the word Recordare the small note e forms
the connecting link between two motives, the first of which we shall
call a, the second b. Over histropha and pressus, which should be kept
well separated in the rendition, motive a has an upward movement to
the dominant, after which the melody descends a third. Motive b ex-
hibits a downward movement and then ascends. Over Virgo Mater the
same two motives are repeated. Bona follows motive b; the three pre-
ceding notes re-echo a part of motive a, as do also the notes over et ut
aver-(tat). Indignationem suam with the descending minor third c~a re-
peats motive a in an amplified manner. If we include the preceding
third we have in that which follows a middle cadence of the fifth mode.
Of the greatest artistic value is the employment of the two motives in
the florid vocalization over a. Before / is attained, the melody descends
in a fifth to the tonic d. Motive b sets in on high c and ends with an as-
cent of a third. In a brilliant rise, motive a is now attached a fifth high-
er and then leads over to motive b, which sets in on c. This trope realizes
to the full the beauty inherent in the melody.^

The melody is characteristic of fervent petition. With ut loqudris
it becomes still more appealing. Indignationem suam sounds the outcry
of a heart tortured by the weight of divine wrath. But the confident
melody of Recordare returns, swells to victorious height and power, and
dies away with the expression of quiet resignation.

Musica sacra, 48, 36 ff.

1 Cf. Revue, 4, 161 ff., and Wagner, III, 507 f.

444 St. Matthew, Apostle and Evangelist

COMMUNION

1. Felices sensus heaiae Mariae 1. Happy the senses of the

Virginis, 2. qui sine morte meruer- blessed Virgin Mary, 2. which
unt martyrii palmam sub cruce without death obtained the palm of
Domini. martyrdom beside the cross of the

Saviour.

With striking fidelity the melody follows the textual development
and reveals a wonderful brilliancy in the words martyrii palmam. They
begin a fifth higher than the preceding words, while the subsequent
words set in a fifth lower. If we add to this the prominence given to the
dominant a, we have a strikingly original effect. Nevertheless we have
also here a part adaptation of a melody which is sung on the feast of
the Visitation (July 2) and on many other feasts of the Blessed Virgin.
The insertion of the word beätae hinders somewhat the easy fiow of the
original. Less disturbing is the abbreviated repetition of Mariae Virginis
over sine morte.

At the foot of the cross Mary is the queen of martyrs. Although she
did not taste death there, yet so great, so deep was her pain, that no
martyr ever suffered like her. Rightly, therefore, is she awarded the
palm of martyrdom. Interwoven with this palm is the virginal lily. For
a Virgin has suffered, in whose heart there was never the least disorder
or shadow of sin and who is so exalted, so noble in her suffering precisely
because she bears all this innocently. The strength to do this she found
in gazing upon her dying Son, sub cruce Domini.

Let us also stand at the foot of the cross of Jesus together with
Mary, His Mother. Then we shall be victorious in all our struggles and,
should our life become a martyrdom, then we also shall obtain the palm
of victory. This sorrowful Mother prays for us always. And during to-
day's celebration of the sacred Mysteries Christ again makes available
for us the fruits of His Passion. Christ's sufferings are for us a source of
strength.

ST. MATTHEW, APOSTLE AND EVANGELIST
(September 21)

INTROIT (Ps. 36:30, 31)

1. Os justi meditabitur sapien- 1. The mouth of the just shall me-

tiam, 2. et lingua ejus loquetur ju- dilate wisdom, 2. and his tongue

St. Matthew, Apostle and Evangelist 445

■dicium: 3. lex Dei ejus in corde shall speak judgment: 3. the law of

ipsius. Ps. Noli aemulari in ma- his God is in his heart. Ps. Be not

lignantibus: * neque zelaveris fa- emulous of evildoers: * nor envy

.denies iniquitatem. them that work iniquity.

Matthew did not consider himself one of the righteous. He was a
publican and the friend of those who were regarded as sinners. But He
who is Justice itself, justified him, healed his soul (cf. Gospel of the
feast), and called him to be an Apostle and an Evangelist. Thereafter
lie wrote and taught what he had heard from the lips of eternal Wisdom.
He was privileged to announce the glad tidings of a saving Gospel.
T'rom him we learn of the judgment, of the judgment of his people and
•of every soul that resists grace; above all, the judgment at the end of
the world. His writings and teachings were to him life and truth. The
law of God was in his heart, and as the blood flows from the heart into
the veins, so the law of God was the force that enlivened all his actions.
Would that we might gaze into the heart of this saint and observe how
the grace of God changed it, ennobled it, and filled it with ardent love!

This saint calls to us from his celestial home: If in your daily lives
you perceive many who lead a life of sin and nevertheless seem to pros-
per and be happy, do not lose courage. God's wisdom still governs all
things; one day it will lay bare everything, and give victory to the just.

We immediately recognize the identical endings of the first and
third phrases. Upon closer investigation we discover that the melody
■over lex Dei ejus at the beginning of the third phrase is a somewhat ab-
breviated form of that over meditahitur sapi-(entiam). This creates a
parallelism between these two phrases, diverting attention from the
textual parallelism existing between the first and second phrases. In
fact, the second phrase with its range from high 6 b (the only one found
here) to low c, forms a certain contrast with the first and third phrases.
The tonic of the sixth mode (f) plays an important role in all the phrases.

Over sapientiam the principal and the secondary accents are short,
the following syllable in each instance having more notes. The groups
over (cor)-de ipsius might be divided into two divisions of three notes
each. The chords g and a would produce a more pronounced harmonic
effect. The rhythm 2+2-|-2, however, is more effective. Quiet, solem-
nity, clearness proper to "wisdom" characterize this song, filled as it is
with the peace that comes from God.

GRADUAL (Ps. Ill: 1, 2)

l.Beatus vir, qui timet Dominum: 1. Blessed is the man that feareth

2. in mandatis ejus cupit nimis. the Lord: 2. he shall delight exceed-

446 St. Matthew, Apostle and Evangelist

i^. 1. Polens in terra erit semen ingly in his commandments, jll. 1.
ejus: 2. generatio rectorum bene- His seed shall be mighty upon earth:
dicetur. 2. the generation of the righteous

shall be blessed.

The melody has comparatively few typical forms. We are acquainted
with the formula over erit semen from the Gradual of the Assumption
over (in)-clina aurem, and with benedicetur from Epiphany over orta est.
The very last group brings the corpus to a close. The resolved major
chord f a c, much favored by the fifth mode, is used a number of times
both in ascending and descending passages, brightening the entire mel-
ody. It seems that the ending over Dominum, and particularly the ca-
dence and the ascent over in (manddtis) ejus and (semen) ejus have
been borrowed from the first mode, the fourths over (cu)-pit nimis from
the third. For the rest, however, this Gradual has many characteristics
of its own. At the beginning g e f dis repeated a second and a third time;
only d had to be changed to /, since the second half of the phrase sets
in on high c. Before the first / over Dominum a pause for breathing will
have to be made, as well as after manddtis; likewise after the sixth note
of nimis, and in the verse after generatio. The cadence which closes terra
appears in an extended form over ejus, the groups immediately preced-
ing being repetitions of semen e-(jus).

The fear of God becomes a source of joy if it leads us to fulfill the
command of God in a practical way and to bear His yoke gladly. For the
Lord Himself has said: "My yoke is sweet and My burden is light"
(Matt, 11, 30). In fact, it becomes a fountain of blessing for all mankind.
What an immense spiritual family the Gospel of St. Matthew has ga-
thered about itself, what a veritable fountain of blessings has it revealedl
Through it numberless souls have become righteous (recti), have deserted
the crooked path of sin, have become just men, good characters, and
have thus merited God's blessing.

The ALLELUIA VERSE is the same as that on the feast of St.
Bartholomew (August 24); cf. also that of the Assumption (August 15).

OFFERTORY (Ps. 20: 4, 5)

1. Posuisti Domine in capite 1. 0 Lord, thou hast set on his

ejus coronam de lapide pretioso: 2. head a crown of precious stonesi

vitam petiit a te, et tribuisti ei, 2. he asked life of thee, and thou

alleluia. didst grant it to him, alleluia.

Many have borne a precious crown, only to lose it later. And even
if worn for many years, death finally snatched it from its owner. Whoever

St. Matthew, Apostle and Evangelist 447

is crowned by Thee, O Lord, remains crowned for all eternity. And com-
pared to Thy glory, all the gems of this world are but as dust. Thou
hast crowned Thy saint with immortal glory.

"He asked life of Thee." When Thou didst stand before the revenue
collector's desk and didst say to him: "Follow Me!" but one longing
burned in his heart: Away with the life I have led until now; I shall fol-
low Jesus! And Thou hast given him life, life with Thee; for many years
he was privileged to be the witness of Thy teaching and of Thy miracles,
and later, when he wrote his Gospel, all that he had seen and heard was
re-enacted in his soul. And Thy word: "He that shall lose his life for My
sake, shall find it" (Matt. 16: 25), gave him the incentive to shed his
blood for Thee and thus to attain life eternal, alleluia!

The melody was explained on Easter Monday.
COMMUNION (Ps. 20:6)

1. Magna est gloria ejus in sa- 1. His glory is great in thy sal-

lutari tuo: 2. gloriam et magnum vation: 2. glory and great beauty
decorem impones super eum, Domine. shall thou lay upon him, O Lord.

The song opens with a festal ring, expressing in its jubilation al-
most amazement over the glory prepared by God for His saint. In his
mind's eye the singer sees all the churches of the Catholic world in which
St. Matthew is venerated today. He beholds the solemnity with which
the Gospel written by the saint is read at the divine services. He beholds
in spirit all the sublime things that have been wrought in souls through
meditation upon this Gospel. Transcending this world, he gazes upon
the glory of heaven, and this forces him to cry out: Magna est gloria ejusl
But the Lord effected all this. This fact is stressed by the florid melody
over ^wo. The low e over tuo finds its antithesis in the high c over gloria.

In the second phrase the jubilant ring is somewhat subdued; rever-
ent admiration now dominates. The renown of the saint is one which
never ceases, a glory which never wanes. "Thou, 0 Lord, layest it upon
Him." What a tender preparation the accent over impones receives!
The honors of this world are but too often a burden. The glory of heaven
is refreshment and sweetness and bliss in God.

The gentle close over Domine seems to breathe the tender petition:
Lord, in Holy Communion Thou hast again become my salvation — be
Thou my eternal salvation, lead also me into Thy glory!

448 The Dedication of St. Michael the Archangel

THE DEDICATION OF ST. MICHAEL THE
ARCHANGEL
(September 29)

Originally this feast commemorated the anniversary of the dedi-
cation of a basilica to St. Michael.

INTROIT (Ps. 102:20)

1. Benedicite Dominum omnes 1. Bless theLord, all ye his Angels:

Angeli ejus: potentes virtute, qui you that are mighty in strength, and

Jacitis verhum ejus, 2. ad audien- execute his word, 2. hearkening to

dam vocem sermonum ejus. Ps. Bene- the voice of his orders. Ps. Bless the

die anima mea Domino: * et omnia Lord, 0 my soul: * and let all that

quae intra me sunt, nomini sancto is within me bless his holy name,
ejus.

The Introit opens with the psalm-intonation of the third mode
g a c c, and is repeated with variations over potentes virtü-(te), qui fdcitis
•ad audi-(endam), either at the beginning of the phrase or part of the
phrase. The interval of a fourth over (Ange)-li prepares us for the accent
of e-jus and the important melodic structure over this word. For there
is question here of His angels, those who have remained faithful to God.
They possess marvelous strength and virtue, and all this strength, their
entire being, they place in God's service. Lucifer, in his vain delusion, it
is true, cried: "I will not serve;" the good angels, however, are like the
stars. When God calls them, they answer: "We are here," and serve
Him with gladness. For to be allowed to serve God is their glory. This
they have learned from their intrepid leader, St. Michael. As soon as
God manifests His will in any manner whatever, they obey without
hesitation, without delay, without seeking the reasons. Ad audiendam
vocem: as soon as they know that God wills a thing, they carry the be-
hest into execution.

We now entreat and exhort the angelic spirits to praise the Lord.
And with one accord these countless legions render their hymn of praise
with a melody powerful, pure, and inspiring.

With such excellent guidance we now dare to direct our song heaven-
ward. The choir of angels sweeps us along with all that we have and
are, and all the graces and blessings that God has implanted in our
hearts impel us to join with them.

Over fdcitis verhum ejus, as well as over sermonum ejus, quiet two-
note groups are sung. Noteworthy, although not exceptional, is the fact

The Dedication of St. Michael the Archangel 449

that the principal and the secondary accents of audiendam have only
one note each, while the following syllable has several notes.
Festal joy characterizes the entire Introit.

GRADUAL (Ps. 102:20, 1)

1. Benedicite Dominum omnes 1. Bless the Lord, all you his

Angeli ejus: 2. potentes virtute, qui angels; 2. you that are mighty in

facitis verbum ejus. f. 1. Benedic strength, that do his ivill. li/'. 1. Bless

anima mea Dominum, 2. et omnia the Lord, O my soul: 2. and all that

interiora mea nomen sanctum ejus. is within me, bless his holy Name.

With slight differences the Gradual has the same text as the Introit.
Almost all the formulas of the melody are typical. The first half-phrase
occurred on the third Sunday of Lent, as likewise the entire second
phrase of the verse. Corpus and verse have the same florid closing ca-
dence over ejus, and the same extensive cadence at the close of the
first phrase over ejus and (Dömi)-num. In the corpus, (D6mi)-num and
(virtü)-te have the same endings, while the subsequent phrase in each
case begins with an interval of a fourth. In the verse (D6mi)-num and
(me)-a have a similar ending. The interval of a fifth over verbum is pe-
culiar to this Gradual.

ALLELUIA VERSE

1. Sancte Michael Archangele, 1. Holy Archangel Michael, de-

defende nos in praelio: 2. ut non fend us in the battle: 2. that we may
pereamus in tremendo judicio. not perish in the dreadful judg-

ment.

In this Alleluia, assignable to the eleventh century, we discern a
more clever motivation than that exhibited in the Alleluia-verse of
Pentecost and the third Sunday after Pentecost. Here the form is a,
b, b\ b.

The song has a ring like that of the clashing of swords. Its initial
motive begins with a sharp accent and then continues somewhat heavily.

In the second member, d ggf a becomes g dag c, in the third a bba d; and

after a relaxation g dag c recurs. Over praelio we have the same form as

over the third member. The address in apostrophe at the beginning
shows gradual development, is then followed by an intrusting defende.
The singer then sees himself drawn into battle, and extreme distress
forces from him the cry: ut non pereamus.

450 The Dedication of St. Michael the Archangel

He who cannot vindicate himself in the final judgment is lost for-
ever. Hence, O holy Michael, warrior of God and defender of souls, do
thou stand by us! Help us to conquer in the battle against the devil and
his host in this battle, which is daily, almost hourly, being waged against
us! "Do thou. Prince of the heavenly host, by the power of God thrust
down into hell Satan and all the wicked spirits who wander through the
world seeking the ruin of souls!"

Sancte Michael and tremendo judicio have the same melody. Over
alleluia it appears in a simplified form, no doubt, because the word has
only four syllables. This melody is cleverly adapted to the Alleluia on
the Commemoration of St. Paul (June 30) ; there it beseeches the Apostle
of the gentiles for his powerful intercession.

The ancient manuscripts assign to today's feast a typical melody
of the fourth mode with the text Lauddte Deum omnes Angeli ejus.

OFFERTORY (Apoc. 8: 3, 4)

1. Stetit Angelus juxta aram 1. An Angel stood near the altar

templi, 2. hahens thuribulum au- of the temple, 2. having a golden

reum in manu sua: 3. et data sunt censer in his hand: 3. and there was

ei incensa multa: 4. et ascendit given to him much incense: 4. and

fumus aromatum in eonspectu Dei, the smoke of the perfumes ascended

5. alleluia. before God, 5. alleluia.

1. An angel is standing before the altar of God when in spirit we
bring our gifts to the altar to add them to the sacrificial gifts of the
priest. In a mute way our gifts say, as once said St. Michael: "Who is
like God!" They acknowledge God's infinite perfection and our absolute
dependence upon Him. Would that we might offer our gifts with the pur-
ity and devotion of the holy angels!

In the first phrase almost every word with any prolonged melody
conveys something special to us, particularly the word Angelus.

2. The angel had a censer of great value. The gift we chanters
bring, our compositions and their rendition, ought also to have artistic
value. The diminished chord over hahens receives its natural resolution
in the subsequent/. In its first half aurem resembles templi; in its second
half, aram of the first phrase. The motive over in manu sua, which we
hear again at the end of the third and fourth phrases, has a truly festive
ring.

3. "There was given to him much incense." Surely it would be
ignoble if we were to be niggardly with God. Ei is a condensed form of
templi.

The Dedication of St. Michael the Archangel 451

4. Practically at the same time that we are singing this phrase,
clouds of incense are ascending at the altar during a solemn high Mass.
Thus song and liturgical action are joined. The melody graphically
describes how the sweet-smelling incense is wafted upward, how at the
top of the canopy the clouds disperse and slowly settle, only to be borne
aloft again by new clouds. From the angel's golden censer came rays of
heat and the glow of fire. In a similar manner the soul of the creative or
imitative artist must glow. That which proceeds from the soul must
ascend upward to the presence of God, must seek to glorify Him. Only
then will our chant lift the hearts of the faithful aloft to God. May the
sentiment of the hymn for Terce be verified in us: Flammescat igne
Caritas, accendat ardor proximos — "Let love light up our mortal frame,
till others catch the living flame."

Over ascendit the pressus on c, c, f, a, form the points between
which the melody undulates. A crescendo should develop here which
reaches its summit in the last group before -dit. The following are to be
sung in two-note groups: eg, dc, dc, da, ga, f. Fumus resembles aram,

while aromatum is like templi.

5. The second group of alleluia reminds us of the motive over
templi.

The fact that it has nine members ending on the tonic and not one
on the dominant (a) detracts somewhat from the possibilities of the
piece.

Today's Offertory gives the impression that it belongs to the sec-
ond (plagal) mode.

This melody is also sung on the feast of All Saints to the text Jus-
torum dnimae, and, with the same text, in the third Mass for several
Martyrs; likewise in the Mass for Deliverance in Time of Pestilence to
the text Stetit poniifex, and its first half on the feast of St. Peter's Chair
at Rome (January 18) to the text Tu es Petrus. In some places it is sung
on the feast of St. Vincent de Paul (July 19) to the text Inclinet.

The angel stood very near to the altar. Formerly that also was the
place assigned to the singers. If in many instances they are now phy-
sically distant from the altar, they should strive the more to be very
near it in spirit.

COMMUNION (Dan. 3: 58)

1. Benedicite omnes Angeli Do- 1. All ye Angels of the Lord, hless

minum: 2. hymnum dicite, et su- the Lord: 2. sing a hymn, and exalt
perexaltate eum in saecula. him above all forever.

452 The Holy Guardian Angels

The Communion repeats the mode and content of the Introit and
the Gradual. Again and again the choirs of angels are exhorted to the
praise of God. A single summons does not suffice. The prophet is not
content simply to say, "Praise the Lord," but he cries, "Sing a song and
exalt him above all forever." Today this superexaltdte contains a special
signification. Lucifer had cried, "I will ascend into heaven, I will exalt
my throne above the stars of God" (Isa. 14: 13); but today the angels
sing, "How art thou fallen, 0 Lucifer, who didst arise in the morning. . . .
Thou wast brought down to hell, into the depth of the pit" (Isa. 14: 12,
15). And without ceasing they proclaim with Michael: "Who is like God!"

The melody, indeed, is not inspired by this thought; it manifests a
dignified reserve. Benedicite begins with a reverential awe and descends
to low d before the following interval of a fourth. The same occurred
twice in the foregoing Gradual. After this, however, a greater energy
manifests itself. Hymnum dicite repeats the melody of omnes Angeli.
At the close, the significant in saecula is well accented and receives a
melody florid as no other. It has, nevertheless, the same range, the
same intervals, and above all the same solemn spirit as the beginning.

The fact that our Lord deigned to make us partakers of the Bread
of Angels in Holy Communion, should impart special consolation to us
when exhorting the angelic spirits to continue their never-ending Sanctus,
Sanctusl

THE HOLY GUARDIAN ANGELS

(October 2; in many churches on the Sunday
nearest September 1)

This feast was extended to the universal Church in 1670.

The INTROIT and COMMUNION are identical with those of
the feast of St. Michael; the GRADUAL, with that of the first Sunday
in Lent.

ALLELUIA VERSE (Ps. 102: 21)

1. Benedicite Domino omnes 1. Bless the Lord, all ye his hosts:

virtutes ejus: 2. ministri ejus, 3. qui 2. you ministers of his 3. that do
facitis voluntatem ejus. his will.

In four different instances the angels are exhorted today to praise
the Lord. The Alleluia-verse uses as its means the typical melody of the
fourth mode, which we heard for the first time on the third Sunday of
Advent.

The Most Holy Rosary of the Blessed Virgin Mary 453

In the text the angels are addressed as a heavenly host, as servants
of God. But in His infinite goodness, God has appointed those who
always serve Him to be our servants also, surely a signal honor and
distinction. To each of us He addresses the words of today's Lesson:
"I will send My Angel, who shall go before thee, and keep thee in thy
journey, and bring thee into the place that I have prepared." In union
with our guardian angels and all the choirs of angels, we join in offering
a hymn of thanksgiving for this signal grace. With what alacrity they
fulfill the Benedicite Domino we address to them! And what solicitude
they manifest to see that we arrive at that goal which God intended for
us when he said: "I go to prepare a place for you." They make it their
concern that we, like themselves, should become servants of God, pre-
pared to carry out His every behest; that we, like themselves, should
lead a spotless life, singing to God a pure song, so that one day we be
allowed to join with them in an unending Alleluia. Their protection is
our glory and our hope. For they belong to a victorious host (virtutes),
fighting the battles of God; against them all the forces of hell cannot pre-
vail.

OFFERTORY (Ps. 102: 20, 21)

1. Benedicite Dominum omnes 1. Bless the Lord, all ye his

Angeli ejus: 2. ministri ejus, qui angels: 2. you ministers of his that

facitis verhum ejus, 3. ad audien- execute his word, 3. hearkening to

dam vocem sermonum ejus. the voice of his orders.

The Offertory has almost the same text as the Introit and the
Alleluia- verse. The melody of the first two members is practically iden-
tical with that of the Offertory Benedicam Dominum for Monday after
the second Sunday in Lent. The rest, however, adheres faithfully to
the Offertory of Passion Sunday; today's shorter text has been adapted
to the original with extreme cleverness. The whole demands a lively,
energetic rendition.

THE MOST HOLY ROSARY OF THE

BLESSED VIRGIN MARY

(October 7)

The INTROIT and the GRADUAL have been taken from the
feast of the Assumption, except that in the Introit the word Assump-
tione is replaced by Solemnitate.

454 The Most Holy Rosary of the Blessed Virgin Mary

ALLELUIA VERSE

1. Solemnitas gloriosae Virginis 1. This is the solemnity of the

Mariae, ex semine Ahrahae, 2. or- glorious Virgin Mary, of the race

tae de tribu Juda, 3. clara ex stirpe of Abraham, 2. of the tribe of Juda,

David. 3. of the illustrious family of David.

Here, in a most abbreviated form, is adduced the genealogy of the
"Queen" of the Most Holy Rosary. Compare it with the Alleluia- verse
for the feast of St. Joachim and the Communion for the solemnity of
St. Joseph.

The energetic melody was explained on the feast of Corpus Christi.
Used here, it can embellish the text, but not interpret it.

OFFERTORY (Ecclus. 24: 25, 38, 17)

1. In me gratia omnis viae et 1. In me is all grace of the way

veritotis, 2. in me omnis spes vitae and of truth, 2. in me is all hope of

et virtutis: 3. ego quasi rosa plan- life and virtue: 3. as a rose planted

lata super rivos aquarum fructi- by the water-brooks have I budded

ficavi. forth.

The melody of the first and second phrases is taken from the feast
of the Purification, due perhaps to the word gratia, which occurs in both
Ofifertories. In content also the two texts are closely related. Diffusa est
seems to be the theme which is developed in the Offertory In me. It tells
us wherein the plenitude of blessings which has been poured out upon
Mary consists. The adaptation of the melody is extremely ingenious.
Textually omnis in the first phrase belongs to the preceding gratia, just
as in the second phrase we have omnis spes. The melody, however, would
combine omnis and viae. Mary can indeed say of herself: In me is all
grace of life; but also: In me is the grace of full, of entire life.

The third phrase has a construction proper to itself, even though it
bears some resemblance to already existing melodies. The leading
thought of the feast receives here a marvellous development. The Offer-
tory of Palm Sunday with dederunt and aceto served most probably as a
model for the two final phrase-members.

Mary possesses "all grace." The mysteries of the Rosary further
us on the "way of truth," the ideal of moral perfection, and offer us the
means of realizing this ideal. We can, therefore, in truth say that Mary

The Most Holy Rosary of the Blessed Virgin Mary 455

is ''all hope of life and of virtue." Whoever imitates her, his soul will
blossom like the rose and bear fruit for eternal life.
Musica sacra, 45, 213 ff.

COMMUNION (Ecclus. 39: 19)

1. Florete flores quasi lilium, et 1. Send forth flowers, as the lily,

date odorem, et frondete in gratiam: and yield a smell, and bring forth
2. collaudate canticum, et bene- leaves in grace: 2. and praise with
dicite Dominum in operibus suis. canticles, and bless the Lord in his

works.

The melody is taken from the Communion Confunddntur superbi of
the Mass Loquebar (for a Virgin Martyr) ; its phrasing, however, is not
entirely happy. In the original, the first phrase treats of the godless ones
who should be confounded and closes with the melody which we here
have over odorem. In juste (here lilium) expresses just anger over the
wrong that has been perpetrated on the saint by her persecutors. Out
of this dark and somber background rises the beautiful figure of a Vir-
gin and Martyr with the words Ego autem (here el frondete). In the an-
cient manuscripts the melody is assigned to the feast of St. Cecilia. The
saint rises above all that is earthly, takes as it were her flight to heaven,
and pledges immutable fidelity to the Lord's commandments. This
magnificent line is interrupted on the feast of the Holy Rosary by a
large pause after gratiam. The motive in the original stands over in
manddtis but here begins a second phrase over collaudate. This, as the
Gregoriusblatt (44, 65) remarks, is obviously a mistake. Abstracting from
this, the Offertory with its new text can be made extremely effective.
The clivis and torculus over the closing syllables of lilium, gratiam, and
Dominum are as pleasing as flower-buds, while collaudate is expressive
of true joy.

By "flowers" (flores) we are, no doubt, to understand the mysteries
of the Lord and His blessed Mother. In quiet meditation they will
blossom forth, vivifying and invigorating our hearts. They will encour-
age us to praise the Lord, to glorify His works, and all that "the only-
begotten Son by His life, death, and resurrection hath purchased for
us" (cf. the Collect). They should glorify the deeds which the Lord has
wrought upon His Mother, the victories of Lepanto and Temesvar, the
marvels of grace in every individual soul, and not least, the work of re-
demption which He has renewed today in the Sacrifice and in the Eu-
charistie Banquet — for we are singing a Communion song.

Musica sacra, 45, 237 ff.

456 The Maternity of the Most Blessed Virgin Mary

THE MATERNITY OF THE MOST BLESSED

VIRGIN MARY

(October 11)

To counteract the false teaching of Nestorious, the Council of
Ephesus in 431 declared and defined that Mary, of whom Jesus was
born, is truly the Mother of God. As a fitting close to the fifteenth-cen-
tenary jubilee of this Council, Pius XI in 1933 extended the feast of the
Maternity of the most Blessed Virgin Mary to the universal Church,
thus according this article of faith solemn recognition in the liturgy also.

INTROIT (Is. 7: 14)

1. Ecce, Virgo concipiet, et pariet 1. Behold, a Virgin shall conceive,

filium et vocdbitur nomen eius Em- and bring forth a son, and his
manuel. Ps. Cantate Domino can- name shall he called Emmanuel. Ps.
ticum novum, * quia mirahilia fecit. Sing ye to the Lord a new canticle: *

for he hath done wonderful things.

There are miracles which the omnipotence of God repeats now and
then in the course of time. But the miracle He wrought in Mary, combin-
ing in her the dignity of virginity with that of maternal fecundity, was
a thing so singular and exceptional that she alone was deemed worthy
of it, and by it was exalted above all other creatures. As the heavenly
Father offered His only-begotten Son for the world, so Mary presents
to us in human form this only-begotten Son of God, the true Emmanuel
— God with us. It is meet, therefore, that we sing a new canticle to the
Lord.

The text of the antiphon forms the Communion for the fourth Sun-
day of Advent (q.v.). The psalm- verse is the same as that of the Introit
for the third Mass on Christmas.

The melody employs various motives. Noticeable resemblance
exists between concipiet and cor meum in the Introit Tibi dixit of the
Tuesday after the second Sunday of Lent. Filium and et vocdbitur are
practically the same as Domine and et sancti of the Introit Sacerdotes tui.
Eius resembles mea in the Introit Ego clamdvi of Tuesday after the third
Sunday of Lent, while Emmanuel corresponds to protege me of the same
Introit.

GRADUAL (Isa. 11: 1, 2)

1. Egredietur virga de radice 1. There shall come forth a rod

Jesse, 2. et flos de radice eius as- out of the root of Jesse, 2, and a

The Maternity of the Most Blessed Virgin Mary 457

cendet. j^. Et requiescet super eum flower shall rise up out of this root.
Spiritus Domini. 'S/. And the Spirit of the Lord shall

rest upon Him.

"My memory is unto everlasting generations." These words, taken
from the Lesson which precedes, are well ascribed to Mary since, ac-
cording to today's Communion, she bore the Son of the eternal Father
in her womb. Centuries and milleniums sought her and longed for her;
she was the "rod" from which should blossom forth the most beautiful
"flower." In another simile the Lesson refers to her as the "vine" which
produces a "pleasant odor." The Spirit of God rests over the fruit of her
womb. And in a solemn moment of some future day her Son will ex-
claim: "The Spirit of the Lord is upon Me. He hath sent Me to preach
to the meek, to heal the contrite of heart." This Spirit of God rests over
Him and remains in Him because the divine and human nature have
been intimately combined in His person and will never be separated.
This thought is suggested by the rich melody over requiescet super eum.

The melody is original to the Gradual of the nineteenth Sunday
after Pentecost (q.v.). There the corpus has only one phrase, while the
verse has two. Today, however, in accordance with the import of the
text, the above division is reversed. A happy adaptation brings flos
into pleasing prominence. The original, however, emphasizes the word-
accent at the end of the corpus more effectively than is the case today.
The initial motive over eum is first developed and its closing motive then
abbreviated over (Dömi)-ni.

ALLELUIA VERSE

1. Virgo Dei Genitrix, quern to- 1.0 Virgin mother of God, he

tus non capit orbis, 2. in tua se whom the whole world is unable to
clausit viscera factus homo. contain, 2. being made man, en-

closed himself in thy womb.

The Alleluia text is the same as that of the Gradual verse on the
feast of the Assumption (q.v.). In the latter the word Virgo is given
melodic prominence, while here the word Genitrix is characterized with
particular splendor and reverential awe. The melody over orbis in tua
of the Assumption corresponds to that over totus non capit of today. In
reality, however, the complete melody for today is taken from the
Alleluia Leva in circuitu for the feast of Mary, Mediatrix of all graces:
The word-accents are very effective. The first member of each phrase
is richly developed and strongly accents the third over the dominant,
while the second member of each phrase is simpler and more quietly

458 The Maternity of the Most Blessed Virgin Mary

sustained. The mehsma over Geni- is repeated over -trix. The latter also
employs a much-used thesis of the first mode. The awe and amazement
depicted over Genitrix continues to grow over clausit. So exalted, so in-
conceivable, and yet so sweet is the mystery that lies hidden in the soul
of the Virgin Mother.

Alleluia with its joyful ascending movement is also sung on the
feast of the Seven Holy Founders of the Order of Servites (Feb. 12).
The juhilus has an arsis and a thesis in each of its members.

OFFERTORY (Matt. 1: 18)

1. Cum esset desponsata Mater 1. When Mary, the Mother of

ejus Maria Joseph, 2. inventa est Jesus was espoused to Joseph, 2.
in utero hahens de Spiritu Sancto. she was found with child of the

Holy Ghost.

Relative to their melodies, the following passages from today's
Offertory and that of Quinquagesima Sunday should be compared:
desponsata and Benedictus es, Maria Joseph and (justificati)-6nes tuas,
inventa est and in Idbiis meis, in utero and judicia, Spi-(ritu) and (6)-ris,
Sancto and tui. Thus the phrases whose melody is not founded on that
of the Offertory of Quinquagesima Sunday are: Cum esses, mater ejus,
and hahens.

The adaptation of the melody is especially happy in this, that it
emphasizes the dignity and honor accorded St. Joseph in becoming the
spouse and protector of the Mother of God. St. Joseph also merits our
gratitude for the faith, although severely tested, he had in the Blessed
Virgin and for the love he bore her. According to the text, however, the
second phrase which emphasizes the divine source of Mary's maternity
should be stressed. "I am from on high," our blessed Lord says. And
this applies not only to His divine nature but to His human nature as
well, insofar as the genesis of the latter is due to the mysterious workings
of the Holy Ghost. The dictum of St. Bede^ nevertheless remains true:
**Just as Christ is the Son of God and consubstantial with the Father,
so is He also the Son of Mary and consubstantial with His Mother.
Conceived in her virgin womb, He took upon Himself human flesh only
from the body of His Mother."

COMMUNION

The Communion is the same as that on the feast of the Visitation.
We have received the Son of the eternal Father into our hearts and

1 Commentary to Chapter II of St. Luke, Book IV, Chapter 48.

St. Luke, Evangelist — SS. Simon and Jude, Apostles 459

so accepted the invitation of Mary in today's Lesson: "Come over to
me, all ye that desire me, and be filled with my fruits." The same Lesson
closes with the words: ''They that explain me shall have life everlasting."
This promise of the eternal Truth and^ — in the sense of the Liturgy — of
the Mother of God should be a source of inspiration and consolation to
all singers. The opportunities to sing the praises and virtues of Mary
are abundant. Let us make use of them to show our ever-increasing awe
and reverence for her exalted dignity as Mother of God, and to chant
with ever-renewed love and gratitude the praises of her whom the Les-
son calls "the Mother of fair love," who possesses "all grace of the way
and of the truth. . .all hope of life and virtue."

ST. LUKE, EVANGELIST
(October 18)

The INTROIT and the OFFERTORY are the same as those on
the feast of St. Andrew.

GRADUAL (Ps. 18: 5, 2)

1. In omnem ten am exivit sonus 1. Their sound went forth into

eorum: 2. et in fines orhis terrae all the earth: 2. and their words to
verba eorum. S'. 1. Caeli enarrant the ends of the world. S^. 1. The
gloriam Dei: 2. et opera manuum heavens show forth the glory of God:
ejus annuntiat firmamentum. 2. and the firmament declareth the

work of his hands.

This melody belongs to the type explained on the first Sunday of
Lent. Its first phrase and first half of the second phrase are very closely
related to the somewhat freer form found in the first and second phrases
in the first Mass for Christmas. The text of the Offertory was explained
on the feast of St. James.

The ALLELUIA VERSE is the same as that on the feast of St.
James.

The COMMUNION is the same as that on the feast of St. Matthias.

SS. SIMON AND JUDE, APOSTLES

This feast, occurring on October 28, is not celebrated on a Sunday
if it is only of the second class, since the feast of Christ the King falls
upon the last Sunday of October.

460 Kingship of Our Lord Jesus Christ

The INTROIT is the same as that on the feast of St. Andrew; the
GRADUAL as that on the feast of SS. Peter and Paul. The ALLELUIA
VERSE has the typical melody of the eighth mode. The OFFERTORY
is the same as that on the feast of St. James, the COMMUNION as
that on the feast of St. Matthias.

* * * *

KINGSHIP OF OUR LORD JESUS CHRIST
(Last Sunday in October)

Pope Pius XI brought the Jubilee Year of 1925 to a close with the
introduction of this new feast. It was to be a continual reminder to the
world of Christ's inalienable regal privileges, belonging to Him by virtue
of His divine Sonship and His office as Redeemer. It was intended to
bring about a subjection of all nations and individuals to the sweet yoke
of Christ.

Old melodies were fitted to the texts of this new feast.

INTROIT (Apoc. 5: 12; 1: 6)

1. Dignus est Agnus, qui occisus 1. The Lamb that was slain is

est, accipere virtutem, et divinita- worthy to receive power and di-

tem, et sapientiam, et fortitudinem, vinit^ and wisdom and strength and

et honorem. 2. Ipsi gloria et im- honor. 2. To him be glory and em-

perium in saecula saeculorum. Ps. pire forever and ever. Ps. Give to

Deus, judicium tuum Regi da: * the King thy judgment, 0 God'. *

et justitiam Filio Regis. and thy justice unto the King's Son.

Mankind has indeed witnessed numerous triumphs of the greatest
solemnity. And although it seemed that their splendor could not be
surpassed, yet other celebrations were held that eclipsed those that
preceded. These also had their limitations, since they were earthly fes-
tivals. But when heaven celebrates its feasts, the feasts of its God,
nothing is lacking, everything is perfect. There the homage of hearts
entirely submissive becomes the homage of adoration and praise of an
infinite Being and the glorification of a deed which God alone was able
to perform. Of this homage, this adoration, this praise, the Apocalypse
speaks in the twelfth verse of the fifth chapter and in the sixth verse
of the first chapter. Ten thousand times ten thousand angels pay their
respects, crying with a loud voice: "The Lamb that was slain is worthy
to receive power and divinity and wisdom and strength and honor."
Because Christ the Lamb was slain. He has earned this honor. No one
has ever been so humiliated, no one has ever borne sorrow so great and

Kingship of Our Lord Jesus Christ 461

deep, as the Lamb of God in His voluntary sacrificial death. For all this
torture and pain, for all this derision and contempt, the hosts of heaven
now sing a pean of glory to the Lamb, and this song will resound unto
endless ages. It is directed to Him whom the Father has appointed ab-
solute ruler, to the Son of the King, to the Son of God, to whom He has
intrusted all judgment.

Today, in the Introit of the Mass, the entire earth may also join in
this song. Today we are privileged to appear before the Lamb of God,
paying our homage and offering our adoration.

The vigorous text with its accents might have lent itself to a bril-
liant composition. Consider the marvelous effect produced by Handel
in his Messias with these v/ords! If one were satisfied with the mere adap-
tation of an existing melody, a much more brilliant one might have been
found in the profuse wealth of the ancient chants. The melody chosen,
it is true, has a festal ring; but it is dominated by a guarded reverence,
at least in its first phrase, which prefers seconds and thirds. Only in the
second phrase, in which greater power is also discerned in the text, are
the intervals extended to a thrice-repeated fourth. Here the melody for
the first time becomes impressive. But he who is acquainted with plain-
song, especially with the ferial chants of Lent, meets here many familiar
passages; he finds the original in the Introit Dum sandificätus füero,
sung 'on the Wednesday after the fourth Sunday in Lent, which an-
nounces to those to be baptized their cleansing through the pouring of
clean water and the gift of a new Spirit.

Small variations result from the different length, accent, and mean-
ing of the text; thus the stressing of Dignus and Imperium. The signifi-
cant occisus est is fittingly brought to the fore; if divinitdtem bears a
similar melody, this may serve to remind us that the Lamb of God re-
ceives these honors precisely because He has gone to a sacrificial death.
With Ipsi gloria the rendition ought to be more lively and festal. The
original reaches its summit at mundabimini — "you shall be cleansed."
On account of today's short text, the melody of the final phrase of the
original — over et dabo voMs spiritum novum. — is wanting; in place of it
we find over saeculorum the closing cadence of the Introit of the feast
of SS. Cyriacus, Largus, and Smaragdus (August 8).

GRADUAL (Ps. 71: 8, 11)

1. Dominabitur a mari usque ad 1. He shall rule from sea to sea,

mare, 2. et a flumine usque ad ter- 2. and from the river unto the ends

mines orbis terrarum. i\ 1. Et of the earth, i'. 1. And all kings of

adorabunt eum omnes reges terrae: the earth shall adore him: 2. all

2. omnes Gentes servient ei. nations shall do him service.

462 Kingship of Our Lord Jesus Christ

Before the introduction of this special feast to commemorate the
kingship of Christ, Epiphany was regarded as the feast of Christ the
King. Since the chants were to be borrowed from other feasts, it was
only natural to take them from Epiphany, This, beyond doubt, explains
the fact that the Gradual of Epiphany has been carried over to the new
feast, note for note. Another reason may be seen in this, that the text
of the Gradual of the new feast and of the second half of the Offertory
of Epiphany correspond exactly. But the adaptation evidences a deli-
cate sense for rhythm and truth of expression.

Special attention ought to be given to the beginning and close of
the verse. At Epiphany the melody begins immediately with an interval
of a fifth. There the exhortation Surge — "Arise and be enlightened!" —
wishes to be as impressive as possible. We find the word-accent on the
very first syllable. Today it occurs oijly on the fourth syllable, being
introduced by a series of low notes. This constitutes the only feature
not borrowed immediately from the Gradual of Epiphany. At Epiphany
orta est with its interval of a fourth might remind one of the flaring up
of divine splendor. We do not find this interval over the text (servient)
ei — "They shall do him service"- — the reason perhaps being that instead
of the dactyl orta est, the melody in the present instance has at its dis-
posal only the spondee ei.

These may appear small matters. But he who possesses a sense for
the beautiful flow of melody and, above all, for truth of expression, will
appreciate them. Things such as these give the original its artistic value.
Perhaps aurum, which begins with a fourth, and which in the original
hints at the value of the gift, should have been slightly altered in the
adaptation. No doubt the insignificant et is surprised at the prominence
that has been given it.

One is tempted to ask whether the magnificently swelling melody,
which over illumindre portrays the waxing of the light from the first
ray of morning to the full glare of noonday, fits well with the quiet text
(et adordhunt) eum.

But our song cannot be joyous enough, festal enough, if we think
of those who gather from all the ends of the world in a mighty, invisible
stream to do homage on their knees to Christ their King. They realize
that the rule of this King concerns but their welfare, and that in them-
selves alone have the words of today's Lesson been verified. For it is
God the Father "who hath made us worthy to be partakers of the lot of
the saints in light: who hath delivered us from the power of darkness,
and hath translated us into the kingdom of the Son of his love, in whom
we have redemption through His blood, the remission of sins" (Coloss.
1, 12 f.).

Kingship of Our Lord Jesus Christ 463

In an extended form the initial motive of Dominabitur returns over
a mari usque, and in its original form at the close of terrarum. The re-
solved descending major chord c-a-f over terminos and (terra j-rum
gives the piece a bright ring. In the verse the descending c a / is twice
extended to d a f over eum. This descent may be looked upon as a sym-
bol of adoration.

ALLELUIA VERSE (Dan. 7: 14)

1. Potestas ejus, potestas aeterna, 1. His power is an everlasting

quae non auferetur: 2. et regnum power, that shall not be taken away:
ejus, quod non corrumpetur. 2. and his kingdom that shall not

be destroyed.

The melody agrees exactly with that of the second Alleluia-verse
for the fourth Sunday after Easter.

In the following schema we give in the first place the text of the
Sunday just mentioned, and in the second that of the new feast, indi-
cating how the latter agrees with the original melody:

1. Christus resiirgens ex m6rtuis=

2. Potestas ejus potestas aeterna,

1. jam non möritur: — 2. quae non auferetur:

1. mors Uli ultra non dominabitur =

2. et regnum ejus, quod non corrumpetur.

Is it, perhaps, that the adaptation of non moritur and non domina-
bitur to non auferetur and non corrumpetur has led to the borrowing of
the entire melody? For both verses have a related thought-content and
portray similar sentiments. The one speaks of the fullness of life which,
has to fear death no more; the other of the plenitude of power which
none can diminish, which can neither weaken nor collapse. And in the
Credo we sing: Cujus regni non erit finis — "His kingdom shall have no
end."

In the original the second phrase has a richly developed melisma
over the word mors. Here it is placed over the insignificant et. This
doubtless causes difficulties in some minds and suggests the question:
Would it not have been possible, since it was a matter of choice, to se-
lect a different melody and thus have avoided this defect?

But, really, the matter is not so serious, for the melody exhibits
remarkable phrasing. We see that even chants of the classical period do
not shrink from embellishing a word like et with a florid melisma, for
example the Alleluia for the fifth Sunday after Pentecost. Above all we

464 Kingship of Our Lord Jesus Christ

are to grasp this thought: "Christ's power is invincible." This is made
the easier, since the second phrase continues in a sort of parallelism the
thought already clearly expressed in the first phrase. Hence this et
should also be sung with the joy of victory. Like the original, the mel-
ody over mors is a song of triumph coming from the lips of the "the
Prince of life." Quod non corrumpetur repeats Alleluia with its juhilus.

The TRACT has the typical form. During the Paschal season, the
ALLELUIA is taken from the Mass for the feast of the Crown of Thorns,
celebrated on the Friday after Ash Wednesday; in the thirteenth cen-
tury it was sung to the text Qui confidunt.

OFFERTORY (Ps. 2:8)

1. Postula a me, et dabo tibi 1. Ask of me, and I will give thee

Gentes hereditatem tuam, 2. et pos- the gentiles for thine inheritance, 2.
sessionem tuam terminos terrae. and the uttermost parts of the earth

for thy possession.

Coming from the lips of anyone else, these words would be pre-
sumptuous, a promise which no man could fulfill. And even when oc-
casionally the then known world had to bow to a single sovereign,
many years did not elapse before everything again fell into ruins. God
alone has a right to speak these words, and God alone can bring their
promise to completion. He will found a kingdom which, as we may infer
from the preceding chants, will have limits neither of space nor of time.

Furthermore, Christ alone has the right to express such a desire
(Postula). For He is the Son of God by essence, and the fidelity with
which He fulfilled the work His Father gave Him to perform assures
Him of an eternal reign.

The melody is reminiscent of chants we hear at Christmastide.
Quite probably the beginning of the Offertory of the third Mass for
Christmas, with its mystic obscurity and its reserve, in contrast to the
powerful text: "Thine are the heavens, and Thine is the earth," served
as a model for the first phrase. Here we call to mind the saying of Adal-
bert Stifter: "That which is truly great does not trumpet forth; it exists
and thus exerts its influence." The two Offertory texts express related
thoughts. Beginning with haereditdtem we hear the melody from the
Offertory of the Christmas Midnight Mass over the words exsultet terra:
"Let the earth be glad before the face of the Lord, because He cometh."
Thus today's Offertory makes clear to us the words of the heavenly
Father concerning Christmas joy; adding thereto with tender voice the
message of that peace for which the subsequent Secret prays in particu-
lar. The most potent reason, however, for this universal reign of Christ

Kingship of Our Lord Jesus Christ 465

is given in the Preface in these words: Thou "didst anoint with the oil
of gladness Thine only-begotten Son, our Lord Jesus Christ, the eternal
Priest and universal King."

After Gentes a half pause is indicated. Considering the text, one
should prefer a greater pause after a me; thus the exhortation Postula
and the promise dabo would be more effectually separated. The melody
of the original, however, demanded a different grouping. The fact that
haereditatem recites on e, and not like the original on /, produces a pleas-
ing effect. The notes over Postula, which begin the Offertory for Sexa-
gesima Sunday, are the only ones which do not have the sound of Christ-
mas about them.

The whole should portray the dignity and solemnity of the words
of the heavenly Father; dynamic climaxes should not be wanting, es-
pecially over possessionem tuam.

COMMUNION (Ps. 28: 10, 11)

Sedehit Dominus Rex in aeter- The Lord shall sit king forever;

num; Dominus henedicat populo the Lord will hless his people with
suo in pace. peace.

In the Offertory we were reminded of the Christmas chants. With
its melody the Communion carries us back to the preparation for that
great feast. Its very first word repeats the melody of the Communion of
Ember Saturday in Advent. The rest employs the melody of the Com-
munion of Ember Friday in Advent from sancti ejus on with slight varia-
tions. Here again an inner relationship exists between the two texts.
The Communion of Advent speaks of the Parousia, when the Lord will
return in glory, bringing all His saints with Him. Today's Communion
contemplates the Lord sitting upon His throne, which will never be
shaken, which will stand forever. The word aeternum receives melodic
prominence. The Lord blesses His people. As the Preface says. He pre-
sents them with "a kingdom of truth and life, a kingdom of holiness
and grace, a kingdom of justice, love, and peace." In the holy Sacrifice
He has blessed His people with all heavenly blessings and graces; He
has given Himself to His people in the Sacrificial Banquet. And every
Communion acts as a preparation for eternal union with God, and gives
an anticipatory taste of that eternal peace with which Christ the King
will favor those who, as the Postcommunion says, have battled with
Him and conquered with Him. He will fulfill His promise: "To him that
shall overcome, I will give to sit with Me on My throne; as I have also
overcome, and am set down with My Father on His throne" (Apoc. 3:
21).

466 All Saints Day

Of all this the melody sings simply and modestly, without display,
without agitation, without any great development. The plain, rhythmic
torculi, which lift the middle note an interval of a second, strengthen
this impression. It is the song of the King of peace.

The chants of this new feast betray throughout adaptations of
older melodies. This should not, however, spoil our joy in singing them.
Each of them is like a new stanza added to a beloved old song, awaken-
ing memories of the most beautiful seasons of the liturgical year.

ALL SAINTS DAY
(November 1)

"All Saints is a feast of exalted joy; a memorial day dedicated by
the Church militant to the honor of its triumphant members in heaven,
to its own welfare and consolation. It is a feast full of unrestrained jubi-
lation and thanksgiving. Wide horizons unfold themselves before the
meditating eye, presenting views similar to those seen by the inspired,
heaven-rapt disciple on Patmos in the golden depths of eternity. Peoples,
nations, tongues, innumerable hosts of men, all and each of them a
thought of God, a picture of God, a world, a marvel of divine creative
power, of divine redemptive love and wisdom. All perfect and trans-
figured, illumined by the sun of eternal bliss, surrounded by the rays of
glory emanating from God's sublime majesty and from the throne of
the Lamb. All joined in one immense family of God, members of one
Body. The most sublime and glorious ideal realized in all of them:
Christ in them, God in His Christ, God all in all" (C. O., 50, 147).

Only in the ninth century was this feast definitely introduced into
the Church. Hence we ought not wonder if we find no references to it
in the most ancient manuscripts of plainsong. The chants have been
borrowed in part from older feasts;^ some parts, like the Alleluia and the
Communion, have been composed in the classical style of plainsong.

It is the feast of All Saints. Scarcely another feast brings out the
truth so forcibly, that God is the Sun from which emanate all those rays
we admire in the saints. Already in the Invitatory for Matins the Church
sang: "Come, let us adore the King of kings, for He is the Crown of all
the saints."

1 c. o., 50. 147.

All Saints Day 467

INTROIT

1. Gaudeamus omnes in Domino, 1. Let us all rejoice in the Lord,

diem festum celehrantes suh honore celebrating a festival day in honor

Sanctorum omnium: 2. de quorum of all the saints: 2, at whose solem-

solemnitate gaudent Angeli, et col- nity the angels rejoice and give

laudant Filium Dei. praise to the Son of God.

This Introit was explained on the feast of the Assumption.
In the antiphon we have been exhorted to rejoice; in the psalm-
verse (Ps. 32: 1) we cry to the saints:

ExsuUate justi in Domino: * Rejoice in the Lord, 0 ye just: *

rectos decet collaudatio. praise becometh the upright.

GRADUAL (Ps. 33: 10-11)

1. Timete Dominum omnes sancti 1. Fear the Lord, all ye his saints:

ejus: 2. quoniam nihil deest timen- 2. for there is no want to them that
tibus eum, ^^. Inquirentes autem fear him. S^. But they that seek the
Dominum non deficient omni bono. Lord shall not be deprived of any

good.

The text exhibits parallelisms: Inquirentes. . .Dominum corre-
sponds to Timete . . . ejus ; non deficient . . . bono corresponds to quoniam
nihil. . .eum. Of this parallelism the melody takes notice insofar as the
endings of these two parts agree: eum— bono. In the ancient plainsong
manuscript we find this piece with the same text for the feast of St.
Cyriacus.

In the middle and at the close the first phrase of the corpus has the
same rhythm; in this feast we have already met related tone-sequences.
Quoniam in the second phrase is like omnes in the first. Nihil predomin-
ates almost like a reminiscence of nihil solliciti sitis in the Introit for
the third Sunday of Advent.

After the fifth note over (Inquiren)-tes in the verse a brief pause
for breathing will have to be made. It portrays an earnest seeking of
and tending toward God. This is brought out by the ascending fifth and
the rise to high c. Here, indeed, we meet tone-sequences with which we
are acquainted from other sources; thus the groups immediately before
and after the first pause in the Gradual for the twenty-second Sunday
after Pentecost over (unguen)-tum, the group after the second pause on
the first Sunday in Advent over mihi, the group after the third pause in
the Gradual Domine from the Mass of holy Abbots over vitam. The
second half of the phrase sustains itself on /.

468 All Saints Day

To whom are these words addressed? In accordance with St. Paul's
mind, we may suppose Sancti to refer to all those who belong to the
Church, through which they have been sanctified and called to personal
holiness. Those speaking are the saints in heaven, just as the angel in
the Apocalypse calls out with a loud voice: "Fear the Lord, and give
Him honor." Today they look down lovingly upon us, filled with the
desire that one day we also may be united with them. They indicate
the way, admonishing us: Fear God, seek God! This fear of God must
be such that it awakens the longing after God, the desire for Him, and
Him alone, in our souls. The saints were true seekers of God. In all
things and everywhere they looked for Him and found Him. The florid
melody reminds us that in all the events of life, in all misfortunes and dis-
illusionments, whatever their magnitude and number, the eyes and the
hearts of the saints remained fixed on God. Others may have pursued
pleasures and honors and wealth, but (autem) they sought God. In Him,
where alone true joys are to be found, were their hearts firmly estab-
lished.

But at the same time they tell us how God rewarded them for all
their sufferings, labors, and privations. In the contemplation of God
they feel no further need, for no good is wanting to them. They confirm
this statement by their own experience. For they possess God, the
highest good, and in Him they have all that the human heart can de-
sire; and because God is eternal and immutable, their happiness can never
diminish, can never be lost, or undergo change.

"This song echoes the admonition which the saints so often heard
while following the Lord upon earth in the pilgrim's vesture of this sin-
ful humanity. The gentle, humble song is wafted to them as from afar,
from a distant past; not as a woeful sigh and a suppliant petition; but as
a glorified remembrance, a greeting from remote well-known lands
where once they lived, struggled, and conquered" (C. O., 50, 149).

ALLELUIA VERSE (Matt. 11: 28)

1. Venite ad me, omnes qui la- 1. Come to me, all you that labor

boratis, et onerati estis: 2. et ego and are burdened: 2. and I will re-
re ficiam vos. fresh you.

This Alleluia again is a prelude to the subsequent Gospel and its
beatitudes. Its splendor, its solemnity, and its triumphant joy is spread
over the melody like the light of a glorious dawn. It is one of the most
valued chants in the Graduale, one which grips the singer spontaneously.

Indeed, there is mention of those who are afflicted and heavily
burdened. But the Saviour invites them to Himself; and according to
the interpretation of the composer of the plainsong melody. He has

All Saints Day 469

placed in this invitation a fullness of consolation and refreshment, of
liberty and bliss. Although we must admit that the melisma over la-
horatis is considerably drawn out, yet there is nothing oppressive about
it, nothing that suggests pain or sore distress. It is a thorough Alleluia-
song, giving one the impression that all difficulties have been overcome,
just as the saints in heaven with joy and fervent thanksgiving to God
now cast a glance backward at their earthly existence.

The juhilus has the form a+ a}, b, c, c^ We find that the melody
of Alleluia likewise begins the verse Venue. The b-member of the ju-
hilus has exerted an influence on the melody over omnes. "If in the be-
ginning with Venite ad me the melody was tender and mild, almost in-
gratiating, with omnes it rises wide and high, as if Christ were opening
His arms to embrace the many thousands" (C. O., 50, 150).

The melisma over lahorätis with its fifty-two notes clearly reveals
the structure: a b b a; a is repeated immediately after the third pause,
contracting the individual notes over qui lahorätis into a torculus. Here
the motives ascend forcefully upward. Contrasting with this, we find
between these motives the descending motives c and c^ of the juhilus.
"Scarcely has the word reficiam been uttered, than the entire choir
joins in. The melody of alleluia rises to the lips. For they have experi-
enced a hundred and a thousand times the meaning of this reficiam.
They can only thank, praise, and rejoice, and in their hearts and on their
lips the grateful response to the promise of Christ finds expression in
the melody of the juhilus, until it once more brings this gripping, highly
dramatic picture to a close" (C. 0., 50, 150).

In the subsequent Gospel we are shown how God comforts His
people. He will console and give them their fill, will show them mercy,
and will lead them to the contemplation of Himself; they will be called
and truly be children of God: He will give them His heaven. Would
that we might think of this oftener in this our earthly exile!

Today the Saviour has again invited to Himself all who have come
to the house of God. In the sacred Mysteries He will be our strength,
and through them He will prepare us for that eternal Alleluia with
which the streets of the heavenly Jerusalem forever resound.

OFFERTORY (Wisd. 3: 1, 2, 3)

1. Jusiorum animae in manu 1. The souls of the just are in

Dei sunt, 2. et non tanget illos tor- the hand of God, 2. and the torment
mentum malitiae: 3. visi sunt oculis of malice shall not touch them: 3. in
insipientium mori: 4. Uli autem the sight of the unwise they seemed
sunt in pace, 5. alleluia. to die, 4. hut they are in peace, 5.

alleluia.

470 All Saints Day

Our souls come from the hand of God, and by His grace they are
justified; in God's hand they will rest secure as long as their will is in
accord with God's will. God will then protect His faithful ones as the
apple of His eye. Man's malice may try to subvert them in every possible
way, may try to entice and seduce and conquer them by threats and
violence, by chains and prisons, but all efforts will prove fruitless. It is
true, the lives of the saints were not free from temptation and storms,
pain and worry and misfortunes. Nevertheless, already in this life God
fulfilled in them the promise given by the mouth of the prophet: "Be-
hold I will bring upon him as it were a river of peace, and as an over-
flowing torrent the glory" (Isa., 66: 12). Obviously the foolish man has
no conception of this rich, ample, bright and blissful state. For him life
is dreary and sad; it is a living death.

In the next world, how happy are the souls of the just in the hand
of God! How secure from all assaults of evil! There is found peace,
eternal peace in God.

Today during the celebration of the sacred Mysteries, we are privi-
leged to taste again of this peace; we are allowed to rest in God's hand,
to rest on His breast, and to drink of the fullness of His life.

The melody was explained on the feast of St. Michael. The happy
adaptation of this text was accomplished in the twelfth century. We are
tempted to ask why the small word autem was favored with such florid
neums. In the original we find them over ascendit, which easily lends
itself to tone-painting. But we must take into consideration not so much
the word as the entire thought. This part, with its jubilant melody,
forms a magnificent contrast to mori ("to die") with its low pitch in the
preceding phrase. Individually, the phrases, according to their text, are
shorter than those of the original. This might explain the omission of
the descent to the fourth below the tonic which we find there at the end
of the second, third, and fourth phrases.

"The priest offers up pure sacrificial gifts in the sight of God. With
these gifts also the earthly sufferings and heavenly joys of the saints
ascend to the throne of God. A most mysterious and most intimate con-
nection is thus forged between their lives and the life and death of
Christ. Their lives are woven into His sacrifice, and together with the
Eucharistie Sacrifice they are immolated to God. The singer recognizes
this; he would also have his song ascend to heaven bright and clear as
the clouds of incense which he sees rising from the altar" {CO., 50, 151).

COMMUNION (Matt. 5: 8-10)

1. Beati mundo corde, quoniam 1. Blessed are the clean of heart,

ipsi Deum videhunt: 2. beati pact- for they shall see God: 2. blessed are

All Saints Day 471

fici, quoniam filii Dei vocabuntur: the peacemakers, for they shall he
3. heati qui persecutionem patiun- called the children of God: 3. blessed
tur propter justitiam, 4. quoniam are they that suffer persecution for
ipsorum est regnum caelorum. justice' sake, 4. for theirs is the

kingdom of heaven.

Our attention is once more called to three of the eight beatitudes
which the Lord announced to us in today's Gospel and which are given
to us, as it were, to take along into life. The first half of the first phrase
mentions the beatitude, while the second half comprises its argument.
In the third phrase the beatitude forms an independent melodic phrase,
as does also its argument. Thus there result four musical phrases, the
first and last of which have an identical musical rhythm, while the other
two, written a third higher, have practically the same rhythm (AT, Sch.
232). This melodic correspondence may serve to remind us that basic-
ally all the beatitudes are but the fulfillment of this word of God: "I
am. . .thy reward exceeding great" (Gen. 15: 1).

Special attention should be given the threefold heati. The first, as
if sung by angels' voices, sets in on the dominant of the mode, transcend-
ing the misery of sin. The descending movement which follows brings,
as it were, the purity of heaven down to earth. The beatitude embraces
here the range of a fourth. Peace and simplicity characterize the second
phrase, which ranges within a minor third. To be a harbinger of peace is
the quiet yet blessed work of the "children of God." The third heati
has an entirely different ring. It proclaims that even when you must
undergo persecution, when you must bring sacrifice to be just and to
uphold what is right, when you must suffer to protect and defend the
Church, then also are you blessed, for the kingdom of heaven awaits
you. This third heati the Church wishes to be deeply engraven on the
soul. No persecution, however vehement, can drown its triumphant ring.
It seems to encourage us with the words of Tertullian: "One Christian
is greater than the whole world." Even though c a, c g, ä g, a g over per-
secutionem patiuntur may sound like the strokes of a scourge, like the
striking of stone against stone, still the heart of the martyr is hopeful
and happy as he sings: heatil

In Holy Communion we were allowed to contemplate God, we were
privileged to receive the King of peace into our hearts, and with Him
the kingdom of heaven: He it is who gives us strength for sacrifice and
for persecution. And He will remain with us until He can endow us
with His entire blessedness for all eternity, until, united with all the
saints, we can render Him our thanks without ceasing.

472 All Souls Day

ALL SOULS DAY
(November 2)

The commemoration of the souls of all the faithful departed origin-
ated with Abbot Odilo of Cluny (►M048). In the very earliest plainsong
manuscript, however, we already find an Agenda Mortuorum, a Mass
liturgy for the deceased, with the same Introit and Gradual as in today's
Mass.

Today's liturgy affords us a searching glance into the motherly
heart of the Church. She is, as St. Augustine tells us on this day, the
pia mater communis, the loving, solicitous mother of all. She forgets none
of her children, even when they have passed from this life and their
name is no longer remembered. She prays and offers the Sacrifice of
atonement for all of them. And these sentiments the faithful make their
own.

A supernatural quiet seems to hover over the prayers and chants
of this day; they express unbounded confidence in God's merciful love.
Over the liturgy of the dead of the first Christian centuries, one might
inscribe the words: quia pius es. . .. Thou, O God, art goodness, mild-
ness, and mercy. This spirit pervades especially today's Introit, Grad-
ual, (Tract), and Communion. The Middle Ages, however, have al-
tered this spirit by stressing almost exclusively the idea of jugdment
and punishment for sin — the leading thoughts of the Sequence Dies
Irae. The liturgy knows nothing of this spirit which is dominated by a
purely human sadness over the departure of a loved one, as if there were
no eternal life. Such sentiments must by no means be allowed to influ-
ence the interpretation or the rendition of today's chants.

INTROIT

1. Requiem aeternam dona eis 1. Eternal rest give to them, 0

Domine: 2. et lux perpetua luceat Lord: 2. and let perpetual light

eis. Ps. Te decet hymnus Deus in shine upon them. Ps. A hymn, 0

Sion, et tibi reddetur votum in God, hecometh thee in Sion, and a

Jerusalem: * exaudi orationem vow shall he paid to thee in Jeru-

meam, ad te omnis caro veniet. salem: * hear my prayer, all flesh

shall come to thee.

The very first words of the Introit bring the devout petition and
the leading thought of the day. We implore eternal rest for the faithful
departed- — the Church's prayer of predilection whenever she thinks of
her beloved dead. She already prayed thus in the third century, for we
can trace these words to an epitaph of that time.

All Souls Day 47B

The divine Saviour has said: "Take up My yoke and learn of Me . . .
and you shall find rest for your souls." But we all know how easily
human weakness betrays us. Man's life upon this earth is a warfare, and
not a few fall in the battle. Under the trials, disappointments, and the
enticements of this life, in bodily pain and distress of soul which often
sadden and embitter the final moments of life, man's heart becomes
vacillating and unstable. Hence we pray for those who have preceded
us: Lord, grant unto them eternal rest, take them into Thy kingdom of
eternal, immutable peace, draw them to Thy heart!

"And let perpetual light shine upon them!" Perhaps in the storms
of life the supernatural light was often threatened with extinction. The
departed may have for a time pursued illusory objects, or may have de-
termined to be a light unto themselves and not always lived as children
of light. In Thy goodness, O Lord, forgive them their folly. Now, when
all other lights have been darkened, when the world with its attractions
and seductions has disappeared, the only thing they long for, the only
thing they desire is Thy eternal light. Thou art that immense Sun, to-
ward which their entire being gravitates, the Sun that never sets, lumen
indeficiens; every being that approaches Thee Thou dost enrich with a
blissful eternity.

This, also, is the mute prayer of the many candles which, according
to ancient custom, are lighted during the Mass for the Dead. Formerly
candles were not only used to illumine the subterranean burial places,
but were also a symbolic prayer for light.

Our most powerful intercessor, however, is Christ in the Sacrifice
of the Mass. He is the Sun of justice; in His sea of light He can cleanse
all the defects that mar the human soul, and with His infinite merits
supply its needs and deficiency of love and make reparation for it.

Filled with confidence in the reparatory power of the holy Sacrifice^
the psalm-verse begins joyfully: Te decet laus- — "A hymn, O God, be-
cometh Thee." How often have eternal rest and eternal light been asked
of God, and how often has He granted the prayer! How many have at-
tained Him, singing in a blissful spirit as they entered into heaven: Te
decet lausl

"The psalm is a harvest song. At one time all Israel made a pil-
grimage to God in Jerusalem and offered Him the first fruits of the har-
vest according as they had vowed. So we also, in order to sing a fitting
hymn to God in Sion for His many blessings, bring to the Lord in the
deceased member of our community the gift of a ripened spiritual har-
vest (votum), that thus, being united in the closest manner to Christ's
sacrifice, he may find eternal rest and eternal light. The world of this
psalm portrays such a consoling picture of the soul that has departed in

474 All Souls Day

the Lord, that, as in bygone days, we should like to hear more: 'The
words of the wicked have prevailed over us: and Thou wilt pardon our
transgressions. Blessed is he whom Thou hast chosen and taken to Thee:
he shall dwell in Thy courts. We shall be filled with the good things of
Thy house; holy is Thy temple, wonderful Thy justice' " (Betende
Kirche, p. 572 f.).

The melody of the antiphon is especially warm and pleasant. Some-
thing of the quiet of death, or better, of the peace of eternal life, or again
of heartfelt sympathy with those who have been bereft of a loved one
seems to hover about it. As soothing balsam it penetrates the afflicted
heart. The parallelism of the text is reflected in the melody.

Each of the four half-phrases closes with a quiet clivis: g f and
g f f, and each phrase with the same rhythm. In the second phrase the

5 4 3 21

cadence sets in on the fifth last syllable: Mceat eis. The first phrase
closes with a dactylic word (Domine), over the first syllable of which,

5 4 3 2 1

as is often done, a single note is set: (do)-na eis (Dö)-mine. In the first
phrase the melody grows gradually: f g, f ga, f g a c, and then, as in the
second phrase, come those serene closing notes: g f and g f f. Aeternam
— only eternal rest can satisfy the human heart- — receives prominence
through its pressus. With (e)-is care must be taken that the high point
of the melody be not neglected; nevertheless c must not be accented.
In the first phrase each member began on the tonic /; in the second
phrase they all set in on the dominant a. Perpetua has not the heavy
pressus of aeternam; here everything is lighter, one might almost say
more spiritual, reminding us of a descending light. In the closing rhythm,
the top notes of the melody give the following descending line: c h a g f.

This Introit has two psalm-verses. The first has a solemn intonation
but is wanting in the solemn Introit-psalmody as noted in the most
ancient manuscript. We have here the simple form, which Dom Pothier
tries to justify in Revue (15, 153). We also note the mournful mediatio
correpta over the Hebrew words Sion and Jerusalem.

The text of the antiphon is closely related to a verse of the apocry-
phal fourth Book of Esdras (20: 34). Psalm 64, of which our verse in an
excerpt, bears the inscription: "To the people of the captivity, when
they began to go out." Even more than the captive Jews, the souls in
Purgatory yearn for their fatherland, the heavenly Sion, where they
shall glorify God for all eternity.

Revue, 21, 74 ff.; Analyses, 3, 23 ff.; Gregoriushote, 42, 117 ff.; Rot-
tenhurger Monatsschrift, 6, 101 ff.; Merk, Die Totenmesse mit dem Libera
{Stuttgart, Schloz, 1924).

All Souls Day 475

At first the Kyrie with its quiet seconds preserves intact the spirit
of the Introit. Then, however, it has as a new motive the descent below
the tonic to e which the Introit always avoided, and as its highest point
h, which must not be accented. It should be sung thus: f g ä h a a. The
final Kyrie, with its inception on a descending and ascending fifth and
its rise to high d, sounds like the persistent knocking at the gate of
heaven to ask mercy for the poor souls. The quietly descending seconds
intimate that the prayer has been heard.

GRADUAL

The corpus has the same text as the Introit-antiphon.

f. (Ps. Ill, 7) 1. In memoria f. (Ps. Ill, 7) 1. In everlasting

aeterna 2. erit Justus: 3. ab audi- remembrance 2. shall be the just
Hone mala 4. non timebit. man: 3. of the evil hearing 4. he

shall not fear.

The melody was explained on the first Sunday of Lent, and is prac-
tically the same as that sung on Easter Sunday, For Christ's resurrec-
tion is the pledge of the resurrection of our beloved dead and of our own
resurrection. In the Latin countries, the poor souls are frequently re-
ferred to as "holy souls," and with good reason, for they are possessed
of sanctifying grace, which renders them "just" and assures them
heaven, even though they have still to make atonement for some of
their offenses. In God's courts they were given a favorable verdict. Al-
though the world may be harsh and unjust in its judgments, they are
now far removed and it can affect them no longer. And though they
must suffer the effects of God's justice, yet they are fully conscious that
God will be their final end. How pleasing and sublime is the effect of
this verse in the liturgy of the dead!

TRACT

1. Absolve, Domine, animas om- 1. Absolve, 0 Lord, the souls of all

nium fidelium defunctorum f ab the faithful departed f from every

omni vinculo delictorum. 2. Et gra- bond of sins. 2. And by the help of

tia tua Ulis succurente, f merean- thy grace f wza?/ they be enabled to

tur evader e judicium ultionis. 3. Et escape the judgment of punishment,

lucis aeternae f beatitudine perfrui. 8. And enjoy the happiness of

eternal light.

Ordinarily the Tract is taken from one of the psalms. Here, how-
ever, we have an example of an oration from the best period of the
liturgy. Verses one and three pray for the departed. The second verse

476 All Souls Day

pictures to us the decisive moment before the awful judgment, which is
emphasized still more in the Offertory.

Except that the first verse has a florid intonation, the first half of
all three verses is alike, having also the same middle cadence. The sec-
ond half of the first and second verses shows the same descending for-
mula, which sets in one syllable before the word-accent: -lictorumy
-tionis. The third verse has a florid closing melisma.

Here the chants, so far of a quiet character, take on a gloomier color-
ing, yet even now the petition for liberty and light, yes, eternal happiness,,
predominates above all else. The melody is not in the serious second
mode, but in the lighter, brighter eighth mode.

SEQUENCE

The Franciscan Thomas of Celano (1200-1255?) is considered the
composer of this Sequence, although we flnd his name attached to it
only a century later. Not before the second half of the fourteenth century
was this song included in the Requiem Mass, having been previously
employed merely for private devotion. It was prescribed for universal
adoption in the sixteenth century. It seems that the serious and solemn
trochees were created particularly for the awful scene here described.
"This monumental piece of poetry could make even a Goethe tremble.
The reference to it in his Faust has been duly noted by the modern Chris-
tian and non-Christian world of litterateurs. And even today it serves
to remind us that the poetical powers of the Middle Ages need fear noth-
ing by comparison with the poetry of a later period, indeed, that the
latter in great part shares in the heritage of the former" (A. Baum-
gartner, S.J., Weltliteratur, IV, 458).

Exclusive of the last six verses, there are three double strophes
that repeat the same melody thrice. In the first strophe the second verse
extends beyond the melodic peak of the first verse. In still greater measure
the second double strophe predominates over the first and third. The
text concerning the blasts of the trumpet may have influenced the
composer. The third verse descends to low a once, the third double
strophe does the same twice. The fact that every strophe, as well as
every individual verse, closes on the tonic, heightens the force of this
chant and has the effect of the somber tolling of bells. Berlioz, who
employs all the possibilities of the modern orchestra in his Requiem, ad-
mits that in the unbounded wealth of musical art there is nothing to
compare with the effect produced by this plainsong Sequence.

FIRST PART (STROPHES 1-6)

By its vivid portrayal of the end of the world and the final judg-
ment, this part grips one's very being.

All Souls Day

477

la. Dies irae, dies ilia,

Solvet saeclum in favilla :
Teste David cum Sibylla.

lb. Quantus tremor est futurus,
Quando Judex est venturus,
Cuncta stride discussurusl

2a. Tuba mirum spargens sonum
Per sepulchra regionum,
Coget omnes ante thronum.

2b. Mors stupebit, et natura,
Cum resurget creatura,
Judicanti responsura.

Liber scriptus proferetur,
In quo totum continetur,
Unde mundus judicetur.

la. That day of wrath, that dread-
ful day,
When heaven and earth shall

pass away,
Both David and Sibyl say.

lb. What terror then shall us befall,
When lo, the Judge's steps

appal.
About to sift the deeds of alll

2a. The mighty trumpet's marvel-
lous tone.

Shall pierce through each
sepulchral stone

And summon all before the
throne.

2b. Now death and Nature in

amaze
Behold the Lord His creatures

raise,
To meet the Judge's awful gaze.

3a. The books are opened, that the

dead
May have their doom from

what is read,
The record of our conscience

dread.

3b. Judex ergo, cum sedebit, 3b. The Lord of judgment sits

Quidquid latet, apparebit: Him down.

Nil inultum remanebit. And every secret thing makes

known;
No crime escapes His vengeful
frown.

SECOND AND THIRD PARTS (STROPHES 7-17)

After consideration of the terrific drama enacted at the end of the
world and at the final judgment, the consciousness of guilt rises before
the mind. Forthwith the soul turns to prayer, hoping for forgiveness on
the basis of Christ's redemptive work, and finding consolation in the

478

All Souls Day

fact that even a Mary Magdalen and a thief on the cross found pardon.
An ardent petition goes forth to be numbered among the saved, among
those who will stand at the right hand of the Judge (Merk, Die Toten-
messe, p. 72).

la. Quid sum, miser tunc dicturus
Quem patronum rogaturusl
Cum vix Justus sit securusl

la. Ah, how shall I that day en-
dure:

What patron's friendly voice
secure.

When scarce the just them-
selves are surel

lb. Rex tremendae

Qui salvandos salvas gratis,
Salva me fons pietatis.

lb. O King of dreadful majesty,
Who grantest grace and mercy

free.
Grant mercy now and grace to
me.

2a. Recordare, Jesu pie.

Quod sum causa tuae viae:
Ne me perdas ilia die.

2a. Good Lord, 'twas for my sin-
ful sake.
That Thou our suffering flesh

didst take;
Then do not now my soul for-
sake.

2b. Quaerens me, sedisti lassus:
Redemisti crucem passus:
Tantus labor non sit cassus.

3a. Juste judex ultionis,
Donum fac remissionis
Ante diem rationis.

3b. Ingemisco tamquam reus:
Culpa ruhet vultus meus:
Supplicanti parce, Deus.

2b. In weariness Thy sheep was

Upon the cross His life was

bought;
Alas, if all in vain were
wrought.

3a. 0 just avenging Judge, I pray,
For pity take my sins away.
Before the great accounting-
day.

3b. / groan beneath the guilt,
which Thou
Canst read upon my blushing

brow;
But spare, 0 God, Thy supli-
ant now.

All Souls Day

47^

THIRD PART

la. Qui Mariam ahsolvisti,
Et latronem exaudisti,
Mihi quoque spem dedisti.

2a.

2b.

3a.

la. Thou who didst Mary's sins
unbind,
And mercy for the robber find,
Dost fill with hope my anxious
mind.

Preces meae non sunt dignae:
Sed tu bonus fac benigne,
Ne perenni cremer igne.

Inter oves locum praesta,
Et ab haedis me sequestra
Statuens in parte dextra.

lb. Preces meae non sunt dignae: lb. My feeble prayers can make

no claim.
Yet, gracious Lord, for Thy

great Name,
Redeem me from the quench-
less flame.

2a. At Thy right hand, give me a
place
Among Thy sheep, a child of

grace.
Far from goats' accursed race.

2b. Yea, when Thy justly kindled
ire
Shall sinners hurl to endless

fire,
Oh, call me to Thy chosen choir.

3a. In suppliant prayer I pros-
trate bend
My contrite heart like ashes

rend.
Regard, 0 Lord, my latter end.

FOURTH PART

Here the verse-structure and the melody change. Three dimeters
follow. No doubt, this close was added only after the whole had been
adopted for liturgical use. Still we find it in some old manuscripts.

1. Lacrimosa dies ilia, 1. Oh, on that day, that tearful day..
Qua resurget ex favilla, When man to judgment wakes

from clay,

2. Judicandus homo reus. 2. Be Thou the trembling sinner's
Huic ergo parce, Deus: stoi/,

And spare him, God, we humbly
pray.

Confutatis

Flammis acribus addictis:

Voca me cum benedictis.

Oro supplex et acclinis.
Cor contritum quasi cinis:
Gere curam mei finis.

480

All Souls Day

Pie Jesu, Domine,
Dona eis requiem. Amen.

3. Yea, grant to all, O Saviour
Blest,
Who die in Thee, the saints'
sweet r-est. Amen.

The second half of the first and second verses has the same melody.
Judicdndus produces a marvelous effect. The subsequent huic ergo ought
to be sung more softly, after which Pie Jesu should be rendered with
the utmost devotion.

Although the double strophes of each of the first three parts have
the same melody, still in every instance the text will give the cue for
the rendition, without of course, introducing any sharp contrasts.

Formerly this Sequence was sung after the Mass for the Dead, as
the procession made its way from the church to the cemetery. In some
places it was sung in Advent as a preparation for the coming of the
universal Judge.

Schulte, A., Die Hymnen des Breviers nebst den Sequenzen des Mis-
sale (Paderborn, Schoeningh), p. 200 ff.; Stimmem aus Maria-Laach, 42,
512 ff.; Kayser, H., Beitraege zur Geschichte und Erklaerung der alten
Kirchenhymnen (Paderborn, Schoeningh); Revue, 16, 46 ff.; Dreves-
B\ume, Ein Jahrtausend lateinischer Hymnendichtung; Gihr, Dies Irae.

OFFERTORY

1. Domine Jesu Christe, Rex glo-
riae, libera animas omnium fide-
lium defunctorum de poenis in-
ferni, et de profunda lacu: 2. libera
eas de ore leonis, ne absorbeat eas
tartar US, ne cadant in obscurum: 3.
sed signifer sanctus Michael re-
praesentet eas in lucem sanctam: 4.
Quam olim Abrahae promisisti, et
semini ejus. ^. 1. Hostias et preces
tibi Domine laudis offerimus: 2. tu
suscipe pro animabus Ulis, quarum
hodie memoriam facimus: 3. fac
eas, Domine, de morte transire ad
vitam, * quam olim Abrahae pro-
misisti, et semini ejus.

1. 0 Lord Jesus Christ, King of
glory, deliver the souls of all the
faithful departed from the pains of
hell and from the deep pit: 2. deliver
them from the mouth of the lion,
that hell may not swallow them up,
and they may not fall into darkness;
3. but may the holy standard-bearer
Michael introduce them to the holy
light: 4. which thou didst promise of
old to Abraham and to his seed. i^. 1.
We offer to thee, 0 Lord, sacrifice of
praise and prayers: 2. do thou re-
ceive them in behalf of those souls
whom we commemorate this day: 3.
grant them, 0 Lord, to pass from
death to that life, * which thou
didst promise of old to Abraham
and to his

All Souls Day 481

Great difficulties are experienced in the explanation of this text.
Some would translate defunctorum not by "departed," but by "dying."
Considered in this light, the prayer carries us to the moment of death,
where it will be decided whether the soul will be condemned to eternal
darkness or whether it will attain to perpetual light. We may pray thus
for those who will die today, as well as for all men, whom, as today's
Preface says, "the certainty of dying afflicteth;" we can also call to mind
the approaching hour of our own dissolution. In the present instance,
libera does not signify "deliver," but rather "preserve from," just as
the various invocations of the Litany of the Saints do not always pre-
suppose that we have been afflicted with the evils there enumerated, but
pray for protection against and preservation from them. Hence we here
implore the King of glory to preserve the dying from the pains and the
darkness of hell. This first part, with the twofold libera, is the negative
part.

The significant sed leads to the second, the positive part, with its
petition for the "holy light." St. Michael the standard-bearer, was
once victorious in the struggle against the evil spirits; may he lead also
our souls to true peace. He is the angel who bears the gifts and the
prayers of the faithful to heaven, letting them ascend like sweet-smelling
incense (Offertory for his feast) ; may he bring our souls after that most
important moment of death to the holy light, so that we also may be-
come partakers of the promises made by God to Abraham. May God
become our reward exceeding great.

This antiphon is perhaps native to Ireland. Originally the verse
did not belong to it. In reality it is a Secret, a silent prayer for the de-
ceased. Today's sacrifice, however, is also a sacrifice of praise, because
it is the Sacrifice of Christ. It is Christ who imparts to it its efficacy.
Hence we confidently hope that the departed, by virtue of this sacrifice,
may pass from death to life. The verse harks back to the last phrase of
the antiphon. The composer has treated the two parts as a whole.

The melody is not so tender as that of the Introit, nor so powerful
as that of the Libera. It is serene, serious, a prayer with restrained emo-
tion. Frequently it recites on the tonic. Only in two passages does the
melody become somewhat florid, first to give the words Rex gloriae promi-
nence, and secondly with semini, that by means of tone-painting it may
cast a sweeping glance over the innumerable children of Abraham, en-
trusted to him by virtue of God's promise. The passage d f e d e c cor-
responds to d f e f g e. Christe rhymes with (gl6ri)-ae, and the two libera
have similar introductions. Alternately the melody over defunctorum is
expanded and contracted over de profündo lacu, ne absorbeat eas tartarus,
Abrahae promisisti, (a)-nimäbus Ulis, (me)-m6riam fäcimus. Related to

482 All Souls Day

it is the motive over Hostias, which opens the verse. This motive, re-
curring several times, makes the petition here expressed more appeal-
ing. De ore leonis with its fourth and accented g is especially powerful,
making one almost see the hellish lion with its distended jaws. Reprae-
sentet eas has practically the same formula; the energetic fourth, however,
is wanting. It is sung gently and brightly, similar to the third and
fourth phrases, in accordance with their lucid text.

The petition of the verse is more fervent. Its first phrase confines
itself to the range of a fourth. The second phrase gives prominence to
the words tu, quarum hodie, and transire, and demands a rendition of
special warmth. Thou wilt graciously accept the offerings we bring for
those whom we particularly commemorate today, and we trust and
know that Thou wilt bring them to eternal life.

In more than thirty instances, the accented syllable has a higher
pitch than the following syllable, and is also frequently higher than the
preceding syllable.

If any chant deserves to be sung prayerfully, with serene confi-
dence in God's goodness and with inner emotion, it is today's Offertory.

Revue gr., 6, 165 ff. and 205 ff.; Rassegna, 2, 488 ff.

The SANCTUS begins with the closing note of the Preface, whose
natural continuation it is. Hence the celebrant's pitch is to be taken in

A A G A AG

this manner: dicentes: Sanctus. Gloria tua and nomine Domini (each
having a cadence with two accents) remind us of Dignum et justum est
while the second Hosdnna reminds us of Per omnia saecula.

The AGNUS DEI is the same as that at the end of the Litany of
the Saints. The petition dona eis should be sung impressively, but with-
out harshness. Sempiternam and requiem are sung without an interven-
ing pause.

COMMUNION

1. Lux aeterna luceat eis, Do- 1. May light eternal shine upon

mine: * 2. Cum Sanctis tuis in ae- them, 0 Lord: * 2. With the saints

ternum, quia pius es. f. 1. Requiem for ever, because thou art merciful,

aeternam dona eis Domine, et lux ^. 1. Eternal rest give to them, 0

perpetua luceat eis: * Cum Sanctis Lord, and let perpetual light shine

tuis in aeternum, quia pius es. upon them: * With thy saints for

ever, because thou art merciful.

The Communion harks back to the thoughts of the Introit, setting
them forth in brighter light. It is a song of triumph, a song of victory.
Such were the sentiments of the early Christians when, singing, they

All Souls Day 483

bore to the tomb the remains of those who were privileged to become a
sacrifice to Christ through martyrdom. The antiphon Iste Sanctus, sung
at the Magnificat on the feast of a martyr, begins and closes with the
same melody as the Communion. We hear expressed today the convic-
tion that the sacrifice of the Mass just completed has poured out the
fullness of blessings over Purgatory, and that through its efficacy many
souls have entered into the kingdom of comfort, of light, and of peace.
They are now joined with the army of the saints (cum Sanctis), are them-
selves saints, entirely immersed in the blissful light of God. All that was
obscure and confusing, that troubled them so frequently in their lives,
has vanished. One truth alone shines out brightly before them: "All the
ways of God are mercy and truth."

This Communion plays a very important part in the history of the
liturgy, precisely because it alone preserves the old custom of having a
verse follow the antiphon. Today this custom is retained in the Introit
only. The psalmody is not of the simplest. Before the accent of the ca-
dence a preparatory d is inserted, as we find in the solemn Introit-psal-
mody of the fifth mode; moreover, the second half of the verse has at its
beginning a decorative a. In the antiphon, Cum Sanctis tuis corresponds
to Mceat eis. Something like the light of resurrection and the mild splen-
dor of God's goodness ought to characterize the rendition: quia pius
es. . ..

RESPONSORY Libera

1. Libera me, Domine, de morte 1. Deliver me, O Lord, from ever-

aeterna, in die ilia tremenda: * 2. lasting death in that dreadful day: *

Quando caeli movendi sunt et terra: 2. When heaven and earth shall

3. Dum veneris judicare saeculum quake: 3. when thou shall come to

per ignem. jl. Tremens factus sum judge the world by fire. f. I tremble

ego, et timeo, dum discussio venerit, and am sore afraid, for the judgment

atque Ventura ira. * Quando caeli and the wrath to come. * When

movendi sunt et terra. ^, Dies ilia, heaven and earth shall quake, jll. 0

dies irae, calamitatis et miseriae, that day! that day of wrath, of woe

dies magna et amara valde. Dum and of tribulation! a great day and

veneris judicare saeculum per ig- exceeding bitter. When thou shall

nem. jll. Requiem aeternam dona eis come to judge the world by fire. f.

Domine: et lux perpetua luceat eis. Eternal rest give unto them, O

— Libera me [usque ad f.]. Lord, and let perpetual light shine

upon them. — Deliver me [to the jl.].

In this responsory we no longer hear the expressions of peace, rest,
and confident hope that characterized the prayers of the early Chris-
tians regarding death. Rather we find the fear and anguish that had

484 The Dedication of a Church

laid hold of the mind of the Middle Ages, anticipating the impending
destruction of the world. It is an impetuous appeal to the universal
Judge. Judicdre dominates the entire piece, sounding almost like a shrill
piercing cry. Only over this word does the melody ascend to high c.
This phrase has indeed the greatest range, the largest intervals (fifth
and fourths), and the richest, well-prepared development. The first
three words have the range c—f, the subsequent three, d — g. In the sec-
ond half of the first phrase, with the range c — g, the words die ilia are
accentuated by means of a higher pitch and also by means of the pressus,
which had already served to strengthen aeterna. The second phrase
points to the catastrophe that will shake both heaven and earth. The
third phrase begins immediately a fifth higher than the closing note of
the preceding; similarly judicdre. Rarely in plainsong are the accents
which dominate members and phrases given such plastic prominence as
here : me, morte, die ilia, movendi, judicdre, and rarely do we see such a
carefully planned gradation. All this must be brought out in the rendition.

In a certain sense, the quiet, reserved character of the verses forms
a contrast to the agitated corpus. They are almost syllabic and avoid
large intervals, never going beyond a. Both in text and melody, the sec-
ond verse without doubt formed the nucleus for the later Sequence Dies
Irae; there also judicdre finds an echo in tuha mirum spargens. Originally
the Dies irae served as a trope to Libera; then it became a Sequence.
Cf. C. O., 49, 55 ff.

After the first verse the second phrase is repeated, after the second
verse the third phrase, after the third verse, which exhibits special
warmth with Domine and gives impressiveness to the word lux, the en-
tire Libera up to ignem is sung again. The form here reminds us of the
rondo. The melody in the Vatican Gradual can be traced back to the
end of the tenth century.

These same chants are employed at the burial, on the third, seventh,
and thirtieth day after death, and on the anniversary.

THE DEDICATION OF A CHURCH

In the most ancient manuscripts the chants of this Mass are found
before the feast of Christ's Ascension. For at Rome the dedication of
the Pantheon as a Christian Church (Sancta Maria ad Martyres), in the
year 607, that is, three years after the death of St. Gregory the Great,
was celebrated on May 13.

The Mass formulary was considered the crown of the church's dedi-
cation, and in it each year we re-experience that which was consum-

The Dedication of a Church 485

mated at the time when our parish church and our mother church
(metropolis), the cathedral of our diocese, received its solemn consecra-
tion at the hands of the bishop. In this way every church is again in-
timately united in a special manner to the "Mother and Mistress of all
churches throughout the world," the cathedral church of the Pope, St.
John Lateran in Rome. Hence it is that the entire Catholic world com-
memorates the consecration of this church on November 9. On Novem-
ber 18 our thoughts again travel to Rome when the consecration of the
churches of SS. Peter and Paul is solemnly commemorated.

INTROIT (Gen. 28: 17)

1. Terrihilis est locus iste: 2. hie 1. Terrible is the place: 2. it is

domus Dei est, et porta caeli: 3. et the house of God, and the gate of

vocahitur aula Dei. Ts.Quam dilecta heaven: 3. and it shall he called the

tahernacula tua, Domine virtutem! court of God. Ps. How lovely are

* concupiscit, et deficit anima mea thy tabernacles, 0 Lord of hosts! *

in atria Domini. my soul longeth and fainteth for the

courts of the Lord.

The first word of the Introit today again determines the attitude
of the soul. Deep reverence grips man when God approaches. The Pa-
triarch Jacob was overcome with awe when in a dream he saw the
ladder reaching up to heaven. The same feeling fills the faithful soul
when it enters the church, for this is the house of God. "That Thou, O
God, wilt deign to visit this place, we beseech Thee, hear us!" — this
was the underlying spirit of the prayers at the consecration of the
church. The soul knows that prayer here has not been in vain. With a
ring of conviction it sings: "This is the house of God." And in the tre-
mendum Mysterium of the Mass, Christ appears among us in His di-
vinity and His transfigured humanity. Then the church becomes the
gate through which heaven, yea, the Lord of heaven comes to us; it
becomes the courtyard of heaven, bringing to us an anticipation and
taste of the joys that await us there; it consecrates and sanctifies our
souls so that one day they may inhabit the heavenly mansions.

Precisely for this reason the holy reverence which overshadows the
soul is not something oppressive of which we would wish to rid ourselves,
but a reverence blended with an inner happiness. Exceeding lovely is
the tabernacle of God among men; for the souls of men yearn and lan-
guish.

The first phrase sets in as if bowing profoundly before the holiness
of the place, and has the effect of an A minor. The second phrase begins
and closes with C major and has a much brighter ring. Its close fg ff

486 The Dedication of a Church

cdc bears some rhythmic similarity to iste in the first phrase with its
fg'ff ed. At the same time there is a tendency toward a cadence, which
in other melodies of the second mode, for example, in the Introit for the
first Mass of Christmas over mens es tu, is made to stand out in sharper
relief by means of e, which has the quality of a leading note. With its
ecac cdf the third phrase reminds us of terrihilis est of the first phrase,
while at the same time it has a pressus in common with the second
phrase. Thus the words domus Dei and aula Dei are given prominence.
Is the whole to be sung with gentle modulations, or should the ac-
cents be strong, almost violent? The former interpretation has the
greater appeal. The twofold tristropha would then graphically describe
the singer's trembling and awe for the mysteries of the Catholic house
of prayer.^

GRADUAL

1. Locus iste a Deo f actus est, 1. This place has been made by

inaestimabile sacramentum, 2. irre- God; it is a mystery beyond measure,
prehensibilis est. Si. 1. Deus, cui 2. it is free from all stain, jl. 1. O
adstat Angelorum chorus, 2. ex- God, before whom the choir of angels
audi preces servorum tuorum. stands, 2. give ear to the prayers of

thy servants.

God has traced the plans of the Catholic Church; He has created
its atmosphere and given it that supernatural strength from which its
faithful can so liberally draw. These attributes are as true and real as
they are mysterious; their consequences we see realized in the lives of
the saints. Each church is a mystery, a Sacramentum; in it most of the
sacraments are also administered. No one can rightly define it nor rightly
estimate its value. In its very essence it shows forth the universal Church,
the Communion of Saints, the city of God in heaven, the Bride of Christ
for whom He has sacrificed Himself, that she might be glorious, without
spot or wrinkle (irreprehensibilis).

The "mystery beyond measure" which makes up the Church, has
been unveiled to some extent in the Epistle. The Church is a holy city;
she has come as a heavenly bride celebrating her espousals with Christ,
the Bridegroom, in the mystery of the Mass. There God comes to us
and takes up His abode among us; He becomes our God.

As mysterious as it is real, the entire drama is but an anticipation
and preparation for the eternal wedding feast in heaven. Then God shall
wipe away all tears and in His everlasting kingdom make all things new.

1 K. K., 23, 116 ff.

The Dedication of a Church 487

The corpus is quiet and serene. Actually it has a range of only a
fifth. Once the melody goes below the tonic, and once it ascends above
the dominant. Inaestimdhile is modeled on admirabile of the ninth Sun-
day after Pentecost. Over sacr amentum fgagfg becomes gahaga. The re-
solved descending major chord occurs three times.

The verse exhibits great development. Its florid melisma over
(cho)-rus is easily recognized; suffice it to mention only Maundy Thurs-
day. The entire second phrase, text and melody, is taken from the sec-
ond Gradual for the Ember Saturday of Lent.

God appears surrounded by His celestial court. In some churches
the mural decorations depicted the choirs of angels. The thousands and
tens of thousands of angels pay Him homage and are happy in His pres-
ence, all their desires being fully realized. We, on the contrary, have
many things to ask for and to lament over: we must cry: exdudi — "hear
our petitions!" And no matter how many or how great they may be, we
may bring them all. Today, however, we will above all — Imprimis —
pray for the Church, that God may protect, unite, govern, and preserve
her in peace over the entire earth. We will pray that our souls also,
created and redeemed by God, and sanctified through the sacraments,
may ever retain their dignity as temples of God and ever strive after
greater holiness. Only then can we hope that our prayers will be accept-
able to God and worthy of being heard. Here it will be opportune to ask
ourselves: What must be my attitude in choir so that I may measure
up to the standard of the choirs of angels?

ALLELUIA VERSE (Ps. 137: 2)

1. Adoraho ad templum sanctum 1. I will worship towards thy

tuum: 2. et confitehor nomini tuo. holy temple, 2. and I will give

glory to thy name.

The beginning of this Alleluia shows some resemblance to that of
the nineteenth Sunday after Pentecost. On the syllable -ia a torculus
and then a pressus should be sung. The close of the verse has only the
torculus of the second member and the last eight notes of the jubilus.
According to Wagner^ this Alleluia marks approximately the division
between the archaic (Gregorian) and the classic (post-Gregorian) type of
Alleluia. Indeed, he says that there is only wanting "the agreement of
the coda of the verse with the jubilus and its symmetrical construction
and brilliant melody," but that it shows a great step forward in com-
parison with the type portrayed in the three Christmas Masses.

Ill, 402 f.

488 The Dedication of a Church

The first phrase portrays reverence, an awe-inspired reverence in
the "holy temple" of God. The second phrase is a jubilant song of
praise. Over confitebor the melisma with the form a a b is, according to
Wagner,^ "one of the most beautiful musical inspirations of the Middle
Ages." To the solemn ascent to high / there is a corresponding recol-
lected descent. Care must be taken not to sing the ascending notes too
rapidly. The annotated manuscripts here give all the notes the broad
form. The motive f f c d is repeated delicately over ccga, followed by a
repetition of the entire melisma. It would seem that we are listening to
the fifth mode, were it not that dbc leads us back to the seventh mode.
This formula was already sung over the close of (Ado)-rä-(ho). The group
over tu-(um) is enhanced over (tu)-o.

Who prays thus? In Codex 339 of St. Gall's this Alleluia, text and
melody, is assigned to the feast of the Purification. It is, therefore, really
Christ Himself, who, in every church, at every Mass, adores the Father
in spirit and in truth, who glorifies and praises Him in the measure that
His infinite Being demands. Let us rejoice that we have one who can
offer an adequate adoration, a worthy song of praise, and let us strive
to render this song in a manner truly divine.

During the Paschal season the verse Bene fundata is sung according
to the melody which was explained on the feast of the Assumption. After
Septuagesima the Tract Qui confidunt is sung as on the fourth Sunday
in Lent.

Revue, 15, SA n.

OFFERTORY (1 Par, 29, 17-18)

1. Domine Deus, in simplicitate 1. O Lord God, in the simplicity

cordis mei laetus ohtuli universal 2. of my heart, I have joyfully offered
et populum tuum, qui repertus est, all these things: 2, and I have seen
vidi cum ingenti gaudio: 3. Deus with great joy thy people, which are
Israel, custodi hanc voluntatem. present: 3. O God of Israel, keep

this will.

Simplicity and joy add a special odor of sweetness to the sacrifice
that we offer to almighty God. There is no desire of retrenching in His
sacrifice, nor do we feel ourselves to be a sacrificial lamb; we are conscious
only of the happiness we experience in being allowed to offer God our
gift. The first phrase of the Offertory sings of this simplicity and joy.
Simplicity here seems to have derived its bright melody from joy — and
the joj^ is entirely simple and unadorned. Laetus ohtuli could scarce be

1 i. c.

The Dedication of a Church 489

sung with more modesty or with greater simplicity. The twofold bi-
stropha must be sung lightly and must not be held longer than four
beats. Universa can be sung with a slight crescendo. The final groups
remind us of Deus.

The Gospel recounted with what readiness Zachaeus made sacrifice:
"Behold, Lord, the half of my goods I give to the poor, and if I have
wronged any man of anything, I restore him fourfold," and how pleased
the Saviour was with these words!

The second phrase is characterized by the "great joy" which here
seeks full expression; it should be sung with a great crescendo. The heart
of King David leaps with joy when he sees his people — yea, God's people
— enthusiastic to bring sacrifices. Populum tuum bears some resemblance
to the beginning of today's Gradual.

After the second phrase a large pause is to be made, for here a new
thought, a prayer is introduced: "Keep this will!" This phrase begins
with a soft, humble tone, expressing the wholehearted longing for God's
helping grace, while the following custodi is given some prominence. On
the closing syllable of voluntdtem the joy of the first two phrases is once
more felt. Here two motives are interwoven: ac gfg and gf dcf, and in
both of them we find an echo of fg dcff over obtuli. Domine Deus pos-
sesses the simplicity and modesty of the first phrase.

It would be difficult to conceive of a more beautiful Offertory song.
Permeated with its spirit, the Secret continues: "Grant that all we. . .
by full and perfect devotion, be acceptable to Thee both in body and
soul; that we who now lay our votive gifts before Thee, may by Thy
help be found worthy to win Thine everlasting rewards."

As a pledge for this we hear these words from the lips of the Lord :
"This day I must abide in thy house." It is in Holy Communion that
He deigns to come into "our house" to sit at meat with us; and then we
experience that salvation has entered into our house, into our heart.

COMMUNION (Matt. 21: 13)

1. Domus mea, domus orationis 1. My house shall he called the

vocabitur, dicit Dominus: 2. in ea house of prayer, saith the Lord: 2.

omnis qui petit, accipit: et qui every one that asks therein, receives:

quaerit, invenit; et pulsanti, aperie- and he who seeks, finds: and to him

tur. who knocks, it shall he opened.

This house is a house of prayer. The first two members of this
Communion would, as it were, engrave these words in large letters over
the entrance of the church; hence the many large intervals. The ac-
cented second domus sets in with a fourth; the fifth c-f, and the fourths

490 Asperges Me and Vidi Aquam

c-g and bb-/ occur at varying intervals. The third member with its se-
quence-like passages is then a quiet thesis after the great arsis. Its clos-
ing cadence was heard a pitch higher over mea. This unusual inception
for a piece of the fifth mode demands clever manipulation on the part
of the organist.

The second phrase has only seconds and thirds; its last member
has the sole fourth. Throughout a preference is shown for the ascending
and descending major chord f-a-c: qui petit, (quae)-rit, inve-(nit), (a)-
perie-(tur). Omnis — "every one" rightly receives a special accent. In the
rendition a slight pause might separate the petition from its fulfillment,
thus: qui petit- — dccipit, etc. The second phrase, therefore, explains why
the church is a house of prayer; it is there, namely, that our prayers are
heard. Would that all the churches of the Catholic world might relate
how much consolation they have dispensed, how many tears they have
dried! Today the words of this Communion have again been realized in
holy Mass. The heavenly Father did not give us stones when we prayed
for our daily bread. We sought mercy and peace and found them. We
knocked, and the gates of heaven opened and rained manna. Indeed, in
the ultimate analysis we were not the ones who asked and sought and
knocked; Christ is our intercessor; He it is who prays for us continually.

This Communion song is at the same time a song of invitation,
calling us to return soon and often to this place of intercession, so that
we also may share in its blessings.

The dedication of the church! Our soul also celebrates the feast of
its dedication which took place at Baptism; this is the secondary thought
that permeates the prayers of the rite of consecration. Just as in the
dedication of the church, so at Baptism the priest commanded the evil
spirit to depart from us; and after the saving waters had been poured
upon our heads, the Holy Ghost with the Father and the Son made our
souls their sanctuaries. And the holy oil and chrism with which we, as
also the church, were anointed, was the pledge of our participation in
the riches of God's infinite grace. We can, therefore, predicate of our
soul the words: This is the house of God. If we make these truths a part
of our everyday life, then our prayers and song will resound with a pure,
full ring in the house of the Lord!

ASPERGES ME and VIDI AQUAM

Singers should make it a duty to consider also these chants as some-
thing sacred. Hence they will not make their appearance in choir during
the time that holy water is being sprinkled or even afterward. Rather
they will be there without exception from the very beginning, and assist

Asperges Me 491

wholeheartedly throughout the ceremony. These chants form a sort of
overture to the sacrifice of the Mass. No orchestra, for instance, which
takes any pride in its art and which values its reputation, will tolerate
the presentation of its overtures by indispensable instruments only; it
will demand that the entire ensemble be present for the whole program.
These songs, however, play a much more important role, especially the
Asperges.

ASPERGES ME (Ps. 50: 9)

1. Asperges me, Domine, hys- 1. Thou shall sprinkle me with

sopo, et mundahor: 2. lavabis me et hyssop, 0 Lord, and I shall he
super nivem dealhahor. Ps. Mi- cleansed: 2. thou shall wash me and
serere mei, Deus: * secundum mag- I shall he made whiter than snow.
nam misericordiam tuam. Ps. Have mercy on me, 0 God, *

according to thy great mercy.

Hyssop is a wild, bushy plant, which was employed in many ritual
sprinklings of the Old Law. This sprinkling with hyssop symbolizes in-
terior purification. Even the pagan Greeks and Romans used water in
their various cults to symbolize the cleansing of the soul. In the Chris-
tian cult the use of holy water can be traced back as early as A. D. 200.
In monasteries it was customary to sprinkle the various apartments
with holy water every Sunday. Gradually this practice was adopted by
the universal Church.

God is holiness itself; and when man appears before Him, the prayer
of the publican forces itself to his lips: "God, be merciful to me a sinner!"
If we consider the obligation we assumed when the waters of Baptism
made us children of God^ — Sunday reminds us of this — and how often
we have been unfaithful, then the Asperges and the Miserere will well
up from the innermost recesses of our souls. Furthermore, we have
gathered to celebrate, in union with the priest, the sacrifice of the Mass,
that awful Mystery, at sight of which even the angel choir of Powers
trembles in reverence. With what sentiments of profound humility and
contrition ought we to approach the altar!

But as sinners we have special duties. Before the priest sings the
Gospel, he prays, bowing profoundly: "Cleanse my heart and my lips,
O God almighty, who didst cleanse the lips of the prophet Isaias with a
live coal: vouchsafe, of Thy gracious mercy, so to cleanse me, that I
may worthily proclaim Thy holy Gospel." We singers also are messengers
of God, announcing the divine word, and by our singing we can become
the mediators of grace. This requires that our hearts be clean. Thus the
Asperges is to us what the Munda cor is to the priest. If a Cecilia prayed

492 Vidi Aquam

to the Lord: "Let my heart be spotless," how much more becoming is
such a prayer to our own lips!

The text of the antiphon exhibits a pronounced parallelism, which
is perfectly portrayed in the melody. Asperges me — lavdhis me, (hyss6)-po
et mundabor- — (ni)-vem dealhahor. Hence, we find rhythms not only at
the ends of the phrases but also — a rare occurrence — at the beginning.
The text shows a gradation of thought in the second phrase. In the first
phrase, however, the melody treats the word Domine with distinction,
and this with good reason. For only the Lord in His great mercy can
cleanse our soul, and thus make it worthy to take part in the celebration
of the sacred Mysteries.

In the psalm-verse care should be taken that magnam and miseri-
cordiam be sung without an intervening pause; similarly sdecula and
saeculorum.

The first melody given in the Graduate can be traced to the thir-
teenth century. It is an expanded form of that which is found among
the Cantus ad libitum (I), which dates from the tenth century. That
marked II dates from the twelfth century. Its lavdhis me is similar to
that of the other two; it also has rhythms at the close of the first and
second phrases; d e leads over to c d. We find in it expressions of more
devout and suppliant feelings than in the other two. The psalm-verse
with the harsh b a g f e is an admirable expression of a contrite heart.
While the first two melodies employ the solemn Introit-psalmody, the
third employs the simple psalmody.

Gregoriusbote, 23, 89 f. and 24, 3 i.—Caecilia, 23, 22 ff.

VIDI AQUAM (Ezech. 47: 2)

1. Vidi aquam egredientem de 1. / saw water flowing from the

templo a latere dextro, alleluia: 2. right side of the temple, alleluia: 2.

et omnes ad quos pervenit aqua ista and all to whom that water came

facti sunt, et dicent: alleluia, were saved, and they shall say:

alleluia. Ps. Confitemini Domino alleluia, alleluia. Ps. Praise the
quoniam bonus: * quoniam in sae- Lord, for he is good: * for his mercy
culum misericordia ejus. endvreth for ever.

In vision the prophet Ezechiel sees the new Temple and the new
worship that will replace the Mosaic. The mysterious waters flowing
from the sanctuary remind us of the spring which was inside the old
Temple to the right side — south for the Hebrews — which flowed into
the valley of the Cedron and thence into the Dead Sea. These waters
are an image of Baptism, of that Baptism which flows over the entire
earth like a stream of water, freeing souls from original sin and some of

A Last Word 493

its evil effects, giving new life and bestowing the strength to fully re-
cuperate and attain the eternal salvation to which this Sacrament has
given us a claim.

The water flowing from the right side of the sanctuary may serve
as an allusion to the commixture of water and blood which flowed from
the pierced heart of the Saviour, and as an indication that the baptismal
water derives its supernatural power from the death of Jesus.

Psalm 117, which follows the antiphon, is the great Easter psalm,
the psalm of the resurrection and the triumph of Christ. The present
verse is sung in the Gradual for Easter Sunday.

In Christian antiquity the Vidi aquam was sung during the proces-
sion which, after the Vespers of Easter, led the neophytes back to the
baptismal font. There they gave thanks with this song for the graces
they had received. We can easily imagine with what fervor they sang
salvi facti sunt, which marks the climax and which has an admirable
melodic construction, and how enthusiastically all must have joined in
the alleluial The preceding et omnes shows affinity to a well-known form
of Tract melody (cf. the passages sitivit and fuerunt in the Tract Sicut
cervus for Holy Saturday). With the recitation of pervenit in a somewhat
low pitch, aqua is brought to the fore so much the more prominently.
The melodic descent over ista might remind us of a fine drizzling rain.
This descent to the tonic is also a means of giving salvi facti a brilliant,
victorious character. In this manner the second phrase is made to excel
the first. We can speak here of the predominance of a rhythmic motive:
df dg g cb ba c, db ga g, da dg d ga fg g. The melody over -re dextro is re-
peated over et dicent, each time before the inception of alleluia.

The whole piece demands an extremely energetic rendition, ani-
mated by the joy of Easter.

Since about the twelfth century Vidi aquam has been sung in place
of Asperges at the sprinkling of holy water during the Paschal season.

Caecilia, 24, 17 ff. — La vie et les arts liturgique (Liguge, Aubin), 9,
251 ff.

A LAST WORD

The celestial choir, with which the Preface of the Mass unites us,
should be the ideal of our prayer and song. There the angels laud God's
majesty: Majestdtem tuam laudant. Every thought of self-praise and
self -exaltation is foreign to them; they know naught else than the
glorification of God. They look into the depths of His perfections and

494 A Last Word

tremble in holy reverence. Before themselves they see the infinite ex-
panse of God's holiness and beauty, and are urged to thank Him for
His own great glory and for the glory into which He has deigned to
elevate them. We should make our own that reverence v/hich they ex-
perience before God's majesty. Like them we should have but this one
object in mind: to glorify God, the immortal, eternal God. Then also
something immortal, eternal will enter into our song. Then our song be-
comes endowed with an acoustic which ennobles everything it reaches,
tempering that which is rough and hard, resounding unto eternity.

In heaven they sing socia exsultatione — "with common joy, in uni-
son," for from the heart of the one God wells forth a stream of joy and
bliss, encircling all the heavenly city. Little wonder that there all the
streets resound with the cry of Alleluia. We, on the other hand, realize
only too frequently that we have not yet reached our goal, that we are
not yet in our true fatherland. We feel the difficulties and trials of our
vocation. In like manner we know that polyphonic music is appreciated
much more at a high Mass than plainsong, no matter how much effort
is spent in its preparation and rendition. Hardly ever is there a word of
praise or a mark of distinction for the singers of Gregorian chant; per-
haps it will even be a matter of suffering persecution for the sake of
justice and for that which the Church loves and desires. If this be the
case, then the heavenly choir and its singing should be our model; then
will we immerse our heart in this atmosphere of joy and relieve it, set
it free, and revivify it. If the celestial choir exults and triumphs, then
surely we will not consider the performance of our duty a matter of
strict obligation. Rather will we mutually help and encourage one an-
other that we also may realize a socia exsuUdtio, a common happiness,
a united joy. How happily this will materialize in plain chant! For plain
chant can and does produce joy and happiness and jubilation, as these
pages have shown more than once.

In heaven there is unceasing praise: non cessant clamdre: Sanctus —
'They do not cease to cry out: Sanctus." In heaven every day — if we
may designate time there — brings new knowledge, new marvels, new
joy, and therefore a new song. This never-ending progress should be an
ideal for us also. The more deeply we penetrate into the mysteries of the
liturgy, the fuller will be our joy, and the more ardent our love for the
liturgical chant. Polyphony, it is true, is in no way to be ousted from its
rightful place; on the other hand, plainsong does not everywhere hold
the position it deserves, nor does it receive the attention it demands in
churches where it is sung. Let us formulate our resolve and once more
draw our inspiration from the zeal of the heavenly choir, and with pru-

A Last Word 495

dent, but unflagging application work for the realization of the program
of Pope Pius X. Assuredly our work will not be in vain. We shall prepare
our soul for a fervent concelebration of the Eucharistie Sacrifice — and
the Lord will one day grant the petition of the Preface, and unite our
voices to those of the heavenly choir.

B
E

N
E
BENEDICAT
I
C
T
U

INDEX

(Abbreviations: A — Alleluia, C — Communion, G — Gradual,
I— Introit, 0— Offertory, T— Tract, S— Sunday).

Accent, Influence on melody 62,
79 f., 107, 230, 298, 351

Adam of St. Victor 237

Adaptation of melodies 56, 346

Adducentur A. 38

Adorna 364

Advent: 1. S., 13 ff., I. and O. 5;
2. S. 20 ff., O. 4; 3. S. 27 ff.,
A., 374, I. 4, 241; 4. S. 34 ff..

Agatha 425

Agios 0 Theos 171

Agnus Dei (Requiem) 482

Alleluia 7 f.; archaic form 8, 18,
54; of Christmastide 59

All Saints 466 ff.
Litany of 175 f.

AH Souls 472 ff.

Amavit eum A. 272, 339

Amen 351

Andrew 353 ff.

Angelus O. 39

Anna 414 ff.

Arsis 242

Art, religious 10 f.

Ascension of Our Lord 211 ff.
Sunday after 215 ff., A. 349

Ash Wednesday 111 ff.

Asperges me 490 ff.

Assumpta est O. 186

Bartholomew 434 f.
Beata es O. 39
Beethoven 108
B flat (&b) 134, 330, 348
Blood, Most Precious 403 ff.

Cadence, middle and final 2 ff.,

14, 113
Caesura, with Tract 8 f.; with

Gradual 95
Candlemas 362 ff., A. 354
Candor est A. 236
Caro mea A. 236
Chants, artistic whole 2
Chorus of ancient tragedy 81
Christmas, Vigil 41 ff., 0. 5, G. 47;

Feast: 1. Mass 45 ff., A. 8, G.

122 f., O. 87; 3. Mass 50 ff., A.

310, 395, C. 87, G. 280, 0. 464

Sunday after 69 ff.
Christmas carols 45 f.
Circumcision of our Lord 74 f.
Clamaverunt G. 301
C— mode 186
Communion 6
Concussum est A. 236
Confessor 89, 170
Contrast 4, 6
Corpus 6
Corpus Christi 232 ff.

Sunday after 240 ff.
Cross: Finding of 385 ff., A. 237;

Unveiling 170; Exaltation 435

ff.; Adoration 170 ff.
Crucem tuam 172

Dactyls 80, 87
Dante 175

Development of melody 7 f.
Dedication of Church 484 ff., 322,
A. 310, 329

498

Index

Dico vobis 361

Dies Irae 476 ff., 472

Dilexisti C. 387

Dispersit G. 121 ff.

Dominant, emphasis on 32, 107;

setting in on 255, 266, 279, 288,

330
Dominant and tonic 117
Domine refugium G. 121 ff.
Drama 92, 159 ff., 291, 296 f., 299,

340, 391

Easter Sunday 178 ff., G. 122 f.,
I. 336

Easter Monday 184 ff., O. 411
1. S. after 188 ff.; 2. S. after 191
ff., I. 336; 3. S. after 194 ff.;

4. S. after 198 ff., A. 463, O. 91;

5. S. after 202 ff., I. 343, 357
Ecce Sacerdos G. 164

E flat (e\?) 136

Epiphany, Feast 79 ff., G. 462;

Octave 81; Vigil 78; 2. S. after

88 ff.; 3. S. after 93 ff.
Esthetics of interval 10, 26
Et 265, 463
Expressiveness of chant 1 ff., 9 f.,

55, 134
Exsurge 363

F
Family, Holy 85 ff.
Fa clef 375
Form a b a 2
Fourths 113

Gloria laus 153 f.

Good Friday 167 ff., T. 8; dulce

lignum 386; lamentations 89
Gradual 6 f.
Greek text 171, 234
Guardian Angels 452 f.

Haas J 92
Haec Dies G. 122 f.
Half tones 25, 313
Holy Innocents 66 ff.
Holy Saturday 173 ff., A. 137,
T. 9

I
Immaculate Conception 357 ff.
Improperia 170 f.
In dulci jubilo 50
Introit 2 ff.; — and preliminary

prayers 331
Itaque 184 -

J
Jacopone da Todi 437
James the Elder 413 f.
Jerusalem 285; Church of Holy

Cross in, at Rome 20 ff., 137 ff.
Jesus, Holy Name cf. Name
Joachim 431 ff., G. 121 ff.
John the Apostle 62 ff.
John the Baptist 391 ff., G. 6
Joseph (March 19) 372 ff., G. 294,

344; after Easter 387 ff.
Justus ut palma A. 354, G. 120 ff'.,

309

K
Kingship of Christ 460 ff.
Kyrie (Requiem) 475

L
Laetabitur A. 236, C. 381, I. 312
Lance and Nails C. 56
Latin, colloquial 197, 383
Lawrence 420 ff.;— Statio 97 f.,

130 f.
Lent; 1. S. 118 ff.; 2. S. 126 ff.,

G. 305, 378, I. 336; 3. S. 130

ff.; 4. S. 137 ff., I. 252, T. 9;

5. S. cf. Passion Sunday; 6. S.

cf. Palm Sunday

Index

499

Levita A. 236

Libera 483 f.

Litany of All Saints 175 f.

Liturgy 1, 9 ff.

Low Sunday 188 ff.

Luke 459

Lumen 363;— Christi 173 f.

M
Mark 381
Matthew 444 ff.
Matthias 370 ff.
Maundy Thursday 161 ff., G. 309,

487
Mediant 8
Melisma: codal 7; wandering 7,

344; inner 7; final 7; initial

7; caesural 7
Melismatic punctuation 6 f., 9,

294
Michael 448 ff., 322, G. 4, O. 470
Migration of nations 98, 102
Mocquereau 17
Mode: first 392; third 7 f., 144;

fourth 225; fifth 52; sixth 270;

seventh 52; eighth 7, 185;

C-mode 186
Modulation 46, 128, 129, 146
Motivation, technique of 7, 15 f.,

31, 135, 217, 228, 264
Motives, concatenation of 301;

rhythmic 328

N
Name of Jesus 75 ff., G. 4
Nativity of B. V.M. 435
Neum 7
Nimis honorati G. 121 ff.

O
Oberhammer 26
Objectivity 10 f.
Obtulerunt 365 f.
Offertory 5 f.

Palestrina 55
Palm Sunday 150 ff.
Pange Lingua 173
Parallelism 50, 70, 100
Passion Sunday 142 ff., C. 407
Pentatony 40, 49
Philip and James 381 ff.
Pentecost; Sunday 219 ff.; Mon-
day 227 ff.; 3. S. after 252 ff.;

4. S. after 256 ff., G. 305, 309,
1.244, 267; 5. S. after 263 ff.;
6. S. after 267 ff., G. 304; 7. S.
after 270 ff.; 8. S. after 275 ff.,
A. 310; 9. S. after 279 ff.; 10.

5. after 283 ff., G. 294, I. 343;
11. S. after 287 ff.; 12. S. after
292 ff., A. 405; 13. S. after 298
ff.; 14. S. after 303 ff., A. 286;
15. S. after 307 ff.; 16. S.
after 312 ff.; 17. S. after 317 ff.;

18. S. after 321 ff., O. 274;

19. S. after 326 ff.; 20. S. after
331 ff., A. 38, 344; 21. S. after
335 ff., G. 121 ff.; 22. S. after
342 ff., A. 314, O. 5; 23. S.
after 346 ff., G. 294, I. 32, 326,
O. 315

Per omnia saecula 79

Personality 10 f.

Peter and Paul 397 ff., G. 359

Pforzheim 424

Philip Neri C. 56

Phrasing 116, 157, 232 f., 287 f.,

299, 337, 355
Popule meus 170 ff.
Posuisti O. 39, 186 f.
Prayer 11, 15
Pressus 7 f.
Proprium Missae 1 ff.
Proske 55

500

Index

Psalmodic structure 139, 190, 285,

304 f., 310, 349
Purification cf. Candlemas

Question 257, 406
Quinquagesima 106 ff., G. 4, 103 f.
Quint, introductory 68, 82, 399

Rendition 10 f.

Repetition 7; of text 92, 110;

of motive 133
Requiem 472 ff., G. 121 ff., I. 285,

347, O. 5
Responsories 113, 287
Responsum 365
Rhythm 49, 71, 73, 76, 125, 132 f.,

147, 233, 283, 308, 445
Rhythmic motive 328
Rogation Mass 207 flf., O. 278, 306
Rosary, Feast 453 ff.

Sacred Heart of Jesus 245 ff.

Salve sancta Parens 80

Sanctus (Requiem) 482

Schuster 339

Secret 273

Sentiment 9 f.

Septuagesima 97 ff., G. 132

Sequence in melody 22, 55

Sequence: Corpus Christi 237 f.;
Easter 182; Pentecost 223 ff.;
Requiem 476 ff.; Seven Do-
lors 439

Seven Sorrows of B.V.M. 437 ff.

Sexagesima 101 ff.

Sicut cervus 174 f.

Simon and Jude 459 f.

Solemnitas A. 236

Spengler 10
Stephen 57 ff.
Structure of chants 1 ff.
Super 117

Tecum G. 130 f.

Tetrachord 308

Text; expressiveness 9 ff.; em-
bellishment 9 ff.; treatment of
92; repetition 5, 90 f.

Textual relationship 391, 437

Thesis 242 f .

Third, minor 312 f.; major 26

Third, repetition 89

Thomas, Apsotle 362, O. 96

Thomas of Celano 476

Tone painting cf. Word painting

Tract 8 f .

Transfiguration of Our Lord 417 ff.

Transposition 136, 244, 255, 340

Trinity Sunday 229 ff.

Typical melodies 7, 181

Variable chants 1 ff.

Venantius Fortunatus 173

Verse; of Introit 2 ff.; of Alle-
luia 7 f.; of Gradual 6 f.; of
Tract 8 f.

Vespere autem 177

Vexilla Regis 173

Vidi aquam 490 ff.

Visitation of B.V.M. 407 ff., 294

Wipo 182

Word painting 29 f., 33, 60, 75,

102 f., 134, 183, 227, 325, 328,

337, 349 f., 395, 471

Date Due

w'4.

Library Bureai

Cat. no. 1137

783,23J61c

3 5002 00173 5708

Johner, Dominicus

The chants of the Vatican gradual,

ML 3080

. J72

Johner^

Domini cue ^

1874-

The Chan
gradual

ts of

t.he

Va-tlcan

Internet Archive Audio

Featured

Top

Images

Featured

Top

Software

Featured

Top

Texts

Featured

Top

Video

Featured

Top

Mobile Apps

Browser Extensions

Archive-It Subscription

Save Page Now

Full text of "The chants of the Vatican gradual"

See other formats